JP6889514B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “slot machine”).

Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game is performed in which a large number of prizes can be obtained when a winning prize is won.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won a prize at the starting port. Then, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, a determination process for determining whether or not a hit is won is performed. At this time, the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined fluctuating time on a predetermined display. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the above special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has won the prize, and the opening / closing member of the large winning opening is operated to increase the number of players. We will provide a special game that can be awarded the prize of.

JP-A-2017-006393

In such a conventional gaming machine, Yu Technical interest is concern that a decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

Means 1: Judgment means for making a judgment based on the starting prize, and
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means, and
The operation receiving part that receives the operation by the player,
An operation reception means that can generate a reception allowance period in which an operation opportunity is given and starts executing a post-operation effect when an operation is received during the reception allowance period,
An image display means capable of displaying an image display of the operation receiving unit on a predetermined display screen, and an image display means.
Equipped with a production sound output means that can output the production sound audibly,
The production sound is a gaming machine that includes a BGM production sound that is audibly output based on a starting prize.
Whether the BGM effect sound is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, audibly output in the first suppressed mode, or audibly output in the second suppressed mode having a higher degree of suppression than the first suppressed mode. , Or may be inaudible,
further,
As the acceptance allowance period, a plurality of acceptance allowance periods including the first acceptance allowance period, the second acceptance allowance period, and the third acceptance allowance period are prepared.
The first reception allowable period is such that the operation reception is permitted while the BGM effect sound is audibly output in the second suppression mode or is in an inaudible state, and the first reception is permitted. When the operation reception is performed while the reception allowable period occurs and the operation reception is displayed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is started to be executed, and when the operation image display is hidden. Duplicate display is executed at the time of specific disappearance,
Both the second acceptance allowance period and the third acceptance allowance period allow operation acceptance while the BGM production sound is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and the second acceptance allowance period. When any of the third acceptance period occurs and the operation reception is performed while the image display is displayed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is started to be executed, and the image display is displayed. When the display is hidden, a predetermined overlap display at the time of disappearance using only a smaller area than the specific overlap display at the time of disappearance is executed, but when the operation reception is performed during the second reception allowable period, the BGM effect sound is produced. Is executed after the operation while the audible output is performed in the non-suppressed mode, whereas when the operation reception is performed within the third reception allowable period, the BGM production sound is generated by the third reception allowable period. 1 The post-operation effect is executed by producing audible output in the suppression mode.
further,
When the reception allowable period occurs, the reception allowable sound can be output in any of a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode and a special mode.
When the reception allowable sound is output in a special mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed can always be executed even if the operation reception is not performed within the reception allowable period corresponding to the special mode. When the reception allowable sound is output in the predetermined mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed when the operation reception is not performed within the reception allowable period corresponding to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that there are both cases where the operation is not executed and cases where the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed is executed.

According to the present invention, the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. In (a), a part of the operation button is cut out in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, and the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control unit and the like. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) which is referred to in the said effect symbol variation start processing in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by a fixed channel system. It shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship with a game state, a reproduced sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification is terminated for each type of the notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128. (A) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. Is a diagram. (B) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (C) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. Is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (C) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (D) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of production separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under suppression is performed. It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern selection table in the effect mode which can execute the sword withdrawal effect, (A) is shown an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect according to the type of a variation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body when the aura member is provided on the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and is (A) sword delivery state, (B) first sword pulling state, (C) second. Indicates the state of sword pulling. It is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) a sword delivery state, (B) a first sword pulling state, and (C) a second sword pulling state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for the pseudo-continuous production. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the transition example. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button was once enabled without the sword decoration being effective, and then the sword decoration was activated. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect when "specific operation-related effect" is set as the effect target of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the effect content for each type about the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the production example about the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the button image BTG is displayed in the mode (a specific effect mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the production example when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the production example when the first precursor production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 which starts a new symbol variation comes in the situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 which a special effect pattern is started arrives in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing, etc. of symbol variation) arrives during execution of a restoration operation. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing, etc. of symbol variation) arrives during execution of a restoration operation. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the original position. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of the state transition between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of performing the expectation effect that a princess character is displayed large as a background image during execution of a specific effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the display example when the help image is displayed in the state which the expectation effect shown in FIG. 200 is performed. It is a figure which shows the display example when the character image PG is displayed so that the display position is changed by the operation by a player. It is a time chart for demonstrating an example of the process when the production restriction period is generated in a non-gaming state. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the production restriction period ends early. It is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the special period (opening period). It is a time chart which shows an example about the processing when a game is started when a store opening exclusive period (special period) is set. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the special operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data including the acceptance allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data including the acceptance allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the low expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example of the modification when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the production example which the 1st permissible sound is output in a specific mode at the time of occurrence of "non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)". It is a time chart which shows the production example in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the production example in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the production example in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the effect example (movement reception effect under suppression) which appears in "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as an operation target" in the suppression / automatic reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to "non-suppressed mode". It is a time chart which shows an example of the processing procedure when realizing various display effects using scenario data and blocks as a concept. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is not detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period). It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is started in the "m + 1" th frame in the effect acceptance period (valid period) shown in FIG. 226. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 226. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 226. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started from the “m-3” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 226. About the effect reception period (valid period) when the timing of performing the "process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" in the frame is performed after the "judgment process related to the effect reception". It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a figure which shows an example of the integrated image. It is a figure which shows the display example about the integrated image from the start to the end of the validity period. It is a figure which shows the display example about the integrated image from the start to the end of the validity period. It is a figure which shows an example about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows an example about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production which suggests the degree of expectation of an integrated image step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the integrated image. It is a figure which shows the production progress example in the valid period that the integrated image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the production progress example in the valid period that the integrated image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the production progress example in the valid period that the integrated image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the 2nd reception acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the 1st acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example about the effect content when the 2nd reception acceptance state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example about the effect content when the 1st acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the 4th reception acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content when the 5th acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception period (the first reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content at the time when the 2nd condition is satisfied and the 2nd reception period (the 2nd reception production) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content at the time when the third condition is satisfied and the third reception period (third reception production) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content at the time when the 4th condition is satisfied and the 4th reception period (the 4th reception production) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content at the time when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth reception period (fifth reception production) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production content at the time when the sixth condition is satisfied and the sixth reception period (sixth reception production) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the 7th condition is satisfied and the 7th reception period (7th reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. It is a figure which shows the production example in the variation pattern in which the 1st reception period (the 1st reception production) occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example in the variation pattern in which the 1st reception period (the 1st reception production) occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example in the variation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (the 2nd reception production) occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example in the variation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (the 2nd reception production) occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example in the variation pattern in which the 4th reception period (the 4th reception production) occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example in the variation pattern in which the 4th reception period (the 4th reception production) occurs. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period. This is a modified example of the production related to the reception period.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. The effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and the door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls, which are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820, are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tongue ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the lower part for bass inside. It is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, the power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and houses the power supply board inside, and the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game balls are housed inside. It is provided with a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling the outer frame. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upper portion on the left end side of the front view and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10 are the same. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed from the front surfaces of both left and right ends to the rear. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that a game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, of the hinge member 620 on the main body frame side.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction, respectively. To.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 are shown with respect to the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state in which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 from being used for fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but it is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 below the through-hole 111, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 has an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball lending display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

Although the details of the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, although the details will be described later. It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 projects far forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single-shot button operation sensor 312, and the like. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like are provided with a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of projecting pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a to restrict the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. In the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151, a mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height lower than the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through hole 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protruding portion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. Absent.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that protrude into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 10008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in the front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 39 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are arranged in a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which are arranged in a columnar shape rearward along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a tubular opening extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the push detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to come into contact with the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the push detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 which is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c formed by a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the cutout portion 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral opening 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 is formed on the front side of a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 46A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It can be seen in a state, and the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. 44, The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. , The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, but the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 is emitted. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since they are arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a plurality of frame top lens decorative substrates 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through port 111. ing. In the left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. The reflective surface may be provided by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. It includes a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection portion 532c) and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole, moving forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. It includes a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

The square lens portion 532b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels in the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then dividing a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Is arranged in the radial direction so that the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light with a more uniform shade forward. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square tubular shape extending back and forth. The upper decorative base 534 of the left unit is inclined so that a portion forming the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the lower decorative base 535 of the unit, the lower end of the upper doglegged part, and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically and shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. It is attached to the member 553 and is attached to the right side surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. The box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are attached so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through port 111. ing. In the right-side reflective vertical wall portion 568, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the reflective surface itself is provided from a reflective material such as metal or resin on the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, and is reflected on the inner surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and is a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective vertical wall portion 33.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to the relay substrate of the door body of the door frame base unit 100, and the decorative substrate 552A on the upper right side of the door frame is the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body portion 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portions 553e are centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, they are formed substantially in the center of each vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched from the left end side in the front view to the right in a quadrangular shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical directions when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view as the whole moves forward. The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the angle of incidence on the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left and the right side of the right unit right shading member 560 is right. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view, and rear The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It includes a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. Only the medium LED 552c can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape provided with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedron decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. FIG. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a pair of upper speakers 573 extending to the left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown here, the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the above-mentioned outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from the outer outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the inner periphery of the opening window The structure is such that an outer peripheral light detection unit 35 (left outer outer light detection unit 35a, right outer outer light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery thereof is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate through each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowing upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a deformed pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central part in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the deformed pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the deformed pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 close to both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the unevenness of the square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right triangles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right triangle lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The middle left decorative board 586 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the middle left decorative substrate 586 of the door frame top at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The middle right decorative board 587 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Door frame action effect]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to operate the production operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and are arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (direct front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. it can.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball supply port 323c has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand in or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e to the touch. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 includes a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island equipment, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with a high-quality stereo sound. it can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, are projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after disassembling. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a grand prize opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a gate portion 2003 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-inducing portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the mounting bosses 1010 and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the front and rear and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engaging step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is placed on the upper side (upper side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 with a gap formed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 and the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 so as to be inserted. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claw 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guidance unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end in the front view, and is opened downward to have a notch portion 1152 having the same shape as the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch portion 1152 above the notch portion 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear positions where the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel is connected to the front component 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the front unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. To the number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. When the second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the big winning opening 2005 It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the 3010c diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a grand prize opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to a substantially center in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 opens a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6) It extends to the left and right with a size that can be accepted, and is formed so that it can be opened and closed according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of always accepting a game ball.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). Can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is located in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. The start port unit 2100 is arranged directly under the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received by the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending to the left and right along the above and houses the effect drive board.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which a lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

As the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, that is, a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right to be released forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that it is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted at the start port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 will flow down.

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it will be in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large prize opening 2005 when the large prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, by accepting the game balls in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where a game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is made by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the symbols correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is the present invention. In the window portion of the door frame 3, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is in the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation buttons 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative part of the present invention, and the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative part of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are used as the second decorative body of the present invention in the present embodiment. The second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED and subscreen decorative board mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 in the present embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is used as a light emitting body of the present invention, and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present invention is used as a back decoration means of the present invention. The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A). 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped, the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move the button lens 411. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second by changing the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) with the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) inside the operation button, the first decorative body is used. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 will be operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the state, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with and is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the central side of the button lens 411 not provided with the first button decoration portion 411a. The decorative member 432 inside the operation button on the back side (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration portion 411a is radial. The decoration can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) or the door frame inside the operation button can be directed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432 g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. it can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432 g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432 g. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) inside the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button are on. The interior decoration board 435 and the inner decoration board 436 under the operation button are light-emitting and decorated by direct light, whereas the first button decoration section 411a is decorated inside the second button. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for light emission decoration, whereas the second button internal decoration portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent and decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emittingly decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted from the outside, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button do not need to be secured. The second effect display device on the side (460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and the size can be increased so that the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device on the door frame side) can be enlarged. 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside portion of the button lens 411, the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be arranged. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from becoming frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, below the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410, which is movable (advance / retreat) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm, which is within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the interior decoration of the operation button that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. Since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at a position where the storage plate of the game ball is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see it at a glance. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, which are provided with the part 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for luminescent decoration of the frame side lens 417. It includes an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can prevent the light from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently emitted and decorated. it can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, the second button decoration part Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diverted. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminous decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration unit 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately emitting light of the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-emitting decorated in various patterns, so that the player's interest can be focused on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type production), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Then, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f that allow only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f of the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be decorated by emitting light through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the decorative substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 are extended from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a good state, and through the transparent button lens 411, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button is decorated in front of the outer portion of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emittingly decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and a light emission in which the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect, the light emission effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can not get bored with the various light emission effects, and the player can enjoy it. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and below the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size of installation space behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the lower plate 322 that can store the game ball is attached by extending the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. it can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate second region A2 extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer circumference, and extends upward to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can perform the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening) of the lower plate main body 325. When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged, reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to accept the game ball into the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, and the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small to be inconspicuous. it can. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate are visible, so that the player can see the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). it can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1, the lower plate covers 340, 340A having the lower plate second region A2, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension are added. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space at the rear depends on the amount of protrusion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to the rear, various effect operation units 400 (second) having different amounts of protrusion to the rear. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the effect operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where more game balls are loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is located below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received in a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction while having 321 and the lower plate 322. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult for the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the player can play the game in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d, the portion between the ball pulling hole 322a, the lower plate ball pulling hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 that can be seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are brought into the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, and discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to make sure that the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 is in a state where it is difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the player is made to think that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls as in the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 that bulges forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect) can be made to appear. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side, and the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game ball is wrapped around the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and the player can concentrate on the game, entertain the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, his / her fingertips are on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by tactile sensation, and in the state where the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decline in interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hands placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), a sufficient storage amount of the game ball can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. This makes it possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be provided. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertips and the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 and the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be moved from the player side. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make it stand out more and attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, it is possible to entertain the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates up and down, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a sense of humor, and you can dedicate the player to the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. Door frame side effect display device 460 that can present the effect to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button is attached, and the outside is surrounded by the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 having a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412, and projects from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side first) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. (Ii) It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the lens and the 470) becomes relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative portion 411a or the like, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented from deteriorating the appearance. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a tubular shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can block the outer side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) to make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in a state of being inclined with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can more entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, the operation button 410 is made to stand out in the pachinko machine 1 and is of interest to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

Further, a button frame 412 that is opaque from the outer peripheral end to the inside of the button lens 411 with a predetermined width over the entire circumference is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 from the side, the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because there is no directionality on the outer circumference as compared with the case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when the player participates in the operation. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest can be operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the production, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 410 by the production image and the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , By actively participating the player in the player participation type production and entertaining it, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by executing the production in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed on the portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. (2) A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a tubular shape toward the base unit 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one of the display devices 460A may project toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire circumference of the outer circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, etc. on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It may be set to 322, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of it wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You may want to be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedron shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "Equipped with an operating device", "Equipped with a rotating body with decoration on the surface", "Equipped with a decorative body with decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that are three-dimensionally imitated with decorations that follow the concept of the machine "," Characters, items, logos that follow the concept of the gaming machine, and predetermined models A member such as a unit or a panel equipped with a "designed by a sticker, printing, etc.", etc. may be attached. Further, the member to be attached to the attachment space 326j (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a which is open forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is used. A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. The front surface of such a dish unit cover may be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion covers an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322. An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in viewing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the arc-shaped one in which the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction is shown. The second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member of the display device 460A or the like is shown so as to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is subject to predetermined conditions. A configuration may be provided in which a variable light transmitting means is provided so that the rear side can be visually recognized by satisfying. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". The rear side becomes visible because it becomes opaque or becomes opaque. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized in a normal state. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in the normal state can be seen, and thus the front member can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the rear member of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under a normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear member Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. Therefore, on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a liquid crystal film or the like is used as a variable light transmitting means, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or luminescent and decorated) by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of luminescent effects and decorative effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation process of the control power supply (for example, + 5V) as shown in FIG. A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to a game being played by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , The payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 are provided, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 69. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with built-in various control programs such as the main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various types. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. The program mainly includes a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "built-in main control") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (1 value within a predetermined numerical range) as an initial value and is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general, as shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Is entered in. Further, the gate sensor 4003 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, which is attached and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol display 1405, 1st special hold number indicator 1404, 2nd special hold number indicator 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407. To do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. The circuit is connected via (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with built-in various control programs including a payout control program that controls operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. It includes a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 and the 952d. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program also issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball out detection sensor 827 that detects the out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is a payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full is full is first the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, thereby performing payout control without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). In When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). Is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the amusement park (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330. It is output to the equal rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental device return display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU952a uses the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending balance display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

In the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and one of these three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven by one digit segment indicator, which is a so-called dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting up, are from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input is made via the board 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the vessel can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends an EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island equipment and capable of electrically connecting or electrically shutting off AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. A launch control unit 953 that controls launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power factor rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. It includes a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not the player is touching or a finger, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control on the first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 while controlling the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and hour / minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. It includes a volume adjusting volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operating it.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emitting modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc. that defines the above, and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. ”) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a period of time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit game board side motor drive data for transmission to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system goes out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serials I. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae with peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 1511ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the watchdog timer is started and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume of the sound effect can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. (For example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is a production information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a Since the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap and the like are provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set. In the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are set. Dial created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511ca of Bank0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is executed. When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. LED. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed, and are stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1ms). The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are commanded when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used to manage various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is backed up in "(RAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (RAM) and the effect backup information (RAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. 72. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source for control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. To the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and heads toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal. And, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It has. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu to be used Background image data, selected display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's point of view. The service mode screen image data used for the above, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400 should be operated.

Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display arranged in the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the control board 1510 outputs the output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path of is extremely long as compared with the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, "V-by-One (V-by-One) of THine Electronics Inc. is used in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. By adopting a differential communication system called "registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a serial interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Image data for the effect display device 460 is stored from channel CH2 in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 effect display drive board 4450. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, in the sound effect built-in VDP1512a, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 74, the music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined to obtain the volume of the combined production sound. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. By synthesizing the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a, the volume of the combined production sound is actually the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplifies to the master volume value, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. ..

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to control the notification sound to be played in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually displayed at the bottom. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound proceeds according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period elapses, the sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400). When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is supposed to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, the notification sound is played. Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period because the muted production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data. Then, when the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 stop flowing, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b are for drawing on the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the right side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, which is not shown in the peripheral control output circuit and relays around the frame. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data can be obtained. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three image signals, a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronous signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is obtained from the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is unitized is arranged. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment that receives noise that has invaded the machine.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential paired cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Even if it adopts a differential communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Inc. and is less susceptible to noise, the configuration with such hardware alone will result in electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data in the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Inc. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the door frame side effect display device 460 can reliably display the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 3, various wirings such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 to remove various wirings, and then the door frame 3 is removed from the main body frame 4, so that the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are added to the wiring pattern for video transmission. Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, separated by a predetermined dimension from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twist pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by a harness. One of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, and the harness that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be housed. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is input as a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two differential signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are not input, a circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so that the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, various serialized effects are generated. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a considers that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is transmitted to that effect. (Please call a clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side production display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. Based on the effect, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be used to develop the effect. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration while waiting for customers, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to produce the game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. The notification sound for, etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and are muted. The volume from to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation portion 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration while waiting for customers, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and cases where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume adjusting volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the production operation unit 400 You can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to increase the volume to the desired level, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, he / she will be seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and the music or sound effects are noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can use the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The ground (GND) of various boards and the ground (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the launching solenoid 682 and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c from + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 which are in the forward direction by the diode PD0. A current flows toward the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned from the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and of these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages, + 24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and are peripheral through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates DC 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

In the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 are supplied via the payout control board 951, and the signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V are monitored. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative substrate of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier substrate 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage to be output, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, and main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit in which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which is HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the transistor MTR0 is turned on by inputting the operation signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitoring voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC 22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
Monitoring of a + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 24V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
Monitoring of a + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25 to + 12V, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 12V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC 22 releases the latch state and transfers the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same as the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip-flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes, the state of outputting the signal whose logic is HI from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic. Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal can be used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, signals from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, are input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. No function The main control output circuit 1310cc outputs the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure warning signal, and outputs the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 on the payout control board 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. In the above, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 becomes Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. There is no reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is paid out to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of the above is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 951 and the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main pay serial data transmission signal without the reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and a main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is provided to the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69 are displayed. A drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the above.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main-circle serial data from the shift register 1310aea, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal No. 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal for the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circle serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main-circle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main-circle serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 ensures that the data is received without any omission or omission.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. Therefore, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Even if the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops due to a power failure or momentary power failure due to the electrical parallel connection, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the main control output circuit 1310cc, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the command from being missing. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missing command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. Therefore, 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a function, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and is missing. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit and the like, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control unit circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly comprises the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each of them, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 to smooth the filter. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will be power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples by the capacitor PC3 and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control unit circuit]
In addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 resets as peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b is input with a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be described, then the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 by the pull-up resistor PR20 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF according to the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 by the pull-up resistor PR28 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via a resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off to perform logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are in the present embodiment. Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer uses the outer end frame door opening information output signal to transmit the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that the player who is playing the door has a state that does not occur during the normal game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame is turned on. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619'are adopted as normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, since the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a, while When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Is entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after removing the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, the accommodation space is filled with the stored game balls. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. In 951, when the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise invades the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the payout motor 834 is driven. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball passage described above by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body breaks down. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the first-stage and second-stage transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the second-stage transistor PTR43 changes, and the signal becomes the RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50, and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53, and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56, and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error clearing signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is turned on, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of the above, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is being operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is determined that the main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952da and input to the voltage switching input terminal, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals 6 and 7 of the drive ICPIC60 are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 includes the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to the rental device such as a game ball. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible via the terminal board 869. And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LED and phototransistor are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and is also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is changed, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as the CR connection signal 1.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. To.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo is taken. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the optocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the optocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, so that the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 bc to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXE output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to the signals 1 and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 includes a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and the like. And 2 rounds big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal related to the above, a payout power failure warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. A game information signal such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer has the number of jackpots in which the round is 2 times (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots in which 15 rounds have occurred (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. In some cases, the 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily arouse the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. Absent.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting an output signal to a hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 comprises an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player in which the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is obtained every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and the main prize ball number information output signals are various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the game ball entered in, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal generates a 15-round jackpot. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal indicating that the variation display has been completed (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. This is a signal to convey that, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in the present embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to count the number of times to count the number of times to perform the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal is input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is used. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is red and outputs a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. In addition to being able to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time saving, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. In addition to being able to grasp that there is, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered in various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having the connector provided in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center to the right side, in this respect as well, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a 15-round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls will be insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, in the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk in the hall, for example, checks the hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying the game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball clogging (also, it occurs in the payout device 830, for example). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball hose) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 rounds of big hits are completed, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15-round big hit is completed and the 15-round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 as prize balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are displayed. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the number of game balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly comprises the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and is used as a positive signal by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, it is restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are 8 bits each. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two differential signals, the positive signal and the negative signal, are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to do so. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , The peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 and the period of demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is used. It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that the data is used, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application sheet, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to the ground, respectively.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logical) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, but for some reason, it is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal plate 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that tells that the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 terminal to the D17 terminal, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal are three video signals (18), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 terminal to D17 terminal, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out game balls as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a main control board. The prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machines are installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is connected from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH gives a prize. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. The probabilities and time-saving states include a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be displayed. The number of stops displayed is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is lengthened as compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state), as shown in FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of the game balls to the second starting port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state). In addition to increasing the number of decisions as to whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces, when opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is lengthened to increase the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces. It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect Start, Special Symbol 2 Designation, and Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect End related to the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command during the round starts while the large winning opening 1 is closed (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command indicates the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot symbol display command. It instructs the display of symbol information.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command indicates (opening start), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the grand prize opening 2005), and the command for displaying the closing of the large winning opening 1 is transmitted at the time of closing the large winning opening 1 (starting closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005. Is transmitted by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot unit 2100 opens the jackpot 2005. ) Is sent.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category is composed of commands named power-on state and power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure ) With information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored. , Information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, and. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuations occur). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to identify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Is also sent to.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal-figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the vessel 1402, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for designating the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It is composed of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually). As the game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric service effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Hit Opening, Solenoid Open Display, and Solenoid Ending. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is left and right when the normal power is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the start port solenoid 2107). It is transmitted at (when expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). Is detected by the count sensor 4005) to indicate the start of the winning abnormality notification, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electrical in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When an electrical connection with 4005 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. When this occurs, the magnetic detection switch is instructed to start the abnormality notification.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the state is set. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 refers to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, it instructs the end of the main body frame opening notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is transmitted to, the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Of these, it is transmitted when any of them becomes disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to an error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. Along with setting it as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related division is composed of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. It is executed and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively, and the variation shortening operation end designation command is variable. The state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortened non-operating state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift the state from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is to hold 0 to 4 special symbols 2 (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 The number of balls (the number of balls (holding number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Based on this, the first special symbol display 1403 indicates the start of the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the display unit 1400. Before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used at the time of starting port winning (when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, or the second. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent to notify the effect, and is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end designation command is sent. , The special symbol 1 storage command is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after the high probability number of times is exhausted in the case of "high probability N times" (after the out-of-order stop period elapses), and the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number change. Time (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first start is further performed. It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of holdings decreases). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol 2 changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays the fluctuation of the special symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it for display), and the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the number of reserved balls is reduced), the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation is increased (the game ball is at the first start port 2002). When the number of reserved balls is increased after entering the ball), the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation is increased (when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls is increased). When it increases), it will be sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, or the second starting opening. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the fact by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 merely receives the start opening winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when the ball is out. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball-shaped, payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball-shaped ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 69, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game state, which is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is used to determine a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece is used. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, and the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variablely displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 69. It is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on processing described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the extracted ID code, performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed to perform a second operation. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time when the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT1310af is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, the timer clear setting value is set. The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the electric power clearing process, the power failure clear signal is first output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to start the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Set to the state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is shown in FIG. 72, is activated (boot). I'm waiting until you do). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When the power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S28, the main control program sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores the game backup information such as the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, a fraudster is on the hem of the arm The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, the main control side power off processing described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control internal RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken-out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit. To do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a. ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is determined in advance at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 89 The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt permission (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. The execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to send the detection signal input by the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as a trigger (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). Game control side normal operation control means), it is treated as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 954 (error release unit), which was originally supposed to be used to release the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 954 (error release unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after a predetermined time has elapsed, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. It should be noted that the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and if there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2107, an attacker solenoid 2108, a first special symbol indicator 1403, a second special symbol indicator 1405, and a first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. 69. , The second special hold number indicator 1406, the ordinary symbol indicator 1402, the ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, a point will be described in which the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is supplied. The main control side power off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms from the time when the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island equipment is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. The waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the device 460 starts (boots) is started by timing, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the power-off processing on the main control side in the power-on processing. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without causing a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM is completed. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power restoration and there is no manifestation of intention by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power supply from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process of power failure on the main control side composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff process can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period during a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power supply cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. If the power failure warning signal has been input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. Since the time measurement cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt processing on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one that is covered by hardware so that the power failure processing is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. In other words, the problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on does not set the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or power failure when the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 steps. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the large winning opening 2005 shifts from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and restored according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is issued. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 finishes, for example, the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 to indicate the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. A command to display the fifth round of opening the large winning opening is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the transition from the state to the released state (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005 is started). To do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded) is displayed to the second start port 2004. The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (screen to be transmitted to the player), and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the movable piece of the above is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The movable piece of the solenoid will shift from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and returned, the game state becomes a game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the grand prize opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state shifts to the current state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. A screen that tells you that there is a message (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side to insert the game ball into the grand prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, in a state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen telling that the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "Movable pieces" The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the screen that conveys the message "The game is being expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start port." Can be instructed to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. (Including the time of power recovery to recover), any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is restored. It is composed of information instructing whether to do so and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), and the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs after 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works may coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). I don't know if the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D). Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing on the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later is the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for transmitting that has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69, which detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001,2201 shown in FIG. Detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 Detects a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 and a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. Detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. , The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and input information. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 90 and other categories is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the game balls that have entered the large winning openings 2005. Detection signal from, detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start port 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After that, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program transmits the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing a total of two readings, one for the first to third readings to be compared and the other for the second to fourth readings, a total of two readings, due to the effects of chattering and noise, etc. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs the winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs, and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of planned game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the number of added game balls is added. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information that conveys that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). Navi command and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or taking out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol and storing it in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal judgment table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches in advance, a random number for jackpot determination (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. To do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified in relation to the big hit shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the grand prize opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2, the figure is shown in the figure. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10. The output information is stored in the output information storage area, or 15 rounds are performed. At one time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. In addition to storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation display pattern random number. The display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and normally according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is sent to the starting port solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as time-saving and medium-time information output information and start port winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 89, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. A big prize is won based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected by various commands classified into commands and big hits. Large prize opening 1 count display command equivalent to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to the normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to the normal electric role production, Fig. 90 Various commands classified into the notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) and various commands classified into the status display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation) shown in Navi commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data. When the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Status, which configures the power-on status command as main-circle serial data, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, and the game information is adapted. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 The error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (1st main body frame closing command) A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, the peripheral control board 1510 issues the main control return destination command at power-on in FIG. 89, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine. It can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reserved setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 93. Based on the power-on recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power-on state command and the power-on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. The effect can be displayed in the display area of. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by being seen by the player in such a state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the inspection device of the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and cold start is performed.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is also backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness to turn on. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of 1ms timer interrupts, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad one byte at a time. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, etc. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by music and sound effects according to.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage is started. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data to output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and is based on the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. The generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. Normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, large winning opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command,) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into the various commands shown in FIG. 89, which are classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and the power-on. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to testing, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands, for example, an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side. The effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (the effect device). Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The stored calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates a sprite data on the game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is started to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in Bank0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the work area 1511da to be backed up shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is high-speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously backed up from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, which is shown in FIG. 72, is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 96 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the V-blank signal is input and the next V-blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 95. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing failure this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 97. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, in which the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the constituent time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is also shown in the figure. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 73 are created. The control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc, and Bank 0 (1 ms) is specified. ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the periphery 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, and the third byte of the main frequency serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a shaving environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are the received command storage areas. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 75, is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning). It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer). The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511ca included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, a predetermined byte (for example,) from the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). , 1 byte) in succession Copy all in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 1511 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, which is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core. 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) are transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 1511 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a gives a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e are displayed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511ca (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal, which has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts bit by bit from to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process to be executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is a signal to be output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective each time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process to be executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101, and includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of the screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule is being started. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a customer waiting state is performed and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the pachinko machine is waiting for customers or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. When it is not the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period when the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is in the waiting state for customers to perform the demonstration (simply in the waiting state for customers). This routine is terminated as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the production is completed and all the pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is counted up. (Count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is the case as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has reached the transmitter and the transmitter. It is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the value has not been reached, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side effect. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is used for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs the process of drawing in. For example, the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, in the communication error display processing, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state is performed. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The peripheral control MPU1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is used for the game. Along with performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform the flow process. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 103.

First, a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady processing or the like, and the main control side shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main control side of the power-on processing. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process, the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. 94, or the second shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the start opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. In each round, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). The round is digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative symbol is in the center. , And the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is stopped. At this time, the player can recognize the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped by the variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second lottery by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for transmitting the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is shown as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is steady. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Because the pointer is updated to indicate the number of screen data to be output to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, it follows the screen generation schedule data. Since the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. Even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT can be used until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not performed. The process of recovering the connection with the player is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, "upper plate" is displayed. Since the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the side. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, tell that the drawing data received from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the steady processing, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data has not been started and the screen generation schedule data has not been started in the scheduler update process, the power of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the steady process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the CNT value is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is used. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the process of step S1544 in the same process is performed. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is set to the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), That is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a problem with the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A problem has occurred in the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the transmitter IC1512d for directing the door frame side is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the data is data is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is displayed again. During the interval period until the start of, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect are used. A state in which there is a problem in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is set to the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When it has reached (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A process is performed to notify by displaying the message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is displayed. The 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated. This is because the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information most of interest to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which is given is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect in the middle and recovering to the state where the drawing can be performed correctly. By stopping and displaying the decoration pattern on the right side, the drawing of the information most of interest to the player is completed.

In this respect, the period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the customer waiting state. During the period of the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case of transmitting the LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the effect display drive board 4450 has a problem. (For example, "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk.") To that effect by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to the effect display device on the game board side. By outputting to 1600 and outputting a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") to the audio data transmission IC1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is played from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the LOCKN signal output request data is received, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN. When no signal is input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Then, when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a discovers a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. The clerk in the hall can extremely easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without any trouble. ing. Therefore, it is possible to find a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for the door frame side effect. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d cannot be normally received, the receiver ICSDIC0 receives a communication problem between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal for transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to eliminate the defect. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. Generates the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk." It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by early detecting and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a problem in the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. Is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is started, stopped, and the game is not progressing, it is possible to move toward solving the communication problem.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal for transmitting from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is sent to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is being repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to fluctuate the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is predetermined. Data pattern (SYNC pattern) can be stopped to be transmitted to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the progress of the game is not executed. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion (distortion of the image) of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is still present. Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the progress of the game again (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), it can be directed to be resolved.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which is a start area in which a game ball launched by a ball launching device 650 toward a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 70 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 92 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is used. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information related to payout, and a main control side power supply of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the turn-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the error generated for the payout device 830 is cleared. The RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is not output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor but is output to the payout control MPU952a which is a payout control microprocessor as an error release signal for the operation. ..

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the process when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information related to the above is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit power is turned on. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information about payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. When the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process (or the period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on) has elapsed, the payout device 830 An error canceling function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor MPU952a without outputting it to the main control MPU1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error clearing signal for clearing the generated error. Since it is provided in combination, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , This is a circuit in which a detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit in which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a gaming ball driven into the gaming area to manipulate the flowing state of the gaming ball as desired to obtain an unfair profit. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such an illegal game act and suppress the illegal act by a light emitting means, a voice alarm, or the like, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area. There is.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the game progress and the production will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 has a display mode (design, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310. It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the effect operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the effect.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and when it is determined that a winning ball has been won, the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side is increased by one. Will be done.

If the processing flag is 0 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of pending hits is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting port winning processes are completed, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the result of the jackpot determination memorized above and the current gaming state. After determining and setting the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting port winning processes are completed, the changing process is executed. In this variable processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the time-out. To stop. After that, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (loss). The process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

On the other hand, when the first and second start opening winning processes are completed and the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined based on the type of the winning jackpot. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the winning jackpot type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. After updating the game status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a jackpot fluctuation fluctuation pattern, a missed reach fluctuation fluctuation pattern, and a missed fluctuation fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is to be performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. The loss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 does not undergo the reach effect. , The effect that the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally removed and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to the game information, such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern can appear. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 makes the effect display device 1600 appear a variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, and also changes the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation. Controls such as changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the movable effect unit 3100 after the backside are executed.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. 104. On condition that the detection signal by the start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start port 2002) (YES in step S5231), a random number for determining the first big hit is acquired from the random number counter. The first start port passing process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233). A second start port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variation jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes the game after opening the game for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "16R probability variation jackpot", the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot B", the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times to control the 8R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the jackpot 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). It is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes after the game is repeated twice.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and right-handed is more advantageous than right-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a jackpot game that is open for a long time of up to 8 rounds. Only the state (generally 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). ), The expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when the big hit is won, such as the 16-round long-open jackpot game state (generally 2000 game balls can be obtained) is executed. Therefore, when the transition to the right-handed state is controlled, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, in starting such open control of the big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, there is a high probability according to the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is in a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. Probability change big hit, 8R Probability change big hit B) is set when the game state is finished, and when the next big hit is made, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) will be described later. Will be reset with.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. The jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is set at the end of the game state, and when the next jackpot is reached, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is performed. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The fluctuation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the fluctuation count counter is reset, and is used in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is a thing, and it is updated (for example, count-up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B). It is reset when starting the jackpot game state based on.

If the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set as the process of step S5236. To determine. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the large winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed. Each set process such as the number of times counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, when the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of random numbers for the second jackpot determination stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in the pending state is not lost (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the holding status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second big hit judgment random number will be performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only maintains the driving of the game ball (right-handed) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judgment random numbers can be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, the special symbol game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 105. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S5421, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern) ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" which is (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above, the following steps S5243 to S5245 will be performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, the small hit group, and the like before the final determination may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 106. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, for second jackpot symbol). Random numbers, random numbers for the second variation display pattern) are acquired from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the second special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, the small hit group, and the like before the final determination may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). The command to be executed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since it is a program module of the above and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The big hit judgment random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read big hit judgment random number, lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process of the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )

3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 are executed in response to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination processing regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 108, first steps S5301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM of the same main control. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. First-in, first-out (First-In) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The shift operation is performed in the mode of First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize for the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). .. Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and responds to the occurrence of a start winning prize in the second start port 2004. The random numbers extracted by the above are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

After that, as the process of step S5305, the jackpot determination process, which is the determination process for the winning of the jackpot, is performed based on the read out random number for determining the first jackpot. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability time shown in FIG. 110 (A) if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5311). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110A, the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). The jackpot judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state) It is equipped with a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability. Then, in the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332. The first big hit judgment random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation judgment value indicating that the first big hit judgment random number of the type is the above loss (big hit probability at low probability; generally "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability referred to, 204 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 65332 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The above-mentioned second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately 1/321).

Further, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The above-mentioned first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the outlier determination value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the deviation judgment value indicating that the above is lost. The above-mentioned second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). The jackpot judgment value (of the jackpot judgment value) set in the jackpot judgment table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot judgment random number. The number of jackpots may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the low probability and the big hit judgment table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). ..

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5315). ), Set the jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot (step S5316), and end the jackpot determination process.

Further, when it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been lost, the read jackpot determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won based on the selected jackpot determination table. Whether or not it is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (a loss determination is made).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5317 that the result is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. The reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state and when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. It is provided with a reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of, and a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is in a low-probability state (low-probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The above reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, it matches the reach judgment value indicating that all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers do not reach. This may be done so that it does not match the reach determination value indicating reach.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the low probability state than in the high probability time saving state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-time-saving state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state and the low-probability state. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the random number for reach is reached and the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers are not reachable. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating reach is the same as in the low-probability non-time-saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319) (YES in step S5120). , The reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 111, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B) and reads out the random number for the first jackpot symbol in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. And the selected symbol determination table are compared with each other to determine the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers) are displayed for the determination result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Random numbers for the first big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is displayed. Here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second big hit symbol) are stored in a form associated with each other.

In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of the big hit is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big hit symbol. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. .. More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probabilistic jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high-probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and production contents for each type of jackpot.
1. 1. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. 8R probability variation jackpot A controlled by the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 that is in a relatively advantageous state.

2. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls the variable display of the special symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or wins a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state An 8R normal jackpot that performs a battle effect in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) and is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time saving state.

3. 3. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 16R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 16R jackpot game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state (success production). ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time was controlled to the high probability time saving state, it is controlled to the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that the state is relatively advantageous. 16R probability change jackpot

4. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state (failure effect). ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time was controlled to the high probability time saving state, it is controlled to the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that the state is relatively advantageous. 8R Probability change jackpot B

5. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, it is special. While controlling the variable display of the symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or winning a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), a specific character is in the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. Performs a defeat battle effect (battle defeat effect), and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win a prize at the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 Only the variation display is executed, and the jackpot related to the second special symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

If the 8R probability variation jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 8R probability variation jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is selected as the jackpot symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol (the mode when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped) is set. After determining the specific symbol stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines to be a lost symbol as an mode when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. To do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is subjected to any one of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, and loss) as the process of step S5337. (It may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the instruction (may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

The peripheral control MPU1511a displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is determined to be a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different intermediate decorative symbols; reach loss. (Symbol), and if the outlier is specified, it is decided to be the outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU1511a causes the hit effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. Is designed to appear during the jackpot game after the start of.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 112. If this is done (step S5341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and a small hit flag is selected. If is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S5345) is selected. When (not shown) is selected (step S5346) and none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal loss (the loss without performing the reach effect) occurs, the time of the loss occurs. (Not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example is used as a random number for jackpot determination (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) and a random number for jackpot symbol (random number for first jackpot symbol, random number for second jackpot symbol). Multiple types are provided for each judgment result based on the results. Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each random number for the first variable display pattern. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing step S5302 from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number. By comparing with the random numbers for the variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the random numbers for the variable display pattern read out from this table, the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59. Random numbers for various types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectation is executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns have high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

The super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed. Expectations are rising. That is, such a super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state even if a loss is finally displayed. Will be able to increase. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, a high-expected notice production, which is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern, appears during the period when the super reach production is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state In common with, a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second big hit judgment random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time saving state and the non-time saving state, and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2004 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state. At the same time as urging, the player has secured time for winning the game ball to the second starting port 2004.

In addition, when 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) is selected. It will be possible to prevent the waste from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the region directly above the gate portion 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate portion 2003 in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%). The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously accepted (a time saving state in which almost all the game balls driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "about 1/32". It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol coming off based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shows the fluctuation time of the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) extremely It is said that it can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is completed in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, and thus 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are accepted into the second starting port 2004 one after another, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being ejected without being subjected to the lottery process. ..

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 113, first steps S5371. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the fluctuation time timer is not 0 even though the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the process of steps S5371 and S5372 is performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 114, first steps S5381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot gaming state (step S5387). The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. When the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation count counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step). S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the jackpot game in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game state (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the time is shortened with a low probability (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) (here). Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state) (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is started. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of updating to (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) described above determines that the small hit execution flag is set. The small hit game state will be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is regarded as a loss, and the first special symbol process without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394). That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag and the small hit executing flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is played according to the hold status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is on and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. To do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit a normal figure", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S5407)

The initial value of the normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S5402).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is on and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the above As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of held normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to put the variable display control of the normal symbols into a new hold state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5421, as shown in FIG. 117. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S5422, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) at the time saving time (not shown). In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), a non-time saving hit determination table (not shown) is selected (not shown). Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, all the 255 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers were won, and the normal figure hit. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the out-of-order judgment value indicating that the outlier is obtained. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball is always won by hitting the normal drawing, the movable piece is opened, and the game ball is opened to the second starting port 2004. It controls acceptance as much as possible. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be made to match the judgment value per normal figure indicating that the normal random number is won per normal figure.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. The above ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal figure, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won in the normal drawing, so that the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened. There is no control over the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the time saving state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning. At that time, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. (Ii) The acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol hit as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, when the result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is determined to be out of order, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing)). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and the effect according to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following fluctuation pattern specification command reception waiting process, effect symbol change start process, effect symbol change process, effect symbol change stop process, jackpot display process , The jackpot game processing, and the jackpot end effect processing are executed.

Fluctuation pattern specification command reception wait process: During the period from the main control MPU1310a to the reception of the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern, the effect (demo effect, etc.) is applied when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control related to the jackpot is not performed. When the control is performed and a fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing.

Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol variation period are determined based on the variation pattern command, etc., and the decorative symbol variation is started based on the determined effect content. To control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol change. Of the fluctuation patterns (effect patterns), most of the "variation patterns stopped by the jackpot symbol (effect pattern)" are prepared in the form of being paired with the "variation pattern stopped by the lost symbol (effect pattern)". By functioning as the same fluctuation pattern (effect pattern), it becomes possible to provide an effect as to whether a jackpot symbol appears or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is described below, when the description is described as "predetermined fluctuation pattern" or "specific fluctuation pattern", unless otherwise specified, it is stopped by the "big hit symbol". It means both a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)" and a "predetermined fluctuation pattern stopped by a lost pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)", and as a result of the progress of the production content in the same manner. You will reach a turning point where either the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Process during effect symbol change: Controls to start various effect contents determined in the effect symbol change start process at each timing during the symbol change period, and when the change time ends, the value of the process flag is set to the effect symbol. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing: Controls to stop the fluctuation of decorative symbols based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and when the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is changed to the variable pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

Process during big hit game: Controls various effects during the period when the big hit game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (display effect for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended, etc.) is controlled during the period from the end of the big hit game state to the variable permissible state. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the process of waiting for the variable pattern specification command reception.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. It is controlled so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on (variation effect).

The effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variable effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variable effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may try to do it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (variation effect) is determined in this way, a notice lottery (determination process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By controlling the advance notice effect won in the advance notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the above-determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed (processing during the change of the effect symbol), a plurality of effect contents can be displayed. It is designed to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on the appearance mode of them as a compoundable property.

Conventionally, in such a composite effect, a plurality of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) may appear and be executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. By doing this, it is expected that the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency of executing multiple timer effects while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. , It was considered difficult to fully improve the game entertainment.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" is intended for a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. It is executed as a count effect display from (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (in preparation, etc.) before starting the count display. Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, conversation notice or cut-in A) that causes either a relatively unfavorable effect (low expectation) or an advantageous effect (high expectation) for the player appears. , B, etc.) is the target of the timer effect, and it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the timer effect on the advance notice side executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the target of the effect at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the "timer effect effect target" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the passage of time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds and the like. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count-up or count-down is performed, the time has elapsed since the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (timer effect on the advance notice side) as the effect content that appears only when the user wins the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern determined based on the determination table T1 ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) that is built in in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if only the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed, the count effect display is executed as "the effect content of the advance notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, by executing it as "the production content of the production pattern itself determined based on the fluctuation pattern command", the degree of expectation from the jackpot expectation indicated by the production pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command It will be possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessary addition (addition of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the advance notice lottery"). For example, if the jackpot expectation when a specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", the jackpot expectation is increased by the combined effect function when the advance timer effect is further executed. For example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount, but when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, a big hit is expected. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be preferably maintained.

The degree of expectation of a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern). Basically, the expectation of a big hit as the variation number increases. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variable side timer effect in which the "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 (variation number 9). 10) <Variation number 17 (18) is set. Further, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail here, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself itself. As a result, an effect pattern (count variation pattern) in which the variable side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer effect for the conversation notice. It differs from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that. Further, the variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 9 and 10 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 11 and 10. In No. 12, the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A as the effect target is executed, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed, and the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A as the effect target is executed. It differs in that it can be done. Further, the variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 17 and 18 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 19 and 18. In No. 20, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in B is executed, and in the variable numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation tends to be higher when the variable side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

The "conversation notice" is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and is often added with a relatively low degree of expectation. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and a relatively high degree of expectation is added. It is a production that often occurs (or a production that always has a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-in A, B, the character A action, B, etc., which will be described later) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. Further, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable effect is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the advance notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the advance notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B instead of the cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect content (effect pattern) is obtained for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as the variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6) such as shortened fluctuation or normal reach effect with low expectation", the count effect display as the timer effect on the notice side is displayed. While the effect is not won (increasing the premium degree) and the expectation level UP when the notice side timer effect appears is appropriately secured, the variation pattern is "a variation pattern for executing the effect side timer effect (increasing the premium degree). In the case of "variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22 and the like count fluctuation patterns)", the fluctuation pattern is of the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, fluctuation) as compared with the case where it is not such a count fluctuation pattern. The ratio corresponding to (numbers 1 to 6, etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0) are prepared. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) (variation numbers 5 and 6) that may be set to the individual correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is not executed, and four fluctuation patterns (variations) are prepared. Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), it is more noticeable than the case where the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. The rate at which it is judged that the count effect display (timer effect on the notice side) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one effect pattern (variable effect) without unnecessarily increasing the degree of expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern the count fluctuation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. At that time, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. Further, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, the actual hit is larger than in the case of loss. The effect pattern that has been won in the above can appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variable number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio of execution as the effect content (timer effect on the notice side) will be different. Therefore, among the above-mentioned count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (variation effect) is high, the type thereof. Depending on the situation, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained in a suitable manner.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the timer on the notice side is within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation side timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is determined by the advance notice lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a jackpot expectation that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. It will be possible to make it possible, and by extension, it will be possible to realize the production opportunity of the double timer without unnecessary addition of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "conversation notice" is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "cut-in" is the effect target. The mode of the count display (form, color, etc. of the count number) is different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the mode of the count display of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, in combination with "the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern is used", the ease of appearance of the notice side timer effect is recognized. You will be able to expect.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (variable side) The mode of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display) may be different (or at least different from any one), or may be the same (or at least the same as any one). ..

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the effect. It is useful for making the player recognize that the timer effect on the warning side, which is set to a high degree, is appearing, and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice-side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common mode as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of modes having different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do so.

Further, in order to make it possible to more preferably recognize that the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the count display when the advance notice side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable side timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down) differ. In such a configuration, the count speed of the timer effect is closely watched even during the period in which the count display is in progress after the timer effect is started, and is relative to the variable side timer effect having a relatively low expectation. It becomes possible to make people interested in which of the timer effects on the notice side, which has a high degree of expectation, is being executed, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the timer digestion period.

At this time, in the variable side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notice side timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count is displayed in a mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the timer effect on the notice side (cut-in), whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed. It will be possible to add fun by making the difficulty of judgment different. Further, in the variable side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and erasure of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count may be displayed by displaying the count.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to grasp whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and the interest of the game will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a count is displayed for the fluctuation pattern (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the variable side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for digesting all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect is acquired, one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for the effect, etc., so that the count display of the variation side timer effect and the advance notice side timer By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed is different. I try to give it fun

In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effect target and reach) in which the start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) of the count display is different for one fluctuation pattern. Although it was decided to prepare the same production content), multiple production patterns (however, the timer production is targeted) with different start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) of the count display. The type of effect and the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern may be the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared so as to have a one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) when they appear between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect can be made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to give fun by making it difficult to judge whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. ..

Further, while the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the countdown display, if the variable side timer effect is executed in the countup display, it is deterministically grasped whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and that the game will be greatly improved. Further, while the timer effect on the notice side is executed in the countdown display, the timer effect on the variable side targeting the specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed in the countup display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example). If the variable side timer effect for cut-in) is executed in the countdown display, it will be interesting to make it difficult to judge whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed depending on the effect target. You will be able to grant it.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is set as the effect target for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are set as the effect target. To control. When the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the effect is different from that of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the rate at which the jackpot expectation is low is set to be high and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display is displayed. I try to make the end timing different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect has a predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different effect is being produced (the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) because the count display of the other is continued while the end is reached. It looks like it is. After that, the other count display that has been continued also reaches a predetermined value and ends in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is the object of the effect. Even if it is clarified by the timer production on the finished side that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for production, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for production ( It is expected that the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) to maintain the expectation and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect in this way, the timing at which the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice side timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to make the count end corresponding display (for example, "count successful!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear separately at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, which target the "conversation notice" executed as the effect on the variable side or the advance notice side, appear in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but in the variable side timer effect, as the variable side effect in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display is advanced according to the variable side specific effect ("count success!", Effect according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.) that occurs, in the notice side timer effect, it is related to "conversation notice". The count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("Chance UP!"" That occurs as the effect on the notice side, or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined few seconds before the start of the effect). By advancing, different count end corresponding displays will appear at different timings.

By the way, it is required that each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is always executed when it is targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect (when the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notices and cut-ins are effects that can be executed in multiple modes with different expectations. Therefore, when the target is the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is relative when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is required to appear in a mode with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable side timer effect and the effect target are simply executed when the effect pattern is executed. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with relatively high expectations) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode having a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the target of the effect is always selected in the advance notice lottery. ..

If each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is not targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is determined whether or not to appear as the effect content of the notice side in the advance notice lottery described later, as well as the advance notice. A determination is made as to what mode (a mode having a relatively high degree of expectation or a mode having a low expectation) is to appear as the effect content on the side, and the appearance is controlled based on the result of the determination. ..

The following is a summary of the effect pattern determination process using FIG. 118.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU1310a, first, the current game is based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation degree) to the probability variation expectation when a specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state. become.

Next, as the effect patterns associated with the variation numbers, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect) are prepared so as to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the winning of the jackpot determination. At this time, if the jackpot judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is delayed is high, and thereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set. The slower the number, the more likely it is that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when the special effect condition is satisfied. Even in this case, the effect pattern set so that the variable side timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) that appears during the symbol change is selected in this way, what kind of advance notice effect is given within the execution period of the effect pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in any manner (notice lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, the description of the automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly explained.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is supposed to improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds according to the type and some that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is a corresponding default each. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize a variety of sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sound). Each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the output means) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while the number of combinations of sounds scheduled to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). .. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
119 (A) and 119 (B) show an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 119 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is the one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a pair of a playback channel and a sound is assigned exclusively to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which playback is started is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is assigned so that the playback timing is not affected as much as possible.

In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that hinder overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap in playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound classification and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 122A shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122B shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122C shows that each sound cannot be reproduced when it is attempted to be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 122 (A) to 122 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 122 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" are sequentially arranged along the time axis which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. 122 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "first half notice A" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", so that the "first half notice A" The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound stops (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. 122 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "full screen notice" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full-screen notice", so that the "full-screen notice" is given. The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 123 (A) and 123 (B) show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment, respectively.

FIG. 123 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-mentioned sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). The point is different. Here, the fact that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned according to a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is the one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 123 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this automatic channel method, priority is assigned to each sound individually as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural. Become.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which playback is started is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each playback channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for designating a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If a sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group, the sound is immediately reproduced.

In the above case, if there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being played in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly played. If there is a channel having a lower priority or the same as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than the sound being reproduced or is not the same, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound.

FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, the playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, up / down pan initial value, volume initial value, such as the sound control by the fixed channel already explained, are used for each sound division and sound name. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying the AUTO group (also called "playback priority"), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seekpoints, playback type settings, and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group in which each sound is reproduced in a plurality of AUTO groups. Further, the priority order is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced at the same time. In this priority order, the larger the numerical value, the more preferentially the sound should be reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value, the less preferentially the sound should be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority is, for example, a notification sound having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3"). , A sound effect with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmation sound" and "button press sound"), a BGM with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10". Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("first half notice sound effect" to "second half notice sound effect"), and pending winning sounds with a priority of "01" It is supposed to be. As a result, when an attempt is made to reproduce a notification sound in a state where there is no free channel, for example, it is not necessary to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having a lower priority (for example, a hold winning sound) ) Is being played back, and the notification sound is played with priority.

As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L are output. The volume difference output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Further, as already explained, the upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It shows the initial position of sound image localization of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, there is a difference in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. This upper and lower pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

Similarly, the initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example, and in addition, "1" (0x1FF for 0xFF) in the third byte. By setting), it will not be affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the gaming machine, and it will always be played at the volume set by the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds.

The seek point represents the playback start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as this seek point, for example, "0" is set for each of the "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to the "first half notice A sound effect", while the "second half notice A sound effect" and the "second half notice B effect" are set. [1] is set for each of "sound". With such a seek point, it is possible to register sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered in the sound source when the maximum number of sounds that can be registered is exceeded.

The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 126 (A) and 126 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "middle symbol stop" are sequentially arranged along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "during a big hit".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponds to range A). Here, when an attempt is made to reproduce the hold prize sound as a new sound because there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this hold winning sound can be played back using the playback channels 12 to 13, none of the playing sounds is overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to "holding sound playback" in the figure), and other sounds are not overwritten. The output of all kinds of sounds continues.

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 (as shown in FIG. Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, if a start prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure) is to be played and the hold prize sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The output of all other types of sounds continues without any of the sounds being played being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to the "hold sound play" in the figure).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), for example, since a notification (corresponding to the "notification 2 generation" in the figure) is generated after that, the notification sound having the highest priority of "25" as a new sound (corresponding to the "notification 2 occurrence" in the figure). When an attempt is made to reproduce (corresponding to the illustrated "notification 2"), as a result of searching for a free channel, it is found that there is no free channel at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being played at the start timing is searched, and the playback channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels playing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to the “notification sound 2” in the figure) to be reproduced next is set. Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sounds, the reserved winning sounds being reproduced on the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are overwritten by the notification sound.

FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is used as the work name for each channel, such as setting reservation flag, required sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority at the time of automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, and volume control. It includes a work for pan and a work for pan control, and has each information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The playing sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly assigned when it is "0", while the channel is automatically assigned when it is "1" ("Sound control by the automatic channel method" described later. Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, if it is "1", it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration, with the time when the desired reproduced sound is registered as "0". The elapsed time from the registration is the elapsed time among the plurality of playing sounds when trying to play a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. It is used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-mentioned left and right pan and upper and lower pan set values.

FIG. 128 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control by a fixed channel method for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the production sound. An example of a sound definition table is shown when the process of outputting only in (say) is realized. In this sound definition table, the definitions of priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound name. doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of the other notification sounds and the effect sounds are omitted. Regarding the effect sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 is defined for each channel except the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is the numerical value of the priority. The high notification sound is assigned and output to the channel X regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to the channel X first is given priority, and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output after the output of the notification sound is completed. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 129 is a table showing, for each of the notification sounds illustrated in FIG. 128, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) for ending the notification, for each type of the notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound, but this is a free channel as much as possible in order to effectively utilize a single channel X. This is a measure to maintain the state and refrain from the subsequent output of the notification sound.

As shown in FIG. 129, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed). It informs that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"". ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected". On the other hand, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied. It has become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), there is a high possibility that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a fraudulent act due to a slapstick act is performed). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that notifies that it is in the state), and count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the big hit game state (the state where the big winning opening is open) A notification sound that notifies that the detection by the winning opening sensor) is being performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the closed large winning opening to win a game ball) has been performed. 3 (abnormal grand prize) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are those. The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo vibration has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example). , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and detected by the vibration sensor 2405 as the notification time. While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps are used. With regard to lighting by, the execution will be continued until the release condition "returning the power" is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (large prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo large prize abnormality has been detected" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "a large prize abnormality has been detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the notification time is set. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) from the time when the count sensor 4005 detects it, it is within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). Further, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a notification sound such as "boo-boo" that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed) 1 A combination of the alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and the message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of which content of the notification is adopted is adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning under a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other alarm sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, when notifying an item belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed), the hall side responds to the fraudulent activity rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial action of. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (cheating). Since it is possible to recognize that the situation has been performed), it is expected that the initial response to the fraudulent activity on the hall side will be expedited. Furthermore, a message sound for notifying which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of "boo-boo", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement for the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed by opening the door). However, there is a possibility that the door has been opened due to the abnormal response measures taken by the hall side). Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open"). ”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 3 times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong". ), But for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the release condition is "door closure detection (door frame open switch 618 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the "detection that the door frame 3 is closed)" is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 (the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2). Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed by opening the main body frame, there is a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to an abnormality response measure by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed and this cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified of them. The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the main body frame open switch is used as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time when the detection by 619 is detected, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, And the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (cheating) A combination of sequential output with an alarm sound used in any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 such as "ping pong ping pong", which plays a role of notifying that there is a moderate possibility that There is.

In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility that cheating has been performed), while not making the person who is playing the proper game feel disgusted. It is important to be able to take corrective action on the hall side as quickly as possible. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing proper games will not feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing proper games to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of belonging to the first notification group. It is output when it belongs to the third notification group although it has a different lighting mode from the case where it belongs to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. It is expected that the measures for dealing with abnormalities on the hall side will be expedited to some extent by notifying by lighting various lamps that are not displayed.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated by the game ball at the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though the time is not shortened. It is in a state where the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is performed in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to the game in the proper mode (left-handed)). It informs that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed"). ") And are to be executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to be completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the lower plate 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 to be full in the game ball (lower plate). A notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where the ball should be removed) is provided to guide the game to proceed properly, although the possibility of fraud is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in the state to be expected, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition should be set to the same ones. It is said.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and the notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" is repeatedly output as the notification time, and the game board. Both of the displays in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects the display. ..

However, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) are detected by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279 when they are completed in 20 seconds. When the 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds is output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silence output), and a loop process that repeats the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silence data as a set is performed. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group simply by checking the silent data part instead of the message sound part that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed with this assigned to the channel X.

By the way, there may be silence in the notification sound used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to have a "pause". It is clear that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion having a relatively long time (third notification group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence time in between. It becomes possible to notify the game guidance without causing disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the same priority is set for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, but the priority is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, it is decided to adopt loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and 1SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. .. In addition, "Boo Boo", which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "Ping Pong Ping Pong", which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined is created at the time of output. You may then assign it to a channel.

FIG. 130A shows a process when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 130 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 where no notification sound is output at present, it is mainly assumed. In the control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so that it is indicated that the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred based on the state of the updated notification flag is output externally and managed in the hall computer, and the step. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after that) when no notification sound is output, the magnetic detection information. When it is grasped that is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. (Here, the loop of "Boo-boo magnetism detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set.

When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to control the peripheral. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is repeatedly executed from the timing tα1 for 60 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism is detected"). ”) And lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) will be executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (a), in the timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not passed from the timing tα1 and the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so that it is indicated that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 where the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output externally and managed in the hall computer, and the step. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the vibration detection information is included, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is completed and the timer (60 seconds) is not timed up, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is performed. The generation schedule data is set, and the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is assigned to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boo-boo vibration detected"). It is supposed to perform playback.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, although the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the above from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp These are executed for lighting.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection that has already been set is reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them can be used. Even if it is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tα3 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism was detected” is repeated based on the time-up of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly). The loop processing to be executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set to time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been played 6 times.

At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest. By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boo-boo vibration”). The notification sound is played back in the loop of "Detected".

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set and is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration has been detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is timed up, “Boo-boo vibration is detected”. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "boo-boo vibration") among the notification sounds such as "was done".

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 130 (a)), when the 6th alarm sound (here, "Boo Boo") and the 6th message sound (here, "Magnetic detection") have finished playing, the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "boo-boo") was reproduced. As a result, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" and "Boo Boo vibration was detected" are connected at strange points, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example). If the notification sound 1 ends with "boo-boo magnetism" and the notification sound 2 starts with "movement detected", a meaningless notification such as "boo-boo magnetism has been detected" It becomes a content, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of (which may confuse the site).

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 time-ups at the warning sound of “boo-boo” and ends, resulting in a message sound. Even if it is not played back, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and it is no longer played back (only magnetic anomaly). If it is a notification, the notification sound will end at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is cut off at a halfway timing, it is prompted to check the display inside the liquid crystal, and the display inside the liquid crystal shows "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected", respectively. By displaying the display, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

FIG. 130 (b) shows a process when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 130 (a). ) And the above-mentioned processing (processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. ) Is almost the same.

For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), at the timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the frame opening detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information that the frame opening detection has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after that) when no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection is detected. When it is grasped that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to the channel X and the notification is made. A timer (30 seconds) is set to start the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the loop of "the frame is open ping pong ping pong") and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame open). ..

When assigning the notification sound 5 (frame opening) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and peripheral. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Will be.

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection are transferred from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is the release condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "frame is open ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly executed from timing tβ1 for 30 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "frame is open"). "It is open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (b), in the timing tβ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, the state of the notification flag is first updated so as to indicate that the door opening detection has been performed, as in the case of the timing tβ1 in which the frame opening detection has been performed. Next, the information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of the door opening detection is included, the notification sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. 129 is transmitted to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Not assigned. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side already assigned is preferentially reproduced and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door opening detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (30 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, the door open detection is responded. Schedule data for sound generation is set, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) is used. The notification sound is played back.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), although the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and the screen generation schedule data are set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the inside of the liquid crystal described above These are executed for the display and the lighting of the lamp.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority order is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the frame opening detection that has already been set is reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is lit. The mode is not reflected in each of the various lamp emissions. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the frame and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the door have the same data contents. No matter which one is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tβ3 where 30 seconds have passed from the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as "frame is open ping pong ping pong" is emitted based on the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame opening). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and sets the schedule data. By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door” is used. Is open. Ping Pong Ping Pong "loop) will be used to play the notification sound.

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door opening detection is not set and is set when the timing tβ3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of "door is open ping pong ping pong" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up, "door is open". It will be possible to urge the loop processing to end and stop playing at halfway timing (for example, timing such as "door is open") among the notification sounds such as "ping pong ping pong".

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 130 (b)) When the third message sound (here, "the frame is open") and the third alarm sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") have finished playing, the fourth message sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") Here, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") was played. As a result, "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and "the door is open ping pong ping pong" are connected at strange places, and it becomes impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation. The occurrence can be suppressed suitably.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door open detection is shortened, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it becomes possible to surely grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 130 (c) shows the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 130 (c), at the timing tγ1 in which no notification sound is output, the game is played in spite of being in a non-time saving state in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). Assuming that the gate sensor 4003 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the region on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the region 5a (right-handed detection in a non-time saving state), it is mainly In the control MPU 1310a, the information that the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time saving state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Will be. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU1310a, and the information is not output to the hall computer externally.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the result is in a non-time saving state. When it is grasped that the right-handed detection information is included, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (set) for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left-handed") and timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) (set). 20 seconds) is set.

Regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the gate unit 2003 is played from the main control MPU 1310a. Only the information that the sphere has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in a non-time saving state. , And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Will be.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting the storage area 1511 cage, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes the notification end (time-up of the timer (20 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance)), which is the release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). It will continue to run until. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the production, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. Will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is repeatedly executed from the timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. Display within the area (for example, "Please return to left-handed") will be executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (c), at the timing tγ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tγ1 and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is in the loop playback state, step S110 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, as in the case of the timing tγ1 in which the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state, the information that the lower plate full tank is detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (detection of full lower plate) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), a command is issued in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is found that the information of the lower plate full tank detection is included, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 129 is channeled in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) should not be newly assigned to the channel X. By setting the setting, the playback of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full tank is not set at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not yet been set. Set this for (seconds), and when the timer (20 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, the lower plate is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Pull out the ball in the lower plate". The notification sound is reproduced in the loop).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set, the screen is generated according to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate. By extracting the schedule data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is executed. There is.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

After that, at the timing tγ3 where 20 seconds have passed from the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as "Please return to the left-handed" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower plate full tank. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here). Then, the notification sound is reproduced in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate").

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is set at the timing tγ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set and is set when the timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate", the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing (for example, the timing of "Pull out the ball of the lower plate") and it is not played. You will be able to encourage.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 130 (c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate") is heard. It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced. As a result, "Please return to left-handed" and "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange points, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played, silence data for 5 seconds is inserted. Since the message sound of another notification sound is reproduced in, it is preferable to generate a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to avoid it.

FIG. 131 (a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, the said. Regarding the process corresponding to the magnetic detection (magnetic anomaly process), the same process as in the case described with reference to FIG. 130 (a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is started, and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is timed up. In t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced for 6 times. In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (a), 60 seconds have not passed from the timing t-1, and the notification sound such as "boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state at the timing t-2. In step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection (see FIG. 128). ), Even if the door open detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

And usually, for the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority side described with reference to FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (c) overlaps, the notification sound on the lower priority side A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after a magnetic anomaly occurs is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group" with a medium possibility of fraud. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (a), at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data are set. , Only set the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the setting of the flag, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are set, respectively. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X to start the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "door is open ping pong ping pong"). .. The execution of the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting in response to the door opening detection is started from the timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even though the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening while the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" was being played back in the loop, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected." From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "Door is open", the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection is played in full for 30 seconds, and "Door is open Ping Pong Ping Pong". The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as is played three times. In this way, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group is reproduced. Although it is the content (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop), it is expected to raise awareness that the situation is highly likely to be fraudulent.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected", the notification content will start from the message sound (door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation It will be possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs has been completed. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of "ping pong ping pong" after the message sound, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 131 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 131 (b), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 in which no notification sound is output. As for the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as the "frame open detection process (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 130 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), at the timing tδ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, the step is taken. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 128), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed even when the right-handed detection occurs in the non-time saving state.

That is, as described above, for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (c) overlaps. The process is performed so that only the timer of the above is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound is generated according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Schedule data is not set. Then, at the timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X for the minute amount, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "return to left-handed").

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is not included at a good timing. Will be reproduced, so that it becomes possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, even with such silent data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Will be.

FIG. 131 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 131 (c), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 in which no notification sound is output. As for the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as the "frame open detection process (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 130 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tε2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S112 It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of FIG. 94 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (See FIG. 128), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in both the sound and the lamp lighting. The output content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. As for the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in both the sound and the lamp lighting, the timing tε2 has been set up to that point. The process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emitting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are obtained. Is kept in the set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are set respectively. Put it in a state. Then, the allocation for the channel X and various lamp operations is assigned based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 can be output in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process on the lower priority side in the execution state (door open process). It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic anomaly process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is started, and the timer for the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is started. The loop processing will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been played 6 times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is processed in any of the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. The output content will be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense situation is promptly transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

FIG. 131 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ1 where no notification sound is output, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state is detected in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If so, the process corresponding to the right-handed strike detection in the non-time saving state (left-handed strike guidance process) is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 130 (c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” is started, and the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up at the timing tζ3. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tζ1 and a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is being played in the loop, step S110 or It is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 128), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection, and the output content of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is reflected as the actuator operation. It will be prevented from being done. As for the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, as a method of preventing the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, right-handed detection in the non-time saving state set up to that point at timing tζ2. The process of canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state from the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state. In addition to the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door open detection are also maintained in the set state. Set each generation schedule data. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection. Therefore, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection is made so that the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the processing on the lower priority side (left-handed guidance processing) in the execution state. It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-handed guidance process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is started. The loop processing will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times in accordance with the time-up of the timer (30 seconds). In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the door opening detection with a medium possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. In any of the above, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person who is playing the proper game does not feel disgusted, but after that. The notification sound belonging to the second notification group is performed by the alarm sound of "Ping Pong Ping Pong", and it is expected that the hall side will be promptly notified that the situation has changed to the situation where there is a possibility of fraud. ..

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in the situation where such an abnormal notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value is used. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness set value is changed, it is desirable that some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps reflect the changed brightness.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of each notification sound shown in FIG. 128 should be output, various above-mentioned processes are performed according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents and game guidance (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is hard to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of.

In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraudulent activity. is there. That is, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state is continued. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (recovery of various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily output. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 132 to 137, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priorities, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further change the state of the gaming machine. It is intended to realize notification in a manner that can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 132 to 137.

In the example shown in FIG. 132, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also generated. It is set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will play for a second.

On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 when the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 arrives.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection is completed and the channel X is in the vacant state, the magnetic detection in which the priority regarding notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the door opening detection started from the timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but the allocation for various lamp operations is At the timing tα13, the mode of lamp light emission corresponding to the magnetic detection is switched.

That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection are also obtained. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

On the other hand, as for the display in the liquid crystal and the light emission of the lamp corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 132, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor. Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some kind of fraudulent work opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to be completed. It is assumed that the magnet may have entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 momentarily when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Since it is such an act, there is a concern that it is not sufficient as a countermeasure only by performing the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity to take some measures.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection ends is reached, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection" in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is set to channel X. Special processing will be performed to reassign to. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", which causes a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and attract everyone's attention. Also, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that "when the magnetic notification is finished, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is finally possible to make the fraudulent act inconspicuous." Since the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that should have ended is played, the notification situation becomes unexpected, so it is expected that further fraudulent activities will be recognized as being too risky. Will be.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period during which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period during which the notification processing belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. It is decided to perform a process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (process of reducing the volume to a specific value). The specific value may be a volume of 0. During the period during which the notification processing belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds assigned to the other channels is not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is suppressed) is whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being played (whether the notification sound is being played) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are during the period in which the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. Processing to suppress the volume of the production sound inside and other game sounds (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the period during which the processing is being performed, processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and other game sounds (processing for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing during the period (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed. It was decided to reduce the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and the other game sounds to the same value during the period, but both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing. During the period, the process may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period during which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states just by checking the effect sounds other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be made faster.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 132, when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection is terminated is reached, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the volume of other game sounds is terminated. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the terminated state is played in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection ends is reached, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the volume of other game sounds may be continued without being suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 132, as is clear from the processing corresponding to the door opening detection, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The period during which the lamp is emitted and the period during which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the door opening detection are the same at the start time, but the end times are all different. In this way, by operating them so that the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it will be possible to appropriately notify the contents of abnormalities and game guidance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 133, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at the timing tα23 in a non-time saving state. I'm assuming a case. However, in this example, unlike the case shown in FIG. 132, it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, so that the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely malicious. Since it is unlikely that such an act has been performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is completed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 134, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 132. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 134, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door opening detection is completed at the timing tα34 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 134, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the terminated state is referred to as “notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection”. It will not be played in a connected manner. That is, even in the example shown in FIG. 134, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 132, after a person who intends to perform some kind of illegal work opens the door frame 3 to open it, the door open detection is performed. Waiting for the corresponding notification sound to finish playing, the magnet momentarily falls within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 while the squirt is cold. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the situation has entered. However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetic detection is not generated in a non-illegal state, the magnetic detection is performed even though the door frame 3 is in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing only by continuously playing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacated in case further notification sound processing is required. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 134, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality content, the game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 132. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 135, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, which is within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 135, after waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to be completed, an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt was cooled. Occasionally, a magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and despite the fact that a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced in response to this, the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is maintained without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being repositioned, and there is a possibility that more malicious cheating is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, while the notification sound 1 The process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection over a longer period of time from the time when the first magnetic detection is performed until the elapse of 60 seconds from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection is performed. Will be able to be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption during the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. And finally, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a big sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The special process of resetting the "sound generation schedule data according to the detection" and reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", and also in the middle such as "inspecting the boo-boo magnetism". The loop processing is completed at an odd timing, and the sound is reproduced in a form connected to the "reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appears in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 136, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 132. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 136, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 136, when waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to end and trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt is cold. Even though the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality was reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken greatly without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”, and then the notification sound is reproduced. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form that is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) without setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection. Seconds) are set, and at the timing tα55 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is finished, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. ..

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo vibration has been detected" does not end its loop processing at a good timing. For example, the loop is performed at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo vibration is detected". Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is completed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) for the “sound generation according to the door open detection”. "Schedule data" is set again, and a special process of reassigning the notification sound to channel X is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection" that is connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection". In addition to being reproduced in, it will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to vibration detection" in which the loop processing is completed at a halfway timing such as "inspecting boo-boo vibration". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appeared in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 137, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the frame opening detection is completed instead of the door opening detection. I'm assuming.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 137, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection is further generated immediately after the frame opening detection is performed is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if the magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent activity, the door frame 3 should be in the open state, and even if the main body frame 4 is in the open state, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Since there is no such thing, it can be assumed that the hole side may have mistakenly detected the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when using a magnet to clear the ball clogging in the ball tank or the payout passage.

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 137, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the end state is "notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection". By regenerating in a form connected to "regeneration" (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection but also magnetic detection is performed. For each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), special processing for terminating them is also performed.

According to such a configuration, while the function for fraudulent activity is appropriately performed, when the hall side is erroneously detected, the notification process corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection is performed by simply closing the main body frame 4. Since it will be possible to terminate all notification sounds, liquid crystal display, lamps), it is expected that the hall side will respond quickly to false positives and maintain a suitable atmosphere in the hall. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 137, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the frame opening detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) according to magnetic detection. You may want to perform a special process to end.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjusting function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in the process of step S1108, it is monitored whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated, and it is determined that the effect selection left button 331 is operated. A process of lowering the set value (player set value) by the player regarding the speaker volume is performed, and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the set value (player set value) set by the player regarding the speaker volume is performed. ) Is increased. In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pip!") Is output at the increased volume value. , It is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completed sound, the same sound may be output depending on whether the volume value is lowered or raised. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority as described above when there are no empty channels (for example, "20" which is the same as the button pressing sound), and the output volume of the production sound (for example, the output volume of the production sound ("20"). It is possible to more reliably convey that the change in audible sound volume).

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period (demo display, etc.) before the game is started because the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination has not yet been performed. Not only during the period when the game can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the jackpot judgment is executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. By making it possible to change the volume value flexibly at times, we are trying to maintain the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in a situation where channels of various production sounds are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine is concerned. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic anomaly or a door opening, a process is performed in which a specific notification sound corresponding to the detection content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. Further, at this time, it is possible to execute the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value without stopping the channel allocation itself of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped. Therefore, as long as the channel allocation of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

However, in the above-mentioned notification process under the progress of the production, since the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display production itself is not stopped, only the amount of the specific notification sound assigned to the channel is normal ( More channels will be used than in the non-notification state), and there will be no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound. The risk tends to be high. Then, if there is no free channel to which sound data is not assigned before the end of channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound, one of the sound data at that time. Since one channel allocation has to be discarded, even if the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed after that, the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to the channel is reproduced. It is not possible, and there is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

Regarding the concern about empty channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be decided from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production. Therefore, regardless of which channel method is adopted, as the above-mentioned effect progress notification process. It is important to prepare a processing structure that allows a common processing program to be adopted in order to reduce the cost and improve the reliability of the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” Or “pipi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the effect progress notification process is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin to reduce the risk of running out of free channels.

However, despite the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the volume value when a more important effect appears, the output volume is set while the effect progress notification process is being executed. If the change is not possible, when the notification process under the production progress is executed due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.), the appropriate volume value is set according to the content of the production progress. It is inevitable that the game interest will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed to. In addition, as a result of the progress of the production during the period during which the notification processing under the progress of the production is performed, if a large deviation occurs between the appropriate volume value and the actual set value according to the content of the production, the output volume (possible). Since it became possible to change the setting of (listening sound volume), it is necessary to accept multiple operations in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. As a result, even though the notification process under the progress of the production is finally completed, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be lowered due to the lack of free channels and the inability to properly output the production sound.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and the above When the notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume is changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point.

According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) according to the progress of the effect while the notification process under the progress of the effect is being executed, a new operation is performed. It becomes possible to collectively change the output volume (audible sound volume) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected when the effect progress notification process is completed without performing the above. In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and a situation occurs in which a vacant channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Will also be preferably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when the batch change of the output volume to the player set value is executed when the effect progress notification process is completed, the game during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the user setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. The sound may be output in a special mode different from that of the above (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more preferably solve the shortage of free channels when the effect progress notification process is completed, it depends on the number of changes in the player set value and the player during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) all at once as the production progress notification process ends. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification process under the production progress due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate production is performed due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

In the above explanatory example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection ends while the door open state is maintained, and then a magnetic abnormality occurs and the corresponding notification sound ends, the door open detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 132). However, if a magnetic abnormality occurs while the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is in the output state and the notification sound corresponding to this occurs, the door open detection is performed even if the door open state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the remaining time as the output time of the interrupted "notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection").

When the door is open, the lamp emits light according to the door open detection, but this lamp emission will continue even after the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection ends when the door is open. It is desirable to. Furthermore, it is desirable that the door frame 3 be continued for a predetermined time even after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is completed.

If there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is terminated while the door open state is maintained, the specific error occurs. It is desirable to output the notification sound again in response to the door opening detection based on the occurrence of. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the door opening detection.

Alternatively, if there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is terminated while the door open state is maintained, the specific error occurs. The notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection may not be output again based on the occurrence of a specific error, but the state in which re-notification is possible may be maintained.

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in the situation where such an abnormal notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value is used. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness set value is changed, it is desirable that some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps reflect the changed brightness.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of such an effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume) will be described.

FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of the effect separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

First, prior to explaining the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume), the content of the effect progress notification process is described with reference to FIG. 138. Will be briefly explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 128 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 138, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as volume suppression modes of the effect sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) regarding the volume, the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of "20" to "50" is changed. Among the possibilities, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanatory example, although the processing itself related to the output is performed, the production sound is silenced. It is illustrated as a thing to make.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud When the notification process relating to any of these is executed, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. Moreover, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, From the time when the abnormality is detected until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

In this explanatory example, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound). The period during which the process of suppressing the volume) is continued is the same as the period from the playback of the notification sound (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, grand prize anomaly) corresponding to the abnormality detection to the end of this. Is set to.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the degree of suppression is high. The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the sound. However, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, that time point. Then, the process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is terminated in the first volume suppression mode on the side where the degree of suppression is low.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the effectability No processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound).

In this explanatory example, the suppression mode is different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is not always necessary to make the difference, and the output volume of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. A process for suppressing (volume of audible sound) may be performed. However, the termination condition of the process to be suppressed is different in the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do it.

FIG. 139 shows the contents of the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this explanatory example, the player setting value is changed by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The smaller the value, the lower the volume of the effect sound. Further, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-mentioned suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the production sound. It is set as a value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanatory example, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the operation by the player.

Now, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the player setting value regarding the volume of the effect sound is "3" out of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. , It is assumed that the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "60", which is 20 times that volume. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, and the jackpot determination has not been performed and the player is in a state of waiting for a start prize, the effect selection left button 331 is pressed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a that imitates the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player setting values "1" to "5" is is also executed. To. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed in a state where the background image is changed. At least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when the player operates the image. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In such a situation shown in FIG. 139 (A), when an operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to "1" each time the operation is performed. The output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" accordingly. In addition, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a gauge display indicates which of the current set values is in the range of the player set values "1" to "5". The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 139 (C)) will be executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player set value is "1", neither the player set value nor the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is lowered, and the game is played. The person setting value remains "1" (the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is “5”.

On the other hand, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit judgment is made, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the decorative symbol SZ fluctuates in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit judgment and the type of the fluctuation pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 139 (A) (the period during which the demo display or the like can be performed) but also the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination after the game is started. The reception by the player is allowed even during the execution period, and the volume value is agile when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 139 (C) appears. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 139 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 139 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is 20 times that of "60" →. Under the setting change to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at the changed volume "80", and in the second operation, the player setting is performed. The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times higher than that. At "100", which is the volume after the change, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played.

Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, it is within the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value. The second volume value display OH2, which indicates which is the current set value by the gauge display, is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. By clarifying which of the current setting values is for the range of player setting values "1" to "5", even in a tense situation where a more important effect appears. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to the change of the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

The second volume value display OH2 is displayed from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 139 (C) as shown in FIG. 139 (D). It is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and then the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player set value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed in such a manner that the player set value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"). When is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is more preferably promoted to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 140, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation and the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the detection is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying this.

The situation shown in FIG. 140 (A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 139 (A). When a start winning prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 139 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "" "The door is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed during the fluctuation period of the symbol, the first volume suppression mode is used. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (A), but the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player's set value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such the effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume (audible sound volume) of the production sound, which has been lowered to the value (here, "10"), is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) regarding the volume is this. Accepting changes to itself, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point As mentioned above, it is made to change all at once.

That is, FIG. 140 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 140 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the value set by the person (20 times), is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the first specific value.

At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is first specified. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of “1” to “5” of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so that the second volume value has been received. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the notification processing under the production progress (output volume up to a specific value). When each of the lowering processes) is completed, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be "80" according to the first operation from the first specific value (here, "10"), and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, the first specific value (here, "10") will be changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the vacant channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, when the output volume (volume of the audible sound) is changed all at once (“10” → “100”) as the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, the output volume changes. Nevertheless, the channel allocation of the volume adjustment completed sound itself is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification process under the production progress due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate production is performed due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic anomaly and the door opening are exemplified as specific states, but the effect progress notification process and the door opening occur in the state where the magnetic anomaly occurs. The end conditions may be different from those of the effect progress notification process in this state.

For example, first, regarding the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened, when the door is closed or when a predetermined time has passed since the door was opened (the door was continued to be opened). Even if) it will be terminated. However, in any case, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (for example, "10" → "100"), the volume adjustment completed sound channel despite the change in the output volume. It is desirable not to do the allocation itself.

On the other hand, the notification processing under the effect progress in the state where the magnetic anomaly has occurred should not be terminated only when the magnetic anomaly state ends, but should be continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (for example, "10" → "100") when the RAM is cleared or the power is restored from the power cutoff. Even if there is, it is desirable not to assign the channel of the volume adjustment completed sound itself even though the output volume changes.

Further, in the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened, a display indicating that is displayed when the player set value is changed is displayed, whereas in the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred. , When the player setting value is changed, the display indicating that fact may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that the end conditions are different between the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened and the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic anomaly occurs. become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob portion is mainly performed by the hall side, the output (channel allocation) of the volume adjustment completion sound triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob portion cannot be performed. It is more desirable to allow free channels to have a margin.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, various effects included in the pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Lamps (lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and used for production, etc., and game lamps such as special-figure LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting target. ) Is provided with a brightness adjustment button (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the player determines the brightness applied to the various production lamps. It is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value related to brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the setting value applied to the volume at that time. I have to. Further, the brightness of the effect lamp can be changed by the operation by the player in both the state where the symbol does not change and the state where the symbol changes.

Further, it is desirable that the brightness adjustment completed sound is channel-assigned under the same conditions as the volume adjustment completed sound described above. In this case, even if the set value related to the brightness is changed, the brightness adjustment is confirmed. There will be situations where the sound channel allocation itself is not performed, or where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. According to such a configuration, it is necessary to grasp the current situation (whether or not the above-mentioned notification process under the progress of production is being executed, etc.) when the set value related to the brightness is changed instead of the volume. Will be possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

The player setting value related to the volume is set to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed after being controlled by the demo screen) is satisfied. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player, a display indicating which is the current set value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume). To a third party that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is decreasing by preventing both the value display OH2) and the output (channel allocation) related to the volume adjustment completion sound. More desirable to make it harder to recognize.

Also, if a new volume adjustment is made while the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state even if there is a free channel Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel in the form of ending halfway and outputting (overwriting and outputting) is more important for allowing a margin in the number of free channels. desirable.

Also, when an operation is further performed to the side where the volume is increased even though the player set value is at the maximum value, or to the side where the volume is decreased even though the player set value is at the minimum value. When the operation of is performed further, even if there is a free channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and it is not output so that the number of free channels can be increased. More desirable on. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but the display indicating which of the current set values (first volume value display OH1 and second volume value display OH2) is displayed. May be good.

Volume adjustment by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is permitted, but it may be possible to generate a period during which this is not permitted for volume adjustment performed by the operation by the player.

On the other hand, FIG. 141 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection while the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the state detection generated in FIG. 140 is a magnetic abnormality instead of opening the door. It is a figure explaining the content about the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the right button 332.

The situation shown in FIG. 141 (A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 140 (A). When a start winning prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 140 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 141 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the magnetic detection is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection"). And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed during the fluctuation period of the symbol, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the sound output volume (audible sound volume) will be performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (A), but the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player's set value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process is executed in response to such a magnetic anomaly, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, "0") is performed. The output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound (mute in this case)) that has been lowered to () is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself regarding the volume. The change reception is allowed, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is displayed. As mentioned above, the changes are made all at once.

That is, FIG. 141 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 141 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the second specific value (here, "0 (silence)"), which is lower than the value set by the person, is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the second specific value.

At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is specified second. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of “1” to “5” of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so that the second volume value has been received. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Incidentally, in this explanatory example, in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the magnetic detection occurs. The notification process under the progress of the production is continuously executed.

After that, a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the magnetic detection was performed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH was returned to the state of being executed again, and the effect progress notification process (output volume was specified). When the process of reducing the value to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (audible sound volume) should normally be "80" from the second specific value (here, "0") according to the first operation, and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, the second specific value (here, "0") will be changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

When the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (D), the game board side effect display device The display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is finished, the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, and the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. On the other hand, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the production sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

In this way, even if a magnetic anomaly occurs, the player is allowed to change the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. , It will be expected to suppress the deterioration of the game interest until the notification processing under the progress of the production is completed. In addition, the volume value (volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the vacant channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is also output when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (“0” → “100”) when the effect progress notification process due to the magnetic anomaly is completed. Even though the volume changes, the channel allocation of the volume adjustment completed sound itself is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which an appropriate production cannot be enjoyed due to a shortage of free channels even though the notification processing under the production progress caused by the notification due to the false detection is finally completed. Can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in Fig. 128, the initial volume of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic anomaly such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected". Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always played at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player set value.

Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification processing under the progress of the production is not executed. Therefore, the player is set during the execution of these notifications. It is possible to appropriately change both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound). However, as shown in FIG. 128, “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the initial volume value for these notification sounds 6 and 7, regardless of the player setting value. It will always be played at the volume set by the initial value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set in the third byte of the initial volume value, and "1" is not set. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

Further, for each process described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol change but also before the start of the symbol change and in a form straddling the start and end timings of the symbol change. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

Further, in each of the processes described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation by 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

Further, the processing described with reference to FIG. 140 and the processing described with reference to FIG. 141 have different modes of suppressing the effect sound during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being performed. It is not necessary to make them different, and the output volume (audible sound) of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the process of suppressing the volume of the sound) may be performed.

Further, in the effect progress notification process, the output volume (volume of audible sound) of various game sounds is suppressed, and among these game sounds, the game ball is placed at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as the sound played according to the winning (winning sound), may be played at the default volume without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds (winning sounds), such as sounds played in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 128 to 141, there is no vacancy in the channel by adopting a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormal content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to make technical ingenuity in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. Concerns remain about the emergence of the above unintended mode of sound output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical techniques are required for channel allocation of the production sound at a stage prior to the occurrence of a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel (a situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). I try to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical measures made regarding the output of the production sound will be described in sequence. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Further, when the automatic channel method is adopted, it is not always necessary to adopt the control based on the above-mentioned priority, and when all the channels are in use, a process of discarding a new sound may be performed. Good. In addition, the examples described below can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

[Operation sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. Perform the process of causing. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and output in a suppressed mode or silently ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and output) and an operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is detected in this state, the jackpot symbol (corresponding to the symbol) is caused by the symbol fluctuation. A special production sound suggesting the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the production pattern is output in an unsuppressed mode (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested by the special production may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special effect sound is output in response to the operation detection, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed mode or silently. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". This will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

By the way, when it is attempted to output a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of "BGM reproduction") to a channel in a suppressed mode or silently, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the existing sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a valid period for the production reception), a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("" It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate a valid period of the effect reception) after setting the sound of "BGM reproduction") in a suppressed mode or in a state of being silently output.

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the valid period of the production reception is generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (production reception) is performed at any timing within this valid period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume returned to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to this is started to be reproduced at an indefinite timing.

In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM playback" is switched to the sound data of "BGM playback dedicated to special production sound playback" and this is used. It is also conceivable to perform a process of regenerating. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the content of various effects until the symbol is stopped and ended, the timing of the symbol stop, etc., the sound of "BGM reproduction" is within the valid period. While it is uncertain (depending on the player) at what timing the operation (directing reception) will be performed, if the operation (directing reception) is used as an opportunity to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". However, there is a concern that so-called sound deviation may occur between the timing of various productions and the timing of stopping the design after that, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of the super reach production, the sound data at the second half of the super reach production, etc.) are determined according to the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. When the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel according to the time series, the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel and the playback is started from the timing before the valid period of the production reception occurs in the specific production pattern, and the valid period ends. The assigned state for a predetermined channel is maintained for a long period of time until the timing after the sound is played.

In this regard, in a part of the section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, the process is suppressed or silently applied to the sound output as compared with the other sections. When the data content that regulates that is performed is preset and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data, a part of the section (special). It is designed to have a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception occurs within the period). In addition to this, regardless of the timing of the operation by the player within the valid period of the above-mentioned production reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The sound of "BGM reproduction" is a special production sound according to the production reception, straddling the two sections in the specific sound data with the period (other section) after the end of (partial section). The sound is reproduced in an unsuppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as "BGM reproduction" sounds corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, super). Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach production) to the predetermined channels according to the time series specified by the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is received for production in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, it is special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be played back, the sound of "BGM playback" that is in the playback state on the predetermined channel is "output in a suppressed mode or silently (special period) regardless of the production reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in the form of being mixed in with the special production sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppressed mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in silence, the special directed sound is not suppressed by the highly immediate processing triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that, while the playback is started at.

FIG. 142 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example of executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described with reference to FIG. 142.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the effect is advanced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start to the end of the symbol variation when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. It may be reproduced as a sound material) based on the schedule data for sound generation, or the entire period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is obtained. It may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 142, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in the playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in the reproduction state is special. At the timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 when the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception), which gives the operation opportunity to trigger the generation of the production sound, is reached, the silent data content is set. It is designed to be in the playback state in some sections. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in the usage status of the channel. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This provides an operation opportunity for the player to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest of the game.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this explanatory example is the timing ts16 at which a part of the section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is terminated even if there is no operation by the player. At the timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is terminated so that the operation by the player is not accepted for the production. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the operation validity period when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is in the playback state within a part of the section set as the silent data content. It will be possible to generate a special production sound according to the operation by the player while providing an atmosphere in which the usage status of the cage channel seems to be affordable. The operation valid period ends not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when the operation by the player is accepted for production. When the timing ts15 arrives without the operation by the player, the special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

Then, in this explanatory example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned based on the reception of the effect. Special production sounds are assigned to channels 08 and 09, which are different from those of, 03, and played back.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, the maximum time (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) from the start to the end of the operation valid period is set to "SY", and the operation valid period ends at this maximum time. When the time (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) until the end of a part of the section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is set to "BF", it is within the operation valid period. Regardless of which timing the player operates, the special production sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time of "SY + α (> BF)" and played.

According to such a configuration, the timing ts16 always arrives when the special effect sound is in the playback state, regardless of the timing during which the operation is valid. The sound of "BGM reproduction" can be output as an unsuppressed mode so as to be mixed in with the special production sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special production sound to the output of the "BGM reproduction" sound as the non-suppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , The buffer period for restoring the output period of the special production sound in the non-suppressed manner of the "BGM reproduction" sound (the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is restored in the non-suppressed manner by being mixed with the special production sound). By making it function as a period that makes it difficult to notice that, when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, but the discomfort caused by returning it after a predetermined time is created. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction in this way, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the unsuppressed mode. Playback of the special production sound will be terminated while in the state.

In the above explanatory example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are operated by the player as shown in FIG. 142 (b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow according to the accepted timing, but regardless of which timing they correspond to, the timing ts16 arrives when the special production sound is in the playback state. , It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, "a feeling of strangeness caused by not returning the sound of" BGM reproduction "as a non-suppressed mode but returning it after a predetermined time when the operation by the player is accepted" is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section while the special production sound having a large initial volume value is attracting attention.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, when the operation by the player is received for the effect, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination is generated. The special production sound may be generated based on the reception of the production only when the conditions are satisfied. Even when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the player's operation is received within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is reproduced. Then, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly brought into the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the transition to is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 142.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is shortened compared to the case where the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect) is reproduced. The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound is returned to the playback state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, there is a silence period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if a revival effect that raises the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. May be good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated and this may be made an empty channel.

In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by also performing a movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the reproduced state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound is suppressed more than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. It suffices if it is output by. Here, as the suppressed mode, in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced can be exemplified.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel itself is set to the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound is silenced, so that the "BGM reproduction" can be performed. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently by simply playing it back without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of the "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (the process of returning to the initial volume value) is performed with the reception of the effect as an opportunity. Try not to. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. The process of increasing from the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without increasing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from a specific value. Good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, a restriction process for making it difficult for a new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel is performed at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing ts12 to the timing ts16. It is desirable to. It should be noted that such restriction processing has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol fluctuation during execution, such as a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjustment sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is targeted for restriction, and that the specific game sound subject to this restriction is not played without being newly assigned to a channel.

Further, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is used on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. It is desirable to play sound effects, dialogues, and other directing sounds instead of music so that they do not overlap with the sound of.), And while the specific directing sound is being played, the timing ts12 arrives and BGM is played. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed mode or silently. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of a specific effect sound should be terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special production sound is not output.

Here, with respect to the above-mentioned specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from channels 02 and 03, the reproduction does not necessarily have to be started at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and the reproduction does not necessarily start at the timing ts12 or later. It may be present and the reproduction is started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, if a specific effect sound is output in the non-suppressed mode (normal mode), once, " Since the sound of the BGM reproduction in the "suppressed mode or silent state" can be made to appear as if it has been returned to the reproduced state in the normal mode, the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that it is.

Further, "for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output". , "The output of a specific production sound is terminated based on the fact that the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period, or is automatically terminated at a specific timing within the timings ts13 to t15 (operation valid period)." It means that. That is, if the operation by the player is not received before the specific timing within the timings ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated.

Further, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is emitted from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound in a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of being silenced ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of production sounds including special production sounds are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM reproduction into those production sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is usually mixed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

Regarding the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, the effect reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the effective period even if there is no operation, and the post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do so.

Further, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 occurs, the effect reception is permitted while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the suppressed mode or silently. The "acceptable reception sound" suggesting that (or the reception of the production is allowed) may be output in a non-suppressed manner. The "acceptable sound" is configured as a part of the "specific sound data" for outputting the above "specific production sound", and the "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel before the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific effect sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" is output in an unsuppressed manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the “acceptable sound” is output as the sound corresponding to the “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound for acceptance" is output from before the timing ts13 to after the timing ts13 so as to straddle the timing ts13. It should be noted that the specific effect sound can be output as, for example, a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect (an effect suggesting that the valid period will occur soon) performed before the operation valid period occurs. In this case, a "reproduction section of the precursor sound" and a "reproduction section of the acceptable reception sound" are provided in one sound data assigned to the channel so as to straddle the timing ts13. The "acceptable sound" may be a non-output state in the middle of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at the timing ts15. It is good, but it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to switch to the non-output state when the production reception is made while the output state is in effect.

That is, "the reception allowable sound is output" here means that "sound data including the reception allowable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at the timing ts13, and is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction section of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing ts13. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "reproduction section of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

Further, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, the elapsed time from the time when the production reception is performed, regardless of the timing of the production reception within the valid period. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special production sound is reproduced in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the predetermined channel to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned.

In this regard, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception will appear as the display image on the effect display device 1600. However, regarding the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception, "the execution state (visible state) is continued until the elapsed time from the time when the effect reception is made reaches the predetermined time value". Instead, it is desirable to "hide the effect when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period". As the "predetermined timing in the effect pattern", for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after the timing ts15 and before the timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even if the production reception is performed immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the timing must come before the timing when the output state of the special production sound ends. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, with respect to the processing related to the special production sound, the output state must be continued until the timing when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored in the non-suppressed manner and comes after the timing ts16. However, since it is possible to end the special effect display before the special effect sound, it is possible to advance the effect after the operation after the operation at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such an effect, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored or the timing that arrives before the timing ts16. It can be said that it is important.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the elapsed time from the production reception timing is predetermined based on the production reception. "Processing for special production sound that continues the output state until the time value is reached" and "Processing for special production display that continues to be displayed until a predetermined timing in the production pattern arrives" are performed in parallel. Will start with each.

For example, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process related to the special effect display" of the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively long period of time. Of the post-operation effects, the "process related to the special effect sound" ends at the timing when a predetermined time value elapses from the time when the effect reception is performed. On the other hand, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process related to the special effect display" of the post-operation effect is executed only for a relatively short time. However, among the post-operation effects, the "process related to the special effect sound" is executed from the time when the effect is received until the timing when the predetermined time value elapses.

That is, in this case, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern becomes the specific timing. When the production is received within the special operation reception production (valid period), "the output state is displayed until the elapsed time from the timing when the production is received reaches a predetermined time value. It functions as a process for executing the "process related to the special effect sound to be continued" and the "process related to the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives", respectively.

According to such an operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "process related to the special effect display" among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation for this, the end timing of the "processing related to the special production sound" of the post-operation production will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate for a while after the validity period occurs and operate it at a later time, the end timing of the "processing related to the special production sound" of the post-operation production will be relatively late. However, there is a demerit that it is not possible to maintain the execution state of the "process related to the special effect display" among the post-operation effects for a long time.

That is, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no most desirable operation timing for producing excitement.
-In exchange for accelerating the end timing of the "processing related to the special effect sound", do you enjoy this by lengthening the execution state of the "processing related to the special effect display" (operate at an early stage within the valid period? Do you do) or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of "processing related to special effect display", do you enjoy this by extending the time until "processing related to special effect sound" is completed (at a late stage within the valid period)? Do you operate it) or
-Sacrifice little by little the time that the "process related to the special effect display" is maintained as the execution state and the time until the "process related to the special effect sound" is completed, and try to balance it as a whole. (Is it operated at a timing that is neither early nor late within the valid period?)
It is possible to have a strategic operation effect such as the above for the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception effect that does not cause tiredness and allows the operation timing to be selected according to the mood of the player. Will be able to.

Here, in the above explanatory example, as the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), "process related to the special effect sound" and "process related to the special effect display" are performed. Although the example described above has been described, the "process of operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed, or the "process of operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be performed instead of the "process related to the special effect display". May be executed. However, regarding the "process of operating the predetermined effect movable body", as in the case of the above-mentioned "process related to the special effect display", "even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the valid period". , It is desirable to end the operating state when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. " Here, "terminating the operating state" means that, in the case of an effect of operating a predetermined effect movable body to a specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operating state at the specific position is moved to the original position. It means to start the process of operating to return.

In the above description example, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , The process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) ”and the“ process related to the special effect sound ”that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. And said. However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, if the jackpot determination is lost or the predetermined effect determination is lost). In such a case), even if the production reception is performed within the operation reception production, the "processing related to the special production display (or the processing for operating the predetermined production movable body)" is not performed, and the predetermined production conditions are met. Is satisfied (FIG. 142), the "processing related to the special production sound" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short can be performed as a different production sound. More desirable.

However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error), and the production may not be accepted. As a result, the production is valid without being accepted. When the period ends, the player's interest in playing the game sees that the "process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)" is not performed even though the operation is performed. There is concern that it will decline. Therefore, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the production pattern is reached. (Or, the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and the" process related to the special effect sound "that continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed respectively. It is desirable to be done. As a method for automatically generating (automatically receiving) an operation reception or an effect mode related thereto, any one of the above-mentioned or later-described examples, or an appropriate combination can be used.

As described above, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state in the non-suppressed mode. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect reception, and the output state of the reception allowable sound is released at this point. In this regard, even when the normal valid period that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed occurs, the acceptable reception sound is put into the output state in an unsuppressed manner. However, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound is continued without canceling the output state even if the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. Further, regarding the reception allowable sound output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the reception allowable sound output when the normal valid period occurs. It is desirable to use the sound of "BGM reproduction" in order to preferably maintain the game entertainment while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed.

Further, it is a valid period (or a second reception period among a plurality of reception periods having different post-operation effects) that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or a silent state, and the sound of the specific BGM is a suppressed mode. Or, in the case of (which occurs when there is no sound), there are N types (modes) of acceptable reception sounds that suggest that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred), and these types. Be sure to output (output in a non-suppressed manner) by either of. On the other hand, it is the first reception period among a plurality of reception periods with different post-operation effects, which occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode. In the case where the sound of the specific BGM is in a state of being output normally in an unsuppressed mode), as a reception allowable sound suggesting that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred). Only M types (modes) less than N are prepared, and "when outputting in one of those types (output in an unsuppressed mode)" and "not output by any of those types and accept acceptance" It is desirable to have "when the sound data including sound itself generates a valid period without being assigned a channel". In addition, it is desirable to suggest that "the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears differs" depending on the type of acceptable sound for reception. It should be noted that the mode as a reception allowable sound prepared corresponding to the valid period (first reception period) that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction (specific BGM) is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode. The M number, which is a number, may be of one type (one aspect). In this case, when the first reception period occurs, the same mode is always output as the reception allowable sound. On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, any one of the reception permissible sounds having N modes is selectively output (based on the results of the jackpot determination, the effect determination, and the like).

Alternatively, either the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, or the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being normally output in the non-suppressed mode. Also, although a plurality of types (modes) are prepared as the reception allowable sound, the ratio of the reception allowable sound having a high expectation of big hit occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It is desirable that the sound is relatively high during the effective period, and is relatively low during the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed manner. .. And also in this case, in the valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, the acceptance allowable sound suggesting that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred) is While it is always output (output in the non-suppressed mode), the valid period occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being output normally in the non-suppressed mode (the effective period occurs). Or, the reception allowable sound suggesting that the valid period has occurred) is "output in a non-suppressed manner" and "the sound data itself including the reception allowable sound itself is not channel-assigned and is not output". It is desirable to have it.

According to these configurations, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output normally in an unsuppressed manner, the degree of expectation suggested by the reception allowable sound is less detailed (M types less than N). You may not be able to recognize it, or you may not be able to expect much (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode, there is a possibility that the acceptance allowable sound may be overlooked by the sound of the BGM reproduction. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the reception allowable sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output in a suppressed mode or a silent state, the acceptance allowable sound is set in a situation where it is possible to make the sound output in the non-suppressed mode stand out. Since the output is always performed in a non-suppressive manner, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes are adopted, among the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" occurs. , At least one of the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in an unsuppressed manner" occurs (for example, of the acceptable sound). Of these, the type with the lowest expectation for big hits) may be included. However, the acceptance allowable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being output normally in the non-suppressed mode" includes "the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or silence". The types that cannot be output (for example, the types with the highest expectation of big hits among the acceptable sounds) should be included as the reception allowable sounds that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the state is" occurs. Is desirable. In addition, the number of production types that can appear as post-operation effects according to the production reception in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output normally in a non-suppressed mode" is "BGM playback". It is desirable that the number of production types is larger than the number of production types that can appear as a post-operation effect according to the production reception in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state". Among the production types that can appear as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed manner", "the sound of BGM reproduction is At least one of the effect types that can appear as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception in the "valid period that occurs when the state is suppressed or in a silent state" may be included. In addition, the plurality of reception periods in which the post-operation effects performed when the effects are received are different from the first reception period, and the third reception period is further included, and the third reception period is also included. It may be generated when the sound of BGM reproduction (specific BGM) is in a state of being normally output in an unsuppressed manner. However, in this third reception period, by preventing the reception allowable sound from being output when it occurs, it is more difficult to perform the operation than when the first reception period occurs, which makes it more difficult to operate the game. It is desirable to try to improve.

Further, in the normal gaming state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability fluctuation function is activated, the valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, and the sound of BGM reproduction are in the non-suppressed mode. When multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations are prepared as acceptance allowable sounds in any of the valid periods that occur when the output is in the normal state, output is performed in any of the valid periods. Then, the special reception permissible sound that "the rate of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100%" may be output. In addition, a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as special reception allowable sounds.

That is, in this case, when the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" is generated, the effect is produced within the valid period. Even as a post-operation effect performed based on the reception, when it appears, it will be executed in a special mode in which "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". If the production reception is performed while the special reception permissible sound is being output, the output of the special reception permissible sound is interrupted, and when it is output, "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" special It is desirable to output the production sound.

However, when the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppressed mode" occurs, the valid period As a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect is accepted within the company, when it appears, it is executed in a special mode in which "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" and in the special mode. It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that the special reception allowable sound output when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" is generated and the "sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode". The special reception permissible sound output during the "valid period generated when the state is in the same state" may be different types of reception permissible sounds. In addition, there are multiple types of special reception allowable sounds that are output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in an unsuppressed manner" occurs, and among these types , The type of special reception allowable sound output when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" is generated, and the type may be different from the type. .. If the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound (including the special reception permissible sound) is output, the output of the reception permissible sound is interrupted, and the production sound corresponding to the post-operation effect (post-operation effect is special). When it is performed in a mode, it is desirable to output a special effect sound that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" when it is output.

According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or a silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in hearing), when the special reception allowable sound is output, it is within the valid period. Even as a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect reception has been made in, when it appears, it will always be executed in a mode that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". On the other hand, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation in which a hearing error is likely to occur due to competition with the sound of BGM reproduction), it is assumed that the special reception allowable sound is output. However, as a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect is accepted within the valid period, the effect is not necessarily performed in the mode that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". Therefore, it is possible to have doubts (suspicions as to whether or not the sound was mistakenly heard) whether the reception allowable sound was output as "special reception allowable sound", so that the tension can be maintained appropriately. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed manner, the emphasis is placed on "how to prevent the reception allowable sound from being overheard", and a feeling of tension until the reception allowable sound is output. It becomes possible to maintain this in a suitable manner. In order to increase such tension, in the operation reception effect, "a special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "". Compared to the case of the operation reception effect, "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is executed in a mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "". It is desirable to execute the effect (display related to permissible pre-operation and sound related to permissible pre-operation) in a relatively short time so that the valid period is suddenly generated.

In the state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation in which a hearing error is likely to occur due to a conflict with the sound of BGM reproduction), "a special reception allowable sound is output and operation is performed. The post-operation is not executed in the mode that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%", and the operation reception effect (valid period) and "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is" When it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%. In the operation reception effect (valid period), the special reception allowable sound is output as different types of reception allowable sound. It may be output as a reception allowable sound of the same type. In addition, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation in which the reception allowable sound is likely to be misunderstood due to a conflict with the sound of BGM reproduction), "special reception allowable sound is output. The operation reception effect (valid period) that is performed and the post-operation effect is executed in a mode that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" may not necessarily occur. In addition, in the operation reception effect (valid period), "the special reception allowance sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in the mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "", the acceptance is allowed. Regardless of which type of sound is output, the post-operation effect is not executed in the mode that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%", and that mode is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

In addition, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) and the normal valid period that occur while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, an image display that imitates the operation means used as the operation target and is effective. A gauge display indicating how much time is left is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate. In this regard, at least during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed, when the production is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and the "production" is performed. "Processing related to special effect display (or processing to operate a predetermined effect movable body)" in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives, and "elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received" It is desirable to start each of "processing related to the special production sound that is continued until the time value reaches a predetermined time value". According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the valid period the production reception is performed after the production reception based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether or not the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) will be completed immediately. As a method of starting the effect after the operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the above or the following examples, an appropriate combination, and the contents described in the writing should be used. Is possible.

In the above description example, regarding the number of effect patterns prepared (memorized) as the "specific type of effect pattern" that outputs the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a suppressed mode or silently, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number of production patterns to be less than the number of production patterns prepared (memorized) as "other production patterns" that are not output silently in order to improve the game entertainment when the production occurs. ..

Further, when a plurality of production patterns are prepared as the suppression mode or the "effect pattern" for outputting the sound of the "BGM reproduction" silently, the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is suppressed in the production pattern for the first set time. Alternatively, an effect pattern for outputting silently and an effect pattern for suppressing the sound of "BGM reproduction" for a second set time longer than the first set time or an effect pattern for outputting silently are included, and the jackpot symbol is included in these effect patterns. It is desirable that the expectations that appear are different. According to such a configuration, when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, the jackpot expectation can be suggested depending on how long the state is continued. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (Processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where the symbol variation is executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even if the volume setting value is changed in the state where the symbol fluctuation is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the "effect pattern for outputting the sound of BGM reproduction in a suppressed mode or silently" can be selected, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the pattern change regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, the player who sees the volume adjustment confirmation sound not being output becomes aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed, so that it is expected that the gaming interest is maintained favorably. become. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 can display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed, so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable to make people aware (awareness of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel, but this is output at volume 0, or the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel. ..

The special production sound that is output based on the fact that the production reception is performed when the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state is the time that is more than twice the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15). It is desirable to configure it to maintain the output state. According to such a configuration, even if the production reception is performed immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special production sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed can be set. The output time up to the timing ts15 (special production sound) can be made longer.

[Amusement machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine provided with the effect operation unit 400 in the plate unit 320, which can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player, has been described. A gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's motivation to operate will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 165. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 143 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 144 is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 accommodates a sword portion 5010 having a sword blade portion 5011, a handle portion 5012, a collar portion 5013 sandwiched between the sword blade portion 5011 and the handle portion 5012, and a sword portion 5011 of the sword portion 5010. It constitutes a sword ornament 5001 composed of a sheath portion 5020 capable of being capable of being used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sheath portion 5020 movably provided on the door frame 3 in the left-right direction in the front view. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword pulling direction and the sword delivering direction. The sword portion 5010 is usually in a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword-drawing operation makes the sword blade portion 5011 visible to the player in the sword-drawing effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword-drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the sword-delivering operation by the player and returning to the sword-delivering state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, an opportunity to execute a sword drawing effect accompanied by movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword extraction effect can be executed. FIG. Shown, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of the sword-drawing effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed without performing the sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance. In spite of this, there are patterns in which the sword-drawing production is not performed, and there are patterns in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed and the sword-drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 145 (A), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is drawn according to the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for a large hit fluctuation at the time of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern for a small hit fluctuation at the time of a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for a missed fluctuation at the time of a miss, and the fluctuation results in an advantageous result for the player. The pattern is set so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed increases. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuations, with a probability of 30% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for small hits, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuations. It is executed with a 20% probability. It should be noted that the probability of the variation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword removal preparation transition effect is executed is higher than when the reach effect is performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), whether or not the sword-drawing main effect is executed is drawn according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the type of variation pattern is the same, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the variation pattern results in an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the fluctuation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for out-of-order fluctuation, the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher than in the case where the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of a variable pattern for jackpot fluctuation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the sword-drawing effect is executed, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern is advantageous for the player, the higher the probability that the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is executed. Is set to be. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and aura member movement due to sword pulling movement of sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 149, the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword pulling effect (sword drawing preparation transition effect and sword drawing book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 146, FIG. FIG. 147) and the aura member 5035 are provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described with respect to the case of forming an integral decorative body (FIGS. 148 and 149).

FIG. 146 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword ornament body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state and (B) first. The sword-drawn state and (C) the second sword-drawn state are shown. FIG. 147 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 147 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 146 (A), the sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword-delivered state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), in the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling preparation transition effect, only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade part 5011 is pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and can be seen by the player. It becomes the first sword pulling state. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling main production, the blade portion 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath portion 5020, and most of the second sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the blade pulling operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword ornament 5001 has an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword-delivered state (FIG. 146 (A)) to the first sword-drawn state (FIG. 146 (B)). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 147 (B)) inside the portion 5020 to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (FIG. 146 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates at the maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword-drawn state.

As shown in FIG. 147 (A), the aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011. The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033 and. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and in the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011, respectively.

Further, below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) changes from the sword delivery state to the first sword withdrawal state, it changes from the closed state to the open state, and the movement of the aura member 5030 causes the blade part 5011. The sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state after being deformed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the form in which the maximum operation is performed, but also the form in which the operation is stopped in the middle). ).

FIG. 148 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state, (B) first sword pulling state, and (C). Indicates the second sword withdrawal state. FIG. 149 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 149 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in FIGS. 147 and 148 described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself can move in the left-right direction, it can move in the up-down direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword delivery state (sword delivery state). ⇔ 1st sword withdrawal state ⇔ 2nd sword withdrawal state). This makes it possible for the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) to be united with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to appear as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 149 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely housed state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011 and the enclosure aura member 5036. It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the above, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by the driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in the front view, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is on the rack right. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the enclosure aura member 5036 stops at a position where it merges with the blade portion 5011 to form a second sword pulling state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the enclosure aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the range of motion.

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion maintains a relative positional relationship according to the state change (sword delivery state ⇔ first sword extraction state ⇔ second sword extraction state) of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010). An example of combining with 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (combination) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the complete appearance state in which the maximum movement is performed, but the movement is stopped in the middle and appears in the middle. It suffices if it can be in a state with an aura member). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 150 to 152 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword-delivered state functions as an operating means, and the player operates and detects the sword pulling operation. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in the front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state is the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbol forms a reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 150 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 150 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, and a part of the bamboo blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sword-delivered state.

In the princess reach effect, an image of the princess heading to the back of the blind is displayed (FIG. 150 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggestion image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 150 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, the operation validity period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to perform the sword removal operation of the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 151 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small steps in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. May be good. Then, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword pulling operation by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornamental body 5001 in the sword-delivered state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword pulling state, the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection / notification operation may be an operation in which the sword portion 5010 (or the handle portion 5012) moves up and down, such as movement or vibration, and an operation different from the own sword pulling operation can be felt through the handle portion 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection / notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle portion 5012. For this reason, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) is reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body is prevented. Can be done.

In the sword pulling operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player pulls out the sword. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is stationary above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (initial stage). The state) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 151 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the detached mode "767" (FIG. 151 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 151 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the detection notification operation is finished. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow) is placed in the center of the front surface (below the display area) that overlaps with the display area of the effect display device 1600. Only the hold display area can be dropped and moved to a visible state (total fall state) (FIG. 151 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body The 5001 maintains the second sword-drawn state (FIG. 151 (D2)). At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example. By differentiating the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed after that, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Princess Reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the game profit when it is a hit, etc.). ..

Then, after a predetermined period has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 was put into the second sword pulling state by the player's sword pulling operation, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword pulling state was reached. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 151 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed with the blinds removed (Fig. 152 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword pulling operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a hit, the hit is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 152 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the detachment is displayed together with a sad princess in the case of the detachment (FIG. 152 (F1) (F2)).

When the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player cannot move due to being grasped when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, but the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing (FIG. 151 (D3)) of the sword decoration 5001. If it is held at the performed position, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the movable effect in the left-right direction of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) are progressing. Since it is configured to do so, the progress of the game will not be stagnant. The sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured not to perform a movable effect. You may.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword pulling operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved in the forward direction (at the operation position) of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. On the other hand, it can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword pulling operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword pulling operation was performed, increasing the operation value of the player and motivating the player to operate. It is possible to suppress the decline of. In addition, since one operating means can be operated in a stepwise different mode (vertical direction during operation, horizontal direction after operation) by the operation by the player, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. It is possible to increase the operating value of the operating means as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

The left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is an effect display for the purpose of integrally producing an effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and a specific decorative member SDY (a sword accessory). The operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after performing the sword pulling operation with the sword decoration body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved so as to be located outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed so as to displace to the left direction (left end of the frame). Further, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example is an operation in the vertical direction (a sword pulling operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operating direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

Further, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player is performed, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm it for a certain period of time, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent movable production of the sword decoration body 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, if the movable effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to let go, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection / notification operation is completed, the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other production patterns 2 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 153 to 155 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 used in many ways. is there. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which the expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the expectation degree that the fluctuation during execution becomes a big hit and the operation of the operation button 410 are performed. As an effect, a pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 153 (A)), first, the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The operation promotion effect is started and the player is urged to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 153 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Later (FIG. 153 (N1)), an image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 154 (N2)). After that, the result of this fluctuation display (big hit, missed) is notified (FIG. 154 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expected degree suggestion effect for the variable display during execution. For example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expected degree (FIG. 154 (N2)). A character that changes the held display may appear.

Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and expanded by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 153 (M1) shows an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the message of the title "sword pulling chance" and the operation explanation "I want you to put the sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 155 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword withdrawal state and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state to produce an effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 155 (M3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the variation display this time is performed.

When the result of this variation display is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 155 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 155 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) only stops moving in small steps in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the disconnection (decorative symbol stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 155 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001) become possible, and the player can perform the operation button 410. It is not possible to identify subsequent deployments at the time of manipulating. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach effects, the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) are different operation modes (pressing operation and sword delivery operation). The player is requested based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operating means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Other production patterns 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 156 to 160 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable and is displayed in the detached mode based on the pressing operation of, the player is given an operation opportunity again by re-variating from the symbol display in the detached mode. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given / R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 156 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, here). , "You can move the movable body with a single button stroke") is displayed (Fig. 156 (B)), then the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. An operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the operation (FIG. 156 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to a single blow (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) to be moved by the operation. You may do so. Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the player detects the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 157 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative symbol) for notifying a big hit is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is released. The stop mode "777", the message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 157 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable, when the player detects the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped to move in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative symbol in an offset mode (“767”) is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 158 (P1). After that, as it is, according to the effect pattern to be set. It is developed into a pattern (FIG. 158 (P2)) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in an detached mode (“767”), or a resurrection pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the resurrection start image (referred to as "yet") indicating that the fluctuation display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative symbol in the detached mode of FIG. 158 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 158 (P3)), the decorative design is again in the reach state and reduced to the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the center of the screen. An operation valid suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a samurai ally) is displayed (FIG. 158 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 158 (P5)). As a result, the player raises the expectation that the production using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-emitting decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means according to the set effect pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (Katana) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat oozes on the samurai's forehead of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is luminescently decorated (FIG. 159 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is continuously moved in small steps and the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, and an operation for prompting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 159 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not decorated with light emission when it is operated a necessary number of times.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 159 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player in the lower right corner of the screen. As in the case of the above (FIG. 155 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again from the completely dropped state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released is a screen. An image notifying the big hit (message of the stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, "superb") is displayed in the center (FIG. 159 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 159 (R5)).

When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, the image of the samurai who has closed his eyes and sharpens his eyes (sword decoration body) of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the form with an aura member (FIG. 160 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be light-emitting decorated. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation instead of the operation button 410, but at this point, the form such as whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is moved in small steps, when a predetermined period elapses after the second sword is pulled out and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 160 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 159 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 160 (Fig. 160). Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of alignment, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 159 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 160 (Q5)).

In this way, since the expectation level is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the expectation level is more powerful than the expectation level suggestion by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and the decline in game interest can be suppressed. Further, even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 again. Will be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest, which is a concern because the operation effect is monotonous without shining instead.

Although 3 examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 are given in FIGS. 150 to 160 described above, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of productions can be provided, and the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 161. There are two types of the sword decoration body 5001 described above, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member. Here, the sword portion 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle portion 5012. Are provided in two types.

FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating a form of the sword decoration body 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deforming the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player is provided from the left and right sides of the sheath portion 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the door. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the sword ornaments 5001 in the sword-delivered state, and show the sword 0 to step 3 morphologies in order. The sword ornament 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 161 (A), the step 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to those of FIGS. 146 (A) and 148 (A) described above, and no operation is required for any of the constituent members at the initial stage. Shows the morphology. As shown in FIG. 161 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 161 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle portion 5012 expands and moves from the center so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from the inside. Shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. Shows the morphology. Here, the step 1 form to the step 3 form enable the morphological change without putting the sword ornament 5001 into the second sword drawing state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 capable of accepting operations by the player and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integral decorative body as the operation unit of the operation means, a more powerful operation means is provided. Can be done.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 165, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is effective among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. Specifically, as a suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory), the operation valid period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position. When the operation is valid, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162 (B)) that generates the operation validity period with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) positioned at the initial position even during the operation validity period. If this is done, there is a 30% chance that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective, and a 70% chance that the operation button 410 will be valid. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed. Has a 70% probability (including a step-up pattern) that the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, and a 30% probability that the operation button 410 is effective for operation. An example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described below.

(1st suggestion pattern)
FIGS. 162 and 163 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. Is a diagram showing a transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 162 (A)), the operation buttons are determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operating means of the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 162 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is determined to be valid for operation is generated. Let me. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the initial position, the operation button 410 is considered to be more effective than the sword decoration 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 is activated, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Let me. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the ratio is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the operation valid period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible.

If an operation on an operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is effective for operation is detected in FIG. 162 (C) or (D) described above, and the result of this variation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a completely dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of alignment, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the deviation. An image (the stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 164 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is valid during the reach effect as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect to be executed. In FIG. 165, although the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 was once enabled for operation without the sword decoration body 5001 being effective for operation, and then the sword decoration was performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern which makes the body 5001 operation effective.

As shown in FIG. 164 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 which is determined in advance to be valid for operation by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. It is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament.

Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is predetermined to be effective is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the suggested position, the sword decoration body 5001 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position. To generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible. Further, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved from the state of being operated at the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) may be moved from the state of operating at the suggested position to the fully dropped state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation on the operation effective operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in FIG. 164 (AA2) or (AA3) described above, the above-mentioned FIG. 162 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a fully dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of alignment, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the deviation. An image (the stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

The operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggested position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the sword decoration body 5001 has a different ratio of effective operation, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern that follows the effect transition from FIG. 164 (AA1) to (AA3) described above before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational effective, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is operated. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 165 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 which is determined in advance to be operation-effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) as in FIG. 164 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps (FIG. 165 (BB1)). ). Next, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (Fig. 165 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 163 is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means. Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 165 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operation means for which the operation is effective is from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (messages of "chance to pull out the sword" and "I'm sorry to have you pay the sword") is displayed (Fig. 165 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 163) in the above-mentioned second suggestion pattern.

Note that, at the time of FIG. 165 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the operation of the button operation 410 (without the operation promotion effect). It would be good if the sword decoration body 5001 could be operated after the player's interest was once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is effective is generated. ) Can be changed, and the operation means that is effective depending on the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operation effective. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1), the sword decoration 5001), in which the operation validity period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggestion position. Is highly expected to be effective for operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in order to grasp which operation means is effective for operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Then, since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 163) after the operation of the operation means, a series of drop effects are performed from the vertical wiggle movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It can be shown as a production of the game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body will be effective, is not limited to this, and the character is shown during the pre-operation suggestion effect. It may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means for which the operation is effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is lit or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second sword withdrawal state, but also the operation means for which the operation is effective is moved by vibration or the like. You may do it.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation (or pretended to be valid for operation) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggested position. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation of the sword decoration body 5001. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to expect that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that the motivation for operation is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 162 (B)), as in the case of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is viewed from the initial position in front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It may operate in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper portion, and may be moved in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. After that, when the operation valid period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decoration body 5001 to be effective even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation valid period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Perform the production with a pattern. In the production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) that establishes a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. And, based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting a privilege). The degree of expectation for giving a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting benefits when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide another operating means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), this There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for granting the privilege is higher than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for giving the privilege suggested when the operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It will be possible to improve the interest of the game when the production is in the pre-stage where it has not been performed yet and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired effect result (effect result suggesting that the expectation for granting the privilege is high, etc.) does not appear in the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation for another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation-related production. Become.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) having such a directing property. If so, it is possible to execute a common operation-related effect when giving these operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least, as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) in which the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted), at least
-The operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) after the "specific operation-related effect" that can appear even when the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first production mode that generates the valid period (effect reception period) to be performed, and the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled without the production of the "specific operation-related production" being started (the production can be accepted). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) to be performed are prepared, and by executing any of these production modes, the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (effect). It is designed to generate a valid period (production reception period) that can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period in which the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received. Regardless of whether there is a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can accept the effect, it is common (specification) prior to the occurrence of those periods. ) Operation-related effects will be made feasible, so it will be possible to have an interest in whether a specific operation means or another operation means can accept the effects. By performing the operation while the above is performed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the effect, it corresponds to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). The production reception period will be generated, but at least when the production is started, it is about which of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) the production reception period is generated. Should be kept secret. Further, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. It may be possible to indicate whether or not the effect is to be performed (the effect display is displayed), or a plurality of operations are performed within the period after the effect acceptance period occurs, including at the same time as the effect acceptance period occurs. It may be possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) is given the operation opportunity (the effect result display appears), and the operation-related effect is executed until what timing. It can be changed as appropriate.

Hereinafter, some effect modes that can be adopted when carrying out such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanatory examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show the production contents when any of the production reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed, and the common (specific) production is shown. ) Operation-related effects If any of the effect reception periods occurs without being executed, the effect contents may be omitted. However, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is not executed and one of the effect acceptance periods occurs, the effect content is as follows: "The operation for the operation button 410 is performed without the specific operation-related effect being executed. A general effect such as "an operation instruction image for prompting appears or an operation instruction image for prompting an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 appears" can be mentioned. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach effect is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period during which is being executed, or is common during the execution period of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed with each of the effects of each of the other examples described later, and can also be appropriately combined and executed with each of the above-mentioned effects. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each effect of another example described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Therefore, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for each of the different productions described below.

[First production mode]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the production example (the first production mode) to be performed.

In FIG. 166 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 166 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 166 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display is made to move within each. In this way, the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed simultaneously in the display area by displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means at the same time. It is suggested that the operation for any of those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 166 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166 (b) has progressed, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "operate" and a production reception) prompting the user to operate any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) while each is stopped and displayed in the area. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears to indicate the production status.

According to such an effect mode, although it is possible to receive an operation on at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to make it unclear which of the above can be accepted for production. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 166 (c)) in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is capable of accepting the effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is capable of accepting the effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this production example (first production mode), a plurality of operation means are performed before the operation for at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) can be received. Common (specific) operation-related as shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and 166 (c) for a period until the operation for at least one of (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) can be accepted for production. I try to perform the production.

Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and 166 (c). Absent. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is after that (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It suffices if it occurs in (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can accept the effect. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted for production. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time, and the button image BTG and sword decoration are not necessarily displayed at the same time. It is possible that none of the image SYGs appear and an effect image different from any of them appears as a specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, there is a case where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration body 5001. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution (start of production) of specific operation-related effects to the occurrence of those effect reception periods, depending on the case where the reception period occurs.

In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation for any of the operation means ("Operate". , Etc.), or always operate a specific operating means among the plurality of operating means, regardless of how the plurality of operating means are allowed to receive the effect. May be displayed to prompt the user. In short, as an operation instruction, the same production mode appears in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is possible for the production and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is possible for the production. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production.

Further, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 166 (c), it is kept secret as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated to receive the production. , Even when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting the production, and when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not capable of accepting the production (in any of the first to third situations described later). However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a light emitting state to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the sword decoration body 5001 side to provide the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect situation in which the image shown in FIG. 166 (c) appears is only the operation of the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where the production can be accepted, or in the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for the production, or the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for the sword decoration 5001 Both of them are set to be in one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs among these a plurality of situations, the first situation (the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) is given. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate at which

Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in any of the first situation (operation button 410) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). (Whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or in either the second situation (sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed (when the "GG" in the figure is advanced), the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 167 (d) and 167 (f)). Is supposed to be done.

In the operation-time effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 167 (d) and 167 (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 performs a predetermined display effect. ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided by providing an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. , The degree of expectation for granting benefits may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time production according to this production example (first production mode), the production is accepted by the operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 167 (d) and 167 (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute the control to put the operating means into the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167 (d), even though the operation button 410 was operated by the player, the operation was performed in response to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control to reciprocate the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that is not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which the effect reception is generated as a result of the player's operation on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 side operation effect is executed, the "operation" is performed. Even if the sword decoration body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the production reception may have occurred and the production on the sword decoration body 5001 side may have been executed. It will be possible to appeal the possibility to the player.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 167 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword pulling operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in the sword delivery position according to the production reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the sword withdrawal position (sword withdrawal state) instead of returning to the sword withdrawal state. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword delivery position (sword delivery state) to the sword removal position (sword removal state) based on the operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword removal state. Occasionally, a production will be performed during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed between the operation button 410 side operation effect and the sword decoration body 5001 side operation operation effect, the sword decoration body at that time By confirming the operating state of the 5001, it becomes possible to feel that the operation-time effect caused by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 side is being executed.

Then, after the operation-time effect (FIGS. 167 (d) and (f)) is performed in this way, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 167 (e). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side is available. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined time elapses (at a stage before the reach effect is started), the sword decoration body 5001 is not operated (sword delivery position (sword delivery state)). It will be controlled to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decorative body 5001, the electric power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001) is used. Regardless of whether 5001) is allowed to accept the effect or not, the common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) effect is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 can receive the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can receive the effect respectively. It will be possible to give an operation opportunity in a state where it is kept secret.

In this production example (first production mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can receive the production, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is the production. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 can accept the effect without being able to accept it, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of receiving production, the sword decoration body 5001 is said to be capable of receiving production. You will be able to mislead as if you weren't there. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the production with a relatively high expectation is performed when the production is accepted. It is expected that it will be interesting to know which operation means should be operated when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, when the operation means of the side that cannot accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is exhausted by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the above operation is performed. Although the effect reception required for executing the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is to be performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection itself. Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. With such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is obtained between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although it is made to be executed, these operation-time effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation-time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect-time effect performed by the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 may emit light. , A unique production sound is generated, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received.

Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The production reception period is not set when the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) and the production reception period related to the occurrence of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001 is used, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration body 5001, the operation button 410). In either case, when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 166 (c), it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect. That is, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for the first operation means is performed while the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set, While another effect mode is executed as an operation-time effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed and the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (No. 1). When there is an operation for the first operation means (when the effect reception period for the second operation means is set), another effect mode is not executed as the operation time effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be produced. In short, when the effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. It is set for both the operating means and the first operating means. When another effect mode appears as the operation mode, the second operation is performed instead of causing the other effect mode to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation mode on the second operating means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as an effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed is the situation where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used. The first situation where only the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted for the production, the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 It is set so that both the operation and the operation for are corresponding to any of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is displayed when the effect reception is performed, whereas in the third situation, the operation time is different from that of both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or the above-mentioned other effect mode (different from the operation-time effect of the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the above-mentioned third situation is not always necessary.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-mentioned production example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 167 (f), the player does not perform the operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 167 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be enabled. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operating means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control to operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side is set at an earlier stage than before returning to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end the operating state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source. Needless to say, the drive source provided corresponding to these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Further, as the "operation" in the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) generated by such a drive source, modes such as "movement", "rotation", "swing", and "vibration" are exemplified. This is not limited to the production example, and the same applies to other production examples.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 168 to 171 are executed as an effect showing the process of the specific operation-related effect until one of the first effect result and the second effect result appears. It is suggested that when the first effect result appears as a result of the above, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the production example (second production mode) which suggests that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs.

In FIG. 168 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 168 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 168 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed simultaneously in the image, and the lightning bolt image IZ is depicted acting on those images BTG and SYG. In this way, the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed simultaneously in the display area by displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means at the same time. It is suggested that the operation for any of those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 168 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168 (b) is advanced, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed as effects. An effect is performed in which the other party is pushed out of the display area by pushing each other within the display area of the device 1600.

That is, in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) related to this effect example (second effect mode), "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG press each other, and these images It is executed as an effect such as "Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area", and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this production example (second production mode), the production shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and 168 (c) is either "the production reception period for the operation button 410 or the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001". Corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods" even when

The figure on the left side of FIG. 168 (c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area in a predominant situation, and the figure on the right side shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts how the situation is predominant to remain in the territory. In a specific operation-related production, the situation of such inferiority / superiority changes from moment to moment with the passage of time.

FIG. 169 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c). Is being performed (first production result). When the content of the effect is developed, the period for accepting the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 169 (d)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the effect (the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs).

At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays (character display such as "press" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is in a state where the effect reception is possible (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, the operation of the operation button 410 is promoted by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 to the light emitting state.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is advanced through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c), etc.). The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 168 (a)) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than that.

Further, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 169 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. Percentage of the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that when the effect (FIG. 169 (d)) in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity is performed without going through. Is desirable to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the effectary delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In FIG. 169 (e), as a result of performing an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. It depicts how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e) is the same as that shown in FIG. 167 (d). That is, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 executes a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”). It has become. At this time, even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is placed in the first position and the second position according to the reception of the production. The same applies to the fact that control for reciprocating operation with the position (control for setting the operating state) can be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears according to the effect reception. Then, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Then, after such an operation-time effect (FIG. 169 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 169 (f). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, the reach effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed. Control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-operated state (sword delivery state)) at a stage earlier than that. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decorative body 5001, the electric power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 170 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is in the display area. A production that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second production result). When the content of the effect is developed, the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 170 (g)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the production (the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs). ..

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display (character display such as "draw the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is possible to receive the effect (during the effect reception period on the sword decoration body 5001) among the plurality of operation means. In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit having the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be made to emit light) is set to the light emitting state. By doing so, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is encouraged.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is progressed through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c), etc.). The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 168 (a)) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than in the case, and the expectation for granting benefits is lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed after a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

In FIG. 170 (h), as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed in response to the operation. It depicts how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation-time effect shown in FIG. 170 (h) is basically the same as the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, a production mode such as "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the production reception, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. "Chance !!" may be displayed. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears according to the effect reception. By doing so, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 170 (h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 ( (Change from stage 0 form shown in FIG. 161 to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and depending on which of these modes appears, the degree of expectation for granting benefits such as big hits The height has come to be suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 170 (i), even if the operation-time effect (FIG. 170 (h)) is completed and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword ornament 5001 is not returned to the sword-delivered state, but is maintained in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although not shown, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the sword-drawn state, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword delivery state (during the period when the reach production is performed, etc.). The operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and in that case, the operation time effect according to the operation to the sword-delivered state can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is given an operation opportunity in two stages, and the first stage operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) and the second stage operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed according to each operation (operation to the sword delivery state), not only when the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is being operated, but also the first stage. It is expected that the game interest for the operation will be maintained favorably even during the non-operation period from the operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) to the second stage operation (operation to the sword delivery state). Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). Further, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation are different from each other.

Further, when the operation-time effect (FIG. 170 (h)) corresponding to the first stage operation is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the sword-drawn state, and is not maintained in the sword-drawn state. In that case, it is desirable not to give the second stage operation opportunity. Whether to maintain the sword ornament 5001 at a position (sword withdrawal state) that allows the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state) can be given in the operation time production according to the first stage operation. It may be executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not. That is, when the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state and is returned to the sword-delivered state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state). It is clear that it will be. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

If the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state as a result of performing the operation-time effect (FIG. 170 (h)) according to the first stage operation, when a predetermined time elapses (reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword delivery state)) before the start of the operation. However, in this case, the operating state (reciprocating) of the sword decorative body 5001 is at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the movement (or maintenance in the sword-drawn state). Further, with respect to the sword decorative body 5001, the electric power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 171 (j), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 169 (d). Therefore, an effect is performed that depicts how the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this production example (second production mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the production shown in FIG. 168 (c) is performed, the production shown in FIG. 169 (d) or the production shown in FIG. 170 (g). Either the effect shown in FIG. 171 or the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) appears. It is said that which effect content appears has been determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), unlike the case of the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d), the effect performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), the instruction display (character display such as "press" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation is not displayed, and also in the point that FIG. 169 (d) is displayed. ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the production acceptance period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes recognizable that there is.

In FIG. 171 (k), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in the mist MY, and even the outline description thereof is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), all the effect elements (button image BTG) suggesting that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect are removed. Therefore, although it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) that the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) appears. As a result, it becomes possible to raise a suspicion as to whether or not the production reception period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Even in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the mode of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitively shown which of the plurality of operating means the production reception period will occur is reduced. It suggests that.

In FIG. 171 (i), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the appearance of the sword is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, it is suggested that the outer shape of the mist MY may cause an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410. You will be able to.

Further, also in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with FIG. 171 (k), and until it is definitively shown which of the plurality of operating means the effect reception period occurs. It suggests that the remaining time of is even less.

Then, in this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. 171 (i) is further advanced and the mist MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 170. The production shown in (g) is performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even if this is the case (Fig. 169 (d), Fig. 171 (j)), there is a possibility that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, so the game interest should be maintained. Will be able to.

In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 169 (d), 171 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning bolt image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 is achieved. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and this will also make it possible to maintain the interest of the game.

In this production example (second production mode), the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY when the production shown in FIG. 171 (j) appears (FIG. 171 (k)), and further. When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 170 (g) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that the production suggests that the production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is not necessarily close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 171 (j) and 171 (k) also hides which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, even in the production situation shown in FIG. 170 (h) in the above production example (second production mode) after providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, FIG. 169 (e) Similar to the effect situation shown in the above, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be enabled. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operating means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source. Needless to say, the drive source provided corresponding to these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Further, as the "operation" in the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) generated by such a drive source, modes such as "movement", "rotation", "swing", and "vibration" are exemplified. This is not limited to the production example, and the same applies to other production examples.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 172 to 175 are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) that is basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but is different from the second effect mode. Is.

In FIG. 172 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 172 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 172 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be ready for production.

In particular, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated respectively. As a result, it is easy to make it easy for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 to be able to receive the effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is made recognizable. Here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, as compared with the case where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated to the operation positions when the operation opportunity is given. I try to operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, it is also an operation means in which time is still left before the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed. Regardless of this, each of these operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left before the production reception period occurs, or the situation where the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed, the game entertainment for those operations can be enjoyed. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is produced by each operation (FIG. 172 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the effect display on the effect display device 1600. After the start, basically, the same production progress as the above-mentioned second production mode is performed.

For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 172 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. , The production content is as described with reference to FIG. 168 (b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are in a state of being operated from the initial positions (positions when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are located at positions different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. In addition, it is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operating position when the operating opportunity is given.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and the operation opportunity is immediately given, but it is movable. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to at least the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related production is further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is positioned in a different position (for example, an intermediate position) as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, and the effect reception period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the extension of the operation-related production. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It will be possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has a button image BTG "movable operation button". Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to "410", the production content is as described with reference to FIG. 168 (c). However, in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are placed at the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

In the effect shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 172 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 show the mode when they are in the initial position (non-driven position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, by intentionally making the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, their matching will be achieved in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect to be performed (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

Further, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "at the operation position". Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 169 (d).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operating position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), first of all, "a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a manner of moving to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed". After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character display such as "press" or effect) that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is performed. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 will be different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the deviation of those modes will be filled soon. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), the effect shown in FIG. 173 (f) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 169 (e) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position). In addition, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position.

After such an operation effect (FIG. 173 (f)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 173 (g). Is also as described with reference to FIG. 169 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) is performed, the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is an operation of the sword decoration body 5001. Except that the instruction content regarding is "pushed in" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", the production as explained with reference to FIG. 170 (g). It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in an operating state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in an operating state. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration body 5001 is moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

As the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode of moving to the operation position)". First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (characters such as "push"" that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decorative image SYG is different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes can be prevented. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be filled (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), the effect shown in FIG. 174 (i) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 170 (h) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. The sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an operation effect (FIG. 174 (i)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 174 (j). Is as described with reference to FIG. 169 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "at the operation position". Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 171 (j).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operating position. It is suggested that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and the possibility that the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 still occurs is left even by setting such an operation state. You will be able to do it.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k), the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 171 (k) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operating at different positions.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 171 (l) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the operating position than the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the initial position.

When the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that the production suggests that the production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is not necessarily close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 175 (k) and 175 (l) also hides which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the above explanatory example, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to receive the effect during the valid period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect is received. Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (FIGS. 167 (d), 169 (e), etc.). However, it suffices as long as the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is put into an operating state, and the operating state includes, for example, a mode of moving to another place and staying, a mode of vibrating, and the like. It is possible to adopt. In addition, even if the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated and the production reception is performed during the valid period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the production reception is performed according to the production reception. It is desirable to put the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed into an operating state (vibration, etc.).

In addition, regarding the effect of putting the "operation unit on the side where the operation is not performed" into the operating state, the post-operation effect according to the operation is "expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears," 0 "," Appears when executed in a "high mode" (including "100"), and the post-operation effect according to the operation is "expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, including" 0 "and" 100 "). It may not appear when performed in a "low mode".

Further, when the post-operation effect is performed by operating one of the two operation units (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001), the "operation unit on the other side that has not been operated" is also put into the operating state. , When the post-operation effect is performed by the operation on the other side, the "operation unit on one side where the operation is not performed" may not be put into the operating state.

In this production example (third production mode), the driving source that applies the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies the driving force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different driving sources. It may be the same drive source.

In each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, when "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, it is basic. Is given an operation opportunity only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the operation time effect on the button side is performed. Become. In addition, when "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating sword decoration body 5001" appears as a result of the production in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. Of the body 5001, the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received, the operation time effect on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the effect at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and the effect at the time of failure (do not operate the specific decorative member SDY) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot judgment. While it is supposed that either one will appear, even in the operation time production on the sword character side, success production (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and failure production based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit judgment (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated), and the contents of their production are the same. Therefore, when an operation opportunity is given to an operation means on a side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, in the operation-time effect on the button side and the operation-time effect on the sword accessory side, in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the same as each other. It may be the content.

Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is decided to perform an effect as to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is used. On the other hand, operation opportunities are given. However, there are cases where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the effect content that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means regardless of which effect result appears, such as pushing each other with each other. It may be.

For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-delivered state is brought into the sword-drawn state, or an operation in which the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-drawn state is brought into the sword-delivered state) with respect to one operating means It is possible to give an effect as to whether or not the operation opportunity is given by (operation), and the operation opportunity may be given to the operation means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in a state different from that of the sword-delivered state and the sword-drawn state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-delivered state or the sword-drawn state when the effect result of making the sword is shown.

In addition, when the symbol variation in the pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the symbol variation is in the pending state (digested before this). It is also possible to perform the effect suggested from (within the execution period of the symbol change). According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is not given are provided. For both, it will be possible to sustain the game interest related to operation for a longer period of time. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in the pending state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is used. It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as a specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button image BTG, Although it was decided to display the sword decoration image SYG), these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect reception period for the operation button 410 or the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 may occur after that. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the production reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001, those operations are performed until the production reception period occurs. It will be possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period will occur. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and sword decoration. It is possible that none of the image SYGs appear and an effect image different from any of them appears as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed at the same time is adopted while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is completed. Either BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. Then, in this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. By executing the specific image (for example, lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) as the effect content, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect may be executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning bolt falls on one side of the rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock and the other side. By making the sword decorative image SYG appear from the rock when lightning strikes the rock on the side, it is possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 169 (d) and 170 (g). .. Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one rock, and when the lightning bolt falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Therefore, it is also possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 169 (d) and 170 (g). In short, it is desirable to advance the production as the production content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the second and third production modes described above, and in another example thereof, there are specific cases where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of the effects) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. Further, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of production modes are prepared as specific operation-related productions, and a production reception period during which a specific production (operation-time production) can be generated depends on which of these production modes the production is performed. The ratio set for the specific operating means among the plurality of operating means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation with respect to the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (such as FIG. 169 (e)), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time based on the time when the operation was performed. It may be. However, it is not based on the time when the operation is performed, and depending on at which timing of the production reception period the operation is performed, from the operation of the operation means on the non-operated side to the end of the operation. It is desirable to make the time lengths different.

That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated and the remaining time of the effect reception period is short, the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player struggled with whether to operate the operation means on the side that was not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation during the production reception period (depending on the high possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that did not operate is operated and then the operation is terminated. Time length up to ("Even if the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect may have been executed." By making the length of time that appeals to the player different), it becomes possible to maintain the game interest appropriately.

In addition, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. May be made to work.

Further, between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. A predetermined effect suggesting the ratio at which the effect image (sword decorative image SYG) is displayed may be performed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body (here, a specific movable body) that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. , The specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed by operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY). Desirable to enable.

In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect result between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.). An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is intentionally generated only on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means. As a result, it becomes possible to create a special production mode as if the production result is shown and the production is completed even though the production is in the middle of a specific operation-related production, and the production is performed. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby during the period. In addition, when an operation for one side of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with high expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the degree of expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game interest when the player understands that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related production. ..

In addition, when the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects related to a plurality of operation means are in the middle of being performed, and the effect reception period is intentionally generated only for the operation buttons 410 of those operation means, the effect reception period is within the effect reception period. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, for example). Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) appears as the effect result, the expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the effectability as the specific operation-related effect between the time when the specific operation-related effect is started and the time when the effect result is shown. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side with a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is granted more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production reception periods, normally, when an operation is performed by the player, the production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed before. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

However, even if it is set to the automatic button effect state described later, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while a specific operation-related effect is being performed. In the case of generating the above-mentioned special operation effect, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (so that the automatic button function does not function). After that, even if an effect acceptance period for any of the above-mentioned plurality of operation means occurs as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect acceptance period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed (so that the automatic button function functions) without doing so. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function functions, and it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be expected to suppress the decrease in.

It should be noted that the setting change related to the on / off of the automatic button effect state can be changed not only during the period when the symbol change is not executed but also during the period when the symbol change is executed by operating the operation button 410, for example. It is desirable to be. For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated when the automatic button effect state is off, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the automatic button can be changed. When the effect state is on, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, the operation time effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the automatic button effect state is set. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an operation effect by an operation by the player while maintaining the on state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the effect reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation for the operation button 410 as well as the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation is performed for the other operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state to cause a change in the effect being executed. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different depending on whether the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, a button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 or a sword decoration body 5001 is imitated. It was decided to give an operation opportunity corresponding to the displayed sword decorative image SYG, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is given to the operation button 410. The first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as the period) is given and the operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword decoration body 5001 when the second display mode is displayed. Any display content may be adopted.

For example, in the above-mentioned second and third production modes, the production image CG (first) shown in FIG. 176 (a) is replaced with the production image shown in FIGS. 169 (d) and 173 (e). The display mode) is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (b) is displayed instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 170 (g) and 174 (h). May be good. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the background image other than that (the part displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started). Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (almost the entire effect in the display area). Since it can be replaced), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) in the display area shown in FIGS. 169 (d), 170 (g), 173 (e), and 174 (h). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the granting of operation opportunities is performed using almost the entire display area (until other effect images such as the background part where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). By doing so, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable for operation.

In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (a), the first display mode has a shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is possessed. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly suggest which operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), it is not necessary to prepare the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 itself as an effect image. , It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape and a part of the design of the operating means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG It may also be performed with an effect suggesting a different degree of expectation depending on which of (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Further, a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and it depends on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

Further, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (preferably, it is desirable that the effect situation has a relatively high degree of expectation). When the operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect, is executed) (it is desirable that the effect is a relatively low expectation situation). It may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). If it is displayed, the effect acceptance period is applied not only to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, but also to another operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) that does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. In the production situation where the expectation is relatively high, it becomes possible to give a different kind of fun to the operation than when the button image BTG appears, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. Another operating means may be a different operating means from the sword decoration body 5001.

In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect reception period. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that the production situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the sword decorative image SYG appears in the production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, when the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means that is occurring at the same time is also terminated so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation for the operation means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means may be terminated so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is performed. Even though an operating means other than the means is being operated, the operation-time effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operating means (operation button 410) are operated may be executed.

If a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even if an effect reception period occurs for the operation means of, the same operation time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to make it work (make the automatic button function work). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing the specific operation-related effect when the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is used. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means different from the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is provided even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when the operation is performed is executed, and the special operation effect that may appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is executed is not executed.

However, during the effect reception period, another effect before the specific timing at which the operation-time effect (effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function is different. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and a specific timing has arrived. However, it is desirable that the effect during operation (the effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect state is continued in the on state even after the effect reception period ends. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then each of the above-described effects (operation-time effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). When the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). In addition to the operation means corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (sword decoration body 5001), another operation means not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (for example, the operation button 410) is also subjected to the effect reception period. It becomes.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes, and in another example thereof, as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" or If any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) that imitates the sword decoration body 5001" is displayed, and if the production is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, it is relative. The first operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggesting that the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make one of the second operation-time effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate). That is, in this case, when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the degree of expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content suggesting the above, will be executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period generated after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first). The effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001 when the operation button 410 is executed based on the effect reception for the operation button 410 when the display mode) is displayed and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when it was executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side having a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image (sword decoration) on the side with relatively high expectations as a result of the effect in which the specific operation-related effect is performed. Compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, there is no demerit in the effect result, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the timer effect described above (FIG. 118), it is possible to set "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes targeted by the timer). That is, in the timer effect for which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" is the effect target, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. This makes it possible to enjoy the production during operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when the operation for the operation means is performed, the effect result is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Allow any of the unfavorable production results to appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result advantageous to the player is higher than that of the case where the effect target of the timer effect is not set. It is more desirable to be. The ratio may be 100%.

In this regard, when an effect pattern for executing a timer effect for the effect of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001)" appears, the "operation opportunity for the operation means" that is the effect target appears. A specific operation-related effect using "grant" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decorative image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears is executed.

According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when it is played.

However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) until just before that. However, there is a concern that it will not be possible to understand which production should be watched, distracted attention, and conversely reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 177. , Until the count display of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation-related effect" is set to the unexecuted state, and the count value is set. It is desirable to start the production of the "specific operation-related effect" after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0").

FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001). The following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned notice side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processes according to the timer effect.

In FIG. 177 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

In FIG. 177 (b), the timer effect is started (here, the countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (a). It shows the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer effect related to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (1), while it remains unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count "0") is reached so that it is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" as the count value is displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be produced. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode). A specific operation-related effect as to which of and is displayed will be executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), those effects are sometimes performed. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in a series, it becomes possible to enjoy each different production.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") when the specific operation-related effect is in the unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize whether it was done as a game, and the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), between the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) and the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect that suggests an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) that the timer effect is intended for is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first displays “sword”. This suggests that the timer production was intended to "provide an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration body 5001".

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“Katana delivery”). In the production situation where the player recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", the production of "specific operation-related production" will be started, so that the game entertainment can be improved. become. When the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the count display (count "0") is displayed when the effect display device 1600 displays "sword". It may be displayed continuously.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the sword decoration body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, the count is “0”). (Reciprocating motion in the vertical direction) is performed, and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration body 5001" is the target of the timer effect. I try to suggest it.

It should be noted that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is counted not only when the timer effect targets "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001" but also when another effect is the production target. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is intended for, but functions as an effect suggesting that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the production to be the production target is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is said that the effect that suggests the type of effect is being executed at the same time as or before the start of the effect that suggests the type of effect, and that the effect that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is targeting is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 177 (d) shows an effect situation in which the “specific operation-related effect” is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type for which the timer effect is the effect target is hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is also in a completed state. However, it is important to execute the effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended for, and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

Then, after the "specific operation-related production" is started in this way, the production progresses in the order of FIGS. 177 (e) to 177 (h), and the contents of these productions are described in FIG. 168 (c). ), FIGS. 170 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 172 (d), 174 (h) to (j), which are substantially the same as those described above, and thus details are omitted.

As the timer effect performed in connection with the specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 177 or the timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made viable. That is, in another timer effect, the point that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 177, but the specific operation-related effect is produced. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, "0") according to the start timing (strictly, a little earlier than this), and the specific operation-related effect is to be continued even after the effect is started. It has become. In this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given (the privilege is given (the second display mode). Expectations for (big hit) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but when the effect situation in which the effect is developed at the same time appears, the specific operation-related effect is produced. Regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, their effect value is the same (the degree of expectation for the privilege grant (big hit) is the same. The same). That is, in this case, since the directing property of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously produced, any of the effects is produced. It will be possible to avoid the situation where the person cannot understand whether to pay attention to the timer and is distracted. However, in order to improve the interest of the game, when a production pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect appear at the same time appears, a privilege is given as compared with the case where the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first suggests the type of the effect target (in this case, the display suggesting the type of the effect target. Although "sword delivery") is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect object as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is targeted by the timer among a plurality of effects that can be targeted by the timer, the display suggesting which effect is the target of the timer effect may not be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, the operation opportunity is given to any of the operation means prior to giving the operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it would be granted. However, the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production reception period). Does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production reception period). An effect pattern such as performing a second precursor effect may appear. When performing these precursory effects (first precursory effect, second precursory effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the time required is set to be shorter. It is desirable to reduce the degree of expectation for granting benefits when a production appears in order to enhance the interest of the game when a specific operation-related production is performed.

Here, as the precursor effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) that imitates the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears, for example, fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of being stuck. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer, behind the specific image) that is difficult to see due to overlapping with the specific image. After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, reducing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It can be executed as an effect to be exposed to the image. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursory effect will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, blue button image BTG, red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for granting benefits (big hit), As the precursory effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed progresses, it becomes possible to have an interest in which display mode the button image BTG appears.

It should be noted that the first precursor effect that appears when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration is provided. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that each is executed as a different production content. Further, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect is different.

Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, the effect is performed as an effect related to the addition of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept that includes. Then, with respect to the precursory effect including the "specific operation-related effect", as described below with reference to FIG. 178, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursory effect is performed in any of the effect modes. By suggesting how long the production reception period that occurs in response to the precursory effect is, depending on what was done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the precursory effect is performed. It is more desirable to plan.

FIG. 178 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type of the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effects A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (a) (precursor effect A), the precursor effect A is started when the first predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect When A is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (a) (precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T1 that you have will occur.

In the production reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect A. ) Is displayed. Then, when the production reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T1, the above-mentioned operation-time production (for example, FIGS. 167 (d), (f)) is performed based on the production reception. , FIG. 169 (e), FIG. 170 (h), FIG. 173 (f), FIG. 174 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the second predetermined time elapses, not when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. Precursor production B1 is being produced. This precursor effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) when an operation opportunity is given (specific operation). It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is to occur.

In the production reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1. Will be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the above-mentioned operation time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor production B1 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having a time length (here, a short time length) different from that of T1. This suggests how long the effect reception period generated in response to the precursor effect is, depending on which mode (precursor effect A, precursor effect B1) the precursor effect is performed. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment taste when the precursory effect is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (c) (precursor effect B2), the precursor effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. Like the precursor effect B1, this precursor effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the time when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Those that are not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 Production reception period) T3 is to be generated.

In addition, even in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (character display such as "press" and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 are displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the production reception is performed by the operation for a specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T3, the operation time production different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the production reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor production B2 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (c). (Validity period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even though the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low expectation for giving a privilege (big hit) is executed, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. Since it is suggested that a long production reception period (valid period) T3 will occur, a production situation will be created as if a specific operation-related production was performed, and the precursor production B2 It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment taste when it is performed. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege differs between when the production reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the production reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

It should be noted that the precursory effects B1 and B2 can be specified by making the same effect mode appear from the start of the effect until the timing in the middle of the effect, and making a different effect mode appear after the timing has passed. The operation means of the above may be provided with a color rendering property as to whether to generate the effect reception period (valid period) T2 or the effect reception period (valid period) T3. However, it is not always necessary to have such a directing property, and even when the precursory effects B1 and B2 are started to be produced, the effect is started when a different time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. Alternatively, the precursor effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths from each other.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (d) (precursor effect C), the precursor effect C is started when the third predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect is executed. When C is executed, the effect reception period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (d) (precursor effect C), when the precursor effect C is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T4 that you have will occur.

Even in the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect C. ) Is displayed. Then, when the production reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T4, the above-mentioned operation-time production (for example, FIGS. 167 (d), (f)) is performed based on the production reception. , FIG. 169 (e), FIG. 170 (h), FIG. 173 (f), FIG. 174 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor production C is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (d). (Validity period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as that of the precursor production A is generated, the game entertainment taste when the precursor production C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

In the production example shown in FIG. 178, the production reception period is associated with the types of precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship with the length of the production reception period (valid period). The length of (validity period) is suggested. However, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2, etc.) having a predetermined time length to be different for each type of precursory production, the production reception period (valid period) ) May be suggested.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is subjected to. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operating means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operating means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173 (e), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, but the button image BTG is also displayed in the operating position in accordance with this. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operating position (sword withdrawal state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as the state in which the sword decoration image SYG is operated in the operation position (sword withdrawal state). Has been done.

However, a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, button image BTG) that is imitated as it looks. If this happens, the range of the production will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the production even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high expectation is being performed, and the interest in the game will be reduced. I am concerned.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is described below with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180. Regarding BTG), it is desirable not to necessarily express the state of the specific operating means at that time as it is, but to display it as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and an effect content when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

First, FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (c) show the content of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of hold is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), it corresponds only to the sword decoration body 5001 side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the “specific operation-related production”. Assuming that the precursory effect is executed, it becomes recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity. In addition, in the precursor effect (the same applies to the precursor effect in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given soon is made, the effect image imitating the operation means. Does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity from the time when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

In the precursory effect shown in FIG. 179 (a), the sword decorative image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation and the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity, the sword decoration image SYG, which has a low expectation as the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image SYG of the degree of expectation. Which of the high sword decorative images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 179 (b) shows the final production result of the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura, and as a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively highly expected production situation. It will be suggested that there will be a production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 179 (b), the final effect suggesting that the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura does not change to another effect image (sword decorative image SYGa, etc.) is displayed. ..

FIG. 179 (c) shows an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“pushing in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state accordingly. I try to change the state to the state. When the production reception is performed within the production reception period, the production at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword delivery state. Be maintained. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursory effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, here). , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword removal state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) that imitates the operation means on the operation target side and the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side Are all in a state of being stopped at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, FIGS. 179 (d) to 179 (g) show the contents of the effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of hold is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 179 (d), if the precursor production as the "specific operation-related production" is started, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 It will be recognizable that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the crab.

FIG. 179 (e) shows a production situation in which the precursory production as a “specific operation-related production” has progressed and the production result has appeared. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity as a production result of the "specific operation-related production". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 179 (e), a final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG, etc.) is displayed.

FIG. 179 (f) shows an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“pushing in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword removal state.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 179 (f) and 179 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-drawn state during the production reception period (sword decoration image SYG). The sword ornament 5001 is designed to slowly and continuously perform upward displacement until the end of the production reception period, and is in a different state from each other. I am trying to do it.

In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration body 5001, the production reception will be performed when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sword delivery state. A predetermined operation is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword delivery state. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used for the production. On the other hand, the other side does not work and can play the role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 179 (f) and 179 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period, but the sword is not limited to this. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated to stop the sword decoration body 5001.

As described above, in the production example shown in FIG. 179, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed during the production reception period (FIG. 179 (c)) that occurs without going through a specific operation-related production. In contrast to the stopped state, during the effect reception period (FIG. 179 (f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. On the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, the range of the production can be expanded, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, the operation is performed when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect. While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Either the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a precursor effect other than a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect of which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decorative image SYG imitating the sword ornament 5001 appears When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode having a relatively high degree of expectation or a display mode having a relatively low degree of expectation. It will be possible to further provide the directing effect of. The method may be appropriately adopted in each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, in addition to the production example of FIG. 179.

Then, in the case of giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is produced as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it appears or can be recognized, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operating means is outlined and only the outline is shown. Make the display state recognizable) appear as the production progresses. After that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white outline of the effect image imitating the operation means). It is desirable that the state is released so that the color can be confirmed) in sequence as the production progresses. Further, when the button image BTG is displayed through such an effect progress, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation under a predetermined condition (for example, an operating means). After making the imitated production image white out, etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is recognizable that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the production result of the specific operation-related production. To a state where it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG is highly expected (for example, the sword decorative image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). It is also possible to generate an effect pattern that further advances the effect. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white state of the sword decorative image SYG). To make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), the display mode is higher than the display mode on the low expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

180 (a) to 180 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 179 (d) to 179 (g) as an effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 180 (a), the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the precursor effect has a shield (button image BTG) that imitates the operation button 410. The first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the second character holding the sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001). It is depicted that they are facing each other, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am trying to do it.

FIG. 180 (b) shows a production situation in which the production result of the precursory production as the “specific operation-related production” appears. In this production situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (sword decoration) is not displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. The effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 180 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 176 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is hidden), and is specific. While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) are the relevant. It is suddenly replaced with an effect image (display image shown in FIG. 180 (b)) as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

FIGS. 180 (c) to 180 (e) show an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 180 (c). An instruction display (a character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the sword decoration body 5001 to operate.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts the operation from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 180 (d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state only after a relatively short time has passed since the production reception period started. It is designed to do. After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in a sword-drawn state at least until the end of the production reception period, and the player (Operation from the sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state) will be waited for.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 180 (c) to 180 (e), the movement (swing in the rotation direction) is completely different from the movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration body 5001. In the lowering operation), the second character is depicted as swinging down the sword decoration image SYG, and even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, the sword decoration image SYG continues. It is designed to operate. The sword decoration image SYG related to this production example loops a series of displays from the start (FIG. 180 (c)) to the end (FIG. 180 (e)) of the swing-down operation within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated by processing.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the loop processing, and the display change progresses by the amount according to the passage of time. Further, the sword ornament 5001 is also brought into a sword-pulled state while a series of displays from the start (FIG. 180 (c)) to the end (FIG. 180 (e)) of the swing-down operation are performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will be maintained in the sword-drawn state without being affected by it. It should be noted that when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sword-delivered state within the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and the predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, and the above-mentioned The loop processing is completed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword delivery state. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The movement modes (movements that play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation (movements until moving to the operation position), loop movements used for the production) are different from each other, and the movements of the sword decoration body 5001 are completed. Even after that, the sword decoration image SYG will continue its operation without ending. As a result, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 180 (c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( It will be possible to expand the range of the production, such as making it feasible by continuing the background), and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, the effect content (display in which the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 180 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is performed. The effect (FIGS. 180 (c) to (e)) is executed when the effect reception period occurs by changing both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) that imitate the operation means are specified differently from each other under the display of the dedicated background (full moon). Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image) and the image), it is possible to improve the effectability during the production reception period. In this sense, even in the precursory production, it is possible to perform the production using at least one of the production image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a directing connection between them to further improve the directing effect. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes having different expectations for granting benefits, and may be displayed by any of the display modes.

In addition, in the precursory production as a specific operation-related production or the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as those productions, and the production reception is performed according to which of the production modes appears. It is also possible to suggest whether or not a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time production when the production reception is performed during the period. The background image that appears when the precursory effect is performed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 180, when a precursor production as a specific operation-related production is performed, the production reception is performed by changing both the production content and the background image appearing in the precursor production. Although it was decided to execute the effect within the period, the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect (for a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means (or in a specific operation mode among a plurality of operation modes). ) When the production reception period occurs in the form of changing both the production content and the background image that appeared in the precursor production when the dedicated precursor production when the operation opportunity is given) is being performed. You may try to perform the production. The point is, "It is possible to generate an operation-related effect (precursor effect) related to the operation of the operation means, and as the operation-related effect (precursor effect), the effect reception for the first effect is performed by the operation by the player. It is said that at least one operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect reception is performed for a second effect different from the first effect due to an operation by the player can be generated, and is displayed in the first operation-related effect. The first operation promotion image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation promotion image is not yet displayed is continuously displayed, and is related to the second operation. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed according to changing the background image when the second operation promotion image is not yet displayed to another background image. " All you need is. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image do not have to be the same image, and for example, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, the gauge display, or "press!" Or "deliver the sword!" It is possible to adopt it as appropriate, such as displaying comments. Further, the "first production" and the "second production" may also be different post-operation productions. For example, the "first operation-related production in which the production reception for the first production is performed" includes the production reception. It is possible to exemplify which mode appears as a conversation notice when the conversation is made, and as the "second operation-related production in which the production reception for the second production is performed", the production reception is performed. It is possible to exemplify as an effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates at that time. At this time, regardless of which mode appears as a conversation notice, the production design is such that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears (including 100%) is higher when the specific decorative member SDY operates. It is desirable to do. Further, for "the second operation-related production in which the production reception for the second production is performed", refer to FIGS. 142, 212 to 215, 217 to 220, 223, 250, 253, and the like. It may be executed as one of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described later. On the other hand, regarding the "first operation-related effect in which the effect reception for the first effect is performed", the operation reception effect (under BGM non-suppression) described later with reference to FIGS. 216, 222, 224, 249 and the like. It may be executed as one of the operation reception effects). In addition, each of these different examples of the operation reception effect, which will be described later, may be appropriately adopted. Further, the background image "continuous display" does not necessarily have to be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing a river flowing or a duel between characters. It also includes those in which the projected range of such a still image or moving image is displayed in a sliding manner (displayed in a manner in which the coordinates move). That is, it can be said that the background image is "continuously displayed" if it is displayed in a time-series or coordinated connection in the projected depiction content. On the other hand, "changing a background image to another background image" does not necessarily have to be displayed by another image data or another layer. For example, the background image itself does not have to be displayed in time series or coordinates. It also includes images that are suddenly changed to "images with different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the production reception period)" that are not connected to each other, or are replaced (switched). It also includes images that change to "black images" or are replaced (switched). That is, if there is no connection in terms of depiction content in terms of time series and coordinates before and after the change, it can be said that "the background image is changed to another background image". In order to make it easier to recognize that the background image has changed in this way, the effect image (blackout, whiteout, etc.) that hides the background image that has been displayed up to that point is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is more desirable to display the display over an area (more preferably substantially the entire area) of at least half of the display area, and to display the second operation promotion image together with the new background image after the display. The first operation-related effect and the second operation-related effect may be sequentially displayed within one variation pattern. As described above, the timing for changing the background image to another background image may be before the production reception period occurs, or the production reception period may occur, including the timing when the production reception period occurs. It may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 180 (b) may be omitted and the production may progress from FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. 180 (c)).

In the production example shown in FIG. 180, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately communicating the current situation). The performed operation may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and then the stopped state may be maintained.

Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the background image may be changed when the effect reception period occurs or the background image may be changed. It may be possible that the display to be displayed may not be performed. In this case, if the display for changing the background image is performed when the production reception period occurs, the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the production reception period occurs. It is desirable to.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the production reception is performed, it is decided to operate the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) as an operation operation based on the production reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 167 (d), 169 (e), and 170 (h), the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button) is provided as a movable body on the door frame 3 side. By making 410) also operate, it is possible to improve the effectability of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed. In this way, in order to improve the effectability of the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed depends on the result of the effect. Then, the production situation at the time of success in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side is movable. While the effect situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the operation-time effect (for example, a specific operation-related effect) performed without going through a specific operation-related effect. In the operation-time effect after the precursor effect, which is not an operation-related effect, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side depends on the result of the effect. It is possible to show the production situation at the time of success when only operates, or to show the production situation at the time of failure when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and the specific operation-related effect related to the other examples thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the button is in a mode in which the princess character is added (specific effect mode). The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. If the value is set to be high, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific production mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 181 (b). In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific production mode, it is desirable that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

Further, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (FIG.) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed). 181 (a)) and the second effect pattern (FIG. 181 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, the expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, as well as the button image BTG and the sword. Regardless of which of the decorative image SYG appears, it becomes possible to provide completely different fun such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 181 (c), when the production result of the specific operation-related production (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared in the specific production mode. (For example, from the time when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG appears is in the stage of being performed, a specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed). The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (same degree of expectation). That is, in this case, since the rendering property of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it is said that "a precursory effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide a completely different color rendering index.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 151, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of the above. Both the sword part (handle part 5012, sword blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are supported so as to be movable (operable) by one main body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3. Even if one side of the sword part (handle part 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in the state of being operated (operated), the other side has a structure that can be operated (operated). It is formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not possible. Since there is no change, there is a concern that there is a high possibility that an operation error will occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image (and its) that imitates the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001. When the instruction display prompting the operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side. Become. That is, in this case, as the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing moment by moment, let the player first perform the operation for correcting the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to do so, and if the production reception period ends before the production reception is done even though a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectations has been performed. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001, there are modes such as "movement in the vertical direction" by the sword part and "movement in the lateral direction" by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reversal relationship In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the proper side, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing operation opportunities is increased.

Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit. , As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

FIGS. 182 and 183 show an example of an effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

In FIG. 182 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 182 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 182 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182 (b), the first effect is modeled on the first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. The image OX and the second effect image TX that mimics the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so as to move in the lateral direction are included in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time to suggest that an operation opportunity by any of these operation modes will soon be available for production. In this regard, in the first production image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration body 5001 that imitates the sword part is displayed larger than the second production image TX, the first production image OX and the first production image OX In each of the second effect image TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

FIG. 182 (c) shows the development of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182 (b), the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX and the effect image TX are pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect) When the result) appears, the effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

In the specific operation-related effect related to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 182 (c), when the first effect image OX is left in a predominant situation, a display such as "push" can be visually recognized. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized when the second effect image TX is left in a predominant situation. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

In FIG. 182 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 182 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A production that depicts the state left in is being performed (first production result). When progressing to this effect content, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the first operation mode is used. When the operation is performed, the effect reception is performed, and a specific operation-time effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 182 (d), the effect reception period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, in the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as "push" and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) will be displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 operates from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 183 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is performed instead of the first operation mode. It shows the production situation when it is performed by the player.

That is, in this effect example, even if the effect reception period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the first The operation detection of the operation mode 2 itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is assumed that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received in the effect is specified. (Here, "it is fine as it is") is done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 183 (f), the content of such a specific notification changes with the passage of time so that the player can regain his / her calmness (here, "calmly push in"). It has become like. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player side is in a panic state, this is preferable. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of the second operation mode is operated by the first operation mode as it is, the player side is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize it.

In FIG. 183 (g), the operation on the proper side (first operation mode) is performed in the production situation (effect reception period when the operation is erroneously operated) in FIGS. 183 (e) and 183 (f). As a result of this, it is a depiction of how the production reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation-time production corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration body 5001 is in a non-operated state (normal state) from the state of the second operation mode. ) Will be returned.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (state of operation error), since the production reception is properly performed, the deterioration of the game interest when the operation error occurs can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, it is decided to notify that the operation should be performed as it is without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed as it is without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to provide detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, since the player may be in a panic in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, it may be counterproductive to notify the complicated contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received, the notification is not displayed by a message but by an effect or sound only. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which a specific notification is performed based on the operation and no effect is performed during the operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect that the operation is switched to the proper operation.

On the other hand, depending on the player (particularly, an elderly player, etc.), it is possible that a situation may occur in which the operation is mistakenly performed even before the production reception period occurs in the specific operation-related production. For example, when the operation instruction for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not given, but the operation for the second operation portion (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed, the first It is also assumed that a situation will occur in which a production reception period related to a specific operation production is generated only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side of the above, and in this case as well, how should the player operate it? There is a concern that it will not be recognized whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation part (sheath part) is given the operation opportunity is performed, the first operation-related effect is performed. The second operation unit is in a situation where no operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is given to the operation unit side of the second operation unit (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 182 (b) and 182 (c)). It is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received. The specific notification may be "a message display indicating that the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity is given soon should be operated while maintaining the operation state", or a message display may be used. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as a notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming a special situation such as a specific notification being performed based on the operation and no effect at the time of operation even though the operation is performed, the operation is subsequently performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a chance to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being operated (for example, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation is being performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion). , Even if the production reception period related to the specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the sword part), the state in which the operation on the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body). When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation effect according to the operation is performed. It becomes.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the same state, the production reception will be performed properly, so that the operation error occurs before the production reception period occurs. Even when the above occurs, the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

However, of the period during which a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is given an operation opportunity is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect acceptance period is shown. If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of the above-mentioned, the information will be mixed with the content to be notified (instruction display, etc.) within the production reception period, and the player will be more and more confused. There is a concern that it will end up. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect in which the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, in the period until the effect result is displayed. , The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, the above-mentioned first period is performed. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation unit of 1.

In the above-mentioned production example, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege may be suggested when performing a specific notification. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the production mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 161). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in the above to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may let it. Alternatively, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In this case, in the production display device 1600 during the production reception period, an instruction display (character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 The sword decoration image SYG that imitates the above is displayed, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161). It will be.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to add some fun to confirm the sword decoration image SYG. However, the performance is poor when it is in the production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance during the production reception period.

At this time, it is necessary to make the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG have a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, which makes the effectability during the effect reception period more effective. It is desirable to ensure that it is suitable. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To display. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by confirming the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the production reception period will be preferably maintained.

In order to obtain such an effect, the number of production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of production modes are prepared as the sword decoration body 5001, the plurality of production modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because they are falsely displayed. There is concern, which may reduce the interest in playing games. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161). When the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, thereby displaying the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword. It is desirable to make the appearance of the decorative image SYG different from each other. The special aspect may be a mode in which the outer shape is changed by further deforming and combining the sword decoration image SYG, operating in a mode not appearing in the sword decoration body 5001, or in the sword decoration body 5001. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, the structurally difficult staging expression of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, so that the concern that the sword decoration is falsely displayed is suppressed. In addition to being able to do this, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by providing a directing effect beyond the player's imagination when looking at the structure of the sword decoration body 5001.

Even when the sword decorative image SYG is provided with a special aspect in this way, each aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is prepared as an aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, FIG. 161 is shown). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. When the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to suggest that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the other mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Further, the method for displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode may be applied to another effect in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is subjected to the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration body 5001. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It makes it possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the design is changed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursory effects are executed as different effect contents from each other, and as those effect contents, for example,
-A specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area.
-After that, a production image that imitates the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed at a position that is difficult to see by the specific image.
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased, the area where the specific image is displayed is decreased, etc.). It may be made to change. For example, in the first precursor effect, a display effect by "cloud effect" is performed as a specific image (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image that imitates the operation means), and in the second precursor effect, "flame" is performed as a specific image. Display effect by "effect" (display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image that imitates the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by "water effect" as a specific image (effect image that imitates the operation means) By making the types of specific images different, such as by gradually making the display effect easier to see, it is possible to make those precursor effects different from each other. That is, in this case, the "cloud effect" is used. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed. At that time, it is recognizable that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the display effect by the "water effect" is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect) as to which of the button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed.

Then, when performing a precursory effect (at least one of the first precursory effect, the second precursory effect, and the third precursory effect) with such an effect content, an effect image in which the operation means is imitated by a specific image is displayed. It is desirable to generate the effect reception period for the operating means during the period when it is difficult to see. When such a configuration is applied to either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operating means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when it is uncertain which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect is produced during the effect reception period. You will be able to improve your sex. Further, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the operation means cannot be held, the effectability during the effect reception period can be improved.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 186 is an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the first precursor effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. However, this example of the effect is not the first precursor effect but the second precursor effect and the third. It can also be applied to precursory effects.

In FIG. 185 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 185 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 185 (a).

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (b), the display effect by the "cloud effect" is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a "cloud effect" gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 186 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased). Or, the area where a specific image is displayed is reduced, etc.).

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 186, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set at the timing t2 in which the display effect by the "cloud effect" is gradually changing to non-display. Along with the occurrence, a button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are displayed (bar display). FIG. 185 (c).

In this production example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, red) is displayed. , Blue), the ratio of the operation-time effect being performed in a manner with high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 185 (c), it is uncertain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect during operation is executed in a form in which the effect content is switched from such a precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is the first display mode and the first display mode. It becomes possible to advance the production without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Despite this, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the production situation shown in FIG. 185 (c) at the timing t3, the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued, and the “cloud effect” is obtained. Is completely hidden (Fig. 185 (d)). In such a situation, the operation button 410 can be operated while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a way that the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 185 (d).

According to such a configuration, in the production reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period from the display of the button image BTG until the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t2 to t3). ), It becomes possible to provide the effectability by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

It should be noted that the period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden in order to enhance the color rendering index during the production reception period (timing t2 to t4). It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period of the above timings t2 to t3. In this production example, a message such as "press" is displayed during the period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. For example, at timings t2 to t3. If the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period from timing t3 to t4, the effectability in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more preferably enhanced. Will be able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 185, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see first appears, and after a predetermined time from that situation, the effect situation is set to be difficult to see. Until then, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation where it is difficult to see before the production reception period occurs, the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor). In the case of the production, the production pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, the more difficult it is to see the button image BTG, the more interesting it is to pay attention to the button image BTG. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 185, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the "cloud effect", but the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is affected by the "cloud effect". It was decided to display so that the visibility would be maintained without receiving it. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the change in the visibility of the button image BTG with peace of mind while grasping the remaining time of the production reception period.

However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the "cloud effect" so that it is difficult to see until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode while the remaining time of the production reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented and novel color rendering.

Further, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 185, the above-mentioned or later-described “acceptance allowable sound” may be output. In this case, the "acceptable sound for reception" is output from the time when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to see by the "cloud effect".

In addition, when such "acceptable sound" is output in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, including "0" and "100"), the button image BTG It will be possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation even before the whole appears, and it will be expected to improve the interest of the game.

When the production reception (operation) is performed while the "acceptable sound for reception" is being output, it is desirable to turn off the "acceptable sound for reception" in the output state at that time. In addition, as for the "acceptable sound for reception", each configuration described above or described later may be appropriately adopted.

The "cloud effect" may be transparent, in which case the button image will be faintly visible behind it, but visibility will be maintained even with such a configuration. ..

The "cloud effect" itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, including "0" and "100"). In this case, although the operation button 410 functions to make it difficult to see, the game entertainment is improved when a high degree of expectation is suggested.

Before the "cloud effect" is displayed and completely hidden, the following production method is used to put a specific effect sound (BGM) into a suppressed mode or a silent output state, or to make it a non-output state. It may be adopted. In this way, the specific effect sound (BGM) that has been put into the suppressed mode or the silent output state, or has been put into the non-output state, is output in the non-suppressed state even when the player operates it. It will not be returned.

In addition, when such a directing property is applied to any of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect image that imitates the operation means after the start of the precursor effect is clear. Even if the length of the time until the specific image is made visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the specific image becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) at the same time. Further, when such an effect is applied to any of the precursor effects of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the operation means is imitated after the precursor effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple of these so that multiple effects with different expectations are given. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set it to the time.

Further, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image) as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operating means. For example, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to see due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself that imitates the operation means, and then relative. It may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operating means appears in a display mode in which it is relatively difficult to see may be a timing before the timing t2. May be performed as a precursor effect, or while another display is performed as a precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see. May be good.

Further, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, the specific operation-related effect described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 186 will be described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later. ) May occur only when it occurs. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and as a result of the progress of the effect, a plurality of operation means are available. Since the production reception period corresponding to only one of the operating means will occur, if there is a delay in deciding which of the plurality of operating means should be operated, it is better than being operated by the player. It is possible that the production reception period will end after all the remaining time has been exhausted. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is generated, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed. During the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect, the player operates the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function. Since the production is accepted by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is controlled to this automatic button effect state. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the effect reception period is within the effect reception period. Even if the operation by the player is not received for the production, the process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the operation by the player is received for the production can be executed within the production reception period. There is. According to such an automatic button effect state, even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, the effect after the operation is generated when the operation is performed, so that the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate is suppressed. You will be able to. As for the automatic effect function, when the operation is performed, the same effect reception as when the operation actually occurs may be generated, so that the processing according to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. The same processing as when there is a production reception may be performed without letting it.

In the embodiment relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, effects, settings, and the like may be appropriately combined or replaced.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operating means a plurality of times during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. The setting to the production state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various settings" screen is selected so that the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is made. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, and the operation for the operation button 410 and an operation for a different operation means may be operated a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating it once. By simplifying such an operation, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state. It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, and from such a person, the operation button 410 is used. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the automatic button effect state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult for it to be set incorrectly. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is not set even if the operation is performed in the long press mode when at least the effect reception period occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set and the setting is canceled, the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change has not been executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various settings" screen is selected so that the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting of automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is positioned in the operation state even if the operation state for the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed). The automatic button effect state is canceled only when it is detected (just operated in a single operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that some operation is performed on the operation button 410 means that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button effect is produced. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal production state at an early stage, it is expected that the game entertainment interest will be maintained favorably.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operating means including the operating button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the jackpot determination when it is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. Production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (for example, sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (more accurately, a predetermined production pattern in which the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 or the like is set) Is generated, and even if the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) is not received during the production reception period, the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) is performed during the production reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the production is received. According to such a configuration, is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received, or another operation means (for example, for example). , When the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) as to whether or not the operation for the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect is executed, the effect result. Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for production, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that such a specific operation-related production can be enjoyed with peace of mind. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). , When the operation for the first operating means is not performed within the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process that causes the same change for the effect as when the operation for the first operating means is performed. Yes (first automatic production means),
-When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is set. When it occurs, when the operation for the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation for the second operation means is performed is executed. It is possible (second automatic production means)
Regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the period occurs, the first (1) Automatic processing by the automatic effect means or automatic processing by the second automatic effect means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are the operation targets. Regardless of which of the second-side production reception period set as is occurring within the execution period of the symbol change, the automatic production function can function when the same specific time elapses from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, when the first-side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time elapses after the first-side effect reception period occurs. The automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed and when a time different from the specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs. As in some cases, the production progress within the symbol variation may be performed. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means would be executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, but the timing is different from this. Since the production is accepted and the production is automatically generated after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol variation period as compared with the case where the control is not performed to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The ratio of the production reception period to be performed may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, so that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, the automatic production is performed. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the function, the effect reception period can be generated more frequently while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the frequent occurrence of forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means is high. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the occurrence rate differs between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production reception conditions are met within the production reception period, the post-operation production can be executed (post-operation production execution means).
-It is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition based on the operation performed by the player within the production reception period (player operation reception means).
-When the operation by the player is not performed within the production reception period, it is possible to execute the process of satisfying the production reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means). )
However, regarding the specific timing within the production reception period, it is set so that it will not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has elapsed from the start of the production reception period. I'm supposed to do it. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player to operate by himself / herself will be given before the automatic production function functions, and there will be an option to generate the production reception by the operation by the player. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs. When the production progress within the symbol variation is performed so that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" is used. Any of the "time different from" will be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side production reception period.

Here, if the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period, the effect is received. , The process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Similarly, during the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state, an effect reception period for an operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect reception Even if the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the period, the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception and the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are to be executed respectively. Is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation production according to the production reception", the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button production state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the production reception period. The operation on the body 5001 is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect executed when the effect is received.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect). The desire to end the state) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific production state and the operation to allow the operation reception to be performed, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button is given an operation opportunity within the effect reception period. A process for terminating an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect by performing an operation on the 410 or the sword ornament 5001 only once (only by operating in a single operation mode). (Processing to execute the effect after operation) is performed respectively, so the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the production state.

However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button effect state (change of setting to automatic button effect state or cancellation of setting of automatic button effect state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (state in which the symbol change is not executed). , The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decoration body 5001. That is, the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that amount, a big hit is expected than the operation button 410. The degree is increased. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thereby the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at the time and maintain the game entertainment. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the operating means (operation buttons) other than the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operating means. By operating 410 or another operating means) multiple times, it is possible to set or cancel the setting to the automatic button effect state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the sword decoration body 5001 does not need to be operated to the automatic button effect state. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed for the purpose of.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. Only when the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the production reception period, and the post-operation production corresponding to the production is received. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration body 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Will be.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is set, "automatic operation for generating an operation effect without operating within the effect reception period" In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "effect function", the special operation means that is not the target of the "automatic effect function that generates an operation effect even if it is not operated during the effect reception period". May further be included. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs when the symbol variation is in the execution state, and the operation for the special operation means is received within the effect reception period, the effect is received. The degree of expectation for a big hit will be suggested by the post-operation production according to the production reception. However, even if the automatic button effect state is controlled, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect is received will appear. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if the effect is different from the effect when the effect is received, it may appear.

Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only when, but also the effect reception period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect reception period where the expectation is suggested when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, and the expectation is suggested when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable that this is not allowed even if there is a production reception period, etc.). That is, when the operation button 410 is within the effect reception period for an operation means different from that of the operation button 410, the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long-pressed manner). In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function that generates the production during operation without operating during the production reception period" is enabled to operate the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410). The production reception when the operation button is performed) may occur without any operation, and for a player who is not familiar with such an automatic button production state, is there a production reception period for the operation button 410, or the operation button 410? This is because it may be confusing whether the production reception period for the operation means different from the above has occurred, and there is a concern that this may reduce the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the production reception period when it is not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the production reception period when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may be possible to execute it as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether or not the automatic production function can function within the specific production reception period, and the production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment displays a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) during the effect reception period. However, when the production reception period occurs, the specific image is specified so as to go to the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which a lightning bolt falls toward a specific area) may be displayed (precursor effect) outside the area. That is, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the production image different from the specific image, the "specific image suggesting the remaining time" in the hidden state is watched to the place where it will appear in the future. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation by the player is not in time and the specific production reception period ends. Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game enjoyment is appropriately maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player. Based on the progress of the game or the effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which the state can be set or canceled according to the progress of the game or the effect, for example, "While it is controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but it is a big hit game state. And the control mode such as "The automatic button effect state is canceled when the state shifts to the high probability time saving state" and "The automatic button effect state is generated within the execution period of the symbol change, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol fluctuations are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as, etc. Further, the pachinko machine 1 may be constantly controlled to the automatic button effect state. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled, and the setting and cancellation of the "auto button effect state" are applied. Such processing itself will disappear.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions may be a predetermined timing when the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or after that, or the remaining time of the production reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was performed after the production reception period was completed. It will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at an intermediate timing (specific timing) in which the remaining time of the production reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic production function functions as in the case of actual operation. At that point (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the effect is executed after the operation.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation effect will occur even if it is not operated while the automatic button effect state is controlled, until the effect reception period ends (effect reception) It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period) to start the post-operation effect corresponding to the function. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function even though the specific timing within the production reception period has arrived, the post-operation effect is generated by the player himself / herself operating after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to make it feel uneasy when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, it is mistaken that it is controlled to the automatic button effect state even though it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is recognized and you may not be able to check the post-operation effect "," The automatic effect function may not work due to some trouble, and you may not be able to check the post-operation effect ", etc.) You will be able to.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned production examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. It may be used in an appropriate combination.

In explaining each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not normally controlled. When an effect reception period occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared. When a specific valid period related to this is generated while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific valid period. You may do it. According to such a configuration, the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is enhanced (improvement of the effectability by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, the automatic effect function may not work during another effect reception period set when a specific display effect is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific valid period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions so that you can enjoy the feeling of VIP by saving the trouble of operating it. Therefore, it is expected that the hobby of the game will be enhanced. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and the automatic production is performed in at least a part of the production reception period. If the function cannot be functioned, the above-mentioned effect and effect when a specific valid period occurs while a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. Further, even when such a specific valid period occurs, if there is no operation by the player before the specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production according to this.

Further, as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are prepared.
-If the first specific valid period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first specific valid period occurs. While the function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
-If a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific valid period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when the above-mentioned has elapsed, the second specific valid period is terminated, and the post-operation effect corresponding to this is generated.
-If a third specific valid period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific valid period is controlled even though it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of the operation, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed may be performed when each process is in a specific effect state, such as preventing the appearance of the post-operation effect. According to such a configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is from the time when the effect acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function may function when the predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed. Even if the production reception period ends, the above-mentioned automatic production function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-mentioned is described when the second predetermined time elapses. It becomes possible to advance the production with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic production function of the above works or the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work in the first place. The first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called). When a single operation is performed), the effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

The first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. If this is the case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is provided. Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects generated when the effects are received in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different production contents.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at what timing within the effect reception period the automatic effect function functions (which is the effect reception period when the effect is received). The automatic production function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) showing the remaining time of the production reception period so that it can be recognized (whether only the time was left). It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect in the state where this is displayed instead of being hidden at the time point. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period is the first specific valid period ( A relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs, the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses) and the second specific valid period (relatively after the production reception period occurs). It becomes possible to recognize which of the later stage, the period during which the automatic effect function operates when the second predetermined time elapses).

In this sense, when the first specific valid period (the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs) and the second specific valid period (the period when the automatic production function functions) occur. The jackpot expectation is different from when the second predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs (for example, the second specific valid period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may be hidden. As in the case where is functioning, the "bar display" may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the "bar display" is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. May be good.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is to be activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation means to be operated within the effect reception period (for example, an operation to be operated). In addition to displaying an image display that imitates the means), even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. It is desirable to. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be hidden. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. Whenever the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific valid period or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden.

At this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect are both generated. Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

For example, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the above-mentioned automatic effect function, it appears only when a jackpot expectation level (for example, a jackpot is obtained) as an operation target suggestion image (such as an image imitating an operation means). When a plurality of modes having different modes) in which the post-operation effect is executed are prepared and the operation is accepted by the operation by the player, the operation target is when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the operation reception. If the suggestion image (such as a copy image of the operation means) is left in the state of being displayed in any of the plurality of modes having different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be obtained. It will be possible to check both of them at the same time, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a valid period (effect reception period) in which the image is displayed is generated, the type of the valid period (effect reception period) (the conditions for generating the valid period and the post-operation effect that occurs when the operation is accepted) The display area is reduced as time passes (the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied), and the display area is reduced as time passes. It is desirable that there is a case where the display is not performed (the second valid period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition). That is, in the valid period in which the display area is not displayed and the display area is reduced according to the passage of time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much remaining time is allowed for the operation reception, and the valid period. It becomes possible to maintain a feeling of tension within. In addition, "not displaying that the display area of a specific image is reduced with the passage of time" means, for example, that the gauge is usually (first effective period) in such a manner that the display area is reduced with the passage of time. When displaying an image, it can be realized by not displaying the gauge image itself or by adopting a method of displaying the gauge image but its display area does not decrease with the passage of time in the second valid period. is there.

In this regard, when an operation reception is made during the second valid period (when the display area is not reduced with the passage of time), changes according to the operation reception (display change, lamp emission, etc.), etc. It is desirable that the model image is not hidden but displayed at the time when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect) is started. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the operation reception was performed while the model image was displayed (before the end of the valid period), and there was anxiety that "the operation reception may not have been made in time". Will be able to get rid of.

In this case, it should be noted that the display mode (for example, color) of the simulated image before and after the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) according to the operation reception occurs. (Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to see the image due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one change caused by a post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, at least at the time when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the imitation image is maintained in the mode displayed before the operation is accepted, and that the imitation image is not obscured by other images. Therefore, if the image is dynamically displayed during the valid period when the operation reception is allowed, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, etc.) caused by the post-operation effect according to the operation reception. It is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when the execution of) is started. On the other hand, if a change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs due to the operation by the player within the first valid period, the change. The image may be hidden when (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, or the image may be displayed without being hidden, as in the case of the second validity period described above. It is also possible to generate a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) according to the operation reception in the state.

However, even during the valid period in which "the display area of the specific image is not displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time" in this way, the modeled image that imitates the operating means to be operated is displayed. It is desirable to display the image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the gauge image does not suggest the remaining time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time that the operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image by the simulated image has progressed. It is possible, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes a first operation means (for example, an operation button 410) and a second operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) as operation means, and the first operation means. There are cases where a valid period (effect reception period) in which operation reception is permitted for the second operation means is generated, and a valid period (production reception period) in which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted. Of these, the first image of the first operating means is displayed during the valid period when the operation reception for the first operating means is permitted, and the second operating means is displayed during the valid period when the operation reception for the second operating means is permitted. The second image that has been imitated is displayed. Further, the validity period in which the operation reception for the first operation means is permitted and the validity period in which the operation reception for the second operation means is permitted are the jackpot expectation degree (post-operation production) suggested when the operation reception is performed. The rate at which the mode that appears only at the time of a big hit is executed) is made different. In addition to the valid period (effect reception period) in which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted, the valid period (production reception period) in which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted, and a valid period different from these. Further, it may be something that can occur. In this regard, when the operation reception is performed during the validity period (for example, the validity period in which the operation reception for the second operation means is permitted) on the side where the jackpot expectation is high, the change (display change or display change) according to the operation reception is performed. , At least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lamp emission), it is desirable that the model image (second image) is in the displayed state without being hidden.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 183 (f) described above, for example, the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is given an operation opportunity. Nevertheless, the first operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is left in the operating state (the operation is performed). Even if the operation is performed on the second operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation is accepted, the player is made to recognize that the production is properly accepted. You will be able to do it.

In this case, it should be noted that the display mode (for example, color) of the simulated image before and after the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) according to the operation reception occurs. (Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to see the image due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one change caused by a post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the operation is performed at least when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the imitation image is maintained in the mode displayed before the reception is made, and that the gauge image is not obscured by other images. Therefore, if the image is dynamically displayed during the valid period when the operation reception is allowed, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, etc.) caused by the post-operation effect according to the operation reception. It is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when the execution of) is started. In addition, in order to make the player recognize that the production has been properly received, changes (display change, lamp emission, etc.) according to the operation reception are performed by the operation by the player within the first valid period. Even if it occurs, the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) is not hidden in the state where the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, but the change (display change, etc.) according to the operation reception is displayed while the change is displayed. , Lamp light emission, etc.).

According to such a configuration, "based on the determination means for making a determination, the effect means for producing an effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and the determination by the determination means to obtain a predetermined result. A privilege giving means that can give a privilege to the player, and a specific operation receiving portion (displaceable between the normal position and the pressing position) that is provided so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position. ), The first detection unit capable of detecting a specific operation (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving unit to the second position, and a special operation receiving unit different from the specific operation receiving unit. It is equipped with a second detection unit that can detect a special movement (for example, sword delivery operation) by the player with respect to (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), and (for example, a post-operation effect that occurs when an effect reception is made). As the production reception period (different types), a plurality of production reception periods including the first production reception period and the second production reception period are prepared, and in the first production reception period, the specific operation receiving unit is modeled. The displacement image is displayed, and the effect reception is performed by the detection by the first detection unit. During the second effect reception period, the displacement image that imitates the special operation receiving unit is displayed, and the first 2 The effect is received by the detection by the detection unit, and the player specifies the operation even though the special image of the special operation receiving unit is displayed during the second effect reception period. When the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position, the second detection is performed even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion in the second position. The effect reception is performed by the detection by the unit, and the post-operation effect can be executed based on the effect reception. "

Then, in such a configuration, "even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving unit at the second position, the effect reception is performed by the detection by the second detection unit, and the effect is received. At the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the effect reception, by keeping the special image of the special operation receiving part displayed instead of hiding it, it is not the side that operated it by mistake. It becomes possible for the player side to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an operation on the proper side.

When the special image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, the post-operation effect is started to be executed in the displayed mode. If the production is accepted without such an erroneous operation, the image may be left displayed instead of being hidden when the post-operation production is started, or after the operation. The image may be hidden at the time when the effect is started to be executed.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the special operation receiving unit is given an operation opportunity is lower than that in the first effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit. In many cases, this is considered to be one of the causes of operational errors. Therefore, it is suggested that the production reception is permitted or the production reception is permitted when the second production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving unit occurs. It is desirable to output the acceptable reception sound. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect reception period has occurred, and it is expected that operation errors are less likely to occur. The "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or the reception is accepted. A sound that is already in an acceptable state (validity period). In other words, it suggests that the output is started within the set time that the production reception is allowed and the production reception is in the allowable state, or before the setting time that the production reception is allowed is started. It suggests that the output is started and the production reception is allowed, and is output as a production sound such as "Pickin", for example.

However, it is suggested that the production reception is permitted or the production reception is permitted even when the first production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit occurs. The reception allowable sound may be output. However, in this case, it is desirable that the mode (tone color, etc.) of the permissible reception sound is different between the case where the first production reception period occurs and the case where the second production reception period occurs. Alternatively, in the first production reception period, even if the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is being output, the reception permissible sound in the output state is not terminated and is continued, but the second production reception period In, if the production reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is being output, it is desirable to end the reception allowable sound in the output state in the middle of the process. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp whether the first production reception period or the second production reception period occurs, or the operation for the specific operation receiving unit and the special operation receiving unit can be easily grasped. It will be possible to properly grasp which of the operations on the department has been accepted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is reduced with time. (For example, a display in which the display area is finally set to "0") is used to generate a small gauge valid period (effect reception period) that suggests the remaining time for which operation reception is allowed, and the display area is After displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image), the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) is reduced with the passage of time (for example, the display area is finally set to "0"). There is a case where a large gauge valid period (effect reception period) suggesting the remaining time for which operation reception is allowed is generated by performing the display). Then, between the small gauge valid period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge valid period in which the large gauge image is displayed, the jackpot expectation level suggested when the operation is accepted (only at the jackpot as a post-operation effect). The rate at which the non-appearing aspect is executed) is made different (for example, the large gauge validity period has a higher expectation of big hit). In addition to the small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period, a validity period different from these may be further generated. The small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period may give an operation opportunity to the same operation target, or may give an operation opportunity to different operation targets.

In this regard, when the operation is accepted during the large gauge validity period, when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the large gauge image be displayed instead of being hidden. In addition, the large gauge image becomes smaller with the passage of time even when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display does not end and this continues. As a result, there was a sense of security that a large amount of remaining time seemed to remain due to the large gauge image being displayed, but after the operation was accepted, whether or not the operation was properly accepted? You will be able to feel anxiety and maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode (for example, color) of the gauge image is displayed before and after the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) according to the operation reception. The transmittance and the like) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the gauge image may be in a state where it is difficult to see by another image. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the operation is performed at least when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image is maintained in the mode displayed before the reception is made, and that the gauge image is not obscured by other images. On the other hand, if a change corresponding to the operation reception (display change, lamp emission, or at least one change caused by the post-operation effect) occurs due to the operation by the player within the small gauge valid period, the change occurs. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, or the gauge image (large gauge image) may be hidden as in the case of the large gauge validity period described above. ) May be displayed instead of being displayed, and a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) may be generated according to the operation reception.

In addition, when the large gauge validity period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception allowable sound that suggests that the production reception is in an acceptable state or that the production reception is in an acceptable state. .. As a result, the player can recognize that the large gauge validity period has occurred, and can further emphasize the sense of security until the operation is accepted. The "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or the reception is accepted. A sound that is already in an acceptable state (validity period). In other words, it suggests that the output is started within the set time that the production reception is allowed and the production reception is in the allowable state, or before the setting time that the production reception is allowed is started. It suggests that the output is started and the production reception is allowed, and is output as a production sound such as "Pickin", for example.

However, even when the small gauge validity period occurs, a reception permissible sound suggesting that the production reception is in a permissible state or that the production reception is in a permissible state may be output. However, in this case, it is desirable that the mode (tone color, etc.) of the acceptable reception sound differs depending on whether the small gauge valid period occurs or the large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during the small gauge valid period, even if the production reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is being output, the reception allowable sound in the output state is not terminated and is continued, but during the large gauge valid period. If the production reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is being output, it is desirable to end the reception allowable sound in the output state in the middle of the process. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp whether the small gauge valid period or the large gauge valid period occurs, the operation reception during the small gauge valid period, and the large gauge valid period. It will be possible to properly grasp which of the operation receptions was performed during the period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may be images that are not only different in size but also in the form itself (such as images that are not similar to each other).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or described later), during the period when the operation reception is permitted, the pachinko machine 1 is dynamically so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced in the simulated image. It is to be displayed. In this regard, when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started, the image is not hidden and remains displayed. In this case, the dynamic display of the image may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the model image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated image described later in which they are integrated.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, "operation reception" is detected by a touch sensor in addition to detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button. The operation reception may be performed by detecting the movement of the player in a specific area in a non-contact manner.

Further, when an effect that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is referred to as an "operation system effect", the operation system effect is related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.) that does not have. However, in this case, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is higher than that in the case where the "specific effect" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are in parallel, it is assumed that the production reception is not performed in the "operation system production" and the post-operation production is not executed. However, since "another specific effect that has nothing to do with this" is in the running state, the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed, while the "operation system effect" is executed but "another that has nothing to do with this" When the "specific effect" is not executed, if the effect is not accepted in the "operation system effect" and the effect is not executed after the operation, no effect will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are not executed. By increasing the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning compared to the case where the "effect" is performed in parallel, it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the operation system effect occurs. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, when the production reception period occurs, the precursory production that is performed before that, the production that the operation means to be operated operates, etc. are executed as "operation system production" or related production. It can be said that it is a thing. Further, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably a precursor effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning increases. You will be able to. In this case, it is desirable that the effect is executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably a precursor effect) and ends before the end of the effect reception period. It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether or not the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a high rate of functioning, and it becomes possible to provide the effect in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, if the "other specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the precursor effect), the "other specific effect" is performed a plurality of times within one symbol variation. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when "another specific production" is executed is high. It will be possible to give a sense of tension as to whether the production reception period will occur.

In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in succession. Until the 1000th loss fluctuation) is reached, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination may occur with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect reception period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function when there is no operation by the player. On the other hand, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss variations are executed). Then, when the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) that reaches the specific value, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated and the player operates within the production reception period. It is also possible to execute a process that always generates the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss fluctuation reaches a specific value, "the player should be operated every time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. Even though I was urging them to do so, I couldn't get any results. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions the automatic production function. Since it is realized as a directing effect, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste. At this time, in the production reception period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, "operate") that is different from the display image (for example, "operate") that appeared during the production reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, loss fluctuation up to 999 times). It is desirable to make "If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf" etc.). In addition, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In the (effect pattern), a special display image (for example, "for example," "is always generated during the production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf. "Etc.") will appear, and even if there is no operation by the player within the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function will be activated and the production reception will be accepted. It is desirable to execute the process that always generates the effect after the operation.

In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in succession. The number of remaining fluctuations until the 1000th loss fluctuation) may be displayed.

In addition, while the symbol is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first operation is performed during the symbol change until the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches the specific value. Both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. , Only one of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side may advance the effect so that it cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is preferably suppressed that the production reception period occurs and the expectation is given to itself. You will be able to get it. However, this production example "has achieved some results even though it has urged the player to operate each time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is being executed continuously. There was no such thing. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a production that always functions the automatic production function, so it is transient. A production acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low so as not to have any more expectations, and the second operation means (for example, for example) It is desirable not to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur both when it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but it is the second operation means among the plurality of operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). The second effect reception period, in which an operation opportunity is given to the object, cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is reached. You will be able to maintain the color rendering index of.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Displays a copy image (operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation target to be operated) that imitates the operation means (model image display means).
-If an operation is performed by the player while the image is displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means).
-After the production reception period occurs, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing the operation while the image is displayed, the post-operation production can be executed without receiving the operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the post-operation effect is executed in the "player-friendly mode" when the effect is received is different. It is desirable to be able to do it. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. It will be possible to generate an effect after the operation.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is to be activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, a copy image (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation target to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, and the operation target suggestion image is displayed. Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the copied image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be hidden. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the image is displayed, or a light emitting or movable decorative body by a lamp provided on the game board 5. It may be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different expectations, the expectation (image) suggested within the effect reception period even when the effect is generated after the operation. Display mode) can be confirmed.

The image that is continuously displayed in this way is hidden after the effect is generated after the operation. However, what is the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has passed since the first side production reception period occurred, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs? When the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when different times elapse, the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the hiding of the image should also be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when a specific time elapses or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic process when a time different from the specific time elapses. Even if it does not exist, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. ..

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time elapses, and when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time elapses, the big hit is determined. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

Further, when the effect reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Any of the modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation, a high expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) can appear. ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period, the production reception (automatic production function always functions) is performed and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed, but the low expectation display is displayed. When an aspect (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. In some cases, the effect is not accepted (the automatic effect function is functioning) and the effect is not executed after the operation. That is, if a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and the operation is forgotten, it is inevitable that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, but the low expectation is low. When the display mode (for example, the blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game interest does not deteriorate so much even if the operation is forgotten, so that the highly expected display mode (for example, the red operation image) appears. Occasionally, if you forget to operate, the automatic production function must be activated within the production reception period to avoid the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate, but the low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation). If you forget to operate when the image) appears, make sure that the automatic production function does not function within the production reception period so that you can feel the tension in playing so that you do not forget to operate it. It will be expected to raise the player's participation consciousness. When not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. It may not be possible to appear. Further, during the production reception period, any one of three or more display modes may appear.

Then, in each of the characteristic techniques described below, another example relating to these automatic button effect states may be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Suggestion of expectations by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform the operation within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), the said. It is possible that a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed on the effect can be executed. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received during the effect reception period, the same change as when the effect is received. It is possible to generate an effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) that causes the effect is not executed. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received within the effect reception period and the automatic effect function does not function, the symbol changes as compared with the case when the automatic effect function functions. In, it is possible to execute a process in which the effect within the symbol variation is advanced so that the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears is low. At this time, the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a directing demerit may occur, a novel directing property such as forcing the player to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period". It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an operation on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like). The above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 166 to 186)) as to whether a period occurs or an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect is generated. See))) is feasible. In this respect, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related effect, those effects are compared with the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect is advanced within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period. At this time, the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the execution of a specific operation-related effect before the effect acceptance period occurs itself also functions as an effect suggesting that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to more preferably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Further, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 more than when it is shown that the operation button 410 is given the operation opportunity as the effect result. When it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period generated in response to a specific operation-related effect is set to the operation button 410. On the other hand, it is more desirable to set the ratio so that the ratio is the same when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given and when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001.

According to such a configuration, a production situation with a relatively low expectation (suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (the effect result of a specific operation-related effect), this is the expectation that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results can be performed in parallel to enhance the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, specific examples of the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189.

In FIG. 187 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. As shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 187 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 187 (a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press"). ”And a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. In addition to producing the effect (such as), there are multiple modes with different expectations within the display area (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.). Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%.

That is, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not received within the specific effect acceptance period. As a result, the post-operation effect that should have occurred as long as the effect reception is performed is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), even though the operation button 410 was not operated within the specific effect reception period. , The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation is performed within the specific production reception period and the production reception is performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs depending on the operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode of being displayed in the display area is the same as that of the case where the effect is generated after the operation due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 187 (e), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned automatic effect function". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment when executing the symbol change, and as a result, 60% in a specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Production reception period when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40% during a specific effect reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific effect reception period is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", "the above-mentioned Which of those periods should be generated so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not work". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

According to such a configuration, the automatic production function functions when the production reception period occurs, in which it is determined that a highly expected mode (such as "super heat!") Appears as a post-operation production when the production is accepted. While the ratio of performing is relatively high, when the production reception period occurs, it is decided that a mode with low expectation (such as "chance!") Will appear as a post-operation production. The percentage of functions that work will be relatively low. Therefore, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect reception period is determined. By confirming it, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a directing demerit may occur, a novel directing property such as forcing the player to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period". It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

However, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), even if the automatic effect function functions when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, it is expected as a post-operation effect. Since low-level modes (such as "chance!") Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic effect function has a relatively high degree of expectation, this The suggestion of continuous expectations (suggestion by the function of the automatic production function, suggestion by the mode of post-operation production) will realize the performance that will not let you down, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby. You will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the production reception period, the production reception is performed. If this is done, there is a possibility that a highly expected aspect has appeared in the post-operation production that should have appeared, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. However, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 187 (c) (the situation in which the automatic effect function does not function and the effect does not appear after the operation) appears, the effect situation (automatic effect function) shown in FIG. 187 (d) appears. Worked, but it is desirable that the expectation is lower than when the post-operation effect shows a mode with low expectations.

In FIGS. 188 and 189, when the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186) occurs in the automatic button effect state, the effect suggests the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function. A concrete example is shown.

In FIG. 188 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, the display indicates that the automatic button effect state is controlled. , "Auto button setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 188 (b) shows the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 168 to 171 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 188 (a) (specific operation-related effects exemplified separately from this). (May be a production) indicates the production status at which the production has started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and cases where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. A common display effect is performed in the above, and while the common display effect is being performed, it is kept secret whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity. .. However, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of a specific operation-related effect, a production situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation. As a result of the second effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, an effect state indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 with a relatively low degree of expectation and the relatively high degree of expectation appear. It will be shown which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given the operation opportunity.

FIG. 188 (c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188 (b). The effect status indicating that the effect has been received for the operation button 410 has appeared. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, such as "press") is displayed. Character display and bar display showing the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c), the specific decorative member SDY (such as a bamboo blind) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. One of a plurality of modes (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectation, "super heat!" With relatively high expectation, etc.) with different expectations in the display area while operating the effect. It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic effect function of is not functioning, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at a rate of 80%.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There is a possibility that the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 188 (c)), the effect occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)), the effect within the symbol variation is increased so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period is increased. Makes it possible to carry out the processing that progresses. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as "the proper operation cannot be performed within the production reception period and the production corresponding to the operation may not appear". It becomes possible to provide anxiety about which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect. In order to obtain such an action effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic effect function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the production status is such that the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high (here, "auto button high accuracy") continues. It has come to appear as a target.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is not received within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 188 (d). As long as the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect that should have occurred is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if not.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 188 (e), the effect is produced even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period. The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed within the reception period and the production reception was performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs depending on the operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode of being displayed in the display area is the same as that of the case where the effect is generated after the operation due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (f), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, FIG. 189 (g) shows a state in which the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188 (b). It shows that the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred due to the appearance of the production status indicating that there is. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, "" A character display such as "Pay the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410 and shifts the sword decoration body 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Will be allowed to operate.

Here, assuming that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c). The same post-operation effect as when it was done will be executed. However, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c). Among multiple modes with different expectations (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.), the mode with high expectations is The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This ratio may be 100%. In addition, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the production reception period, the automatic button production state is canceled and the normal production state is returned, and the remaining time is exhausted during the specific production reception period. The point that the production is terminated when there is no production reception is the same as in the case of the production reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period in the production situation shown in FIG. 189 (g) (the production reception does not occur). In the case), although the production situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c) occurs, the production reception occurs in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c). As in the case of not doing so, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation (FIG. 188). Even when (see (c)) appears, the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (the effect result of the specific operation-related effect), so that the above-mentioned automatic effect is not changed. It will be possible to suitably maintain the expectation that the function will function. In this way, two different productions that are not affected by each other's production results (specific operation-related production, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic production function) are paralleled, and a disadvantageous production result appears in one side of the production. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the interest in playing games. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. Expectations will be lower than if they worked.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not received within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 189 (h). , The post-operation effect that should have occurred as long as the effect reception is performed is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. Even if it does not exist, in the production situation shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if it did not work.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 189 (i), even though the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 was not performed within the effect reception period, as shown in FIG. 189 (i). The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production reception was performed within the production reception period will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but when the post-operation effect occurs according to the operation within the effect reception period. In both cases, when the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (j), the effect is advanced in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect.

It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned". As for whether or not it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the automatic production function of the above does not function", as in the case of the production reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed, the symbol changes. At the time of execution, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. Instead, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Production reception period when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, and 80%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at the ratio of.

Similarly, the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) is also generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions". In that case, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work". , Which of those periods should be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

It should be noted that the post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and in the case where the specific operation-related effect is not executed. It may be executed as a different effect from the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)). However, even when the effects are executed as different effects, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, the sword decoration body 5001 used in the production examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be the sword decoration body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 161. Further, in FIGS. 188 and 189, although it has been described as an example in which the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, the “automatic effect” will be described. The “effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS. 166 to 186.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when a specific operation-related effect is executed without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is performed. In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button effect state from being accepted, the state of "the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted" is before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to generate the effect from at least the effect situation shown in FIG. 188 (b) (the effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started) so that this can be continued until the effect reception period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform a setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has been started, this will not be accepted. Therefore, the automatic button effect state It has become possible to provide "production using the automatic production function" only to those who are continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button production state, and the game is continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button production state. You will be able to provide dramatic value for what you do.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 188 (c), FIG. 189 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect). ), The first display mode (for example, blue button image BTG and blue sword decoration image SYG) and the second display mode (for example, green button image BTG and green sword decoration). Image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the second display mode appears, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" occurs as compared with the case when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to have a high percentage of.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 188 (c), FIG. 189 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect). )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decorative image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the third display mode appears, "the above-mentioned automatic effect". It is also possible to ensure that the "effect reception period" in which the function functions occurs.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period. While there is a risk that a directing demerit such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period", provide a judgment material as to whether or not to exercise a directing selection such as ". Will be possible, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect acceptance period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" exemplified in FIGS. 166 to 186, and FIGS. 188 and 189. It is desirable to generate the above-mentioned effect as a period having a longer time than the effect reception period (such as FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There is a possibility that the operation cannot be performed, but by giving a long time to the production reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related production", it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. Will be expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 188 and 189, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic effect function to function is set to be relatively high during the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect". For example, whether or not the automatic effect function works by setting the effect reception period to have a longer time than the effect reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". It can be said that it is desirable to maintain the directing performance of the game for a long time and to improve the game entertainment. In this case, the timing at which the automatic effect function functions is reached when the first hour has passed since the period occurred in the effect reception period in which the "specific operation-related effect" is not executed. On the other hand, in the production reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related production", the automatic production function is to make it arrive when the second time, which is longer than the first time, elapses after the period occurs. It is important to maintain the effect of whether or not it works for a long time.

In addition, there is a production reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" and a production reception period that corresponds to the "specific operation-related effect", and the time from the start to the end of those periods. Even if the items are different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period will be displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the remaining gauge amount will be reduced. It is desirable to only have different speeds. That is, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, it is continued for the same period as the effect acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". Since it will be possible to make people think that it is, the color rendering index as to whether or not the automatic effect function works is preferably maintained, coupled with the "frustration" caused by the fact that it is continued for a longer period than expected. You will be able to make it.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 187 to 189, the first effect acceptance period (effect acceptance period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Is generated, and even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not always executed, the specific display effect occurs without being executed during the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed. The first when the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period rather than the effect reception period for 1 (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)). The ratio of processing by the automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is increased.

In this regard, in such an automatic button effect state, the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) differs depending on the type of effect reception period as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is set to the "first automatic button effect state", the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning differs depending on the type of effect reception period ("50% -50%", "10". % -90% "), which is set differently in the" second automatic button effect state ", and when the effect reception period occurs, the automatic effect function is set to always function regardless of the type of period. A third automatic button effect state to be generated may be further prepared so that any of these effect states can be set, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always played in the automatic button effect state (first automatic button effect state, second automatic button effect state, third automatic button effect state). Or the production may be executed.

The above-mentioned "type of effect reception period" may mean that the type of post-operation effect that occurs when the operation is accepted is different. For example, in the first automatic button effect state, the "first effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect of the conversation notice" and the "second effect reception period for generating the post-cut-in effect" are When the operation is not accepted for the operating means within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not generated (although automatic reception is not performed), but "after the operation of operating the movable body A" In the "third effect reception period for generating an effect", when the operation is not accepted for the operating means within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated (automatic reception is performed). It will be. On the other hand, in the "second automatic button effect state (second effect state)" in which automatic reception is more likely to occur than in the "first automatic button effect state (first effect state)", "conversation notice". In the "first effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect of", when the operation is not accepted for the operation means within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not generated (automatic reception). However, in the "second effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect of the cut-in" and the "third effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect for operating the movable body A", those effects are accepted. When the operation is not accepted for the operating means within the period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated (automatic reception is performed). However, any of a plurality of production reception periods including the first production reception period (type of conversation notice), the second production reception period (cut-in type), and the third production reception period (type of movable body A) occurs. Even if this is the case, when the operation is not accepted by the operating means, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not prepared and the "normal effect state" is not prepared and should be set. Will be disabled.

That is, in this case, the game is based on "an operating means that can be operated by the player, a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a determination that a predetermined result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. As a production reception period in which a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a person and a production state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of production states are provided, and an operation opportunity is given to the operation means. A plurality of effect reception periods having different types of post-operation effects that occur when an operation is accepted are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of effect reception periods occurs in the plurality of effect states, the operation is said to occur. Depending on the type of effect reception period that has occurred, when the operation is not accepted for the operation means within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was accepted is generated, and the acceptance is made. When any one of the first effect state and the plurality of effect reception periods occurs, which may be the same as when the effect is not generated after the operation, depending on the type of the generated effect reception period. When the operation is not accepted for the operation means within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not generated. However, the easiness of occurrence of the same post-operation effect includes at least a second effect state different from the first effect state, and any of the plurality of effect reception periods has occurred. Even in this case, when the operation is not accepted by the operating means, the gaming machine is characterized in that it does not include an effect state in which the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not included. " Will be provided as.

Further, the distribution rate may be set to either 0% or 100% depending on the type of the effect reception period and the type of the effect state.

Further, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be modified and implemented as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the timing (first) when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at (timing within the effect reception period) to end the first effect reception period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect acceptance period occurred (the first). The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing within the effect reception period of 1), and then the first effect reception period is ended without the post-operation effect being executed (the post-operation effect is not executed after that). ). On the other hand, if the automatic production function functions during the second production reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third production reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second production reception period or The above-mentioned automatic production function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time, which is longer than the first predetermined time, elapses after the third production reception period occurs, and the second production reception period or the third production reception period or the third The production reception period is terminated and the post-operation production is generated accordingly. However, if the automatic production function does not function within the second production reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third production reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second production reception period or The above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time elapses after the third production reception period occurs, and then the second production reception period or the third production reception period or the third production without the post-operation effect being executed. Ends the production reception period of (After that, the production after operation is not executed).

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is low, and the automatic effect function can function. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time for the player to receive the production by his / her own operation before the end of the first production reception period. You will be able to play games with your heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function can be used. Since there is not much time left for the player to operate when it does not function, even though the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high, providing a game with a sense of tension. Will be able to.

Regarding the above modification, in the first effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses (timing within the first effect reception period). However, in the second production reception period and the third production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time elapses (timing within the second production reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic production function should not function (due to some trouble), it is time for the player to operate it. Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, it can be expected that the same action and effect will be produced.

Further, in addition to the above-described effect examples with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189, in other effect examples, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or may be constantly controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting itself to the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine capable of functioning at a predetermined ratio.

[Unified operation control when in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (end the automatic button effect state). Desire) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the production reception period related to the specific production occurs while being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the production reception is performed. After the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the operation according to the effect reception, only by performing the operation once for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given within the period. Each effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if there is a desire to end the automatic button production state and advance the production depending on the player's own operation within the production reception period, the production mode can be switched while avoiding the loss of operation opportunities. Will be able to be performed smoothly.

As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is permitted only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. ..

On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated in the state where the effect reception period has not occurred. The operation for canceling the setting is allowed only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period has occurred, when the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated within the effect reception period. , The process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) according to the effect reception are performed respectively (operation unified control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated while the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred, the operation is not accepted and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players play games with a selfish game technique such as "while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), operate by yourself only when you like to advance the effect". It can be assumed that some people want to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (button for continuing the automatic mode) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect is performed. The process of ending the state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect are performed respectively (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state), but the control is performed in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If an operation is performed on the above-mentioned special operation means within the effect reception period related to the specific effect, the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed and the effect changes according to the operation. The processing that can cause the above is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is terminated and it is desired to actively perform the operation game after that, the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period. As a matter of fact, if you want to perform only rare operations while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), you should operate the special operation means within the effect reception period. It becomes possible to realize the game desired by the player only by properly using the operation means.

Hereinafter, the operation unified control in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192.

In FIG. 190 (a), the number of holds is 1 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation being performed, it is shown that the production reception period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while the reach state is formed. As shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area even during this effect reception period, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, below). An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 in which no change has occurred is allowed to be operated.

In FIGS. 190 (b) to 190 (d), although the operation button 410 was not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to enable the effect reception period. It shows how the post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production was accepted is being executed. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is terminated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (described as "PUSH" in the figure) are described. Any operation opportunity for the button) 1410 will be lost.

That is, in the post-operation effect related to this effect example, a stepwise effect progress appears, and any of the effect results of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (d)) having different expectations can be obtained. Even if it is decided at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that it will finally appear, first, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion). Smoke image) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 190 (c), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 190 (b). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 190 (b) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 190 (d). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

Then, the flow of the effect shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d) appears as a basic effect progress when the effect reception period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 190 (b) to 190 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs the operation. ..

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the desire to return to the normal production mode in which the production can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (automatic button production state). The desire to end) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that (detection that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position), the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unified control in the button effect state). When the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a) ends, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function, and the special operation means (special operation means (a). In the figure, the operation opportunity for the button (button) 1410 described as "PUSH" will also be lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect is received as shown in FIG. 191 (e). As a post-operation effect according to the situation, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 191 (f), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 191 (e). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) that suggests that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 191 (e) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 191 (g). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

However, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is also performed based on the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 191 (e) to 191 (g), after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display shown (here, "auto button is being set") will be hidden. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. The suggestive display (here, "auto button release") is to appear (see FIG. 191 (e)).

Further, as described above, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means in which no change has occurred (in the figure, "PUSH" is described. The operation on the button) 1410 is also allowed. Then, this special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "operates by itself only when it is desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode switching). As mentioned above, it is prepared to enable a selfish game technique such as "progressing the production."

Therefore, even when the operation for the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), as shown in FIG. 192 (h). In addition, as a post-operation effect according to the operation being performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception being performed, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 192 (i), a specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 192 (h). As the smoke image (smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 192 (h) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 192 (j). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed. When the operation for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is terminated, and the above-mentioned automatic effect is performed. The function cannot be functioned, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is also lost.

However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. The process of terminating is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 192 (h) to 192 (j), even after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The indicated display (here, "auto button is being set") will be continuously displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is used within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a). A special case that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions (Fig. 190 (b)), or when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (Fig. 191 (e)). The production is made to appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 192 (j), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears in the case (FIG. 190 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 191 (e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to do it. Instead of the glittering effect display, an additional effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be performed.

According to such a configuration, the change content of the effect caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period related to the fortune telling effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). And, when controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation was performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period related to the fortune telling effect. The contents of the changes in the effect that occur in some cases will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a glittering effect display) appears, "the operation means is operated and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is It becomes possible to recognize that the setting is not canceled and this is continued while enjoying the effect after the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (i), even when displaying a production image (here, “Kichi” fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation, it is special. The production (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) can appear.

Further, such a special effect (here, a glittering effect display) is made to appear additionally to the above-mentioned post-operation effect at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the special effect. When an additional effect appears, it is desirable that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that the operation for will not be performed. Therefore, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the special effect (here, glitteringly shines). If the effect display) does not appear, any effect result will appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), or by operating the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It is desirable that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing due to the symbol fluctuation is lower than in the case of.

According to such a configuration, "the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button described as" PUSH "in the figure) 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. , In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and this is continued, there is a demerit such as "it can be suggested that the rate of big hit symbols appearing due to symbol fluctuations is extremely low". Since there is a risk of being vulnerable, it is expected that the player will be able to exercise such a directing selection in a suitable manner to maintain the interest of the game.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 192 (i), although the same effect mode as that in the example shown in FIG. 191 (f) appears, the above-mentioned effect demerit has occurred. Therefore, it is recognizable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than that in the examples shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 191 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 192 (i), the effect mode is shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 191 (f) while making it possible to recognize that the situation has a low degree of expectation. By making it the same as the case, the third party who does not operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation where the production selection fails. It is difficult to grasp the above, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in the interest in games.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which effect selection is made within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), FIGS. 190 (b) and 191 (Fig. 191) Although it was decided to display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) as shown in e), FIG. 192 (h), etc., the specific effect image is relatively as a post-operation effect. It may be displayed in either a plurality of modes in which a high-expected production mode (here, the fortune-telling of "Nakayoshi") appears, or a ratio in which a special production appears is different.

Further, regardless of which of the production selections is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific production image, and the production modes having different expectations are obtained. (Here, "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) may be made to appear directly as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is in the production situation (FIG. 192 (i)) in which the production selection fails, the production mode with different expectations ( Here, when either "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) appears as a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion).

In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation even within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a), so that it can be used for determining whether or not to take the above-mentioned effect risk. You may.

Further, the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operating means for continuing the state when the automatic button effect state is in effect. Alternatively, it may be carried by another operating means already prepared.

Further, during the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a), is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received for the effect? Alternatively, the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) is executed as to whether or not an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect. It may occur as a result of the above.

In addition, during the effect reception period in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity, the first effect is also given an operation opportunity for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 190 (a)) and the second production reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 190 (a)) occurs, the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 166 to 186) are shown more than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the ratio of (see) appearing before the symbol fluctuation is stopped is high. According to such a configuration, the ratio of the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appears depending on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested production.

[Stable side automatic production processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, there is a special case such as "a plurality of operating means can be received for directing, and different directing is executed depending on which operating means is operated". It is possible to generate the production reception period of. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and for any operation means within the special effect reception period. Which of the multiple operating means should the automatic effect function be enabled when there is no operation (which of the multiple operating means causes the same change as when the effect is received)? Is a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can be accepted for effect, and a different effect is executed depending on which operation means is operated". When the production acceptance period of is generated, "whether or not there is a possibility that a production result with a lower degree of expectation will appear" instead of "whether or not there is a possibility that a production result with a higher degree of expectation will appear". Is the standard, and the process of enabling the automatic effect function for an operation means different from the "operation means on the side that can generate an effect that may produce an effect with a lower expectation" (automatic effect on the stable side). Processing) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the production mode with the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period is Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic production function functions, a situation such as "when the automatic production function forgets to operate, the production mode with the lowest expectation will appear by the automatic production function" will occur. It becomes possible to avoid it preferably.

Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 195.

First, an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs when the user is in the normal effect state without being controlled by the automatic button effect state will be described. In FIG. 193 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the normal effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation being performed, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 while the reach state is formed. It shows the production situation where the production display suggesting that the special production reception period is started. In this production situation, although neither the production reception for the operation button 410 nor the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword have been in this situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword pulling position in order to prompt the determination of which of the decoration body 5001 should be operated. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

FIG. 193 (b) shows the player using either the special effect reception period (pressing operation of the operation button 410 or sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 193 (a). It shows the production status where the production reception period) that can be selected by the side has occurred. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect state shown in FIG. 193 (a), and operation buttons. While the state of 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is kept to be continued, an instruction display prompting the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed. Correspondingly, the downward arrow displayed and the bar display indicating the remaining time of the special production reception period, etc.) are displayed.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 193 (b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "disturbance" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are capable of accepting the effect. Further, it is possible not to display the dedicated mark when both of the two operating means are capable of accepting the production. For example, even though both the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 are permitted, "the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed without displaying the image of the operation button 410. It may be set to "display a modeled image" or "display a modeled image of the operation button 410 and not display a modeled image of the sword decoration 5001".

That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b), the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as the effect after the button side operation. After the fact that it was done is displayed (Fig. 193 (c)), it is suggested that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. And the effect of making any one of "100 defeated" appear based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 193 (d) and 193 (e)) is executed. For example, in the post-button operation effect when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d) appears at a rate of "40%", and in FIG. 193 (e) at a rate of "60%". The effect mode shown is made to appear, and in the effect after the button side operation when the jackpot is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d) appears at a ratio of "60%", and the ratio of "40%". It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (e) appear.

On the other hand, when the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is made within the special production reception period, as the production after the sword side operation, first, after it is displayed that the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been made ( FIG. 194 (f)) shows that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. An effect (FIGS. 194 (g) to 194 (i)) in which any one of "777 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-operation effect on the sword side when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (g) appears at a rate of "10%", and in FIG. 194 (h) at a rate of "50%". The effect mode shown appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (i) appears at a rate of "40%". In the post-operation effect on the sword side when the jackpot is lost, the rate of "40%" appears. The effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (g) appears, the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (h) appears at a rate of "50%", and the effect shown in FIG. 194 (i) appears at a rate of "0%". It is possible to make the aspect appear.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the number of defeats is small regardless of whether the effect after the button side operation or the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Has a lower degree of expectation than a production mode in which the number of defeats is large. Further, when the number of defeats is the same (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (h), and the effect mode shown in FIG. 195 (e) described later). , Expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

In such a configuration, a special effect reception period is generated to allow the effect reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means), and the special effect reception period is generated. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (effect after button side operation, effect after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the operated side within the production reception period, one operation means can be operated. The monotonous directing performance will be improved, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

In particular, the same expectation is not shown by operating either the operation button 410 (first operating means) or the sword decoration body 5001 (second operating means), but the sword decoration body 5001 (first operating means). Only when the operation means (2) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 194 (g)) is shown, which suggests that the jackpot symbol is unlikely to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). Since we have made it possible for the production mode of "defeating one body" to appear, we would like to see the production on the side of the sword decoration body 5001 (second operating means) (effect after operating the sword side) even if we take such a risk. It is expected that the game will be maintained by giving conflicts and stimuli to the game.

In this case, the post-operation effect on the button side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. (Here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 194 (g)) "is eliminated, and it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. Further, the post-operation effect on the sword side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here)" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. Then, in the sense that there is a risk of appearance of the “one-body defeat” effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (g), it functions as a post-operation effect that includes relative turbulence.

Furthermore, in this production example, from the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 193 (a) to the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 193 (b) (here, within the special production reception period), The effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears, it is more than when the effect mode does not appear. , When the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, the appearance rate of "the specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 194 (g))" is low. It is possible to carry out the production progress in the form of a sword. This ratio may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, there is a risk that "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, a production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 194 (g))" may appear. As a material for determining whether or not the operation should be performed on the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it becomes possible to use the effect result of whether or not the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (ab) appears. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably improved when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b) occurs.

In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b) occurs but no production reception is performed within the special production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production is performed. The function does not work, and the effect is advanced without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

On the other hand, FIGS. 195 (a) to 195 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect acceptance period occurs while the automatic button effect state is controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 195 (a), 195 (ab), and 195 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except for the fact that a display indicating that effect (here, "auto button is being set") appears continuously on the effect display device 1600, an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period will start appears. From 1 to the end of the special production reception period, the production is performed with the same contents as in the above-mentioned normal production state (FIGS. 193 (a), 193 (ab), and 193 (b)). Be progressed.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. The automatic effect function is enabled for the operation button 410, which is different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the effect that may cause the effect of "defeating one body" shown in 194 (g). It is possible to execute the process of making it (stable side automatic effect process).

That is, in this case, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. As a result, the same change as when the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the special effect reception period is generated for the effect. Therefore, as a post-operation effect on the button side, first, after it is displayed that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been made (FIG. 195 (c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation and the larger the number of defeats. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher, either "50 defeated" or "100 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot judgment (Fig. 195 (d), Fig. 195 (e)). ) Will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 within the special production reception period. Since the effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 194 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function is activated, "when you forget to operate". It becomes possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as "the automatic effect function causes an effect mode with the lowest expectation to appear."

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, within the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 195 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears. , "A specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 194 (g))" appears at a low rate, and the production after the sword side operation is performed. Since the opportunity to enjoy the sword is given, it is expected that the sword decoration body 5001 is preferably encouraged to operate.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, a special period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the production and the period for which the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received for the production are simultaneously generated and terminated at the same time. Although it was decided to control it as the production reception period, it is not always necessary to generate these periods at the same time. For example, if the period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect and the period in which the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received for the effect overlap in a part of them, those periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. May be executed without fail. That is, in this case, "Which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and further, a special effect reception period occurs" at a relatively early stage from the time when the symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern. You will be able to think about a production strategy that assumes that a special production reception period will occur, such as "Should the setting operation to the automatic button production state be performed before doing?" .. For example, it will be possible to confirm "how much notice production was performed in what production mode (expectation degree)" before the special production reception period occurs. It has become possible to use the result as a judgment material for "which of a plurality of operating means should be operated within the special production reception period", and the game until the special production reception period occurs. It will be possible to maintain this as well as the interest.

However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410, when there is an operation on the sword ornament 5001, and even when there is an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 within the special effect reception period, the automatic effect function Which effect mode appears when is functioning is determined by a lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the start of the symbol change or when the effect reception occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

Further, even if there is a production situation in which the special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. When there is an effect display (Fig. 193 (a), Fig. 195 (a)) that suggests that a special effect reception period will start, it is permissible to set the automatic button effect state. It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that it will not be done. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that a special effect reception period in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that "effect display" has started, this will not be accepted, so you can continue playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. It has become possible to provide "stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state" only for those who are, and it is an effect for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. Value can be provided.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the button-side operation is performed on the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 194 (g)") that may appear when the production after the sword-side operation is performed. It was decided to execute it as a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that may appear when the post-production is performed, but for the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation", the post-button operation production is performed. It may be executed in the same mode as the effect mode that may appear when it is performed (for example, (“50 body destruction” shown in FIG. 193 (d)). In this case, the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Even if "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation" appears as a result of the performance, the same mode as the production mode that can appear when the effect after the button side operation is performed appears for the purpose of seeing. Therefore, it is difficult for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to recognize that the production situation is such that the degree of expectation is extremely low. It becomes possible to do so, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed. That is, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, one such as "a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception". Even though the effect situation only appears, the symbol changes depending on whether the effect situation is generated by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword decoration body 5001. Since the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear differs depending on (the fluctuation of the symbol in the execution state), it becomes possible to further enhance the fun as an effect using a plurality of operating means.

However, this is a case where the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is executed as the same mode as the production mode that can appear even when the post-operation on the button side is performed. However, the "special production mode with the highest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-operation on the button side is performed (for example,). (It is desirable to execute as (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 194 (i)). According to such a configuration, “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-operation effect on the sword side. When appears, it is difficult to recognize that the degree of expectation is extremely low for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated. On the other hand, when "the most promising special production mode" appears in the production after the sword side operation, even a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the production situation has extremely high expectations. Therefore, as a player, he / she takes the above-mentioned risk without worrying about the eyes of a third party. You will be able to enjoy the production on the side of the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) (effect after operation on the sword side). In addition, regarding the "special production mode with the highest expectation", a third party Anything that is recognizable may be used, and for example, uniqueness with other production modes may be ensured by performing a movable body operation or lamp emission.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 194 (f) to 194 (i)), the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" (FIG. 194 (FIG. 194). i)) can appear, and when the effect mode (FIG. 194 (i)) of the "777 body defeat" appears, any other effect mode (FIG. 193 (d), FIG. 193 (e)) appears. , FIG. 194 (g) and FIG. 194 (h)) appear at a higher rate in which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). This ratio may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary to make the effect mode (FIG. 194 (i)) of the "777 defeated body" appear, and in this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d) is shown in FIG. 194. The appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (h) is higher than the appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (e) by the amount of lowering the expectation of the effect mode shown in (g). It becomes.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the effect after the button side operation (FIGS. 193 (c) to 193 (e)) and the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 194 (f) to 194 (i)) are shown. ), A common effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating 100 bodies") can appear, but the common effect mode does not appear. May be good. Further, in the post-operation effect on the button side, only the display change appears, whereas in the post-operation effect on the sword side, in addition to the display change, the movement of the movable body, the light emission of the lamp, and the like may be enabled. Further, the effect after the operation on the button side and the effect after the operation on the sword side do not have commonality as the effect contents regarding the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as different effects from each other.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, when the effect reception occurs, including when the effect is received by the function of the automatic effect function, first, for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. Although it was decided to make the display (FIG. 193 (c), FIG. 194 (f), FIG. 195 (c)) appear, which suggests whether the production was accepted, the degree of expectation is suggested without making the display appear. It is also possible to execute an effect that causes the effect result to appear.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the production mode of "defeating 777 bodies" as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 194 (f) to 194 (i)) (FIG. 194 (FIG. 194). When i)) appears, it is more related to the specific operation described above than when any other production mode (FIG. 193 (d), FIG. 193 (e), FIG. 194 (g), FIG. 194 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appears before the symbol variation is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operating means (sword decoration) on the higher expectation side. It is desirable that the ratio of operation opportunities given to 5001) is high. According to such a configuration, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, it is possible to preferably encourage the sword decoration body 5001 on the side having a high effect risk to perform an operation.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable effects]
As described above, this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) responds to symbol fluctuations when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately and in a situation where a specific state has not occurred). When the restoration operation time (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute a process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the situation of the production, it will be a pleasure and there is a concern that the interest of the game will be deteriorated.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol change" is set as "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol change". Then, as shown in FIG. 196, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state has arrived, at least the following processes are performed in the peripheral control MPU1511a. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is changed. Processing to advance the production ・ Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), it is specified. Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect progress related to the "specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable ornament at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable ornament A situation will appear in which the processing to be performed is parallel to each other.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, an effect pattern (relatively expected degree) that has an effect paired relationship with the specific effect pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in the effect pattern having a pair relationship (the effect pattern with a relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but the specific timing tm2 is reached. It is made so that the same mode of production as in the case of "a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation (a production pattern with a relatively high expectation)" is performed. To. In this way, by preparing two effect patterns (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are in a paired relationship in an effect, at the time of the specific timing tm2. (For example, a predetermined time until a specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having an effect of whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the specific movable ornament operates). Will become feasible, and the game entertainment will be suitably maintained by such directing.

However, if there is a case where the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing is specified. Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it cannot perform a directing operation. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the color rendering index will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 196, among the effect patterns, the effect progress related to "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2" and a predetermined effect for the specific movable decorative body. When a situation appears in which the process of performing the restore operation (restoration process based on the restore operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) is performed in parallel, "specific" is "specific" until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restore status. The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation "is completed. In addition, various methods can be adopted as "a process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", but in the following explanation, "whether the abnormal state is resolved or not" It is assumed that the process of repeatedly performing the restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body until a predetermined upper limit is reached is executed.

More specifically, with respect to the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation", the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. The time required for this to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decoration, "a predetermined restoration for a specific movable decoration" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing to perform the operation" is completed also arrives at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for a specific movable ornament fails and is restored (restored) is performed. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is postponed in a delayed manner. And at the latest, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and has not been restored (restored) yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is executed again, the specific movable decoration By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration status is completed. Will be.

In addition, when it is assumed that x time is required to perform the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body once, one symbol is established so that the relationship "x time x n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2" is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be completed before the arrival of the specific timing tm2 regardless of the restoration status.

According to such a configuration, the effect progress related to the specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a certain situation appears, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed before the arrival of the specific timing tm2 regardless of the restoration status. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decoration is restored before the arrival of the specific timing tm2, but also when the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific timing tm2 is specific. Since the movable decorative body is brought into a stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is stopped at a position different from the original position, some behavior may occur when the specific timing tm2 arrives, or the movable decoration does not operate. Even so, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (if the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the effect operation by the movable decoration is performed). ..

However, in reality, if a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoration operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, it has a color rendering property as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the game entertainment.

As a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result hit by an attack) appears in the super reach effect, and operates if the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as "not", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a form that incites whether or not a specific display result appears", and a specific movable decorative body is "a display effect". When it is provided as "a thing that operates based on the fact that the effect is accepted by the operation by the player (or the effect is accepted but does not operate)", "an effect that causes a specific display that encourages the player to operate" appears. Can be exemplified.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It is assumed that it will be in a normal state. In this way, even if it is in an abnormal state at the start of fluctuation (or "restoration operation time" such as when the previous symbol was stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation arrives after it is restored to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to produce and operate a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot recover (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, the timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation time arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be provided with movable ornaments that have a more complicated structure and perform multi-step movements, and such movable ornaments have a longer time to complete as a restoration process. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that is in a pair relationship with the specific effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, it is within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol variation to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decoration becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a simple and first-aid manner, which accelerates the deterioration of the specific movable decoration. It can also be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol variation is started, the main control MPU1310a side When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, a specific movable state is performed while the special effect pattern is produced (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is performed). It is controlled so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the decorative body is operated) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and 197 (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation is started in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the effect progress related to the special effect pattern. And when a situation appears in which the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is performed in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped). Allows this to continue without terminating the restore process.

More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoration process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is executed for the entire period thereof.

According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) is performed aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed. Since it will be possible to perform additional operations, etc.), this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and the player will be carefully restored in this way. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent production with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special production pattern so that it can be selected only when the player loses the prize in the big hit judgment. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as "This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while" appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and 197 (d), the timing tm11 arrives when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and is continued even after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is terminated. According to such a configuration, the restriction that "even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol is changed" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends, if the hold digestion is not interrupted and the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol variation is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, the next time) The time to start changing the design) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still being continued, it is determined that the specific movable ornament is still in an abnormal state (not located in the original position, etc.). Will be done. Then, based on the determination, if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only the restoration process can be performed, the content of the process is naturally limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. ..

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 197A (b) and 197 (d), a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Occasionally, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) arrives, the restoration process in the execution state is not terminated and this is continued in a form that straddles the next restoration operation time. .. According to such a configuration, no matter what the situation is when the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being executed, "despite the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration". Since the restriction that "the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes are performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 197A (c) and 197 (d), the new symbol variation is started as a result of the start of the new symbol variation while the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. As a result, "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) to 197 (c), it is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the game or production status (further, restoration status, etc.) after the special production pattern is completed. With respect to the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably). It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed). Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movable time is relatively long until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the ornament.

If a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is completed, the effect is described. The restoration process is not completed within the new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and the restoration process is straddled three or more times (effect pattern). One restoration process may be continued in a form (the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods).

In the example shown in FIG. 197A, at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that it will be in a state. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made recoverable, and it becomes possible to produce a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, despite the fact that one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), a specific movable ornament is abnormal at timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained until the symbol variation is completed from the timing tx and the next restoration operation time is further reached. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific movable decorative body is specified each time the restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) comes. If the restoration process for the movable decoration is started many times, if the specific movable decoration is irreparably damaged, the specific movable decoration cannot be restored, but the specific movable decoration cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline as the restoration process for the body is repeated. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit after the specific movable decoration is put into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) reaches the predetermined upper limit). However, when it has not been restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for a specific movable ornament even if a new restoration operation time comes after that.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above predetermined upper limit number of times. , When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special effect patterns and their One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, it means that the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit number, but the restoration operation time has not been restored from the abnormal state. Even when the "+1" th restoration operation time arrives, the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is continued without being completed. In this way, with respect to the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation period, the predetermined upper limit number may be reached no matter how many times the restoration operation period arrives while the one restoration operation is continued. It is desirable that the count is treated as one restoration process so that the restoration process is not completed so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation time corresponding to a symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back) provided on the game board 5 side is provided. In addition to the medium movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. Door. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like) that are also used as the operating means are , It is possible to restore (return) in a manner different from the case of the specific movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) described above.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation for giving an operation opportunity to give an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol is changed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity granting effect, "a process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 177 (f))". "Process to generate the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))", and "display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period". ) (See FIG. 177 (f)) ”is performed respectively. As a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (here, a pushing operation) and the production is received, the "specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory)" is received based on the production reception. ) And the process of producing a movable decorative body on the board side (see FIG. 177 (g)) and the process of causing a change in the displayed contents (see FIG. 177 (g)). Become. The board-side movable decorative body that is produced by this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A.

However, among such operation opportunity granting effects, the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" is not executed normally when the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the normal state for the "process for generating the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001" and the "process for displaying the operation prompting". It is made feasible at both a certain time and an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player who sees the "display prompting the operation" operates the sword decoration body 5001 and receives the effect, the effect is received. "Processing for producing a movable decorative body on the board side such as a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)" and "processing for causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. Not only that, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 receives an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part operates, so that the abnormal state is obtained. Can occur in some cases.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) that is also used as an operating means is used. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A, a return process for applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position when an abnormal state occurs. The restoration process) is performed at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the production is received by the player in the production pattern of the movable operation system". It is made feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body can be moved by aiming at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol fluctuation (more strictly, after the start or stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing at the start and stop of the symbol change, but also a different unique timing (during the change period). Of these, the frame-side movable decoration (operation) is aimed at the timing when an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be resolved). Since the process of restoring (restoring) the means) will be performed, it is expected that the return to the original position of the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. ..

FIG. 198 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration body (operating means). is there.

As shown in FIG. 198, the effect pattern of the movable operation system (the effect pattern in which the operation opportunity granting effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 is executed during the period when the design is changed) is executed. It is assumed that the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operating position, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001" and "a display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and the effect reception period". When the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player and the production is accepted (timing tm22) while the remaining time of the sword decoration is being executed (timing tm22), "specific decoration member SDY (sudare), etc." The "process of causing the effect operation of the movable decorative body on the board side" and the "process of causing a change in the display contents of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 198, the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A is operated as the board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the production reception is received, and the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (movable decorative body on the board side) and this cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration body, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body. Regarding the determination to that effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the specific notification sound and display are accompanied by the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications be made. This is because the sword decoration body 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is notified that this has become an abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be done by the player, the specific movable ornament is "placed out of reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state. This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped by notifying the player, and simply emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed may promote a decline in the interest of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality is found in the specific movable decorative body while performing the "process for producing and operating the specific movable decorative body" based on the reception of the effect at the timing tm22. Although it will occur, by allowing this to be executed as usual for the "process that causes a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600", it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in the abnormal state, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 198, at the timing tm23, the symbol fluctuation already in the pending state is immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 196 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, at the start of the symbol variation). The timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, which is started in (), is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status). As described above, it is finished by (until the predetermined production is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the sword decoration body 5001 is also "specifically movable decoration" based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol change starts). It is possible to execute a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoration operation and at least a part of the operations in parallel so as to return the operation to the original position (giving a driving force). Moreover, the timing at which such a "process for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is also the same, regardless of the restoration situation, within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, a predetermined effect). It is made to end by (until it starts).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable ornament is resolved and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of excitement when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament body is started / ended and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament body 5001 is started / ended are the same. However, only one of those timings may be the same, or all of those timings may be different.

Further, regarding the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", as described with reference to FIG. 197A, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. Not only can it be continued after the special effect pattern ends, but also the symbol fluctuations that are on hold after the special effect pattern ends are immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds later) digested (started). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) can be continued without being completed. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be performed in the same manner as this (the mode described with reference to FIG. 197A). That is, in this case, also for the "process of causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it should be terminated regardless of the restoration situation between the start of the next symbol change and the elapse of the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

In addition, after the sword decoration body 5001 is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times, and then a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed. When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, the special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. Form The restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 may be continued.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable ornament and the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in an abnormal state, and the specific production pattern is produced and advanced without performing the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body. Therefore, the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm24.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period of timings tx to tm2 within a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state) by the above, the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2, which itself is an abnormal situation. Even if a specific movable decorative body is used to perform an effect in such an unreliable situation, there is a high possibility that it will fail. Therefore, avoiding this will prevent a decline in the interest of the game. It can be said that it is desirable to do so.

Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and the abnormal state is restored again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed. That is, if the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and a notification is given each time the abnormal state is restored, the player may be misunderstood that the abnormal state is not resolved. Since there is a possibility, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) should be performed only when the first abnormality that changes from the normal state to the abnormal state occurs to encourage the player to perform the repair work. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 198, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are subjected to the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) that arrives after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 198, the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 Assuming that the production is accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect that the abnormality generated in the sword decoration body 5001 has been resolved by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration body 5001 that was in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received for production by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is subsequently used. It is possible to apply a driving force to return to the position (retain in the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect reception, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword ornament 5001 to the original position is performed (once). (Period when the return operation is successful) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is finished (the specific movable ornament is returned to the original position). It is desirable to terminate the process before it is executed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, considering that there is a rare chance that the possibility of returning the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by such an external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to the sword decoration body (returning operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is used until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is completed. By continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (the return operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is executed again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this restoration process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword ornament 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and after that, it is assumed. , The sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is produced and progressed, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 198, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as the operating means, is set with respect to the board-side movable decoration (specific movable decoration). In addition to the restoration operation time (at the start of symbol fluctuation) to be performed, the restoration operation time (timing after the production is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, it is original. Since a large number of opportunities for returning to the position are given and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning by using at least an external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is eliminated. There is a high possibility that the game will be less enjoyable.

In addition, about the process of giving the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the effect is received by the operation by the player of the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state, the symbol variation starts. A driving force may be applied to the sword decoration body 5001 with a content (different operation mode) different from that of the restoration process performed when the time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the processing is to restore the sword decoration body 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is necessary to perform the processing differently from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing will be executed in a simple manner so that the restoration processing will be completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the restoration status, and if the restoration fails, it will be more serious at the next restoration operation time. It is desirable to ensure that the return processing is performed properly.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 198, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol fluctuation start time) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed for that number of times. Nevertheless, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not newly started. Even when the production pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed after the production reception is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (retain in the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the production is received is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by an external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, even in the above-mentioned situation where the return without external force is given up, it is desirable to execute the process without giving up. Therefore, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))" and "a display prompting an operation (a character display such as" push "and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period". It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 177 (f)) ”is also performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the recovery without an external force is given up.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is given a first operation opportunity to be pushed in while being positioned at the operation position (operate to a specific detection position), and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the original position, it is pushed (to a specific detection position). When the operation means is provided so as to give a second operation opportunity so as to operate), even if a production reception occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, but the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation portion is relatively small, so it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally low.

Further, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received by the operation by the player is not necessarily the production reception. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been performed. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

The restoration operation time may be a predetermined timing that arrives on condition that the symbol change is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time, for example. .. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start. The restored process is terminated before the timing tm2 in the specific effect pattern that has been held and digested arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved and digested. Each of the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

Further, the frequency of appearance of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the movement frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is more likely to occur as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special effect state, the normal effect state is generated. It is desirable to enable the game so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body, which is also used as an operating means, is in an abnormal state. Occasionally, when the above-mentioned special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 197A, the abnormal state is reached for a period from the start of the effect pattern according to the next symbol variation. One restoration process for the movable ornaments in is continuously feasible. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a symbol change start time) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is again performed. Since it is not started and the restoration process that is already in the execution state is continued without being terminated, it is movable different from the movable decoration that is the target of the restoration process. The problem is when to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 197A, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is a new restoration operation time (next) after the arrival of the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends. It is designed to be continuously executed without ending even when straddling (the start time of the symbol change). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm11 elapses and the time when a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives. In the case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or "both method 1 and method 2" or "both method 1 and method 3" is adopted to perform restoration processing on the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to execute.

Method 1: Specify at least when there is a relationship such as "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body". When a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoration process for the movable ornament is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) ) Has arrived, and a new restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is started.

According to such method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed, and the other movable decoration will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). It becomes possible to newly start the restoration process for the body (frame side movable decoration body). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are executed at the same time. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments is expected.

Method 2: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decoration (board side movable decoration) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration process is performed. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decoration to be completed, another movable decoration (board side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

According to such method 2, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) whose restoration process has not yet been executed. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body), we waited for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of these movable ornaments is expected.

Method 3: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for a specific movable ornament is not executed, but another movable ornament (movable on the board side) is triggered by the restoration operation time that arrives after waiting for the restoration process for a specific movable ornament to be completed. The restoration process for the ornament) is newly started.

According to such method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration that is not in the execution state yet. It will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for, and unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration, the said No processing will be executed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes an abnormal state while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is in the execution state, the movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, and it is expected that the rate of deterioration of these movable decorative bodies will be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 197B and 197C, the mode (methods 1 to 3 and the like) when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing, etc. of symbol variation) arrives during the execution of the restoration operation. I will explain in detail.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for convenience of explanation, the first movable decorative body (the above-mentioned “specific movable decorative body”), the second movable decorative body, and the second movable decorative body that can perform the effect operation are the movable decorative bodies. It includes at least three movable ornaments, a fourth movable ornament, and a fifth movable ornament. When only one of the movable decorative bodies is not in the normal state, the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state are the "first movable decorative body", the "second movable decorative body", and the "third movable decorative body". Regardless of which of the "movable decorative body", the "fourth movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decorative body that is not in the normal state has a restoration operation time (design) corresponding to the symbol variation. The restoration operation (restoration process) is started when the start timing or end timing of the fluctuation arrives.

However, if there are a plurality of movable ornaments that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation arrives, all of the movable decorations that are not in the normal state are restored all at once with the restoration operation time as an opportunity. If (restoration processing) is started, there is a concern that it will not be possible to concentrate on the production according to the pattern fluctuation and it will be exciting.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanatory example, if there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, some of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state. Only the restoration operation can be started when the restoration operation time has come, thereby avoiding that all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. , The restoration operation is realized in a mode according to the situation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 197B, the timing tm32 has arrived (restoration corresponding to the symbol variation) when the symbol variation (first time) is completed (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) is started. When the operation time has come), an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable ornament, the second movable ornament, the third movable ornament, the fourth movable ornament, and the fifth movable ornament. Suppose it was. The "abnormality" here means that the "abnormality" is detected by the detecting means, but it does not necessarily have to be in the situation where the "abnormality" is detected, and the movable decorative body. It may simply mean that it is in a situation where an "abnormality" has occurred (an undetected state).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanatory example, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32). However, here, for the first movable decoration body, the second movable decoration body, and the fourth movable decoration body, the restoration operations are started so as to be parallel to each other, but the third movable decoration body and the fifth movable decoration body are started. As for the movable decorative body of, the restoration operation is not started and it stands by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state from starting the restoration operation all at once, and the restoration operation in a mode according to the situation can be realized.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third movable decorative body, which did not start the restoration operation at the timing tm32 and was left in an abnormal state, waited for the arrival of the next restoration operation time (timing tm35). Instead, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed. As a result, while avoiding that all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once, all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state can be restored to the normal state at a comparatively low and early stage. become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, with respect to the fifth movable decorative body which is left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, when the next restoration operation time (timing tm35) arrives. Does not start the restoration operation, but starts the restoration operation based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is completed. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent a plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing restoration operations in parallel in a combination that hinders concentration on the effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the second movable decorative body is completed before the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is completed, but the second movable decorative body is completed. When the restoration process for the ornament is completed, the "third movable ornament" and the "fifth movable ornament" do not start the restoration operation. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is completed after the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decoration is completed, but the fourth movable decoration is completed. The third movable decoration does not start the restoration operation and does not maintain the standby state until the restoration processing for the body is completed, and when the restoration processing for the fourth movable decoration is completed, the "fifth" The "movable ornament" does not start the restoration operation.

That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is not started. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body (1) to be completed.

Further, the fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the completion of the (restoration operation).

In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, the combination that hinders the concentration on the production) among the plurality of movable decorations, so that the pattern changes can be met. Restoration processing can be performed while appropriately maintaining an environment in which the production can be concentrated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, although the "fifth movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state earlier than the "third movable decorative body", the "first movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state. When the restoration process for "" is completed, the restoration process for "third movable ornament" is started first. In this way, by not performing the restoration process in the order in which the abnormal state occurs, it becomes possible to preferentially restore the movable decorative body, which is highly important for the production, to the normal state, which makes the game enjoyable. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) is completed (loss stop) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the timing tm35 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) when the fluctuation (third time) is started comes. Such a restoration operation time originally functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body which has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time (timing tm35). ing. As a result, it becomes possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm35. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to execute the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time)". There is a high probability that the third movable ornament can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which the third movable ornament is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform the effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, in the third movable decorative body, the timing tm32 (2nd time) when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at the timing tm31 before the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a form delayed from the timing tm32 (timing tm34).

However, the third movable decorative body is later than the timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation), and within the period during which the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even if the normal state is maintained until the timing of "timing tm33" and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is performed as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which) is terminated. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) even though the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state is reached at the timing tm33. The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm32 that arrives before the timing tm33) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body (1). Therefore, it becomes possible to return to the normal state at an early stage. The details of the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32" will be described later.

At this time, if the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable that the restoration process is continuously executed so as to straddle the timing tm35. Further, at the timing tm35, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, and the restoration process for the first movable decorative body executed so as to straddle the timing tm35 is completed at the timing when the restoration process is completed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body.

In this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrives, it is in an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration body" that has not been completed can be started before the "fifth movable decoration body", the movable decoration with high production importance is possible. You will be able to preferentially return to normal from your body. The "fifth movable decorative body" is based on the fact that the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decorative body", which was in a normal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) has arrived, has been completed. Then, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 is started. The "restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 (restoration operation)" is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration in the program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm32. A mode in which a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration body are included, and each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when it is determined whether the "third movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, and it is determined that the "third movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state. The restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the "fifth movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state, the "th. The restoration process for "5 movable ornaments" is started. If the "third movable decoration" is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the "first movable decoration" is completed, the restoration processing for the "third movable decoration" is not performed, and the "fifth" Determine if the "movable ornament" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is reached, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decoration body" is in the normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decoration body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. Will be.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the "restoration process for the first movable decorative body" started with the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is "symbol variation (1). The timing tm42 when the next (second) symbol change (second time) is started after the end (stop loss) has arrived (the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived), but it is not finished and is in the middle of execution. "Second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fifth movable decoration" at the time when the timing tm42 arrives. Is assumed to be in an abnormal state.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is not restarted from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm42, and the timing tm42 ( It is designed to be continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time). As a result, it becomes possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm42. For example, when the symbol variation (second time) is to execute the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the symbol variation (second time)". The probability that the first movable ornament can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which the first movable ornament is started is increased. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform the effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm42). However, here, with respect to the fourth movable decoration body, the restoration operation of each of the first movable decoration body in the running state is started in parallel, but the second movable decoration body, the third movable decoration body, The movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body do not start the restoration operation and stand by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state from starting the restoration operation all at once, and the restoration operation in a mode according to the situation can be realized.

In particular, regarding the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 197B, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation such as "it is not in a normal state and the restoration process (restoration operation) is not executed". Based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32), the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) when the first movable decoration is in a situation such as "not in a normal state and executing a restoration process (restoration operation)". ) Arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives.

That is, the situation in which the first movable decorative body executes the restoration process (restoration operation) across the restoration operation time (timing tm42) means that the first movable decoration body returns to the normal position (return to the original position). It can be said that the player is being distracted by the "first movable decorative body" in such a state. And, in such a situation, if many movable decorative bodies start a new restoration process (restoration operation), the player cannot concentrate on the production according to the pattern change, which is a pleasure. Is a concern.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, among the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 197B) capable of performing the restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body. With respect to, even in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process is started in parallel with the first movable decoration body in the state of being executed. On the other hand, regarding the second movable decorative body, in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process is not started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the state of being executed, and the first movable decorative body is not started. It is maintained in a standby state until the restoration process for the ornament is completed. Then, in a state where the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is completed, the restoration operation time (timing tm45 in FIG. 197C) is waited for a new arrival, and the first is based on the arrival of the timing tm45. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body of 2 is started. As a result, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal, many movable decorative bodies are suppressed from newly starting the restoration process (restoration operation), and the above-mentioned concerns Will be resolved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, with respect to the third movable decorative body which did not start the restoration operation at the timing tm42 and was left in an abnormal state, the next restoration operation time is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. Without waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is completed. As a result, while avoiding that all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once, all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state can be restored to the normal state at a comparatively low and early stage. become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the fifth movable decorative body in which the restoration operation is not started at the timing tm42 and is left in an abnormal state, the next restoration operation time is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. The restoration operation is not started even when (timing tm45) arrives, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm46 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is completed. I am trying to do it. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoration operation in parallel in such a manner as to hinder the concentration on the effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative body is completed before the timing tm44 when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is completed, but the fourth movable decorative body is completed. When the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, the "second movable decorative body", the "third movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body" do not start the restoration operation.

That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is not started. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body (1) to be completed.

Further, the fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the completion of the (restoration operation).

In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, the combination that hinders the concentration on the production) among the plurality of movable decorations, so that the pattern changes can be met. Restoration processing can be performed while appropriately maintaining an environment in which the production can be concentrated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is in the process of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) is completed (loss stop) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the timing tm45 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) when the fluctuation (third time) is started comes. Such a restoration operation time originally functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body which has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time (timing tm45). ing. As a result, it becomes possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to execute the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time)". There is a high probability that the third movable ornament can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which the third movable ornament is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform the effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, in the third movable decorative body, the timing tm42 (2nd time) when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at the timing tm41 before the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a form delayed from the timing tm42 (timing tm44).

However, the third movable decorative body is later than the timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), and within the period during which the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even if the normal state is maintained until the timing of "timing tm43" and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm43, the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is performed as in the example shown in FIG. 197C. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which) is terminated. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) even though the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state is reached at the timing tm43. The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm42 that arrives before the timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body (1). Therefore, it becomes possible to return to the normal state at an early stage. The details of the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm42" are as described in the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm32".

Further, in this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrives, it is in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration body" that has not been completed can be started before the "fifth movable decoration body", the movable decoration with high production importance is possible. You will be able to preferentially return to normal from your body. The "fifth movable decoration body" is based on the fact that the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration body", which was in a normal state at the time when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) has arrived, has been completed. Then, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 is started. The "restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 (restoration operation)" is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration in the program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm42. A mode in which a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration body are included, and each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when it is determined whether the "third movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, and it is determined that the "third movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state. The restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the "fifth movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state, the "th. The restoration process for "5 movable ornaments" is started. If the "third movable decoration" is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the "first movable decoration" is completed, the restoration processing for the "third movable decoration" is not performed, and the "fifth" Determine if the "movable ornament" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is reached, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decoration body" is in the normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decoration body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. Will be.

According to the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, the movable decorative body (first) that is not in the normal state (it is not in the original position even though it is not in the state to be movable). Of the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body), the restoration operation period (design variation (design variation (design variation)) that came before this. For the movable decorative body (first movable decorative body) that is executing the restoration operation triggered by the start timing of the first), the restoration operation is not restarted and the restoration operation timing is ignored and the restoration operation is continuously executed. However, for the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that has not executed the restoration operation, the restoration operation can be started without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42). That is, in this case, the plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state may or may not ignore the function as the restoration operation time depending on the situation in which they are placed. It will be possible to realize the restoration process suitable for the situation while the above is being performed.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 197C, the "first movable decorative body" performs the restoration operation when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation (the start timing of the symbol variation (first time)) has arrived. When the restoration operation time (start timing of the symbol variation (second time)) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives again during the execution, the first movable decorative body executing the restoration operation arrives again. This can be continuously executed without re-doing the restoration operation triggered by the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol change (second time)). That is, in this case, it takes time to restore to normal, and as a result, even if the restoration operation time comes again while the restoration operation is being performed, this is ignored, so the state is in the middle of execution. It becomes possible to continue the restoration operation without interruption, which makes it possible to promote the early return of the movable ornament in an abnormal state.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body is being executed over a plurality of fluctuations, another movable decoration body (third movable decoration body) is used. When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decoration does not start the return operation when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, and the third movable decoration does not start the return operation with respect to the first movable decoration in the state of being executed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body is not redone when the restoration operation time comes (timing tm42), and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body is performed. Restoration processing for the third movable decoration (restoration operation) immediately after the continuously executed "restoration processing for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" is completed after not starting when the time (timing tm42) arrives. Since the restoration operation) will be started, the restoration process should not be performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, the combination that interferes with the concentration on the production) among the plurality of movable decorations. However, it becomes possible to restore a plurality of movable ornaments to normal relatively early.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the third movable decorative body becomes abnormal at the timing tm43, the restoration operation time of the third movable decorative body has not yet arrived after the abnormal state. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 (the end timing of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time). ing. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) even though the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state is reached at the timing tm43. The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm42 that arrives before the timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body (1). Therefore, it becomes possible to return to the normal state at an early stage.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation time, the movable decoration is movable within the symbol variation in which the movable decoration is normally restored. When the execution timing of the effect arrives, the movable effect can be executed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to normal. In such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decoration can be restored to normal at an early stage by the timing when the movable effect is started.

In addition, even if the restoration operation period corresponding to the symbol fluctuation comes multiple times during the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration, all of them are ignored and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to continue.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relationship of performing a restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel as shown in FIG. 197B. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 197C, if a new restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decoration body is executing the restoration operation, the second movement is performed at the timing tm42. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the ornament was not started, and each restoration operation was not performed in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent many movable decorations from newly starting a restoration process (restoration operation) when the first movable decoration is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal.

Then, when a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decoration is completed and the normal restoration is performed, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is performed at the timing tm45. I'm trying to get started. According to such a configuration, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is not started immediately after the situation where the first movable decoration takes time to return to normal is solved. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation time (timing tm45), it is possible to concentrate on the production. It will be possible to adjust the environment appropriately.

At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is terminated due to a failure, a new restoration operation time (restoration operation period) is performed after the restoration process (restoration operation) is completed. When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it becomes impossible to provide the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, the movable effect using only the second movable decorative body is restored to normal, and the movable effect using the second movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to make it feasible.

In the example shown in FIG. 197 (C), after the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed and the normal restoration is performed, until a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives. When the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are restored when a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives. It is desirable to start the processing (restoration operation) in parallel.

In the above example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is terminated due to a failure (does not return to the original position), the first movable decoration is restored. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). Further, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is terminated due to a failure (does not return to the original position), the restoration process (restoration) for the third movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration based on the completion of the operation).

In the above example, when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is completed (timing tm34, tm44) and the third movable decoration is not in an abnormal state, the first movable decoration It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body. Further, when the third movable decoration becomes a new abnormal state within the execution period of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration" started in this way, the fifth movable decoration is subjected to the restoration process (restoration operation). When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not performed based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation), and a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived. It is desirable to perform a restoration process (restoration operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, when the restoration operation (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration has not been completed yet and is in the execution state when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived, the restoration operation time has arrived. When the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" is not started and the restoration operation time after the "restoration process for the fifth movable decoration (restoration operation)" is completed comes. It is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body".

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1) before this is reached. For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without re-doing the restoration process (restoration operation). For the fourth movable ornament that has not executed the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration operation is performed without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42). I'm trying to get started. In this regard, even the fourth movable decorative body that has started the restoration process (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42) is new while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed. When the restoration operation time (timing tm43) has arrived, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation time (timing tm43) and continue to execute the restoration operation so as to straddle the restoration operation time.

When there is a movable decoration that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) and a movable decoration that is waiting to execute the restoration process (restoration operation), the effect display related to the symbol variation is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state that is not visible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormal state due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, while the above-mentioned notification is being executed in response to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state, The restoration process (restoration operation) that is already in the execution state is continuously executed without stopping, and the movable decoration that is waiting to be executed in the restoration process (restoration operation) is also restored when the restoration operation time comes. It is desirable to start a new (restoration operation).

When there are movable decorations that are in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration operation) or movable decorations that are waiting to be executed in the restoration process (restoration operation), those movable decorations are used within the symbol variation. When the execution timing of the movable effect has arrived, the driving force for the restoration process (restoration operation) may be given to those movable ornaments, but the driving force for executing the effect should be given. It is desirable not to have (do not operate) in order to realize an early return to the normal state. However, although the driving force for executing the effect is not given to those movable decorative bodies, the light emission provided in each movable decorative body is provided so that this appears in the light emitting mode according to the movable effect. It is desirable to make the part emit light as usual. That is, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, but a part of the effect (light emitting effect) constituting the movable effect is properly executed, so that the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears). , "0", "100" are also included), different light emitting modes will appear in the "movable decorative body that is not in the normal state", and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

In addition, for movable ornaments that have completed the restoration process (restoration operation) due to a failure, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not performed even if the restoration operation time comes again, so at least the power is turned on. As long as it is, it can be said that the movable decorative body is not operated by the movable effect. However, even if the movable decorative body is in such a state, when the timing for executing the movable effect using the movable decorative body comes, the movable effect itself is not executed, but the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect (light emission effect) to be performed is properly executed. That is, in this case, a movable ornament whose light emitting mode differs depending on the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears and includes "0" and "100") is in a state where the "restoration process (restoration operation) is completed by failure". , And it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably.

A movable decoration that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), a movable decoration that is waiting to be executed in the restoration process (restoration operation), or a state in which the restoration process (restoration operation) is completed due to a failure. As for the movable decorative body in the above, the light emitting portion may be capable of emitting light as usual even when other effects are executed.

The restoration operation time may include not only the one that arrives in response to the symbol variation but also the one that arrives under different conditions. Then, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific time that arrives under conditions different from the symbol fluctuation, the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, while the restoration process (recovery operation) is performed. When the restoration operation is performed at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration process (restoration operation) should be started (executed) in the non-notification state without performing the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1) before this is reached. For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without re-doing the restoration process (restoration operation). For the fourth movable ornament that has not executed the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration operation is performed without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42). I'm trying to get started. In this way, even when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed without ignoring this. The "fourth movable decorative body" that will be started is used for important productions such as when the hit result is derived by the symbol variation or when the big hit game is started or executed. It is desirable to have.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, with respect to the third movable decorative body, the case where the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" succeeds in normal restoration (reference position detection) and the case where it fails (reference position). Regardless of whether it is terminated (completed) in the case of non-detection), the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body". It is desirable to do so.

Further, based on the fact that the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" ends with a failure to restore to normal, and the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" ends. When the performed "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" is completed with successful restoration, the third movable ornament is abnormal again within the symbol variation in which the normal restoration is successful. When the state is reached, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation comes, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" is not performed and the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" is performed. It is desirable to perform "restoration operation)".

However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation arrives, the "fifth movable" started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body". When the "restoration process for the decorative body (restoration operation)" is in the execution state, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration body (restoration operation)" and the "restoration process for the third movable decoration body (restoration operation)" The "restoration process for the first movable decorative body" is triggered by the "restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation" that comes after the "restoration process for the fifth movable decorative body (restoration operation)" is completed. It is desirable to perform the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" without performing the "(restoration operation)".

After the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" is successfully restored to normal, the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" is being executed. Even if an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" is executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable that the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" is not started at the restoration operation time. That is, in this case, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" occurs at the restoration operation time that comes after the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" ends with success or failure in normal restoration. Will be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1) before this is reached. For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without re-doing the restoration process (restoration operation). Ignore and let this continue. Further, regarding the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) is ignored, and the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is waited for the completion, and the completion is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the above. In this regard, when the first movable decoration becomes abnormal again while the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" started in this way is being executed, the "third movable decoration" When the "restoration process for the body (restoration operation)" is completed, the "restoration process for the first movable decorative body (restoration operation)" is not started based on the end, but the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation is set. It is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament" based on the new arrival.

However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation newly arrives, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" is not completed and is in the middle of execution (straddling the restoration operation time). It is desirable to ignore the restoration operation time and wait for the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" to be completed. Then, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body" is started at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation that arrives after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body" is completed. It is desirable to let them do it.

That is, in this case, the "first movable decorative body" and the "third movable decorative body" are restored so that the "first movable decorative body" is restored to normal in advance when both are in an abnormal state. When the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes when the third movable decoration is not in the normal state even though the processing is performed, the first movable decoration is subjected to the restoration operation. When the restoration operation is started based on the time (when the third movable decoration is not executing the restoration process) and when the restoration operation is not started (the third movable decoration is Since there is a case where the restoration process is being executed), it becomes possible to realize the restoration process according to the situation.

The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting changing means capable of changing the winning probability related to the hit determination and the selection probability related to the effect pattern. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable that the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation is used as the same timing (for example, at the start of the symbol fluctuation).

The first movable decoration body, the second movable decoration body, the third movable decoration body, the fourth movable decoration body, and the fifth movable decoration body are provided with movable decorations at positions where the player can contact. The body may be included. In this case, the movable decorative body provided at a position where the player can contact is most likely to be in an abnormal state, so that the restoration operation time has come regardless of the situation of the other movable decorative bodies. Then, it is desirable to provide it as a "fourth movable decorative body" that starts the restoration process (restoration operation).

A light guide plate on which the light guide pattern is displayed is provided in front of the movable decorative body, and the effect of displaying the light guide pattern is not restricted even during the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it feasible in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

The "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" shown in FIGS. 197B and 197C are prepared so as to have an effect relationship in which they are in an operating state in a specific movable effect. It is desirable to do. For example, the "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" may be decorated in a mutually related manner, or may be operated at the same time as a movable effect based on a pattern variation (effect pattern). Be prepared as a form of decoration (completion of characters and character strings, etc.). The third movable decorative body shall be prepared as a specific movable effect or one that is not used when forming one decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is possible to prevent one decoration from being formed in the same mode (operation at the same time) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (effect pattern). As a result, the decline in the interest in games can be suppressed.

Regarding the "first movable decorative body", "second movable decorative body", "third movable decorative body", "fourth movable decorative body", and "fifth movable decorative body", the game board The one provided on the 5 side and the one provided on the door frame 3 side may be separately arranged.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the "first movable decorative body", the "second movable decorative body", the "third movable decorative body", the "fourth movable decorative body", and the "first movable decorative body", and the "fourth movable decorative body". Although it was decided to provide "5 movable ornaments", regarding "second movable ornaments", "third movable ornaments", "fourth movable ornaments", and "fifth movable ornaments" Does not necessarily include all of the movable ornaments, and may include "one" of the movable ornaments and "two" or "three" as appropriate. Even with such a configuration, it has the technical features described with reference to FIGS. 197B and 197C (in what mode the restoration process is performed in relation to the "first movable decorative body"). It becomes.

[Penalty when operating the operation unit that can emit light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume setting value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operation units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operation units may be handled roughly, and as a result, one of those operation units is used. If any failure occurs, the operability and color rendering will be significantly reduced, so it is inevitable that the game will be enjoyed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation button 410,
-A sword decoration body in which the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, collar portion 5013) is movable (variable) between the sword delivery position and the sword extraction position by a predetermined operation (sword extraction operation, sword delivery operation). 5001 (see Fig. 146, Fig. 161 and so on)
Even though the operation opportunity is not given, "operation to pull out the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, collar part 5013) from the sheath part 5020 (sword pulling operation)" and "sword delivery" If the "operation" is repeated, it may cause a failure.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the effect light emitting portion (not shown) is arranged on the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013, and the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion) is provided. 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) are provided with a special detection unit (not shown) that can detect whether or not the sheath portion 5020 is in a specific position (original position) in which the sword is delivered. Then, at least during the period when the demo screen is displayed (a non-game state in which the game effect or symbol change according to the jackpot judgment is not executed), the sword part 5010 is specified as a result of the detection by the special detection unit. When it is determined that the position (original position) is not present, the peripheral control MPU1511a generates a production restriction period as a penalty.

According to such a configuration, at least in a non-gaming state in which the symbol is not changed, the sword portion 5010 is subjected to a predetermined operation together with the effect light emitting portion (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013). As a result of being displaced to, if it is detected that the operation unit is not located at a specific position, an effect limiting period can occur. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the operation unit from being roughly handled.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "change of the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound" and the above-mentioned "setting value related to the emission brightness (brightness setting value)" The above-mentioned production restriction period is generated while all of the "changes" are kept in a state where they can be accepted by the operation by the player. However, as will be described later, during this production restriction period,
-Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-As for the effect lamp, when the set value (brightness set value) related to the emission brightness is changed, the effect light emitting unit included in the sword portion 5010 as the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1. (Sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) are provided in a portion different from the sword portion 5010 that is the detection target, although the light is not emitted with the brightness corresponding to the brightness set value. For the effect lamps (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), the effect light emission with the brightness corresponding to the set value is made ready to be executed, and so on. It can be done.

According to such a configuration, when the above-mentioned effect restriction period occurs, it is possible to accept both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the brightness, but it is related to the volume setting. The degree of restriction will differ between the processing and the processing related to the brightness setting.

That is, with respect to the production sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the production sound is not output in a form that reflects the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. By not outputting the sound, the player feels nervous (maybe he has done something he shouldn't do).

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness set value is changed for the effect light emitting part (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, and collar part 5013) provided in the "sword part 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light is not emitted in a form that reflects the changed brightness setting value, the effect lamp provided in a part different from the "sword part 5010" operated by the player has been changed. By making it possible to perform effect light emission (for example, light emission that matches the timing when a specific advance notice effect is performed) in a form that reflects the brightness set value, due to the rough handling of the "sword part 5010". While warning that it is recognizable that the production restriction is imposed, it becomes possible to preferably appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production. In this sense, with respect to the effect lamp on the game board 5 in which the game ball flows down or wins a prize, the effect emission is executed in a form that reflects the changed brightness set value as usual. Is desirable. As a result, it is possible to give a warning against handling the operation unit roughly while preferably avoiding "the player is discouraged from starting the game or urges the end of the game". become.

Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release conditions for the respective restrictions are different depending on the restrictions on the processing related to the volume setting and the restrictions on the processing related to the brightness setting. .. In particular, the "processing related to volume setting" on the side that initially imposed relatively strict restrictions should be greatly improved to the normal state relatively early to strongly encourage the continuation of the game. On the other hand, while showing an improvement trend in the "processing related to brightness setting" on the side that initially imposed a relatively sweet restriction, the overall improvement speed was slowed down, and some They try to keep the limits, which is expected to keep the tension moderate for a long time and prevent the mishandling from being re-treated.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect pattern determination or a notice effect determination is performed, the effect content according to the result of the determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the decorative symbol varies according to the result of the jackpot determination. The production will be executed together with the expected production (notice production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (role production). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background depiction (background notice), it basically has a degree of effect such as "how much value should be set for the ratio of images with high expectations to appear". Only letting you do it. Therefore, the fundamental problem such as "it will be difficult to have a sense of expectation for a big hit unless an image with a high degree of expectation (expected production) appears" has not been solved yet.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined to perform a special effect as a result of the advance notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background is depicted. It is possible to execute a process of displaying the background image used in the above in a special mode different from the original image data, and when the background image is displayed in the special mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the background image is not displayed in the special mode. It is possible to suggest that the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) is high.

Here, as the "process of displaying in a special mode", for example,
-Processing to display the original image data as rotation processing data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation around any (or an appropriate combination) of the x, y, z axes in the display area, etc.)
-It is possible to exemplify processing such as displaying the original image data as mosaic processing data with a predetermined degree of "blurring".

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the original image data is slightly processed (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.) and then performed. A special effect is intentionally performed to display this (displayed in a special mode). With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to definitively detect and recognize the fact even if a special effect is performed in which the original image data is slightly processed. However, in exchange for this, even if the special production is not performed, it is possible to memorize the feeling / illusion that "maybe the special production is being executed". Therefore, even if the state in which the image with high expectation (special effect) does not appear is continued, it is expected that the expectation for the big hit is maintained suitably.

However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status of such "processing to be displayed in a special mode", it will be difficult to recognize even the possibility of a high expectation situation. In the end, the meaning of performing a special production may be lost.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment displays a help image as to whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed in response to an operation by the player. It is possible to execute the process of making it. According to such a configuration, since the help image can be displayed according to the operation by the player, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. It is expected that the decrease in the amount of the image will be suppressed, and that the expectation will be maintained favorably.

However, the "help image" according to this explanatory example does not clearly indicate whether or not the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is being executed, but intentionally includes recognition difficulty. ing. Even if it does not seem that the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, it is not possible to be sure because it is intentionally made to have such recognition difficulty. Will be left behind, and it will be possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

FIG. 199 shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the state shifts between the non-game state in which the game is not executed (during the demo screen, etc.) and the game execution state in which the game is executed. ..

FIG. 199 (a) shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the game is not being executed and is in a non-game state (during a demo screen, etc.). As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the effect display device 1600 in the non-gaming state is useful for checking "whether a special effect is being executed" (here, character image PG (here, here). A guide image AG suggesting that a penguins-like character) can be made to appear by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is displayed. In this explanatory example, the explanatory text and the character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG, respectively.

When a start prize is generated and a game (change of a special symbol according to a big hit determination) is started in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a), the effect display device 1600 first obtains FIG. 199 (b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in. At the same time, the variable effect by the decorative pattern SZ is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). In this way, by automatically hiding the guide image AG when the game is started, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the color rendering index when the game is in the execution state. The existence of the character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguins) can be suitably appealed.

FIG. 199 (c) shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199 (b) is completed (stop display).

If the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), the guide image AG is hidden by digesting the hold information and newly starting the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ. The production situation shown in FIG. 199 (b) will reappear in the same state. On the other hand, if the hold information does not remain in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), the state is again shifted to the non-game state (during the demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the state in which the game is not newly started continues for a predetermined time after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199 (b) is completed (stop display). The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a)) will reappear. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be left stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

Then, the "process of displaying in a special mode" according to this effect example is a state in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern" (when a predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination). It can be executed when the specific effect image appears within the period (predetermined timing in the specific effect pattern).

FIG. 200 shows an expected effect in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern", and the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image. A display example of the effect display device 1600 in the state of being in the state is shown.

That is, in this production example, at least when "expected production in which a princess character (specific production image) is displayed in a large size as a background image" is performed, a predetermined production condition is satisfied. It has become possible to execute a process of slightly rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) and then displaying them (processing of displaying them in a special mode). There is. When the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "process to be displayed in a special mode" has been executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "process to be displayed in a special mode" has not been executed is displayed. The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when it is displayed.

More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a), the "process of displaying in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) are the original image data. It is displayed up to. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (b), each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) is rotated to the left three times and then displayed. The process (process to display in a special mode) is executed, and in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (c), the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) are displayed 6 degrees to the left with respect to each original image data. The process of displaying these after performing the rotation processing of the above (processing of displaying in a special mode) is being executed.

As is clear from FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (c), even when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is performed, each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) is performed. Only a small amount of rotation is applied to the image. In particular, in the figure, it is possible to compare and see between FIGS. 200 (a) and 200 (c), but in the actual production, FIG. 200 (a) according to the result of the production determination. ) To (c) are displayed and cannot be compared between them. Therefore, even when FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the state is displayed in the special mode, but the state is displayed in the special mode. It is expected that the player will be aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 200 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. It is difficult to be sure, and it will be expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation) such as "may be in a state of being displayed in a special mode".

It should be noted that the processing of rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) to the left by 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) and then displaying them (processing of displaying in a special mode). ) May be executed as a process of separately performing rotation processing on each original image data and then displaying the original image data, or after converting each original image data into one image. It may be executed as a process of rotating and displaying the image of.

Further, regarding FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c), when the image shown in FIG. 200 (c) is displayed, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears more than when the image shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. It may be possible to have a relationship that increases. Alternatively, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed, FIG. 200 (a) is displayed once and then displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes momentarily in the order of FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c). You may let it. Alternatively, both FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c) do not necessarily have to be prepared, and only one of FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c) may be displayed.

However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to judge the implementation status of such "processing to be displayed in a special mode", the meaning of performing such a special effect is lost. It could be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed, the operation button 410 is performed. It is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed by an operation for a predetermined operation means such as.

In FIG. 201, a help image is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted in the state where the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as the background image” is performed. A display example of the time effect display device 1600 is shown.

That is, in this production example, an operation (operation button) by the player is performed at least when the "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed large as the background image" is performed (see FIG. 200). When 410 etc. is performed, a character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguin) that is useful for checking "whether a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed" is used as a help image. It is supposed to be displayed.

More specifically, if an operation (operation button 410 or the like) is performed by the player in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 201 (a) will appear, and the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a) will appear. If an operation (operation button 410, etc.) is performed by the player while in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 201 (b) will appear, and when the situation is shown in FIG. 200 (c). When an operation (operation button 410, etc.) is performed by the player, the situation shown in FIG. 201 (c) appears.

However, as is clear from FIGS. 201 (a) to 201 (c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be useful whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed. , It is not specified whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. It is because we dare to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems that "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, we can be strongly aware of the possibility. Even if it does not seem that the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is being executed, it cannot be assured that hope for the feasibility of the process can be left and the expectation can be maintained. It will be possible.

Here, whether or not the character image PG (help image) according to this production example is in a state in which the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed as shown in FIGS. 201 (a) to 201 (c). Regardless of the mode of execution, it is possible to display only in one mode in which the image is held at a predetermined position and the ruler is held in the horizontal direction. In this way, by causing an image (here, a ruler) that is displayed so as to extend in the horizontal direction without being affected by the "process of displaying in a special mode" to appear by an operation by the player, the image is displayed. (Here, a ruler) can be made to function as a guide image (help image) as to whether or not a "special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed".

In particular, in this production example, the position overlapping with the image (princess character) to be executed in the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is not affected by the "process to be displayed in a special mode" and is in the horizontal direction. A guide image (here, a ruler) that is displayed so as to extend to appears. Therefore, by checking the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) to which the special processing is executed, it can be further useful for determining whether the special processing is being executed. become.

That is, in such an effect example, the special effect to which the "process of displaying in a special mode" is applied is a slightly tilted effect, and when the tilted effect is performed, the tilted effect is performed. Expectations are higher than if not done. Therefore, the player operates a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) in order to determine whether or not the tilting effect is being performed, but even if the operation is performed, " It is intentionally made to have a recognition difficulty that does not definitively notify whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. As a result, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility of high expectations when the tilting effect appears to be executed, and even if the tilting effect does not appear to be executed. It is expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation) such as "may be in a state where a tilting effect is being executed".

Furthermore, the guideline image (here, a ruler) of whether or not the "special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed" is subject to the "process of displaying in a special mode". One effect is to display at least a part of the image (decorative pattern SZ, background image) in a form that overlaps it. ), And it becomes possible to provide an interesting effect such that the function is exhibited for the first time by comparing with the effect image (here, the princess character) that is already displayed.

In addition, according to such a configuration, it becomes possible to advance the production without displaying the guideline image (here, the ruler) depending on the player's selection (depending on the operation). When you are not confident that you are in a state where the production (here, tilt production) is being executed, you can enjoy various ways of playing, such as not intentionally performing operations by the player. Become.

In this production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed as "process of displaying the original image data after being rotated", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the original image data, the image data created based on the original image data may be subjected to rotation processing and then displayed. Further, the image data may not be subjected to rotation processing, but may be subjected to other processing or conversion. In short, it is possible to execute a special process that converts an image into an image having a mode different from the normal mode and displays it, and when the special process can be executed, the player operates the image to make it the target of the special process. As long as it is possible to display a guideline image that does not become, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned effects.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" can be executed when the "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed. However, depending on the result of the effect determination, it may be possible to execute the decorative symbol SZ a plurality of times within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation. At this time, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed many times, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol is higher than when the number of times is small.

Also, regarding the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here), not only when the "expected effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed, but also the decorative pattern SZ is displayed. It may be possible to make it displayable by an operation by the player over the entire period from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in the stopped state, it may be possible to display it by an operation by the player.

That is, in this case, no matter what background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) to appear is executed. It becomes. However, considering that the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is a "comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image", the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image each time. It is clear that it depends on the type of. On the other hand, if the display position and display form of the character image PG (especially the ruler in this case) are changed according to the type of the background image each time, the character image PG will be used as a comparison reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the suspicion of lack of reliability may reduce the enjoyment of the game. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an invariant and absolute image regardless of the production situation.

Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed between a plurality of predetermined display positions according to the operation by the player (operation button 410, etc.). .. However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

FIG. 202 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

FIG. 202A shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player has a suspicion that "the process of displaying in a special mode has been executed", and performs an operation for displaying the comparison reference image (reference image). If so, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at any of a plurality of predetermined display positions (see FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)) according to the mode of operation. Processing is performed.

For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is located at the left side position (FIG. 202 (b)) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, the character image as the comparison reference image (reference image) is located at the center position (FIG. 202 (c)) in the display area. When the process of displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is placed at the right position (FIG. 202 (d)) in the display area. ) To display the character image PG.

As is clear from FIGS. 202 (b) to (d), the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) itself has the same form regardless of the display position. , Since the positional relationship between the background image (or decorative pattern) and the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) that can be the target of the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is different, "display in a special mode". The ease of determining whether or not the "processing to cause" is being executed will naturally differ.

For example, when the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is displayed at the position (center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 202 (c), the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is the comparison target. It is displayed so as not to overlap with the background image, and when the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 202 (d) (the right position in the display area). , The character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (standing tag) although it overlaps with the background image to be compared. It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether or not the process of making the image is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the character image PG (particularly, the ruler in this case) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is placed in a "display position suitable for comparison" that differs depending on the type of background image each time. Since it becomes possible to display the image by an operation by a person, it becomes possible to suitably provide a material for determining whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed.

In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is made variable according to the number of operations for the operation button 410 within the predetermined time. However, this is not always the case. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time with respect to the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any of the operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation for an operation means different from that of the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation (reception period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. Will be possible.

Further, since the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function as an effect (expectation degree) by itself, it is necessary to compare and judge with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the expected effect (background image) becomes a worthless image that makes it difficult to see. Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the display is performed by the player, it is desirable that the display is automatically hidden without requiring any operation.

However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (especially the ruler in this case) is displayed as the comparison reference image (reference image) and the type of the background image, "processing to display in a special mode" is executed. In some cases, the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is not enough to compare / determine whether or not the character is in the state of being in the state. Therefore, in the above-mentioned production example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operating means operated to make the character image PG appear is re-operated. If so, the time for which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, each time a predetermined operating means is re-operated, it is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) based on the operated timing, so that the display is intermittent until the player is satisfied. It becomes possible to maintain the display state of the character image PG by performing various operations, and it becomes possible to make a careful comparison and judgment.

However, if such endless continuous display as a comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be extremely easy to determine whether or not special processing is being executed. .. That is, the player may always get a confident conclusion that "the special process is being executed" or "the special process is not being executed", which is a "special aspect". It does not clearly indicate whether or not the process to be displayed in is being executed, and the above-mentioned purpose of making it difficult to recognize is overthrown.

Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler held by the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden each time the predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed. , The comparison reference image (character image PG) Since the display area as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It becomes possible to suitably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed, while making it possible to extend the image.

However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), it cannot be used for comparison with the background image, which reduces the interest of the game. It can be connected. Therefore, regarding the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, the minimum size (here, the length of the shortest ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum size is set. When the size is reduced to the size of, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden is not extended even when the predetermined operation means is re-operated in the state. It is desirable that the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is not further reduced.

Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. .. That is, in this case, each time a predetermined operation means is operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear (or extend the display time), the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole. Is getting smaller (here, the ruler is getting shorter), and finally it doesn't even appear, so when you really want to know if the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed. It will be possible to encourage only the operation, and other than that, it will be expected to concentrate on the original production content.

The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over even after the variation effect is completed and the next variation effect is started. According to such a configuration, a comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable production opportunity, and basically, just by looking at the background image or the decorative pattern SZ, a "special aspect" is provided. It becomes possible to provide a color rendering index (see FIG. 200) for predicting whether or not the "process to be displayed in" is being executed.

Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 is in a state when it is first displayed by an operation with a predetermined operating means after the power is turned on (or the RAM is cleared). After that, each time an operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), and finally it does not even appear. .. However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (if it appears at multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions). It is also possible to prepare a process for displaying the display area as a whole by increasing the display area (here, the ruler is lengthened). According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operating means.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of operating means for which the display positions of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are set to be different are prepared, the operation is performed according to which of the operating means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operation means. In this case, the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set for each operation means (display position), and the specific operation means. When an operation is performed on the above, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operating means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

For example, in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIG. 202, when the first operating means is operated in the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (a), the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (b) appears. It becomes. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the first operating means is re-operated, this is in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state. As mentioned above, it is displayed smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, after that, even when the second operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (c) appears, and the comparison standard accompanying the re-operation of the first operating means The reduced display as an image (character image PG) is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation with respect to the second operating means. Similarly, when the third operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) accompanying the re-operation of the first operating means. The reduced display as is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right side position by the operation with respect to the third operating means.

In this respect, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the center position shown in FIG. 202 (c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (center position). When another operating means (for example, the first operating means) is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the displayed state. Therefore, it is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position where it is difficult to compare with the background image by the operation with the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means. By operating the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. This makes it possible to add an interest in searching for a position at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the ease of comparison.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at a different display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is not displayed. It is not displayed, but the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character image PG) can be displayed at the same time, and the comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are lined up). As a result, the horizontal length can be substantially increased), so a background image that is difficult to compare appears, but the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed. It will be possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when you really want to know if there is one. However, this consumes two "remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (number of operations until the minimum unit is reached)" set for each of the plurality of operation means at the same time. Since it can be generated in exchange for the fact, it can be said that the cost of greatly improving the ease of comparison is also great.

Further, as described above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images) are hidden. In order to lengthen the time during which PG) is displayed at the same time, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, whether or not it is judged whether or not the "special processing is being executed" is determined only by the comparison reference image (character image PG) that appears by the operation on the first operation means, or the price is increased. Even so, it is necessary to make a quick decision as to whether the second operation means is to be further operated to greatly improve the ease of comparison, and the delay in the decision causes a disadvantage on the player side. Since it will be expanded, it becomes possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension.

Further, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character image PG) are displayed at the same time, the timing at which the comparison reference images (character image PG) are hidden is different. The size (length of the ruler) as each comparison reference image (character image PG) also becomes different from each other depending on the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) in each operation means, "the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if a specific operation means is operated, but the comparison reference image is displayed when another operation means is operated. (Character image PG) is displayed ”, so which operation means should be used for the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear. It becomes possible to provide even more fun by adding a judgment element other than the type of the background image to be compared to the judgment.

As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, but the predetermined time elapses. It is desirable that when the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a loss before that, it is hidden as a trigger. That is, as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the effect content in the display area, and by comparison with the background image or the like, it becomes difficult to see. It will be difficult to concentrate on the content of the production. As a result, if you do not notice that you have stopped due to loss, the purpose of the character image PG to be useful for the production will be lost, so you will be stopped due to loss. When this happens, it is desirable to hide the character image PG with this as an opportunity.

However, when the character image PG is stopped due to a big hit, the character image PG may not be hidden and may be continued in the displayed state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the character image PG is stopped due to a big hit, the big hit game is started even if it is not noticed, so that it is a surprise when the character image PG is hidden after a predetermined time has passed. It will be expected to function as a production.

Further, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that the specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. Even in the situation of gazing, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. However, when such a specific sound is output, the following It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain the interest of the game.

That is, although the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set for each operation means (display position), the remaining number of times is set. If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, the production content in the display area becomes difficult to see, and the original production is concentrated. Will be difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) can be output as a sound, while this specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is displayed in a "special mode". Make the sound output acceptable only when is not being executed. In this way, regarding the execution of the "processing to be displayed in a special mode", the specific sound (for example, the bark of a penguins) is not used as a definite suggestion on the affirmative side, but only as a definite suggestion on the negative side (for example, , Penguins' bark), so that players who dislike such specific sounds can concentrate on the original production and the possibility of "displaying in a special mode" is high. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at a certain time.

However, for a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark), a comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by an operation by the player when the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed. Even in the case of, it is desirable that the sound output is not always allowed. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image already displayed is changed (the length of the ruler is short)) by the operation by the player. When a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is output, it is definitely recognized that the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed, but the specific sound (for example, the bark of a penguins) For example, when the penguins' bark) is not output, there are cases where the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed and the state where the "processing to display in a special mode" is not being executed. It becomes possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is not output.

The specific sound (for example, the barking of a penguins) may be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions regardless of which of the plurality of operating means having different display positions is operated. However, if a specific sound can be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions only when a specific operation means is operated among a plurality of operation means, the specific sound may be output. A comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed is displayed, or a specific sound is not likely to be output. It becomes possible for the player to select whether to make a comparison reference image (character image PG) appear, which is useful for determining whether or not the process of displaying in is being executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a small size (the ruler is short) in a special manner. The difficulty of recognizing whether or not the process is being executed is preferably maintained. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, penguin bark) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (for example, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large) is output. For example, if the volume is made lower than when the penguins are output, the recognition difficulty when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended is reduced to some extent. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position so that the comparison reference image (character image PG) does not overlap each other when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 202). It is desirable to set each of. The comparison material with the background image can be increased by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as a transparent image. According to such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, the comparison is performed between the background image and the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG). It becomes possible to perform favorably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a small size (shortening the ruler) each time a predetermined operation means is operated, but this is not always the case, and the point is that it is special. Any aspect may be used as long as it enhances the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in the mode is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively high is gradually enlarged. It may be. That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is "displayed with a specific transmittance", the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed with the specific transmittance is made small (specific among the rulers). It is important to display the part that is displayed with transparency (shorter), and the part that is no longer displayed with specific transparency may be hidden, or with a transparency higher than the specific transparency. It may be displayed to increase the difficulty in visibility.

Further, as described above, the "process of displaying in a special mode" is shown in FIG. 200 (c), for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a) to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b). It may be a dynamic depiction process that changes the display state. When the "process of displaying in a special mode" is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is terminated, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. After the display state shown in 200 (b), the display state is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a).

In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but as a dynamic depiction process. It is desirable that the "process of displaying in a special mode" is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player while the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed, the said. While the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintaining the display state (within 3 seconds), "from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c) to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b), the figure is shown. Since a movement such as "returning to the display state shown in 200 (a)" will always appear, it is possible to facilitate comparison / judgment as to whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

However, the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player while the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintaining the display state (within 3 seconds), "from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c) to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b). After that, the movement such as "returning to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a)" does not always appear, so it is difficult to compare / determine whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. It will be possible to make it. In addition, the strategic nature of being able to extend the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) will be added.

Further, the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or from a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the effect determination. May be done for a long time. Further, "a process of displaying in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) within a period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol SZ to the stop of fluctuation. The "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process performed for a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at predetermined timings different from each other.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, a penguin's bark), the sound output should be interrupted for a time significantly shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the "process of displaying in the special mode" is executed, the specific sound is sounded until after the "process of displaying in the special mode" is executed. Since the output of (for example, penguin bark) is suppressed from being maintained, a specific sound (for example, a specific sound (for example, a process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed. , Penguins' bark) makes it difficult to generate a production situation as if it were denied.

In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) from before the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is executed to after the execution. Become. Therefore, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is executed, for example, the display shown in FIG. 200 (a) is displayed while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. From the state, the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b) is passed, and then the display state is changed to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c).

Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a penguins-like character and a ruler, only one of the penguins-like character and the ruler may be displayed. In short, a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is not subject to the "process of displaying in a special mode" may be able to appear by an operation by the player. However, if a guide image (ruler) showing the unit of length in the horizontal direction is displayed, it is possible to facilitate the judgment as to whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed. It is possible.

The guide image AG in the demo screen shown in FIG. 199 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

[Prevention of mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (role effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume setting value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operating means (operation button 410, sword portion 5010, effect selection left button 331) are to be operated by the player. , The effect selection right button 332, the brightness adjustment button (not shown), etc.) are provided. Then, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variable effect is performed by the decorative pattern, and the game entertainment hobby is given through such an operation effect. I try to maintain.

However, if a large number of operating means are provided in this way, the existence of these operating means becomes conspicuous, so that the player is likely to be the target of mischief. Then, as a result of being treated roughly, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly deteriorated, and it is inevitable that the game interest will be deteriorated.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-game state (a state in which the above-mentioned operation effect cannot occur) in which the game effect according to the jackpot determination is not executed. If there is a high possibility that the operation is detected by multiple operation means and mischievous, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, which suppresses the operation means from being handled roughly. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, among the plurality of operating means included in the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the game is not started (non-gaming state), some predetermined operating means (which should not be required to be operated) ( Here, when the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as an opportunity.
-The effect display device 1600 displays (plays) a specific moving image (warning image) that cannot appear when the game effect according to the jackpot determination is being executed.
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. Control is performed to generate the period) over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). When a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the operation reception regarding the volume is allowed and the volume is increased. The adjustment confirmation sound will also be output, and the operation reception regarding the brightness will be allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound will also be output, and the normal state as a non-gaming state will be returned.

In the production restriction period (function restriction period) according to this embodiment, "even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume is not accepted. "The setting value is not displayed" and "Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted and the current brightness setting value is not displayed". However, only one of the process related to volume adjustment and the process related to brightness adjustment may be restricted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that trigger the generation of such an effect restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the conditions for generating the production restriction period will be complicated and a sense of tension will be given, such as "Isn't the mischievous act actually monitored by the hall side?"

FIG. 203 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a production restriction period is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined production restriction condition in a non-gaming state (during a demo screen, etc.). is there.

Now, the game is controlled to the state where the game is not started (non-game state), and the standby display is being performed on the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative symbol is displayed in the stopped state, and the demo screen. Is displayed, etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, the process of adjusting the volume (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if a predetermined effect lamp is in the light emitting state at the time of the operation, the brightness is adjusted (the brightness setting value is used as the amount of light). Processing to reflect) will be executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

In this way, in the non-gaming state, when the player starts the game, the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated so that the volume and brightness can be set to suit his / her taste. Reception is allowed. Then, when the operation is accepted, it is expected that the player is encouraged to start the game by changing the volume setting value and the brightness setting value accordingly.

However, as described above, in the non-gaming state, an operation for mischief may be performed on a plurality of operation means including such a volume adjustment button and a brightness adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly deteriorated, and it is inevitable that the game interest will be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some operation patterns (detection patterns) to be recognized as mischief detection are prepared, and in the non-gaming state, any of these operation patterns can be used. Based on the detection that the operation has been performed, it is possible to execute a process of generating a production restriction period (function restriction period) in which a penalty is imposed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is determined that the condition related to the effect restriction is satisfied when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state. It is said.
a. When the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be timed with the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 as a trigger, the operation detection for the operation button 410 is newly generated before the first timer time is timed. Further, the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is performed from the start of timing the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) triggered by the operation detection for the newly generated operation button 410 until the timing of the second timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) in which detection conditions such as occurrence again are set
b. The operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is newly generated until the third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be timed with the operation detection for the operation button 410 and the time is finished for the third timer time. In addition, the operation detection for the operation button 410 is performed from the start of timing the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) triggered by the operation detection for the newly generated sword portion 5010 until the operation detection for the fourth timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as occurrence again are set

It should be noted that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and the effect restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when the detection conditions related to the other operation patterns are satisfied, or the detection may be performed. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Further, the first to fourth timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the same timer may be used for timing, or different timers may be used for timing.

Here, "long press on the operation button 410" and "continuous hit operation on the operation button 410 (multiple operations)" are also modes that are not required in the state where the game is not started (non-game state). It can be said. However, since these modes can be instructed to be operated in the operation effect in the game execution state, the player has some purpose (for example, wishing or rehearsal) when starting the game even in the non-game state. It is assumed that these operations can be performed in, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, for the "operation combination for a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation in the order of" sword part 5010-> operation button 410-> sword part 5010 ")" to be detected for the purpose of mischief, the game execution state is set. It can be said that it is important to avoid erroneous detection by setting the operation effect so that the operation is not instructed at a certain time. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is significantly reduced.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, operations for other operating means (for example, sword portion 5010) are performed before and after the operation for the specific operating means (for example, the operation button 410). As a condition, the detection condition related to the above operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the effect restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when the operations for a plurality of operation means are mixed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, players and the like who have only touched once due to their rarity, not the intention of mischief, can be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more preferably avoid a large decrease in the operating rate of the slingshot.

The stricter detection conditions in this way are to prevent the production restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 to drop significantly, and to make it confusing due to mischief. This is because it is expected that various combinations will be used when the machine is operated, and even if the detection conditions are tightened, there is a high possibility that the detection conditions will be satisfied in the future.

In the example shown in FIG. 203, first, the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected at the timing tq1 in the non-gaming state. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is generated based on the detection, and whether or not the second stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer time is completely digested. It will be in the state of judging whether or not (the state of the first stage).

That is, as described above, in the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", three conditions (sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the effect restriction period, and these conditions are imposed. Each time is satisfied one by one, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are to be climbed one step at a time.

At the timing tq1, the first staircase of the three stairs until the production restriction period is generated is climbed. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is exhausted, and the detection condition of the second stage (here, the operation for the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been exhausted, it is returned to the original state (the state of the 0th stage after going down one staircase) in which all of the above three conditions are not satisfied.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 203, the operation for the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time is in the state where the digestion is not completed (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern. (Detection pattern) Of the three conditions of a, the "second stage detection condition" is satisfied. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is generated based on the detection, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the last) until the second timer time is completely digested. It will be in a state (second stage state) for determining whether or not the detection condition) is satisfied.

That is, at the timing tq2, the second staircase of the three stairs until the effect restriction period is generated is climbed. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is completely digested, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation on the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time has been exhausted, it is returned to the original state (the state of the 0th stage after going down two stairs) in which all of the above three conditions are not satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 203, the operation for the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time is in the state where the digestion is not completed (the second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. Of the three conditions of the pattern) a, the "third-stage detection condition (final detection condition)" is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, the effect display device 1600 displays (reproduces) the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect according to the jackpot determination is being executed. Let's get started. At the same time, even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and of course the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and of course the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. , Generates production restrictions. Then, the production restriction period (function restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued from the timing tq3 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of operations are operated in a mixed manner, an effect restriction period is generated, so that the operation by mischief can be suppressed.

Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (go up the stairs), but when the time runs out in the middle of the road, until then I am trying to cancel all the state levels and return to the original state. As a result, even if the game is ended with the state level raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game. Can be avoided.

In addition, in the process of raising the state level (up the stairs) in this way, the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness" which are the operation means to be restricted when the production restriction period occurs. It can be assumed that the "adjustment button" is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) can be set to a volume and brightness that suits the player's taste when the player starts the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated in the process of raising the state level (up the stairs), the state is triggered by this. It is desirable not to cause a change in the level or affect the first timer time, the second timer time, or the like.

That is, in this case, no matter how much the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are targeted for operation by mischief, the production restriction period cannot be generated with this as an opportunity. However, at least the already raised state level does not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period occurs, the target of the production restriction is the "volume adjustment button" or "brightness adjustment button". Since the operations for these will be invalidated at all, the mischief for the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness adjustment button", which are not detected by the mischief, will be appropriately suppressed. Will be expected to do.

Further, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for mischief detection, it is sandwiched between "two operations (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 203) for another operation means (for example, sword portion 5010)". Regarding the "operation (timing tq2 in FIG. 203)" in the form of "specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)", it is a condition that the operation is performed not once but a predetermined number of times. Is more desirable.

That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. The operation on the button 410 is detected, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within the 6th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection is detected again. When the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the detection condition related to the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" is satisfied and the effect restriction period is generated. Further, the 5th to 7th timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the same timer may be used for timing, or different timers may be used for timing.

When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the 6th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the 6th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. , It is more desirable that the detection conditions related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) are not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. Further, within the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds), the operation on the operation button 410, not the operation on the sword portion 5010, is detected again (here, 2 times), which is a specific number of times (here). Then, even when the detection) is performed (3rd time), the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset so that the detection condition related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. Is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) in succession at the timing between the operations of the sword portion 5010 twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. The detection condition is satisfied and the production restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) during the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the effect restriction period is set. Since it will not occur, it is expected that the conditions for the production restriction period will be complicated and that the hall side will actually monitor the mischief. Become.

In order to make such a complexity, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword portion 5010 is performed again within the timer time, or when the operation button 410 is operated again, the operation button 410 is operated. When the operation is performed within each timer time over times (> n times), it is desirable to control the state to a state different from the original state (the state may be different between m times and l times). .. Therefore, even if the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" in the state controlled by these different states, the effect restriction period does not occur.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) during the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the effect restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times). If the production restriction period can be generated (similar to when it is operated n times), the conditions for generating the production restriction period will be made more complicated, and "the mischief act is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that a feeling of tension such as "ka" will be more preferably given. In this case as well, it goes without saying that each time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time is generated and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" that trigger the generation of the effect restriction period will be prepared.

However, such mischief is very different from cheating such as magnet goto, and taking too strict measures may lead to disadvantages on the hall side. Therefore, for the specific video that appears during the production restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning content, the content should be such that it explains the proper handling method related to the game and the production, and the deterioration of the game interest is suppressed. Is desirable.

As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific video is hidden, and "operation reception regarding volume is permitted. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation reception regarding the brightness is allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. ”It will be returned to the normal state as a non-gaming state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the player starts the game at the timing tq4 before the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. It is conceivable that the start winning prize may be generated to shift to the game execution state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In such a case, since the above-mentioned intended purpose of quitting the mischievous act and starting the game has been achieved, the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet passed. End the production restriction period (function restriction period) of something.

However, if the game is started without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility of insufficient reflection, so at least the change in the decorative pattern that triggered the end of the production restriction period. Until the display is finished, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but "Even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output and the brightness. Even if it is adjusted, it is desirable to control it as a partial restriction period such as "The current brightness setting value is displayed but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output."

As shown in FIG. 204, when the game execution state is entered in this way, the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated regardless of whether or not it is controlled during the partial time limit. Become so. Therefore, even if the sword portion 5010 is operated or the operation button 410 is operated, the first timer time and the second timer time are not timed with these as triggers, and the production restriction period may occur. Absent.

According to such a configuration, when the game is shifted to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration as the production restriction period, the game is left in a form in which a part of the restriction contents during the production restriction period is left. Since it will be shifted to the execution state, it will be possible to encourage reflection on the mischievous act without hindering the progress of the game production.

Regarding the partial restriction period, not only until the variable display of the decorative symbol that triggered the end of the production restriction period is completed, but also the decorative symbol is stopped when the number of reservations is 0. It may be continued at least until (until it becomes non-gaming state).

Further, at the timing when the game execution state ends and the game shifts to the non-game state (for example, the timing tq5 shown in FIG. 204), a predetermined safe time is set and until the predetermined safe time elapses. Is desirable to continue the state in which the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated even though it is in the non-gaming state. That is, it is assumed that the excitement of the player has not cooled down in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, and the operation for a plurality of operation means is excessively performed. This is because imposing a penalty may lead to immediate cancellation of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game shifts to the non-game state.

In addition, when the game is shifted to the non-gaming state while being controlled as the above-mentioned partial restriction period, there is a possibility that the reflection on the mischief act is still insufficient, so the partial restriction is performed until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is allowed again when the safe time elapses.

In addition, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from the start to the stop of the variation display of the decorative symbol. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated immediately, the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" can be detected at least until the safe time is terminated. It will be possible to continue the invalidated state or to continue the partial time limit.

In addition, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the form of ending the production restriction period (function restriction period), the symbol variation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned partial restriction period can be continued for a relatively long time.

Further, in the above-mentioned explanatory example, even if the detection approaching the occurrence of the effect restriction period is performed within the detection period for the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (in FIG. 203, the portion where the fine dots are applied), no matter what. The behavior of is also not appearing. However, instead of this, by outputting a specific sound every time the timer time is set in the above operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time going up the stairs where the penalty occurs), it is urged to stop the operation due to mischief. You may do so. This specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of the operating means to be detected. Similarly to this, each time the timer time is set in the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the penalty is generated up the stairs), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. May be good.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

[Noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (role effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume setting value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

By the way, since there are only new customers who are trying to start the game for a while after the hall opens, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment can be frequently performed so that the game can be started with a set value that suits one's taste. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output each time the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is performed, the adjustment confirmation sound reverberates in the hall, ruining the atmosphere. It's a pleasure.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to perform an operation related to volume adjustment or an operation reception related to brightness adjustment from the time the power is turned on until the predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", and the acceptance of changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value can be permitted. It is supposed to be.

According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the set value (volume setting value) and the brightness set value related to the output volume of the effect sound are set to the respective "predetermined specific values". It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by adopting the automatically set "specific value" as the setting value of the volume that many players tend to like, many games are played in the time zone when the hall is just opened. It can be expected that it will be difficult for a person to adjust to a volume setting value or a brightness setting value that suits his / her taste. The establishment of the predetermined condition may mean that a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a may be received, or the peripheral control MPU 1511a may be satisfied. The specific process may be completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value and the volume setting value are set based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied or the predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Allows acceptance of changes in brightness setting values, but does not output volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if changes in those setting values are accepted. A special period (opening-only period) for a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) First, generate it. Then, after the end of such a special period (opening-only period), when the change of those set values is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. There is. As a result, for a while after the hall opens (until the time required for all adjustments by new customers to complete), various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output. Then, it becomes possible to give an opportunity to adjust the volume and the brightness to start the game with the set value that suits one's taste.

FIG. 205 is a time chart showing an example of processing related to a special period (opening-only period).

Now, as shown in FIG. 205, assuming that the power is turned on at the timing tr0, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume by the player until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is controlled as a state in which the operation related to the adjustment and the reception of the operation related to the brightness adjustment are not allowed. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to the game such as a start prize is not allowed, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power restoration appears, or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (design stop display, demo screen, etc.) is still displayed. Do not show.

After that, when the timing tr1 in which the predetermined condition (for example, the predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU1310a) is satisfied, the detection related to the game such as the start winning is allowed, and the game start waiting state (for example, the game start waiting state ( It will be controlled as a state of waiting for a start prize). The effect display device 1600 also displays the stop symbol (standby screen), and can recognize that the symbol is in the change waiting state.

At this time, under the condition that the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", "acceptance of changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is permitted, but they are Even if the change of the set value is accepted, a special period (opening-only period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such a store opening-only period can be continued until the arrival of the timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed from the occurrence of the period, and when the period ends at the timing tr2, the volume is increased. When a change in the set value or the brightness set value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (waiting state for symbol change) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and its back are maintained. Various background images (static display or dynamic display) displayed on the side (images whose priority in the layer is lower than the decorative pattern) are displayed when the store opening period is changed to the normal business period. It won't change.

According to such a configuration, even after the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and the game starts in the waiting state, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening period ends). During), the adjustment confirmation sound is maintained in a state where it is not output, so that it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound reverberating immediately after the store opens. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by new customers has elapsed), the adjustment confirmation sound is automatically shifted to a state where it can be output. By the time various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments will be allowed while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. Moreover, since the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) and the adjustment confirmation sound is automatically shifted to the normal business period, a predetermined time has passed since the store opened. Until this is done, it will be possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to notice that the adjustment sound is controlled during the opening-only period when the adjustment sound is not output.

After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game start waiting state is entered (timing tr1 or later), when the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, the change setting value is corresponding to the effect display device 1600. Parameter display (parameter display on the volume side, parameter display on the brightness side) is performed. Therefore, by checking such a parameter display, it is possible to adjust the set value according to one's preference.

However, even if the output related to the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period immediately after the store opens (the store opening period), changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value will be reflected as the volume and light intensity. In the end, the atmosphere in the hall may be dyed in one color, and there is a concern that the atmosphere will be ruined and it will be a sensation. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the volume setting value is changed before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable not to. Similarly, regarding the brightness, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change in the brightness setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed brightness setting value is used as the amount of light. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (the period dedicated to opening the store), each player adjusts the set value according to his / her preference while checking the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. That is, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust the set value according to one's taste, the atmosphere in the hall is not affected by the sound or light around the pachinko machine 1. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

It should be noted that only the brightness of the volume and the brightness may be maintained in a state in which the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the amount of light even after the timing tr2 arrives. That is, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption increases due to the operation by mischief until the game is started, and the brightness whose power consumption is large compared to the volume is that while the game is not started. It is desirable that the adjustment is not reflected. Further, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output because the degree of adjustment cannot be confirmed.

However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (the time for the opening period has not been exhausted), the symbol variation (variation display by decorative symbol) starts based on the start prize. After that, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment by the player have been completed, and it is expected that the frequency of these adjustments will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, if the start prize is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period ends early based on the detection. It is possible to execute the process of shifting to the normal business period.

However, during the variable display period of the decorative symbol due to the start winning, which ended the store opening period early, changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value are accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output. If this happens, it is assumed that many players will adjust the volume and brightness after the opening period is terminated early, which may lead to a fall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start prize is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is terminated early and the normal business period However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed at least until the fluctuation state of the decorative pattern generated by this is completed (suppression processing during fluctuation).

FIG. 206 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started while the store opening period (special period) is set.

For example, as shown in FIG. 206, it is assumed that the start winning prize is detected at the timing tr3 in which the time as a special period has not yet been digested. Then, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment ends the processing related to the opening-only period and shifts to the normal business period, and starts the fluctuation suppression process in the normal business period. This fluctuation suppression process allows the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to be accepted while the fluctuation display related to the decorative symbol is being performed, and the change of these setting values is the effect sound in the output state. It is possible to execute the process of reflecting the volume and the amount of light of the production lamp in the light emitting state, but the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. " The difference from the "processing required for the opening period" is whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the change in the set value is reflected as the volume and light intensity. Whether or not it is performed, the suppression content for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, such a fluctuation suppression process is performed in a non-gaming state (a state in which the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). Unless it is migrated to, it will continue to run.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation with the short variation time is executed only once), and the non-game state is set at the timing tr4. If it is immediately returned to (the number of holds is 0 and the decorative design is stopped and displayed) (for example, one hour has not passed since the early termination of the store opening period). Even in the state immediately after the store opens), the special period (the period dedicated to the opening of the store) will not occur again.

That is, in this case, in the non-gaming state after the timing tr4, as a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted. It will be controlled. During the normal business period when the fluctuation suppression process is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed brightness setting value is also the light intensity of the effect lamp in the light emitting state. It is supposed to be reflected as. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize that the symbol is in the change waiting state.

A player who creates a situation such as "the opening period (special period) is terminated early and then the game execution state is also terminated immediately" is not convinced by the adjustment contents made while the adjustment sound is not output, so it starts once. Since it is assumed that the person has a desire to make finer adjustments until the game is interrupted, a special period (opening-only period) even if the store has just opened less than an hour after the power is turned on. ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

In the above description example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) for which the store opening exclusive period (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the store opening exclusive period (special period) occurs. , It may be the time until the specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to the respective "predetermined specific values" may be timing tr1 or may be a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned explanatory example, there is a technical feature in the configuration regarding the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after the timing tr1, and the processing in the period before the timing tr1 is different from the above-mentioned contents. It may be realized as a different process.

Further, in the above explanatory example, in the timing tr2, the decorative symbol and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed, but the display change is such that an image different from the decorative symbol and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, it may be done.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

Further, in the above description example, only one of the set values of the volume and the brightness may be changed.

[Control over volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the importance of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (role effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume setting value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the first hit determination is made according to the acceptance of the game ball at the first start port 2002 and the case where the second start port 2004 is performed. Regardless of whether the second hit determination is made according to the acceptance of the game ball, the symbol variation (first symbol variation, second symbol variation) is performed according to the hit determination. After that, a privilege (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player can be given. However, the expected value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol variation).

In the above-mentioned example, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the change in the volume setting value is "a game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed", ". The first-side execution state in which the first symbol change is executed and the second symbol change is not executed, and the second symbol change is not executed and the second symbol change is executed. It is possible to allow it in any of the "second-side execution states", and the numerical range in which the change of the volume setting value is allowed is the same in any of these states.

According to such a configuration, the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like regardless of which state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment through sound adjustment according to each state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "game start waiting state" and "first side execution state" are present, the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed. When this is done, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", it is controlled so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

That is, in the "game start waiting state", since the game is not being executed, the effect sound is not output, and if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, the change is made. It is not possible to confirm the volume of the later volume as an audible sound. Therefore, it is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed in the "game start waiting state".

Further, in the "first side execution state", although there is a situation in which the effect sound corresponding to the first hit determination is output, the situation is a low probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low. It is often controlled to a state (low probability non-time saving game state), so there is not much expectation for the production. In recent years, it has been confirmed that a player plays a game while paying close attention to a mobile device such as a smartphone when the game is in such a low expectation state. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the "first side execution state", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is used to surely notify the player of the change and the volume level after the change. It is desirable to output.

On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", the effect sound corresponding to the second hit determination is output, and the high probability game state (high probability time short game state) in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively high. ) Is often controlled. In such a situation, since the expectation for the production is high, the volume adjustment tends to be performed to enjoy the production. Therefore, it is recommended to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed. It may be difficult to hear the directing sound and BGM according to the two-hit judgment, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the "second side execution state", it is controlled so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound and BGM according to the second hit judgment. It is desirable to give an opportunity to adjust the volume in an environment where the sound can be heard so that the game entertainment can be maintained favorably.

However, in the "second side execution state", the degree of expectation for the production is increasing, and even after the second symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode, the player may change this again to the jackpot mode. It can be said that it is important to secure the time (afterglow) to make people aware of the game in order to maintain the interest of the game. In this regard, if the normal processing when the game is in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after the transition to the "game start waiting state", the processing related to the "second side execution state" is performed. It becomes possible for the player to easily detect that the game has been terminated in a lost manner and the state has been shifted to the “waiting for the start of the game” state, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, when the process related to the "second side execution state" is completed and the state is shifted to the "game start waiting state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition to the "game start waiting state" is performed. Controls so that normal processing (processing that allows a change in the volume setting value and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) is not performed during the "game start waiting state". It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "the volume setting value is allowed to be changed, but the volume setting value is changed. Even so, it is desirable to perform "processing that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound" and "processing that does not allow the change of the volume setting value itself". However, it is more positive that the "second side execution state" may still be continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state". As in the case of the "second side execution state", "a process that allows a change in the volume setting value but does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed" It is more desirable to do so.

On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. Therefore, when the process related to the "first side execution state" is completed and the state shifts to the "game start waiting state", the "first side execution state" is different from the case of the above-mentioned "second side execution state". The above-mentioned normal processing (processing that allows a change in the volume setting value and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed), which is also performed even when in the "state", should be continued as it is. It is desirable to.

By the way, in the situation controlled to the "first side execution state", the mischievous operation is performed so that the operations for a plurality of operation means are mixed and performed within a relatively short time due to the stress that the big hit is hard to win. Is a concern. That is, as a result of being treated roughly, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly reduced, and further deterioration of the game entertainment will be unavoidable.

Therefore, there is a possibility that operation detection has occurred by a plurality of operation means and mischief has occurred not only when the game is controlled to the "game start waiting state" but also when the game is controlled to the "first side execution state". When the situation becomes high, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) in the above-described example of "preventing mischief against a plurality of operating means (see FIGS. 203 and 204)" may be generated.

That is, in this case, some predetermined operations among the plurality of operating means included in the pachinko machine 1 in any of the "game start waiting state (non-gaming state)" and "first side execution state". When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as an opportunity.
-The effect display device 1600 displays (plays) a specific moving image (warning image) that cannot appear when the game effect according to the jackpot determination is being executed.
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. Control is performed to generate the period) over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image in the effect display device 1600 will be displayed even if the image related to the "first side execution state" has appeared before that. When a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the operation reception regarding the volume is allowed and the volume is increased. The normal state as "game start waiting state" or "first side execution state" such that the adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation reception related to the brightness is allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. Will be returned to.

As for the detailed contents and other examples regarding such a production restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt each content in the explanation example of "prevention of mischief for a plurality of operating means". However, in this case, even if the "game start waiting state" is changed to the "first side execution state" while the production restriction period (function restriction period) is in effect, the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early. Various processes related to the production restriction period will be continued as they are under the same conditions as when the game is in the "waiting for game start state". As a result, it is expected that the mischief operation when controlled to the "first side execution state" with a low degree of expectation will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the state is changed from the "game start waiting state" to the "second side execution state" while in the effect restriction period (function restriction period), the above-mentioned "effect restriction period (effect restriction period) is referred to with reference to FIG. "Processing related to early termination of the function restriction period)" and its modified examples will be appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere when the highly expected "second-side execution state" is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected that the game entertainment is appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

Further, in the above description example, only one of the set values of the volume and the brightness may be changed.

[Period of permissible operation reception (validity period), its own color rendering index]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. The variation effect by the corresponding decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (role effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the above decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description, the movement of the movable body, etc. The expected effect will be provided as an effect having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination, the first fluctuation pattern is set regardless of the result of the advance notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“intrinsic reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is permitted when the design effect based on the pattern progresses to a specific timing. Further, even when the second fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of performing the fluctuation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the advance notice effect determination corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern, the first variation pattern is determined. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“additional reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is permitted when the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern of 2 progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the advance notice effect determination, the operation reception effect (effective) that allows the effect reception even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Period) does not occur. A plurality of first variation patterns that generate an "intrinsic reception effect" and a second variation pattern that can generate an "additional reception effect" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that the "intrinsic reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" can be generated in sequence.

However, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined change (effect) for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the valid period. Since only the post-operation effect that generates the display change in the display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the operation reception effect (effective). (Period) The effect of the game itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
-When an operation by the player is detected, the first operation effect means capable of executing the post-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern arrives, and
-When an operation by the player is detected, a second operation effect means capable of performing a post-operation effect in such a way that the elapsed time from the timing at which the detection is made reaches a predetermined time value. I will prepare.

According to such a configuration, there are cases where the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is executed and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is executed, and the operation reception effect (valid period) itself. Since different color rendering properties will be provided to the game, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable until the post-operation effect is executed.

That is, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the post-operation effect is executed up to a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed at an early stage or a late stage within the valid period. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous to operate immediately after the valid period occurs in order to maintain the execution state as the post-operation effect for a long time and enjoy the effect.

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, regardless of the timing within the valid period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until a predetermined time value is reached. After the operation, the effect is executed. Therefore, by not operating for a while after the validity period occurs and operating at a later time, the overall production time from the start of the validity period to the end of the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. It can be said that it is advantageous for enjoying the production.

In this case, the effect generation conditions of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the advance notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. A special result can be obtained in the above, and it is possible to realize that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second fluctuation pattern occurs when the pattern effect (effect pattern) progresses to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. It may be realized as it occurs when the timing is reached.

FIG. 207 shows the first post-operation effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in a manner that continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the valid period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows an example about the operation reception production.

Now, assuming that the first effect condition required for the occurrence of the "first operation reception effect that allows the effect reception" is satisfied, the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. This first operation reception effect (valid period) ends without executing the post-operation effect when the timing tr3 when the predetermined set time elapses without the effect reception being performed. First operation reception that allows production reception During the execution period of the production, an image display that imitates the operation means to be operated and a gauge display that shows how much effective time remains is displayed to encourage the player to operate. Operation promotion effect is performed.

When the first operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound indicating that the effect reception is in the permitted state (or the effect reception is in the permitted state) is output. .. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the reception allowable sound for the above-mentioned predetermined set time, and the above-mentioned predetermined set time has not yet elapsed in the middle stage. At a certain timing tr2, it is set to a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

In addition, "the reception allowable sound is output" here means that "sound data including the reception allowable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr1, and the channel is already assigned. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr1. Alternatively, the "acceptable reception sound" may be output from before the timing tr1 to after the timing tr1 so as to straddle the timing tr1. Further, "setting to a non-output state" here means not only canceling the assigned state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, but also maintaining the assigned state of the sound data to the channel. However, the concept includes that the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is terminated and the period after that (including the silent data) is reproduced.

As described above, in such a first operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is performed as a post-operation effect based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. Although it is started, the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) started in this way is based on the fluctuation pattern regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period. It is set to end when the predetermined timing tr4 in the design effect (effect pattern) arrives. The "operation-induced process using the first effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process for causing the first decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 207, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr1a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is performed. It is executed for a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr2a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Will be executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

According to such a first operation reception effect, it is an execution state as a post-operation effect that the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs (execution state of operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Will be maintained for a long time, and it will be possible to provide a directing property that is advantageous for enjoying the directing.

As will be described later, in the first operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect reception. Even if this is done, the output state of the reception allowable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until the predetermined timing tr2.

FIG. 208 is a time chart showing an example of a second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in a form in which the elapsed time from the timing at which the detection is performed continues until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time value.

Now, assuming that the second effect condition required for the occurrence of the "second operation reception effect that allows the effect reception" is satisfied, the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to the timing tr11. The second operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. In this second operation reception effect (valid period), as in the case of the first operation reception effect, when the timing tr13 when the predetermined set time elapses without the effect reception being performed, the post-operation effect is not executed. It is supposed to end. A time value different from the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Second operation reception that allows production reception Even during the execution period of the production, an image display that imitates the operation means to be operated and a gauge display that shows how much effective time remains is displayed to encourage the player to operate. Operation promotion effect is performed.

Even when the second operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is in the permitted state (or the effect reception is in the permitted state) is output. To. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the reception allowable sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At the timing tr12, which is the timing tr12, the output is set so that the sound cannot be heard.

As for "the acceptance allowable sound is output" here, in addition to newly assigning the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel at the timing tr11, it is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr11. Alternatively, the "acceptable reception sound" may be output from before the timing tr11 to after the timing tr11 so as to straddle the timing tr11. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The "reproduction period of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is a concept including a transition to a period in which sounds (including silent data) after that are reproduced.

As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is performed as a post-operation effect based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. Although it is started, with respect to the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) started in this way, the effect reception is performed regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period. It is made to continue until the elapsed time from the time when it is made reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined set time as a valid period). The "operation-induced process using the second effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process for causing the second decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 208, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr11a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is performed. It is executed from the timing tr11a to the timing tr14 when a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr12a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member). Is executed from the timing tr12a to the timing tr15 (the timing that arrives after the timing tr14) when the predetermined time value has elapsed.

According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the valid period occurs, from the start of the valid period to the end of the post-operation effect. It becomes possible to provide a color rendering property that is advantageous in enjoying the production by maintaining the production time as a whole for a long time.

As will be described later, also in the second operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even if it is executed, the output state of the reception allowable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until the predetermined timing tr12.

As described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208, the first and second operation reception effects (valid period) are given different effects to each other, and the operation reception effects (valid period) are different from each other. By generating the game based on the satisfaction of the conditions, it is expected that the game enjoyment from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (valid period) to the post-operation effect is suitably maintained.

However, the following problems remain just by adopting the configuration related to the first and second operation reception effects (valid period). That is, in these operation reception effects (valid period), it is advantageous to operate at an early stage within the valid period in order to enjoy the effect, and it is advantageous to operate at a late time within the valid period to enjoy the effect. Since the preferred operation timing for enjoying the production is determined, such as when there is, there is still a poor aspect of the performance within the valid period, and there is a concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, it is more desirable that the operation reception effect is executed as a special operation reception effect having the aspect described below.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, if the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern progresses to the timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the generation of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, it is special based on the progress to the timing tr21. Generates an operation reception effect (valid period). As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (valid period) is different from the case of the first and second operation reception effects, and the timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time elapses without the effect reception being performed. This is not the case, and even if there is no operation, the production reception is always generated within the valid period, and the post-operation production described later is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect is set to be longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect.

In addition, even when the special operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound indicating that the effect reception is allowed (or the effect reception is allowed) is output. Will be done. However, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the reception allowable sound (FIG. 209) is generated in response to the first and second operation reception effects (FIGS. 207 and 208). The output state is maintained for a longer period of time. In this explanatory example, the reception allowable sound shown in FIG. 209 is also set to a non-output state at the timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage in which the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed, so that it cannot be heard. However, the reception allowable sound shown in FIG. 209 may be such that the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 arrives.

As for "the acceptance allowable sound is output" here, in addition to newly assigning the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel at the timing tr21, it is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the "acceptable reception sound" may be output from before the timing tr21 to after the timing tr21 so as to straddle the timing tr21. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The "reproduction period of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is a concept including a transition to a period in which sounds (including silent data) after that are reproduced.

In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when the operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the effect is accepted, the "first movable" shown in FIG. 207 is based on the fact that the effect is accepted. "Operation-induced processing using the decorative body (first effect member)" and "operation-induced processing using the second movable decorative body (second effect member)" shown in FIG. 208 are started in parallel. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is started, but the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" started in this way is performed at any timing within the valid period. Even if the production is accepted, it will be terminated when the predetermined timing tr24 in the design production (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern arrives, and "Operation using the second production member" The "caused processing" is started, but with regard to the "operation-caused processing using the second effect member" started in this way, the effect reception is performed regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period. It will continue until the elapsed time from the time when is reached reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined set time as a valid period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 209, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr21a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), among the post-operation effects, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member". Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but in the post-operation effect, the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. It ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr22a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), the post-operation effect "caused by the operation using the first effect member". The "process" is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but among the post-operation effects, the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is predetermined from the timing tr22a. It will be executed until the timing tr26 (the timing that arrives after the timing tr25) when the time value has elapsed.

As described above, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment occurs when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the production reception is performed within the special operation reception production (valid period), "the first production member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the production pattern arrives is used. "Operation-induced processing" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed, respectively.

According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation, the end timing of the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" among the post-operation effects will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate for a while after the validity period occurs and operate it at a later time, this will be applied to the end timing of "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect. Although it can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a demerit that it is not possible to maintain the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" among the post-operation effects for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no most desirable operation timing to excite the production.
-In exchange for shortening the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is completed, the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is lengthened and enjoyed. (Whether to operate at an early stage within the validity period), or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member", do you enjoy extending the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is completed? (Do you operate at a later stage within the validity period?) Or
-The time until the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is maintained as the execution state and the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is completed are sacrificed little by little, and the whole (Is it operated at a timing that is neither early nor late within the valid period?)
It is now possible to give the special operation reception effect itself such a strategic operation effect, which makes it possible to select the operation timing according to the mood of the player, and provides an operation reception effect that does not cause tiredness. You will be able to.

As will be described later, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member, The operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the reception allowable sound is released at this point.

Here, in the above explanatory example, when the effect reception is performed in the special operation reception effect (FIG. 209), "the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached is provided. It was decided to execute "the operation-induced processing used" and "the operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect was received reaches a predetermined time value". .. However, even when a special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, when the jackpot judgment is lost or when the predetermined effect judgment is lost). In the case where the production reception is performed in the special operation reception production, the "operation-induced processing using the first production member" is not performed, and the predetermined production conditions are satisfied (FIG. 209). It is more desirable that the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short is performed in a different effect mode.

According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member to be performed" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" Since the production content is the same as the operation reception effect (first and second operation reception effects) in which only one of them is executed, the tension when the special operation reception effect occurs by giving such an effect risk. The feeling can be maintained favorably. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "from the timing when the effect is received" When the post-operation effect is executed in parallel with the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" that continues until the elapsed time of is reached a predetermined time value, the first operation reception effect or the second operation It is desirable that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than when the post-operation effect appears in the reception effect.

However, this may not be detected well (detection error) even though the operation is performed in the special operation reception effect, and the effect may not be accepted. As a result, the validity period ends without the effect being accepted. In such a case, the player who saw that the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" was not performed even though the operation was performed, misunderstood that the operation reception effect was reduced to only one of them. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, regarding the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the valid period, and "predetermined in the effect pattern". The first operation-induced processing using the first effect member, in which the execution state is continued until the set timing arrives, and the second, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable that "2 operation-induced processing using the effect member" is executed respectively. As a method for automatically generating (automatically accepting) operation reception and a production mode related to this, it is possible to use any of the above-mentioned or later examples, an appropriate combination, and still the written contents. ..

In the above explanation example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect occur, it is decided to output the reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is in the permitted state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 207 to 209, the reception allowable sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated is set to the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect. It is used as a production sound whose playback state can be continued for a longer time than the reception allowable sound output when the production is generated.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is allowed (when an image display that imitates the operation means to be operated or a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains is displayed). By confirming how long the permissible reception sound, which is the output state from, is continued, the operation reception effect is "the first execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached. "Operation-induced processing using the effect member" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that are continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed, respectively. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time during which the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect reception is performed). Therefore, by the time the player recognizes whether or not the operation reception effect is a "special operation reception effect", there is a demerit that the effectary strategy that the player can select is narrowed.

However, even when it is recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception effect, it is important that the effect strategy remains to some extent. Therefore, regarding the output time (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the reception allowable sound output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated, "predetermined as the special operation reception effect (valid period)". It is desirable to execute the operation assuming that the output is set to a non-output state when a specific time, which is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of the above, has elapsed. According to such a configuration, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state when a specific time less than half of the "predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)" has elapsed. As long as the output state is maintained, it will be possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Therefore, the predetermined set time as the "special operation reception effect (valid period)" ( It becomes possible to provide a dramatic strategy in a state where more than half of the time of "timing tr21 to tr23)" is left.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated is in the output state. Even if it is, the output state is maintained, but for the reception allowable sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated, the output state is forcibly terminated when the effect reception is made while the output state is in effect. I have to. That is, in this case, when the production reception is performed in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception production (a situation in which the above-mentioned specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound is output), the operation reception production is performed. It is important to consider whether was the "special operation reception effect" and whether a more promising aspect appeared as the post-operation effect, but one of them (the operation reception effect is the "special operation reception effect"). Whether or not there was) can be easily recognized only by confirming whether or not the output state of the reception allowable sound has been terminated with the reception of the production as an opportunity. For example, even if it is recognized that the output state of the reception allowable sound is not terminated and the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated as a result, the feeling is changed and "more expected as a post-operation effect". It will be expected to concentrate on "whether a high degree of aspect has appeared". In this case, "when a mode with a higher degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect, the effect is designed so that the rate of new special operation reception effect increases before the symbol is stopped. Is desirable.

Further, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, an image display that imitates the operation means used as an operation target in each operation reception effect and how long the effective time is. A gauge display of whether or not it remains is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge display remains (displayed), and the "execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. "Operation-induced processing using the effect member" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that are continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are started, respectively. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the valid period the production reception is performed after the production reception based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether or not the execution state related to the operation-induced processing using the first effect member will end immediately. As a method of starting the effect after the operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, it is possible to use any one of the above-mentioned or later-described examples, or an appropriate combination.

In the special operation reception effect, if it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs by executing the operation-related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect reception before the effect reception is allowed. It is desirable to squeeze. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player preferably enjoys the dramatic strategy over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (valid period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute the operation-related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect reception before the effect reception is allowed. It is expected that the operation-related display will be executed as a "short-time precursor effect inferior to the timing suggestion function" as compared with the case where a special operation reception effect with a high degree of expectation occurs. It is desirable not to have it.

Here, as an operation-related display (a short-time precursor effect lacking a timing suggestion function) performed by the effect display device 1600 prior to the occurrence of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, For example, it is possible to realize an image displayed in a fade-in state (white image or the like) when the "image display imitating the operating means" appears in a fade-in manner.

FIG. 210 is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the operation-related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and the process related to the channel allocation of the sound data including the reception allowable sound. is there.

That is, from an ergonomic point of view, when the validity period occurs, it is only necessary to display the suggestion image (operation-related display) from several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the validity period occurs. It is known that it is possible to operate so that the production reception is performed at an unprecedented timing. However, even if it is for several frames, if the "image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the validity period has not occurred, the "operating means" There may be a situation in which the production is not accepted even though the operation is performed while the "image display imitating" is displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 210, the timing trA arrives several frames before the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation-related display is started based on the above, but in the situation where the validity period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode.

More specifically, in the timing trA, "allowable" that can be realized as a fade-in image in which "an image display imitating an operating means" is displayed in a fade-in manner, a predetermined effect image, or the like. Start "Previous operation related display". Then, when the timing tr1 (or timing tr11) arrives while the "allowable pre-operation related display" is displayed in this way, the "image imitating the operating means" is displayed from the state where the "allowable pre-operation related display" is displayed. The "display" will be shifted to the state of being displayed in the normal mode.

In this respect, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment outputs a reception permissible sound suggesting that the production reception is in a permissible state when the valid period occurs. As shown in FIG. 210, the output of this permissible reception sound is not started at the timing trA, but is started at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

In other words, in order to make it possible to operate so that the production reception is performed at the timing when the validity period has just occurred, the reception allowable sound is also output from several frames before the validity period occurs. I think it is desirable to let them do it. However, if the reception allowable sound is output several frames before the valid period occurs, the output timing will be different from the appearance timing of the "image display imitating the operating means". As a result, it may give a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the period of timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11), it is also possible to output a sound related to the pre-allowable operation different from the permissible reception sound. However, if the permissible pre-operation related sound is output in such a short period of time, the permissible pre-operation related sound may be heard integrally with the reception permissible sound instead of an independent production sound. In the end, there is a concern that it may cause a sense of discomfort as if a sound gap had occurred.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, prior to the occurrence of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-allowable operation-related display) is displayed for several frames. While trying to start from the front, this is not intentionally executed for operation-related sounds (allowable pre-operation-related sounds), and only the reception allowable sound is output when the validity period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 210, the reception allowable sound is output by allocating the “sound data including the reception allowable sound” to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state by ending the allocation state of the “sound data including the reception allowable sound” to the channel. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" itself may be such that the allocation state for the channel is continued even after the timing tr2, for example, the allocation state for the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable accepted sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 210, when the effect reception is performed between timing tr1 to tr2 (timing tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is terminated and "an image display imitating the operation means" is displayed. Is hidden. On the other hand, as for the "sound data including the reception allowable sound", the assigned state to the channel is maintained, and the reception allowable sound is not forcibly terminated in the middle as described above.

FIG. 211 is a time chart showing an example of a process related to an operation-related display when a special operation reception effect is performed and a process related to channel allocation of sound data including a reception allowable sound.

As shown in FIG. 211, also in the special operation reception effect, the operation-related display (allowable pre-operation-related display) is performed from the time when the timing trB before the timing tr21 in which the valid period occurs occurs. However, the "period of timing trB to tr21" has a length more than twice (more preferably 10 times) with respect to the "period of timing trA to tr1" shown in FIG. 210, whereby the period is concerned. In the permissible pre-operation related display displayed in, "the degree of expectation as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted is performed in a manner with high expectation" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear" is displayed. As suggested, any one of a plurality of production modes can be selectively displayed. It should be noted that, in the situation where the valid period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operating means" is not displayed in the normal mode, which is the same as the case of the example shown in FIG. 210.

For example, the content of the "pre-allowable operation-related display" started at the timing trB is different from the "allowable pre-operation-related display" shown in FIG. 210, and the "image display imitating the operating means" is later ( Explained with reference to FIG. 166 to FIG. 184, which is a slightly story-like precursor effect such as repeatedly moving and displaying a plurality of effect images toward the portion displayed at the timing tr21) and hiding the effect image at that location. Any aspect of the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" may be applied). At this time, any one of a plurality of modes can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested by which of these modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives while the "allowable pre-operation related display" is displayed in this way, the "image display imitating the operating means" is performed in the normal mode from the state where the "allowable pre-operation related display" is displayed. It will be shifted to the displayed state.

In this regard, as described above, the special operation reception effect also outputs a reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is in an permitted state when the valid period occurs. As shown in FIG. 211, the sound is output from the timing tr21 as a production sound to be reproduced in a part of the sound data assigned to the channel at the timing trB.

That is, as described above, in the special operation reception production, it is significantly larger than the "minimum time required ergonomically to enable the operation immediately after the valid period occurs" before the valid period occurs. A long time (timing trB to tr21) is used to perform "allowable pre-operation display" with high color rendering. Therefore, in order to further enhance the effectability in such an effect period (timing trB to tr21), an effect sound (permissible pre-operation related sound) corresponding to the "allowable pre-operation related display" displayed within the same period is output. It is desirable to let them do it. Further, since the production period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performing the production, even if the production sound (sound related to the permissible pre-operation) is output within the period, acceptance is permitted. There can be no inconvenience that can be heard as a sound integrated with the sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the permissible pre-operation related display is displayed by the effect display device 1600 and the permissible pre-operation related sound is output, and these output states are set to the timing tr21. I try to continue until. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the state in which the "permissible pre-operation related display" is displayed is shifted to the state in which the "image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "permissible pre-operation related display" is displayed. The state in which "sound" is output is shifted to the state in which "acceptable sound" is output.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 211, one sound data including the reproduction section of the “pre-allowable operation-related sound” and the reproduction section of the “acceptable allowable sound” is set to the channel based on the arrival of the timing trB. By allocating to the above-mentioned effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized.

According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, the reception allowable sound output when the valid period occurs is a part of the sound data assigned to the channel in the form of extending from the precursor effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as a production sound that is reproduced during the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect is generated (when the precursor effect is generated, etc.), and the first half is the effect according to the precursor effect (allowable pre-operation related display). It is possible to suggest the timing of the special operation reception effect by playing the sound (sound related to the pre-allowable operation), and after the validity period occurs, the channel allocation is based on the effect reception. Since it can be canceled as appropriate, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception has been performed. As an output method for "one sound data" including a reproduction section of "acceptable pre-operation related sound" and a reproduction section of "acceptance allowable sound", first, the degree of expectation (when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) After preparing a plurality of sound data having different jackpot symbols (ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols), one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as the result of jackpot judgment (or production judgment (notice judgment, etc.)). It is desirable to realize the above-mentioned effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively allocating to the channel based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the reproduction section of the "allowable pre-operation related sound (precursor effect)", but different in the reproduction section of the "acceptable pre-operation sound (operation reception effect)". It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

That is, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed between the timings tr21 to tr22, the state in which the effect reception is permitted is terminated and the "image display imitating the operation means" is hidden. In addition to this, the allocation state for the channel is also terminated for "sound data including acceptable acceptable sound", and the output related to the acceptable acceptable sound is forcibly terminated in the middle of the process. As described above. Therefore, by confirming whether the reception allowable sound is forcibly turned off when the production reception is performed, the player can confirm that the special operation reception production was executed even after the production reception was performed. Will be able to recognize.

Even if it is one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half part) of the production sound (permissible pre-operation related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (permissible pre-operation related display) is in the playback state. In the situation (timing trB to tr21), even if the operation by the player is performed, this is not forcibly terminated. The allocation state to the channel is released based on the operation by the player only in the situation (timing tr21 to tr22) in which the section (second half) of the effect sound (acceptable reception sound) corresponding to the valid period is in the playback state. It becomes.

The one sound data (sound data including the permissible pre-operation related sound and the reception permissible sound) is assigned before the timing trB, and is already in the assigned state at the timing trB. May be good. Further, as described above, the allocation state for the channel may be continued after the timing tr22, and for example, the allocation state for the channel may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable accepted sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr22.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state by ending the allocation state of the “sound data including the reception allowable sound” to the channel. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" itself may be such that the allocation state for the channel is continued even after the timing tr2, for example, the allocation state for the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable accepted sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

In the configurations shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, "a plurality of allowable reception sounds having different lengths for maintaining the output state" are prepared as reception allowable sounds accompanying the occurrence of the operation reception effect, and the production reception is performed. The special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), which have different effects after the operation, generate different reception allowable sounds. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the reception allowable sound is continued, there is a demerit that the above-mentioned directing strategy is narrowed, but the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) It becomes possible to recognize which of the two operation reception effects) is occurring.

Moreover, the plurality of reception allowable sounds include the first reception allowable sound (special operation reception production) whose output state is terminated when the operation by the player is received, and the output state continues. The second reception allowable sound (first and second operation reception production) to be performed is included. Therefore, when the operation is performed so that the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, the special operation reception is performed by confirming whether the reception permissible sound output state is terminated when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

However, the acceptable reception sound should be in the non-output state when the valid period ends, and the output state is maintained when the post-operation production is started. If there is, it may interfere with the production. In this regard, in the above description example, the reception production sound whose output state is terminated when the production reception is performed is the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( It is used as a special operation reception production).

That is, in this case, when the production reception is performed in the output state of the "second reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively short", the output state is maintained. However, since the time setting value for maintaining the output state of the second reception allowable sound is short in the first place, it will soon be in the non-output state, and it can be said that it does not interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the production reception is performed in the output state of "the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long", the original time setting for maintaining the output state is performed. Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so it does not interfere with the production.

Moreover, by confirming how long the output state of the reception allowable sound is continued, it is recognized whether the special operation reception effect or the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player who wants to use the sound, if the output state of the reception allowable sound is maintained at the stage when the time setting value for the second reception allowable sound has elapsed, the first reception allowable sound is not the second reception allowable sound. It is possible to predict that is in the output situation. In this regard, even if it is not confirmed that the output state of the first reception allowable sound is terminated, it is possible to confirm that the first reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state when the production reception is generated. It will be possible to confirm at an early stage whether the prediction that the special operation reception effect is occurring is correct.

Further, in the configurations shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, the pre-allowable operation-related display suggesting that the valid period will soon occur is performed, but the pre-allowed operation-related display is performed. The operation-related display includes a first permissible pre-operation-related display (see FIG. 210) having a short display time and a second permissible pre-operation-related display (see FIG. 211) having a long display time. In this regard, when the first permissible pre-operation related display with a short display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptable pre-acceptance sound" is not assigned to the channel, and " By assigning "sound data including the reception allowable sound" to the channel, the reception allowable sound is put into the output state. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first permissible pre-operation related display is not output, but the operation from the time when the valid period occurs can be promoted without causing a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred. become able to.

On the other hand, when the second permissible pre-operation related display having a long display time is performed, "sound data including the accepted permissible sound" is transmitted to the channel from the time when the second permissible pre-operation related display is performed. The reception allowable sound is set to the output state by setting the allocation state and ensuring that the reproduction section of the reception allowable sound arrives at the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (when the precursor effect occurs, etc.), and the first half part is the precursor effect (allowable pre-operation related display). It is possible to suggest the timing of the special operation reception effect by playing the effect sound (sound related to the pre-allowable operation) according to the above, and after the validity period occurs, it is based on the effect reception. Since the channel allocation can be appropriately released, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception has been performed.

That is, in the permissible pre-operation related display shown in FIG. 211, the permissible pre-operation related sound corresponding to the permissible pre-operation related sound is output, and the reception permissible sound is further output when the valid period occurs, but the permissible pre-operation related sound shown in FIG. 210 is output. In the display, the corresponding pre-allowable operation-related sound is not output, and the acceptable pre-allowance sound is output when the valid period occurs.

In the above explanatory examples shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, as the "effect member", the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, the movable decorative body, and the like can be used. Further, as the "first effect member", any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted, and as the "second effect member", any one of them can be adopted. It is possible to adopt any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, which is different from the "first effect member".

Further, in the above explanatory example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same or may be different between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). When the operating means to be operated is different, the images displayed within each valid period will be different.

In the first operation reception effect, it was decided to execute "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" as a post-operation effect. "The execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached" and "The operation-induced processing using the first effect member" and "The execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached". The operation-induced processing using the second effect member to be performed ”may be executed as the post-operation effect, respectively. Further, the operation-induced processing using the first effect member and the effect member different from the second effect member may be further executed, but in the post-operation effect according to the first operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The cause processing is also executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

In the second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" is executed as the post-operation effect. However, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" and "a predetermined timing in the effect pattern has arrived". The "operation-induced processing using the second effect member", in which the execution state is continued until the operation is performed, may be executed as the post-operation effect. Further, the operation-induced processing using the first effect member and the effect member different from the second effect member may be further executed, but in the post-operation effect according to the second operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The causal process is also executed assuming that the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received is continued until a predetermined time value is reached.

In the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received" It was decided to execute "operation-induced processing using the second effect member", which is continued until the specified time value is reached, as a post-operation effect, but an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is used. The operation-caused processing used may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, the operation-induced processing that is executed assuming that the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and the elapsed time from the effect reception timing are predetermined times. It may be a mixture of operation-based processing that is executed as being continued until the value is reached.

Further, in the above explanatory examples shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, the valid period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the valid period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I am trying to do it. By setting such a long time, it becomes possible to enjoy the above-mentioned effective period with the dramatic strategy.

In the first permissible pre-operation related display (see FIG. 210), which has a short display time, "expectation degree as to whether the post-operation production performed when the production reception is performed is performed in a highly expected manner" or "big hit". Although "expectation that the symbol appears" is not suggested, in the second permissible pre-operation related display (see FIG. 211), which has a long display time, "expectation of the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted" is not suggested. It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation that the game will be performed in a high manner" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear".

In the "valid period of the special operation reception effect" set as a relatively long time value, by making one of a plurality of display modes having different expectations appear, "after the operation performed when the effect reception is performed" It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether the production is performed in a highly expected manner" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear".

Further, in the special operation reception production, regardless of the timing of the production reception within the valid period, the "production by the first production member generated by the production reception" is "due to the production reception". In order to make the player recognize that the content of the effect is the same as the effect after the operation, so that the execution state is terminated earlier than "the effect by the second effect member generated". desirable.

In the above explanatory examples shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, as the pachinko machine 1, the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect can be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. However, this does not occur because the first operation reception effect is not installed, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be allowed to occur based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not occur because it is not installed, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect may not be generated as they are not installed, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. ..

The special operation reception effect shown in the above explanatory example shown in FIGS. 207 to 211 outputs specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to the channel in a suppressed mode or silently. Among them, it may generate a state in which production reception is permitted.

[More detailed color rendering of acceptable sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected effects (such as notice effects) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (role effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the above decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description, the movement of the movable body, etc. The expected effect will be provided as an effect having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the fluctuation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the design production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (valid period) that allows. However, as will be described later, the mode of the reception allowable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated is changed according to the result of the effect determination, whereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is intended to suggest the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, when the design production based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, the operation reception is permitted. Reception production (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected, the operation reception effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. Further, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above "specific variation pattern", the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of the result obtained as the advance notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable not to do so, or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is predetermined for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only the post-operation effect that causes the change (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the operation is performed. Reception production (valid period) The production performance of itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decline until the production is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol production (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is performed in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of the low-expected non-suppressed reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected fluctuation pattern (specific variation pattern), the variation pattern (effect pattern) is used. Corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (the playback period in which the audible sound of the sound data is recorded has expired, or channel allocation It is possible to at least generate a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while it is set to (such as the end of).

In such a configuration, when the output in the non-suppressed mode of "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is maintained when the operation opportunity is given (low expectation unsuppressed reception effect), "BGM reproduction" (Specific type of production sound) ”is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is put in a non-output state (suppressed operation reception effect), and the mode related to those operation reception effects (low expectation non-suppression reception). Since the ratio of winning big hits (expectation level) will differ depending on the production and high-expectation suppression reception production), the performance when the operation opportunity is given (when the operation opportunity is given, " BGM reproduction (directing sound of a specific type) "can be suppressed or not, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

However, in the high-expectation suppression reception production, "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppression mode or silently when an operation opportunity is given, so that the high-expectation suppression reception production is compared with the low-expectation non-suppression reception production. There is concern that the production will be poor.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is a reception allowable sound. It is possible to output as. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the poor performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the reception permissible sound output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated is larger than the reception permissible sound output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. It is used as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long period of time, and this also preferably suppresses the poor performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

On the other hand, in the high-expectation suppression reception effect, when an operation opportunity is given, "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppression mode or silently, or is put in a non-output state. There is also an aspect that when a post-production occurs, it becomes possible to make the production sound corresponding to it stand out, and in this respect, it can be said that it is useful for improving the game entertainment. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, with respect to the reception allowable sound output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. And, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the production reception has been made. As a result, it becomes possible to make the effect sound according to the effect after the operation stand out without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect is set to "If the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception, the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends. Not only can it be generated by the non-automatic reception mode that is performed, but also the automatic reception mode that can generate the post-operation effect even if the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception. It can also be generated by.

That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, even if the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not perform the operation, and as a result, the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. However, as will be described later, more strictly speaking, the output time required for the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time required for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect is detected by the operation. It is designed to be shorter than when it was done.

Further, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the operation is not detected, the effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (automatic button function is enabled). Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect reception. That is, in this case, since the production reception will always occur by the time the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the production reception may be performed within the set time after the specific timing. It will disappear, and the length of the valid period for which the production reception is allowed will be substantially shortened. As a result, unlike the case where the effect is started after the operation after the set time has expired, the automatic button function is enabled by accelerating the effect tempo instead of causing an effect delay. It will be possible to realize it.

In addition, if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity will be substantially lost even though the set time has not expired. It is expected that the player will be afraid of this and will actively operate at an earlier stage within the set time, or will play with a sense of tension in the production.

In order to obtain such effects, the "gauge display of how much effective time remains" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is until the specific timing when the automatic button function is enabled. It is desirable to display it as suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses, not suggesting the remaining time. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes "0".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, not only the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode but also the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated. It is possible to output a reception permissible sound that suggests that the production reception is in an acceptable state or that the production reception is in an acceptable state. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a situation in which the production reception is automatically generated due to forgetting to operate and the production reception cannot be generated by one's own operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated, it is not output when the operation reception effect is generated in the non-automatic reception mode. Since the sound can be output as the reception allowable sound, by confirming the type of the reception allowable sound, an operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode is generated. You will be able to recognize that you are.

On the other hand, in the post-operation effect, there is usually a risk of the effect being executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, it is not always good to operate the post-operation effect so as to improve the game entertainment. There is also an aspect that is not always the case. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception allowable sound is output for a sufficient time to suggest that the production reception is permitted, the reception allowable sound in the output state is output. By ending it relatively early, we are trying to create "a time when we can think about whether or not to generate the production reception" while the reception allowable sound is not output.

However, even in the operation reception production executed in the automatic reception mode, if the reception allowable sound is terminated early, there is a concern that it may lead to a misunderstanding that "the production reception is no longer permitted due to the function of the automatic button". Occurs. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, the output state of the reception allowable sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button is not yet functioning and the production reception is permitted. It is designed to suggest that it is in a state, and by extension, it becomes possible to encourage the player to operate it with a sense of security that the automatic button is not yet functioning.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect, the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is set to a non-output state. The operation opportunity is given while the suppression reception effect (here, high expectation suppression reception effect) and "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" are output in a non-suppression mode. While the non-suppressed reception effect (here, low-expected non-suppressed reception effect) can be generated in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the effect reception is now permitted, or the effect reception. There is a technical feature in that each of the acceptable reception sounds, which suggests that is in an acceptable state, is generated in a form that further enhances their unique directing performance.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In explaining the technical features, if the "acceptable sound for reception" is explained again, the "allowable sound for reception" means that the production reception is permitted. It suggests that the output is started within the set time and the production reception is allowed, or the output is started before the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed. It is suggested that the state is reached, and is output as a directing sound such as "Pickin". However, if the output state is set before the set time that allows the production reception occurs, the output state of the "acceptable sound for reception" must be maintained across the timing when the set time occurs ( It is required to be in the output state even within the set time (within the period when the production reception is allowed), and it is more than the time from when the "reception allowable sound" is put into the output state until the set time occurs. It is desirable to set so that the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the "acceptable sound" is longer. In this sense, the "acceptable sound" means that the sound can be output only when the set time (valid period) occurs, and is in the output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) according to an operation by a player or with the passage of an output time.

Further, the "acceptable sound accepted" may be assigned to a channel and output as a single production sound data (see FIG. 210), or another production sound (for example, a set time (valid period)). ) Is executed before the occurrence of), and the production sound that is output in accordance with the above-mentioned "specific operation-related production" etc.) is assigned to the channel and output as one production sound data. (See FIG. 211), and the method for realizing the present invention may be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 212 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the low expectation non-suppressed reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

Now, as a result of the start condition being established (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, the "predetermined fluctuation" of the "low expected fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed" Assuming that "Pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the predetermined variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the predetermined variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the advance notice effect is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) related to the above-selected "predetermined variation pattern". Including each effect example described below, the effect pattern determination (sub control side) is performed based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination (main control side), and the advance notice determination (sub) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. When performing the control side), regarding the processing related to the advance notice effect, the "variation pattern determination" may be replaced with the "effect pattern determination" and the "variation pattern" may be replaced with the "effect pattern".

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 212 (b), the variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. When the timing tr32, which has passed a predetermined time from the start, arrives, an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated during the execution period of the effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is
-"Non-suppressed reception effect (Fig.)" That sets the set time at which the effect reception is allowed while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. 212 (a), (b)) ”, and ・ If the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) where the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect does not occur and the effect is concerned. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 212 (j))" at which the set time ends
It is designed to be generated as a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), the "BGM reproduction sound" is suppressed, so that the operation reception effect is generated. Since the set time (valid period) that allows the reception of the production is suddenly set without any effect such as suggesting (non-suppressed reception production), the player is surprised. It becomes a form of sagging, and delays are likely to occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time is terminated without any post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making people aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to generate the effect after operation, it is preferable to feel the tension when the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is being executed. You will be able to maintain it.

However, although it is executed as such "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is terminated without the post-operation effect occurring, contrary to the player's intention. If such a thing happens frequently, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 212 (b), (c), and (g), the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) at which the effect reception is allowed occurs. When the timing tr31 arrives a little earlier, the output of the "acceptable sound" is started, and the output state is maintained so as to straddle the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production reception is permitted at the timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and "contrary to the player's intention, after the operation. It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently indicate that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is terminated without producing an effect. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and for example, it is adjusted to the generation timing of the set time generation timing tr32. May be generated.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptance allowable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" And "press!" A second permissible sound that is output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 212 (d) and 212 (h), in the operation reception effect (valid period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), The second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. It is designed so that a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when a person tries to operate it.

By the way, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time (valid period) or the execution as a non-automatic reception mode. It is thought that some players may try not to miss the opportunity to generate the effect after the operation by repeatedly hitting the operation means (here, the operation button 410) from the state where the effect reception is not allowed. Be done. However, in this case, since the post-operation production is started immediately after the production reception is permitted, the started production is "the one performed according to the production reception (post-operation production)". It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere notice production that has nothing to do with the production reception", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212 (particularly, FIG. 212 (c)), in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the production reception is performed at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself is terminated, while the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the first 1 The output state is maintained until the timing when the output as the allowable sound ends (the same timing as when there is no operation (Fig. 212 (g)). As a result, the started production is "according to the production reception". It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "what is being performed (effect after operation)" or "what is automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect that has nothing to do with the effect reception". become able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 212, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. 1) is used as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1 effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in a state where the timing tr33 has not been completed. It is required to maintain the output state.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 212, when the timing tr32 for which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 uses the operation means that is the operation target in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect. Along with displaying the imitated image, a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed. As a display method for the image or gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted, and the display images (image, gauge display) have been accepted for production. Based on this, it will be hidden (both will be hidden at the same timing).

However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a "special effect mode (automatic button effect state)" that enables the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. , It may be possible to set and cancel the setting to the "special effect mode" by the operation by the player. That is, in this case, even if the operation reception effect occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the operation reception effect is set to the "special effect mode". , "Non-suppressed reception effect" and will be executed in the above-mentioned "automatic reception mode", and only when it is not set to "special effect mode", "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" Will occur as. However, in the specification (particularly, "more detailed color rendering properties for acceptable sound reception" and related descriptions), unless otherwise specified, the "special production mode" is not set. In some cases, the pachinko machine 1 will be described as an example of production when the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with a "special production mode".

FIGS. 213 and 214 are time charts showing an example of the content of the effect when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

Now, as a result of the start condition being established (holding digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time saving) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, high expectations for the development of "SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)" Assuming that the "specific fluctuation pattern" is selected from the "variation pattern", the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the effect determination is made within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the above is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) related to the above-selected "specific fluctuation pattern".

However, as described above, in the effect (effect pattern) related to the "specific fluctuation pattern", as shown in FIG. 213 (b), regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). In addition, when the timing tr42 (timing within the SP reach state) in which a specific time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol arrives, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr42 within the specific fluctuation pattern is described.
-A "suppression reception effect (FIG. 213 (a)) that sets a set time during which the effect reception is allowed while the" BGM reproduction sound "corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is output in a suppression mode or silently. , (B)) ”, and ・ Even if the operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) where the production reception is allowed. When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the post-operation effect is started based on the effect reception being performed. Aspect (see FIG. 213 (j)) "
It is designed to be generated as a "suppression / automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in a suppressed mode or in silence, a method of presetting a silence section (suppression section) in the data of the "BGM reproduction sound" itself or the "BGM reproduction sound" itself. A method of changing the setting of the volume value for the channel to which "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned to a suppression value (for example, "0"), a combination thereof, or the like can be adopted. As will be described later, this "suppression / automatic reception effect" is also referred to as a "second suppression operation reception effect", and the suppression mode here is also referred to as a "strong suppression mode".

According to such a configuration, the "sound of BGM reproduction" is suppressed during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) related to the specific fluctuation pattern). Since the set time (valid period) at which the production reception is allowed is set with the effect such as suggesting the occurrence of the operation reception effect by outputting in a mode or silence (suppression reception). (Direction), from the player's point of view, it becomes easier to perform the operation immediately after the operation reception effect is generated. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. Because of this (automatic reception mode), it becomes possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation is not overlooked.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as in the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", FIGS. As shown in, when the timing tr41 arrives a little before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) that allows the production reception occurs, the output of the "acceptance allowable sound" is started and the timing tr42 is straddled. Is trying to maintain the output state. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM reproduction sound" is being output in a suppressed mode or silently, a state in which the production reception is permitted at the timing tr41 will soon occur. It is expected that it will be possible to recognize what to do, and it will be difficult to frequently say that "contrary to the player's intention, the production reception is done by enabling the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation". Become so. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) occurs, and is generated in accordance with the generation timing tr42 of the set time, for example. You may do so.

However, with respect to the timing tr40 at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is shifted from the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode to the state of being output in the suppressed mode or silent (or the non-output state), the above-mentioned action is performed. In order to preferably obtain the effect (suppression reception effect), as shown in FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (c), there is a relationship such as "length of timing tr40 to tr41> length of timing tr41 to tr42". It can be said that it is important to set the sound so that it arrives well before the "output start timing tr41 of the above-mentioned reception allowable sound that occurs in advance of the set time" so as to have the property.

Further, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213 (c), (d), (g), and (h), the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" As a "reception allowable sound", not only the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" But also the second allowable sound output as a message sound such as "press!" Also, when the timing tr41 arrives, the output is started at the same time, and the output state is maintained in the form of straddling the timing tr42.

According to such a configuration, the effect display device 1600 determines which of the plurality of operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) included in the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since there is a possibility that the image of the operation means to be operated can be recognized from the time when the image is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), the operation reception effect is immediately generated. It becomes easier to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target" are selected based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. When there is a "selection" and the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as "press!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Deliver the sword!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

In the production example shown in FIG. 213, the output of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is started at the same time, but the timing at which the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are started to be output is different from each other. The output state may be sequentially set. In this case, the output of only one of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound may be started from a state in which the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) and 213 (h), the "first permissible sound" is adopted as the production sound that is output for a relatively short time, and the "second permissible sound" is adopted. Is adopted as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long time, but the long-short relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, regarding the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound", as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) and 213 (h), it is assumed that the output states are maintained for different times from each other, and their outputs are output. It is desirable that the time when the state ends (the time when the state is made inaudible) arrives at different timings before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound for reception" is in. It will be possible to do so, and it will be expected that it will be difficult to frequently say that "contrary to the player's intention, the production reception is done by enabling the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation".
-First situation in which both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" maintain the output state-The output state of one of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" is maintained. However, the other is ending the output state (being in an inaudible state). Second situation-Both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" are finished in the output state. Third situation (which is inaudible)

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 212 and the "suppression / automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, "Pickin!") Is output as the "first permissible sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is output as a production sound that is not output by the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", but the effect sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds. Regarding the first permissible sound), since it can be output as a production sound that is also output in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", when the "BGM reproduction sound" is suppressed. It becomes possible to more easily recognize that the production reception is in a permissible state (first permissible sound) while maintaining the effectability appropriately (second permissible sound).

The timing tr41 to tr42 (or timing tr31 to tr32) when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is output in advance of the set time (valid period) or the image display. The time may be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in the control (processing) unit, or may be two or more frames. That is, if the set time (valid period) and the image display can be output even a little earlier, the player is in a state where the production reception is permitted, and the operation means targeted for operation. Since there is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize which one is earlier by the preceding time, the period until the set time ends and the timing when the automatic button function is enabled are It will be expected to prevent people from forgetting to operate within the period until the arrival.

By the way, as described above, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity may be lost by enabling the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (valid period). Is. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIGS. 213 (c) and 213 (d), unlike the case of the production example shown in FIG. 212 (c), the reception permissible sound (at least one of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) If the production reception is made while the one) is in the output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the production reception is made. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is performed, the output of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and the production reception is permitted by this (the production reception is permitted). Since it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period) has expired, "a state in which the production reception has not yet occurred and the automatic button function can be enabled (a state in which the operation opportunity can be lost)". It becomes possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is in. If the operation is performed and the production is accepted before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period), the production is performed when the production is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not enabled even if the timing tr42A arrives because the state in which the reception is permitted is terminated.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr42a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception) At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), regardless of the timing within the set time (valid period), the effect is received at a specific timing that arrives after the timing tr43. While it is hidden (invisible), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. ing.

However, as shown in FIG. 213, regardless of the timing within the set time (valid period), the effect sound output (effect sound) after the operation is "BGM playback sound". It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained at the time when the timing tr44 for returning the output from the suppressed state (silence state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode arrives. On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, the output state is terminated at the timing tr44 when the "BGM reproduction sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the "BGM reproduction sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effectability is improved. It will be expected to be significantly changed to improve the color rendering index. The "BGM reproduction sound" may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Further, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be terminated at a specific timing after the timing tr44 instead of the timing tr44.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, when the timing tr42 for which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays the operation means that is the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. Along with displaying the imitated image, a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed. In this respect, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in view of the fact that a message sound (for example, "press!") As the second allowable sound is output, the effect display device 1600 also has a non-automatic reception mode. A message display (for example, "press!") That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in is displayed. As a display method for the image, gauge display, and message display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted, and these display images (image, gauge display, message display) can be adopted. Will be hidden (both are hidden at the same timing) when the set time has not yet elapsed based on the occurrence of the production reception. The message display does not necessarily have to exactly match the content of the message sound, and may be any one that prompts the operation.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) to 213 (i), before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period). While the output state of the message sound is terminated (in an inaudible state), the message display is designed to maintain the display state even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, and further. After the automatic button function is enabled, it is not hidden (invisible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends arrives. The display state may be maintained after that. Since the set time (valid period) is terminated when the effect reception is performed, it is actually terminated at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated arrives. Therefore, strictly speaking, the "timing tr43 at which the set time ends" means the timing at which the set time ends when the set time is supposed to continue, and the time set at the timing tr42 is set. It is a timing that arrives when the timing tr42 has passed.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) may be terminated halfway (non-audible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or the operation detection for the operation target prompted by the message display. You will be able to suggest to the player that you are not in the situation. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both the operation reception effect (FIG. 212) that is not executed in the automatic button mode and the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) that is executed in the automatic button mode. Within the set time (valid period), the remaining time display (gauge display) suggesting the remaining time until the end of the state in which the production reception is allowed ends can be performed. Then, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 212) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time elapses. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when this time becomes "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without the operation being detected, the automatic button function is enabled and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, the production reception is not allowed even if the set time has not yet elapsed after the arrival of the specific timing tr42A. Therefore, if the "remaining time display (gauge display) suggesting the remaining time until the end of the state in which the production reception is allowed ends" is performed within the set time of the operation reception effect (FIG. 213), it is normal. Is conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, the effect reception is permitted after the specific timing tr42A arrives. Even though it disappears, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically changed based on the time until the set time elapses, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. I am trying to display it. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0". However, here, since the production reception is always shifted to the state where the production reception is not allowed before the set time becomes "0", the production reception is not allowed with the gauge amount remaining. It will be transferred to the state.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed by enabling the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left, so that the player's intention On the contrary, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "loss of operation opportunity", which makes it possible to operate at an early stage regardless of the remaining gauge amount in the set time (valid period) from the next time onward. You will be able to encourage them to do.

Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception occurs due to the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time elapses (FIG. 213). Gauge display) can be hidden (invisible). On the other hand, when the effect reception occurs by enabling the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in the state where the set time has not elapsed, and at least the setting is performed. Until the end of the time, the "dynamic display mode in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest to the player that the production reception is not performed by the operation detection for the operation target for which the operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

As described above, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 213, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. There is a case. That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr32 in FIG. 212, there is no "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target", and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, it is possible to set the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred, contrary to the player's intention. It is desirable to control the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 213, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means of is operated, it is desirable that the effect reception is performed and the effect is executed after the operation. That is, if a situation appears in which the production is not accepted even though the operation means is operated, the player may be confused, and in such a situation, it is appropriate to interrupt the erroneous operation state. Since it is harsh to request further operations on the operating means on the side, even if an erroneous operating state is maintained, the production is accepted when the operating means on the operating target side is operated. It is desirable to do.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 213, the matters described in the above-mentioned “suppressed operation sound output processing (FIG. 142)” and other examples thereof can be appropriately adopted. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, and tr44 in the production example shown in FIG. 213 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, and ts16 in the production example shown in FIG. 142, respectively. Become.

However, as described above, in the suppressed operation reception effect, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence, so that the effect is poor compared to the non-suppressed operation reception effect. Is a concern. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception allowable sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is larger than the reception allowable sound output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are provided. It is prepared, and any one of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 212 (c) and (g) and 213 (c) and (g), and is the "time maintained as an output state". Is set as the shortest aspect of the above-mentioned plurality of aspects. Further, it is desirable that the rate (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped differs depending on which of the above-mentioned plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that "which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound" and "which of the plurality of operating means is used as the operation target" are obtained as separate determination results within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination. Alternatively, one determination result may be obtained within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permissible case is in either case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable to be able to select it as a sound. Further, also in the second aspect and the third aspect, it is possible to select either the case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the case where the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. You may do so.

FIG. 214 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the second mode is used as the first reception allowable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

As shown in FIG. 214, this effect example is basically the same as the case of the above effect example described with reference to FIG. 213, including the generation conditions and the effect contents (further, description of another example thereof, etc.). Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the advance notice effect determination, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, which is longer than the first mode, in the timing tr41, instead of the first mode. The difference is that the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained for a longer time than that of the second permissible sound.

According to such a configuration, the reception allowable sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output in a longer time than the reception tolerance sound (first mode) output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. Since it is possible to output as a sound to be maintained, the color rendering property is suitably maintained even in a situation where "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently when an operation opportunity is given. You will be able to.

Further, in order to improve the effectability in the suppression operation reception effect, as the first allowable sound output in the second aspect, a sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. It is desirable to do.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 213 and 214, there are "a case where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "a case where the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. It is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is targeted for operation. Therefore, also in this production example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner as in the production example shown in FIG. 213 (for example, "press!"). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 214 (c) and 214 (g), the first permissible sound is output in the second mode. However, by ending the output state of the first permissible sound (inaudible state) before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, the automatic button function can be used in this production example as well. It is possible to estimate how much time is left until the activation timing tr42A arrives from the output status of the reception allowable sound.

In particular, in this production example, the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained even after the output state of the "second permissible sound" output in the production example shown in FIG. 213 is completed. By confirming this, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated arrives, as compared with the case of the production example of FIG. 213. become. Further, by outputting only the first permissible sound out of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound in a longer alternative mode (second mode), the player side first uses the second permissible sound in common. 2 Based on the timing at which the output state of the permissible sound ends, the "remaining time until the timing tr42A arrives" is estimated, and the first permissible sound is selected with a sense of security that the estimation is performed as usual. Since it becomes possible to make more detailed guesses in a challenging manner by using it, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In the production example shown in FIG. 214, other matters are the same as in the production example shown in FIG. 213. For example, when the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the output is output. The point that the state is terminated halfway is also the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 213.

In addition, when the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) occurs in the state set to the above-mentioned "special effect mode", the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be enabled by the player's will, the message is displayed even when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function. The output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and it is desirable that the output state is hidden before the timing tr43 (the timing when the effect reception is made or the timing delayed by the above-mentioned time). At this time, regarding the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it does not arrive in the output state, but the first permissible sound is output in the second mode. When it is done, it is desirable that it arrives in the output state and functions so as to terminate the first allowable sound output in the second aspect in the middle.

Further, there are cases where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the first mode and the case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the second mode. , Not only the time for which the output state is maintained is different from each other, but also different production sounds may be used. For example, when the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the first mode, a production sound such as "pickin" is output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is the second. When outputting in a mode, it is possible to output a sound effect such as "gaogao".

In the above explanatory example, the low expectation fluctuation pattern is defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed", but it is defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which the symbol is stopped without entering the SP reach state", and the low expectation is defined. When a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns, the effect example shown in FIG. 212 may be performed.

Further, it is desirable that the "suppression / automatic reception effect" illustrated in the above explanatory example cannot appear in the low expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) in the normal gaming state, but the above The "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in the explanatory example may also appear in the highly expected variation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) including the above "specific variation pattern" in the normal gaming state. .. That is, even if it is a high-expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to a high-expected fluctuation pattern), it basically corresponds to a low-expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to a low-expected fluctuation pattern) within a period before the production progresses to the SP reach state such as a non-reach state. Since the effect that appears in the effect pattern) is also executed, the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 212 can also appear within the period. Even with such a configuration, when "suppression / automatic reception effect" appears (high expectation fluctuation pattern), when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears (low expectation fluctuation pattern or high expectation fluctuation). It can be said that the rate (expectation level) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that of the pattern).

In the low expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern) that occurs in the normal gaming state, "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silence when giving an operation opportunity. It is desirable that the low expectation non-suppressive reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. This is a case where the "special effect mode" is not set, or the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the "special effect mode".

Further, regarding the length of time from "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled" to "timing tr43 at which the set time elapses after the production reception is allowed", the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be 1 frame), or it may be 2 frames or more. For example, the message display can be visually recognized at "timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled", and such a visible state is at least "timing tr43 when the set time elapses after the production reception is allowed". If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length as the set time (validity period), and there is a possibility that it can be recognized that the operation by the player was not performed. You will be able to do it. In the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, a message sound (second allowable sound) or a message display is output for the "timing when the automatic button function is activated" within the set time in any operation reception effect. It is desirable to output the above-mentioned relationships (see FIGS. 213 (h) and (i) and FIGS. 214 (h) and (i)).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIGS. 213 (i) and 214 (i), "the time for which the message display is left after the production reception is made (in the example in the figure, the timings tr42A to tr43). (Time minutes) ”is also appearing when the production reception occurs at other timings (Fig. 212 (e), Fig. 213 (e), etc.) due to the standardization of the program, but they are separate. By using the program of, it may occur only when the automatic button function is enabled. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 212 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 213 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr42a. Become.

Further, in the above explanatory examples (FIGS. 212 to 214), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect) by the speaker (second effect member). The sound) and the sound) are started at the same time, but the post-operation effect may be performed so as to shift the start time of those effects. For example, in a situation where the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is started at the timing tr42, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) displays the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display). The display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation is displayed according to the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 212 to 214 is hidden (or the timing when the fade-out process is started), which has not been displayed yet. If it is started, the display effect can be switched smoothly.

As described in the above-mentioned "operation sound output processing under suppression (FIG. 142)", even in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, a precursor is given in a period before the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed. The effect (for example, the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" or the like) may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes having different expectations for the appearance of the jackpot symbol as the precursor effect, and to perform the precursor effect in any of these modes. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor sound produced during the period in which the precursor sound is performed, and which of the plurality of modes is output as the precursor sound depends on the execution mode of the precursor sound. It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, regarding the first permissible sound, the first mode and the second mode are displayed in the image to be operated, the gauge display suggesting the remaining time, and the message display of "press!". It is output in any of a plurality of modes including the mode.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 is generated, a specific sound (second) that is not output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 is generated. Since the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound of the embodiment can be output as the reception permissible sound, it is possible to preferably suppress the poor performance when the suppression operation reception effect occurs. Will be able to. Further, by confirming the type of the reception allowable sound, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is occurring in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode.

Regarding the reception permissible sound of the non-suppressed operation reception effect (FIG. 212), the first permissible sound that outputs the reception permissible sound as a sound effect and the second permissible sound that outputs the reception permissible sound as a message sound Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output, whereas the reception permissible sound of the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) is the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound. 2 Both allowable sounds are output. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the effectability when the suppression operation reception effect is being performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the same production sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 212) and the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) (FIGS. 212 and 213). ) And a case where a different production sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 212 and 214).

That is, if the reception allowable sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the production reception is permitted, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, the second permissible sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is also output during normal times. Is desirable. Then, while the reception allowable sound is output in such a mode, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is also output as a production sound (second mode) that is not normally output with a predetermined probability. If the rate (expectation) at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when it is output in the first aspect, the "BGM reproduction (specification)" is made to recognize that the production reception is permitted. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the effectability when the "type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. In order to obtain such an action effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific fluctuation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first reception allowable sound in the effect determination such as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable that the ratio for determining the effect is higher than the ratio for determining that the second aspect is output.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, not only the operation reception effect (FIG. 212) executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also the operation reception effect (FIG. 213, 214) executed in the automatic reception mode. , When it occurs, the production reception is automatically accepted if you forget to operate it because the reception allowable sound suggesting that the production reception is in the allowable state or the production reception is in the allowable state can be output. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation opportunity is lost as a result of the occurrence.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within this set time (valid period). It is determined whether or not the effect is received, and the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without the effect reception being performed in response to the operation detection. According to such a configuration, it is possible to start the post-operation effect within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not there is an operation. It will be possible to make it an automatic button without making the flow of the subsequent production different from the case without it, or causing a delay in the production.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a "message sound (second permissible sound) prompting to be operated" may be output as a reception permissible sound, and the message sound (second permissible sound) must be operated. It is not output in the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode" that is not received, and can be output only in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode" that is received without any operation. There is.

That is, only in the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second permissible sound) that directly expresses the operation should be output, and many types of reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, the first permissible sound) are output. It is conceivable that the second permissible sound) should be output, but since there is a risk that the post-operation effect is usually executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, the post-operation effect should be performed. It is not always good to operate it in order to improve the interest of the game. In this respect, the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode" is an effect in which it is permissible to make a selection such as "do not dare to generate the effect after the operation", and therefore the operation should be performed in such an effect. Avoiding direct expression as a message (second permissible sound), do not output the message sound (second permissible sound), and do not have the right to choose whether or not to generate a post-operation effect. It is desirable to output a message sound (second permissible sound) or output more types of permissible reception sounds only in the "operation reception effect executed in the mode". In addition, in the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode", if the set time ends without the effect reception being performed, the post-operation effect and the related effect will not be performed, so it is expected. The production will progress without suggesting the degree. In the non-moving reception effect, no message sound is output in any of the operation reception effects, but in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode", the message sound is not output. The operation reception effect may be included.

Further, as described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes (“press!” And “sword deliver!”) Are prepared as message sounds (second permissible sounds), and the effects shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 are provided. In the example, one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given the operation opportunity (based on the result of the advance notice effect determination). I am trying to output. In this case, when the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 and a message sound (“press!”) Corresponding to the operation button 410 is output, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the sword decoration body 5001. Compared to when the message sound corresponding to ("Sword delivery!") Is output, it is suggested that the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. The ratio (expectation level) at which the production mode appears is low. The ratio (expectation degree) at which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 212, the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the operation target is Is not the sword decoration body 5001, but the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Moreover, at least in the normal game state, it is suggested that "a big hit symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped" in the post-operation effect executed when the effect reception is performed in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is not output. The rate (expectation degree) at which the effect mode appears is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect reception is performed in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output. It is set to be lower than the rate (expectation level) at which the production mode suggesting that is displayed. The ratio (expectation degree) at which the above-mentioned effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated, first, "whether the message sound (second allowable sound) is output" becomes a turning point for knowing the high or low degree of expectation, and the message sound (the message sound (2nd allowable sound) is output). When the second permissible sound) is output, it becomes possible to know the high or low degree of expectation depending on the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, the post-operation effect can be enjoyed with relatively high expectations. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked by executing the post-operation effect in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the degree of expectation is relatively low, and the "sword decoration 5001" which is used only when the degree of expectation is high is the operation target. Will disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the option of whether to generate the post-operation effect by executing the post-operation effect in the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, in the operation reception effect executed in FIGS. 213 and 214, when the set time (valid period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) to (i) and 214 (g) to (i), the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled within the set time (valid period) for the message sound. While the output state ends (becomes inaudible) before tr42A, the message display is maintained even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled. Furthermore, after the automatic button function is enabled, it is not hidden (invisible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends arrives. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is performed by the operation by the player within the set time, the message display may be hidden at the stage when the set time has not elapsed according to the effect reception, but within the set time. When the automatic button function is enabled, the message display ("Press!" Or "Deliver!") Will continue to be displayed until at least the set time ends.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) may be terminated halfway (non-audible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or the operation detection for the operation target prompted by the message display. You will be able to suggest to the player that you are not in the situation. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is enabled, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display) when the effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function at the timing tr42A. Since the gauge amount in the above is intentionally left, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" against the intention of the player, and this makes it possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" from the next time onward. At the set time (valid period), it becomes possible to encourage the operation to be performed at an early stage regardless of the remaining gauge.

Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is enabled, when the effect reception is performed by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is at least set. The dynamic display is continued until the time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the production reception is not performed by the operation detection for the operation target for which the operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, since the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213 are designed to output the same effect sound (first allowable sound of the first aspect) as the reception allowable sound, eventually. Even when the operation reception effect of is generated, it becomes possible to appropriately convey to the player that the operation opportunity is given. Moreover, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213, the second allowable sound, which is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, is also output. Therefore, which of these operation reception effects is generated? Will also be possible to recognize. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern), the ratio of execution in the mode shown in FIG. 213 is relatively high, and FIG. 214 shows. The rate of execution in the mode shown is relatively low, and the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is relatively high when executed in the mode shown in FIG. 214. That is, in this case, the first allowable sound is not the "first mode" but the "second mode" which is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, while avoiding overlooking the post-operation effect. Since it will be output at, it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, as compared with the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 212, the effect sound (first permissible sound) whose output state is maintained for a long time (first permissible sound) is maintained. Since it is sometimes used as FIG. 214), it is possible to suitably maintain the effectability when "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. become able to.

Further, in the production example (suppression operation reception production) shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the production sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. , The same reception permissible sound (first permissible sound of the first aspect) as when the non-suppressed operation reception effect (FIG. 212) is generated can also be generated. On top of this, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (second aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the effect sound (first) in which the output state is maintained only for a short time. A new effect is added by making the ratio of the symbol stopped by the jackpot symbol higher than that when the first permissible sound is output in (aspect) (FIG. 213). This makes it possible to recognize that the production reception is permitted, and at the same time, the color rendering property when the "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (second aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the first permissible sound is obtained. If the production is accepted during the period when the sound is being output, it is set to the non-output (non-audible) state even in the middle stage of the output (see FIG. 214 (c)). .. On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (first aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 212 and 213), the first permissible sound is the "suppression operation reception effect". Only when it is output in "Operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode" (Fig. 213), if the production reception is done in the middle of the output, it is in a non-output (non-audible) state at that point. (See FIG. 212 (c) and FIG. 213 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, even if the effect reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduced data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Although the first permissible sound is in the output state during the period of timing tr41 to tr42, the production reception is not performed even if the operation is detected within the period, so that the first permissible sound is of the first permissible sound. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

That is, as described above, in the non-suppressed operation reception effect, unlike the suppressed operation reception effect, the operation reception effect is generated without suppressing the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)", so that the post-operation effect is overlooked. The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect cannot be generated unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, when these operation reception effects occur, it is assumed that some players repeatedly hit the sound before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, it may be difficult to understand whether the effect is a post-operation effect or a notice effect that is not related to the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such concerns by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data of (Fig. 212). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, it is not necessary to repeatedly hit the sound. Therefore, in order to suppress the game due to the repeated hits, the first allowable sound is the first mode and the second mode. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize which of the above is output (output is stopped in the middle).

Even if the production is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display is within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. It may be displayed continuously until the end timing of, or the remaining time display (gauge display) may be continuously displayed until the end timing within the set time (described above). Commonization of programs, etc.).

Further, as described above, in the post-operation effect, there is usually a risk of the effect being executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, the operation so that the post-operation effect is performed is to improve the interest of the game. Not always good. In this regard, in the production example (non-automatic reception production) shown in FIG. 212, it is relatively early if the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the production reception is permitted. By using the mode (first mode) that ends in, "time for determining whether or not to generate the production reception" is created while the reception permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), since it is not necessary to create such a time, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition to the case, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) may be output in a longer mode (second mode), suggesting that the degree of expectation differs depending on the mode. .. In addition, by maintaining the output state of the reception allowable sound for a relatively long period of time, it becomes possible to suggest that the automatic button function is not yet enabled, which in turn gives a sense of security. Among them, it becomes possible to encourage the operation by the player.

Further, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), the automatic button function is enabled even when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a long mode (second mode) (FIG. 214). Timing to be performed Before the arrival of tr42A, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is made inaudible, and the two reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are set at different timings. I'm trying to finish it.

As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is enabled does not arrive until the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) becomes inaudible. When it becomes inaudible, it can be suggested that the automatic button function can be activated soon if it is not operated quickly. At this time, in at least the longer side mode (second mode) and the second permissible sound in which the output state is maintained longer than the first permissible sound of the first mode, the loudness and pitch of the sound correspond to the passage of time. It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to make it easier to recognize how much time has passed.

Further, in the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, when an operation opportunity is given, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silence, whereby a post-operation effect is generated. When this happens, we will devise a production method so that the production sound corresponding to this can be heard conspicuously. In this regard, the reception allowable sound output when such a suppression operation reception effect is generated is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed when the effect reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state. Since the output state is terminated, it is possible to make the effect sound according to the effect after the operation stand out without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

In the above production example, when "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production" occurs, even if the production reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. And said. However, instead of this, the degree of expectation is relatively high, for example, when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs in the SP reach state within the high expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to). Only when there is a situation, in order to encourage concentration on the production, the reception allowable sound (even if the same production sound (first mode) is output as the first allowable sound) is produced when it is in the output state. This may be interrupted when the reception is made.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the case where "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs has been described, but "non-suppression / automatic reception effect" and "suppression / non-automatic reception effect" also occur. It may be possible to make the production progress in the same manner when the "non-suppressed / automatic reception effect" or the "suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs.

Further, when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, it is possible to output the third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 213) and the second mode (FIG. 214) as the first allowable sound. When the third aspect is output, it is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the first aspect or the second aspect is output. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and the set time (effective) in which the production reception is allowed. It will be possible to more favorably maintain the game entertainment within the period).

At this time, as for the third aspect, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives. That is, in this case, in paying attention to how long the output time of the first allowable sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that the output time is not the first mode or the second mode but the third mode. The longer the time required, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (valid period) for which the production reception is allowed. Will be. Other matters when the third aspect is output, such as the point that the production reception is interrupted when the third aspect is in the output state, are the same as those described in FIGS. 213 and 214. is there.

The automatic button function may be enabled whenever the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern) arrives, or the specific fluctuation may be obtained when a big hit is obtained. It is activated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives, but when the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives when the big hit is not obtained. It may not be activated.

Multiple types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (valid period), and some of these effects allow reception sounds (first) when the set time (valid period) occurs. The permissible sound, the second permissible sound) may not be output. That is, in this case, when the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted occurs, the number of allowable reception sounds is "0" and the number of allowable reception sounds is "1" (first allowable sound). ) And the case where the number of acceptable reception sounds is "2" (first allowable sound, second allowable sound), suggesting to what extent the pachinko machine 1 "prompts the operation". You will be able to.

As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting the fade-out when the timing of hiding may come may be adopted.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently during the period from timing tr40 to tr44. It may be set to the output state (the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, the channel allocation has ended, etc.). That is, in this case, "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel at the timing tr44 and is put into the output state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, as described above, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach production accompanied by a background change) as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination is performed. When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, regardless of the result of the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the production of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production is accepted. The operation reception effect (valid period) that is allowed
-The "suppression reception effect (FIGS. 213 (a), (b)) that sets the set time at which the effect reception is allowed while the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in the suppression mode or silently. (See FIGS. 214 (a) and 214 (a) and (b)) ”, and ・ The operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) at which the effect reception is allowed. Even in such a case, when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the post-operation effect is produced based on the effect reception. "Automatic reception mode (see FIG. 213 (j) and FIG. 214 (j))"
It is designed to be generated as a "suppression / automatic reception effect" executed by.

At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (notice effect determination), which of the plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode is to output the sound effect (first permissible sound) among the reception allowable sounds. , It is determined whether the message sound (second permissible sound) is output as "press!" Or "deliver the sword!" As described above, the permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output respectively (FIGS. 213 and 214). And, as described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and as the second permissible sound, "Deliver the sword!" Is output, the expectation is higher than when "Press!" Is output. At this time, the order of high expectations is "2nd mode & sword delivery!", "2nd mode & push!", "1st mode & sword delivery!", "1st mode & push!". Is desirable in order to maintain the game entertainment when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

And, as described above, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to the above-mentioned production example, the first permissible sound is in the output state regardless of which of the plurality of modes is output as the first permissible sound. Occasionally, when a production reception is made, this is interrupted (see FIGS. 213 and 214). Also, regarding the second permissible sound, regardless of whether it is output by "press!" Or "deliver the sword!", When the second permissible sound is in the output state, the production is accepted. Was decided to be interrupted.

However, instead of this, if the production reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the fact that the production reception is performed. Although it is terminated, when the effect reception is performed while the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first aspect, the output state may be maintained without being terminated. That is, in this case, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted in the middle, and even if the expected degree cannot be recognized, the first aspect having the lowest expected degree among the plurality of aspects. Since it is possible to recognize that this is not the case, it is expected that the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed. Further, even if a mode with a low expectation appears in the post-operation effect, if the output state of the first permissible sound having the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes is maintained, the post-operation effect can be performed. By re-recognizing that the production state was difficult to expect in the first place, it becomes easier to accept the result that appears as the production after the operation, and it is expected that the game entertainment will not be significantly reduced.

Even in the case of adopting such a modified example, if the above-mentioned "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception effect" occurs within the above-mentioned predetermined fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 212. When the first permissible sound of the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is output in the second mode within a specific fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 214. That is, among the above-mentioned production examples, the “effect mode shown in FIG. 213” when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” that appears within a specific fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. It will be executed instead of the "effect mode shown in 215".

As shown in FIG. 215, the "effect mode shown in FIG. 215" is basically the same as the content described in the "effect mode shown in FIG. 213" and the content described in another example thereof. is there. However, in the "effect mode shown in FIG. 215", even if the production reception is performed at the timing tr42a in which the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted with the production reception as a trigger. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduced data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific fluctuation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode, which has the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes (for example,). (For example, FIG. 214 (c)), when the effect reception is performed at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception.

According to such a configuration, when "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific fluctuation pattern, the effect reception is performed at an early timing so that it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first allowable sound. Even if it is done, the degree of expectation can be recognized by confirming whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is terminated with this as an opportunity. In particular, in this production example (FIG. 213, FIG. 215, etc.), the first allowable sound is output from the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (valid period) to the timing tr42 in which the set time is set. Since the first permissible sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from the output state at the timing tr41 to the arrival of the timing tr42, the first permissible sound is set as the first permissible sound. It becomes possible to function as a time for "distinguishing" which mode is.

In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 215, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared so that the output state is maintained for a shorter period of time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. It is said. As a result, even if the post-operation effect is started when the first permissible sound is being output in the first aspect, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound are combined. It becomes possible to shorten the time when each output state overlaps, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, the first allowable sound output in the first aspect can also be output in the effect example shown in FIG. 212 (see FIG. 212 (c)). Even in the production example, the production reception is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduced data as the first allowable sound. Therefore, the first allowable sound is produced. Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the production reception appears, it will be possible to provide it as a production that does not feel strange.

However, regarding the second permissible sound, if the production reception is performed while the output state is in the output state, the production reception is based on the fact that the production reception is performed regardless of which mode is output as the first permissible sound. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 214 (d) and 215 (d)). That is, in this case, the first permissible sound has a function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the production reception is performed early, while the second permissible sound is in a situation where the production reception is performed by operation detection ( It will play a function that suggests whether or not it is in a situation where the operation opportunity can be lost due to the automatic button function), and by giving these different functions to the reception allowable sound, when the operation reception effect occurs It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment of.

On the other hand, the reception allowable sound output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 may be output without fail in the first aspect, or may be output in a special mode. However, it is desirable to maintain the output state without ending it even if the effect reception is performed when the output is performed in a special mode. When the output is performed in the special mode, it is desirable that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol is stopped is higher than that in the case of the output in the first mode. This ratio may be 100%. It may be output in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" maintains the output state in an unsuppressed mode, and there is a problem that the effect is poor. Therefore, it is more desirable to be able to confirm the mode as the first permissible sound and to recognize the degree of expectation even in the situation where the post-operation effect is started.

In addition, in the "suppression operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type of production sound is output in the suppression mode or silently, or is in the non-output state", the specific type of production sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in an unsuppressed manner even in a non-audible state.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, "suppression that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of production sound is output in a suppression mode or silently, or is in a non-output state. In the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 to 215), the reception allowable sound output when the set time (valid period) occurs is one of "a plurality of modes in which the length of time maintained as the output state is different". It is possible to output according to the non-suppressed mode, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) differs depending on the output mode. In this regard, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is also used in the "non-suppressive operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode". In addition to the case where the output is performed in the non-suppressed mode in the first aspect (FIG. 212), the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is different from the first aspect (the length is different, the effect sound itself is different, etc.). ) May be output depending on the non-suppressed mode, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) may differ depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, both the reception allowable sound output when the "unsuppressed operation reception effect" is generated and the reception allowable sound output when the "suppress operation reception effect" is generated are "output states". Since it is possible to output in any of "plurality modes in which the length of time to be maintained is different", and further, the degree of expectation differs depending on the output mode, "non-suppressive operation reception effect". In any of the above and the "suppression operation reception production", it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the production reception is performed.

FIG. 216 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the first permissible sound is output in a specific mode when the “non-suppressed operation reception effect (here, non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect)” is generated.

As shown in FIG. 216, in this production example as well, the parts not otherwise noted are basically the same as in the production example shown in FIG. 212. However, in the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, when the effect is generated, the effect determination as to which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is to be output (for example, at the start of the symbol variation) (Preliminary effect determination) is performed, and as a result of the effect determination, as shown in FIGS. 216 (c) and 216 (g), a "specific mode" is performed instead of the "first mode". It is assumed that the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped, as compared with the case where the output is performed in the "first mode". The specific aspect is output for a longer time than the first aspect.

Here, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", the first permissible sound can be output according to the first aspect when the operation reception effect is generated. That is mentioned above (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)). That is, in this case, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time when the operation reception effect is generated. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is generated (FIG. 216), the first allowable sound is the first when the "suppressed / automatic reception effect" is generated. In the case where the two modes are output (FIG. 214), different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different times. In this production example, when the first permissible sound is output by the second aspect, it is output for a longer time than when the first permissible sound is output by the specific aspect.

However, on the other hand, the degree of expectation (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) in the case where the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time (see the first aspect (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215))). Is the "first aspect" output when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)" occurs, or the "suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)"". It is different depending on whether it is output when the above is generated. Here, the effect reception is performed when the "first mode" appears when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" occurs. As for the degree of expectation (ratio) suggesting that the jackpot symbol appears in the post-operation effect according to the above, the "first mode" appeared when the "suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215))" occurred. In some cases, it is lower than the expectation (ratio) that the jackpot symbol appears in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. The expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%. ..

On the other hand, the degree of expectation in the case where different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different times (when the "second mode (FIG. 214)" or the "specific mode (FIG. 216)" appears) ( The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) is set to be the same as the predetermined value regardless of whether it is output when the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect” or the “suppressed / automatic reception effect” occurs. The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time, either "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" or "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs. Expectations will not always be the same depending on whether or not they are. Further, even when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first allowable sound, the "suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is output when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound. The same degree of expectation as "automatic reception production" will be suggested.

That is, in this case, with respect to the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", even if the first allowable sound is output in the same mode (first mode), the expectations are different from each other. In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make it appear that there is no directing relationship with each other. .. However, in reality, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expected degree is the same even though the production sounds are different from each other and the output times are different. You will be able to have a secret relationship. For example, when the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the case where the "BGM reproduction" is suppressed and the case where the "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed are usually (the reception allowable sound is the first aspect). (When output as), by starting different post-operation effects (different expectations) when the effect is received, it appears that the effects are not related to each other. However, when the reception allowable sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation when the production reception is performed while making it appear as if a different production is performed depending on whether or not "BGM reproduction" is suppressed. As a post-production, it is expected that the same content (same degree of expectation) can be made to appear, and that a surprise-like production can be provided by secretly having a production relationship.

In this case, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", a plurality of modes are prepared as the first allowable sound, but the commonly used "first mode" is used. It is desirable that the output time is set as the shortest mode among the plurality of modes in any of the operation reception effects. Further, the "second mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is generated. The "specific mode" as the first permissible sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, but each other. It is desirable that the output times of the above are different (for example, "output time of a specific mode" <"output time of the second mode") in order to make it appear that there is no directing relationship with each other.

Further, in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", even if the first allowable sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not terminated in the middle stage regardless of whether or not the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first allowable sound can be left even after the post-operation effect is started, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" with a relatively low expectation is executed. Even though the first permissible sound is output in the "specific mode" that pushes up to the same expected level as the "suppression / automatic reception production", which has a relatively high expectation, I miss this. It will be possible to eliminate the possibility of losing. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted when the effect reception is performed by the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 215.

In the above-mentioned production example, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" (FIG. 214), it is used as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect". The degree of expectation is the same as when a specific mode is output (Fig. 216). However, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as the first allowable sound, the output time is maintained for a longer time than in the "first mode (FIG. 213)" and "second mode (FIG. 214)". When the "third aspect" of the above is to be output, the "third aspect" is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", and the "third aspect" is output instead of the above "second aspect". It is set so that the degree of expectation is the same as when the "specific mode" is output as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect". The "third aspect" is as described above.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 216, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. 1) is used as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1 effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in a state where the timing tr33 has not been completed. It is required to maintain the output state.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the length of time required for the "acceptable sound for reception to be output" is not the length of time for the "time for which the sound data of the allowable sound for acceptance is assigned to the channel", but " It means the length of time it takes to output as audible sound.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in order to make it appear that the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception production" and the "suppressed / automatic reception production" do not have a directing relationship with each other, the "second mode" and the "third mode" Regarding "aspect", it is assumed that output is possible only with "suppression / automatic reception effect" out of "suppression / automatic reception effect" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", and for "specific aspect", "suppression". -It is desirable that output is possible only with "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" out of "automatic reception effect" and "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect". If the "second mode" and the "third mode" are prepared as output candidates in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", the "suppression / automatic reception effect" has its own unique reception allowable sound (second mode). Even if the mode (third mode) is output, the expected degree is not necessarily the same as when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" peculiar reception permissible sound (specific mode) is output. It becomes possible to more preferably improve the effectability as a reception allowable sound output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs.

Further, the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) does not have to occur as an effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). As described above, among the effects related to the expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern), the effects may occur within the effect period before the SP reach state is developed.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, regarding the "suppression operation reception production" in which a specific type of production sound (for example, the production sound of BGM reproduction) can be suppressed, the "weak suppression mode (first)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low. A plurality of modes including at least a "suppression operation reception effect)" and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or are in a non-output state are prepared. May be good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to "0".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a color rendering property as to how much the production sound of the specific type is suppressed when the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned action and effect, the degree of expectation depends on which of the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It is desirable that the (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) be different. Here, the degree of expectation (ratio) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception" when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is ". It is lower than the expectation (ratio) that it is suggested that the jackpot symbol appears in the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception" when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)", an effect corresponding to a high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by a background change, etc.) and a reach state are not formed (or even a reach state). A reach state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach.) While it is possible to appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" ) ”Does not occur in the low-expected effect pattern, but may occur as an effect according to the high-expected fluctuation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is the expectation when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special effect state" that can be transferred based on the satisfaction of the special effect conditions, and in the "special effect state", the player Each time a production reception is made during the set time (valid period) when an operation promotion image (such as a copy image or gauge display) is displayed, a specific type of production sound (for example, a production sound for BGM playback) is displayed. ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed each time a set time (valid period) for which the effect reception is allowed occurs. It has become possible to provide an effect on the sound, and apart from the expectation suggested by the post-operation effect, such an effect (how much it is suppressed) also suggests the expectation. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be further improved when the reception of the production is permitted.

In addition, an effect pattern (for example, high expected variation) in which the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be sequentially executed within the symbol variation. An effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern among the patterns) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" on the side with a relatively low expectation occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation)" on the side with a relatively high expectation occurs. Since there is a possibility that "reception effect)" will occur, it is necessary to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for the specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). Will be able to.

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" is described.
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the effect determination is made. Regardless of which result is obtained as (notice judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, whereas "weak suppression mode (first suppression)" Operation reception production) ”
-Even if the above specific fluctuation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), the production of the specific fluctuation pattern does not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing. , When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), it shall occur when the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" is produced according to the specific variation pattern. When the production is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception production)", the ratio of the post-operation effect being executed in the highly expected mode is higher than when "" does not occur. It is desirable to.

In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" always occurs in the effect according to a specific fluctuation pattern, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" is generated. "Is not always generated, and when the" weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect) "occurs, the" strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) "is a highly expected post-operation effect. Since the rate of execution of the above is increased, attention can be focused on whether or not the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (weak suppression mode)" can be attracted attention. It becomes possible to improve the game entertainment when the "first suppression operation reception production)" occurs.

FIGS. 217 to 219 show a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" in the production according to a high expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern). ) ”Is shown in a time chart showing an example of the effect when the occurrences occur in sequence. FIG. 217 shows an example of the effect when the operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (valid period) occurs, and FIG. 218 shows the comparison after the set time (valid period) occurs. An example of the effect when the operation is detected at a later stage is shown, and FIG. 219 shows an example of the effect when the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period).

Now, among the "highly expected fluctuation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)" as a result of the start condition being established (pending digestion) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, the "specific fluctuation pattern" If is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the effect determination is made within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect, etc.) according to the result of (notice determination, etc.) is additionally executed for the effect (effect pattern) of the selected "specific fluctuation pattern" itself.

However, regarding the content of the effect that appears after the arrival of the timing tr40 (timing within the SP reach state) in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern in the "specific variation pattern". Is the same as in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214. That is, first, when the timing tr40 arrives, regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination, "a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a suppressed mode or silence". (Or, it is set to a non-output state). Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a "strong suppression mode", and while the "strong suppression mode" appears in this way, the timing tr42 (decorative symbol) When a specific time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, the operation reception is permitted regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect judgment. A production (valid period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect generated while the "strong suppression mode" appears is referred to as a "second suppression operation reception effect".

On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (timing before the development of the SP reach state) arrives when a predetermined time has passed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol was started, the advance notice effect determination is performed. On condition that a special result is obtained, an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is additionally generated for the design effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr51 is different from the case of the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. 212, and is different from the above-mentioned "second suppression operation reception". Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of "effect (strong suppression mode)", a process of suppressing the volume of "specific type of production sound (sound of BGM reproduction)" can be performed under predetermined conditions.

According to such a configuration, even if the effect corresponding to the "specific fluctuation pattern" is executed, when a special result is not obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), FIG. 213 or The effect example shown in FIG. 214 will appear, that is, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" does not occur in the effect according to the fluctuation pattern, and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression)" does not occur. Operation reception production) ”will only occur. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, in the effect according to the fluctuation pattern, a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation)" is obtained. The reception effect) ”first occurs, and then the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 is further generated.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the production contents after the arrival of the timing tr40 are as described with reference to FIG. 213, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here. In this case, regarding the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first permissible sound is not the first mode shown in FIGS. 213 and 217 to 219, depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). , The related effects of the effect contents shown in FIG. 213, such as the case where the output is performed in the second mode shown in FIG. 214, and the above-mentioned contents of other examples and modified examples are shown in FIGS. 217 to 219. Needless to say, it is appropriately applied to the production content (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception production)) after the timing tr40 among the production examples.

Then, as described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the timing tr51 (developed into the SP reach state) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol (the effect according to a specific variation pattern) was started. When the timing (timing before) arrives, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" generated at the timing tr51 in the variation effect according to the specific variation pattern is described.
-While the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner, the set time (valid period) at which the production reception is allowed is set, but within the set time (valid period). When the production reception is performed, the "conditional suppression reception production (Fig. 217)" that changes the "BGM reproduction sound" from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) triggered by the production reception. (A), (b)) ”, and ・ If the operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) at which the production reception is allowed, The production reception is not performed, and as a result, each process triggered by the production reception (process of changing the "BGM reproduction sound" from the non-suppressed mode to the weakly suppressed mode, and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect). "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIGS. 219 (a), (b), (f))" in which the set time (valid period) ends without the sound being executed.
It is designed to be generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in the weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned is set in the strong suppression mode (for example, the volume value (audible volume)). ) Is set to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”), which is lower than “0”).

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (first suppression operation reception production)", unless the production reception is performed by the operation by the player, the "specific type of production sound (1st suppression operation reception production)" Since the "sound of BGM reproduction) is not shifted to the" state of being output in the suppressed mode ", it is possible to make it appear that the" unsuppressed reception effect "shown in FIGS. 212 and 216 is occurring. Will be. That is, in this case, it is recognized for the first time that it is not a "suppression reception effect" by changing to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a suppression mode" when the player operates it. Since it will be possible to get rid of it, it will be possible to improve the taste of the game by creating a surprise effect.

In order to obtain such an action effect, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). The fluctuation pattern should be selectable only when it is in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone), and when it is in the special effect state, it is "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (for example, non-automatic reception effect). A variation pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) of "FIG. 212, FIG. 216)" can be selected. The jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped than in the normal effect state. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212, Fig. 216)" appears. In combination with the above-mentioned surprise-like production elements, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can occur in both the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". In the "normal production state", the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception production (figure)" is included in the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired in the winning). "212, Fig. 216)" and "Suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (Fig. 213, Fig. 214)" can occur in sequence, and in the "special effect state", one fluctuation pattern (winning) "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (Figs. 217 to 219)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception" in the production according to the paired fluctuation pattern) It is desirable that "effects (FIGS. 213 and 214)" can occur in sequence.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production", when the set time (valid period) elapses without the production reception being performed, the "specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound)" is completed. ) Is output in a weakly suppressed mode ”, and the production progresses to the subsequent stage (Fig. 219). That is, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". It is difficult to recognize which situation it is in, and since the subsequent productions will be progressed, it is said that the degree of expectation is relatively low. Even when the operation reception effect (valid period) in the game occurs, it becomes possible to more positively encourage the player to operate the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are cases where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" occurs and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)". In the case where "Fig. 212)" occurs, the same production sound (first mode) is output as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) for the same time, and this also causes "conditional suppression (weak)". Suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219) ”and“ non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212) ”are hard to recognize.

Further, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)", the same as when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)" occurs.
-When the timing tr50 arrives shortly before the set time occurs, the output of the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained in a form straddling the timing tr51. point,
-The second permissible sound (for example, message sound) is not output, only the first permissible sound (for example, sound effect) is output.-The set time (valid period) is set. When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means targeted by the operation reception effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time elapses. Each configuration, such as the point where gauge display is performed, is also adopted, and by this, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 217 to 219)" and "non-suppression / It is difficult to recognize which of the non-automatic reception effects (Fig. 212) is occurring. Therefore, as the display method of the simulated image and the gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) is adopted as in the case where the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs. It is desirable, and the same mode as that of the production example shown in FIG. 212 may be adopted for the timing at which those display images (model image, gauge display) are hidden based on the occurrence of the production reception. desirable.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" according to this embodiment, the set time (effective) is also the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 212. When the production reception is performed at the timings tr51a and tr52a (FIGS. 217 (c) and 218 (c)) in which the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is in the output state after the occurrence of the period), the setting is made. The time (valid period) itself is terminated, but the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the timing at which the output is completed as the first allowable sound (same as when there is no operation). The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 219 (c)).

According to such a configuration, even after the production reception is performed by the operation by the player, simply listening to the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception". It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the "effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" and the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)" is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the state becomes "a state in which a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode". Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably each time the production is accepted.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)", if the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr51a, 51b). ), Post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) as post-operation effects according to the effect reception. And at least are supposed to occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr52, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in a state where the timing tr52 has not been completed. It is required to be set to maintain the output state.

In addition, for the reception permissible sound and the operation-related display appearing in the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)", another example or modification of the effect example shown in FIG. Is possible, and it is desirable to use the same method for each other.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)" generated at the timing tr51 in the effect according to a specific fluctuation pattern is produced. The process of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is performed for a predetermined fixed time from the timing when the reception is made.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 217), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is weakly suppressed (the degree of suppression is high). The timing tr53a for returning from the relatively low mode to the non-suppressed mode also arrives relatively early, and as a result, the period during which the "BGM reproduction sound" is changed to the weakly suppressed mode and the "BGM reproduction sound". There will be a relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) between the period in which the is strongly suppressed. On the other hand, when the production reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 218), the timing at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, a comparison is made between the period when the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the weak suppression mode and the period when the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the strong suppression mode. Only short intervals (timing tr53b to tr40) will be provided.

That is, in this case, the later the timing at which the player operates in the first suppression operation reception effect (the closer to the timing tr52), the more "the sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppression mode, and then " The time until the period in which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the strongly suppressed mode is started is shortened. As a result, depending on whether the operation performed by the player in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is completed arrives relatively early and is continuous. It is possible to make it appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is completed arrives relatively late, and the “strong suppression mode” You will be able to feel anxiety such as "may not appear", so you will be able to improve your game interests.

In this production example, the length of time (predetermined fixed time) at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in a weakly suppressed mode is determined by the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is set to be the same as the execution time, but it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time that the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the weakly suppressed mode is set to be the same as or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is desirable to make the post-operation production stand out when the production reception is performed. Furthermore, even if the production reception is performed at the latest timing tr52 of the set time (valid period) of the "first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)", the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time for the "BGM reproduction sound" to be output in the weak suppression mode so that the timing of ending arrives before the timing tr40 for starting the strong suppression mode. In this production example, the time of timing tr51a to 53a and the time of timing tr51b to 53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effect corresponding to one fluctuation pattern,
-The period from the first suppression operation reception effect (timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode). ), And ・ The second suppression operation reception effect (timing tr40 ends the post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode). Period until)
Can be generated in sequence. As described above, the second suppression operation reception effect is a variation pattern in which the effect mode (type of acceptable sound for reception, operation target, etc.) may change depending on the result of the effect determination, but it is not executed. While it is executed as a "design effect based on", the first suppression operation reception effect can occur on condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). ing.

Further, as described above, the first suppression operation reception effect is a production determination (preliminary determination, etc.) even in the production according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) that does not generate the second suppression operation reception effect. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during the symbol change, only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs, and the first suppression operation reception effect and the first 2 Suppression operation reception effects may occur in sequence.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed by the first suppression operation reception effect during the period from the "timing at which the weak suppression mode ends" to the "timing at which the strong suppression mode starts". Since it is set as a variable period that is variable according to the timing performed, after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is completed, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is further performed. It becomes possible to give a directing effect as to whether or not it occurs, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur in sequence, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (ratio of stopping at the jackpot symbol) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. Further, in the variation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) precedes the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher expectation than the case where the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second aspect). The rate of execution is high.

By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (second suppression operation reception effect in the strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the mode is the first suppression operation reception effect). However, even if an attempt is made to infer whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode) when a specific type of production sound (for example, a production sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed. Actually, it is difficult to infer whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without comparison. In particular, it is even more so when the volume value when suppressed is not so large between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this causes a feeling of tension when the operation reception effect is generated. Can be suitably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when the set time (valid period) at which the effect reception is allowed occurs. The first permissible sound is output as the same production sound for the same time (in the figure, it is output in the "first mode"). That is, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it becomes possible to make it difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode). As a result, the tension for the production can be maintained more favorably, and the player can be more and more attracted to the production.

However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect elements useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode are provided within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. It will be prepared as follows in the form of being scattered in chronological order.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the above-mentioned situation appears in which the first allowable sound can be output as the same production sound for the same time (in the figure, it is output in the “first aspect”). Even if there is, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode based on the first allowable sound.

That is, the first permissible sound output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is output for a predetermined time without ending the output halfway even if the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. On the other hand, the first permissible sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated is based on the effect reception when the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 217 and 218). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, and it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. While making it difficult to guess, the first permissible sound itself has a function useful for guessing whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. By making it possible, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to make such a guess.

In addition to the first aspect, the first permissible sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (second aspect, third aspect, etc.). ) Is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode in which the first permissible sound is output, it may be a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode even if the effect reception is not performed when the first permissible sound is in the output state. It becomes possible to easily guess whether or not the game is, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. However, in order to maintain a sense of tension with respect to the effect, the output in the mode (second mode, third mode, etc.) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is higher than the output in the first mode. It is desirable that the execution rate is low.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. Therefore, the second allowable sound is output. By confirming whether or not the permissible sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed is also the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression. Since the operation reception effect is different from that of the operation reception effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to appearing later than the reception allowable sound, there is only a partial difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension in the production by leaving some difficulty in guessing whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that it is not possible to estimate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode when the output of the reception allowable sound and the operation-related display is completed. However, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both the "effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are "performed for a certain period of time from the time when the effect is received". On the other hand, in the post-operation production according to the second suppression operation reception production, the "production by the production sound" is "the one that is performed for a certain period of time from the time when the production reception is received", but the "liquid crystal display" "Direction by" is "the one that ends when the predetermined timing tr44 arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" is determined by the timing when the effect is received. Will be variable and a large deviation will occur. Therefore, by confirming such a deviation, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. ..

However, even if the production elements that are useful for guessing are prepared in such a form that they are scattered in chronological order, some players do not notice them, and as a result, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. In the end, if there is something that cannot be guessed, the interest in the game may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is produced based on the fact that the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). In a weakly suppressed mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the production sound of BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is used. A set time (valid period) occurs during the process so that the production can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound). Since the timing of causing the sound is different, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming the timing.

Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), no operation is detected within the set time (valid period). At that time, the set time does not automatically occur and the set time ends (see FIG. 219). That is, in this case, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the reception of the production for the specific type of production sound (for example, the production sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Although there is a price that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the “BGM reproduction effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is terminated is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as the timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is set is set after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppressed mode, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppressed mode or the weak suppressed mode.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above effect example, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is used regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). The length of the period during which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is invariant (see FIGS. 217 and 218). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). And the length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel (see FIGS. 217 and 218).

According to such a configuration, the color rendering property is generated in "when to perform the production reception (operation)", and the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed can be suitably maintained. Become.

Further, in the above configuration, the first permissibility is made so that it is difficult to distinguish which of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, which have different execution modes of the post-operation effect, is occurring. The sounds are output as the same production sound for the same time, and the production elements that are useful for distinguishing them are prepared so as to be scattered in chronological order. As a result, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed while maintaining a sense of tension in the production.

Further, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, which have different execution modes of the post-operation effect, can be intentionally mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern. Therefore, every time the operation reception effect is generated, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension about "when to perform the effect reception (operation)". In order to obtain such an action effect, in addition to the mode in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern, the effect according to one variation pattern is obtained. It is desirable that the mode in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears a plurality of times is feasible.

If the purpose is to obtain only the effect of the effect of "when to perform the effect reception (operation)", a specific type of effect is produced in the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. The sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) may not be suppressed, and the output in the non-suppressed mode may be maintained.

In addition, regardless of when the effect is received within the set time (valid period), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the speaker (second effect member) of the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) ) Is performed in parallel with the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound). For the operation reception effect, the condition is that a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.). It is desirable that it can be generated in the above and that it cannot appear as a pattern effect (effect pattern) based on a fluctuation pattern.

That is, in this case, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it can be inferred that a special result has been obtained in the advance notice effect determination (a state in which the degree of expectation is relatively high). Therefore, unlike the fluctuation pattern itself (design production) that always occurs regardless of the result of the advance notice production judgment, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when it is recognized that it has been additionally performed. Will be. It should be noted that the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) depend on the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). The second suppression operation reception effect, in which the length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel, changes, may occur only as the effect (design effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. Alternatively, there may be both a case where the fluctuation pattern itself occurs as an effect (design effect) and a case where it occurs under the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.).

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output at a lower suppression degree than the strong suppression mode can appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). You may do it. That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the weakly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. Then, as the number of times the weak suppression mode appears in the production according to one fluctuation pattern, including the first suppression operation reception effect, the degree of suppression is further increased until the symbol fluctuation is stopped ( If the ratio of the second suppression operation reception effect to be further executed) is increased, the effectability can be further improved through the suppression state for the “effect sound of BGM reproduction”. Further, when the production is accepted within the set time (valid period) generated while the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is not set to the suppression mode, "whether or not the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases or not (Fig.) It becomes possible to add further fun to the effectability of "the aspect shown in 212 or the aspect shown in FIG. 217)".

Further, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may also appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation reception effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strongly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a color rendering index as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is produced based on the fact that the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) was set. However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is performed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect occurs. May be set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is produced when a predetermined timing is reached, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of effectability can be expanded. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or after the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to make it arrive.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and 217 to 219, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode (suppression mode or mode). The process of making the output silent or non-output) is made to end at the same timing as or before the end timing of the post-operation effect, but the end timing of the post-operation effect has arrived. You may end it later. Further, in this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing (unless the symbol fluctuation is stopped), even if the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is not returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. Good.

As described above, the reception allowable sound does not have to be generated a little before the set time (valid period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and 217 to 219, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). ) Is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the production according to the fluctuation pattern, while the production reception is performed for the post-operation production sound output (production sound) by the speaker (second production member). It was decided to end when a certain amount of time had passed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are changed. Each of them may be terminated at a predetermined timing in the effect according to the pattern, or the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the speaker (second effect member) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). Both the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation by the above may be terminated when a certain time has elapsed from the time when the effect reception is performed.

The specific type of effect sound to be suppressed (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is the timing at which the effect is switched within the effect according to the symbol variation or the variation pattern (for example, the SP reach effect is started). It is output when the timing etc. arrives. On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started from an indefinite timing (the mining to be operated) within the set time.

The specific variation pattern described in the effect example shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 and the specific variation pattern described in the effect example shown in FIGS. 217 to 219 may be different or the same. It may be a variation pattern. Further, the special effect state may not be a look-ahead effect zone, but may be an effect state when the jackpot probability for the jackpot determination is relatively high.

Further, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of production sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number larger than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to set the "specific type of production sound" to a non-audible state (output in silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel allocation)). Good.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "first suppression operation reception effect", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "second suppression operation reception effect", see FIGS. 213 and 214. However, as described above, based on the result of the advance notice effect determination, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". ) ”. Therefore, when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is not a weak suppression mode but a strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the production reception was performed in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation production has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating means to be operated is
-The first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part touched by the player when operating) is not moved when the set time (valid period) occurs, and-The operation receiving part is moved by the driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" gives an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 is "a device that can give a player an operation opportunity while moving to a specific position". However, one operating means (one operating receiving unit) may be provided with a "first operating mode" and a "second operating mode", respectively, and an operating opportunity may be provided by any of these modes.

Then, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-While outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) in a non-suppressed mode, the non-suppressed operation reception effect in which the set time (valid period) is generated and the post-operation effect is executed. -A suppression operation reception effect is prepared to output a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) in a suppression mode or in a silent state, or to a non-output state. Furthermore, as a suppression operation reception effect,
-The first suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect") that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode). ”), And ・ A second suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned“ suppression / automatic reception ”) that suppresses a specific type of production sound (for example, a production sound for BGM reproduction) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode). Directing ")
Is prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception production, further
-While the production sound of a specific type is suppressed in the strongly suppressed mode (while it is output in the suppressed mode or silently, or in the non-output state), the first operation mode described above with respect to the operating means. (Here, the operation button 410) is given an operation opportunity under suppression, and while the production sound of a specific type is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (output in the suppression mode or silence). (While it is in a non-output state), the operation means is given an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the sword decoration body 5001 is pulled out). By preparing it, the effectability when the operation opportunity is given is further improved.

FIG. 220 shows an example of an effect (movement under restraint reception effect) that appears in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode). It is a time chart which shows. Regarding the effect example (non-moving reception effect under suppression) that appears in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), This is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 217 (the period from the timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect).

As shown in FIG. 220, the second suppression operation reception is also performed in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode). In the effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), the part is basically the same as "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" unless otherwise specified (FIGS. 213 and 214, FIG. FIGS. 217 to 219), the above-mentioned related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving unit to a specific position by a driving force when a set time (valid period) occurs is performed. Although it is required to be performed, there is a problem as to when to perform the process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state or short-term gaming state with probability variation time), as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (h), first, Unless the timing tr40 at which the specific type of production sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode arrives, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppressed mode or the weakly suppressed mode, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode occurs even if the set time for which the effect reception is allowed occurs. Is not given, and only the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is given. That is, in this case, unless the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, this is not the second operation mode even if the operation opportunity is given, so that the player It becomes possible to suppress that the operation is performed in the operation mode on the wrong side.

On the other hand, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility of both the case where the operation is performed and the case where the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player is asked "Which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given the operation opportunity" when the specific type of production sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) becomes the strongly suppressed mode. Since it becomes possible to concentrate on ", it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of an operation error between them.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by concealing which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given until just before the operation opportunity is given, from the timing tr40. We try to maintain a sense of tension and a sense of entertainment from the reception of the production to the start of the production after the operation. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (valid period) occurs arrives, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. I'm going to let you. Here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The advance notice production judgment is performed so as to be.

However, in this case, the production reception itself is in a permissible state for a short time after the set time (valid period) occurs (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed). Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving unit, the length of the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (d), the reception allowable sound is obtained for the time required to move the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position. The first aspect, which has the shortest output time among (first permissible sounds), is set as a time shorter than the time until the output is completed. As a result, regardless of which mode (in addition to the first mode, the above-mentioned second mode, third mode, etc.) is output as the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound), the production reception is performed in the middle of the output state. (It is possible to end the output in the middle), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is unlikely that a directing inconvenience will occur.

Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force is such that there is no operation on the operation receiving portion and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. It is moved at a faster speed so that it takes a shorter time than the time required to move from the to the original position (see FIG. 220 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it becomes possible to appeal that the time for which the set time (validity period) is substantially reduced is reduced, and the game due to the reduction of the time. It will be expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of the person.

Further, in order to more preferably suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression shown in FIG. 212 is set as the set time (valid period). "Operation reception" for the set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect) of the mode and the operation reception effect (from timing tr50 to post-operation effect) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 217. It is desirable to set a time value having a length longer than the sum of "the time required to move the part from the original position to a specific position". According to such a configuration, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that more than substantially compensates for the time to be cut is obtained. Since the set time (validity period) is generated, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. In this case, in order to standardize the program, it is possible to set a set time having the same length even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

However, as described above, the time from the timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated is not substantially accepted for production, and the set time (validity period) is substantially reduced. In view of this, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) in the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 212 is set as the set time (valid period). ) And the set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. It can be said that it is more desirable to set a time value having a length equal to or longer than the sum of "time" and "time of timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated". Also in this case, in order to standardize the program, a set time having the same length should be set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

Further, as described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 220 (a), (h) to (l), the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing tr42A, and the post-operation display effect on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is based on the effect reception. (Liquid crystal display) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are at least executed as post-operation effect. However, in this case, as is clear from comparison with FIGS. 220 (g) and 220 (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, the "speed when the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is changed to "the original position is moved to the specific position". It is slower than "the speed of time" so that it can be maintained in motion for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, in exchange for shortening the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), the operation receiving unit has a movable effect (post-operation effect). Since it can be expected to function as a part of), the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

In the production example shown in FIG. 220 (h), the "movement effect from a specific position to the original position" by the operation receiving unit is performed after the operation corresponding to the automatic generation of the effect reception (automatic button function). Although it is set to start when a predetermined timing in the middle of executing the effect arrives, it may be started at the timing tr42A at which the effect reception is automatically generated, as in the post-operation effect.

However, no matter how slow the "movement from a specific position to the original position" is performed, it is not possible to earn enough time as a movable effect by this alone, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the interest of the game. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 220 (h), after the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position in the vicinity thereof), a vibration effect is performed in which the operation receiving portion is vibrated. Therefore, the period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or the position in the vicinity thereof) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving unit is determined by the "operation receiving unit not operated by the player". It is designed to function as a movable production period. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably realize a movable effect using the "operation receiving unit that has not been operated by the player", and as a result of the automatic generation of the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). It is expected that the effectability when the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the above operation is shortened is preferably maintained. In this case, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable effect if the operation receiving portion is made to emit light in a state where the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position. It is possible to appeal to.

Here, regarding the movable effect period (movement time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the "operation receiving portion not operated by the player", is it when the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends arrives? , It is desirable to end before the timing tr44. As a result, the effect sound of a specific type is returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode, and the progress (switching of the effect) in the effect content corresponding to this can be smoothly promoted.

Another difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that a message sound such as "Deliver the sword!" Is used as the second allowable sound (message sound). It may be output, or a message display such as "push" and a copy image by "sword decoration image SYG" may be displayed as operation-related displays, so that operation errors are less likely to occur. become.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the operation opportunity is not given in such a second operation mode, but the "specific type of effect sound" is set to the weak suppression mode. If the operation opportunity is given based on the above, the operation error may be promoted when the recognition of which of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears is mistaken. In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, an operation opportunity is provided under the weak suppression mode of the "specific type of production sound". Since the weak suppression mode appears based on the fact that the production reception is done without giving it, there is a sense of unnecessary tension and expectation that "an operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given". It will be possible to provide a production without having it.

In the above-mentioned production example (second operation mode), even if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, as in the case where there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, FIG. 220 ( As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within the period during which the post-operation effect is being executed arrives, a vibration effect that vibrates the operation receiving portion is performed. According to such a configuration, regardless of the timing at which the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends arrives. Therefore, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will be terminated soon and a new production progress will appear.

However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is started early based on the fact that the effect is received by the operation, so that the post-operation effect is performed during the period. You may try to further improve the game entertainment. That is, in this case, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the specific type of production sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. However, instead of this, when the production reception is permitted when the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, the production sound of the specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is the non-suppression mode. The rate at which the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is given (0) than when the effect reception is permitted when the effect sound is in the weak suppression mode or when the effect sound of a specific type (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode. Or 100) may be higher.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 146 to 220), in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function can be enabled, the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled is set as the set time (valid period). It is desirable to set a time value with a length longer than the set time (validity period) plus the "time from when the automatic button function is activated until the set time elapses". .. According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) having a longer time value is generated, which is more than enough to compensate for the time that is substantially cut as the period for which the production reception is allowed. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur when in a normal gaming state,
-The operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) executed as the effect of the variation pattern itself (design effect) based on the result of the variation pattern judgment, and-The fact that a special result was obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.) As a condition, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) executed as an additional effect to the effect (effect pattern) of the variable pattern itself.
Is to be prepared at least.

That is, in the "intrinsic reception effect", when a special result is obtained by the variation pattern determination (determination as to which variation pattern is used to execute the symbol effect) based on the result of the jackpot determination (a special variation pattern is selected). Then, it is confirmed that the execution is performed within the effect according to the determined fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the "additional reception effect", even if "a predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect" is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if the predetermined variation pattern is selected), the said. It is not always executed unless the result of generating the "additional reception effect" is further obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) according to the selected fluctuation pattern. Therefore, once the production according to the fluctuation pattern is started, the production judgment is made rather than the occurrence of the "intrinsic reception production" that is linked to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) and whose occurrence is confirmed. It is more beneficial for the player to generate an "additional reception effect" that is allowed to occur depending on the result of (notice judgment, etc.), and it can be said that it is more important to enhance the interest of the game. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern, if an "additional reception effect" occurs in the effect, an "additional reception effect" is generated in the effect. The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped (expectation) is higher than when "" does not occur.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the intrinsic reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, a specific type of effect sound (the effect sound of "BGM reproduction") is suppressed or When the production reception is permitted while the output is silent or in the non-output state, and when the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of "BGM playback") is output in a non-suppressed mode. In some cases, the reception of production is allowed. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur in the normal gaming state, the effect reception is not allowed while the output is suppressed or silent, or the output is not output. The reception of production is permitted while the production sound of a specific type is output in a non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, when the production reception is permitted, it is added by paying attention to whether the production sound of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in silence or in a non-output state. It will be possible to recognize the possibility that reception effects will occur, and it will be expected that the game will be maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the intrinsic reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state is operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. Non-automatic that the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends when the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception. It may be executed in the reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effect that can occur in the normal gaming state is not executed in the automatic reception mode, but is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the additional reception effect is generated by paying attention to whether the effect reception is automatically performed (automatic button function) within the set time. It is expected that the game will be maintained until the production is accepted.

FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the fluctuation pattern 1 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 221. When the variation pattern 1 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 1) performed at the start of the symbol variation, the advance notice effect is performed. At least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute A. As a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is to be executed, the advance notice effect A is applied to the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. It will be additionally executed (timing tr61 to tr62), and when it is not determined to execute the advance notice effect A, the advance notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. The symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

Here, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect change when the timing tr61 arrives. It is additionally executed for the production). It should be noted that "additionally executed" can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. At this time, the notice effect A may be displayed by covering all of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 so that it cannot be seen, or covering only a part of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1. The notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the mode of "lamp effect according to the occurrence of the notice effect A" is given priority over the "lamp effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 (effect pattern)". Further, in the case of the effect sound, by assigning the "effect sound according to the advance notice effect A" to a channel different from the "effect sound based on the variation pattern 1", the effect sound is based on the "variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)". The "directing sound according to the advance notice production A" is additionally output to the "directing sound".

FIG. 222 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the fluctuation pattern 2 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 222, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 2) performed at the start of the symbol variation, "addition" is added. At least it is determined whether or not to execute the "target reception effect". Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this production example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212”. Therefore, as a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the "additional reception effect" is to be executed, the "additional reception effect" is subjected to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212). When the timing tr31 in the above arrives, it will be additionally executed for the symbol effect (effect pattern) (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect is completed), and the "additional reception effect" will be executed. When it is not determined, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the "additional reception effect" does not appear and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is only executed. Become.

Here, with respect to the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222, the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. In the meantime, the first permissible sound is output at the timing tr31, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr32, and the set time ends without the automatic button function being enabled at the timing tr33. , These are as described above with reference to FIG. 212 and the like, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222 is not particularly disclaimed as "the content of the effect when the low expectation non-suppressed reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode" shown in FIG. 212. The parts are basically the same, and the above-mentioned related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) related to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 222, an example in which the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed in the mode of the above-described alternative example in FIG. 212. It is described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect reception is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. Then, "post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" and "post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)" are used as post-operation effects. At least it will be generated, but for the post-operation effect,
-While the "post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" is terminated at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33 regardless of the timing when the effect reception is performed. ,
-The "post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)" is executed in such a manner that it ends when a predetermined fixed time elapses from the timing when the effect reception is performed. It will be.

FIG. 223 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the fluctuation pattern 3 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 223, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, any result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination according to the variation pattern 3, etc.) performed at the start of the symbol variation. Regardless of whether or not it is performed, at the timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3, the process of changing the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" to the above-mentioned "strong suppression mode" is performed, and the "strong suppression mode" is performed. At the timing tr41 that arrives while the above appears, an "intrinsic reception effect" is generated as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 to the end of the post-operation effect).

Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this production example is the same as the “specific variation pattern shown in FIGS. 213 to 215, or FIGS. 217 to 220”. Therefore, with respect to the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 223, the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern 3 (specific variation pattern) is strongly suppressed (for example, silence (volume 0)). When the timing tr41 arrives, the first permissible sound is output, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr42, and the set time is set. When the "timing tr42A" before the elapsed timing tr43 arrives without the production reception, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Regarding these, "FIGS. 213 to 215, or FIG. Since it is as described above with reference to "217 to FIG. 220" and the like, the description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 223 is the same as the effect content of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” shown in FIG. (Fig. 215, FIGS. 217 to 220, etc.) can also be appropriately adopted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period in which the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strongly suppressed mode, "intrinsic reception" is performed as a pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern. Although "effect" may occur, "additional reception effect" that is additionally executed for the pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern does not occur, whereas "BGM reproduction" occurs. During the period when the effect sound of "" is set to the non-suppressed mode, "intrinsic reception effect" which is a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern may occur, and additionally to the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern. In some cases, an "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" based on the fluctuation pattern is set to the strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is the "additional reception effect" is excluded. Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed while an environment is formed in which the operation reception effect is executed in which mode. .. On the other hand, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppressed mode, it can be recognized that the additional reception effect may have occurred. It is expected that the game will be maintained.

In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, in addition to the case where the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" appear in separate variation patterns 2 and 3, one variation pattern (for example, , It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" can appear in sequence even within the effect according to the specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3)). It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" occurs at a timing prior to the "intrinsic reception effect".

More preferably, in the production corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the production sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the non-suppressed mode, and the "additional reception production" and the "intrinsic reception production" are performed. "Is made possible to appear in sequence, and while the effect sound of" BGM reproduction "is in a strongly suppressed mode, the" intrinsic reception effect "is made possible to appear further. According to such a configuration, when it is possible to grasp whether "additional reception effect" or "intrinsic reception effect" is generated depending on the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , When it is difficult to grasp which of "additional reception effect" and "intrinsic reception effect" is occurring (non-suppressed mode), a suppressed mode for the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" appears. Through this, it will be possible to improve the taste of games.

Furthermore, if an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a strong suppression mode in the symbol effect according to a specific fluctuation pattern, the internal reception effect is present. It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" does not occur within the period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the operation reception effect is an "additional reception effect" when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode. Not only will it be excluded, but even the possibility that an "additional reception effect" will appear before the symbol change is stopped will be eliminated, so that an "additional reception effect" will occur. On the other hand, in which mode (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.) the generated "intrinsic reception effect" is executed without giving any expectation. You will be able to concentrate.

In addition, when the "additional reception effect" occurs, the "intrinsic reception effect (both non-suppressed mode and strongly suppressed mode)" occurs after the "additional reception effect" does not occur. As described above, it is desirable to increase the ratio of execution in a mode with a high degree of expectation (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.).

Further, as described above, when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is always generated during the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. You may. In this case, among the plurality of fluctuation patterns that are candidates for selection in the fluctuation pattern determination, "a strong suppression mode is set, but an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. The "variation pattern that does not occur" is not included, and the "variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode" is included. .. Alternatively, even if the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode, the period in which the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is set to the strong suppression mode may end without being generated. You may do it. In this case, among the plurality of fluctuation patterns that are candidates for selection in the fluctuation pattern determination, "a strong suppression mode is set, but an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. A variation pattern that does not occur and a variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when the strong suppression mode is set are included. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the "strong" effect is generated. Even if the player does not notice that it is in the "suppression mode", it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring is excluded based on the following effect elements.

That is, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", first, even when the first allowable sound is the "additional reception effect". Even if the production sound that can be output is output for the same time (in the figure, it is output in the "first mode"), based on the first permissible sound, instead of "additional reception production", " It makes it possible to recognize that "intrinsic reception production" is occurring. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 222) output when the "additional reception effect" is generated ends halfway through the output even if the effect reception is performed while in the output state. While it is output over a predetermined time without letting it, it is output when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode". When the effect reception is performed while the output is in the output state, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 223) ends the output halfway based on the effect reception.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first allowable sound, when the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second permissible sound is also output, the possibility that "additional reception effect" is generated is eliminated by confirming whether or not the second permissible sound is output. It is also possible to recognize that. However, as described above, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed is also , When "intrinsic reception effect" is occurring (with message display) while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in "strong suppression mode", "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is designed to be different depending on the case (no message is displayed), and it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is generated is also excluded.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" generated while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the above-mentioned automatic button function can be enabled, whereas the above-mentioned automatic button function can be enabled. In the "additional reception effect", the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled, and this also excludes the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is possible to recognize.

In this way, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", various effects other than the effect elements related to the "suppression mode" are produced. It is relatively excluded that the possibility that "additional reception effect" is occurring is excluded because the element has a different aspect from that when "additional reception effect" is occurring. It can be easily recognized, and it becomes possible to promote concentration on the "intrinsic reception production".

On the other hand, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the "additional reception effect" and various production elements have something in common. By making it difficult to recognize which of the "intrinsic reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" is occurring, the "additional reception effect" is generated. We are trying to provide a directing effect that makes us aware of the possibility of being present.

FIG. 224 is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when the “intrinsic reception effect” as the pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern is generated while the effect sound of the “BGM reproduction” is set to the “non-suppressed mode”. Is. The "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224 corresponds to the variation pattern when a variation pattern different from the "variation pattern capable of generating the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223" is selected. It may be generated as a design effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is selected, it occurs as a symbol effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern. ..

As shown in FIG. 224, the "intrinsic reception effect" that occurs in the "non-suppressive mode" is also the "intrinsic" that occurs in the "strong restraint mode". Similar to the "target reception effect", no matter which result is obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment), it always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the design effect arrives. It has become an immanence.

However, the first permissible sound (first aspect) output when the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224 occurs is the first permissible sound output when the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 222 occurs. Similar to the sound (first aspect), even if the production reception is performed while the output state is in effect, the output is not terminated halfway and is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). .. Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first aspect, it is difficult to distinguish whether the "intrinsic reception effect" or the "additional reception effect" is generated based on the first allowable sound. ..

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first aspect), and this point is also shown in FIG. 222. It is the same as "additional reception production".

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the operation means to be operated is also used as the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed. Only the imitated image and the gauge display suggesting the remaining time are displayed, and the message display is not displayed. In this respect as well, the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 222. It has become.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the "operation button 410", and the "sword ornament 5001" is not the target to be operated. In this respect as well, it is the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 222.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled, and the post-operation effect is performed. The timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) ends without occurring has arrived, and this point is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 222.

In this way, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is set to the "strong suppression mode". Unlike the case where "intrinsic reception effect" occurs, various production elements are common to the time when "additional reception effect" occurs, and "additional reception effect" may occur. You will be able to be sexually aware.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", "intrinsic reception effect (intrinsic reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled)". When "" occurs, there are cases where the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and there are cases where the set time is generated without outputting the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself. .. On the other hand, when the "additional reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself is not output. The set time is not generated, and the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is always output.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is permitted while the production sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", when the reception allowable sound is output, the "intrinsic reception production" is performed. While it is difficult to recognize which of "additional reception effect" and "additional reception effect" is occurring, when the reception allowable sound is not output, "internal reception effect" is displayed instead of "additional reception effect". You will be able to recognize that you are in a state of occurrence. Regarding whether or not the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output when the "intrinsic reception production" is generated while the production sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode". , It is desirable that it is determined according to the type of fluctuation pattern, not according to the effect judgment. "Internal reception effect" in the non-suppressed mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and "intrinsic reception effect" in the non-suppressed mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output. May be sequentially executed within the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern).

Further, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled appears, and when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, "intrinsic reception effect" and "additional reception effect" While it is difficult to recognize which of the above is occurring, when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is an "intrinsic reception effect". Will be.

In the "additional reception effect", it has been described that the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first aspect based on the result of the effect determination (notice determination). When the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", it may not be output (for example, the "specification" shown in FIG. 216. Aspect "). However, for the different modes, it is desirable that the first permissible sound is generated at a lower rate than that of the first allowable sound.

Regarding the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, another example or modification of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 may be appropriately used for a portion not otherwise specified.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, for convenience of explanation, it is shown as if the production determination is performed while the symbol production is being performed, but the production determination is actually performed. Is performed at the start of the symbol change.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIGS. 212 to 224, regarding the mode of the post-operation production according to the production reception, the case where the big hit is obtained by the big hit judgment and the case where the big hit is lost in the big hit judgment. It may be different from. For example, when a big hit is obtained by the big hit judgment, it is as shown in the production example shown in FIGS. 212 to 224, whereas when the big hit is lost by the big hit judgment, FIGS. 212 to 224 are shown. The post-operation effect may be performed in a mode different from the effect example shown in 224.

As described above, the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has been conventionally realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs were described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the effect device for each content of the notice in addition to the commands related to the fluctuation pattern, and were created by a programmer having advanced technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent game machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of the game machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of productions, and it is necessary to realize complicated production control. As a result, advanced technology is required for individual programmers, development man-hours increase, and it becomes difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the man-hours required for the test for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality also increase.

Therefore, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) may be realized by the program code. Instead, the program data for the game machine is output by the tool that creates the liquid crystal drawing effect, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality. I try to do it.

More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks, each of which indicates the content of the effect. Each of the blocks is attached with a flag (availability information) indicating whether or not the effect based on the block can be executed. This flag (availability information) is stored as, for example, rewritable information on the RAM.

The scenario data is configured as, for example, a time-series combination of blocks for the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination. That is, when the start condition for starting the symbol variation is satisfied, first, an effect determination is made as to which type of effect is to be generated among those effects, and when the result is obtained, the effect is determined. Based on the obtained result, the flag (availability information) is set to the on state for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the judgment result to be executed is obtained, and the judgment result to be executed is obtained. For blocks corresponding to the production type that could not be performed, the flag (availability information) is maintained in the off state. As a result, after the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in chronological order (every unit time (1 frame)) to correspond to the block set in the on state. Only the type of effect will be selectively executed.

Here, as for the scenario data, different data may be prepared for each type of fluctuation pattern, or data may be prepared independently of the fluctuation pattern. If different data are prepared for each type of fluctuation pattern, only the blocks corresponding to the production types that may occur separately for each fluctuation pattern will be configured as scenario data combined in chronological order. Of those blocks, only the flag (availability information) of the block determined to be executed is operated in the ON state. On the other hand, when it is prepared as data commonly prepared for each fluctuation pattern, blocks corresponding to all production types (numbers corresponding to blocks) are configured as scenario data stored by a table structure or the like. Therefore, it may be realized by operating only the flag (availability information) of the block determined to be the execution target among those blocks in the ON state. Further, the scenario data prepared without depending on the fluctuation pattern may be prepared according to the type of processing read during the processing (analysis) of the block (described later in "" "Scenario data related to post-operation production" etc.), in this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern will be prepared respectively, and correspond to the type of fluctuation pattern. Since the scenario data that is not used can be commonly used in a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, the processing load and storage capacity can be suitably suppressed.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, interactive effects for external input by the player, etc. occur, so each block operated in the ON state is executed. It is impossible to realize all the productions by itself.

Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the processing identification information (effect SW) for calling the program for executing the effect at a predetermined timing or executing the predetermined control is in the block or in the block. It can be set (embedded) in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with. Here, the processing identification information (effect SW) is prepared for each type of the program to be called, and each of them is set to the on state or the off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (effect SW) that can always function as an on state may be prepared. As a result, when the processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc., it depends on the type of the acquired processing identification information. The processing of the contents will be called, and the called processing will be executed. The processing identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or indicate the number in the table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. It may be.

When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) the embedded processing identification information in the execution analysis of scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc., the peripheral control board 1510 is a program function according to the type of the acquired processing identification information. Dynamically call (call back). Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of the lamp, operation of the accessory, etc.), and the flag. It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent production control, such as setting and updating data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling the program function based on the processing identification information, it is possible to realize the display or non-display of the drawing by a plurality of blocks, the effect and the replacement of the symbol, and the interactive effect for the external input by the player.

The program function called by the callback is built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and it is not necessary to newly create it for each model of the gaming machine. Therefore, even a designer or a plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge only needs to produce and design various production contents, and otherwise sets processing identification information that calls a predefined program function. As a result, it is possible to easily realize this even with complicated production specifications. Furthermore, by creating a production block (liquid crystal production scheduler data) for each production configuration unit using the production creation tool, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period, and in addition, the production content is based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the flag (availability information) and the process identification information without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be significantly reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game control means (main control) capable of determining the jackpot and giving a privilege based on the determination result (winning of the jackpot) obtained. The image data is displayed in the display area based on the substrate 1310), the effect control means (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processing related to various effects based on the fluctuation pattern according to the determination, and the processing performed by the effect control means. An image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) for outputting to the image control means is provided, and the effect control means reads out time-series image information (the above-mentioned scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.), and the time-series image information. It is provided with an image information processing means capable of executing a process for displaying an image based on the above.

Further, in the time-series image information (the above-mentioned scenario data, block, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.) according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof may include processing identification information, and the image The information processing means can acquire processing identification information from time-series image information and call processing according to the type of the acquired processing identification information. As a result, while the processing related to the image is performed every unit time (for example, one frame), the processing related to the effect elements (lamps, sounds, movable bodies, etc.) different from the image is performed based on the schedule for displaying the image. Therefore, when different production elements collaborate to realize one production, it is possible to prevent the start time from shifting between those production elements. Become.

In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, processing identification information is acquired for each unit time in the time-series image information read when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern. The section can be included. In such a configuration, when the time-series image information itself, which is the data for specifying the "process for displaying the image" in time series, includes the process identification information, which is the data for specifying to read the process. Since the time-series image information read when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern can include a section in which the processing identification information is acquired for each unit time, fine timing is provided. Even when it is necessary to perform the effect processing in the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation from the effect of the displayed image.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state. It is said that the permissible special operation reception effect can be executed. This point will also be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is permitted by the permissible pre-operation related display performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the special operation reception effect. The display related to the allowed operation, which is performed when the player is in the operating state, is displayed based on time-series image information (scenario data or block described above, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.) different from each other. That is, in the special operation reception effect related to the above configuration, the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state. It will be expected to concentrate on. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the color rendering property will be poor as much as the specific type of production sound is suppressed. In this regard, in the above configuration, the permissible pre-operation related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the permissible operation-related display that is performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are Since the images are displayed based on time-series image information that is different from each other, it is possible to realize a variety of color rendering properties with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation is not detected within the period in which the effect reception is permitted, the special operation reception effect capable of generating the post-operation effect is executed. It is possible. This point will also be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is permitted by the permissible pre-operation related display performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the special operation reception effect. The display related to the allowed operation, which is performed when the player is in the operating state, is displayed based on time-series image information (scenario data or block described above, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.) different from each other. That is, in such a special operation reception effect, even if the operation is not detected within the period in which the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not perform the operation, and as a result, the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. Moreover, in the above configuration, the permissible pre-operation related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the permissible operation-related display that is performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are Since the images are displayed based on time-series image information that is different from each other, it is possible to realize a variety of color rendering properties for the display effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment reads out the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the blocks, and controls the liquid crystal display by reading the read information. It is possible to output to unit 1512. This point will be described later, but as blocks, the first type block read after the wait time (wait processing period) required until a predetermined timing arrives and the block are read without the wait time (wait processing period). It is decided to prepare a type 2 block.

More specifically, the first-class block is a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the fluctuation pattern and the timing for starting the production arrives. It is possible to configure it as being read after a while. Regarding the type 2 block, for example, availability information corresponding to the type 2 block in the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the type 1 block. Is set to the on state, so that it can be configured to be read without a wait time (wait processing period).

That is, in this case, the type 2 block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data shared between a plurality of timings and a plurality of fluctuation patterns. As a result, it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity will be reduced, and it will be possible to facilitate the production design and the production change.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data), the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect) is produced. The second time-series image information (second block or second liquid crystal effect scheduler data) can be read while the process based on the scheduler data) is in the execution state, and the second time-series image information is read out. Then, the process based on the second time-series image information is changed to the execution state in place of the process based on the first time-series image information in the state of being executed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to save the trouble of terminating the processing based on the first time-series image information in the middle, and it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity will be reduced.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In explaining the technical features, the "block" according to this embodiment will be described again. The "block" is the effect display device 1600. When the image displayed in is composed of "plurality of image elements (plurality of layers)", it is prepared separately for those image elements (layers), and the image elements are displayed. The image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is used for processing to read out information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

Here, the process for reading out the information (image number) corresponding to the image data (process in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed in the "peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95)" started every frame. For each frame, it is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present based on the "block", and if there is such information, it is read out and each A drawing list is created based on the information read separately for each frame and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). As a result, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out the image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and then outputs the display image to the display area to display the effect display device 1600. The production will be realized.

Here, the "block" itself may be configured as a data structure for designating "information (image number) corresponding to image data" for each unit time. In this case, the above-mentioned "liquid crystal" Since it has a function as "effect scheduler data", it is not necessary to prepare "liquid crystal production scheduler data" separately from "block", and this can be omitted.

However, the "block" according to this explanatory example specifies the type of "liquid crystal effect scheduler data", and is currently displayed based on the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" associated with the "block". It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be made, and if there is such information, it is read out and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" may be associated with one "block". In this case, the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" may be executed in a predetermined order. Alternatively, any one of those "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" will be selectively executed.

Further, in the "block" according to this explanatory example, the "liquid crystal effect" in which the schedule for each frame regarding the information (image number) corresponding to the "image data in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)" is described. In addition to "scheduler data", information on which one to execute as "process related to lamp emission", information on which one to execute as "process related to moving body movement", and which one to execute as "process related to sound output". It also includes information about whether to execute it. That is, in this case, assuming that a "block" for realizing a specific advance notice effect is read, "image processing in the effect display device 1600" and "image processing in the effect display device 1600" related to the specific advance notice effect are based on the "block". Since the "process related to lamp light emission", the "process related to the operation of the movable body", and the "process related to the sound output" are read and executed respectively, different production elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound) are read and executed. ) Collaborate to realize one effect (specific notice effect), it is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between the effect elements.

As described above, the "block" constitutes one scenario data together with other blocks or by itself, and among the scenario data, the availability information is turned on. By selectively executing (analyzing) only the effect, the effect is executed in a mode according to the result of the effect determination.

However, regarding the scenario data and blocks, it is sufficient as long as the scenario data has a relationship such as "each of the scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks indicating the contents of the production", and is separate from the "block". The detailed implementation method is not limited, including the provision of "liquid crystal effect scheduler data".

FIG. 225 conceptually shows an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects using "scenario data" and "blocks" when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected based on the result of a jackpot determination. It is a time chart. In FIG. 225, the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is described as an "animation list", but these are synonymous.

As shown in FIG. 225, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this explanatory example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. For example, in the scenario data of “Layer 2”, a plurality of pieces indicating the content of the symbol effect are shown. The blocks (design block A, symbol block B, symbol block C, and symbol block D) are combined in chronological order. However, in this embodiment, scenario data such as layer 1 and layer 5 scenario data, in which only one block is prepared as a block indicating the content of the effect, is also included.

Further, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this explanatory example also includes "a block configured so that any one of the plurality of associated blocks can be selectively executed". , In this case, by operating only the unavailable information corresponding to the selected block among the multiple blocks in the on state and leaving the unavailable information corresponding to the other blocks in the off state, multiple blocks Any one of them can be selectively executed. Alternatively, the block according to this explanatory example also includes "a block configured so that any one of the plurality of associated liquid crystal effect scheduler data can be selectively executed". In this case, only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected LCD effect scheduler data is operated in the on state among the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the unavailability information corresponding to the other liquid crystal effect scheduler data remains in the off state. By setting the data, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data may be selectively executed.

Assuming that the starting condition for the symbol variation (holding digestion) is satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information related to the results of various determinations from the main control board 1310. The information acquired in this way also includes information on the fluctuation pattern, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads out the scenario data corresponding to the information (fluctuation pattern) and associates it with the scenario data as a candidate for execution target. It is determined which block (effect) is to be executed among the plurality of blocks (block corresponding to the notice effect). Then, among the plurality of blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for the block (effect) for which the effect determination to be executed is made, the availability information is operated (set) in the ON state and executed. For the block (effect) for which the effect judgment to be performed is not made, the availability information is left in the off state.

The availability information associated with each block (effect) should be operated (set) to the off state when starting the symbol effect (variable effect by decorative symbol) such as when the scenario data is read out. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read in this way, the above-mentioned processing regarding which block availability information is to be operated (set) in the ON state is performed.

Here, for the "block" whose availability information is operated (set) in the ON state when the symbol effect is started, it is executed (analyzed) immediately after the symbol effect is started based on the scenario data, or the scenario. It is executed (analyzed) following other blocks (effects) started based on the data, or it is executed at the timing after the predetermined wait time (wait processing period) for the scenario data and blocks ( It will be analyzed). However, the block (effect) also includes "things that may be executed at a plurality of timings within one fluctuation pattern" and "things that may be executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns". That is, when the symbol effect is started, if the mechanism is such that the availability information of all the blocks executed within the fluctuation is operated (set) in the on state, "even in the effect mode in which the same content appears". , It is necessary to prepare scenario data (or blocks) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set just because the execution timings are different. " That is, in this case, although the content of the effect is the same, another data is prepared and the effect is executed based on the data, so that there is a concern that the processing load and the memory capacity may be adversely affected.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always executed, but when the symbol effect is executed, the specific block (specific effect) is executed. ) Is not operated (set) in the on state, and the design effect can be started in the off state. As such a specific block (specific effect), in FIG. 225, "appearance EF block E", "operation waiting block E", "post-operation block E", and the like correspond to these blocks. Will be described later. Of these, the "post-operation block E" is executed as an effect that clearly indicates whether the jackpot has been won or lost (an effect in which the effect content dedicated to the jackpot is prepared).

Further, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, even if the block (effect) for which the result of execution is obtained as a result of the effect determination is obtained, this is executed at another fluctuation pattern or at another timing. If there is a possibility of this, it is possible to start the symbol effect in the off state without operating (setting) the availability information in the on state when executing the symbol effect. Such blocks correspond to "operation waiting block A" and "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" in FIG. 225, but these blocks will also be described later.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied at the timing ts1. Therefore, at the timing ts1, the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a form corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern. Next, an effect determination is made as to which of the block associated with the scenario data read in this way and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is to be operated (set) in the ON state. Then, the operation (setting) for the availability information is performed based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is executed (analyzed) for each layer after the operation (setting) for the availability information is performed in this way, so that the production progresses in a manner according to the result of the production determination.

However, instead of this, even if the effect determination according to the type of fluctuation pattern is performed before the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a form corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern. Good. That is, in this case, the result of the effect determination in which the block associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed before the scenario data is read. It will be operated based on.

Here, in "Layer 1" among the plurality of layers, regarding the "background image" that is displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not executed (the symbol is stopped and displayed and the game is not executed). It corresponds to the block of scenario data (block for normal background). Therefore, in "Layer 1", a new block is not read when the timing ts1 arrives, and the block (normal background block) that is already in the execution state is continuously executed (the block for the normal background). It will be analyzed).

More specifically, in the normal background block, which image data should be output as "image data for background image" stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 at "which timing"? "LCD effect scheduler data for normal background", which is information about (time-series image information), is associated with the data. That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the normal background" every unit time (1 frame), and as a result, "image data (moving image or moving image" for the background image or Each time the information corresponding to "still image)" is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one piece of information (drawing list) may be created together with the information obtained from other frames, and may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 as the drawing list. As a result, the background depiction (normal background) according to the schedule defined in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the normal background" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Regarding the blocks and scenario data associated with this "LCD production scheduler data for normal background", the timing when the power-on processing is completed, the corresponding production state (normal production state, high-accuracy production state, special production mode, etc.) It is desirable that the data be read at the timing of entering), and the background image (background moving image) having the same content is set as time-series image information to be displayed in a loop at predetermined time intervals. In addition, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 does not create one piece of information (drawing list) together with the information obtained from other frames, but displays the information corresponding to the "image data (moving image or still image) for the background image". It may be sent to. In short, the information corresponding to the "image data (moving image or still image) for the background image" may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any mode.

The normal background image displayed on "Layer 1" based on the normal background block is SP on "Layer 3" based on the "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block" described later. When the background image at the time of reach is displayed, the background image on the "layer 3" is preferentially displayed and is hidden in the effect display device 1600. However, as an internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on "Layer 3", "LCD effect scheduler data for normal background" is displayed on "Layer 1". The processing related to the normal background image based on the above is continuously executed, and it will not be in the non-executed state depending on the processing status of the SP background image on "Layer 3". It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225, the normal background is displayed again in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of SP reach ends, and thus the normal background is displayed. Originally, the "design block D" for displaying the stopped symbol is executed. As a result, when the jackpot symbol appears, it becomes possible to easily recognize in which production state the winner was won, and it becomes possible to preferably promote understanding of the game.

On the other hand, in "Layer 2", it corresponds to a block (design block) of scenario data regarding "effect symbol (design displayed on the effect display device 1600)". Since the specific fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 225 develops to the SP reach effect, the scenario data of "Layer 2" is associated with the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for pre-reach variation". "Symbol block A" is associated with "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal reach variation", and "design block B" is associated with "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach variation". It is stipulated that the "block C" and the "design block D" associated with the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the stop symbol" are sequentially executed (analyzed).

However, in recent years, during the period when the SP reach background is displayed, the "effect symbol" is often displayed small in the effect display device 1600, and further, after the SP reach background is displayed, it is temporarily displayed on the normal background. The production progress may be made such as "returned, and then the SP reach background is displayed again". That is, in this case, there is a concern that a deviation may occur when some abnormality occurs only by executing (analyzing) the display schedule related to the "directed symbol" and the display schedule related to the "SP reach background" for each layer. Therefore, the "design block C" associated with the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach variation" may be executed based on the display schedule related to the "SP reach background". In this case, the processing related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the effect symbol.

For example, in order to call the "process of turning on the availability information of the symbol block C" at a predetermined timing in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" described later. By adding the processing identification information, it is possible to execute the "design block C" and the "design block D" based on the display schedule related to the "SP reach background". In this case, with respect to the "design block C" and the "design block D", the availability information of the "design block C" and the "design block D" is left off when the symbol production is started, and the "design block A" ] And "Symbol block B" are not included in the scenario data, and are configured as separate scenario data.

Further, in "Layer 3", it corresponds to a block of scenario data (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) regarding "background image after the SP reach effect is started". In this regard, the "background image after the SP reach effect is started" should not be displayed at the time when the symbol effect is started, but should be started from the middle timing of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the scenario data of "Layer 3", a wait time (wait processing period) that functions so as not to execute the block of "background image after the start of SP reach effect" is set until the corresponding timing is reached. There is. As a result, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" are sequentially executed (analyzed) after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has passed since the symbol production was started, and the corresponding weight processing period is passed. Since the information can be read out for each frame, the background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

That is, in this case, the blocks include a first-class block (a block corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 225, etc.) that is read after a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives. The second type block (block corresponding to layer 1, layer 2, layer 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 225, etc.) read out without passing through the wait time (wait processing period) is included. Since the type 2 block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period) and can be used as common data at all production timings, it promotes reduction of processing load and memory capacity. Not only is it expected, but it will also be possible to facilitate production design and production changes.

In this regard, in the SP reach production, the production content for the jackpot (for example, the production content for the character to win) and the production content for the loss are in the middle of the production after starting the display production with the same content regardless of whether the jackpot is successful or not. It is often configured to suggest a jackpot determination result by branching to one of the production contents (for example, the production content in which the character is defeated). At this time, even though the display effect of the same content is executed regardless of the hit of the big hit until the middle stage of the SP reach effect, they are divided into different blocks (block for big hit, block for loss). ) Or image data, there is a concern that the processing load and memory capacity will be adversely affected.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the scenario data related to the SP reach effect includes a block corresponding to the image data that can be shared between the big hit and the lost (SP reach background block) and the big hit. It is divided into blocks (SP ending background blocks) corresponding to different image data at the time of loss, and these are sequentially executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the SP reach effect while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

By the way, in the scenario data related to the SP reach effect, the "SP reach background block" is read out after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" is read out. These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background", there is a section in which the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It is set so that the effect reception period (valid period) is generated by managing each frame of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data instead of managing the time by a timer or the like.

For example, in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 225, the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" is executed (analyzed) separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. ) Is attached so that the processing identification information of "X1" is lined up for each frame from the timing ts31 immediately after that. Each time the process identification information of the "X1" is read, the following "process X1" is read and executed.
Processing X1. Based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a process of determining whether to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" is performed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such processing identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time is the “effect reception period (in which production reception can be performed by operation) It functions as "valid period)", and in the "process X1", when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the "post-operation block C" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on. It is operated (set) to. As a result, the "post-operation block C" is read out every unit time for the corresponding time, and the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler" associated with the "post-operation block C" is read. In addition to the fact that "data C" is executed (analyzed) every unit time, "process related to lamp light emission" and "process related to movable body operation" associated with the "post-operation block C". , "Processing related to sound output" and the like are started to be executed, so that the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" can be generated.

In addition, even in the next frame in which each process associated with the "post-operation block C" is started to be executed in this way, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler" corresponding to the above "SP reach background block" is also executed. "Data" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when the production reception is performed in the middle of the section (production reception period) to which the processing identification information (here, "X1") is attached every unit time, the "SP reach background" is also used in the next frame. The processing identification information (here, "X1") is read from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data", and the above-mentioned "processing X1" corresponding to the processing identification information is executed. However, the "process X1" also includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the "post-operation block C" has been started to be executed. By determining that the execution has been started, the "process X1" is terminated without performing any further processing based on the operation detection information.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 225, four of the same processing identification information (here, “X1”) are arranged from the timing ts31, but they are read from the second processing identification information (here, “X1”). The production was accepted in the "processing X1", and the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data C" associated with the "post-operation block C" was executed (analyzed) in the "layer 6". I'm assuming a case. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read the third and fourth processing identification information (here, "X1") that is filled in in the figure, the "LCD effect scheduler for SP reach background" is lost. It will be read out naturally while executing "data" every unit time. However, each time it is read out in this way, a process such as "the post-operation effect has been executed, so the process X1 is terminated" is executed in the above "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "X1"). As a result, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the "process X1" (the determination that the post-operation effect is not executed is made), the "post-operation block C" associated with the "layer 6" is used. The process X1 is terminated with the availability information turned off. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (“X1” in this case) is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, the “LCD effect scheduler for SP reach background” is used for each unit time (1 frame). The process identification information (here, "X1") is read from the "data", and the corresponding "process X1" is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the above section ends at the fourth processing identification information (here, “X1”), the fourth processing identification information is read out and responds accordingly. When the effect determination is not made in the process X1, the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" is not executed, and the subsequent effects are advanced.

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), "for SP reach background". The same process identification information (X1) for reading "process X1 that can generate post-operation effect" from "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is acquired. However, since it becomes possible to substantially function as the production reception period (valid period) only by analyzing such information, it is possible to preferably facilitate and standardize the production design. Become.

Note that FIG. 225 merely shows such a process as a concept, and in reality, the process identification information is not acquired only over four frames. If it functions as an effect reception period, it is usually set as a section in which the same processing identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the production reception period that occurs at the timing ts31, and the same can be said for the production reception period that occurs at other timings. Further, as described above, such processing identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. Good.

Moreover, in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the SP reach background" shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information (here, "1") related to the operation effect is attached even at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of the "1" does not read the "process in which the effect determination as to whether to generate the effect after the operation is performed", but the following "process 1" is read and executed. It has become.
Process 1. For the player, there is a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the "effect acceptance period (valid period) in which the effect can be accepted by operation" will occur soon, and the effect acceptance period is occurring. A process for operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" for performing the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that prompts the operation.

According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)" in addition to "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background". However, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" can be started to be executed from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) defined by "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background". become. That is, in this case, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" may be started to be executed at any timing in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background" or at a plurality of timings, or the "LCD for SP reach background" may be started. Since it is easy to start the execution of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" from the "liquid crystal production scheduler data" in the fluctuation pattern different from the "effect scheduler data", the production design is facilitated and standardized. Can be suitably measured.

Here, when the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is read out. .. These processes will be executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in "Appearance EF & LCD production scheduler data for waiting for operation", first of all, while production reception is not allowed, "Production reception by operation" There is a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that an effect acceptance period (valid period) that can be performed will soon occur is acquired.

However, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for waiting for operation", the effect for waiting for operation (the above-mentioned image and gauge) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period has occurred from the middle of the process. A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to (display, etc.) is acquired appears, and in the section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for waiting for operation" executed (analyzed) from the timing ts41, "Y3" is set for each frame from the timing ts42, in addition to the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. The processing identification information of is attached so as to be lined up. Each time the process identification information of the "Y3" is read, the following "process Y3" is read and executed.
Process Y3. Based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a process of determining whether or not to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block D" is performed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such processing identification information (here, “Y3”) is attached for each unit time is the “production reception period (valid period) in which the production reception can be performed by operation”. ) ”. Moreover, in the "processing Y3", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)" which is the basis for reading the "processing Y3". The availability information of the "post-operation block D" associated with the same "layer 6" as above is operated (set) in the ON state.

That is, in this case, when the "post-operation block D" is read, various processes including the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" are executed. By doing so, a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block D" is generated. In addition to this, the newly read "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" is the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting)" that was in the middle of execution. In place of "LCD effect scheduler data D)", the execution state is set in "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, it is no longer necessary to read the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal) because the effect determination is made only by reading the "post-operation block D". Since it becomes possible to substantially invalidate (make the production reception unacceptable) the processing identification information of "Y3" for reading "Production scheduler data D)" and further "Processing Y3". , It becomes possible to favorably facilitate and standardize the production design, such as eliminating the need to separately perform determination and processing for terminating these. In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is read from the second processing identification information (here, “Y3”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)”. The production is accepted in the processed "processing Y3", and the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). It is assumed that it is done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the "ray portion" in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)" is erased by overwriting (substantially). It corresponds to the invalidated section).

That is, it is also possible to attach the processing identification information of "Y3" to the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" as in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts31. However, the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" associated with the same layer as the "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" It can be said that it is possible to achieve such an excellent effect by intentionally attaching it to the ")" side.

However, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect: In addition to the above "Y3" processing identification information included in "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D)"
-The processing identification information of "Y2" included in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" is prepared.

That is, as described above, the “appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” is the same “layer 6” as the “post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”. When the process identification information of "Y3" is attached to this, when the "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" is executed. It is beneficial in that it will be erased (invalidated) by itself. However, the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" is included in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)". It is executed (analyzed) by operating the availability information in the ON state based on the processing identification information of "". Therefore, if the frame processing to which the processing identification information of "1" is attached may be skipped when the processing load is high, the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for waiting for operation (appearance EF & operation) may be skipped. "Waiting block D)" itself will not be executed, and as a result, the production acceptance period (valid period) based on the processing identification information of "Y3" may not occur.

Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment uses the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect (the process of determining whether to generate the post-operation effect based on the operation detection information). Prepare the processing identification information of "Y2" and the processing identification information of "Y3", and put the processing identification information of "Y2" on the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" side. The processing identification information of "Y3" is attached to the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" side. In this way, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect, the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern, and the predetermined wait time (wait process) until the timing for starting the effect arrives. The wait time (wait process) is set by setting the availability information to the on state in the process executed based on the type 1 block that is associated with the type 1 block that is read after the period). By preparing both the ones that are associated with the type 2 block that is read out without the period), the above-mentioned risk that the production reception period (validity period) does not occur can be reduced. Will be able to.

Here, in the "process Y3" executed based on the process identification information of the "Y3", when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the above-mentioned "post-operation block D" is operated in the ON state. , The display effect after the operation (post-operation effect) in the effect display device 1600 is executed. On the other hand, in the "process Y2" executed based on the process identification information of the "Y2", when the effect determination is made, the "process related to lamp light emission", the "process related to the movement of the movable body", and the "sound output" are related. "Processing" is started for each. Therefore, even if the processing identification information of "Y3" is not read out, it is possible to realize the post-operation effect by the lamp light emission, the movement of the movable body, and the sound output by the processing identification information of "Y2". Has been done. The "process Y2" and the "process Y3" may be any as long as they can generate post-operation effects different from each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, three same process identification information (here, “Y2”) are arranged from the timing ts42, but they are read from the second process identification information (here, “Y2”). It is assumed that the effect reception is performed in the "processing Y2", and the post-operation effect by the lamp light emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output is executed by this. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read the third processing identification information (here, "Y2") that is filled in in the figure, "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background". Will be read out naturally while executing every unit time. However, each time it is read out in this way, a process such as "the post-operation effect has been executed, so the process Y2 is terminated" is executed in the above "process Y2" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "Y2"). As a result, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
-The "first special operation that allows production reception based on operation detection information" that occurs when a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state. Reception production (production reception period) "and
-The second special operation reception effect (effect reception period) that can generate a post-operation effect regardless of the effect state (effect mode) even if the operation is not detected.
Etc. can be executed as described above (see, for example, FIG. 142 and FIGS. 212 to 224).

In the first special operation reception effect, the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state, so that the operation effect should be concentrated. Will be expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the color rendering property will be poor as much as the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display related to the permissible pre-operation (precursor effect) performed when the first special operation reception effect is generated and the effect reception are permitted in the first special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that is performed when (during the valid period) is displayed based on blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) that are different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to realize various color rendering properties with respect to the display effect, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display related to the permissible pre-operation (precursor effect) performed when the second special operation reception effect is generated and the effect reception are permitted in the second special operation reception effect. The display related to the allowed operation (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that is performed when (during the valid period) is also displayed based on blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) that are different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to realize various color rendering properties with respect to the display effect, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

More specifically, in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 225, the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppression mode. Moreover, even if the operation is not detected, it is possible to generate a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) that generates a post-operation effect, and when the timing ts51 is reached, the special operation reception effect is generated. The process identification information of "2" is read out in order to start the process related to the special operation reception effect. However, the process identification information of "2" does not read "process in which the effect determination as to whether to generate the effect after the operation is performed", but reads and executes the following "process 2". ..
Process 2. Availability attached to "Appearance EF block E" for performing precursory effects (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that an "effect reception period (valid period) in which production reception can be performed by operation" will soon occur Processing to operate (set) information in the on state

According to such a configuration, apart from the "SP reach background block (LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background)", the permissible pre-operation related display (precursor effect) and the dedicated block (appearance EF block E). And the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) corresponding to the block, but for the "block E for appearance EF", "liquid crystal effect for SP reach background". The execution can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) defined by the "scheduler data". That is, in this case, the execution of the "appearance EF block E" may be started at any timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" may be started. Since it is easy to start the execution of the "appearance EF block E" from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" in the fluctuation pattern different from the "data", it is preferable to facilitate and standardize the effect design. You will be able to do it.

Further, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes having different expectations (expectations for the jackpot symbol to appear) are separately prepared for the permissible pre-operation-related display (precursor effect) and the permissible pre-operation-related display. Since it will be possible to appropriately combine them as to which combination to execute, it will be possible to make various variations as a production, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in the game interest. Become. In addition, even when adopted in other fluctuation patterns, it is possible to realize an effect such that the permissible pre-operation related display (precursor effect) is executed in a common mode, but the permissible operation related display is executed in a unique mode that is not shared. It will also be possible.

Here, when the "appearance EF block E" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" corresponding to the "appearance EF block E" is read out and executed (analysis). Will be done. When this "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF" is executed (analyzed), the effect (display related to pre-allowable operation) by the predetermined effect display is changed from the "section where the effect reception is not allowed" to the "effect reception". Image information (moving image or still image) for execution is acquired in a form straddling the "permissible section".

However, in order to execute "a process that can make an effect determination to generate a post-operation effect based on the operation detection information" in the "appearance EF block E" and the "appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E". Since the processing identification information of is not attached, the effect reception period does not occur based on the block or scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the timing ts52 is reached in the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, “3” is generated in order to generate an effect reception period. The processing identification information of is read out. The process identification information of "3" does not correspond to "process in which an effect determination to generate a post-operation effect is made based on the operation detection information", but is data associated with the following "process 3". ..
Process 3. "Availability information of" operation waiting block E "for performing an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period has occurred Processing to operate (set) to the on state

According to such a configuration, apart from the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)" and the "appearance EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)", Allowed operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) A block dedicated to this (block E for waiting for operation) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation) corresponding to the block. Although it is necessary to prepare, the execution of the "operation waiting block E" may be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) defined by the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background". become able to. That is, in this case, the "operation waiting block E" may be started to be executed at any timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" may be started. Since it is easy to start the execution of the "operation waiting block E" from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" in the fluctuation pattern different from the "data", it is preferable to facilitate and standardize the effect design. You will be able to do it.

Here, as for the production reception period generated at the timing ts52, the same processing identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is attached for each frame as in the production reception period in which the production reception is allowed at the timings ts31 and ts42. It may be configured as an effect section to be performed. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, this is realized by a method different from the production reception period generated at the timings ts31 and ts42, and the other production reception periods are also configured by the method described below. It may be.

That is, regarding the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts52, depending on the state operation (off state, on state) of the operation state flag, the effect reception is not allowed (off state) and the effect reception is allowed (on state). ) And will be adopted. When this method is adopted, the effect is based on the operation detection information every unit time (every frame) in the "peripheral control unit steady processing" shown in FIG. 95, not in the processing called based on the processing identification information. It is desirable to make a judgment.

For example, each time the "peripheral control unit steady processing" is performed, the operation status flag is confirmed, and the operation detection information is provided on condition that the operation status flag is in the ON state (provided that the effect is in the reception period). Based on the above, it is possible to make an effect determination to generate an effect after the operation. When the effect determination is made, the availability information of the block corresponding to the type of post-operation effect corresponding to the operation state flag that is in the ON state (here, "post-operation block E") is turned on ("Post-operation block E"). It will be set).

That is, in this case, only the types of post-operation effects are prepared for the operation state flags, and after determining which type of the operation state flags that are turned on, the post-operation effects are performed accordingly. The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) in the ON state. The process of turning off the operation status flag may be executed within the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect to the on state, or the availability information may be turned on. It may be executed in the process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) operated in the state.

The processing procedure when such a method is adopted will be explained again from the point where the processing identification information of the above "3" is read out at the timing ts52 and the above "processing 3" is executed. "Block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation)" is read and executed (analyzed).

The process of turning on the operation status flag may be performed in the above "process 3", but in the example shown in FIG. 225, the above "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler for operation waiting)" At the first frame (processing timing) when "data E)" is executed (analyzed), the processing identification information of "Z1" associated with the following "processing Z1" is read out.
Processing Z1. Of the operation status flags, the process of turning on the operation status flag of the type associated with "post-operation block E".

As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to the "post-operation block E" is operated (set) to the on state at the timing ts52, and the determination based on the operation detection information is performed in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady processing". By performing the process, the period during which the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state can be made to function as the "effect reception period". Further, while the operation status flag is maintained in the ON state in this way, the permissible operation-related display based on the execution (analysis) of the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" (described above). (Image, gauge display, etc.) will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the permissible pre-operation related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) associated with layer 7 and the permissible associated with layer 6 The display related to the middle operation (block E for waiting for operation (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation)) is executed so that the display periods partially overlap each other.

Here, the permissible pre-operation related display associated with the layer 7 is displayed on the front side of the permissible pre-operation related display associated with the layer 6, and is displayed preferentially. It has become so. Therefore, the effect reception is permitted from the time when at least a part of the permissible pre-operation related display is difficult to see due to the permissible pre-operation related display. It is designed to provide a color rendering property such that it is possible to accept the production while it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not the mode with the above is appearing.

In this respect, when the production reception is performed at the timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage in which the production reception period has not yet ended, the same layer as the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal production scheduler data E for operation waiting)". The process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" associated with 6 in the ON state is executed in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady process". As a result, each process (lamp, movable body, sound, etc.) including the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" associated with the "post-operation block E" is executed. .. At this time, in layer 6, the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" associated with the "post-operation block E" is associated with the "operation waiting block E" in the "waiting for operation". Since it is executed in place of the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" for, it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the "operation waiting block E" halfway. At this time, the processing identification information of "Z3", which will be described later, included in the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" can be naturally deleted (disabled). Become.

Regarding the process of turning off the operation status flag, when performing the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" in the on state in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady process". However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the first frame when the above "post-operation block E (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" is executed (analyzed) ( By reading the processing identification information of "Z2" and executing the following "processing Z2" corresponding to this at the processing timing), the processing based on the "post-operation block E" is executed after the production reception period is terminated. I try to do it.
Processing Z2. Of the operation status flags, the process of turning off the operation status flag of the type associated with "post-operation block E"

However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the permissible pre-operation related display (appearance EF block E (appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is left in the screen (displayed state). As mentioned above, the production reception may be done. Therefore, in the "process Z2", it is determined whether the appearance EF block E (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for the appearance EF) is in the execution state, and if it is in the execution state, the process of terminating it halfway is also performed. It is desirable to. However, after the "appearance EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for the appearance EF)" is continued without being terminated halfway, the image display based on the "post-operation block E" is displayed for the "appearance EF". Priority execution (displayed on the front side of the image display (layer) based on the appearance EF block E) is performed in a range (for example, the entire screen) that includes at least the entire range in which the image display based on the block E is performed. As a result, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

Further, in the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)", when the process at the timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), the "process Z3" is supported in order to end the effect acceptance period. The processing identification information of the attached "Z3" is read out. Here, when the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" is executed (analyzed) at the timing ts54, the "post-operation block E (after operation) corresponding to the same layer 6 is executed. It means that the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" is not overwritten by the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)", that is, the timing ts54 arrives. It means that the production reception is not done until. However, the production reception period generated from the timing ts52 is the same as when the production reception is performed, even if the production reception is not performed between the timing ts52 and the timing ts54. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" for operating (setting) the availability information in the on state (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)", the following processing is executed in the "processing Z3" executed based on the processing identification information of the "Z3" read at the timing ts54. It is supposed to be done.
Processing Z3. Among the operation status flags, the operation status flag of the type associated with the "post-operation block E" is turned off, and the availability information of the "post-operation block E" is turned on. The process of operating (setting) is performed

According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, the same block as when the effect was received is read even if the effect is not received within that period, and the block is read. Since the post-operation effect associated with is executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when the player forgets to operate. Further, the post-operation effect is not executed after the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52) ends, but the "effect" is performed within the final frame (process of timing ts52) of the process related to the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52). Since the process for reading the same block as when the reception was made is performed, it is possible to realize smooth production progress without causing a difference between when there is an operation and when there is no operation. become able to.

Further, according to such a configuration, the display image (model image or gauge display) based on the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" can be produced by the player's operation. A process of hiding the effect based on the fact that the effect has been received, regardless of whether the effect is received or the effect is received by enabling the automatic button function (here, "operation". Since the "rear block E") will be executed, even if the player forgets to operate it, the production can be advanced in the same manner, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. It will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225, the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52 is executed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode at the time of the generation. It also functions as a "special operation reception effect". Also in the "first special operation reception effect" shown in FIG. 225, when the effect reception is performed, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not returned to the non-suppressed mode, and the output in the suppressed mode is continued. Then, within the period during which the post-operation effect is being executed, it is set to return the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

The "specific type of production sound" means the sound of "BGM reproduction" (BGM reproduction for normal background or SP background), but here, in particular, it corresponds to "SP reach background block". It corresponds to the sound (BGM reproduced sound for SP reach) output by executing the attached "process related to sound output". As for the suppression mode and method, the above-mentioned mode and method can be appropriately adopted.

In the above configuration, the operation reception effect (timing ts52 to ts54) is generated (or even if the effect reception is not performed) while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed. (When generating an operation reception effect in which the same post-operation effect as when was performed), the permissible pre-operation related display (appearance EF block E) and the permissible operation related display (operation waiting block) performed at that time Regarding E), they are executed based on blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to realize various color rendering properties with respect to the display effect, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect, second special operation reception effect) at such timings ts52 to ts54, images displayed by blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from each other (permissible pre-operation related display). , Allowed operation related display) is displayed so that there are overlapping periods in time. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize the color rendering index (such as the above-mentioned visual difficulty) that is entwined between the "permissible pre-operation related display" and the "permissible operation related display", and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. become.

On the other hand, an operation reception effect (or a post-operation effect occurs when the effect reception is not performed) that occurs when the "specific type of effect sound" is not suppressed, such as the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts41. In the operation reception effect), the permissible pre-operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, such an operation reception effect is different from the operation reception effect at the timings ts52 to ts54 (the operation reception effect that suggests a big hit by the post-operation effect), and occurs according to the result of the effect determination (notice determination). Since it may or may not occur, the permissible pre-operation related display and the permissible operation related display should be displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data), and the handling according to the judgment result should be facilitated. It can be said that it is more beneficial to make it.

However, even when the permissible pre-operation related display and the permissible pre-operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) in this way, although it is on one layer, the permissible pre-operation related display There are times when both the display and the allowed operation-related display appear to overlap in time (both the allowed pre-operation related display and the allowed operation related display are displayed, for example, one of the allowed operation related displays. It is desirable to perform those effects (so that the parts are difficult to see).

Regarding the block of the operation-related display during the allowable operation (block E for waiting for the operation), the processing identification information read based on the block of the display related to the operation before the allowable operation (block E for the appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for the appearance EF)). The availability information may be operated in the ON state within the processing according to the above.

The operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted at the timings ts52 to ts54 may be executed as at least one of the above-mentioned first special operation reception effect and the above-mentioned second special operation reception effect, for example. , FIG. 142, FIGS. 212 to 215, FIGS. 217 to 220, 223, etc., and is executed as one of the above-mentioned operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression). May be good. In this case, regarding the other operation reception effects among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 225, for example, the above-mentioned operation reception effects (operation reception under non-BGM suppression) are referred to with reference to FIGS. 216, 222, 224, and the like. It may be executed as one of the production). In addition, each of these different examples of the operation reception effect, which will be described later, may be appropriately adopted.

For example, the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) generated at the timing ts42 use different blocks, but those operations are performed. In the reception production, the same reception permissible sound may be output when the production reception is performed (first permissible sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224).

In addition, in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52, if the effect reception is performed during the output of the reception allowable sound, the output state is terminated halfway, but the operation reception effect (operation reception effect) generated at the timing ts42. In the operation waiting block E), various configurations are appropriately provided, such as maintaining the output state even if the production reception is performed during the output of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224). It is possible to adopt it.

By the way, regarding the scenario data related to the SP reach effect, a block corresponding to the image data that can be shared between the big hit and the lost (SP reach background block) and a block corresponding to the different image data between the big hit and the lost. As described above, the blocks are divided into (SP ending background block) and these are executed in sequence. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 for shifting from the “SP reach background block” to the “SP ending background block” is within the period during which the post-operation effect is executed. It is set to be sure to arrive at.

That is, in the operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted at the timing ts52, the effect reception (including the above-mentioned automatic button function) is performed at any timing within the effect reception period (timing ts52 to ts54). However, the predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as the period during which the post-operation effect is always executed (the time required to execute the post-operation effect). Then, during the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, the display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the "post-operation block E" (post-operation display effect on the effect display device 1600 (after operation). The effect)) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is prioritized over the display based on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the SP end corresponding to the "SP end background block". (It is displayed on the front side of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP ending background block). Further, in this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set as a longer time than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E, which is a long time. Minutes will function as "the period during which the post-operation effect is always executed".

Within the period in which the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to such "post-operation block E" is being executed, the "SP reach background block" should be shifted to the "SP ending background block". By doing so, "display of SP reach background block (block shared by winning)" and "display of SP ending background block (block used only in winning)" will be completely different atmosphere. Even if the production is designed so as to be, the sense of incongruity is not felt, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the scenario data of "Layer 4" and "Layer 5" is not related to any image, and is a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) that functions only as time-series data for calling processing at a certain timing. It corresponds to. That is, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself does not contain information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and is not involved in any image display. A data structure (empty time-series image information) that can be said to be "data" is adopted. Even if such a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed on the layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

There are two types of such data call blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call). First, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 4", the timing ts21 to call the process at the start of the symbol variation. A wait time (wait processing period) that functions so as not to execute the data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call) is set until the arrival of. Then, when the timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), the "data call block B" is executed (analyzed), and as a result, the "data call block B" corresponding to the "data call block B" is executed (analyzed). The liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data recall is executed (analyzed).

Here, the processing identification information of "X2" is attached to the "data calling block B" or the "data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" corresponding to the "data calling block B" for each unit time. The following "process X2" is executed each time the process identification information of the "X2" is read out.
Processing X2. Based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a process of determining whether or not to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block B" is performed.

In this "data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)", the section to which the processing identification information of "X2" is attached every unit time is "the effect reception that can be performed by the operation. It is designed to function as a "period (valid period)", and in the above "process X2", the availability information of the "post-operation block B" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on when the effect determination is made. The state is manipulated (set). As a result, the "post-operation block B" is executed (analyzed), and the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" associated with the "post-operation block B" is executed (after-operation block B) every unit time ( In addition to being analyzed), "processing related to lamp light emission", "processing related to moving body movement", "processing related to sound output", etc. associated with the "post-operation block B" are performed, respectively. When the execution is started, the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" can be generated.

Even in the next frame in which each process associated with the "post-operation block B" is started to be executed, the above "data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" is still present. It is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when the production reception is performed in the middle of the section (effect reception period) to which the processing identification information (here, “X2”) is attached every unit time, the “data call block B” is also set in the next frame. (LCD effect scheduler data B for data recall) ”is read out from the process identification information (here,“ X2 ”), and the above“ process X2 ”corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the "process X2" also includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the "post-operation block B" has been started to be executed. By determining that the execution has been started, the "process X2" is terminated without further performing the process based on the operation detection information, which will be described in the above-mentioned "process X1". That's right.

On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the "process X2" (the determination that the post-operation effect is not executed is made), the "post-operation block B" associated with the "layer 6" is used. The process X2 is terminated with the availability information turned off. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (“X2” in this case) is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, “data call block B (data call”) is used for each unit time (1 frame). The processing identification information (here, “X2”) is read from the “LCD effect scheduler data B)”, and the corresponding “processing X2” is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the above section ends with the sixth processing identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth processing identification information is read out and responds accordingly. When the effect determination is not made in the processed process X2, the subsequent effect is advanced without executing the post-operation effect according to the “post-operation block B”.

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the "data call block B" The same process identification information (X2) for reading out "process X2 that can generate post-operation effect" from "(liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data recall)" is acquired. However, since it becomes possible to substantially function as the production reception period (valid period) only by analyzing such information, it is possible to preferably facilitate and standardize the production design. Become.

Here, the block corresponding to "Layer 4" (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) does not include the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and the "process X2" read from the process identification information of "X2". Also, the "block waiting for operation" is not read out. Therefore, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts21, the effect reception is allowed in a state where the model image and the gauge display are not performed, and such an operation reception effect is described as the above-mentioned "empty time series image information". It is realized by.

According to such a configuration, the "data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)" can be shared even when another fluctuation pattern is selected. By preparing scenario data with different wait time (wait processing period) setting values, it will be possible to make them appear at different timings.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 5", the data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without passing the wait time (wait processing period). A substantial wait function is activated in the call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call). That is, in the data calling block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling), no image information or processing identification information is read until the timing ts11 arrives, and when the timing ts11 arrives, "4" The processing identification information of is read out. However, the process identification information of the "4" does not read the "process in which the effect determination as to whether to generate the effect after the operation is performed", but the following "process 4" is read and executed. It has become.
Process 4. For the player, there is a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the "effect acceptance period (valid period) in which the effect can be accepted by operation" will occur soon, and the effect acceptance period is occurring. A process for operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" for performing the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that prompts the operation.

According to such a configuration, although it is necessary to prepare a data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) in addition to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A", the "appearance EF & operation" is required. Regarding the "waiting block A", the process identification information of "4" is added from a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from the "data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)". Since it becomes possible to call it appropriately only by itself, it becomes possible to preferably facilitate and standardize the production design.

Here, when the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is read out. .. These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in "Appearance EF & LCD production scheduler data A for waiting for operation", first of all, while the production reception is not allowed, "Production by operation" A section is provided in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) suggesting that an effect reception period (valid period) in which reception can be performed will soon occur is acquired.

However, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for waiting for operation", the effect for waiting for operation (the above-mentioned image and the above-mentioned image) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period is occurring from the middle of the process. A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to (gauge display, etc.) is acquired appears, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for waiting for operation" executed (analyzed) from the timing ts11, "Y1" is performed every frame from the timing ts12, in addition to the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. The processing identification information of "" is attached so as to be lined up. Each time the process identification information of the "Y1" is read, the following "process Y1" is read and executed.
Processing Y1. Based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a process of determining whether to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block A" is performed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such processing identification information (here, “Y1”) is attached for each unit time is the “effect reception period (valid period) in which the production reception can be performed by the operation”. ) ”. Moreover, in the "process Y1", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for operation waiting)" which is the basis for reading the "process Y1". The availability information of the "post-operation block A" associated with the same "layer 6" as above is operated (set) in the ON state.

That is, in this case, when the "post-operation block A" is read, various processes including the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" are executed. By doing so, a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block A" is generated. In addition to this, the newly read "post-operation block A (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" is the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting)" that was in the middle of execution. In place of "LCD effect scheduler data A)", the execution state is set in "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, only by reading the "post-operation block A", it is no longer necessary to read the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal) because the effect determination is made. Since it becomes possible to substantially invalidate (make the production reception unacceptable) the processing identification information of "Y1" for reading "Production scheduler data A)" and further "Processing Y1". , It becomes possible to favorably facilitate and standardize the production design, such as eliminating the need to separately perform determination and processing for terminating these. In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is read from the second processing identification information (here, “Y1”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for operation waiting)”. The production is accepted in the processed "processing Y1", and the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). It is assumed that it is done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the "ray portion" in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for operation waiting)" is erased by overwriting (substantially). It corresponds to the invalidated section).

In "Layer 4", it is decided to set an effect section in which processing identification information is attached to each frame on the "data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)" side. However, the effect section may be set in the block read from the "data calling block" such as "layer 5". Further, also in "Layer 4", as shown in "Layer 5", this is realized by activating a substantial wait function in the data calling block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data calling). May be good.

Further, in "Layer 5", an effect section in which processing identification information is attached to each frame is set on the block side read from "Data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call)". did. However, the effect section may be set in the "data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call)" as in "layer 4". Further, also in "Layer 5", as shown in "Layer 4", the data call block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call) itself is set to wait by setting a weight to realize this. May be good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when the processing identification information of "1" or "4" is acquired, it is suggested that the "effect reception period (valid period) in which the production reception can be performed by the operation" will soon occur. To perform a precursor effect (display of appearance effect, etc.) and an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate while the effect reception period has occurred. It was decided to execute the process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block" in the ON state. However, it is not always necessary to execute the precursor effect (appearance effect display, etc.), and the operation waiting effect (the above-mentioned image and gauge) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period has occurred. It is also possible to execute a process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "operation waiting block" for performing (display, etc.) in the on state. That is, in this case, as soon as the "operation waiting block" is read out, the process identification information associated with the "process in which the effect determination can be made" is acquired.

Further, as described above, the effect reception period generated at the timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may be realized by setting the operation state flag as in the effect reception period generated at the timing ts51.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the processing identification information of "Y2" and the processing identification information of "Y3" are set to be read at the same timing, but are read at different timings. You may set it.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the block and the corresponding liquid crystal effect scheduler data are separately provided, but these may be configured as one data.

Further, regarding the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) in which the information corresponding to the image data is acquired every unit time (every frame), all of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) is obtained at the first processing timing (frame). It may be configured so that information corresponding to the moving image data over a period can be acquired. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame), and after that, although it is analyzed every unit time (every frame), the information corresponding to the image data is obtained. It is not acquired, and the corresponding process is executed only when the process identification information is attached.

The block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) in which the availability information is set to the on state may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing in which the availability information is set to the on state, or the availability information may be turned on. It may be executed (analyzed) at the processing timing one after the processing timing set in.

In addition, about "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for operation waiting)" and "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)". Although different processing identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to the image data". Further, the length as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as a valid period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same image and the gauge display will be displayed for the same time.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected and a background display effect for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result) is performed. ) Is obtained and the display data is shared between the case where the display data is obtained and the case where the display data is shared (SP reach background block), and the case where the jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the display data is not obtained. It is executed in the form of being divided into an effect section (SP ending background block) in which display data different from the case is used. In such a configuration, when performing the background display effect for a specific reach, different display data is not used for the entire period depending on whether a predetermined determination result is obtained or not, but is in the middle. Since the display data is shared up to the section (timing ts55) and the winning (judgment result) is shown using different display data only in the remaining period, the processing load and memory capacity can be expected to be reduced. Become.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 225, in the "layer 6" different from the "layer 3" in which the background display effect for the specific reach is executed, the post-operation effect (including) so as to straddle (include) the timing ts55. The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has priority display (SP) over the background display effect (layer 3) for specific reach. By making it displayed on the front side of the image display based on the reach background block and the SP ending background block), it is obtained that the "big hit (predetermined judgment result)" in layer 3 is obtained. "Switching from the production section where the display data is shared depending on whether there is no display data to the production section where different display data is used depending on whether the jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not" is hidden. (Or make it difficult to see). As a result, "a production section in which display data is shared between the case where a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained". Even if there is a case where the production design does not work well for the production connection in the production section where different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained, it can be hidden (deceived) by the production after the operation. This makes it possible to facilitate the production design. In this sense, it is desirable that the process of moving the movable body to the front of the display screen is also executed in the post-operation effect.

Further, regarding the post-operation effect (post-operation block E) executed so as to straddle (including) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, it is automatically performed regardless of the effect mode. Since it was configured to be executed in a specific manner, "a production section in which display data is shared depending on whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not" and "big hit (predetermined)" It becomes possible to surely conceal the connection with the "effect section" in which different display data is used depending on whether the determination result) is obtained or not.

In order to obtain such an effect, the timing ts55 at which the switching of the effect section occurs is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden. The post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed when the effect is received at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts52 if the end time of the post-operation effect is different depending on the operation timing. It will be required to set within the period before the timing of hiding. In such a configuration, the processing related to the display (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed in "Layer 3", but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. ..

However, "the production section where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where it is not obtained" and "the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration that hides the background display effect (layer 3) at the switching timing with the "effect section where different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained", it should be possible to execute it when the big hit is won. And it may not be executed when the big hit is not won. For example, the post-operation effect (for loss) is executed even when the jackpot is not won, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and a partial effect display or the like is performed. It is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3) by executing as.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 225, as one of a plurality of blocks corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern, the “post-operation block E” is read out based on the fact that the production reception is performed within the period of the timing ts52 to ts54. Is to be prepared. Regarding the "post-operation block E", even when the operation is not detected within the period of timing ts52 to ts54, the effect reception is automatically performed (the same program as when the operation is detected is automatically generated). Since it is generated (by executing it), it becomes possible to provide an interesting color rendering that has never existed before.

In this respect, although not shown, the "post-operation block E" can be executed even when the first fluctuation pattern or the second fluctuation pattern different from the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. May be good.

For example, in the first fluctuation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” of the effect contents corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern are sequentially executed, and are shown in FIG. 225. Similar to the specific fluctuation pattern, the process identification information of "2" and the process identification information of "3" are read out based on the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)", respectively. That is, in the first fluctuation pattern, although the effect content of the SP reach background (“information about image data” acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is different, the same permissible pre-operation related display (precursor effect) as the specific variation pattern. ) And the permissible operation-related display (image, gauge display, etc.) are executed, and the same "post-operation effect" is used as the post-operation effect when the effect is received in the operation reception effect generated in this way. "Block E" is to be executed.

Further, in the first variation pattern, even if the operation is not detected in the operation reception effect, the effect reception is automatically performed, and the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" are used. It is the same as the specific fluctuation pattern in that the switching of the background effect is hidden by executing the effect after the operation so as to straddle (including) the switching timing with.

In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared depending on whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not" and "a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is hidden at the switching timing with the "effect section in which different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained", the first variation pattern is the same as the specific variation pattern. , It is possible to execute when the jackpot is won, and it may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. According to such a configuration, although different background effects (SP reach effects) are executed for the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern, the different background effects are hidden when the jackpot is won. The same effect (effect after operation) will always appear in the form of a game, which makes it possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, it is recognized that the jackpot was lost at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) having different contents in the specific fluctuation pattern and the first fluctuation pattern appears. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the jackpot has been won by hiding the "background effect" whose effect content differs depending on the fluctuation pattern and making sure that one effect content appears. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit was lost by displaying the "background effect" whose production content differs depending on the fluctuation pattern without hiding it. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to maintain your intuition.

On the other hand, also in the second fluctuation pattern, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" of the effect contents corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern are sequentially executed. However, the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" in the second variation pattern may have the processing identification information of "1", but the processing identification information of "2" and the processing identification information of "3". The process identification information is not included, and immediately before the transition to the "SP ending background block", the operation reception effect that can generate the post-operation effect that straddles the transition timing does not occur. ..

In this regard, in the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" related to the second fluctuation pattern, the process identification information of "5" (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing while the effect reception is not allowed. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of "5", the process (process 5) of operating the availability information of the post-operation block E in the ON state is executed. It has become like.

Then, by turning on the availability information of the "post-operation block E" in this way, even in the second fluctuation pattern, the "operation" is performed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern" and "first fluctuation pattern". The same post-operation effect based on "Post-operation block E (LCD effect scheduler data for post-operation)" straddles (including) the switching timing between "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block". Will be executed on another layer.

In such a configuration, when a second fluctuation pattern different from a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the production reception should be allowed for a period in which the production should be designed as a display related to the background production. Since "block E for post-operation" is intentionally executed as a block different from the block for the background image at a predetermined timing in the production section where it has not occurred, the image and gauge are not displayed and the operation is performed. The post-operation effect (post-operation block E) suddenly appears when the effect is accepted in another variation pattern, even though the effect is not accepted and even the effect reception is not allowed. , It will be expected to improve the game entertainment.

According to such a configuration, even in the second fluctuation pattern, "a production section in which display data is shared depending on whether a jackpot (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not" and "big hit" Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design a production connection well in the production section where different display data is used depending on whether the (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not. It becomes possible to hide (fake) and facilitate the production design.

In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared depending on whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not" and "a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is hidden at the switching timing with the "effect section in which different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained", the second variation pattern also includes a specific variation pattern and a first As in the case of the 1-variation pattern, it may be possible to execute when the jackpot is won, and it may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. According to such a configuration, although the background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern is executed, the different background effect is hidden when the jackpot is won. The same effect (effect after operation) will always appear in the form of a game, which makes it possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, it is recognized that the jackpot was lost at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) having different contents from the specific fluctuation pattern or the first fluctuation pattern appears. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the jackpot has been won by hiding the "background effect" whose effect content differs depending on the fluctuation pattern and making sure that one effect content appears. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit was lost by displaying the "background effect" whose production content differs depending on the fluctuation pattern without hiding it. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to maintain your intuition.

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and another example thereof, the operation reception effect is executed based on various processing identification information attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach). , These processing identification information may not be attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach), and may be, for example, a symbol block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the symbol). ), A call block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for call), or the like, which may be read from another block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225 and another example thereof, a line is executed in the process read based on the process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3". In the effect determination, the effect determination based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is illustrated. However, the specific operating means is not limited to the operating button 410, and may be another operating means. In addition, a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, operation button 410,) may be used for all or part of the above effect determination based on the processing identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3". It is determined which of the sword effect operation unit 5000, etc. is in the state where the operation opportunity is given, and whether or not the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given has been operated (effect determination). Will be done). According to such a configuration, it is determined which of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.) is to be given an operation opportunity, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize the operation reception effect in which the operation opportunity is given only to the user, the processing identification information, the liquid crystal effect scheduler, the block, etc. are shared regardless of which operation means is given the operation opportunity. You will be able to make it. Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both of the different operation means, and the post-operation effect based on the processing identification information may be executed based on the fact that one of the previously operated operation means has received the effect. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, a plurality of permissible pre-operation related displays in the appearance EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 without movement of the operation button 410 (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) and a special appearance EF block E2 with movement of the operation button 410 (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.). Is provided, and one of them can be executed (analyzed) according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, if the blocks following the appearance EF block E1 and the appearance EF block E2 (both or one of the operation waiting block E and the operation post-operation block E) are used in common, the blocks can be saved. Will be.

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, based on the processing identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. By executing the read process, it is possible to accept an operation for a specific operating means. However, in addition to this, for a predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means, in a process (for example, peripheral control unit steady process) that has nothing to do with the process identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The operation may be received at, and a change corresponding to the reception may be caused for the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the production progress due to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the operation for the predetermined operation means can be properly accepted. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

In addition, the block itself is prevented from appearing by a player operation different from the process of performing the effect determination based on each process identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3". Therefore, all the effect elements (display, sound, movable) related to the target block may be disabled. In such a configuration, it is possible to save layers.

In addition, the period of the effect determination is such that a part of each process identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3" is converted into other process identification information by the player operation. Or the opportunity may be changed.

The specific layer may be scheduled to be used before the start of the target fluctuation, and may be used across a plurality of fluctuations.

The block may be used not only during the fluctuation but also during the hit game. Further, a block straddling from the fluctuation to the hit game or a block straddling from the hit game to the probability change may be provided, and the processing identification information is also provided in these blocks and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block. It may be attached.

Further, the type of processing identification information to be read may be changed according to the gaming state, such as "Y3" being attached only to the block (or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the probability change state.

In addition, during error notification (abnormal notification), it is desirable not to delete any block or process identification information during execution, although an error image is displayed or an error sound is output. As a result, the effect can be appropriately restored after the error is cleared.

Further, among the examples shown in FIG. 225 and the inventions inherent in other examples thereof, the described effects are exhibited without necessarily using a technique such as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) or processing identification information. If it can be done, it may be realized by another method.

[Production judgment based on operation detection information before the validity period occurs]
In general, when the production reception period (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the above-mentioned "image" or "gauge display (bar display)" is displayed according to the timing of the occurrence. In this regard, if the player plays for a long time or plays many times, it becomes possible to predict at which timing in the fluctuation pattern the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. Then, some players cannot wait for the operation and operate it aiming at the timing in anticipation that the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. At this time, if the operation is performed immediately before the "image" or "gauge display" is displayed (immediately before the production reception period occurs), the "image" or "gauge display" is displayed. It is misunderstood as if the operation was performed in the state of being (the state where the production reception period has occurred), and as a result, the re-operation within the production reception period (valid period) is delayed, and the production is accepted. In some cases, the production reception period (valid period) would end without fail.

In this regard, in the special operation reception effect (for example, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225) according to this embodiment, the effect reception period (valid period) starts from a predetermined timing in the m-th frame after the start of fluctuation. ) Occurs, as described above, even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect is determined by the automatic button function and the post-operation effect can be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the re-operation within the production reception period (valid period) is delayed in the above-mentioned situation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production cannot be confirmed after the operation. become able to.

However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, it is not possible to remember the actual feeling that the post-operation effect was generated due to the operation by the player, so there is a concern that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows the effect determination to generate the effect after the operation only within the effect acceptance period (valid period), but detects the operation state. Even if the effect is made within the period (immediately before) before the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, it is intentionally used as the target (determination material) of the effect determination. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (validity period) in anticipation of the occurrence, the operation is performed within the production reception period (validity period). After the operation, the production will be executed as if it were a new one. That is, in this case, the player also feels that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation, so that the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

On the other hand, as will be described later, even if the operation state is detected within the period (immediately before) before the production reception period (valid period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specific time. When the production reception period (valid period) occurs while maintaining the above, it is not determined that the production reception will be performed within the m-th frame. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to fairly give the player the conditions for accepting the production, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, at least in the predetermined operation reception effect, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs from a predetermined timing within the mth frame after the start of the fluctuation, at the time when the mth frame is started. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the "image of the operating means (or the gauge display suggesting the remaining time)" is not yet displayed. That is, in this case, since the period in which the production reception is permitted internally occurs from the time when the image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, the player takes the lead. As a result, even if the operation is performed just before the image (or gauge display) is displayed, the production will be accepted and the production cannot be confirmed after the operation. It will be possible to suppress it.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described, but in explaining the technical features, the "directing reception period (valid period)" according to this embodiment will be described again. (Validity period) "means" the period from the start of the process of generating the state in which the effect reception is permitted to the end of the process ". Here, the details of the "process for generating a state in which the production reception is permitted" differ depending on the method for realizing the "production reception period (valid period)", but for example, the "operation state flag (see FIG. 225)". Corresponds to "a process of turning on", "a process of setting a timer", "a process of calling an effect reception determination process based on process identification information (see FIG. 225)" and the like. That is, the "production reception period (valid period)" corresponds to the "production section (period) from the execution of the process for generating the state in which the production reception is permitted until the lapse of a predetermined time". This predetermined time is the "time until the operation status flag is turned off" or the "time until the timer is timed up", and the "effect section to which the same processing identification information is attached in each frame ends". It corresponds to "time until it is done". Then, within such an "effect reception period (valid period)", a determination process as to whether or not the production reception is performed is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every frame) based on the detection of the operation state. However, in the "determination process of whether or not the production reception is performed" according to this embodiment, not only the "operation state detection" performed within the "production reception period (valid period)" but also the said The feature is that "detection of operation state" performed before the "effect acceptance period (valid period)" occurs is also targeted. As such a "directing reception period (valid period)", for example, it is generally created as a period of about 100 frames.

FIGS. 226 to 231 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the processing performed before and after the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. In each of the examples described below, the case where the image is displayed using the "block" and the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" described with reference to FIG. 225 is shown, but the display method is not limited to this. As long as it is a general one that controls the image in units of frames, the realization method does not matter. In addition, "process to generate a state in which production reception is allowed" is also exemplified as "process to turn on the operation state flag", but is not limited to this, and "process to set a timer" and "process to set a timer" and "process". Other methods such as "a process of calling the process of determining the reception of the effect based on the process identification information" may be used.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period).

Now, when a special operation reception effect (for example, an effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225) occurs in a specific variation pattern, the "effect" is set within the "m" th frame after the symbol variation is started. It is assumed that the operation status flag is operated (set) in the ON state as "a process for generating a state in which reception is permitted". Note that the operation status flag is operated (set) to the on state at the halfway "timing t1 (m)" in the "m" th frame by "operating (setting) the operation status flag to the on state". Even if the "process" itself is executed based on the arrival of the "m" th frame, more strictly speaking, the start timing of the "m" th frame is related to the execution of other processes. It is impossible to execute all of the various processes including the relevant process, and while the various processes are executed in a predetermined order, they are executed later than the "frame start timing". Because it is always the case.

When the operation state flag is operated in the ON state in this way, an effect section (effect acceptance period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs, and within the effect reception period, at predetermined time intervals, based on the operation detection information. "Determination processing for whether to generate an effect after operation" is performed.

The effect reception period according to this example is described as "special operation reception effect" shown in FIG. 225. Therefore, regarding the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect", as described above, "peripheral control unit steady state" regardless of whether the effect acceptance period has occurred (whether the operation state flag is on). It is executed as "effect determination based on operation detection information" for each unit time (every frame) in "processing". Then, by continuing this after the production reception period, even within the production reception period, "determination processing as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect" is performed at predetermined time intervals based on the operation detection information. (In the figure, it is executed at "timing t2 (m)", "timing t2 (m + 1)", "timing t2 (m + 2)", and "timing t2 (m + 3)", respectively). That is, in this case, the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" is executed even in the frame before the "m" th frame, but the operation state flag is off. As mentioned above, this is effectively invalidated in the situation, so it will be omitted in the figure.

Further, in this example, the order of various processes performed when a new frame arrives is "after the operation" rather than the order in which the "process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" is executed. The order in which the "judgment process for whether to generate the effect" is executed is set later, and the effect is produced within the same frame (mth frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state. The reception (judgment that the production will be generated after the operation) can be made. However, regarding the order, it is not always necessary to execute the "process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" first, and conversely, "whether to generate the post-operation effect". The order in which the "determination process" is executed may be set first. In this case, within the same frame (mth frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state, the "judgment process for whether to generate the effect after the operation" itself is not performed, so the effect is produced. The reception (judgment that the effect will be generated after the operation) will not be made.

Conventionally, at the timing t1 (m) in the "m" th frame, "a process of generating a state in which the effect reception is allowed (here," a process of operating the operation state flag to the on state ")" is executed. If so, "whether to generate the post-operation effect" is based on the operation detection information acquired within the period after the process is executed (here, "the period during which the operation state flag is on"). The "judgment process" was to be executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, at the timing t2 (m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not the operation was performed within the period of the timings t1 (m) to t2 (m), and the operation is performed. When it is determined that there is, the post-operation effect is executed, and when it is not determined that the operation was performed (or the operation state was detected, but the length of time maintained as the operation state is not sufficient. When it is determined that it is sufficient), the post-operation effect is not executed, and at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the next frame, whether or not the operation was performed within the period of the timing t2 (m) to t2 (m + 1) is operated. The process of making a judgment again based on the detection information was executed for each frame.

However, with this, if there is a person who can not wait for the operation and operates aiming at the timing in anticipation that the production reception period will occur, the production reception period will not be accepted. As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (validity period) will end. Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows the "effect determination to generate the post-operation effect" only within the effect reception period (valid period), but the "operation". Regarding the "state detection" itself, even if it is performed within the period (immediately before) before the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs, this is used as the target (judgment material) of the operation detection determination. I dare to use it.

For example, in such an operation detection determination, it is usually used as a determination condition that "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more" in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like. Be done. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment also uses the operation detection information before the timing t1 (m) arrives, and within the period of the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). "Even if the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is not maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more, the predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more is performed before the timing t1 (m). If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for the time of, it is determined that the operation has been performed, and the effect after the operation is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (validity period) in anticipation of the occurrence, the operation is performed within the production reception period (validity period). After the operation, the production will be executed as if it were a new one. That is, in this case, the player also feels that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation, so that the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

Which one is used as a more specific configuration for such operation detection information is not particularly limited. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether or not the operating state is maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more on a frame-by-frame basis. A frame whose operation state is maintained (continued) for a time (for example, 3 ms) or more is left as an "ON frame", and a frame having no history as an "ON frame" is treated as an "OFF frame". I have to. The history may be left at the end of a frame or at the start of the next frame, or the history as an "ON frame" is left when the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). It may be.

Then, as will be described later, in the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left. When the operation detection information is obtained in the manner in which the above are arranged, the effect reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is made so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

Since the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is an "ON frame" or an "OFF frame" at the end of the frame and records the history, FIG. 226. In the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in the above, the "m" th frame including the timing t2 (m) is not used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-3" th frame, the "m-2" th frame, and the "m-1" th frame are used as determination materials, and these are the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON". It is determined whether or not the history is left as a "frame". On the other hand, when the history as the "ON frame" is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the "operation" performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. 226. In the "determination process of whether to generate the post-effect", the "m" th frame including the timing t2 (m) is also used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are used as determination materials, and these are the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". It will be determined whether or not the history is left as.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 226, the case where the operation is not detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period) is shown. Therefore, at the determination timing (timing t2 (m), t2 (m + 1), t2 (m + 2), t2 (m + 3) in the figure) in each frame after the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, It will be judged that the history as "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "OFF frame" is left, and the production will not be accepted (determination that there was an operation), and the post-operation production will be performed. Not executed.

By the way, with respect to the image displayed by the effect display device 1600, there is a delay of 2 frames (or 1 frame) from the start of the processing related to the display by the peripheral control unit 1511 until the image appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing of determining which image to use as an image according to various determinations and creating a drawing list in response to the determination). Processing in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that received the processing result (information about the image such as the drawing list) on the peripheral control unit 1511 side (preparation buffer (buffer in the hidden state) among so-called double buffering). This occurs because one frame is also required for the drawing process on the) side.

Therefore, conventionally, regarding the processing related to the "effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)" by the peripheral control unit 1511, the frame two frames before the "m" th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. (The "m-2" th frame) is set to start, so that the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the "m" th frame during the valid period.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "the effect during the valid period (block for operation waiting)" is still displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the m-th frame is started. One of the features is to make it non-existent, and the period up to the "m-1" th frame immediately before the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs is "pre-validation period production (effect production, etc.)". "Processing period for" Appearance EF block E ")", and the period from the "m" th frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs is "Production during the valid period (image, gauge display, etc." The processing period for the operation waiting block E ")" is set. As shown in FIG. 225, the "processing period for the effect before the valid period ("block E for appearance EF "such as the effect effect)" is set to be continued after the "m" th frame, and is "effective". It may overlap with the "processing period for the effect during the period ("operation waiting block E" such as an image or gauge display) ".

More specifically, in the predetermined period until the "m" th frame arrives (or the period after that), the drawing list is created based on the information corresponding to the "pre-validation effect (effect effect, etc.)". It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). On the other hand, the predetermined period (the period during which the effect is performed during the valid period) after the arrival of the "m" th frame is drawn based on the information corresponding to the "effect during the valid period (image, gauge display, etc.)". A list is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226, in the peripheral control unit 1511, up to the "m-1" th frame (or even thereafter), "pre-validation effect (block E for appearance EF)". Is executed, and after the "m" th frame, the process related to "effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)" is executed. However, in the effect display device 1600, in the "m" th frame, the process is executed. "Pre-validation effect (display based on block E for appearance EF)" is still in the middle of execution, and "effect during validity period (display based on block E waiting for operation)" finally starts in the "m + 2" th frame. Will be done. That is, in this case, the production is received internally from the time when the "effect during the valid period (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is not yet displayed ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame). Will occur for a period of time, so the player will take the lead, and as a result, the operation will be performed just before the "production during the valid period (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is displayed. Even in such a case, the production will be accepted, and it will be possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production cannot be confirmed after the operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 226, the process related to the "pre-validation period effect (display based on the appearance EF block E)" and the process related to the "valid period effect (display based on the appearance EF block E)" are performed. For convenience of explanation, it is determined to be executed for each frame in the peripheral control unit 1511. However, when these effects are displayed by moving image data, it is sufficient to create a drawing list based on "information corresponding to the moving image" at the start frame of the processing in the peripheral control unit 1511. That is, in this case, in each subsequent frame, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) side automatically reads out the image data and displays the image data. Therefore, the peripheral control is performed for each of the above processes. It may not always be performed frame by frame in the unit 1511.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started in the “m + 1” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 226.

As described above, in the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left are When the operation detection information in the line-up manner is obtained, the effect reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is made so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 227, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m + 1) in the "m + 1" th frame (timing before the judgment timing of the production reception). The "m + 1" th frame itself itself is designed to leave a history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the frame, all of the three frames (“m-2” th frame, “m-1” th frame, and “m” th frame) to be determined are all. Since it is an "OFF frame", the production reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is not performed.

Even at the timing t2 (m + 2) in the next frame "m + 2" th frame, the three frames ("m-1" th frame, "m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame) to be judged are Since the history as "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "ON frame" is left, respectively, the production reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is not performed.

Further, when the timing t2 (m + 3) in the next frame "m + 3" th frame is reached, the three frames ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame, "m + 2" th frame) to be judged are changed. The history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left in each state, and the production reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is performed accordingly.

According to such a configuration, since the "m + 1" th frame and the "m + 2" th frame are "ON frames", the operation state is set for a predetermined time or more over two frames within the production reception period (valid period). It can be determined that the situation is maintained (for example, 3 ms). Further, since the "m" th frame is the "OFF frame", it is possible to determine that the operation has been started within the effect reception period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is properly performed within the period in which the production reception is permitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 227, the production reception period (valid period) is the same as before. ) (Here, timing t2 (m + 3)), the effect reception is performed, and the post-operation effect (here, "post-operation block E") corresponding to this is executed (started). In this example, the process of turning off the operation status flag is executed when the production is accepted, but the operation status flag may be turned off at the end of the frame, etc. By executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the fact that the effect reception has been performed, the operation determination process may not be (substantially) performed in the next frame.

In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2 (m + 3), the post-operation effect (operation) is started from the frame (“m + 3” th frame) for which the effect reception is performed. The processing related to "Post-block E)" is to be performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display corresponding to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the "m + 5" th frame (not shown) two frames later.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started in the “m-2” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 226.

As described above, in the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left are When the operation detection information in the line-up manner is obtained, the effect reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is made so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows "the effect determination to generate the effect after the operation" only within the effect acceptance period (valid period), but "the operation". Regarding the "state detection" itself, even if it is performed within the period (several frames immediately before) before the production reception period (valid period) occurs, this is the target (judgment) of the operation detection judgment. I dare to use it as a material).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame two frames before the "m" th frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such a timing is not used in the determination related to the production reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the "m" th frame, the timing t2 in the "m" th frame occurs. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the three frames prior to this (“m-3” th frame, “m-2” th frame, “m-1” th frame) is sent to the production reception. It is supposed to be used in such a judgment. And in this example, these frames ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, "m-1" th frame) are "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively. The history of the above is left, and the production reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is made by this.

According to such a configuration, the "m-3" th frame is an "OFF frame", and the "m-2" th frame and the "m-1" th frame are "ON frames". Therefore, it is possible to determine that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 3 ms) for two frames immediately before the occurrence of the effect reception period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame two frames before the "m" th frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 228, the production is received within the production reception period (valid period) (here, the timing t2 (m)), and the post-operation effect (here, "post-operation block E") corresponding to the reception is performed. ) Will be executed (started). When such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 228, the production reception period (valid period) itself is ended in an extremely short time in which even one frame is not continued, but the production reception period (valid). Even if the operation is started immediately before the occurrence of the period), it is considered that the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period), and the post-operation effect is generated. You will be able to make it. That is, in this case, the player also feels that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation, so that the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

However, if the production reception in such a manner is frequently performed, the significance of the production reception period (valid period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (valid period) at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame. When this is done, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the image or gauge display. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to raise some doubts as to whether or not the "post-operation effect" was caused by being given an operation opportunity, the effect acceptance period (effective). It can be expected to suppress the start of the operation before the period) occurs.

It should be noted that the method of realizing "the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the image or gauge display" is not particularly limited. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the processing related to the “effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)” is performed from the “m” th frame without considering the delay of two frames. Then, when the production reception is performed at the timing t2 (m), the processing related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" is performed from the frame ("m" th frame) for which the production reception was performed. I am trying to do it. As a result, as shown in FIG. 228, the process related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" is executed without executing the process related to the "effective period effect (operation waiting block E)". Therefore, the post-operation effect will be executed without displaying the image or gauge display.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the "m-2" th frame is maintained so as to straddle the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame. Therefore, it was decided to explain what kind of determination is made based on the assumption and how the effect according to the determination is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 229, the operation (operation state) started from the "m-2" th frame is not maintained so as to straddle the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, and "m". Even if it ends within the -1 "th frame, if the" m-2 "th frame and the" m-1 "th frame each leave a history as an" ON frame "(respectively). If the operating state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing as described with reference to FIG. 228, and the same effect is executed according to the determination.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 228, the operation by the player is not detected at all after the production reception period occurs, and is performed only within the period before the production reception period occurs. Although it is not the case, the judgment conditions ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame are "OFF frames", respectively, for the reception of the production at the timing t2 (m). , "ON frame", "ON frame" history is left) is satisfied, even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m), the production is accepted and the operation is performed. The post-production will be executed.

The same can be said for such a configuration when the operation is performed within the production reception period (valid period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 227, the operating state is not maintained at the time of timing t2 (m + 3), and the timing is earlier than the timing t2 (m + 3) in the "m + 3" th frame, or "m + 2". Even if the operation state is completed within the second frame, the judgment conditions ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame, and "m + 2" th frame related to the reception of the production at the timing t2 (m + 3) are "m + 2", respectively. As long as the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is satisfied), even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), FIG. 227 shows. The production will be accepted as shown, and the production will be executed after the operation.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing when the "determination regarding the production reception" is performed, and the timing when the "determination regarding the production reception" is performed When the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer within a period prior to that (in this embodiment, when the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer in each of the two frames), the operation targeted for operation. The production is accepted on the assumption that the operation has been properly performed on the means, and the production after the operation is executed.

Here, the operation detection information obtained before the production reception period (valid period) occurs is used in the "judgment process related to the production reception" performed after the production reception period (valid period) occurs. If it is simply used as a judgment material, for example, it is operated from a situation where even a precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed and there is no sign that an effect acceptance period (valid period) will occur. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that some people will be able to accept the production. That is, if the operation in such a mode is permitted, the significance of the production reception period (valid period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment detects whether or not the "OFF frame" and the "ON frame" exist, instead of targeting only the "ON frame" as the determination target. This is intended to eliminate the above concerns. In this embodiment, ON / OFF is determined on a frame-by-frame basis, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, "the timing at which the operation is started is determined by detecting the rise and fall of the sensor signal, and the operation is determined. A method such as "the production reception is performed on the condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer from the timing" may be adopted. Even in such a case, it is possible to determine how long before the production reception period (valid period) occurs when the sensor signal rises and falls, and the time during which the operation state is maintained. It is possible to solve the above problem by determining how long it continues.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started from the “m-3” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 226.

As shown in FIG. 230, in this example, the operation started in the "m-3" th frame three frames before the "m" th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs is the effect. It is assumed that the process is continued until the "m + 2" th frame within the reception period (valid period). Also in this example, when the production reception period occurs, first, the "judgment regarding the production reception" is performed at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, and in the determination, the production reception period occurs. The previously acquired operation detection information (here, the operation detection information acquired in the "m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame) is used as the judgment material. It is supposed to be.

However, in this example, the history of the "m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame as "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" remains, respectively. Since it is in the state of being performed, the effect reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is not performed as a result of the "determination related to the effect reception" at the above timing t2 (m). Not only that, even in the "judgment related to the production reception" performed after the next frame such as timing t2 (m + 1), the three frames to be judged are "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON". Since only the history as a "frame" is left, as long as the operation state from the "m-3" th frame is maintained, the production is performed as a result of the "judgment regarding the production reception" performed in each frame. No reception (judgment that there was an operation) will be made.

That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the "m-3" th frame is temporarily terminated, a frame in which the history as the "OFF frame" is left is created, and then the operation is not performed again, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to prevent (determination that an operation has been performed) from being made. As a result, even if the operation state is maintained from the time when the precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed and there is no sign that the effect reception period (valid period) will occur, based on this. It becomes possible to preferably avoid the reception of production.

As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 227 to 230, when the effect is received at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, the post-operation effect is performed without displaying the image or gauge display. It will be done (see in particular Figure 228). However, in this case, it is not possible to feel that the post-operation production has occurred due to the operation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. However, the production may be advanced so that the model image and the gauge display are always displayed. In this case, regarding the feature that "at the time when the m-th frame is started, the" effect during the valid period (block for operation waiting) "is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600". It is not always necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

The method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited, but for example, the timing at which the "process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" is performed in the frame and the "determination related to the production reception". This can be achieved by setting the timing at which the "processing" is performed so as to be opposite to the case of the example shown in FIG. 226.

FIG. 231 shows the effect reception period (effective) in the case where the timing of performing the “process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state” in the frame is performed after the “determination process related to the effect reception”. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the period).

As shown in FIG. 231. Assuming that the "m" th frame has arrived, first, at the timing t12 (m) in the frame, the operation (setting) of the operation state flag to be turned on is performed. Will be done. As a result, the production reception period (valid period) is generated, but in the "m" th frame, the "judgment processing related to the production reception" is performed after the production reception period (valid period) occurs. There is no such thing.

That is, although the illustration is omitted, in the "m" th frame, the timing at which the "determination process related to the production reception" is performed comes before the timing t12 (m). At this time, either the "judgment process related to the production reception" itself is not performed, or the "judgment process related to the production reception" is performed, but the production reception period (valid period) has not occurred. If there is, it will be judged that the production reception will not be made.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production reception from being performed in the frame (here, the "m" th frame) in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame in which the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs (here, the "m" th frame), regardless of the operation status, the peripheral control unit 1511 "produces during the valid period (operation waiting block E). ) ”Is always performed, and the display image (effect during the valid period) corresponding to the process can be made to appear on the effect display device 1600 in the“ m + 2 ”th frame after 2 frames. become.

That is, in this case, the production reception is performed after the production reception period has occurred, at the earliest, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are "OFF frames", respectively. , "ON frame", When the timing t11 (m + 1) in the "m + 1" th frame arrives in the state where the history as "ON frame" is left. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 will perform the process related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" based on the reception of the effect. At this time, in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512), the preparation buffer (preparation buffer) of the double buffering is based on the processing result related to the "effect during the valid period" processed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the "m" th frame. The drawing process is already performed on the hidden buffer side (see “Processing in the image control means” in FIG. 231).

Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 231, even if the production reception is performed at the shortest time after the production reception period occurs, in the production display device 1600, the production during the "valid period" is performed in the "m + 2" th frame. Is displayed, and the display related to "Post-operation effect" is displayed in the "m + 3" th frame, so that the post-operation effect can be started after displaying the image or gauge display. become.

However, the method of starting the post-operation effect after displaying the model image or the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. 231. For example, as in the case shown in FIG. 226, the production reception can be performed at the timing t2 (m) even in the frame (here, the "m" th frame) in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs. Then, even when the effect is received at the timing t2 (m), at the timing t2 (m), the process related to the "effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)" is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. It may be done.

That is, in this case, the frame for performing the processing related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the effect reception is one frame for the frame for which the effect reception is performed. Will be delayed only. Therefore, even if the effect is received at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, in the "m" th frame, the peripheral control unit 1511 "produces during the valid period (waiting for operation). The processing related to "block E)" will be performed, and in the next frame "m + 1" th frame, the processing related to "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" will be performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. .. Such a "delay" is not limited to the frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs (here, the "m" th frame), and occurs regardless of the frame in which the production reception is performed. .. Even with such a method, even if the production reception is done in the shortest time after the production reception period occurs, it is possible to start the production after the operation after displaying the image or gauge display. Become.

As described above, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, in the "determination process for the production reception" performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, the m-th frame is started rather than being started. The "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the previous "m-1" th frame will also be used as the determination material for the effect reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, the "operation detection means" acquired in the "m-1" th frame before the "mth" frame is started. Both the "detection information" and the "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-2" th frame are used as the determination material for the effect reception. That is, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the validity period occurs), this is produced. Since the post-operation effect will be executed assuming that the operation was performed within the reception period (valid period), the player side also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation. You will be able to remember.

Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the "determination process for the effect reception" in the m-th frame is performed, the "operation detection means" acquired in the frame before the m-th frame. The production reception can be done based on the "detection information from". That is, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only immediately before the production reception period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the validity period occurs). Since this is regarded as the operation being performed within the effect reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect is executed, the player side can also perform the post-operation effect due to the operation. You will be able to feel the feeling that has occurred.

However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to the "ON frame" at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the "ON frame" when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed in the frame. It may be operated (set). In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection means) acquired between the start of the m-th frame and the occurrence of the effect reception period (valid period) is also used as the determination material for the effect reception. It will be used. That is, in this case, the operation is performed in the "m-1" th frame and the "m" th frame, respectively (for example, the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), and the operation is performed in the "m-2" th frame. When it is determined that the operation has not been performed (for example, the operation state is less than 3 ms), the effect reception is performed. According to such a configuration, the time until the operation by the player is used as the determination material is shortened, so that it is possible to provide a post-operation effect having high immediate responsiveness.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 230 and other examples thereof, when the production reception period (valid period) occurs, the image and the gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. ing. Then, when the effect is received within the m-th frame, the effect is executed after the operation without displaying (creating) the button image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only immediately before the production reception period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the validity period occurs). , While assuming that the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period) and executing the post-operation effect, "when the post-operation effect is generated in such a manner" It becomes possible to give a dramatic demerit such as "the button image and the gauge display are not displayed", and it becomes possible to promote proper operation within the production reception period (valid period). For example, when the button image or the gauge display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of these modes is displayed, which is suggested by the mode. There will be a dramatic demerit such as not being able to grasp the degree of expectation.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, when the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long period of time, the production is not accepted. It will be possible to encourage the operation in an appropriate manner for the production reception period.

However, on the other hand, when the production reception period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than a specific time instead of a long time, the production reception is performed. Even if the operation is performed immediately before the period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence, it is considered that the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period), and the post-operation production is performed. Will be executed, so that the player will also feel that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation.

Moreover, in order for the production reception to be performed, it is not enough to maintain the operating state for a time shorter than a specific time, but it is also required that the operating state be maintained for a time longer than a predetermined time. Therefore, false detection due to chattering or the like can be preferably avoided.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 231 and another example thereof, in the process in the "mth" frame in which the effect reception period is started, no matter what operation detection information is obtained, the process related to the post-operation effect ( Of the display processing in the effect display device 1600, the process related to lamp light emission, the process related to sound output, and the process related to the movement of the movable body), at least the display process in the effect display device 1600 is "information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation. , The process of reading in the peripheral control unit 1511 ”is not executed, and the process when the effect reception is not performed (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is performed. I decided to do it. According to such a configuration, no matter what kind of operation information is obtained in the m-th frame when the production reception period starts, in the m-th frame, the processing (effect) when the production reception is not performed. At least a part (display processing in the effect display device 1600) of the display processing in the display device 1600, the processing related to lamp light emission, the processing related to sound output, and the processing related to the operation of the movable body is always performed. That is, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, the process corresponding to the reception of the effect (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data of the effect after the operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is started with a delay. Before that, the process when the production is not accepted (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is always executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to recognize that the "post-operation effect" is an effect started due to the operation by the player.

As another example of the example shown in FIG. 231, the effect can be determined based on the operation detection information even in the "mth" frame when the effect reception period starts. In the frame in which the determination is made, the "process of reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511" is not executed, and in the next frame, the "information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed. , The process of reading in the peripheral control unit 1511 "may be executed. That is, in this case, among the processes related to the post-operation effect (display process in the effect display device 1600, process related to lamp light emission, process related to sound output, process related to movable body operation), at least the display process in the effect display device 1600 is determined to be produced. In the frame in which the effect is formed, a process (a process of reading information corresponding to the image data waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed when the effect reception is not performed. However, at this time, among the processes related to the post-operation effect (display process in the effect display device 1600, process related to lamp light emission, process related to sound output, process related to movable body operation), for example, "process related to lamp light emission" and "process related to sound output". Regarding the "processing", a process of reading "information on the light emitting mode after the operation" and "information on the sound output after the operation" may be performed in the frame for which the effect determination is made. That is, in this case, the lamp and the sound are started to be output in the post-operation mode based on the read information in the frame in which the effect determination is made or in the next frame.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225, in the case of adopting the method of displaying the effect image by the block, when the effect is received by the operation, the "post-operation block" for executing the post-operation effect In addition, the "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal production scheduler data for extinguishing EF)" for displaying the extinction effect image until the operation promotion image such as the copy image and gauge display that had been displayed until then is hidden. You may want to do it. According to such an "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinction EF)", for example, an image or an image in which the gauge display fades out when the effect is received (an image that is gradually hidden). Will be able to be displayed. Further, such "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinction EF)" may be executed when the effect acceptance period ends without performing the post-operation effect. The "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinction EF)" is also attached to the background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the background) and the operation waiting block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting). It is possible to configure the process to be executed by operating the availability information in the ON state in the process read based on the process identification information.

Regarding the "process of generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted (process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state)" described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 231, the scheduler after the symbol variation is started. It may be executed based on (elapsed time) or the like, and may not necessarily be executed triggered by a frame.

Further, the "image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed as a pre-validation effect (display based on the appearance EF block E). However, regarding the display mode when the pre-validation effect (display based on the appearance EF block E) is performed, it should be displayed semi-transparently or hazy by other effect display. It is required to display the "image" and the "gauge display" in a manner different from that when the "effect during the valid period (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is performed. At this time, in the pre-validation effect (display based on the appearance EF block E), one of the "image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed, and the effect may be advanced without displaying one. ..

[Further color rendering of image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected effects (such as notice effects) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (role effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the above decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description, the movement of the movable body, etc. The expected effect will be provided as an effect having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the fluctuation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the design production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (valid period) that allows. However, as will be described later, the mode of the reception allowable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated is changed according to the result of the effect determination, whereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is intended to suggest the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, when the design production based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, the operation reception is permitted. Reception production (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected, the operation reception effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. Further, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above "specific variation pattern", the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of the result obtained as the advance notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable not to do so, or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is predetermined for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only the post-operation effect that causes the change (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the operation is performed. Reception production (valid period) The production performance of itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decline until the production is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol production (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is performed in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of the low-expected non-suppressed reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected fluctuation pattern (specific variation pattern), the variation pattern (effect pattern) is used. Corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (the playback period in which the audible sound of the sound data is recorded has expired, or channel allocation As mentioned above, various measures are taken, such as making it possible to at least generate a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the above is done (Fig. 144). 195, 207 to 231).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further displays the model image displayed in the operation reception effect as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image. By doing so, we are trying to improve the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (valid period) occurs. For such an integrated image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs in the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable that it is displayed in both the reception effect (valid period), and it is desirable that it is displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high-expectation suppression reception effect. Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, 207 to 231), the display mode of the illustrated image is replaced with any of the integrated images described below. It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

Hereinafter, a case where the image is displayed as an “integrated image” will be described.
First, to explain the "image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception production includes the "operation receiving part" that receives the operation by the player and the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part. There is a "peripheral decoration" to decorate. In this respect, the "imitation image" means an image in which the "operation receiving portion" is imitated among such operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided so as to be displaced by an operation by the player, and the "peripheral decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "peripheral decoration portion" is the frame unit 415. Will be equivalent to. Further, in the case of the operating means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in FIGS. 146 and 161 that the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010 and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

FIG. 232 is an "integrated image" displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) is generated for an operation means provided with an "operation receiving portion" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player. It is a figure which shows an example.

In this explanatory example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving portion" on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001. That is, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detection information is produced (trigger for execution of post-operation effect, etc.). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation unit has a "handle button 5014" capable of operating (moving up and down) with respect to the handle portion 5012 and an operation (moving up and down) with respect to the sheath portion 5020. Two operation receiving portions with a possible "handle portion 5012" will be provided.

FIG. 232 describes an "integrated image" when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 occurs when a predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the example described below including FIG. 232, the "integrated image" when giving an operation opportunity to the handle button 5014 is operated not with the handle button 5014 but with the operation button 410. It may be applied as an "integrated image" when an operation reception effect (valid period) that gives an opportunity occurs. That is, in this case, the "image of the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, 207 to 231) is referred to as the "integrated image" described below. It can be replaced, and in this case, the handle button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception desk in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). When the effect (validity period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. It is displayed as an integrated image IGa to IGd. In the examples shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not individually prepared as image data, and one image data (integral) in which they are integrated. It is displayed only as a simulated image (IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “first effect mode with relatively low expectation” and “relative” are the post-operation effects to be executed when the operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). A plurality of production modes including "a second production mode with a high degree of expectation" are prepared, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination (production determination). .. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d),
The mode (integrated image IGb) shown in FIG. 232 (b) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When is displayed, the appearance rate of the "second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 232 (c) is higher than that when the mode (integrated image IGb) shown in FIG. 232 (b) appears in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When is displayed, the appearance rate of the "second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGd) shown in FIG. 232 (d) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 232 (c) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). Based on the result of the jackpot judgment (effect judgment), the relationship is established such that the appearance ratio of the "second production mode with relatively high expectation" is higher as the post-operation effect when Any of the simulated images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the valid period only by preparing at least two modes. Further, a mode different from the above four modes (integrated image IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared modes may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operating means (sword decoration 5001,) having an operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by an operation by the player, and a peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof. Production operation unit 400) and
An integrated image display means for displaying the image obtained by imitating the operation receiving portion as an integrated image IGa to IGd integrated with the peripheral decorative image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image.
-It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion while the integrated image is displayed. The integrated image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated image IGa to IGd).

Details of the "integrated image" shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) will be described separately for each of these modes (integrated image IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated image IGa" shown in FIG. 232 (a) includes a normal button image BMGa and a normal peripheral decorative image SSGa that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the "integrated image IGa", the normal button image BMGa is displayed as "an image of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given". On the other hand, the peripheral decoration image SSGa usually has a peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012, or frame) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given. The unit 415) is not imitated, and the peripheral edge of the normal button image BMGa is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, first, even when a plurality of operating means are provided, which of the operating means is given the operating opportunity is determined by the operating means (the operating means which is the operation target). It can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button image BMGa that imitates a part of). Moreover, the normal button image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration part, but a luxurious and large image (integrated image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable for improving decorativeness and color rendering. ), The directing impact when the normal button image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration part luxurious, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible effect regardless of the shape of the actual peripheral decoration part. become.

In the "integrated image IGa" shown in FIG. 232 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button image BMGa), and the upper surface thereof has a pedestal. It is decorated with a certain decoration to warn that it is a high-risk button. As described above, these "pedestals" and "predetermined decorations" have a shape different from that of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with the passage of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum value display area when the operation is not accepted within the valid period. It is displayed so that it decreases with the passage of time until it reaches the display area of. That is, in this case, the peripheral decorative image SSGa usually has a function of suggesting the operation means to be operated, and also suggests the remaining time until the state (valid period) in which the operation reception is permitted ends. It will also play a function of suggesting the remaining time.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 232 (a), a partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is provided. .. The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 232 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. , A gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG is displayed so as to overlap with the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Therefore, the gauge image GG is full. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably for the entire period until it becomes empty.

When realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the method of displaying the image, a method of changing the color of the display target area itself with the predetermined decoration between the portion with the gauge and the portion without the gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as image data by itself, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of a predetermined decoration in the display target area.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 232 (a), the predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the normal peripheral decoration. Since it is designed so as to straddle other areas in the image SSGa, the integrated decorativeness of the display target area itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is more preferably expected that the game enjoyment will be improved when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the “integrated image IGa” is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern button to be operated is used. The 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button image BMGa in the "integrated image IGa". That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared for the button-shaped image BMG, and a normal button-shaped image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. Such a light emitting mode. If the above is adopted, the mode (expectation degree) as the button image BMG can be recognized only by checking the handle button 5014, which is the operation target, without visually recognizing the normal button image BMG.

Regarding the "button copy image BMGa (FIG. 232 (a))", the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated does not necessarily have to be accurately copied. In short, the operation target is Any operation means may be displayed with a copying level (deformation, etc.) that can be recognized.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGb" shown in FIG. 232 (b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa", and is the same as the button image BMG that imitates the operation target. , The peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated image IGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", but the button image BMG is displayed as the above-mentioned "button image". Instead of "BMGa", it is displayed as "special button image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated image IGb" shown in FIG. 232 (b), the special button image BMGb imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. It is displayed as an image having a shape different from that of the "button image BMGa (FIG. 232 (a))" in which the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is imitated. However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it becomes difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operating means is the operation target when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated image IGa", the "button image BMGa" that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed integrally with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Therefore, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" itself has a function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. In this regard, in the "integrated image IGb", the "special button image BMGb" is integrated with such a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and displayed, so that the "special button image" is displayed. Even if the "BMGb" does not properly model the operation target, it may be suggested that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target as a whole of the "integrated image IGb". become able to. In order to preferably obtain such an action effect (a function suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" is an operation means different from the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to display when (handle portion 5012, etc.) is the operation target.

According to such a configuration, the button image BMG that imitates the operation receiving portion and the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are displayed as an integrated image. The button image BMG, which is only a part of the image, can be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily limited to the shape of the operation means to be operated, which makes it more prominent. It is expected that the game will be improved by its sexuality and decorativeness.

In the "special button image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 232 (b), the button has a streamlined shape and is depicted in a more stylish design than the "button image BMGa", and on the top thereof. Words such as "DANGER" are applied. The appearance of a non-existent "special button image BMGb" as a part of such a pachinko machine 1 makes it easier for the player to feel a premium feeling, and the "button image BMGa" has appeared. It is expected that people will instinctively feel that their expectations are higher than they sometimes are.

Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGb" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the operation target is also set. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button image BMGb in the "integrated image IGb". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGc" shown in FIG. 232 (c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa". It is configured as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated image IGc", the button image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button image BMGa", but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration". Instead of "image SSGa", it is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in each of the following points.
-"The peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, and the effect display is performed. The peripheral edge of the button image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the device 1600.
A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such an "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))", any operating means is operated based on the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))". It is possible to significantly change the shape of the "integrated image IGc (Fig. 232 (c))" as a whole without causing a shape change in the "button image BMG" that suggests whether an opportunity is given. become able to. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a highly flexible decorativeness / directing property by causing a shape change without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

Further, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))" according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof is an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))". Is displayed as. Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted when the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))" appears and when the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation reception effect (valid period).

In particular, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))" according to this embodiment, another member having a special decoration is added to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))". The whole image is displayed as an enlarged image in the form of being expanded. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and the degree of expectation is higher than when the "button image BMGa" appears. It is expected that people will instinctively feel that it is expensive.

Further, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))", but is a gauge image (predetermined image). No change is made in the display target area itself of the GG.

That is, when a part of such an integrated image IG is used as a display target area of the gauge image GG, is the display target area or the gauge image only "a part of decoration" or "remaining"? It is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a part having a function of suggesting time. In this regard, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232 (a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 232 (c))" have an important function such as "suggesting the remaining time". Since the shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed and the shape is changed in other parts, the shape can be changed without sacrificing the suggestion function of the remaining time. It becomes possible to realize a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and directivity by causing it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGc" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the operation target is also set. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button image BMGa in the "integrated image IGc". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated. However, the normal button image BMGa when the "integrated image IGc" is displayed should be displayed in a different color (for example, "green") from when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed. It may be. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGd" shown in FIG. 232 (d) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa". It is configured as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated image IGd", the button image BMG is displayed as a "special button image BMGb" having a different shape from the above-mentioned "normal button image BMGa". Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa".

That is, in the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))", the "special button image BMGb" used in the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))" and the "integrated image IGc" (FIG. 232 (c)) ”is displayed as an integrated image with the“ special peripheral decoration image SSGb ”. According to such a configuration, the action and effect exerted by the above-mentioned "special button image BMGb" with respect to the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))" and the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (b))". With respect to "c))", not only the effects and effects produced by the above-mentioned "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" can be obtained, but also when "integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))" is used as a reference, Since the modes of both the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG will be changed, it is expected that the expectation is high instinctively.

On the other hand, while both the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change their modes, the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG. Identification for the same post-operation effect depending on whether the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))" appears or the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is an operation reception effect (valid period) of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGd" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the operation target is also set. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button image BMGb in the "integrated image IGd". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated. However, the special button image BMGb when the "integrated image IGd" is displayed is displayed in a color different from that when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed (for example, "rainbow color"). You may do so. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in a rainbow color.

As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, and the predetermined operation reception effect (valid period). When is generated, the integrated image IG in which the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, but one side of the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed in one mode. The other side can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button image BMG is displayed as the "normal button image BMG", the peripheral decorative image SSG can be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decorative image SSGb" ( 232 (a) and 232 (c)). Further, when the button image BMG is displayed as the "special button image BMGb", the peripheral decorative image SSG can be displayed as either "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" or "special peripheral decorative image SSGb" ( 232 (b), (d)). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as "normal peripheral decoration image SSG", the button image BMG can be displayed as either "normal button image BMGa" or "special button image BMGb" ( 232 (a) and 232 (b)). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the button image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button image BMGa" or the "special button image BMGb" ( 232 (a) and 232 (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, when the mode changes, only one side thereof is displayed. Therefore, by looking at one side where the mode has not changed, it is possible to easily recognize that a predetermined operation reception effect (validity period) has occurred regardless of which mode the other side is displayed. However, by looking at the other side where the mode is changing, it becomes possible to preferably recognize the degree of expectation. It should be noted that the mode of one side of the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may not be changed, and the mode may be changed only on the other side.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, when the integrated image IG is displayed in the operation reception effect (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with the passage of time. It is possible. That is, in this case, the "peripheral decoration image SSG" is responsible for the remaining time suggestion function that suggests the remaining time until the state in which the operation reception is permitted ends, and which operation means is the operation target. By displaying it as an integrated image IG integrated with the "button image BMG" that has the function of suggesting, it is possible to recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared while grasping the remaining time and the operation target. It is expected that the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (valid period) is occurring, such as being able to play the game, can be maintained.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The non-display area of is included (there is both a part having a remaining time suggesting function and a part not having a remaining time suggesting function). That is, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not only intended to suggest the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), and in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the "decoration of the button image BMG" is used. Since it is possible to positively adopt a display mode aimed at "improving the character", while suggesting the remaining time, the effectability when the operation reception effect, which is an important effect, occurs. It will be possible to improve significantly. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more desirable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said that.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button image BMG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as an entity, when the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration portion is one aspect, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of aspects (plural emission colors). ) Is changed to one of them. Therefore, when the button copy image BMG changes, it can be confirmed only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the copy target.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), when the button image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as an entity, the "handle portion 5012", which is the peripheral decorative portion, does not change to any of the plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the button-shaped image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is not necessary for the peripheral decoration image SSG to match the mode of the "pattern portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration portion, and it is possible to perform a variety of depictions that are preferable for enlivening the effect. The peripheral decorative portion "handle portion 5012" may be provided so as not to change in a plurality of modes in the first place, such as non-emission.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), there is a case where both modes of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change (FIG. 232 (d)). However, as an entity, it is desirable that both the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change in one aspect when the peripheral decorative portion "handle portion 5012" is in one aspect.

Different aspects appear in the peripheral decoration portion "handle portion 5012" depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSG" or the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". You may do so. However, while the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is at least different between the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSG" and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the peripheral decoration portion In the "handle portion 5012", it is desirable to only cause a mode change (for example, a change in the light emitting mode) that does not accompany the shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration portion so that the shape cannot be changed in the first place in order to emphasize the virtual effect function by the peripheral decoration image SSG.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the model image, the pattern image BMG that imitates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) and the pattern image that imitates the handle portion 5012 are used. A TMG is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG is different depending on which of these images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decorative images SSGa and b that decorate the peripheral edge of the button image BMG cannot be displayed when a different image different from the button image BMG is displayed. The decorative images SSGa, b itself can be expected to have a "function suggesting which operation means the operation target is".

If the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the image (button image BMG, pattern image TMG), the gauge image (predetermined image) included in the peripheral decoration image has a form (thickness) as GG. , Length) should also be different. The operation reception effect in which the button image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same fluctuation pattern (select which one occurs depending on the effect judgment). It may be an effect that occurs at different fluctuation patterns or different timings. The peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the button image is BMG is not a model of the peripheral decoration, and the peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern image TMG is a model of the peripheral decoration. You may. However, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception effect (valid period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other area in the peripheral decoration image SSG are those areas. A predetermined decoration (here, "striped pattern") straddling the predetermined decoration is applied, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that the game entertainment can be improved. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG is displayed in a form of being superimposed on a display target area to which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Therefore, the gauge image GG is full. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably for the entire period until it becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration. In this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. Since the number of images will decrease, players who dislike the decrease of predetermined decorations will be encouraged to perform operations at an early stage.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided in the above is not imitated, and the image represents an insubstantial object as a gaming machine part. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize a more flexible decorativeness and directability that is not bound by the substance as a gaming machine part.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), at least the peripheral decorative image SSG has a plurality of shapes among the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG. That is, in this case, since it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG expressing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button image BMG, any of the plurality of operating means can be used as the operation target. It will be possible to realize a display with higher color rendering and decorativeness by changing the shape of the integrated image IG while properly suggesting whether or not it is.

Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, when the button image BMG is in one aspect, the shape may not necessarily be changed, but only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is allowed because the peripheral decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button-shaped image BMG. That is why, in this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG is changed in a form of increasing its size. As will be described later, as a method of such a form change, either a method of increasing the number of objects expressed as an image (number of decorations, etc.) or a plurality of modes having different contour shapes (rectangular parallelepiped, sphere, etc.) It is possible to adopt a method of expanding the display target range of a predetermined object expressed as an image or an object displayed by. Further, as will be described later, regarding the morphological change of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a precursory effect, an effect of gradually changing the form from a low expectation form to a high expectation form is executed, and then finally. The operation reception in the operation reception effect may be allowed while the changed form is maintained.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed, the gauge image included in the peripheral decorative image SSG ( Predetermined image) The display target area of the GG is not changed (at least the shape is changed) and is displayed as the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the suggestion function of how much remaining time remains, and thus this is the important function. It becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation by the shape change in a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG while holding the above.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned actions and effects is intended to be achieved, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily represent an insubstantial object, and the peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion is provided. It may be displayed as an image in which the part is imitated.

Further, the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period in which operation reception is allowed" such as a predetermined operation reception effect. This encourages the player to operate.

However, in the integrated image IG according to this embodiment, although the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG are displayed. Only one side is dynamically displayed, and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, one side is displayed so as to stay in place while the other side contributes to improving the effectability when a button effect, which is an important effect, is generated by dynamic expression. As a result, the integrated image IG is not moved and displayed when viewed as a whole, so that visibility can be suitably ensured.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the button image BMG is dynamically moved so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within the movable range. It is displayed, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), and when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Can be displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced with the passage of time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side (peripheral decorative image SSG that is not dynamically displayed) of the integrated image IG that ensures suitable visibility. Therefore, while improving the performance when the operation reception production, which is an important production, occurs by the dynamic display by the button image BMG, how much time is left for the production reception to be allowed? Can be easily recognized.

Further, on the side of the integrated image IG that secures suitable visibility (the peripheral decorative image SSG that is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image ( Predetermined image) The area where GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, when performing an effect suggesting the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated image IG that secures suitable visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from having an adverse effect on the display target area.

The peripheral decoration image SSG has a region different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button image BMG have a plurality of modes having different expectations. One of the modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot judgment (effect judgment), but the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the expected degree of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself are different. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. Moreover, when the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern in the peripheral decoration image SSG? , Or it may be difficult to grasp whether it has a function of suggesting the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced due to the difficulty in grasping to what position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced due to the mixture with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG. ..

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when at least the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image (within the valid period) In the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed, an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is referred to as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the display target area. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" The display position of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is also displayed so as to be displaced in the same manner.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the valid period ends, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is a mere decoration or an indication of the remaining time, the position of the "specific image". By checking, you will be able to recognize the remaining time. In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image", it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed.

As shown in FIG. 233, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) at which the operation reception is allowed is started within the predetermined fluctuation pattern has arrived, the effect display device 1600 will use the effect display device 1600. , Integrated image IG and operation promotion images such as "press!" And "down arrow" are displayed.

In this example, the mode (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed as the integrated image IG, but FIGS. 232 (b) to (d) are based on the result of the effect determination. ) May be displayed in any of the modes shown in). Regardless of which mode the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in the mode described below with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 233 (a), first, in the integrated image IG when the timing is A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. Will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full tank mode, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 233 (a), at the timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The "specific image whose aspect is partially changed" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, whether or not "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displayed. Just by checking, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the operation reception was permitted (the remaining crotch is decreasing).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is first started from timing A0 (start timing of the valid period). Gauge image (predetermined image) GG in a mode such as "the display area increases by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until the predetermined time (the time required for the entire image of the specific image to finish appearing) elapses. It is displayed in the display target area of.

For example, in the integrated image IG when a little time has passed from the timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is shown in FIG. 233 (b). A "specific image TG" as a "specific image" different from the specific image or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed appears to the extent that about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is in the stage of increasing with the passage of time.

In the integrated image IG at the timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has passed, as shown in FIGS. 233 (c) and 233 (d), "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image The "specific image TG" as the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is in a situation where the whole picture has already appeared, and the gauge image without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that the GG is in a state of being displaced within the display target area.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is the gauge image (predetermined) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Image) Displayed at or near the end of the GG, and gauge image (predetermined image) Displayed to displace the display position according to the displacement of the end of the GG (in a continuous manner). It has become.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed at a position connected to the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as an image in which a star-shaped mark is given in a white square space. It has become a thing. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. For example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a partially changed manner, such as an image in which the image gradually fades over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time is exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value ("0" in this case). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends), at least a part (may be all) is not hidden and the display state is maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 233 (e), in the integrated image IG when the timing A4 is the end timing of the valid period, the gauge is used. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and about half of the display area of the "specific image TG" is left. Then, when the operation is not accepted until this state is reached, the period in which the operation acceptance is allowed ends in this state, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, it is most desirable to display so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left, and such a configuration is used. You may try to do it.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the valid period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is aligned with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (in a continuous manner) and its display position. Since the image is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, how many images of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge image (the gauge image (predetermined image). Predetermined image) It becomes possible to make it ambiguous whether it is GG.

That is, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden at the end of the valid period and most of the display area (more than half or all) is left, from the player side. When viewed, it also appears to be part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (hidden here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, so that it can be made to appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" is left and ends, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after becoming, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area is reduced, and thereby the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of discomfort due to a gap between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer capable of absorbing such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 233, at the timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed. The "specific image" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is gauged. The image (predetermined image) may be displayed within the display target area of the GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is a part of the gauge image GG. Since it becomes possible to make it look positive as if it were, it becomes as if a longer time than it looks is set as the validity period, and when the validity period occurs, it becomes a game entertainment hobby. It will be expected to improve.

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed.

Now, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) for which operation reception is allowed starts within a predetermined variation pattern has arrived, even in the example shown in FIG. , Integrated image IG and operation promotion images such as "press!" And "down arrow" are displayed.

Also in this example, the mode (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed as the integrated image IG, but FIGS. 232 (b) to (2) based on the result of the effect determination. It may be displayed in any of the aspects shown in d). Regardless of which mode the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in the mode shown in FIGS. 234 (a) to 234 (d) with the passage of time. ..

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 234 (a), in the integrated image IG when the timing is A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG covers the entire display target area. It is not displayed, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed, respectively. When the timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period) is set, only a part of the "specific image TG" may be displayed, but the whole is displayed here. With such a configuration, it seems that a longer time than it looks is left because the "specific image TG" can be made to appear as if it functions as a part of the "gauge image GG". It is possible to make it.

The "specific image TG" according to this example is an image expressing the "eraser", and cannot fit in the area surrounded by the section image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) and other areas (of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , Areas where the mode can change depending on the degree of expectation, etc.) are displayed with a size that spans them. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the "specific image TG" stand out more than the "gauge image GG", and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is left. Be expected.

Further, in this example, when time elapses from the timing A0 and the timings A2 and A3 are reached and the “specific image TG” is displaced, the “specific image TG” is shown in FIGS. 234 (b) and 234 (c). The part that "" has passed through changes to a "white area" as if it had been erased by an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expression) is reduced by the amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the "specific image TG". Occasionally, the reduced area was expressed in only one color, so the contrast with the "specific image TG" as the boundary became conspicuous, suggesting how much time was left. It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction is to be performed. It is desirable that the color appearing in the reduced region is a color not used in the "gauge image GG".

Also in the example shown in FIG. 234, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG suggesting that the remaining time has disappeared when the display area reaches the minimum value (“0” in this case). Since it does not function as a part, at least a part (may be all) is not hidden and the display state is maintained even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends). Become.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 234 (d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is “0” in the integrated image IG when the timing A4 is the end timing of the valid period. The display area of the "specific image TG" is completely left. Then, when the operation is not accepted until this state is reached, the period in which the operation acceptance is allowed ends in this state, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, also in this example, a part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden and a part is left in the integrated image IG when it is at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the valid period. It may be displayed as.

Even in this example, since the "specific image TG" is displayed so as to be displaced (in a continuous manner) according to the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When viewed from the player side, it is possible to obscure how many images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Will be.

That is, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden at the end of the valid period and most of the display area (more than half or all) is left, from the player side. When viewed, it also appears to be part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (hidden here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, so that it can be made to appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" is left and ends, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after becoming, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area is reduced, and thereby the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of discomfort due to a gap between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer capable of absorbing such a time lag.

In the example shown in FIG. 234, the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are made different from the case of the example shown in FIG. 233, but the same image may be used. On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 233, the same image as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 234 may be used. Further, the valid period in which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, and the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" in the mode shown in FIG. 234. May occur under different conditions from the validity period in which is displayed. In this case, the shape of the integrated image IG itself and at least the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG are mutually different between the valid period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 233 appears and the effective period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 234 appears. It is desirable to make them different.

As described above, the integrated image IG is dynamic during the valid period of the predetermined operation reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to (e) and FIGS. 234 (a) to 234 (d). It can be displayed, which prompts the player to operate it. However, as described above, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within the movable range, whereas the peripheral decoration image SSG is used. Prevents this from being displayed dynamically. Then, in the peripheral decoration image SSG on the side that does not perform such dynamic display, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( Since the predetermined image) GG is changed, it is easy to recognize how much time is left until the expiration date even in the dynamically displayed integrated image IG. You will be able to do it.

The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" may be displayed as one image data or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configuration shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the "specific image TG" has a display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" in the display target area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". It is displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when it is reduced, and its display position is displaced according to the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Is displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, it is ambiguous as to how many images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Will be able to.

Further, the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 233 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at the maximum value, and the predetermined time has passed since the operation reception was allowed. Until the elapse (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is compensated for by the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". I am trying to increase. According to such a configuration, it seems that the remaining time suggested by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" does not decrease at the beginning from the start of the valid period until the predetermined time elapses. Since it becomes possible to have a good image, it becomes possible to maintain a good game interest.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the integrated image IG is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). However, regardless of which of these modes is displayed, the display shapes of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are the same. It is desirable to. Regarding each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG", they may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but a function of suggesting the remaining time is provided. In order to maintain it suitably, it is desirable that even if one aspect of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" is changed, the other aspect is not changed. For example, if the mark attached to the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 233 is not a star shape but a double circle, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. As the "image) GG" is reduced, the degree of expectation (double circle) will gradually become visible, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, at least a part (or all) of the "specific image TG" is not included even when the valid period ends without any operation by the player. The display state is maintained without being displayed. However, with respect to the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, when the timing A4 arrives without the player performing the operation, the operation reception is internally performed and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output (for example, the operation) are performed. It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which only the sound is output according to the reception). In this case, the timing A4 may be the timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (timing when it is hidden or later), and is of the "specific image TG". It is desirable to set it as the timing of arrival when at least a part of it is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation is performed by the player immediately after the operation reception is no longer allowed, even immediately before the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is performed, " Since the "specific image TG" is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started in response to the operation reception by the player in time. become able to. The "specific image TG" may be displayed even when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, by fading out after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started). Things that are gradually hidden).

When the valid period for which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a second valid period different from the first condition. When the conditions are met, it is possible to generate a second validity period in which automatic reception is not performed. Even in the second valid period, the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof, and the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed as a gauge image (predetermined image). ) The display target area of GG is included. However, within the second valid period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG". Is not displayed. The integrated image IG displayed within the first valid period and the integrated image IG displayed within the second valid period are displayed as the same image except that the "specific image TG" is not displayed. Can be done.

That is, in the second valid period generated by the fulfillment of the second condition, unlike the first valid period generated by the fulfillment of the first condition, if the set time elapses without being operated by the player, The second validity period ends in such a way that the automatic reception does not function and the display after the operation and / or the sound output after the operation are not generated. Therefore, if the display of "specific image TG" is left at the time when the reception for the operation by the player is not allowed, the validity period ends even though the remaining time has not been exhausted. It may cause a misunderstanding as if it was done, and eventually the game entertainment may be reduced. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable that the "specific image TG" is not displayed for the entire period from the start to the end.

In this case, it is desirable that the length of the set time (time from the acceptance of the operation reception to the end) differs between the first validity period and the second validity period. In addition, it is desirable that the display changes (post-operation display) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when the operation is accepted have different contents.

Further, in addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, a third valid period in which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, it occurs when the third condition is satisfied). In addition to the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth valid period in which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, it occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied). The point is that the valid period for automatic reception (valid period with different generation conditions) includes at least the first valid period for processing the display and sound in the above-mentioned manner, and automatic reception is performed. It suffices that at least the second valid period in which the processing related to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described manner is included in the valid period in which the display and the sound are not performed (valid periods in which the generation conditions are different from each other).

In addition, the "first validity period" here is
-It does not mean that the display after operation or the sound output after operation is output regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the valid period only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set.
-It means that the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the valid period regardless of the effect state. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special production state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of production state" as the production state. In addition, if the "second validity period" occurs while the "special production state (automatic reception mode) is set", either one may be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is enabled. (For example, "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the production state"), and has nothing to do with the configuration related to the technical features described here.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated image IG (peripheral decorative image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas forming the integrated image IG (peripheral decorative image SSG). In the non-linear region of the portion, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced according to the passage of time. According to such a configuration, the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG with the passage of time becomes decorative, so that the remaining time as an effective period is digested. It will be possible to maintain the amusement interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided with a specific pattern on the display target area and has a predetermined transmissivity. (Predetermined image) The GG is displayed in a form of being superimposed on this, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is provided with a specific pattern, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) changes with the passage of time. It becomes possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) is applied according to the passage of time. It becomes possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display target area of the non-linear specific shape shown in FIGS. 233 and 234 is referred to as the “first display target area”. When the second display target area has a shape different from the specific shape of the non-straight line (non-similar shape), and the distance from the start to the end of the reduction of the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without being operated by the player, or by the player. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, while at least there is a case where the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without being performed. May be terminated when the first set time elapses without being operated by the player, but when the second set time elapses without being operated by the player. I try not to end it.

In this regard, the operation target to which the operation opportunity is given by the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed. If the (operation receiving unit) is different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different, and the operation targets are different. Coupled with being there, it will be possible to encourage people to enjoy the operation reception production with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed are different from each other. The model image will be displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. As for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations between the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed. However, in any case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part of the display target area. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes from each other.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the "non-linear specific shape" and the case where the "different shape (non-similar shape)" is displayed. In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (first set time) is set for each other, the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are "big hits". It is desirable that the rate at which the "mode suggesting that" appears is different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed have the same set time (first set time). Sometimes it is desirable to be given the opportunity to accept operations regarding the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output. When the set time is different, it is desirable to give an opportunity to accept the operation regarding the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the operation-related display such as "press!" Or "down arrow" is superimposed on the integrated image IG to be combined with the integrated image IG. When I look at these, I try to express more strongly that I am in a situation to operate. However, here, the operation-related display such as "press!" Or "down arrow" may be displayed overlapping with the button image BMG (at any timing of dynamic display) that suggests the target to be operated. It does not overlap with the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image TG that suggests the remaining time.

In such a configuration, operations such as "press!" Or "down arrow" are performed while avoiding important information such as button image BMG, gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and specific image TG among the integrated image IG. Since the related display is superimposed on the integrated image IG, it is possible to strongly urge the player to operate while appropriately transmitting important information. Needless to say, this is because the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the post-operation display performed when the operation reception is performed within the valid period as the valid period for which the operation reception is permitted. There are multiple (types) of valid periods with different contents of sound output after operation. The conditions for generating these validity periods are different from each other, and when any of the conditions for occurrence is satisfied, the corresponding type of validity period is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, "specific image TG" is displayed within the valid period of a plurality of types (first valid period). And, at least those in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed within the valid period (second valid period) are included. Hereinafter, in this example, these "first validity period" and "second validity period" are referred to as the above-mentioned "first validity period" in which automatic reception is performed and the above-mentioned "second validity period" in which automatic reception is not performed. Although it is described as the same as the "validity period of", it may be applied as a different validity period.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, in performing the precursory effect (specific display) suggesting that the operation reception is permitted, the precursory effect (specific display) is subjected to the operation reception. Is sometimes executed in a form that straddles before and after the occurrence timing of the permissible validity period. According to such a precursor effect (specific display), a valid period will occur while the flashy effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the valid period occurs. become able to.

However, when the precursor effect (specific display) is executed in such a mode, the precursor effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed on the integrated image IG, so that it is integrated when the validity period is started. Even if the simulated image IG is displayed (internal layer display), the part overlapping the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (it is not visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the precursor effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated image IG that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) is difficult to see. In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will start to reduce its display area under such a situation where visibility is difficult.

That is, in this case, the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the part that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) disappears and the entire integrated image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. By the time the visibility of the entire area) is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, so from the player's point of view, the valid period (set time). Can give the impression that is substantially shorter.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side. .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, "precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or precursor effect (specific display) is executed among a plurality of types of valid periods. In the "second valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is completed", from the occurrence of the second valid period to the end. Make sure that no "specific image TG" is displayed between. On the other hand, among the multiple (types) of valid periods, the gauge image is "when it occurs during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easy to see). (Predetermined image) In the "first valid period in which the display area of the GG is reduced", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first valid period.

According to such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is the gauge image (predetermined image) in the first valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image becomes visible when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible. It becomes possible to make it appear that the display area of the GG has not decreased so much, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced, or the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed for a second valid period. When the "specific image TG" is displayed in, for example, in the display mode of FIG. 233, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the valid period occurs, and the valid period occurs. It may be discovered that this does not function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the appearance of the "specific image TG" gradually appears with the passage of time from. That is, in this case, since there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced due to the exaggerated expression of the length of the remaining time, the "specific image TG" is displayed during such a second validity period. It is desirable not to do so in order to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition to the second validity period, in addition to the second validity period, "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but the precursor effect (specific display) is executed. ) Is completed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG display area is not reduced in the valid period (fifth valid period) ”may be prepared under different generation conditions, or the first valid period In addition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases by the time it occurs during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easy to see). The valid period (sixth valid period) "may be prepared under different generation conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned" specific image TG "is displayed at this time may be appropriately set. Good. In short, the plurality (types) of valid periods include at least the above-mentioned second valid period in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed and the above-mentioned first valid period in which the "specific image TG" is displayed. If so, at least when those effective periods occur, the above-mentioned effects will be exhibited in relation to the precursory effect (specific display).

In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the mode shown in FIG. 234. You may want to do it.

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the production when the first valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period.

FIG. 235 (a) shows the effect display device 1600 in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. It shows the production situation being performed at.

FIG. 235 (b) shows an effect situation in which the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started by the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 235 (a).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 235 (b), it can be seen that at least in the effect display device 1600, the integrated image IG has not yet appeared. However, from the time when the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated image IG is internally displayed, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, so that the integration is performed. The entire image IG may be invisible (or may be difficult to see due to a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation reception is permitted (the validity period is started) from the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

In FIG. 235 (c), as a result of the advancement of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235 (b) and the reduction of the display area of the precursor effect (specific display TH), the integrated image IG is displayed. A portion that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears, indicating a situation in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 235 (b)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 235 (b) appears, and is shown in FIG. 235 (c). When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the appearance of the situation, is reached, the display (display on the layer process) is executed at least internally. It has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 235 (c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually recognized) because they overlap with the priority display precursor effect (specific display TH). Although it is difficult), the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (progressed). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH).

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect (specific display TH) is performed so as to straddle the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and the predetermined time after the valid period is generated is the precursor effect. (Specific display TH) makes it difficult or impossible to see at least a part of the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 235 (c), it is difficult to visually recognize the button-shaped image that imitates the operation target, but the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge is described in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is in a state where it can be recognized that it is a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 235 (c), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to see, the type in which the "specific image TG" is displayed in the first place when the validity period is started ( (See FIG. 234), or the type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and gradually appears after that (see FIG. 233). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to detect that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, it can be said that it is particularly effective to execute the precursory effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In FIG. 235 (d), as a result of further progress of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235 (b), the portion overlapping with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) disappears. (Here, the precursory effect is hidden).

As shown in FIG. 235 (d), when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a good visibility state, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area larger than the actual display area applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is large. It is left behind, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it can be expected that the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor effect (specific display TH) is completed.

In FIG. 235 (e), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 235 (e), at least a part (or all of them) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the end of the valid period. In this regard, in the first valid period, as described above, even if the player does not perform the operation within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed (FIG. 235). (F).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if an operation is performed by the player immediately after the validity period ends (operation reception is no longer allowed), the display is displayed after the operation. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the sound output after the operation is performed, the display and the operation after the operation are performed according to the operation reception that accompanies the operation by the player in time. It will be possible to make it appear as if the after-sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such an manner, the gauge image (predetermined) is reached when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is visually good. Image) The display area of GG has already decreased, and the displacement of "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, there is a high possibility that the operation by the player will not be in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the "specific image TG" is displayed after the operation. It can be said that it is particularly effective to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by outputting the sound after the operation.

Regarding the production progress in the mode shown in FIG. 235, there are cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 234. It may be applied to any of the above.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 235, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed on a separate layer, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 235. It was decided to realize the production progress in the aspect. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 235 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. The method is also applicable to each of the examples described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 235, the embodiment (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as described above, the integrated image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). .. When such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the precursory effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 236 to 238 in order to improve the interest of the game.

FIGS. 236 to 238 are diagrams showing a modified example of the effect progress when the first valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

FIG. 236 (a) shows the effect display device with a first effect pattern (variation pattern) in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is based on the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. It shows the production situation performed at 1600.

FIG. 236 (b) shows an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started by the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 236 (a). It shows the situation.

This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect is performed. It functions as a directing effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), " Either "the image shown in FIG. 237 (c)" or "the image shown in FIG. 238 (j)" is displayed, whereby the "normal button image BMG" and "special" are displayed as the button image BMG. It is intended to suggest which of the "button pachinko image BMGb" is more likely to appear.

Here, when the "image shown in FIG. 237 (c)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "normal button image BMG" is displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). Will be suggested.

The "image shown in FIG. 237 (c)" according to this example is in a mode (here, translucent) in which the "integrated image IGa" is different from the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGa'. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, for the “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)”, the “integrated image IGa” may be displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 232 (a). Alternatively, the "normal button image BMGa" may not be integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and may be displayed as a single image. When the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)) or in the normal time (FIG. 232 (a)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode different from the mode (here, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 237 (c), it is approximated to the extent that the "normal button image BMGa" itself shown in FIG. 232 (a) or the "normal button image BMGa" is reminiscent. At least the image BMGa'with the (simulated) outer shape will be displayed. As a result, the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as the "integrated image IGa (Fig. 232 (a))" integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", or the "special peripheral decoration" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (a))" integrated with "image SSGb" occurs.

After the image IGa'(image BMGa') shown in FIG. 237 (c) is displayed, the image IGa'(image BMGa') is not the "integrated image IGa' (image 232 (a))". , An effect suggesting (reminding) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 237 (d), the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGa'representing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa)". It is described as a production that gradually brings the image SSGb'" closer. As a result of such an effect, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa"). When the "image SSGb'" is added and integrated, the valid period in which the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))" appears will occur. On the other hand, "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa (or image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa')". If the image is not integrated, the valid period in which the “integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” appears will occur.

FIG. 237 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 237 (d) is performed. There is.

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and suggests that operation reception is permitted. It is executed as a production. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGa'representing the integrated image IGa (or image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa)". The "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, the "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa'( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the "image BMGa') expressing the normal button image BMGa" and the "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" are integrated.

When the effect shown in FIG. 237 (e) progresses, either the "image shown in FIG. 237 (f)" or the "image shown in FIG. 237 (h)" is based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 237 (f) and 237 (h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situations and image contents shown in FIG. 235 (c)", and FIG. 237 (e). As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in (1) and the reduction of the display area of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), the integrated image IG is displayed. , A part that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears, and indicates a situation or image content in which the part is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 237 (e)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 237 (e) appears, and is the timing shown in FIG. 237 (f) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 237 (h) appears, is displayed at least internally (display on layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIGS. 237 (f) and 237 (h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (). It is in progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG is invisible or difficult to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period is started.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 237 (f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 237 (e), the image IGa'(or the normal button image BMGa) expressing the integrated image IGa was expressed. It is recognizable that "image BMGa')" failed to be associated with "image SSGb'representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 237 (g), the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)). The whole picture will appear. Since the subsequent progress of the production is as described above with reference to FIGS. 235 (d) to 235 (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 237 (h) appears, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 237 (d), the "image IGa'representing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa'representing the normal button image BMGa')" was changed to the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb." It is recognizable that it succeeded in connecting with the image SSGb'representing. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 237 (i), the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 232 (c)). The whole picture of will appear. Since then, the production progress has only been that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) has been replaced with the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 232 (c)), and FIGS. 235 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the "image shown in FIG. 238 (j)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). Will be suggested.

The "image shown in FIG. 238 (j)" according to this example is in a mode (here, translucent) in which the "integrated image IGb" is different from the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (b)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGb'. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, for the “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)”, the “integrated image IGb” may be displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 232 (b). Alternatively, the "special button image BMGb" may not be integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and may be displayed as a single image. When the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (b)) or in the normal time (FIG. 232 (b)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode different from the mode (here, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 238 (j), the "special button image BMGb" itself shown in FIG. 232 (b) or the "special button image BMGb" is approximated to the extent that it is reminiscent of it. At least the image BMGb'with the (simulated) outer shape will be displayed. As a result, the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))" integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", or the "special peripheral decoration" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period displayed as "integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))" integrated with "image SSGb" occurs.

After the image IGb'(image BMGb') shown in FIG. 238 (j) is displayed, the image IGb'(image BMGb') is not the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))". , An effect suggesting (reminding) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 237 (k), the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". It is described as a production that gradually brings the image SSGb'" closer. As a result of such an effect, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". When the "image SSGb'" is added and integrated, a valid period in which the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))" appears will occur. On the other hand, "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". If the images are not integrated, the valid period in which the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))" appears will occur.

FIG. 238 (l) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 238 (k) is performed. There is. Instead of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), it may be executed as a third precursor effect (third specific display) different from this.

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a production that suggests that. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". The "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, the "image IGb'expressing the integrated image IGb'( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the "image BMGb') expressing the special button image BMGb" and the "image SSGb' expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" are integrated.

When the effect shown in FIG. 238 (l) progresses, either the "image shown in FIG. 238 (m)" or the "image shown in FIG. 238 (o)" is based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 238 (m) and 238 (o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situations and image contents shown in FIG. 235 (c)", and FIG. 238 (l) As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in (1) and the reduction of the display area of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), the integrated image IG is displayed. , A part that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears, and indicates a situation or image content in which the part is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 238 (l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 238 (l) appears, and is shown in FIG. 238 (m) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 238 (o) appears, is displayed at least internally (display on layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIGS. 238 (m) and 238 (o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (). It is in progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG is invisible or difficult to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period is started.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 238 (m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 238 (k) and 238 (l), "the image IGb'(or the special button image BMGb) expressing the integrated image IGb was expressed. It is recognizable that "image BMGb')" failed to be associated with "image SSGb'representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238 (n), the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 232 (b)). The whole picture of will appear. Since then, the production progress has only been that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) has been replaced with the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 232 (b)), and FIGS. 235 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 238 (o) appears, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 238 (k), the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'representing the special button image BMGb)" is changed to the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is recognizable that it succeeded in connecting with the image SSGb'representing. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238 (p), the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 232 (d)). The whole picture of will appear. Since then, the production progress has only been that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) has been replaced with the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 232 (d)), and FIGS. 235 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, when FIG. 237 (c) appears, the probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG is set to "0%", but as the button image BMG. The probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 237 (e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 237 (f) → (g), (h) → (i), FIG. 238 (m) → (n), ( There is a possibility that the production progress will be executed in the form of o) → (p).

According to such a configuration, at the time when FIGS. 237 (f) and 237 (h) and FIGS. 238 (m) and 238 (o) appear, it is not possible to determine in which mode the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed. Although it can be recognized, it becomes impossible to recognize in which mode the button-shaped image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is gradually suggested according to the situation related to the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), and it becomes possible to improve the game interest. .. In particular, when the button image BMG can suggest any of a plurality of operation means having different operation targets depending on the display mode, the validity period is started and the operation-related expectation is also suggested. In spite of the situation, it becomes impossible to recognize which operation target is, so that the degree of attention to the effect can be remarkably improved.

However, even in the situation where FIGS. 237 (f) and 237 (h) and 238 (m) and (o) appear, the button is used in the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the target of operation by the player. It is desirable that the light is emitted (for example, the light is emitted from the time when the valid period occurs) according to the type displayed as the image BMG. According to such a configuration, a person who has a high motivation to operate and tends to directly see the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the "type displayed as the button image BMG". Therefore, it becomes possible to encourage the player to operate.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 236 (a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIG. 237 (c) and FIG. 238 (j).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, even if the situation shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k) is shifted to the situation shown in FIGS. 237 (g), (i) and 238 (n), (p). Good. That is, in this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k) functions as a precursor effect. At the time of transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may have already decreased, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have decreased. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, the gauge image is in the situation shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k). (Predetermined image) GG will start to reduce its display area.

Further, with respect to the production of FIGS. 236 to 238, a part thereof may be omitted depending on the mode prepared as the integrated image IG. For example, when the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) and 232 (d) are not prepared as the integrated image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 238. At this time, FIG. 237 (c) may also be omitted.

In the production of FIGS. 236 to 238, the image BMG'(or the button displacement image BMG itself) expressing the button displacement image BMG before the operation reception is allowed (before the valid period occurs) Good) is displayed (FIG. 237 (d), FIG. 238 (k)), but in that situation (before the expiration date), the image BMG'(or the button image BMG) representing the button image BMG). Is not dynamically displayed as if it were displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving part. According to such a configuration, even if the button-shaped image BMG and the image BMG'expressing the button image BMG'are displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the valid period has not yet occurred. By being able to implicitly suggest, the player will be able to concentrate on the production without worrying about the remaining time of the validity period. Since the reception of the effect is permitted when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, it is difficult or impossible to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). The dynamic display of the button-shaped image BMG will be performed.

FIGS. 239 to 243 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the production when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

That is, in FIGS. 235 to 238, an effective period (first effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is generated. For the case, an example of the progress of the production was explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 239 to 243, when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced, or the precursor effect (specific display) is lined up. An example of the progress of the production will be described in the case where the valid period (second valid period) occurs without being affected.

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment basically performs a predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) when an effective period in which operation reception is allowed occurs. However, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment can execute the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized" within the valid period. When performing the production, in order to make the feature stand out, the predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) itself is not performed when the valid period occurs, or even if the predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) is performed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG When the entire display target area of the above is made good for visibility, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not been reduced yet and has reached the maximum value.

Here, as the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), the gauge image GG is usually displayed when the operation is not performed within the valid period. When the valid period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "the operation is not performed within the valid period, and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. However, at the end of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image GG has not reached a predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. It is possible to mention "the first display mode". According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it seems that a lot of time is left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player Will be aware of the possibility that the validity period will be abruptly terminated, so that the tension during the validity period can be preferably maintained.

Further, as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), the gauge image GG usually reduces the display area every unit time within the valid period. However, it is possible to mention "a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the valid period". According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is little time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can gauge the gauge. It comes to be aware of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed.

That is, in the example described below, "a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" by using at least one of such "first display mode" and "second display mode". A display example is shown for the case of executing.

First, in FIG. 239 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of holdings is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced by the second effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production status performed by the display device 1600.

In FIG. 239 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 239 (a), an effective period in which operation reception for the operation means (operation receiving unit) is permitted occurs, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The integrated image IG is displayed to show the production status. As shown in FIG. 239 (b), at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not been reduced yet. ..

Further, when the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is executed within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is ". The time (set time) set for the valid period (first valid period) in which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed is made longer. This means that if an attempt is made to execute a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized within the valid period, it takes time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the first valid period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed and the "movement of the gauge image GG" Even though the set time until the end of the validity period is different from the second validity period in which the "display mode with features" is executed, is the integrated image IG itself the same? The images are displayed in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the first validity period and the "movement of the gauge image GG are characterized". It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation appears in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the amount of time in the situation where the display area is not reduced appears. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

When the effect situation shown in FIG. 239 (b) occurs, a precursor effect suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, when the entire integrated image IG (at least the "display target area of the gauge image GG" included in the integrated image IG) is displayed without overlapping the precursor effect, the display area of the gauge image GG. Is the maximum value, and it is required that the situation has not been reduced yet.

That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the state where the operation reception regarding the predetermined post-operation display and the predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted (within the valid period). When a predetermined time elapses from the production situation shown in FIG. 239 (b) and the production situation shown in FIG. 239 (c) appears, the gauge image GG is displayed up to that point. The display area is maintained in a state where the display area is reduced according to the elapsed time (predetermined time), and the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is started.

As shown in FIGS. 239 (c) and 239 (d), such a "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is such that it is continued for a predetermined time after the period occurs. It has become. However, even in the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the operation reception is maintained in an allowable state, and when there is an operation on the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, the valid period. Is terminated, and along with this, the integrated image IG is hidden, and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 239 (g)).

According to such a configuration, "a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the valid period. Therefore, compared with the case where the display area of the gauge image GG continues to be reduced at a constant speed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest that there is a margin in the remaining time until the expiration date.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an acceptable state, so that it is possible to give an image as if the validity period has been extended. , It will be expected to improve the game entertainment when the valid period has occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 239 (c) and 239 (d), the decorative symbol SZ that has been displayed up to that point is hidden or difficult to see in the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". The state is set so that the attention to the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is promoted.

However, if a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that a so-called "freeze effect" in which the image in the display screen suddenly becomes a stationary state has occurred. That is, since the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined time and the state cannot be released, it is erroneously recognized that the operation reception is no longer allowed. It is feared that the player's willingness to operate the game will be lost, and the game's interest will be reduced. In particular, in this example, since the decorative symbol SZ is hidden or difficult to see, it may lead to a false recognition that the operation reception is no longer allowed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated image IG itself is not made stationary in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but the integrated image itself. The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept stationary, while the button image BMG included in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving part is depicted. Display) is continued.

According to such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button image BMG is continued, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, so that the operation reception is not allowed ( It becomes possible to suppress the possibility of being erroneously recognized as (a freeze effect has occurred), and it is expected that the player's willingness to operate is appropriately maintained.

Here, the dynamic display by the button-shaped image BMG is executed as a display in which a predetermined operation (such as an operation of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiving portion) is repeated. In this regard, in the valid period (the first valid period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the setting is set. While the button-shaped image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined operation n times by the end of the time, the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. During the valid period (the second valid period shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time of setting, "the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" in the set time. It is desirable that the display can be executed as a display in which a predetermined operation by the button-shaped image BMG is repeated m (> n) times even within the "period during which it is not performed".

According to such a configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced for a longer time than the first valid period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the like. Since the state of not being performed will continue, even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and it takes time to grasp the situation, you will have enough time to operate it. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. It should be noted that the valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is different from the first valid period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the like. If a period (one that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is prepared, the longest of each time (set time) set for those valid periods is Of the second valid period shown in FIGS. 239 to 243, it is desirable that the number of predetermined operations by the button image BMG is larger in the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". ..

As described above, at the time when such a second validity period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and its display area is set as a predetermined maximum value. It is designed to be displayed (Fig. 239 (b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 234, if the specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG in a state of good visibility, the specific image TG is displayed. However, it may appear that the display area of the gauge image GG is decreasing, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 233, when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG may appear in a state of good visibility, the specific image TG may appear. It becomes clear that it does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced by exaggerating the length of the remaining time as the valid period.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second valid period. Therefore, even if the reduction of the display area of the gauge image GG is started from the situation shown in FIG. 239 (b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is not displayed. When is reduced to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 239 (c) and 239 (d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the operation by the player, the gauge image GG reduces the display area again. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see. After that, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 239 (e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period is timed up. As the second validity period ends, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden (FIG. 239 (f)). Here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is "0", that is, when it is hidden (FIG. 239 (e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period is timed up. As the second validity period ends, the operation-related image including the integrated image IG is hidden (FIG. 239 (f)).

As described above, in the second valid period, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 239 (f)), the same operation as when the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The post-display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect functions), and this point is also different from the first validity period. However, instead, in the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first valid period, and operation acceptance is permitted even in the displayed period in the stopped state. As described above, it can be said that the situation itself in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be performed in time is unlikely to occur. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 239, the gauge image GG is usually predetermined (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.) as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized". A case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed and the "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the valid period" is applied has been described. However, as described above, as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", usually (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), when the operation is not performed within the valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed. When the valid period ends when the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "the operation is not performed within the valid period, and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. Even though this is not the case, at the end of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image GG has not reached a predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. The "first display mode" may be further applied. When such a method is adopted, it is necessary to execute it in either the mode shown in FIGS. 240 and 241 or the mode shown in FIGS. 242 and 243 in order to improve the interest of the game. More desirable.

FIGS. 240 and 241 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the production when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situations shown in FIGS. 240 (a) to 240 (d) are the same as those described above and other examples thereof with reference to FIGS. 239 (a) to 239 (d). Therefore, also in this example, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second valid period, and the period including the period is within the second valid period. When the operation reception is made in, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 241 (g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the operation by the player, the gauge image GG reduces the display area again. It will not be displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is continued until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 240 (d) and 241 (e). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see.

As described above, in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 241 (e)), the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning). However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is also performed during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is permitted.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second validity period is set with the display area of the predetermined value left. Since the game is terminated, the player may not be able to operate the game even though he / she intends to operate the game, and the second validity period may end, which reduces the interest of the game. There are concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a specific condition (for example, the symbol is stopped or the symbol is not stopped 10 seconds before the symbol is stopped) is satisfied. While not, the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the second valid period is given an operation opportunity, and the operation means is given an operation opportunity. When the operation is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period for regenerating the second validity period will be generated from the end of the second validity period. It can be said that

According to such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, FIG. 241 (g) is operated by the player. ) Will be able to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (e), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is accepted based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 241 (f)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 240 (b) to (d), FIGS. 241 (e), and (g). Therefore, even if the operation reception is performed within the second valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 241 (g)). ).

When the operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 241 (e), the image shown in FIG. 241 (f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 240 (b)) appears as a post-operation display. It will be. Such an image is different from the post-operation display executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the second validity period (FIGS. 240 (b) to (d), FIG. 241 (f), etc.). It's different. Further, the sound output after the operation, which is executed based on the reception of the operation during the special valid period shown in FIG. 241 (e), also has the second valid period (FIGS. 240 (b) to (d) and FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation in 241 (f) and the like).

FIGS. 242 and 243 are diagrams showing a modified example of the effect progress when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 242 (a) is the same as the above-described contents and other examples with reference to FIGS. 239 (a) and 240 (a). However, in this example, during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 242 (a), when the second valid period occurs and the integrated image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the integrated image IG is displayed. From the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 242 (b) and 242 (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG sets the display area to the maximum value. It will be maintained as it is.

It should be noted that the operation reception is permitted even during the period when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The configuration and progress within the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", such as the execution of the after-sound output, are the same as those described above and other examples with reference to FIGS. 239 to 241. ..

Further, in this example as well, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 240 and 241 "the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. The "period that is not done" is to be continued. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains as it is (maximum value) as shown in FIGS. 242 (c) and 243 (d). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see.

As described above, in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 243 (d)), the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning). However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is also performed during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is permitted.

However, also in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the display area for the maximum value is left as the second valid period. Since the player is trying to terminate the game, the player may not be able to operate the game even though he / she intends to operate the game, and the second validity period may end. There is a concern. Therefore, also in this example, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, specific conditions (for example, symbol stop, 10 seconds before the symbol stop, etc.) are satisfied. While not, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given within the second valid period, and the operation means is given. When the operation for is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated.

According to such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the operation by the player causes FIG. 243 (f). ) Will be able to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 243 (d), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is accepted based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 243 (e)). After that, the contents as described above will be repeated again with reference to FIGS. 242 (b), (c), 243 (d), and (f). Therefore, even if the operation reception is performed within the second valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 243 (f)). ).

However, in this example, even when the second valid period reoccurs in this way, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs from the time of the reoccurrence. Therefore, FIG. 243 (e) In the situation shown in, the decorative symbol SZ is either hidden or hard to see.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 243 (e)" that appears as a post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 243 (d) is the "image shown in FIG. 242 (b)". Is the same as. Such an image is displayed after the operation (FIG. 243 (f)), which is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the second validity period (FIG. 242 (b), (c), FIG. 243 (d), etc.). )) Is different from the image display. Further, the sound output after the operation, which is executed based on the reception of the operation during the special validity period shown in FIG. 243 (d), also has the second validity period (FIGS. 242 (b), (c) and FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 243 (f)) executed based on the reception of the operation in 243 (d) and the like).

As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the entire period from the start to the end of the second valid period functions as a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any of the situations.

In the situation (special valid period) shown in FIGS. 241 (e) and 243 (d), the integrated image IG may be displayed as in the second valid period. However, the second validity period and the special are so that it is easy to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation have different validity periods (second validity period, special validity period). It is desirable that at least one of the display position and the size of the integrated image IG is different from the validity period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second validity period, the integrated image IG in the mode corresponding to the second validity period is hidden, and the integrated image IG in the mode corresponding to the special validity period is newly added. Will be displayed in. When displaying the integrated image IG in the special valid period, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated within the valid period, or a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated. May not be generated.

The "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 can be executed when the integrated image IGa is displayed among the integrated images IGa to IGd. It is desirable that the integrated images IGa to IGd are not executed when the integrated images IGb to IGd are displayed. That is, the integrated image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest expectation, but when the integrated image IGa is displayed, the "movement of the gauge image GG" shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 is displayed. Since there is a possibility that a "display mode with features" will appear, it will be possible to suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 240 to 243, when the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", it depends on the player. Even if a situation appears in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set period (second valid period) without performing the operation, an operation reception occurs and the display changes (or , Sound output after operation) will be able to be generated. More specifically, even when the predetermined set period (second valid period) has expired, when the operation receiving unit (operating means) whose operation has been prompted by the integrated image IG is operated. It is possible to regenerate a predetermined set period (second valid period), and operation acceptance is allowed during the regenerated predetermined set period (second valid period) (Fig.). 241 (e), (f) and FIGS. 243 (d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined set period (second valid period) ends without understanding the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized". Since the predetermined set period (second valid period) can be regenerated, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

On the other hand, during a predetermined set period (first valid period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is not displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", the operation reception is performed. Even if the operation receiving unit (operating means) whose operation has been promoted by the integrated image IG is operated after the predetermined setting period (first valid period) ends without being performed, the predetermined setting period (Second validity period) does not occur again (FIGS. 235 to 238).

It should be noted that the predetermined set period (second valid period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" does not necessarily change the symbol. It does not have to occur during the execution period of. For example, it may be a period generated by using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of the symbol change, or a "period during which the big hit game is not executed, a period before the big hit game is started, or the like". It may occur in.

Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, a longer time is set in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243) than in the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238). In spite of this, the integrated image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship between the first valid period and the second valid period (in the above example, the integrated image IG itself is displayed. The simulated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated image IG is displayed in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button image is the same, so that the set time (set time) is set. It is expected that the lengths of the will appear to be the same. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the first validity period and the "movement of the gauge image GG are characterized". It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation appears in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the amount of time in the situation where the display area is not reduced appears. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

When displaying the integrated image IG in a manner having a similar relationship between the first validity period (FIGS. 235 to 238) and the second validity period (FIGS. 239 to 243), "gauge image" is used. It is desirable that the integrated image IG smaller than the first valid period is displayed in the second valid period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized" appears.

Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, in the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238), if there is no operation reception, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, "" It ends when it reaches 0 "), but in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), if there is no operation reception, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It is terminated in the state of. That is, if the time (set time) set for the valid period is long, the tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, "" By giving the possibility that the validity period can end even if it does not become 0 "), it is expected that the tension is maintained suitably.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, when the integrated image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the precursor effect is being performed (first valid period), the precursor When the integrated image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced while the effect is not performed or the precursor effect is performed but at least while the precursor effect is performed (second effective). The image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG is different from that of the period). In this case, the modes of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. "The precursory effect is performed, but the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursory effect is being performed," says the gauge image over the entire valid period, as illustrated in FIGS. 242 and 243. This means that the display area of the GG is not reduced.

In this regard, according to the above-mentioned example, in the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238), the specific image TG is displayed, and the specific image TG is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. In the second valid period (FIGS. 240 to 243), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display) is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. The target area) is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first valid period, it is possible to make the valid period look longer by the amount that the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the valid period, and in the second valid period. By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension by making it appear that the valid period ends earlier than expected by the player. In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, in the second effective period, a large amount of the display area (at least more than half of the maximum value) of the gauge image GG (display target area) is left at the end of the effective period. It is desirable to do so.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced every unit time during the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the display area is not reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the tension is preferably maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the button-shaped image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced in both the first valid period and the second valid period. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first valid period, whereas the first mode is in the second valid period. It is designed to be displayed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the above-mentioned example, although the button image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decorative image SSG). , When the button image BMG of the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed, when the gauge image GG is in a reduced state and when the gauge image GG is not decreased. I am trying to have. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, it is preferable as the integrated image IG that the operation reception is permitted by dynamically displaying the button image BMG. You will be able to suggest.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, only when the normal button image BMGa and the special button image BMGb are displayed as the normal button image BMGa, "the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characteristic. It is possible to display the "display mode provided". Further, when the normal button image BMGa is displayed, "a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized" may be displayed, and "gauge image (predetermined image)" may be displayed. ) The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a mode (normal mode) that appears even when the special button image BMGb is displayed without displaying "a display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized". I made it. Therefore, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest when the normal button image BMGa, which has a lower expectation than the special button image BMGb, is displayed, is suppressed.

In particular, in the second valid period shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. However, only one aspect is displayed. That is, in this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed even though the remaining time suggestion function and the expectation degree suggestion function by the gauge image GG itself are lost and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG. The integrated image IG on which the is formed is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is statically displayed (in an area-invariant manner) in the integrated image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second valid period is not an image suggesting the remaining time or the degree of expectation, but functions only as a decorative image in the integrated image IG. Therefore, the function can be significantly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed within the first valid period, and the variety of expressions as the gauge image GG will improve the game entertainment. Will be expected.

Regarding the first validity period and the second validity period, it is sufficient that the conditions for their occurrence are different from each other. For example, it may occur at different timings within one symbol fluctuation period. Further, the first valid period means a period during which the operation reception regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and the second valid period is the first valid period. It means the period during which operation acceptance for the second post-operation sound output different from the second post-operation display and the second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and within each of these periods. The reactions (display change, sound output) that appear when the operation is accepted in are different from each other.

In addition, regarding the integrated image IG,
-After the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed every unit time from the time when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. The mode to be reduced (FIGS. 235 to 238) and
-The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect is started to be displayed, at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. Aspects (FIGS. 239-243)
I made it so that there was. According to such a configuration, as a result of the precursory effect, the display area has already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured, and whether or not the precursory effect has been performed. When the entire gauge image GG is made visible, the display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced, and the visibility of the gauge image GG is used to provide an interesting effect. You will be able to do it.

In particular, when the mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the entire gauge image GG is visible regardless of whether or not the precursor effect is performed (FIGS. 239 to 243) is adopted. As long as it is within the valid period, the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can be further displayed, so that the attention to the gauge image GG can be further enhanced.

It should be noted that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect is started to be displayed, at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. In the case of adopting the mode not (FIGS. 239 to 243), in addition to the case where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced within the valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the gauge image GG is used. The display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear in some cases. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears is the second condition, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The condition for generating a specific validity period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, during the period when the button image BMG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG may be reduced according to the passage of time, or the display may not be performed. did. If the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may be hidden within the valid period. Nevertheless, regarding the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first valid period in which the display area is reduced with the passage of time, but also the display area is not reduced with the passage of time. Since it is displayed even during the valid period, it is expected to preferably suggest that the reception of the production is permitted.

In the above example, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) elapses without displaying the display area to be reduced according to the passage of time by the gauge image GG. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function will not be activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is enabled, the tension due to the gauge image GG not suggesting the remaining time may be completely lost. Therefore, the validity period (second validity period) ), It is desirable that the automatic reception function is not enabled (in any production mode). On the other hand, it is desirable that the automatic reception function is enabled (in any effect mode) for the first validity period described above.

In addition, when the button-shaped image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and a display method that pursues only the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is adopted, a method that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is adopted. Then, despite the gauge image GG, the fact that the remaining time suggestion function is not exhibited causes a great sense of discomfort. In this respect, in the above configuration, the button-shaped image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, the pattern can be seen on the back side of the gauge image GG, or the gauge image GG itself can have a plurality of colors. Since this itself has a decorative property in the integrated image IG, it is expected to suppress a sense of discomfort when a situation in which the remaining time suggestion function by the gauge image GG is not exhibited appears. become.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, prior to the occurrence of the first valid period, the "button image BMG" has a low expectation (normal button image BMG) and a high expectation. The color rendering of which of the (special button image BMGb) appears, and the low-expected mode (normal peripheral decorative image SSGa) and the high-expected mode (special peripheral decorative image SSG) as the "peripheral decorative image SSG". The effect of which of SSGb) and SSGb) appears is made to appear step by step. However, such a directing property can also be made to appear by the method described below.

FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect of stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation of the integrated image IG.

First, in FIG. 244 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of holdings is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced by the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production status performed by the display device 1600.

In FIG. 244 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 244 (a), an effective period in which operation reception for the operation means (operation receiving unit) is permitted occurs, and the effect display device 1600 The button image BMG is displayed to indicate the production status.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b), the button image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "peripheral decoration image SGG", and is only displayed as a single image. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (b), the button image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation (normal button image BMGa) or a mode with a high expectation (special button image BMGb). It provides a directing effect as to whether or not the image is to be performed, and in the figure, an example is shown in which a mode with a high degree of expectation (special button image BMGb) appears. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

FIG. 244 (c) shows an effect situation in which the special button image BMGb shown in FIG. 244 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the button image BMG (normal button image BMGa, special button image BMGb) shown in FIG. 244 (b) is valid without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG (first valid period). ) Is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) and becomes an integrated image IG. Does the period (first valid period) occur, or the valid period (first valid period) occurs without the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) and the integrated image IG does not occur? You will be able to provide fun about what to do. When the valid period (first valid period) occurs without becoming the integrated image IG, the gauge image GG is displayed as an image different from the button image BMG, for example, a rod shape (straight line shape). ), The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable that the specific image TG is not displayed.

In addition, when the valid period occurs after the button image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG, it is expected to be stopped at the jackpot symbol than when the valid period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG. It is desirable to increase the degree (ratio). Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b), the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed. ), And it is desirable that the ratio of integration with the peripheral decorative image SSG increases. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (c), the button-shaped image BMG is a peripheral decoration image in a mode with low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image in a mode with high expectation (special peripheral decoration). It provides a directing effect as to which of the images BMGb) is integrated with, and in the figure, a case where a highly expected aspect (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears is illustrated. .. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

The peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) according to this example has an image type different from that shown in each of the above examples (FIGS. 232 to 244) for convenience of explanation. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button-shaped image BMG, and the peripheral decoration image BMG usually has a heart pattern (not shown). On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a check pattern is applied. Then, among the areas where these patterns are applied, the "area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 244 (c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated. It is the same as 232 (d).

FIG. 244 (d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (c).

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the valid period (first valid period) without the first additional decorative HS1 being added to the integrated image IG (integrated image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244 (c). If the mode in which the above occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Validity period (first validity period), whether a period (first validity period) occurs, or the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) is not performed and the first additional decoration HS1 is not added. Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

When the valid period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated image IG, the valid period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of stopping at the jackpot symbol is higher than in the case. Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c), FIG. 244 (b) The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of the first additional decorative HS1 being added is high. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (d), the first additional decoration HS1 is provided to provide a color rendering property as to whether the first additional decoration HS1 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may try to do it.

FIG. 244 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (d).

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the valid period (first valid period) without the second additional decorative HS2 being added to the integrated image IG (integrated image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244 (d). If the mode in which the above occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Validity period (first validity period), whether a period (first validity period) occurs, or the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) is not performed and the second additional decoration HS2 is not added. Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

When the valid period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated image IG, the valid period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of stopping at the jackpot symbol is higher than in the case. Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c), FIG. 244 (b) The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the second additional decorative HS2 is added at a high rate. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (e), the second additional decoration HS2 provides a color rendering property as to whether the second addition decoration HS2 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may try to do it.

FIG. 244 (f) shows an effect situation in which a valid period (first valid period) occurs in a state where the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (e) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 244 (f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, operation instruction images such as "press" and "down arrow" are displayed. In addition to this, the above-mentioned specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and the operation reception is permitted by confirming the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. The specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from that shown in each of the above examples (FIGS. 223 to 244) for convenience of explanation, but is basically the same. Displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced according to the "end of the gauge image GG" which is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases. Will be done.

The specific image TG according to this example should be displayed by the same method as the example shown in FIG. 233 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the valid period but is gradually displayed with the passage of time). Alternatively, the display may be performed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 234 (a method in which the entire display is displayed when the validity period starts).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a mode with low expectation (snail character) or a mode with high expectation (frog character), which is omitted from the illustration. It provides a directing effect as to whether or not it is to be performed, and in the figure, a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation appears is illustrated. The specific image TG is displayed in a more promising manner when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c). The proportion is high, and the expectation is higher when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d). It is desirable that the ratio of displaying the specific image TG is high. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a color rendering index as to how much the operation-related image can be developed into a highly expected mode before the validity period occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game fun related to the operation in a state where the validity period has not yet occurred. In addition, while the operation-related images (button image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) suggest the degree of expectation before the validity period occurs, after the validity period occurs, , Since the degree of expectation is further suggested by another image (specific image TG), it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the period from before the effective period to after it occurs. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 244, the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 244 (b) to FIG. 244 (c) and the production progresses from FIG. 244 (c) to FIG. 244 (d). At the timing of whether or not to perform, and the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 244 (d) to FIG. 244 (e), operation-related images (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) are displayed. You may hide it once. That is, in this case, when the operation-related image (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, it is necessary to provide the fun of whether the production has progressed or the validity period has expired. Will be able to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 244, the button-shaped image, the peripheral decoration image, the additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the validity period at the stage before the validity period occurs, but the mode is different from this. It may be displayed as (blinking, translucent, etc.).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 244, it is desirable that the time required to gradually suggest the degree of expectation by the operation-related image before the occurrence of the validity period is longer than the set time for the validity period. ..

By the way, in the sword decoration body 5001 according to this embodiment, a "handle portion 5012" capable of moving (moving up and down) with respect to the sheath portion 5020 and a "handle portion 5012" capable of operating (moving vertically) with respect to the handle portion 5012 It has been described above that the two operation receiving portions with the "button 5014" are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a valid period (operation reception effect) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 is generated, the valid period (operation) is generated. In the reception production), both the "pattern image TMG" that imitates the pattern part 5012 and the "button image BMG" that imitates the pattern button 5014 are displayed. During the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity, the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is not allowed, and the operation reception is given to the handle button 5014 (operation reception effect). ), The operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is not allowed.

In such a configuration, when the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 occurs, is the operation reception for the handle 5012 permitted, or the operation reception for the handle button 5014. Will be able to make it difficult to recognize whether is allowed. That is, when the operation reception is performed during the valid period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, after the operation, the operation reception is performed in the valid period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. The rate of appearance of a mode suggesting that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a display (or a mode suggesting that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a sound output after operation) is high. The ratio may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, while it is difficult to recognize whether the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is permitted, the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted. When the player comes to recognize the above, the handle portion 5012 is operated in an uplifting feeling, and the game entertainment can be remarkably improved.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity, the handle portion 5012 (the light emitting portion of the handle portion 5012) is not only made to emit light. , The handle button 5014 (the light emitting portion of the handle button 5014) on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given is made to emit light. That is, in this case, during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which both the "pattern image TMG" that imitates the handle 5012 and the "button image BMG" that imitates the pattern button 5014 are displayed, the handle 5012 Even if the handle button 5014 is directly visually observed, it is difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given an operation opportunity. In such a situation, the player recognizes that the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted, so that the operation for the handle portion 5012 can be performed in an uplifting feeling. Can be significantly improved.

That is, during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 can be directly visually observed or the effect display device 1600 can be viewed for a short time. It is difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity is given to the 5012 or the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. At least for those who have played the pachinko machine for the first time (beginners) and those who are not familiar with complicated production specifications (elderly people, etc.), operation opportunities are given to either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "valid period in which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity" is generated in this way. It is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity within the valid period, but it can be recognized if a certain amount of time is required. Then, the button image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed respectively.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the valid period (operation reception production) in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity, the "pattern copy image TMG" that imitates the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 Both the "button image BMG" that imitates the above are displayed, but among those images, the "pattern image TMG" on the side where operation reception is allowed is dynamically displayed, but the operation reception The "button image BMG" on the side where is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. The "dynamic display" here means, for example, a display depicting how the operation receiving portion is displaced within its movable range (in the case of the handle portion 5012, the appearance of operating (moving up and down) with respect to the sheath portion 5020). It corresponds to the displayed display, and in the case of the handle button 5014, it corresponds to the display depicting the operation (up and down movement) of the handle portion 5012).

Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity within the valid period. However, when a predetermined time that can be recognized as a dynamic display (video) has elapsed, the behavior during operation appears in the pattern image TMG as a dynamic display, but the behavior during operation appears in the button image BMG. Since it becomes noticed that is not displayed as a dynamic display, it becomes possible to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity. Then, when the player recognizes that the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) on the side with high expectation is allowed to accept the operation, the handle portion 5012 is operated in an uplifting feeling. Therefore, it will be possible to significantly improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "pattern image TMG" and the "button image BMG" are displayed during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity. Also, by displaying those images as an "integrated image" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of them, the improvement of the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (valid period) occurs. I am trying to plan. The functions and modification examples of such an integrated image are basically as described above. For example, even if the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 to 244 is displayed so as to further display (include) the "pattern image TMG" in addition to the "button image BMG". Good.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "button image BMG" and the "pattern image TMG" are displayed as a "composite image HMG" that imitates at least a part of the sword decoration 5001. The "composite image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated image IG" integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the periphery thereof.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing an example of the “integrated image IG” displayed when the operation reception effect (valid period) is generated for the handle portion 5012.

As shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 is generated. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, the "pattern image TMG" that imitates the pattern portion 5012 is changed to the "composite image HMG" that is integrated with the "button image BMG", and then the "composite image HMG" is used. "Image HMG" is displayed as an integrated image IGe to IGH integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. In the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), "pattern image TMG", "button image BMG", and "peripheral decoration image SSG" are not individually prepared as image data, and they are used. It is displayed as one integrated image data (integrated image IGe to IGH). Further, when the integrated images IGe to IGH are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "push" and "lower left arrow" are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a post-operation effect to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, "relatively". A plurality of production modes including "first production mode with low expectation" and "second production mode with relatively high expectation" are prepared, and these productions are based on the result of jackpot judgment (production judgment). It is intended to carry out any of the embodiments. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d),
The mode (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 245 (b) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGe) shown in FIG. 245 (a) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When appears, the appearance rate of the "second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGg) shown in FIG. 245 (c) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 245 (b) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When appears, the appearance rate of the "second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGh) shown in FIG. 245 (d) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGg) shown in FIG. 245 (c) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). Based on the result of the jackpot judgment (effect judgment), the relationship is established such that the appearance ratio of the "second production mode with relatively high expectation" is higher as the post-operation effect when Any of the simulated images IGe to IGf is displayed.

It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated image IGe to IGH. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the valid period only by preparing at least two modes. Further, an aspect different from the above four aspects (integrated image IGe to IGH) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared aspects may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operating means (sword decoration 5001) having an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) that is displaced by an operation by the player and a peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) provided on the periphery thereof
An integrated image (pattern image TMG) that imitates the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) is displayed as an integrated image IGe to IGH integrated with a peripheral decorative image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image. Image display means and
-As an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012). The integrated image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated image IGe to IGH).

Details of the "integrated image" shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d) will be described separately for each of these modes (integrated image IGe to IGH).

First, the "integrated image IGe" shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a pattern image TMGe, a button image BMGe (composite image HMGe), and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. It is composed of. However, in the "integrated image IGe", the pattern image TMGe and the button image BMGe (composite image HMGe) are "an image of the pattern portion 5012 to which an operation opportunity is given" and "an image". While the "image of the pattern button 5014 that is not the target to which the operation opportunity is given" is displayed as an integrated image, the peripheral decoration image SSGe is usually the "target to which the operation opportunity is given". The peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle portion 5012 is not modeled. Most of the image SSGe decorates the periphery of the patterned image TMGe (composite image HMGe) as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. There is.

In the "integrated image IGe" shown in FIG. 245 (a), the peripheral decorative image SSGa is usually expressed as a treasure box containing some treasures including the pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe). As described above, these "treasures" and "treasure boxes" have a shape different from that of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGe" according to this embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with the passage of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum value display area when the operation is not accepted within the valid period. It is displayed so that it decreases with the passage of time until it reaches the display area of.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 245 (a), a partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is provided. .. The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as a section image KG, and a "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the necklace. However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGe" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the handle portion to be operated is used. The 5012 is made to emit light in the first embodiment (for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGe in the "integrated image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 245 (a))). Further, the pattern button 5014, which is not the operation target, also emits light in the fifth aspect (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGe in the "integrated image IGe" (in FIG. 245 (a), for example, "blue"". ) Is used to emit light. Although the same color is used here, the colors may be different from those of the first aspect and the fifth aspect.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGf" shown in FIG. 245 (b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGe", and the pattern image TMGf and the button image BMGf ( The composite image HMGf) and the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated image IGf", there is no shape change in the pattern image TMGf and the button image BMGf (composite image HMGf). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSG" and the treasure box itself are displayed as the same, but the amount and type of treasure contained therein is increasing. It is displayed as "decorative image SSGf". The amount and types of treasures are increasing, and necklaces, treasure swords, and cups are also displayed in the case of "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and are common.

Further, in the "integrated image IGf" shown in FIG. 245 (b), as the amount and type of treasure increase, the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG The shape has changed, so that the display mode of the gauge image GG is different. According to such a configuration, the shape of the gauge image GG as a display target area differs (not similar) depending on which of the plurality of modes having different expectations is displayed, so that the display area becomes different. It becomes difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left as it is reduced, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGf" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is set. In the second aspect, the unit 5012 is made to emit light (for example, in the same color as the pattern image TMGf in the “integrated image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 245 (b))). Further, the pattern button 5014, which is not the operation target, also emits light in the sixth aspect (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGf in the "integrated image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 245 (b)). ) Is used to emit light. Here, the same color is used, but the second aspect and the sixth aspect may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGg" shown in FIG. 245 (c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGe", and the pattern image TMGg and the button image BMGg (composite image). The image HMGg) and the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated image IGg", there is no shape change in the pattern image TMGg and the button image BMGg (composite image HMGg). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the treasure itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSG", but the treasure box (shape) for storing them is different. It is displayed as "image SSGg".

However, the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGf" in the following points.
"The peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle portion 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, and is virtual in the display effect on the effect display device 1600. As a decoration, the peripheral edge of the pattern image TMGg (composite image HMGg) is decorated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGg" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is set. In the third aspect, the unit 5012 is made to emit light (in FIG. 245 (c), for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGg in the “integrated image IGg” (for example, “red”)). Further, the handle button 5014, which is not the operation target, also emits light in the seventh aspect (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGg in the “integrated image IGg” (for example, “red” in FIG. 245 (c)”. ) Is used to emit light. Here, the same color is used, but the third aspect and the seventh aspect may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGH" shown in FIG. 245 (d) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGe", and the pattern image TMGh and the button image BMGh (composite image). The image HMGh) and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated image IGH", there is no shape change in the pattern image TMGh and the button image BMGh (composite image HMGh). However, as for the peripheral decoration image SSG, the amount and types of treasures are increased and the treasure box (shape) for storing them is also different from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSG". It is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGh".

Further, in the "integrated image IGH" according to this example, the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, changes as the amount and type of treasure increase. Therefore, the display mode of the gauge image GG is changed accordingly.

However, the "third special peripheral decoration image SSGh" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" in the following points.
"The peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle portion 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, and is virtual in the display effect on the effect display device 1600. As a decoration, the peripheral edge of the pattern image TMGh (composite image HMGh) is decorated.

That is, in the "integrated image IGh (FIG. 245 (d))", a part (treasure) in the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated image IGf (FIG. 245 (b))". ) And a part (treasure box) in the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated image IGg (Fig. 245 (c))" are displayed as a combined image. There is.

On the other hand, since the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the peripheral decorative image SSG, the case where the "integrated image IGe (Fig. 245 (a))" appears and the case where "integrated" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation reception effect (valid period) for the same post-operation effect as in the case where the "image IGH (FIG. 245 (d))" appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGH" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is set. In the fourth aspect, the unit 5012 is made to emit light (for example, in the same color as the pattern image TMGh in the “integrated image IGH” (for example, “rainbow color” in FIG. 245 (d))). .. Further, the pattern button 5014, which is not the operation target, also emits light in the eighth aspect (for example, in the same color as the button image BMGh in the "integrated image IGH" (in FIG. 245 (d), for example, "rainbow color". ”) Is used to emit light). Here, the same color is used, but the fourth aspect and the eighth aspect may be different colors.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in any of the embodiments. However, as the amount and type of treasure change (Fig. 245 (b), (d)), or as the treasure box changes (Fig. 245 (c), (d)), the pattern image The shapes of the TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) may be different.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), in each embodiment, the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in different colors, but the same color. It may be displayed as.

When displaying the button imitation image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014, in the examples shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration images SSGa and b are integrated and displayed with respect to the button imitation image BMG. I tried to do it. In this regard, also in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the button-shaped image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 is displayed, but this is not displayed for the peripheral decoration images SSGa and b. .. That is, because the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the case of the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 225 (d) and FIG. 245 ( It is possible to display the image as a completely different image from the cases shown in a) to (d), which makes it possible to provide various effects.

In addition, among the configurations according to the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the portions having the same functions as the examples shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) are shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d). Needless to say, the same effects as the various effects described above are exhibited with reference to d). Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the above-mentioned modified examples and production examples with respect to the examples shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) can be appropriately adopted.

Further, even during the valid period in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245, as in the valid period in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. The "specific image TG" is displayed.

However, in the valid period (plural valid periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232, the type of the valid period (type as post-operation display or post-operation sound output, or a precursor effect) Depending on the type, etc.), the "specific image TG" may be displayed or the "specific image TG" may not be displayed, whereas the integrated image is shown in FIG. 245. In the valid period (multiple valid periods) in which the IG is displayed, the "specific image TG" is displayed regardless of the type of the valid period (type after operation, sound output after operation, type of precursor effect, etc.). It is always displayed.

That is, during the valid period (plural valid periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245, the "state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 is displayed. The validity period generated as a production is not included. Therefore, it is desirable to display the "specific image TG" in order to clarify how much time is left. When displaying the "specific image TG", it is not always necessary to display the gauge image GG.

The "specific image TG" when the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245 may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, or may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 234. You may try to do it.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 245, an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, thereby moving from the specific position to the original position. The operation (sword operation) is allowed. However, when giving an operation opportunity to the handle portion 5012, it is not always necessary to move the handle portion 5012 from the original position to a specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is in the original position, whereby a movement operation (sword pulling operation) from the original position to a specific position may be permitted.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of an effect (operation reception effect) when the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245.

FIG. 246 (a) shows the effect display device 1600 in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. In the effect situation performed in the above, the effect state in which the display related to the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started on the effect display device 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 235 to 238. When the same effect pattern is used, the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the effective period shown in FIG. 246 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the effect pattern, respectively. It may be made to occur, or only one of those valid periods (operation reception effect) may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination.

The precursor effect (specific display TH3) related to this example is also executed in a form that straddles before and after the occurrence timing of the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed. At this point, the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 (specific display TH3) The production reception) is not allowed and the validity period has not occurred.

In this respect, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by the display of the integrated image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid portion of the treasure box). At the time shown in FIG. 236 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated image IG is displayed as a "closed mode", whereby the pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe) is displayed. Some treasures including the above are not displayed as images (by the specific display TH3 which is the lid part of the treasure box), and are in a state where they cannot be seen (or are in a state where they are difficult to see).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decorative image SSG of the integrated image IG has a relatively low expectation aspect shown in FIGS. 245 (a) and 245 (b). And, it provides a color rendering index as to which of the modes with relatively high expectations shown in FIGS. 245 (c) and 245 (d) is displayed. The case where it is displayed in a low mode (FIGS. 245 (a) and 245 (b)) is illustrated. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). In addition, although the explanation is omitted when the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation, the subsequent production progress in the same manner as "when the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a low degree of expectation" explained below. Will be done.

In FIG. 246 (b), as the precursor effect shown in FIG. 246 (a) progresses (the lid portion of the treasure box (specific display TH3) is opened and the area displayed overlapping with the “treasure” is the time. In "treasure", the part that does not overlap with the lid part of the treasure box (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and that part is displayed in a state of good visibility. Is shown.

That is, when the precursory effect shown in FIG. 246 (a) progresses, a specific timing arrives and an effective period for the handle portion 5012 is generated. When the effective period occurs, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the handle portion 5012 to be operated starts moving to the "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the "handle portion 5012" which is the operation target and the "handle button 5014" which is not the operation target start emitting light in a predetermined mode (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission is started, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246 (a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the integrated image IG has a mode in which the lid portion (specific display TH3) of the treasure box is opened from the "closed mode (fully closed)". It is in a state of describing the change to "(fully open)". Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 246 (b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is "a precursor effect (specific display TH3) depicted (expressed) as if it is on the front side thereof). However, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (progressed). ) Is in the situation. In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and the predetermined time after the valid period is generated is , At least a part of the integrated image IG cannot be visually recognized or is made difficult to be visually recognized by the precursor effect (specific display TH3). That is, in this case, the whole picture of the integrated image IG (pattern image TMG and button image BMG (composite image HMG), peripheral decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the valid period. Therefore, it is interesting to know which is the degree of expectation (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the aspect of the pattern image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG. It will be possible to maintain it for a predetermined time after the validity period is started.

That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (b), the "treasure" which is the content of the treasure box is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are small (the mode in which the expectation is relatively low shown in FIG. 245 (a)). There are at least cases where the amount and type are large (the mode with a relatively high degree of expectation shown in FIG. 245 (b)), and in any of these modes. It provides a directing effect as to whether it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), it is recognizable that the "treasure" contained in the treasure box is displayed in a mode having a large amount and type (a mode with a high degree of expectation). ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to see, the type in which the "specific image TG" is displayed in the first place when the valid period is started ( (See FIG. 234), or the type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and gradually appears after that (see FIG. 233). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to detect that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, it can be said that it is particularly effective to execute the precursory effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. In addition, when "treasure" is displayed in a mode with low expectation, the explanation is omitted, but this is the same as "when" treasure "is displayed in a mode with high expectation" explained below. Subsequent production progress will be made.

FIG. 246 (c) overlaps with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of further progress of the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246 (b). It shows the situation where the part (the part where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the "treasure") has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated image IG is displayed. It will be possible to provide a single color rendering index from the time until the end of the game, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the entire treasure of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visually good, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of the "specific image TG" has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area larger than the actual display area applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is large. It is left behind, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, when the precursor effect (the effect of opening the lid portion which is the specific display TH) is completed, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced, which suppresses the deterioration of the game interest. You can expect that. The "specific image TG" according to this example is displayed as an image expressing "light" displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), the pattern image TMG of the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (a display depicting how the handle 5012 is displaced within its movable range). However, as described above, the button image BMG is not dynamically displayed (a display depicting how the handle button 5014 is displaced within its movable range).

In FIG. 246 (d), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period (set time) ends (or). An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (immediately before the end of the valid period) is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 246 (d) appears, it is assumed that the operation reception is barely allowed in time, but the operation reception is already in the state where the screen is displayed. It may be made unacceptable. However, in this case, at that time point, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 are put into a state in which each light emission has already been completed. In this case, images such as "push in!" And "lower left arrow" may be hidden. In any case, at least a part (or all of them) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the end of the valid period.

When the valid period ends, both the light emission of the handle portion 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are terminated. In this regard, during the valid period in which the handle portion 5012 is given an operation opportunity, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation was performed are displayed even if the player does not perform the operation within the period. This is done (see FIG. 246 (e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (FIGS. 235 (e), (f), etc.) that functions within the first validity period described above.

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if an operation is performed by the player immediately after the validity period ends (operation reception is no longer allowed), the display is displayed after the operation. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the sound output after the operation is performed, the display and the operation after the operation are performed according to the operation reception that accompanies the operation by the player in time. It will be possible to make it appear as if the after-sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such an manner, the gauge image (predetermined) is reached when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is visually good. Image) The display area of GG has already decreased, and the displacement of "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, there is a high possibility that the operation by the player will not be in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the "specific image TG" is displayed after the operation. It can be said that it is effective to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by outputting the sound after the operation. Further, in this example, the handle button 5014 on the side where the operation opportunity is not given is set to the light emitting state according to the occurrence of the valid period, and the operation opportunity is given to either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014. I try to make it difficult to recognize. That is, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the operation within the valid period will not be in time, it can be said that it is effective in suppressing the deterioration of the game interest when the operation is not in time.

Regarding the production progress in the mode shown in FIG. 246, there are cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 234. It may be applied to any of the above.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 246, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed on a separate layer, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 235. It was decided to realize the production progress in the aspect. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 246 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, the embodiment (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 245 (b) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as described above, the integrated image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 246, first, when the treasure box that is a part of the integrated image IG is displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the treasure box is described as "a mode with high expectation" and "a mode with high expectation". The first effectability regarding which of the "low-expected aspects" is displayed will be provided. In addition, after the validity period has occurred, the treasure box of the integrated image IG is gradually opened, and the "treasure" is either "highly expected" or "lowly expected". A second color rendering of what is displayed in is provided. That is, in this case, the validity period is generated because the degree of expectation is suggested by the stepwise effects (first effect and second effect) that are performed across the occurrence of the validity period. It is expected that the color rendering index in the period from the front to the post-occurrence will be suitably improved.

In addition, since it was decided that such a stepwise effect would be realized by the depiction of the integrated image IG itself (depiction of the lid of the treasure box), another image (specific display TH shown in FIG. 235). By being disturbed by (such as), the stress is lessened than when the visibility of the integrated image IG is deprived, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. However, also in the example shown in FIG. 246, the precursor effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 237. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 237, the precursor effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 246.

In FIG. 246, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the modeled image of the operation target is integrated with the “peripheral decorative image (first decorative image)” including the display target area of the gauge image. Regarding the case of displaying as a model image, an example (first operation acceptance allowable period) related to the progress of the production was explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 247 and 248, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the modeled image of the operation target is referred to as "peripheral decorative image including the display target area of the gauge image (first decorative image). In the case of displaying as "an image that is not integrated with", an example (second operation acceptance allowable period) related to the progress of the production will be described. The example shown in FIG. 246 and the example shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 do not necessarily give an operation opportunity to the same operation target, but since the operation opportunity is given to the same operation target. If there is, it is desirable that the image itself, which is a model of the operation target, is displayed as the same image (including similar figures).

Here, as a mode in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image", for example, the imitation image of the operation target is "periphery". A mode in which the image is displayed as a single image that is not integrated with the decorative image in the first place, or an image that imitates the operation target is displayed as an image that is integrated with the peripheral decorative image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image. It is possible to adopt the mode to be used. According to such a configuration, when the validity period occurs, when the modeled image of the operation target is displayed as one image, the gauge image is displayed in the image, and the operation target is modeled. When the model image is displayed as one image, the gauge image may not be displayed in the image, so that the tension during the effective period can be preferably maintained.

In the example described below, a display example is shown in which the modeled image of the operation target is displayed as "an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image".

First, in FIG. 247 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed in a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0. In the effect situation performed by the device 1600, the effect state in which the display related to the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started on the effect display device 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and 246. When the same effect pattern is used, it may be generated at the first timing and the second timing in one effect pattern, or any of the valid periods (operation reception effect) based on the result of the effect determination. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern.

In this example, the situations shown in FIGS. 247 (a) and 247 (b) are basically the same as the situations shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), and the description of the same configuration is omitted. However, the "treasure (second decorative image)", which is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 247 (b), is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 246 (b). The content is different from the "treasure (first decorative image)". That is, as described above, the "image that imitates the operation target" according to this example is displayed as "an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image". Regarding the "peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image", the part displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image" and the part displayed as a different image are It has become something.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), the "treasure (second decorative image)" of the peripheral decorative image SSG according to this example includes the "Holy Grail" in FIG. 246. It is the same as the "treasure (first decorative image)" shown. However, in the "treasure" of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the "gold bar" and the "necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)" shown in FIG. An image of gold coins is displayed. The treasure chest shown in FIG. 247 (c) is the same as the treasure chest shown in FIG. 246 (c), and the treasure chest is also displayed in any of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 245.

According to such a configuration, even if there is no portion where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the "treasure (peripheral decorative image SSG)" (FIG. 247 (c)). The gauge image GG will no longer be displayed in the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". That is, in this case, while the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" is gradually made more visible by the specific display TH3, even if an attempt is made to find the gauge image GG, it cannot be found. You will be able to adequately maintain a sense of tension about how much time is left.

In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The same image (such as the Holy Grail) as in the case (FIG. 245 (c)) is intentionally displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to make the "necklace", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, appear to be displayed somewhere, thereby making the "necklace", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, appear. After looking for it, when I realized that this was not displayed anywhere, it means that a certain amount of time has already passed since the validity period occurred, so I feel nervous during the validity period. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 247 (b) to 247 (d), the integrated image IG itself in which the pattern image TMG imitating the operation target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG is a gauge image. Not only the display target area of the above is not provided, but also the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed, and it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left in the valid period, so that the tension during the valid period can be preferably maintained. The display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image different from the integrated image IG, and the display area is reduced with the passage of time. You may do so.

FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has passed and the valid period is about to end. As mentioned above, the gauge image is not displayed in this example. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), it is not suggested that the validity period is about to end, and the player side is in the situation even if the image is visually observed. I can't recognize that there is.

However, even during the valid period of this example, in the pattern image TMG that is the operation target, a display depicting how the handle portion 5012 reciprocates (reciprocates from the original position to a specific position) within the movable range. (Dynamic display) is being performed. In this regard, the validity period of this example is terminated when the reciprocating motion is repeated N times (N does not have to be an integer) after the period occurs. By keeping an eye on the dynamic display by the pattern image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much time is left as the valid period (how many reciprocating movements).

Even during the valid period according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 247 (c) and 247 (d), in the button copy image BMG, a display (movement) depicting how the handle button 5014 reciprocates within its movable range Display) is not performed. In this regard, when the operation receiving unit (here, the handle button 5014) corresponding to the model image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated during the valid period when the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed. Even so, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output may be performed according to the operation reception.

That is, during the valid period of this example, the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, so that the player operates in a hurry, and as a result, the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed. Since it is assumed that there is a high possibility of operating the operation receiver, even if the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated, unlike the case shown in FIG. 246, the display and operation after the operation are performed. It is desirable to output the after-sound in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Examples of the post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case include a display and sound output such as "Push the handle instead of the handle button!". Therefore, even if the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed in response to the operation, the valid period is terminated or the set time is set. It is desirable not to reset the image, and to continue the dynamic display of the patterned image TMG without stopping it. When the handle portion 5012 is operated within the continuous valid period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are performed accordingly (see FIG. 248 (h)). In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated (for example, "the handle part, not the handle button". It goes without saying that the content is different from the content such as "Push in!"). However, "Within the valid period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the button image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, and the pattern image TMG that is dynamically displayed is supported. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output when the operation receiving unit (handle part 5012) is operated (for example, "Congratulations!") "And" Button image that is not dynamically displayed within the valid period. After the operation receiving part (handle button 5014) corresponding to the BMG is operated, the display after the operation when the operation receiving part (handle 5012) corresponding to the pattern image TMG that is dynamically displayed is further operated. It is desirable that the post-operation sound output (for example, "I'm glad I was in time, congratulations!") Is executed as different contents from each other in order to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 248 (e) shows an example of an image that appears in the effect display device 1600 when the operation reception is not performed within the time (set time) set for the valid period related to this example.

That is, in the valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIGS. 247 (d) and (e)), the operation is accepted for the handle portion 5012 within the valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when it was done are not executed (automatic reception effect functions).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed in the integrated image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as another image. Therefore, on the player side, Even if there is an intention to operate it, it may not be possible to operate it and the valid period may end, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in this example, after the valid period ends without any operation by the player, while the specific conditions (for example, the symbol stop or not reached 10 seconds before the symbol stop) are not satisfied. , The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (here, the handle portion 5012) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the valid period, and when the operation for the operation means is accepted, this Based on the above, the above validity period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the valid period is generated from the end of the valid period.

According to such a configuration, even when the valid period ends as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the operation by the player is shown in FIG. 248 (h). It becomes possible to generate an operation reception for outputting a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation (special validity period) shown in FIG. 248 (e), when the player operates the handle portion 5012, the validity period starts based on the fact that the operation is accepted. (Fig. 248 (f), (g)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 247 (b) to (d), FIGS. 248 (e), and (g). Therefore, even if the operation reception is performed within the valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed in the above-described manner (FIG. 248 (h). reference).

When the operation is accepted in the situation (special validity period) shown in FIG. 248 (e), the images shown in FIGS. 248 (f) and 248 (g) (FIGS. 247 (b) and (g)) are displayed after the operation. The same as the image shown in c)) will appear in sequence. Such an image is an image display that is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the valid period (FIGS. 247 (b) to (d), FIGS. 247 (f), (g), etc.). Is different. Further, the post-operation sound output executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 248 (e) is also the valid period (FIGS. 247 (b) to (d) and FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation in 248 (f), (g), etc.).

Since the specific image TG is not displayed during the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the precursor effect (dynamic display by the specific display TH3) is not necessarily performed when the valid period is generated. May be good. For example, when the predetermined condition for allowing the operation reception regarding the predetermined post-operation display (predetermined post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when the predetermined timing arrives), the situation shown in FIG. 247 (c) appears. After that, the display may be advanced in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG are displayed as one image (composite image HMG), but these images are displayed as separate images. It may be displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the "button image BMG" and the "pattern image TMG" are displayed as one image (composite image HMG) including both of the images. The "composite image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated image IG" integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the periphery thereof. However, the "button image BMG" and the "pattern image TMG" are displayed as separate images, and at least one of the images is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery thereof. It may be displayed as an image. For example, if the "pattern image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and the "button image BMG" is displayed as a single separate image, the "pattern image" is displayed. Although both "TMG" and "button image BMG" are displayed at the same time, "pattern image TMG" can be made more prominent, and operations corresponding to "pattern image TMG" can be performed. It becomes possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving portion (handle portion 5012) should be operated. At this time, the "pattern image TMG" in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed, while the "button image BMG" displayed as a single image is not dynamically displayed. The same applies to configurations and other examples.

Further, during the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 246, both the button image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed, but the image on the side that gives the operation opportunity (here, the pattern). Only the image TMG) may be displayed.

Further, it is desirable that the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 is generated assuming that a set time longer than the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 246 is set. In this case, the mode in which the reciprocating image (here, the pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 246 (speed of reciprocating motion, etc.) is shown in FIGS. 247 and 248. It is desirable that the mode (in this case, the pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed (such as the speed of reciprocating motion) within the indicated valid period (operation reception effect). According to such a configuration, even when the gauge image GG is not displayed, it is possible to have a margin by checking "the state of the dynamic display of the image" based on the case where the gauge image GG is displayed. You will be prompted to operate.

In the example shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be an image of "treasure", and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving unit corresponding to the image that is not dynamically displayed is referred to as the "first operation receiving unit", the operation receiving unit that is dynamically displayed in the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248. The operation receiving unit corresponding to the image may be the "first operation receiving unit". However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 246, when the dynamically displayed operation receiving unit is referred to as the "second operation receiving unit", in the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the dynamically displayed image is not displayed. It is desirable that the operation receiving unit corresponding to the above is a "third operation receiving unit" different from the "second operation receiving unit". According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to generate two types of operation reception effects in such a manner that the display relations related to the three operation targets (operation receiving units) slide. , You will be able to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not necessarily have to occur during the execution period of the symbol variation. For example, it may be a period generated by using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of the symbol change, or a "period during which the big hit game is not executed, a period before the big hit game is started, or the like". It may occur in.

Further, in the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the decorative symbol SZ that has been displayed up to that point is hidden as in the valid period in the examples shown in FIGS. 240 to 243. Alternatively, it may be made difficult to see, so that it is easy to notice that the gauge image is not displayed in a special effect state.

As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 246 (c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods having different generation conditions may be prepared. In this case, it is not necessary to make the display progress shown in FIG. 246 in all of those valid periods, and it is sufficient that the display progress shown in FIG. 246 is made in at least one valid period.

As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 247 (c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods having different generation conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not have to be made during all of these valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 may be made during at least one valid period.

In the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, unlike the case of the valid period shown in FIG. 246, a plurality of modes (colors, etc.) cannot be displayed as a simulated image, and one It may be made displayable only in an aspect.

The validity period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is not displayed can be generated only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014, and the operation opportunity is given to the other. When it is given, a valid period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is displayed may occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the valid period (valid period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241) in which the integrated image in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is displayed, and the gauge image The valid period (valid period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248) in which the integrated image in which the display target area of the GG is not provided is displayed can be generated as one of the plurality of types of valid periods. There is. In this regard, during these valid periods (FIGS. 239 to 241 and 247 and 248), when the operation by the player is not accepted in order to maintain a favorable feeling of tension, or when the operation is accepted. During the valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238 and 246), the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced with the passage of time without performing the same post-operation effect (without the automatic button function). In order to maintain it suitably, it is desirable that when the operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is performed (with an automatic button function).

In this regard, the effective period in which the integrated image is displayed (the effective period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and the integrated area in which the display target area of the gauge image GG is not provided are not provided in the first place. When an operation is accepted for an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the valid period (valid period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248) in which the image is displayed, a change (display) corresponding to the operation reception is made. It is desirable that the integrated image is not hidden but displayed at the time when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as the change and the light emission of the lamp, is started. It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated image be continued. This makes it possible to make people feel uneasy about whether the production reception was done properly while the gauge image does not suggest the remaining time, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained more appropriately. Become so.

In this case, it should be noted that the display mode (for example, color) of the simulated image before and after the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) according to the operation reception occurs. (Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to see the image due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one change caused by a post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs. On the other hand, within the valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238 and 246) in which the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced with the passage of time, the change (display change or display change) according to the operation reception by the operation by the player. , At least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as lamp emission), the integrated image (both the image and the gauge image) in the state where the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs. ) May be hidden, or as in the case described above, changes (display changes, lamp emission, etc.) according to the operation reception may be made while the integrated image is displayed without being hidden. It may be generated.

However, even during the valid period in which "the display area of the specific image is not displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time" in this way, the modeled image that imitates the operating means to be operated is displayed. It is desirable to display the image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the gauge image does not suggest the remaining time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time that the operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image by the simulated image has progressed. It is possible, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

[Integrated image, pre-validation effect, image disappearance effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected effects (such as notice effects) will be executed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variation effect by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the above decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description, the movement of the movable body, etc. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit has been obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the fluctuation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the design production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to generate an acceptable acceptance state (validity period).

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, the production reception is allowed when the symbol production based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. It is possible to generate an acceptable state of acceptance (validity period). However, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance allowance state (validity period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of the result obtained as the advance notice production judgment. May also be provided. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice production judgment. It is desirable not to do so, or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is predetermined for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only the post-operation effect that causes the change (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the reception is accepted. The permissible state (validity period) itself has a poor effectability, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) in which the operation opportunity is given occurs, the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given is assigned. By displaying the imitated image as an integrated image (see FIG. 232) integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the imitated image, it is possible to enjoy the game until the post-operation effect is executed. I try to suppress the decline. For such an integrated image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs in the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable that it is displayed in both the reception effect (valid period), and it is desirable that it is displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high-expectation suppression reception effect. Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, 207 to 231), the display mode of the illustrated image is replaced with any of the integrated images described below. It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

The "integrated image" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image, A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. Further, as the "integrated image", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different expectations are prepared, and the same is true in that the image is displayed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception allowable state occurs, a reception allowable sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted is performed. It is designed to be output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate it. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , A sound that has already been accepted (valid period).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, a plurality of acceptance allowance states including the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance allowance state are prepared as the acceptance allowance state (valid period). There is. Here, the first acceptance allowable state can occur when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), but the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). Of these, an effective period that cannot occur in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (or any fluctuation pattern among low-expected fluctuation patterns) (based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied in the production judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). Validity period). Further, in the second acceptance allowable state, a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). The valid period (or the second condition different from the first condition in the production judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be generated in any case (or at least one of those fluctuation patterns) The validity period that occurs based on the establishment).

The "integrated image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first reception allowable state and the second reception allowable state. Here, since it is assumed that the first reception allowable state and the second reception allowable state both occur as a reception allowable state in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410). The "integrated image" displayed in the first acceptance allowed state and the second acceptance allowed state is an image that imitates the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the plurality of modes prepared as the "integrated image", the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) is the first reception allowable state and the second reception allowable state. Of these, it is possible to display only in the first reception allowable state, and in the second reception allowable state, it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). ing. In the first acceptance allowable state, it is determined which of the plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) including the special mode is to display the "integrated image" based on the result of the jackpot judgment. This is done, and the "integrated image" is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of this determination. Regarding which of the plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)) not including the special mode is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination even in the second reception allowable state, the "integrated image" is displayed. The determination may be performed, and the "integrated image" may be displayed in an manner according to the result of the determination.

In such a configuration, in the first acceptance allowable state, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output, and in the second acceptance allowable state, the second acceptance allowable sound is output. One type of reception allowable sound (third reception allowable sound) is output. Here, the first permissible sound and the third permissible sound for reception are output as sound effects such as "Pickin!", And may be output as the same sound or different from each other. It may be output as sound. On the other hand, the second allowable sound is output as a message sound such as "press!". However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and if it is a sound different from the first permissible sound and is output over a different output time, two types of acceptance permissible sounds. It is possible for the player to preferably recognize that the sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) are being output.

Here, it has been described above that the "integrated image" can be displayed even in a mode different from the special mode (a mode having a relatively low expectation) in the first reception allowable state. Even in this case, two types of permissible reception sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) are output. That is, in this case, when the reception permissible state occurs (displays the integrated image), if only one type of reception permissible sound is output, the special mode is not displayed as the "integrated image", and it is regarded as a special mode. Will be displayed in different modes, but when two types of acceptable reception sounds are output, the special mode is displayed as an "integrated image" and the mode different from the special mode is displayed. There will be.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated image" is displayed in a special mode based on which mode the reception permissible sound is output, and the reception permissible sound. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when a condition occurs.

Further, when the "integrated image" is displayed in the first reception allowable state or the second reception allowable state, the pre-effect (precursor effect) is executed prior to this, and the integrated image is executed. Is displayed (displayed in a state where it is difficult to see) at least a part of the "image related to the pre-effect" in a state where such a pre-effect is executed. Then, in the integrated image, the portion overlapping the "pre-effect image" is gradually reduced by gradually reducing the image, or the transmittance of the "pre-effect image" is gradually reduced. By increasing the height and finally hiding it, the mode (overall) is exposed (displayed in an easily visible state) after the occurrence of the acceptance acceptance state. Such a precursor effect (precursor effect) is, for example, an effect shown in FIGS. 235 (b) and (c), FIGS. 237 (c) to (f), and is executed in the same manner. You may try to do it.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start the output at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but starts the output later than this. ing. However, at the time when the output of the first permissible sound is started in advance, it is said that "the integrated image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize the mode". Of course, even when the output of the second allowable sound is delayed, at least a part of the integrated image is displayed in a state in which the image related to the pre-effect (precursor effect) is overlapped from the front side. This makes it difficult to see. The acceptance allowable state (valid period) is generated when the execution of the precursor effect (precursor effect) is started or during the execution period, and at least when the output of the second allowable sound is started. It is in a state where it has already occurred, or it is generated when the output starts.

According to such a configuration, when there is at least a situation such as "the first permissible sound is output and the second permissible sound is not output", two types of acceptance permissible sounds (the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound). The first acceptance allowable state in which the second allowable sound is output occurs (or has occurred), or the second acceptance allowable state in which only one type of acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output occurs (). Or it is difficult to recognize whether it is occurring). However, when a situation such as "the output of the second permissible sound is started after the first permissible sound is output" appears, two types of acceptance permissible sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptance acceptance state to be performed has occurred, and that the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode.

That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize in which mode the integrated image is displayed (or whether it is displayed).
-When shifting from "a state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (first acceptance permissible state). When,
-When there is no transition from "a state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (second acceptance permissible state). And can occur, and it becomes possible to suggest "the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode" by the mode of "transition related to the output of the reception allowable sound". Therefore, while in the "state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output", before the image related to the pre-effect (precursor effect) is hidden, It becomes possible to make people interested in whether or not the output of the second permissible sound is started, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. As a result, if the second allowable sound is output while the image related to the precursor effect (precursor effect) is displayed, the integrated image having a special aspect is displayed (displayed). It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation, and it becomes possible to provide a directing effect such that the integrated image is gradually exposed in such a sense of expectation.

As described above, even at the time when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a part of the integrated image is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "image related to the pre-production". Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode, it is not easy to recognize at least in which mode the integrated image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, when the output of the second permissible sound is started, the first permissible sound may maintain the output state, or the first permissible sound may end the output state. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third reception allowable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance allowable state) and the second condition (second reception allowable state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated image is displayed without outputting any reception allowable sound (first allowable sound or second allowable sound), and the operating means (here, here) while the integrated image is displayed. , When the operation is accepted for the operation button 410), the display may change or the output sound after the operation may be generated as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptance allowed state or the second acceptance allowed state. Good. In this case, the display change and the content of the output sound after the operation may be different depending on the type of the reception allowable state (first reception allowable state, second reception allowable state, third reception allowable state).

That is, by displaying the integrated image without outputting any reception allowable sound, it becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp when the operation reception is permitted, which is related to the operation. You will be able to improve the taste of games. Therefore, in adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated image is displayed in any of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 239 to 243. It is desirable to. According to such a configuration, a "gauge stop period" in which the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined value (0) and is integrated with the gauge image GG left. Since the image will be hidden, it will be possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension when the reception acceptance state is occurring, and it will be more preferable to improve the game entertainment related to the operation. You will be able to plan.

Alternatively, when the integrated image is displayed without outputting any permissible reception sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated image and the display target area is not even provided. May be good. Such a display method is as described above with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248, although the operation target is different. For example, "The display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the gauge image GG is displayed. The display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated image, and the same image (peripheral decoration image) as when the target area is displayed is intentionally displayed. It can be applied in the same way to the technical idea such as "to do so". Even with such a configuration, it becomes possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension about how much time is left, and it is possible to more preferably improve the game entertainment related to the operation. become able to.

Further, even in the reception allowable state according to this example, there are cases where operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and cases where a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is permitted. ) Is output in the suppressed mode, or the operation reception may be permitted while the output is not output. The phrase "outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) in a suppressed mode" in this example means that the case of outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) at a volume of "0" (silence output) is also included. is there. The “non-output state” means, for example, a case where the channel is not even assigned.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception allowable state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and a specific type of production There are a plurality of reception allowable states in which operation reception is permitted while the sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or in the non-output state. In the "allowable state" and "third reception allowable state", operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. It is included as one of the states, and the above-mentioned "second reception allowable state" is an operation reception in which a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode. It is included as one of the permissible acceptance conditions.

According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction (directed sound of a specific type) is suppressed or turned into a non-output state, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode. Since you will be able to do it, you can enjoy the production by giving more concentration while the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or in the non-output state while avoiding the situation where the production is poor. You will be able to do it.

It should be noted that "a reception allowable state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state" is output in a non-suppressed mode. A specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) may be output in a suppressed mode, or may be in a non-output state, and then a reception allowable state may be generated, or a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) may be generated. While the BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode, the reception allowable state is generated, and while the reception allowable state is generated (or at the same time), the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is suppressed in the suppressed mode. It may be the output of, or it may be in the non-output state. In short, it is sufficient that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state.

Further, even in the reception allowable state according to this example, when the operation is not detected within the set time in which the operation reception is permitted, the operation is executed in the automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In some cases, the operation is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, among the acceptance allowance states, the acceptance allowance state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed is as described above.
-It does not mean that the display after operation or the sound output after operation is output regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the valid period only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set.
-It means that the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the valid period regardless of the effect state (the state of the effect setting). In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special production state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of production state" as the production state. In addition, if the reception allowance state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed occurs when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set, is the automatic reception enabled? Either of them may be adopted (for example, "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the production state", or "when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set". It may be said that "automatic reception is enabled only if"), and it has nothing to do with the configuration related to the technical features described here.

More specifically, during the demo screen (the period during which the symbol change is not executed), if settings related to the game are possible, regardless of which of these settings is selected, among the acceptance acceptance states, " The automatic reception is always enabled in the reception acceptance state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Then, among those settings, at least when it is in a specific setting condition, the reception allowable state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the reception allowable state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed are different from each other. It is possible to occur from the beginning. The settings related to the game include settings such as volume, brightness, and probability of appearance of the effect in addition to the special effect state (automatic reception mode), and the settings related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) are not necessarily installed. It does not have to be a thing. When the setting related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not set in the "specific setting condition".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the acceptance allowance state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the "non-automatic reception mode" are executed at least when a specific setting condition is met. A plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared for each, but the above-mentioned "first acceptance allowance state" is included as one of the acceptance allowance states in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed. The above-mentioned "second reception allowable state" and "third reception allowable state" are included as one of the reception allowable states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed.

According to such a configuration, the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the game entertainment may be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). In the state, the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate when the integrated image is displayed in a special mode with high expectations (a mode in which the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol is higher than in other modes), the post-operation effect is produced. (At least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) can be generated, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. Will be able to. On the other hand, there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (there is a possibility that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). Since the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed in the reception acceptance state, this is suitable for the tension when the operation reception is permitted while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest when the operation is forgotten. Will be able to maintain.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the reception allowable sound is output overlaps with the reception allowable state, and the operation is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. When this is done, the output state of the reception allowable sound can be terminated halfway (the state can be made inaudible) based on the fact that the operation has been accepted.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle is the timing at which the operation by the player is detected (operation reception), and the "operation" can be easily recognized. It will be possible to suppress anxiety about whether the reception is being done or the operation is not being accepted yet.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the reception allowable sound is output overlaps with the reception allowable state, but when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. Even if the operation is accepted, the output state of the reception allowable sound may be maintained without being able to be terminated in the middle (it may be made inaudible) based on the operation being accepted. I have to. As will be described later, there are a plurality of reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle and a reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated in the middle. Is included as one of the acceptance allowance states in which the acceptance allowance sound is terminated in the middle, and the above-mentioned "second acceptance allowance state" is the acceptance allowance state in which the acceptance allowance sound is not terminated in the middle. It is included as one of them.

According to such a configuration, the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the game entertainment may be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). In the state, if the operation reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is being output, this will be terminated in the middle. Therefore, when the integrated image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol is higher than in other modes), "Is the operation accepted? You can concentrate on post-operation production such as post-operation display, post-operation output sound, change in light emission by lamps, and production operation by movable decorations, without making you feel uneasy about "Is it in a state where it is not done?" It will be possible to suppress the decline in the interest in games. On the other hand, in the second reception allowable state where there is no possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility that the game entertainment is significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten), the reception is accepted. Even if the operation reception is done while the permissible sound is being output, it is not terminated in the middle, so while suppressing the decline in the game interest, this is about the tension when operating. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation reception is permitted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state, When the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)), the integrated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). I try to have some time.

More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the reception allowable state in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or in the non-output state. In addition to the above-mentioned first acceptance allowance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied, at least the fourth acceptance allowance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied is included, and the first acceptance allowance state is integrated. When the image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) and when the integrated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). However, in the fourth reception allowable state, the integrated image is not displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)), and is different from the special mode (FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)). It is displayed only by c)). Then, in the first reception permissible state, when the operation reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permissible sound is terminated halfway based on the operation reception (non-audible). On the other hand, in the fourth reception allowable state, when the operation reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception allowable sound is set in the middle based on the operation reception. I try not to end it (do not make it inaudible).

According to such a configuration, a reception allowable state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, and the reception is performed. When the integrated image is displayed in a special mode in the permissible state, the reception permissible sound is terminated in the middle based on the operation reception. On the other hand, a reception permissible state occurs in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or an operation reception is permitted in a non-output state, and the reception permissible state is integrated. When the simulated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, the reception allowable sound may be terminated in the middle or the reception allowable sound may be maintained without being terminated in the middle based on the operation reception. Will be.

That is, in this case, in the reception allowable state where the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or in the non-output state, the integrated image is a special mode. Is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which it is unlikely that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). Since the permissible sound may be maintained without being terminated in the middle, it may be because the operation reception is not performed when the reception permissible sound is not terminated in the middle. Although it has been done, it becomes possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the reason is that the fourth reception acceptance state has occurred, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest and maintain a good sense of tension. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first reception allowable state occurs, a wide area using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is used prior to this. The pre-type pre-effect is started to be executed, and when the above-mentioned second acceptance acceptance state occurs, prior to this, the narrow-area type pre-effect that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. It is supposed to be done. Then, the image of the operation receiving unit (here, the integrated image) is displayed in both the period in which the wide area type pre-effect is executed and the period in which the first acceptance allowable state is generated. However, the period in which the wide area type pre-effect is executed and the period in which the first acceptance allowance state is generated are displayed in different modes from each other.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated image (image) displayed during the period when the wide area type pre-effect is executed and the integrated image (image) displayed during the period when the first acceptance acceptance state occurs. In the integrated image (image) to be displayed, although the same operation receiving unit (operation button 410) is imitated, it is displayed based on different image data. As a result, not only the color scheme but also the contour shape itself is displayed as different.

According to such a configuration, when performing a wide area type pre-production, the degree of freedom is increased without being caught in the form (image data) of the integrated image (image) displayed in the first reception allowable state. Since it becomes possible to display an integrated image (image) with a high independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the color rendering when performing a pre-effect (wide area type pre-effect) in a wider range. Will be. It is clear that such effects cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on a single image data.

In addition, in the reception allowance state in which the wide area type pre-effect is executed, the effect at the time of a big hit that appears only when a big hit is obtained as a post-operation effect than in the reception allowance state in which the narrow area type pre-effect is executed. The rate at which aspects appear is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to the wide area type pre-effect (the wide area type pre-effect is executed), and the acceptance allowance states are prepared. As one, a first reception allowable state and a third reception allowable state are prepared respectively. In addition, a plurality of reception allowance states are prepared as reception allowance states corresponding to the narrow area type pre-effect (the narrow area type pre-effect is executed), and the second reception allowance state is one of the reception allowance states. A state and a fourth reception allowable state are prepared respectively.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception allowable state, the operation is performed while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state. As mentioned above, reception can be performed, and in the second reception allowable state, operation reception can be performed while a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is set to the non-suppressed mode. That's right. That is, when a narrow-range type pre-effect that is relatively inferior in color rendering index is performed, the operation reception is performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is not in the suppressed mode but in the non-suppressed mode. Since it can be done (second reception permissible state), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide-area type pre-production, which is relatively superior in color rendering, is not performed. On the other hand, if a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or an operation can be accepted while it is in a non-output state, a wide area type that is relatively superior in effectability. Since the pre-production is performed (first reception allowable state), the game is due to the fact that the operation reception is not performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific setting condition (one effect state) is met, the operation is not detected within the set time in which the operation reception is permitted in the first reception allowable state. When, the operation is executed in the automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception allowable state, the operation is detected within the set time in which the operation reception is permitted. As described above, when the operation is not performed, the operation is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception permissible state in which the wide area type pre-production is performed, there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered when the operation is forgotten due to the high performance, but the automatic reception mode is used. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when the operation is forgotten. On the other hand, in the second reception allowable state in which the narrow area type pre-effect is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that the operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the production is firmly performed. Only those who are paying attention and noticed that the operation reception will be allowed can enjoy the post-operation production such as the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound. You will be able to maintain it.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the operation reception is permitted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state. Is that at least the first acceptance allowable state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance allow state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied are included. As described above. In this regard, in the fourth reception allowable state, the operation reception can be performed while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the state, the operation can be accepted while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in the non-output state. I have to. Further, when the fourth reception permissible state occurs, prior to this, the narrow area type pre-effect using less than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. That is, when a narrow-range type pre-effect that is relatively inferior in color rendering index is performed, the degree of suppression is lowered even if a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is set to the suppression mode. (Fourth reception permissible state), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide area type pre-production, which is relatively superior in color rendering, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. In this case (first reception allowed state), the wide-area pre-production, which is relatively superior in color rendering, is performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is not low. It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation reception is performed by the player while the first reception allowable state occurs and the image (integrated image) is displayed, the operation reception is performed. The corresponding post-operation effect (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is started, and the image (integrated image) is started. When hiding an image), a wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance effect) using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, effect display device 1600) is executed. When the operation reception is performed by the player while the second reception acceptance state is generated and the image (integrated image) is displayed, the post-operation effect (effect display device) corresponding to the operation reception is performed. When the display change in 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) are started to be executed, and the image (integrated image) is hidden. A narrow area type extinction effect (narrow area type extinction effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed.

Here, the extinction effect (wide-area extinction effect, narrow-area extinction effect) is a form in which a part or the whole of the displayed image (integrated image) is hard to see or cannot be seen. It means "an image different from the image" or "display effect on the image" that is displayed. As such an extinction effect (disappearance effect), for example, it may be executed as an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the image (integrated image) is displayed. , The image (integrated image) and the image (disappearing effect) are displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the image (integrated image) in the video is the image (disappearing). It may be an effect that makes it difficult to see, or it is executed by changing the display mode of the image (integrated image) itself (display effect). It may be. However, as such an extinction effect, when hiding the image (integrated image) in order to suggest the degree of expectation or to improve the game interest, what is this? Needless to say, it is more desirable to display it as a separate image.

In addition, "when hiding the image (integrated image) ... the disappearance effect is executed" means "to hide the image (integrated image) ..." The disappearance effect may be executed, or the transparency of the image itself is high while the image (integrated image) is hidden (integrated image). It may be "... the disappearance effect is executed" or "the disappearance effect is executed after hiding the image (integrated image)". , It is a meaning including any of these aspects. In addition, when the image (integrated image) is hidden, the fact that the transmittance of the image itself increases in the process of hiding the image itself is described as "when the image (integrated image) is hidden". ... The disappearance effect is executed. "

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception by the player is started to be executed and the image is hidden, the wide area disappearance effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there are cases where the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed and cases where the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed, it becomes possible to enhance the effectability until the time when the image (integrated image) disappears.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such an extinction effect (image at the time of extinction) is executed, the narrow area type extinction effect (image at the time of extinction of the narrow area) is the narrow area type extinction effect (narrow). The background image that was displayed before the area type disappearance image) is displayed until the narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type disappearance image) is hidden, or after the operation. While (display after operation and output sound after operation) is being executed, it is displayed (maintained) without being changed. On the other hand, in the wide area type extinction effect (wide area type extinction image), the wide area type extinction effect (wide area type extinction time image) was displayed before being displayed based on the operation reception by the player. The background image is different from the background until the wide area disappearance effect (image at the time of wide area disappearance) is hidden or while the post-operation effect (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is executed. It is supposed to be changed to an image.

That is, when the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is executed, not only the image (integrated image) but also at least a part of the background image is the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance). Since it will be difficult to see due to the image), the background image is changed (replaced) with a different background image aiming at the timing when such a wide area disappearance effect (image at the time of wide area disappearance) is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a smooth production transition (transition to a new production phase) using the button production. For example, the wide area type extinction effect (wide area type extinction image) is an image displayed on a layer on which the image (integrated image) is displayed and another layer before the layer on which the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the image (integrated image), the background image, and the image (disappearing effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and one of the images (integrated image) in the moving image. A part or the whole or a part or the whole of the background image may be expressed as a state in which the image (disappearance effect) makes it difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the narrow area type extinction effect (narrow area type extinction image) is executed, while the narrow area type extinction effect (narrow area type extinction image) is hidden or after the operation. Since the background image is not changed while the effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is being executed, the effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, as a player, in addition to the post-operation effect, he is interested in whether the wide area type extinction effect (wide area type extinction image) or the narrow area type extinction effect (narrow area type extinction image) is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment related to the image from the time when the image (integrated image) is displayed until it is hidden.

In addition, when the wide area type extinction effect (wide area type extinction image) is displayed, a big hit can be obtained as a post-operation effect than when the narrow area type extinction effect (narrow area type extinction image) is displayed. The rate at which the production mode at the time of a big hit, which appears only when the player is playing, appears is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states (where the wide area type extinction effect is executed) corresponding to the wide area type extinction effect (image at the time of wide area type extinction). As one of these reception permissible states, a first reception permissible state and a third reception permissible state are prepared, respectively. In addition, as a reception allowance state corresponding to the narrow area type extinction effect (image at the time of narrow area type extinction) (the narrow area type extinction effect is executed), a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared, and these acceptance allowance states are prepared. As one of the above, a second reception allowable state and a fourth reception allowable state are prepared.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception allowable state, a game in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. The operation can be accepted by the player, and the second acceptance allowed state allows the player to accept the operation while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppressed mode. It is as described above. That is, when a narrow-range type extinction effect that is relatively inferior in color rendering index is performed, it depends on the player while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is set to the non-suppressed mode without being set to the suppressed mode. Since the operation reception can be performed (second reception allowable state), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide area type extinction effect, which is relatively superior in color rendering, is not performed. On the other hand, if the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state, the effect is relatively high. Since the superior wide-area extinction effect is performed (first reception allowable state), the operation reception by the player while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in the non-suppressed mode is accepted. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the taste of games due to the fact that it was not done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific setting condition (one effect state) is met, in the first reception allowable state, the operation is detected within the set time in which the operation reception by the player is permitted. When not, the operation is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second reception allowable state, the operation reception by the player is allowed within the set time. As described above, when the operation is not detected in, the operation is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception allowable state where the wide area type extinction effect is performed, there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered when the operation is forgotten due to its high color rendering index, but it is executed in the above automatic reception mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when the operation is forgotten. That is, in this case, even if the operation reception is not performed by the player and the automatic reception functions, the wide area disappearance effect is executed in the same manner as when the operation reception is performed by the player. On the other hand, in the second reception allowance state in which the narrow area type extinction effect is performed, since the execution is performed in the above non-automatic reception mode, the set time elapses without any operation by the player (second reception allowance). When the state is completed), the imitation image is displayed without any post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one effect operation by the movable decorative body). It will be hidden. In this regard, in the second reception allowable state, the narrow range type disappearance effect is executed even when the image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not executed, which causes forgetting to operate. As a result, the deterioration of the game entertainment when the effect is not executed after the operation is suppressed. At this time, the narrow area type extinction effect may be executed in the same mode (same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception allowable state according to this example, the narrow area type disappearance effect that appears when the operation reception is performed and the post-operation effect is executed, and the case where the operation reception is not performed and the post-operation effect is not executed. The mode (image) different from that of the narrow-range extinction effect that appears in is made to appear.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the reception is allowed to be operated by the player while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state. The permissible state includes at least the first acceptance permissible state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance permissible state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. That is as described above. Then, in the fourth reception allowable state, the player can accept the operation while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the reception allowable state, the operation by the player while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in the non-output state. It was also mentioned above that the reception can be done. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation reception is performed by the player in the above-mentioned fourth reception allowable state, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed instead of the wide area type disappearance effect. .. That is, when a narrow-range type extinction effect that is relatively inferior in color rendering index is performed, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is set to a suppression mode prior to that, but the degree of suppression is lowered. Therefore (the fourth reception allowable state), it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide-area extinction effect, which is relatively superior in color rendering, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. In this case (first acceptance allowed state), the wide-area extinction effect, which is relatively superior in color rendering, is performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is not low. It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment.

FIG. 249 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 251 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a second reception allowable state occurs.

Now, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 251 (a)). ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, an effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ second variation pattern ”itself. It will be.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern (when the second condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU1511a is shown in FIG. 249 (b). In addition, when the timing tB3 when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives, the operation acceptance regarding the effect after the second operation is permitted. (Corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (d)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the second acceptance allowable state (validity period),
-The operation reception is performed while the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of production sound)" corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern, for example, the BGM reproduction sound during normal fluctuation maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. The permissible "non-suppressed reception permissible state (see FIGS. 249 (a) and (b))", and-the operation was not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) at which the operation reception is permissible. In this case, the "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 249 (h))" that does not generate the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) corresponding to the second reception allowable state.
It is designed to be generated as a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, the set time (valid period) in which the operation reception is permitted without the effect of suggesting the occurrence of the reception acceptance state by the "BGM reproduction sound" being suppressed. ) Is suddenly set (unsuppressed reception effect), so that the player is surprised by the fact that the start of movement when trying to operate is likely to be delayed. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time is terminated without any post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). By making people aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to generate the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect), the tension can be appropriately maintained.

However, such a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" is performed after the operation (here, the second post-operation effect) in a manner that appears only at the time of a big hit than the "suppress / automatic reception effect" described later. Even though the ratio (which may be 0% or 100%) is low, if the player's intention is such that the post-operation effect does not occur frequently, the game interest may decline. I am concerned. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 249 (b), (e), and (i), the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) at which the operation reception is allowed occurs. When the timing tB2 arrives a little earlier, the output of the "acceptable sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)"), and the timing within the set time. Even if the operation is accepted at tB3a, the output state is maintained in a form straddling this. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 in which the setting time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second reception allowable state is set. It is difficult to frequently notice that the reception is accepted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. It will be expected. However, the "acceptable sound for reception (here, the first permissible sound)" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) is generated. For example, the timing at which the set time is generated. It may be generated according to the generation timing of tB3.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptance allowable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" And "press!" A second permissible sound that is output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 249 (f) and 249 (j), in the second reception allowable state, the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. Is output, and even due to the output limitation on the "acceptable sound for reception", a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of the movement when the player tries to operate the sound.

By the way, in the second reception allowable state, as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time or the execution as a non-automatic reception mode, the operation means (here, the operation) from the time when the operation reception is not permitted. By repeatedly hitting the button 410), it is considered that some players may try not to miss the opportunity to generate the effect after the operation. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect is started immediately after the operation reception is permitted, the started effect is "the one performed in response to the operation reception (post-operation effect)". It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere notice effect that has nothing to do with the operation reception", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 249 (particularly, FIG. 249 (e)), in the second reception allowable state, the “reception allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the production reception is performed at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is terminated, while the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway and is used as the first allowable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing when the output ends (the same timing tB3c (FIGS. 249 (e) and (i)) as when there was no operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether the sound is "produced after the operation (post-operation effect)" or "automatically generated as an effect unrelated to the operation reception". Will be.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 249, when the effect reception is performed within the set time of the second reception allowable state (timing tB3a in the figure), the effect display device is used as a post-operation effect according to the operation reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) of the 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) of the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 249 (d)). See). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tB4, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output sound (effect sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output if the timing tB4 has not been completed. It is required to maintain the state.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB2 before the timing tB3 in which the set time of the second reception allowable state is set arrives, the operation means targeted for operation in the effect display device 1600. An image of the above is displayed, and a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 in which the setting time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second reception allowable state is set. It is difficult to frequently notice that the reception is accepted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. It will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the time when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is started to be output, but it is not limited to this, and either one is started earlier. You may do it. Alternatively, only one of the image and the reception allowable sound (for example, only the image) may be started before the timing tB3.

Further, as described above, the simulated image displayed when the second reception allowable state occurs (the image of the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given) is the peripheral edge that decorates the peripheral edge of the simulated image. It is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the decorative image. This "integrated image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, a gauge image (predetermined) is included in the peripheral decoration image. Image) A display target area (section image KG) of GG is provided. Further, as the "integrated image IG", a plurality of modes having different expectations (see FIG. 232) are prepared, and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, among the plurality of modes prepared as the "integrated image" in the second reception allowable state, the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) is drawn (selected). ) Is not included, and only aspects different from the special aspect (for example, the normal aspect shown in FIG. 232 (a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the integrated image IGa having the lowest expectation is displayed as the integrated image IG.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 249 (c) to 249 (f), it is assumed that the timing tB3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated image is displayed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and a movable decorative body. As at least one of the effect operations), the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are started, respectively (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (f)").

However, as shown in FIGS. 249 (c) and 249 (d) and FIG. 251 (f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated image IG is not displayed at the time when the post-operation effect is started. It is not set to, and the display state is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tB3a), there is no change caused by the integrated image IG (specific layer), and a short time (timing tB3a) from there. Until the timing tB3b after the elapse of the predetermined time) arrives, the "display on the integrated image IG" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in FIG. 251, a conversation notice (may be a chance) by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes it difficult or invisible to see a part or the whole of the integrated image in the displayed state appears (“FIG. 251”). Corresponds to "the situation shown in (g)"). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the integrated image IG is displayed, or the integrated image IG and the image (disappearance effect). ) Is displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the video is expressed as being difficult to see due to the image KSE (disappearing effect). It may be as described above.

As shown in FIG. 249 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated image IG is hidden even when such an image KSE (disappearance effect) is started to be displayed. It is not set to, and the display state is maintained. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated image IG is displayed, the change caused by the integrated image IG is caused. However, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the extinction effect is displayed on the layer on the front side of the effect, the model image and the gauge image GG are difficult to see or cannot be seen.

That is, in this case, the image KSE of the extinction effect (the same applies to the image HSE of the wide-area extinction effect described later) is used for the purpose of making the image (integrated image IG) difficult to see or making it invisible. The image (integrated image IG) itself displayed on a specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) even though it is displayed on the predetermined layer. The display in the same mode as when the operation reception was permitted is maintained, and no change is made. Further, with respect to the gauge image GG, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced will be continued across the operation reception. As a result, even in the process of making the image (integrated image IG) difficult to see or making it invisible, the mode (at least a part) when the operation reception is permitted is visually recognized. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the time to be maintained as the state shown in FIG. 251 (f).

Then, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated image IG is terminated within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) in which the image KSE of the extinction effect is displayed (shown in FIG. 251 (i)). (Equivalent to the situation where the image is displayed), and thereafter, the disappearance effect (here, the narrow area type disappearance that uses less than half of the predetermined display area) when the integrated image IG is not displayed on the layer. The image KSE of the effect) will be displayed. The image KSE of such an extinction effect is hidden when a predetermined time elapses (timing tB3d) after the display is started (timing tB3b) (“FIG. 251 (FIG. 251)). Corresponds to "the situation shown in j)"). In this regard, regarding the timing tB3d to be hidden, the display change (here, the liquid crystal display in this case) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects is particularly large regardless of the timing when the operation is accepted. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the running period. That is, as will be described later, the disappearance effect image KSE and the integrated image IG are displayed on the layer in front of the image (conversation notice by the princess character) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 251 (g) to 251 (i), while the image KSE of the extinction effect is displayed, the image (conversation notice by the princess character) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is visually recognized. It's getting harder. The same applies to the wide area disappearance effect.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, first, the post-operation production is started, and at the time when the operation reception is performed, the integrated image IG is displayed in what manner. (Which aspect of FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), how much remaining time is suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) will be maintained in a state in which it can be grasped (“FIG. Corresponds to "the situation shown in 251 (f)"). After that, the display of the extinction effect by the image KSE in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600" and the integrated image IG in the post-operation effect is started. (Corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (g)"). As described above, the extinction effect includes a narrow-area extinction effect having a low color rendering index and a wide-area extinction effect having a low color rendering index, and is executed as a narrow-area extinction effect here. While the image KSE of such an extinction effect is displayed, the integrated image IG is hidden (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (i)"), and then the extinction effect is displayed. When the image KSE is hidden, the "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character)" in the post-operation effect is finally visible in a clear state ("" Corresponds to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (j)").

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect the integrated image IG was, then what kind of aspect appears as an extinction effect, and then. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what mode (here, which of a plurality of conversation notice modes with different expectations) appears as a post-operation effect, when the operation is accepted with such a variety of effects. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment of.

In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing tB3b or the extinction effect is used instead of the timing tB3a for the timing of starting the display of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timing tB3b to tB3d). However, also in this case, since the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started to be executed at the timing tB3a, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains the timing tB3a.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 249 (g) to 249 (j), it is assumed that the set time elapses (the second acceptance allowable state ends) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the second reception allowable state is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, if the set time elapses without the player performing the operation, the post-operation effect is not performed. The image (here, the integrated image IGa) is hidden.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 249 (b) and 249 (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception allowable state) is completed, The pachinko image on the specific layer (here, the integrated pachinko image IGa) is not hidden, and the display state that appeared when the reception allowed state was maintained is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation reception is no longer allowed, at that time (timing tB4), there is no change caused by the image (here, the integrated image IGa). Until the arrival of the timing tB4a after a short time (predetermined time) has passed since then, the "display on the image" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. There is. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area left even when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception allowable state) is completed, and the display area is displayed after the timing tB4. The display area is reduced in the form of "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the valid period (second acceptance allowable state) is terminated without any operation, the simulated image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes having different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether it was. In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to "0" after the expiration date, it is possible to encourage people to think "I was sorry" when the operation reception was not in time at the last minute. It is expected that the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed.

In this example, the valid period (second reception allowable state) is terminated without the operation reception, rather than the time from the timing tB3a when the operation reception was made until the image is hidden (invisible). The time from the timing tB4 until the image is hidden (invisible) is shortened.

Further, as described above, in the second reception allowable state, if the set time elapses without the operation by the player being detected, the post-operation effect is not executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 249 (g), when the image (here, the integrated image IGa) is hidden, the narrow range type disappearance effect is executed. While the narrow range type extinction effect is being executed, the image (here, the integrated image IGa) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the narrow area type extinction effect when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 249 (g)) is the narrow area type extinction effect when the post-operation effect is executed. (The execution is performed in a mode (image) different from that shown in FIG. 249 (c)).

According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether or not it was in time), it is necessary to properly understand it by confirming the mode of the narrow range type extinction effect. This makes it possible to avoid a decline in the interest in the game due to the inability to grasp whether or not the production is being performed after the operation. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the mode of the narrow-range type extinction effect (FIG. 249 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 249 (g)). )) It is desirable not to appear. However, for example, the narrow-range type extinction effect (FIG. 249 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is defined as "A (for example, a change in the image itself)" and "B (for example, what is the image itself)". If the two modes of "another image display)" are to be executed together, the narrow range type extinction effect (FIG. 249 (g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed is executed in "A". You may. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception was not performed when the mode of "B" does not appear in the narrow area type extinction effect, and the post-operation effect is performed. It is possible to avoid a decline in the entertainment interest of the game due to the inability to grasp whether or not it is in the game.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB1 before the timing tB3 in which the second acceptance allowable state occurs arrives, a narrow area type pre-effect using less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. It is supposed to be started (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (b)"). Then, within the period in which the image KTH related to such a narrow-range type pre-effect is displayed, first, the display of the imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image IGa) that imitates the operation receiving portion and the first permissible Each of the sound outputs is started (timing tB2, which corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)"). At the time when the display of the image (here, the integrated image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the image (integrated image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH applied to the narrow area type pre-effect. It's getting harder. That is, as time passes, the display range of the image related to the narrow-area type pre-effect is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "image (integrated image)" is used. The visibility of the image IG) will be gradually increased ”(FIGS. 251 (b) to 251 (d)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the second narrow-range type pre-effect is executed and the image (here, the integrated image IGa) is displayed. The timing tB3 at which the acceptance acceptance state occurs has arrived, and the operation acceptance is permitted (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251 (d)"). That is, in this case, since the operation reception is permitted at the stage where the visibility of the image (integrated image IG) is being enhanced, the image (integrated image IG) is used. Whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the aspect (expectation), or confirm the aspect (expectation) as the image (integrated image IG). After that, it becomes possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect).

Here, the image KTH used for such a narrow-range type pre-effect is, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the image (integrated image IG) is displayed. Alternatively, the image (integrated image) and the image (narrow area type pre-effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the image (integrated image IG) in the moving image is displayed. It may be something that expresses how the image is gradually increased.

In the narrow range type pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the output of the effect sound related thereto may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permissible state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the purpose is to maintain a sense of tension regarding operation-related matters, the narrow-range type pre-production is used. It can be said that it is desirable to perform the image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to enhance the concentration on the effect.

Further, as the narrow-range type pre-effect, a plurality of modes having different expectations may be prepared, and one of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination. .. However, considering that the second reception allowable state is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, and the post-operation effect is not executed if the operation is forgotten, the narrow area type pre-effect is not executed. It is desirable to prepare only one aspect and display it only by the one aspect in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the operation is forgotten.

FIG. 250 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state occurs.

Now, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the "first fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the first variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 252 (a)). ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, an effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ first variation pattern ”itself. It will be.

As described above, in the effect related to the "first variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 250 (b), the decorative pattern is displayed regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the timing tC4 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the SZ variation effect is reached, the operation reception regarding the effect after the first operation is permitted. Generates an acceptable state (validity period) (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (g)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the first acceptance allowable state (validity period),
-The "suppression acceptance allowable state" (FIG. 250 (a),) in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. (B) ”and ・ Even if the operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) at which the operation reception is allowed, When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started in the "automatic reception mode (see FIG. 250 (h))".
It is designed to be generated as a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also referred to as a “strong suppression mode”.

According to such a configuration, the operation reception is allowed while the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state (suppression reception production). From the perspective of the person, it becomes easier to operate immediately after the set time (valid period) occurs. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) has the timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), you will be able to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that you will not miss the highly expected post-operation production. .. That is, in such a "suppression / automatic reception effect", the rate (0% or 100%) in which the post-operation effect is performed in a manner that appears only at the time of a big hit than the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect". It is also good) as described above.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as in the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", FIGS. As shown in the above, when the timing tC3 arrives slightly before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) at which the production reception is allowed occurs, the “reception allowable sound (here, the first allowable sound)” is set. The output is started and the output state is maintained so as to straddle the timing tC4 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of production sound)" is output in the suppressed mode or is in the non-output state, the operation is performed at the timing tC3. It will be possible to recognize that the reception will soon be allowed, and "against the player's will, the production reception will be done by enabling the automatic button function, not by his own operation." Will be expected to be less frequent. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) occurs, and is generated, for example, in accordance with the generation timing tC4 of the set time. You may do so.

In order to more preferably obtain the above-mentioned action effect (suppression reception effect), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is changed from "a state in which it is output in a non-suppressed mode" to "a state in which it is output in a suppressed mode or not The timing tC2a that shifts to the "output state" has a different aspect from that shown in the figure, but has a relationship such as "length of timing tC2a to tC3> length of timing tC3 to tC4". It can be said that it is desirable to set the output start timing tC4 of the above-mentioned acceptance allowable sound that occurs in advance of the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may arrive before the wide area type pre-production is started.

Further, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 250 (f) and 250 (j), unlike the case of the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", " As the "acceptable sound for reception", not only the first permissible sound that is output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" But also the second permissible sound that is a message sound such as "press!" Is output. Moreover, in this example, the second permissible sound is in a state (valid period) in which the operation reception is already permitted after being delayed by a predetermined time with respect to the timing tC3 at which the first permissible sound is started to be output. At the timing tC4a that arrives at, the output is started.

That is, in this case, in the second acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the integrated image IG (image) cannot be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is the set time (valid period). The output is started without delay in the occurrence of, and the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the integrated image IG (image) can be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is the set time (valid period). The output is started without delaying the occurrence, and the output of the second allowable sound is started after the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

According to such a configuration, the first permissible sound (sound effect) is started to be output when the mode of the integrated image IG (image) is difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the previous effect. After that, when the first permissible state (validity period) occurs, it is possible to shift to the state where both the first permissible sound (sound effect) and the second permissible sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated image IG (image) is displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output. You will be able to do it. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is in the output state, the integrated image having a specific high expectation mode (special mode). It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the IG (image) will be displayed, and in such a situation, the integrated image IG (image) will be gradually exposed (clear). Sex will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and 250 (f), while the "second wide area type pre-effect" is being executed among the wide-area type pre-effects (image of the pre-effect). Is displayed), the output of the second permissible sound is started.

As will be described later, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target" are selected based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. When there is a "selection" and the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as "press!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Deliver the sword!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second permissible sound" is adopted as the production sound that is output for a relatively short time. However, although the "first permissible sound" is adopted as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long time, the long-short relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the output states of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" are maintained for different times. In addition, the time when these output states are terminated (the time when they are made inaudible) should arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f when the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound for reception" is in. It will be possible to do so, and it will be expected that it will be difficult to frequently say that "contrary to the player's intention, the production reception is done by enabling the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation".
-First situation in which only "first permissible sound" of "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" maintains the output state-both "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" 2nd situation where the output state is maintained ・ The "1st permissible sound" maintains the output state, but the "2nd permissible sound" has finished the output state (being in an inaudible state). 3rd situation-Both the "1st permissible sound" and the "2nd permissible sound" have finished the output state (they are in an inaudible state).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppression / automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, "Pickin!") Is output as the "first permissible sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is output as a production sound that is not output by the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", but the effect sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds. As for the first permissible sound), since it can be output as a production sound that is also output in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production", the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of production sound)" is suppressed. It becomes possible to more easily recognize that the production reception is in an allowable state while maintaining the effectability when the situation is favorable (second permissible sound) (first permissible sound). Allowable sound). However, in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppression / automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. It may be output.

The time length between arbitrary timings shown in the above-described figures and the later-described figures may be the minimum time (for example, 1 frame) in the control (processing) unit, or 2 frames. It may be the above time. For example, if the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) can be output even a little earlier than the set time (valid period), the player will be in a state where operation reception is permitted (or Since it will be possible to recognize what has happened earlier by the preceding time, the period until the set time ends and the period until the timing when the automatic button function is activated comes. It will be expected to prevent people from forgetting to operate inside.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 250, unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 249, the operation is performed when the reception allowable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is in the output state. When the reception is made, the output state is terminated halfway based on the fact that the operation reception is made. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is performed, the output of the reception allowable sound (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) is interrupted at that time, and the operation reception is permitted by this (the operation reception is permitted). It is possible to recognize that the validity period) has expired. As a result, it is less likely that an operation is accepted even though the operation is not accepted, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the automatic reception function is enabled contrary to the intention of the player. become able to. If the operation is performed and the operation is accepted before the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period), the operation is performed when the operation is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not enabled even if the timing tC4f arrives because the state in which the reception is permitted is terminated.

Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e) and 250 (f), the first permissible sound starts to be output without delaying the occurrence of the set time (valid period), and the second permissible sound is output for the set time (valid). The output is started after the occurrence of the period). According to such a configuration, the output of the first permissible sound is started no matter how quickly the operation is accepted by the player, but the second permissible sound depends on the timing at which the operation is accepted. (When the operation is accepted between the timings tC3 and tC4a) The state in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends without the output being started, and as a result, the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect). ) Will be executed. When the operation is performed between the timings tC3 and tC4, the operation is not accepted, and the first allowable sound is not terminated with this as an opportunity. Further, if the operation is accepted before the timing tC4a arrives, the output of the second allowable sound is not started.

According to such a configuration, is it possible to start the post-operation production after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that the first permissible state is received)? 2 Whether to start the production after the operation without confirming that the permissible sound is output (without recognizing whether the first reception permissible state or the second reception permissible state) is played. Since it will be possible to leave it to the choice of the person, the range of games will be expanded, and it is expected that the interest of the game will be improved.

Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and 250 (f), at least the image (here, the wide area type pre-effect) is applied within the period of timing tC3 to tC4a. (Some) are not hidden, and the display state is maintained. That is, in this case, under the condition that the second permissible sound has not been output yet (timing tC3 to tC4a), the mode (expectation degree) of the integrated image (image) cannot be clearly visually recognized by the pre-production. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned playability such as "leave it to the player's choice" to be more interesting.

Further, also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 250 (d), when the operation reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tC4b in the figure), the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is performed. (Here, as the first post-operation effect), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member). At least occurs (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i)"). Here, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 249, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the timing is set regardless of the timing of the operation reception within the set time (valid period). While it is hidden (invisible) at a specific timing (same timing) that arrives after tC5, the output sound (directing sound) after operation is predetermined from the timing when the operation is accepted. The output state is maintained for a certain amount of time (fixed time). In the example shown in FIG. 252, a background notice by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output applied to the liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 250, regardless of when the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period), the output sound (directing sound) after the operation is "BGM playback sound (BGM reproduction sound). It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained when the timing tC6 from the suppressed state (non-output state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode arrives.

On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is terminated at the timing tC6 when the “BGM reproduction sound” is output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at the timing tC6, both the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the non-suppressed mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effectability is large. It will be changed and expected to improve the game entertainment. However, instead of this, the output state may be maintained at the time when the timing tC6 arrives for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display). Further, the "sound of BGM reproduction" may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC3 before the timing tC4 in which the set time of the first reception allowable state is set arrives, the operation targeted for operation in the effect display device 1600. An image of the means is displayed, and a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tC3 slightly before the timing tC4 in which the setting time (timing tC4 to tC5) of the first reception allowable state is set. It is difficult to frequently notice that the reception is accepted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ends without occurring. It will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the time when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is started to be output, but it is not limited to this, and either one is started earlier. You may do it. Alternatively, only one of the copy image and the reception allowable sound (for example, only the copy image) may be started before the timing tC4.

Further, as described above, the imitation image (an image imitating the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given) displayed when the first acceptance acceptance state occurs is also the periphery that decorates the periphery of the imitation image. It is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the decorative image. This "integrated image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, the gauge image GG (in the peripheral decoration image) is included in the peripheral decoration image. A display target area (partition area KG) of the predetermined image) GG is provided. Further, as the "integrated image IG", a plurality of modes having different expectations (see FIG. 232) are prepared, and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, unlike the second reception permissible state, in the first reception permissible state, a special mode having a high degree of expectation among a plurality of modes prepared as the "integrated image IG" (for example, FIG. 232). As described above, the aspect shown in (d) (integrated image IGd)) is included as a target of the lottery (selection) and can be displayed.

By the way, in the first reception allowable state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the remaining time is displayed (based on the time until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated when there is no operation arrives). It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first reception allowable state (FIG. 250) according to this embodiment, the remaining time is displayed based on the time until the timing tC5 at which the set time elapses, not the time until the timing tc4f arrives (FIG. 250). Gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect is started to be executed by enabling the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left. It is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" against the intention of the player, and this makes it possible to indicate that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" regardless of the remaining gauge amount in the set time (valid period) after the next time. It will be possible to encourage the operation to be performed at an early stage.

However, regarding the first reception allowable state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception was received does not necessarily have to be started within the set time, and the set time It may be started when or after the end of.

Further, the integrated image IG (image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 250 is not necessarily the same as the integrated image IG (image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 249. Good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operating means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 250, the operating means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is depicted. May be depicted realistically.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) to be operated, and the operation button 410 is displayed as an integrated image IG (image). In the example shown in FIG. 250, a handle portion 5012 (sword decoration body 5001) is used as an operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and the handle portion 5012 (sword decoration body 5001) is displayed as an integrated image IG (image). 245 (a)-(d) may be referred to). The "integrated image IGe to IGH" is as described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 248, or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, a gauge image is included in the peripheral decoration image. (Predetermined image) A display target area (partition image KG) of GG is provided. Further, as the "integrated image IG", a plurality of modes having different expectations (see FIG. 232) are prepared, and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed.

As described above, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tC4 in FIG. 250, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. There is. That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tB3 in FIG. 249, there is no "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target", and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, it is possible to set the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred, contrary to the player's intention. It is desirable to control the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tC4 in FIG. 250, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means of is operated, it is desirable that the effect reception is performed and the effect is executed after the operation. That is, if a situation appears in which the production is not accepted even though the operation means is operated, the player may be confused, and in such a situation, it is appropriate to interrupt the erroneous operation state. Since it is harsh to request further operations on the operating means on the side, even if an erroneous operating state is maintained, the production is accepted when the operating means on the operating target side is operated. It is desirable to do.

As described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, the production sound of a specific type is output or non-output in the suppression mode before the operation opportunity is given, so that it is compared with the non-suppression operation reception effect. There is a concern that the color rendering will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer period of time than the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are provided. It is prepared, and any one of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIG. 250 (e), and the "time maintained as the output state" is set as the shortest mode among the plurality of modes. It is something that is. Further, it is desirable that the rate (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped differs depending on which of the above-mentioned plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that "which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound" and "which of the plurality of operating means is used as the operation target" are obtained as separate determination results within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination. Alternatively, one determination result may be obtained within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permissible case is in either case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable to be able to select it as a sound. Further, also in the second aspect and the third aspect, it is possible to select either the case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the case where the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. However, it is desirable to prepare a mode in which the output can be performed only when the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. Then, regardless of which of these modes the first permissible sound is output, the output state is maintained for a length longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG. 249.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 250 (c) to 250 (f), it is assumed that the timing tC4 arrives and the operation is accepted while the integrated image IG (here, the integrated image IGd) is displayed. doing. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and a movable decorative body. As at least one of the effect operations), the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are started, respectively.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and 250 (d), even in this example, the integrated image IG on the specific layer is not hidden at the time when the post-operation effect is started. , Maintain the display state from the time when the reception was allowed. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, it is caused by the integrated image IG at that time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 252 (i)"). No change occurs, and until the arrival of the timing tC4c after a short time (predetermined time) has passed, the "integrated image IG" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is applied. "Display" is being continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes it difficult or invisible to see a part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the display state appears (“Fig. Corresponds to "the situation shown in 252 (j)"). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer (predetermined layer) before a specific layer on which the integrated image IG is displayed, or the integrated image and the said image. The image (disappearance effect) is displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated image in the video is expressed as being difficult to see due to the image (disappearance effect). As described above, it may be the same as the above.

As shown in FIG. 250 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and the image HSE displayed on a predetermined layer ( The disappearance effect) is not hidden even when the display is started, and the display state is maintained as it was when the reception was allowed. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated image IG is displayed, the change caused by the integrated image IG occurs. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the extinction effect is displayed on a predetermined layer on the front side of the effect, the simulated image and the gauge image GG are difficult to see or gradually become invisible.

Then, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated image IG is completed within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) in which the image HSE of the extinction effect is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated image is displayed. The image HSE of the extinction effect (here, a wide area extinction effect that uses more than half of a predetermined display area) is displayed under the condition that the IG is not displayed on the specific layer. The image HSE of such an extinction effect is hidden when a predetermined time elapses (timing tC4g) after the display is started (timing tC4c). In this regard, regarding the timing tC4g to be hidden, the display change (here, the liquid crystal display in this case) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects is particularly large regardless of the timing when the operation is accepted. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the running period. That is, as will be described later, the image HSE and the image (integrated image) of the extinction effect are displayed on a predetermined layer on the front side of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, while the image HSE of the extinction effect is displayed (FIGS. 252 (j) and (k)), it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. There is.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, first, the post-operation production is started, and at the time when the operation reception is performed, the integrated image IG is displayed in what manner. (Which aspect of FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), how much remaining time is suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) is maintained in a state in which it can be grasped. After that, among the post-operation effects, the image HSE of the disappearance effect in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)" and the integrated image IG. Will start to display. As described above, the extinction effect includes a narrow-area extinction effect having a low color rendering index and a wide-area extinction effect having a low color rendering index, and is executed as a wide-area extinction effect here. While the image HSE of such an extinction effect is displayed, the integrated image IG is hidden, and then when the image HSE of the extinction effect is hidden, the post-operation effect The "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)" is finally visible in a clear state (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (l)").

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect the integrated image IG was, then what kind of aspect appears as an extinction effect, and then. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of aspect appears as the effect after the operation, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the operation is accepted by such various color rendering properties.

In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing tC4c or the extinction effect may be used instead of the timing tC4b for the timing of starting the display of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timing tC4c to tC4g). However, also in this case, since the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started to be executed at the timing tC4b, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains the timing tC4b.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 250 (g) to 250 (j), it is assumed that the set time elapses (the first acceptance allowable state ends) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the first reception allowable state is executed in the automatic reception mode, the post-operation effect is performed even when the set time elapses without the player performing the operation. In the meantime, the image (here, the integrated image IG) is hidden.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 250 (b) and 250 (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled, the operation is the same as when the operation by the player is accepted. , The image (here, the integrated image) is not hidden and maintains the display state. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time (timing tC4f), there is no change caused by the image (here, the integrated image). Until the arrival of the timing tC4fa after a short time (predetermined time) has passed since then, the "display on the image" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. There is. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area left even when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception allowable state) is completed, and the display area is displayed after the timing tC4f. The display area is reduced in the form of "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the post-operation effect is started by enabling the automatic button function, the simulated image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes having different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether it was.

Further, in this example, the time from the timing tC4c when the operation is accepted until the image is hidden (invisible) and the time when the automatic button function is enabled tC4f are hidden (invisible). ) Is made the same as the time until it is made.

Further, in this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), the image (here, the integrated image IG) is hidden as shown in FIG. 250 (g). At the time of setting, the wide area type extinction effect is executed, and the image (here, the integrated image) is hidden while the wide area type extinction effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the image related to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 250 (c)) when the operation by the player is accepted and the automatic button function are enabled. The image is executed in the same manner as the image applied to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 250 (g)) (all images are "image HSE"). This is a part different from the case of the example shown in FIG. 249 (the narrow area type extinction effect when the model image is hidden in the non-automatic reception mode is different from the operation mode).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not in time at the last minute, the same mode as when the operation reception is in time will appear. It will be possible to encourage people to think that "has started to be executed", and it is expected that the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC1 before the timing tC3 in which the first acceptance allowable state occurs arrives, the wide area type pre-effect using more than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. (Corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (b)"). Then, within the period during which the wide area type pre-effect is being executed, the display of the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IG) that imitates the operation receiving portion and the output of the first permissible sound are started (in this case). The timing is tC3, which corresponds to the “situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”). At the time when the display of the image (here, the integrated image IG) is started, a part or the whole of the image (integrated image IG) becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image related to the wide area type pre-effect. ing. That is, as time passes, the display range of the image related to the wide area type pre-effect is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "image (integrated image)" is displayed. ) Will be gradually increased in visibility ”(FIGS. 252 (f) to (h)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 related to this production example, the first reception is performed while the wide area type pre-production is being executed and the image (here, the integrated image IG) is displayed. The timing tC4 at which the allowable state occurs has arrived, and the operation reception is permitted. That is, in this case, since the operation reception is permitted at the stage where the visibility of the image (integrated image IG) is being enhanced, the image (integrated image IG) is used. Whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the aspect (expectation), or confirm the aspect (expectation) as the image (integrated image IG). After that, it becomes possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect).

Here, the image used for such a wide area pre-effect may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the image (integrated image IG) is displayed. , The image (integrated image) and the image (wide area type pre-production) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the image (integrated image) is gradually enhanced in the moving image. It may be something that expresses how it goes.

It should be noted that the wide area type pre-production is different from the case of the second reception allowable state in the effect display device 1600 in view of suggesting the occurrence of the first reception allowable state, which has a relatively high expectation. It is desirable that not only the image display but also the output of the effect sound related to this is performed. Then, a part of the effect sound related to such a wide area type pre-effect may be executed so as to function as the first allowable sound.

Further, as a wide area type pre-effect, it is possible to prepare a plurality of modes having different expectations and selectively display one of these modes based on the result of the effect judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment. It is desirable to improve the interest of games.

Further, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), the wide area type pre-effect according to this example is started when the timing tC1 in the "first fluctuation pattern" arrives, and the first reception allowable state occurs. It is executed across the timing tC4 and is completed within the set time of the first acceptance allowable state. However, between the start and the end of such a wide area type pre-effect, the first wide area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect are sequentially executed as the wide-area type pre-effect. It has become like. These two wide area type pre-effects may be displayed as one moving image data or may be displayed as different moving image data from each other.

Here, the first wide area type pre-effect is displayed when the timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (b)"), and the second wide area type pre-effect is the timing. When tC2 arrives, the display is started in place of the first wide area type pre-effect (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (e)"), but any of these pre-effects is displayed. Even during the period, "an image of the operation means to be operated" is displayed during the period when the previous effect is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 250 (c), a copy image (integrated copy image) is displayed when the timing tC1a within the period during which the first wide area type pre-effect is executed arrives. As a result, it is possible to recognize which of the plurality of operating means the operation opportunity is given at a relatively early stage (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (c)"). In FIG. 252 (c), the image HTH1 produced by the first wide area type pre-effect is described as producing "an image in which the entire image (here, the integrated image) is outlined". It is just a white outline, and it cannot be said that it is an image that imitates the effect button that is the operation target. After that, the "image A1 in which the entire image (here, the integrated image) is outlined" is the "image A1 in which at least one of the decoration and the pattern is used to obtain at least the outline of the image (here, the integrated image). It is now displayed as a "shaped image A2" (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252 (d)"), which suggests that the operation target is an effect button. From this, it can be said that such an "image A2" is a model image of the operating means that is the operation target. That is, such an image A2 is executed as an effect that makes it appear as if the "image HTH1 by the first wide area type pre-effect" was produced. The "outline of the image (here, the integrated image)" means the outline of the operation receiving portion (here, the outline of the operation receiving portion and the outline of the peripheral decoration image).

However, when the timing tC2 arrives, whether to hide the "image A2 as an image (integrated image)" and the "image HTH1 related to the first wide area type pre-production" that had been displayed until then, respectively. The "second wide area type pre-production" is started to be executed in a form that makes it difficult to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252 (e)"). Then, when the timing tC3 within the period during which the second wide area type pre-effect is being executed arrives, the image (integrated image IG) is displayed again (in the "situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)"). (Equivalent), the timing tC4 at which the first acceptance acceptance state occurs in the displayed state has arrived (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (g)"). That is, the second image (FIGS. 252 (f) to (k)) is continuously displayed from the time when the operation reception is permitted until at least the operation reception is not permitted, and the second image is displayed. The operation is accepted while the image is displayed, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is started to be executed.

That is, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptance state, the pre-effects are executed twice, and in those pre-effects, "the operation reception is hidden before the acceptance is allowed". The first image (FIGS. 252 (c), (d)) and the second image (FIGS. 252 (f) to (k)) that continue to be displayed even after the operation reception is permitted. And are displayed separately. According to such a configuration, a higher degree of freedom is achieved without considering the mode (result of production determination, etc.) that should be displayed when the acceptance acceptance state occurs. Since it becomes possible to display the image (the image that is hidden before the operation reception is allowed (first time)) under the effect design, the range of the effect can be expanded. In this sense, the "image that is hidden before the operation reception is allowed (first time)" can be displayed when the operation reception is within the permitted period. It is desirable that the image be displayed as a mode that is not present (a mode different from any of the modes shown in FIG.

Here, the model image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-effect is being performed is the same as the model image displayed while the narrow area type pre-effect is being performed. Since the display state is continued even after the state in which the operation reception is permitted occurs, the display state is displayed as one of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 232 (in the example shown in FIG. 250). , A special aspect of the integrated image IGd). On the other hand, the simulated image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-effect is being performed has at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from any of the aspects shown in FIG. 232. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image (here, image A2). For example, as the shape, the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target is deformed and expressed, such as making the outline part of the image rounded or using many curves without using many straight lines. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying as an image. In the narrow area type pre-production described above, an image having at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from the acceptance allowable state does not appear.

Further, when the operating means to be operated is a specific operating means, a plurality of simulated images (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-effect is being performed are shown in FIG. 232. Regardless of which mode is displayed, the simulated image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-effect is being performed can be displayed in one mode (same mode). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide area type pre-production can be used exclusively for "indicating which type of operation means will soon be given an operation opportunity". According to such a first wide area type pre-production, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the operation target without deteriorating the game interest, and thus the player is made to recognize the operation target. From, it will shift to the second wide area type pre-production that suggests the degree of expectation.

In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, regarding the first wide area type front effect, the operation means (sword decoration) on the side with the highest expectation among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It can be said that it is more desirable to execute the operation only when the operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). That is, in this case, either when the reception allowable state in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity occurs or when the reception allowable state in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 occurs. Even so, the wide area type pre-effect can be executed prior to this, but for the first wide area type pre-effect, there is an opportunity to operate the sword decoration body 5001 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It will be feasible only when granted. In this case, the first reception permissible state may be generated as a reception permissible state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword decoration body 5001. On the other hand, the second wide area type front effect is executed regardless of whether the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity or the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. It is possible. At this time, the second wide area type front effect is executed in the same manner when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity and when the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. It may be carried out in a different manner.

Further, when the image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-effect is being performed is displayed by the integrated image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. However, even in such a case, the display target area of the gauge image GG is the image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-effect is being performed. It may be displayed as an image that does not include. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the image (integrated image) is different. At this time, the image may be displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decorative image in the first place. It may be displayed as.

According to the above-mentioned production example, in the second reception allowable state shown in FIG. 249, the model image (integrated model image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound is output as the reception allowable sound. However, the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first reception allowable state shown in FIG. 250, the image (integrated image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are each as the reception allowable sound. It is said that it can be output. However, in the first reception permissible state shown in FIG. 250, even when a mode different from the special mode (low-expected mode used in FIG. 249) is displayed as the image (integrated image IG). As for the reception allowable sound, the processing as described with reference to FIG. 250 is performed, and it goes without saying that the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound can be output as the reception permissible sound, respectively.

At the start of output of the second permissible sound (message sound), the image related to the wide area type pre-production remains, and it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the image (integrated image IG). In a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the mode of the image (integrated image IG), the state shifts from the state in which only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output to the state in which the second allowable sound (message sound) is also output. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the image (integrated image IG) is displayed in a special mode by the reception allowable sound. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the image with a special aspect (integrated image IGd) will be exposed. Inside, the image (integrated image IG) is gradually exposed.

The integrated image IG includes a display target area (partition image KG) of the gauge image GG, but the integrated image IG is displayed in either a low expectation mode (IGa) or a high expectation mode (IGd). Even in this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG (the target portion where the gauge image GG is displayed and the portion which increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, how much time is left can be easily recognized regardless of the mode of the image.

As described above with reference to FIG. 232, the mode of the peripheral decoration image is different from that of the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd). Further, the operating means (such as the effect button) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the image, but the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

According to the above-mentioned production example, when the game is in a predetermined gaming state, the reception allowable state at the time of suppression in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific production sound is suppressed, and the specific production sound are suppressed. There are multiple reception permissible states at the time of non-suppression where operation reception is permitted in the absence, but in the first reception permissible state among the reception permissible states at the time of suppression, the integrated image IG is a special mode. While it can be displayed, the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd) in the second reception allowable state in the non-suppressed reception allowable state, which is different from the special mode. It can be displayed with. In the second reception allowable state, the integrated image IG is not selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) having different expectations excluding the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). It may be possible to display only. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the effect is poor as compared with the case where the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third reception allowable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance allowable state) and the second condition (second reception allowable state) is satisfied. In the case, after displaying the integrated image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated image is one of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 (for example, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 242 and 243). ) Is adopted and displayed as described above. However, when such a third reception permissible state (valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease) is generated, prior to this, as in the first reception permissible state, "BGM reproduction sound (specific type) (Producing sound) ”is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display (which does not appear in other accepted accepted states including the first accepted accepted state and the second accepted accepted state) It is desirable that the post-operation effect) and the post-operation output sound are executed. That is, when the "BGM reproduction sound" is put into the suppressed state (or the non-output state) when the acceptance allowable state occurs, it is expected that a highly expected mode (special mode) is displayed as the integrated image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, it becomes conspicuous that the "BGM reproduction sound" is inferior in the directing effect as compared with the case where it is output unsuppressed. There is concern that the interest will decline. In this regard, in the third reception allowable state, it is possible to appear a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and then the post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed. Even when a special aspect does not appear as the integrated image IG, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

However, in either the first reception allowable state or the third reception allowable state, the "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" in the suppressed state (or non-output state) triggers the operation reception. It is desirable that the output is not restarted in the non-suppressed mode, and the display change and the output sound after the operation are executed while maintaining the suppressed state (or non-output state).

Further, even if the reception allowable state is generated after the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of production sound)" is put into the suppressed state (or non-output state), when the third reception allowable state occurs, the third reception is allowed. 1 Unlike the case of the acceptance allowable state, the integrated image IG may not be displayed in a special mode, and may be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type of effect sound)" is put into the suppressed state (or the non-output state), either the first acceptance allowed state or the third acceptance allowed state is set. It will be possible to add fun as to whether it will occur.

Further, in the third reception allowable state, it is assumed that the display area of the gauge image GG is executed as an effective period in which the display area is not reduced, but instead, the display target area of the gauge image GG is not included (FIG. 247, FIG. The image (which may or may not be an integrated image) may be executed as a valid period during which the image (which may or may not be an integrated image) is displayed in the embodiment shown in 248). Even with such a configuration, it can be said that the same action and effect can be achieved. In this case, it goes without saying that the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types having different generation conditions are prepared as the reception allowance state, but there is a case where a reception allowance state different from the first reception allowance state occurs. However, when this is a reception allowable state of a specific type, it is desirable that the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, for the reception allowance state in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd), it is possible to execute in the automatic reception mode in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the operation is forgotten. Is desirable.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 250, the automatic button function is enabled at a predetermined timing within the set time (valid period), but it is automatically activated when the set time (valid period) ends or after the set time ends. The button function may be enabled to start executing "the same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is accepted within the valid period". In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is enabled is the same as the “processing from the timing tC4f” shown in FIGS. 250 (g) and 250 (h).

With respect to the image applied to the extinction effect shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, a predetermined transmittance is set for the image itself so that the image behind the image can be visually recognized, although it is difficult. Good.

According to the effect example shown in FIGS. 249 to 252, when the operation by the player is accepted or the automatic button function is enabled and the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the image (integrally). Both the aspect of the modified image IG) and the aspect of the gauge image GG are displayed in a state of good visibility without being made difficult to see by the extinction effect (FIG. 251 (f), FIG. (See FIG. 252 (i)). As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-operation effect while recognizing in which mode the image (integrated image IG) is displayed and how much time is left. You will be able to improve the taste of games.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 251 even if the operation reception is performed and the post-operation effect (post-operation effect) is executed in the second reception allowable state, the background image is displayed before and after the post-operation effect is started. I try to maintain this without causing a switch. On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 252, when the operation reception is performed in the first reception allowable state and the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed, before and after the post-operation effect is started. The background image is switched (after the operation, the space background).

According to such a configuration, the automatic reception function can be effectively used, and even if the operation is forgotten, the background image can be appropriately switched. Will be able to progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception allowable state where the automatic reception function is not enabled, the background image is not changed, so if you forget to operate the background image will not be switched or only the background image It becomes possible to avoid causing inconvenient events such as sudden changes.

Further, in the second reception allowable state, after the operation reception (or activation of the automatic button function) is performed, most of the display area overlaps with the image HSE applied to the wide area disappearance effect, so that the image cannot be visually recognized. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a small part that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide area disappearance effect, the aspect after the operation can be confirmed by checking the image in that part. Can be recognized, and the disadvantages of executing the wide area disappearance effect can be eliminated. In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, when the operation reception (or activation of the automatic button function) is performed in the second reception allowable state, the jackpot symbol appears after the operation in a relatively high proportion. The background images when the post-operation effect is executed should be different from each other when the effect is executed and when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the proportion of the jackpot symbols appearing is relatively low. Is more desirable. These proportions may be 0% or 100%. In this case, the background image itself is changed when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the jackpot symbol appears in a relatively high proportion, whereas the post-operation effect is performed in a mode in which the jackpot symbol appears in a relatively low proportion. The background image may be kept unchanged when is executed.

In the above-mentioned production example, when the operation opportunity is given, the production sound of a specific type is output in the non-suppressed mode (second reception allowable state), and the production sound of the specific type is output in the suppressed mode. There are cases where the output is set to non-output (first acceptance allowed state), and the rate (expectation) at which the post-operation effect is executed differs depending on the type so that it appears only when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the effectability when the operation opportunity is given. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the first reception allowable state, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output or not output in a suppressed mode, and when a post-operation effect occurs. It is decided to devise a directing method so that the directing sound corresponding to this can be heard prominently. In this regard, in the above configuration, with respect to the reception allowable sound output when the first reception allowable state occurs, if the production reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the production reception is performed. Since the output state is terminated based on the above, it is possible to make the effect sound according to the effect after the operation stand out without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

Multiple types are prepared as reception allowable states in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd), and in any of these reception allowable states, operation reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. Then, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle. On the other hand, a plurality of types are prepared as reception allowable states in which the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in a special mode (IGd), but these reception allowable states are when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. A reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle when the operation reception is performed, and a reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated in the middle when the operation reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state ( It is desirable to include both the second reception allowable state, etc. (can occur under different conditions).

As described above, the reception allowable sound includes a sound effect and a message sound. In this respect, the message sound is always interrupted when the production is received while the integrated image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa) while it is in the output state, whereas the sound effect is , When the integrated image is displayed when it is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), it is not interrupted when it is interrupted when the production is accepted while it is in the output state (first acceptance allowable state). It is desirable to have a time (second reception allowable state). As the acceptance allowance state in which the message sound is output, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of types of acceptance allowance states including the first acceptance allowance state.

The wide area type pre-effect shown in FIGS. 250 and 252 is realized by sequentially executing the first wide area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect. In this regard, in the first wide area type pre-effect and the second wide area type pre-effect, in both of these pre-effects, a model image (integrated image) that imitates the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is displayed. However, the image A2 displayed within the execution period of the first wide area type pre-effect is the image (integrated image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptance allowed state (first acceptance allowed state). It is different from the above, and it does not gradually change to the image (integrated image IG).

That is, the model image A2 (FIG. 252 (d)) displayed in the first wide area type pre-effect is not displayed when the second wide area type pre-effect is executed prior to the occurrence of the first reception allowable state. The display state (invisible state) is set. Then, after a predetermined time (FIG. 252 (e)) in which no image of the operation target is displayed (maintained as invisible), the image is displayed within the execution period of the second wide area type pre-effect. , An image different from the image A2 displayed in the first wide area type pre-effect is displayed (FIG. 252 (f)). And, this "image within the execution period of the second wide area type pre-production" is the image itself (integrated image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptance allowance state (first acceptance allowance state). The image HSE related to the second wide area type pre-production is displayed in a form that straddles the occurrence of the reception allowable state (first reception allowable state), so that the image (integrated image IG) is displayed. It will be allowed to accept operations while it is being done. Then, the image (integrated image IG) is displayed even at the time when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is started (FIG. 252 (i)), whereby the first image is displayed. It is displayed over the period from before the acceptance acceptance status occurs to after it ends.

Here, when the model image A2 is displayed in the wide area type pre-effect (first wide area type pre-effect), the operation means (operation receiving unit) that the model image A2 is imitating will soon be (another effect). An operation opportunity will always be given (without sandwiching). That is, the reception allowable state may be generated while maintaining the display state of the image A2, but in the above-mentioned production example, the image A2 is hidden and the "operation target" is set in the wide area type front effect. After creating a state in which no image of the image is displayed, the image of the operation means (operation receiving unit) is depicted differently from the first image (A2). It is displayed as an integrated image IG).

According to such a configuration, in order to suggest that a reception acceptance state with a high degree of expectation occurs, operation reception is permitted even when a model image is displayed for a long time as a pre-effect. It will be expected to encourage operations without delaying the timing. That is, if the imitation image is displayed for a long time as a pre-effect and the acceptance acceptance state is generated while the reproduction image is displayed, the timing at which the operation acceptance is permitted suddenly arrives. As a result, there is a possibility that operation delays will occur frequently even though the previous production is being executed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance allowable state, a copy image having a description different from the copy image displayed within the set time of the acceptance allow state is preceded. Not only is it displayed, but after a period of time during which no image is displayed, the image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptance state is displayed. That is, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that the first reception allowable state can occur only within the period after the image displayed within the set time of the reception allowable state is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult for an operation delay to occur while displaying a model image for a long time as a pre-effect.

In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, it is necessary to perform the "second wide area type pre-effect" rather than the "time required for the first wide area type pre-effect" or "time for displaying the image A2". It is better to set so that "1 time until the acceptance acceptance state occurs" and "time from the display of the image (integrated image IG) to the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptance state" are shorter. Clearly desirable. The image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide area type pre-effect.

Further, in order to preferably obtain such an action effect, the image (integrated image IG) displayed in the second wide area type pre-effect is "operation in the movable region" as an operation means (operation receiving portion). This is dynamically displayed in the form of expressing "behavior when operated" (see FIG. 233, etc.), whereas the image A2 displayed in the first wide area type pre-effect is such. It is more desirable to display without dynamic display. The image (integrated image IG) displayed in the second wide area type pre-effect will continue to be in the dynamic display state even after the first reception allowable state occurs. In addition, the image (integrated image IG) displayed in the narrow area type front effect also expresses "operation in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as the operation means (operation receiving unit). This is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display state is continued even after the second acceptance acceptance state occurs.

The image (integrated image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252 (f) and the image (integrated image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252 (g) are images. Although they are the same in themselves, they may be different in terms of transmittance.

It is more desirable that the image KTH related to the narrow-range type pre-effect shown in FIG. 251 is displayed as an image having a size that can cover the entire image (integrated image IG) from the front side. .. Then, by at least either reducing the display area of the image KTH or increasing the transmittance thereof, an image (integrated image IG) is displayed from the place where the image KTH is displayed. ) Should be displayed in a manner that gradually becomes exposed over time.

Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 related to the wide area type pre-effect shown in FIG. 252, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the image (integrated image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the image (integrated image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image having a size capable of covering the entire image (integrated image IG) from the front side, similar to the image KTH related to the narrow area type pre-effect (FIG. 252 (FIG. 252). e)), by at least reducing the display area or increasing the transmittance, the image from the place where the image HTH2 is displayed (integrated image IG). Is designed to be gradually exposed as time passes. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed so as to emphasize the depiction of the image A2, there is a demerit that it is difficult to visually recognize the image when giving an operation opportunity (any operation). It becomes difficult to recognize whether an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay occurs).

The wide area type pre-effect is performed by sequentially executing the first wide area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect, and for the effect sound output by the wide-area type pre-effect, these are combined into one sound data (1). It is desirable that it be output by playing back one sound effect / music.

Further, in the narrow area type pre-effect shown in FIG. 251 the background image displayed before this is maintained without being changed in the narrow area type pre-effect, but the wide area type shown in FIG. 252 is maintained. In the pre-effect, the background image that has been displayed before this is changed in the wide-area pre-effect (here, it is changed at the start of the wide-area pre-effect). In such a configuration, the background change can be executed as a part of the wide area type front effect, so that the front effect is more effective than the narrow area type front effect which is limited to the partial effect change. It will be executed as a production. It should be noted that the background image (FIG. 251 (a)) displayed before the narrow-area type pre-effect is performed and the background image (FIG. 252 (FIG. 252)) displayed before the wide-area type pre-effect is performed. The background image may be different from a)).

In the second wide area type pre-effect shown in FIG. 252 (f), the integrated image integrated with the "peripheral decorative image in which the section image KG that divides the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)" is integrated. Although it was decided to display a copy image as an IG, in the first wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 252 (d), it was decided to display a copy image in which such a section image KG is not decorated (depicted). As a result, in the first wide area type pre-production, at least the remaining time can be enjoyed without causing the player to worry about the pre-production. The image in which the section image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be an image in which the section image KG to be decorated (depicted) is not displayed in the integrated image IG, and at least a part of the integrated image IG is displayed. In addition to the mode in which the decoration (gauge area) of the above is not displayed, the shape itself may be different from that of the integrated image IG.

As described above, "an operation acceptance state in which a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state is permitted, and is executed in an automatic reception mode". Are prepared in a plurality of forms having different generation conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and a "first acceptance allowable state" is prepared as one of these acceptance acceptance states. However, these acceptance-acceptable states include "the first wide-area type front effect (FIGS. 252 (c) to (e)) in which the image is displayed and hidden, and the timing at which the acceptance-acceptable state occurs. In addition to the "first acceptance allowed state" in which the second wide area type pre-effect (FIGS. 252 (e) to (g)) in which the image is displayed is performed, the image is displayed and hidden. The first wide area type pre-effect is not performed, and the second wide area type pre-effect (FIGS. 252 (e) to (g)) in which the image is displayed straddling the occurrence timing of the reception allowable state is performed. It is desirable to include the state. That is, in this case, in the first reception allowable state, the ratio of the post-operation effect being executed is higher than the specific reception allowable state in a manner in which the effect appears only at the time of a big hit, so that the operation reception is permitted. It will be possible to enhance the interest of the game from the time when the previous timing (the timing when the first wide area type pre-production appears) arrives. In this case, the second wide area type pre-production performed when the first reception permissible state occurs and the second wide area type pre-effect performed when the specific reception permissible state occurs do not necessarily have to be the same contents, and they do not necessarily have the same contents. It may be executed as a different effect content (image). Further, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first reception allowable state and the second reception allowable state.

As described above, the "acceptance allowed state in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode and is executed in the non-automatic reception mode" is the occurrence condition (variation). A plurality of patterns are prepared in different forms, and a "second reception allowable state" is prepared as one of these reception allowable states.

The wide area type pre-effect performed in the first reception allowable state is executed under the condition that "specific type production sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or not output, but "specific type production sound" is performed. (BGM playback) ”is executed for a longer time than the narrow-range type pre-production (second reception allowable state) that is executed while being output unsuppressed, so this is preferably maintained for the game entertainment. You will be able to. In particular, among the wide-area pre-productions, the first wide-area pre-production alone is made to be executed for a longer period of time than the narrow-area pre-production, so that the game entertainment is suitable from a long time before the reception acceptance state occurs. Will be able to increase. The timing at which the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or de-output may be set to arrive while the first wide area type pre-effect is being executed, or the first wide-area type pre-effect may be performed. The production may arrive before the execution starts.

According to the above-mentioned production example, when the wide area type pre-effect (FIG. 252) is performed when the first reception allowable state is generated, the effect is changed including the background image, whereas when the second reception allowable state is generated, the effect is changed. When the narrow-range type pre-effect (FIG. 251) is performed, the background image is not changed and the effect is changed while maintaining the background image. Furthermore, in the first reception allowable state that occurred while such a wide area type pre-effect is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation effect (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether or not the operation is performed. On the other hand, in the second reception permissible state that occurred while the narrow-area type pre-effect was being performed, the background image was not changed by the post-operation effect, and the effect was maintained while the effect was maintained. There is. According to such a configuration, in the first reception allowable state, the background image is changed twice before and after the occurrence of this, so that the effect is compared with the second reception allowable state. It will be possible to greatly enhance the color rendering, and it will be possible to encourage more concentration on operation-related productions.

In the wide area type extinction effect according to the above-mentioned production example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 252 (j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come after the timing at which the wide area disappearance effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 252 (i), the post-operation effect (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed while the background image is not changed. Then, after the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the wide area type extinction effect first makes the background image displayed when the reception is allowed state difficult to see or makes it invisible (FIG. 252 (j)). The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (k), and then the background image is changed by displaying another background image (the situation shown in FIG. 252 (k), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (l)). Other background images may be displayed in such a way that they are gradually exposed while the wide area disappearance effect is being performed, or are displayed after the wide area disappearance effect is completed. You may.

In the example shown in FIG. 252, as the post-operation effect, first, the display change in the liquid crystal display (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed. As a post-operation effect, the execution may be started first, and the display change on the liquid crystal display may be started later (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As described above, a plurality of "acceptance allowance states in which the automatic acceptance mode is executed and the wide area type extinction effect is executed" are prepared in different forms of occurrence conditions (fluctuation patterns, etc.), and one of these acceptance allowance states is 1. As one of them, the "first reception allowable state" is prepared. However, in these reception allowable states, in addition to the "first reception allowable state", "post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) in the same mode as the first reception allowable state can be executed, but the wide area type extinction effect. It is desirable to include a "special reception allowance state" in which is executed as a different image (the display timing may be the same). That is, in this case, even if the same post-operation effect is performed, the extinction effect will be different, so that the effect can be improved, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed. become. The special reception permissible state may be the specific reception permissible state described above. The specific reception allowance state and the special reception allowance state are executed in the same manner as the first reception allowance state in terms of the display timing of the image, the processing related to the output of the reception allowable sound, the processing related to the extinction effect, and the like. ..

As described above, a plurality of "acceptance allowance states in which the non-automatic acceptance mode is executed and the narrow area type extinction effect is executed" are prepared in different forms of occurrence conditions (fluctuation patterns, etc.), and these acceptance acceptance states are prepared. As one of the above, a "second reception allowable state" is prepared. However, in addition to the "second reception allowance state", these reception allowance states include "post-operation effects (for example, conversation notice and movable body movement) of a type different from the second reception allowance state" (third operation post-operation effect). ) Is possible, but it is desirable that the narrow area type extinction effect includes a special reception allowable state in which the same image is executed (the timing of display may be the same). That is, in this case, even if different post-operation effects are performed, the extinction effect itself is displayed as the same image, so it is easy to be in a situation where the operation is accepted regardless of the type of post-operation effect. You will be able to recognize it. The special reception permissible state is executed in the same mode as the second reception permissible state with respect to modes such as display timing of the image, processing related to the output of the reception permissible sound, and processing related to the extinction effect.

In the narrow area type extinction effect, the image KSE related to the narrow area type extinction effect is hidden even when the image (integrated image IG) is hidden after the post-operation effect is started. It was decided to maintain the display state (see FIG. 251 (i)). In this respect, the image (integrated image IG) is more than the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation effect is started) until the image (integrated image IG) is hidden. It is desirable to set so that the time from when) is hidden until the image KSE applied to the narrow area disappearance effect is hidden is longer. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect can be performed while maintaining the display state of the image (integrated image IG) even after the post-operation effect is started so that the mode can be confirmed. It seems that the reason why it is not clearly revealed is not due to the "image in which the display state is maintained" but to the directing effect of the "image KSE applied to the narrow-range disappearance effect". Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-area extinction effect is performed by a dynamic display using an image different from the image, rather than a fade-out that ends relatively quickly. Regarding "dynamic display by another image" as such a narrow area type disappearance effect, multiple types with different expectations are prepared, and they are selectively displayed according to the type of acceptance acceptance state with different generation conditions. It is more desirable to do so.

According to the wide area type extinction effect according to the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to expect a function suggesting that the first reception allowable state is executed in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, in the second reception allowable state, since the operation is accepted only by the operation by the player and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect is executed without affecting the entire screen. However, it can be said that it is advantageous that the image applied to the extinction effect is executed by the small narrow area type extinction effect in that the post-operation effect can be immediately executed in a state of good visibility. According to such a configuration, in the case of the wide area type extinction effect, it is required to change from the background image to ensure its visibility, but in the case of the narrow area type extinction effect, the background image is not changed. It will be possible to ensure visibility just by performing the production after the operation while maintaining the above.

As described above, in the second reception allowable state, there are a plurality of modes (first mode) in which the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination. , Including the second aspect), the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, there are cases where the first mode (a mode having a relatively high ratio) appears and the second mode (a mode having a relatively low ratio) appear as a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect). In both cases, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state, there are a plurality of modes (third mode) in which the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination. , Including the fourth aspect), the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, there are cases where the third aspect (a mode having a relatively high ratio) appears as the post-operation effect (the first post-operation effect) and the case where the fourth aspect (a mode having a relatively low ratio) appears. When the wide-area extinction effect is executed in different modes (images), or when the third mode (a mode with a relatively high proportion) appears, the wide-area extinction effect is executed, and the fourth mode (relatively) It is desirable to execute the narrow-range extinction effect when a mode with a low ratio) appears. The narrow area type extinguishing effect at this time may be the same as or different from the narrow area type extinguishing effect performed corresponding to the second acceptance allowable state.

According to such a configuration, in the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance allowance state, in which the wide area type extinction effect may occur, the extinction effect itself has a degree of expectation. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the low visibility of the post-operation effect due to the wide area type extinction effect. In addition to the 1st acceptance allowance state and the 2nd acceptance allowance state, the 4th acceptance allowance state and the 5th acceptance allowance state, which will be described later, are the fluctuation patterns in which the jackpot is lost and the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot is won. It can occur, and the first fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern described above, and the fourth fluctuation pattern and the fifth fluctuation pattern described later are "the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (at the time of defeat). Needless to say, it is prepared as a pair.

Further, the second acceptance allowable state may be made capable of occurring not only in the second fluctuation pattern but also in the first fluctuation pattern. For example, the second acceptance allowance state is generated at a relatively early timing in the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance allowance state is generated at a relatively late timing.

Timing when the display output (display on the layer) related to the image (integrated image IG) is finished within the period when the image of the disappearance effect is displayed (timing from when the operation is accepted until it is hidden) May be different between the first permissible acceptance state and the second permissible acceptance state.

When the operation is accepted in the "situation in which the image KTH related to the narrow area type pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 251 (d), the image KTH is not hidden with this as an opportunity. It is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the image KTH is being displayed. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 251 (f). After that, when the narrow area type extinction effect is started to be executed, the "image KSE applied to the narrow area type extinction effect" makes it difficult or impossible to see the "image KTH applied to the narrow area type pre-effect". It is desirable to advance the production so that it is done.

Further, even when the operation is accepted in the "situation in which the image HTH2 related to the wide area type pre-production is displayed" shown in FIG. 252 (g), the image HTH2 can be hidden by taking this as an opportunity. Instead, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started to be executed while the display of the image HTH2 is continued. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i). After that, when the wide-area extinction effect is started to be executed, the "image HSE related to the wide-area extinction effect" makes it difficult or invisible to see the "image HTH2 related to the wide-area pre-effect". It is desirable to advance the production.

In the example shown in FIG. 250, when the operation reception is permitted while the "specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction)" is in the non-output state, the "specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction)" About "BGM reproduction)", it is not always necessary to re-output until the symbol is stopped. For example, at the timing tC6, either the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" that has already been turned off or the "effect sound related to the post-operation effect" that is started to be output when the operation is accepted. It is also possible to newly start the output of a special production sound different from the above. The output of the special effect sound is not started when the operation is accepted, but is started when a predetermined timing within the fluctuation pattern is reached.

The image related to the wide area type pre-effect and the image related to the narrow area type pre-effect are displayed until the set time of the reception allowable state is completed (or until the automatic reception button is activated). May be good. Further, the output state of the first permissible sound may be maintained until the set time of the reception permissible state is completed (or until the automatic reception button is activated).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the model image of the operation receiving portion is displayed in both the wide area type front effect and the narrow area type front effect, but in the wide area type front effect (first wide area type front effect). , The mode (image data) different from the mode (image data) that appears in the period in which the operation reception is permitted (first reception allowable state) is displayed. As a result, in the wide area type pre-effect (first wide area type pre-effect), even if the image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, the operation reception is permitted. It is now possible to appeal to the occurrence of an operation reception effect (acceptance allowance state) while making it difficult for misrecognition to occur, so that a large-scale pre-effect that requires a relatively long time can be performed. become. In the second wide area type pre-effect and the narrow area type pre-effect, the model image (integrated image) is displayed as it is in the mode (image data) that appears during the period when the operation reception is permitted (acceptance allowable state). As the previous effect is hidden (the display area decreases), this is gradually revealed. That is, in this case, the model image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptance allowance state occurs continues the display state from before the acceptance allowance state occurs to after it occurs. This also applies to the fourth reception allowable state described later.

In the production example shown in FIG. 249 (FIG. 251) and the production example shown in FIG. 250 (FIG. 252), changes according to the operation reception (in the post-operation production) regardless of the production example. Yes, at the time when the execution of (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started, the model image (gauge image) is displayed without being hidden (furthermore, dynamic display). (See FIGS. 251 (f), 252 (i), etc.). After that, the extinction effect (narrow area extinction effect or wide area extinction effect) is started to be executed (see FIGS. 251 (g), 252 (j), and the like). However, in the wide area type extinction effect executed in a relatively large range, it becomes difficult to visually recognize most of the changes (post-operation effect) that once appeared clearly, and there is a concern that the interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, when the narrow-area type extinguishing effect is executed, changes caused by post-operation effects such as display changes and lamp light emission (changes according to the operation reception) prior to the execution of the narrow-area type extinguishing effect. At least one of) is started to be executed, and at this point, the image (gauge image) is not hidden and is displayed without being obscured by the narrow-range disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area type extinction effect is executed, the change according to the operation reception (display change, lamp emission, etc.) is performed after the operation prior to the execution of the wide area type extinction effect. At least one of the changes that occur) may not be initiated. That is, in this case, when the change according to the operation reception (the post-operation effect, at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started, the image (gauge image) Is displayed without being hidden, but it is difficult to see due to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 252 (j)).

That is, when the narrow-area extinction effect is executed, the operation is performed when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started. The display state of the model image (gauge image) will be maintained in the same mode as it was displayed before the reception was made. In this case, at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the model image (gauge image) is not difficult to see due to the narrow-range disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area disappearance effect is executed, FIG. 250 (j) may appear after passing through FIG. 250 (i), or the post-operation effect may be produced without passing through FIG. 250 (i). FIG. 250 (j) may appear at the time when the execution is started.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the acceptance allowable state executed in the "suppression operation reception effect" in which a specific type of effect sound can be suppressed is a state in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or no output. In addition to the first acceptance allowable state executed in the "strong suppression mode (first aspect shown in FIG. 250)", the "weak suppression mode (second aspect shown in FIG. 249)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low ) ”, As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance allowance state are prepared. In this case, the specific type of production sound to be suppressed may be a different production sound or the like, and may be output as a production sound having the same function, such as a production sound for BGM reproduction. Just do it.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a color rendering property as to how much the specific type of effect sound is suppressed when the set time (valid period) in which the operation reception is allowed occurs. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned action and effect, the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on which of the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" and the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" occurs. It is desirable that the rate at which the symbols appear) is different. Here, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, the ratio (expectation degree) of being executed in the mode in which the "post-operation effect according to the operation reception" appears only when the big hit is won is , When the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" occurs, the "post-operation effect according to the operation reception" is lower than the rate (expectation) executed in the mode that appears only when the big hit is won. ing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)", the effect corresponding to the high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) and the reach state are not formed (or reach). A state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach.) While it is possible to appear in any of the productions according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)). "Is not generated in the low expectation effect pattern, but may be generated as an effect corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the jackpot expectation when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" occurs. It can be said.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special effect state" that can be transferred based on the satisfaction of the special effect conditions, and in the "special effect state", the player Each time an operation is accepted during the set time (valid period) when an operation promotion image (such as a copy image or gauge display) is displayed, a specific type of production sound (for example, a production sound for BGM playback) is displayed. ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed each time a set time (valid period) for which operation reception is allowed occurs. It has become possible to provide an effect on the sound (whether a weak suppression mode or a plurality of modes including a strong suppression mode appears), and apart from the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation effect, such an effect. Since the degree of expectation is also suggested by (how much it is suppressed), it is expected that the game entertainment will be further improved when the reception of the production is permitted. In this case, the above-mentioned second reception allowable state does not occur in the "special effect state", but can occur in a different effect state (normal effect state).

Further, within the symbol variation, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" and the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowance state)" can be sequentially executed (for example, a highly expected fluctuation pattern). Of these, an effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if a "weak suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" on the side with a relatively low expectation occurs, a "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowance state)" on the side with a relatively high expectation occurs. ) ”Will remain, so it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound is small (weak suppression mode). Will be.

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress the decline in the game interest when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" is described.
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the effect determination is made. Regardless of which result is obtained as (notice judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, whereas "weak suppression mode (first suppression)" Operation reception production) ”
-Even if the above specific fluctuation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), the production of the specific fluctuation pattern does not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing. , When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), it shall occur when the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" is generated in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern. Compared to when it did not occur, the rate at which the post-operation production is executed in a highly expected mode when the production reception is performed in the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" (a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit) It is desirable to increase the rate of execution in.

In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" always occurs in the production according to a specific fluctuation pattern, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" always occurs. When the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, the highly expected post-operation effect is executed in the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)". Since the ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to attract attention as to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" can be attracted attention. ) ”Will occur, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" does not necessarily have to occur in the same fluctuation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)", and for example, the "strong suppression mode". The "first acceptance allowable state" may occur within the first fluctuation pattern, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowance state)" may occur within the fourth fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 253 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which the fourth reception allowable state occurs.

Now, for example, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the above-mentioned "special effect state" and the "fourth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of performing the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fourth variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU1511a is shown in FIG. 253 (b). In addition, when the timing tD3 when the fourth predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ arrives, the operation acceptance regarding the effect after the fourth operation is permitted. To generate. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptance allowable state (validity period),
-While the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fourth fluctuation pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode, the set time (valid period) at which operation reception is permitted is set, but within the set time (valid period). When the operation reception is made in, the "conditional suppression reception effect" (Fig.) That changes the "BGM reproduction sound" from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) triggered by the operation reception. 253 (a), (b)) ”, and ・ If the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) where the operation acceptance is allowed, the operation corresponding to the fourth acceptance acceptance state "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 253 (h))" that does not generate post-effect (post-operation of the fourth operation)
It is designed to be generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned is set in the strong suppression mode (for example). , A method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is "10") having a lower degree of suppression than the volume value (audible volume) is "0") can be adopted.

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (fourth reception allowable state)", unless the operation reception is performed by the operation by the player, "specific type production sound (BGM)" Since the "reproduction sound) is not shifted to the" state of being output in the suppressed mode ", it seems that the" unsuppressed reception effect (first reception allowable state) "shown in FIG. 249 is occurring. You will be able to do it. That is, in this case, it is recognized for the first time that it is not a "suppression reception effect" by changing to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a suppression mode" when the player operates it. Since it will be possible to get rid of it, it will be possible to improve the taste of the game by creating a surprise effect.

In order to obtain such an effect, the fourth variation that allows "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" to occur depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). The pattern should be selectable only when it is in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone), and when it is in the special effect state, it is "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (figure). 249) ”can be selected depending on the result of the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.) The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped compared to when it is in the normal production state (expectation degree) ) Should be high. According to such a configuration, when "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" appears. As a result, the above-mentioned surprise-like production elements can be combined to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" can be generated in both the "normal production state" and the "special production state". In the "normal production state", the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 249)" is performed within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired in the winning). ) ”And“ suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception production (Fig. 250) ”are allowed to occur in sequence, and in the“ special production state ”, one fluctuation pattern (one paired by winning) "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (Fig. 250)" are sequentially arranged in the production according to the fluctuation pattern of It is desirable to be able to occur.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect", when the set time (valid period) elapses without the operation being accepted, the "specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound)" is used. ) Is output in a weakly suppressed mode ”, and the production progresses to the subsequent stage. That is, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". It is difficult to recognize which situation it is in, and since the subsequent productions will be progressed, it is said that the degree of expectation is relatively low. Even when the operation reception effect (valid period) in the game occurs, it becomes possible to more positively encourage the player to operate the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are cases where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)" occurs and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)". When "" occurs, the same production sound is output as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) for the same time, and this also causes "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production". It is made difficult to recognize which of "(FIG. 253)" and "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)" is occurring.

Further, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)", the same as in the case where the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)" occurs.
a. Prior to the acceptance of operations, a narrow-range pre-effect is performed at timing tD1.
b. When the timing tD2 arrives shortly before the set time occurs, the output of the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2. point,
c. The point that the second permissible sound (for example, message sound) is not output, but the first permissible sound (for example, sound effect) is output.
d. When the timing tD2 arrives shortly before the set time occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays an image (integrated image) that imitates the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that suggests the remaining time until the set time elapses.
e. Even if the operation is accepted while the reception allowable sound is being output, the reception allowable sound in the output state is not terminated halfway.
f. At the time when the operation is accepted, the image (integrated image) and the gauge image are not hidden, and the display state is continued. While the image (integrated image) and the gauge image are displayed, the point at which the narrow range type extinction effect is executed, and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the operation is accepted, and so on. Each configuration is also adopted, and either "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" or "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" occurs. I try to make it difficult to recognize if I am doing it. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, "a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode". Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the sound has been shifted to the "state of being performed", it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained each time the production is accepted.

Therefore, as a display method of a model image, a gauge image, a narrow area type pre-effect, and a narrow area type extinction effect, as in the case where "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)" occurs, for example, FIG. It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is desirable to adopt the same mode as the production example shown in FIG. 249 for the timing at which those images are hidden. However, it is not always necessary to adopt the same embodiment.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)", if the operation reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation reception is performed. As the corresponding post-operation effect, at least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. It has become. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tD4, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output sound (directing sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the operation is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output if the timing tD4 has not been completed. It is required to be set to maintain the state.

In addition, the reception allowable sound, operation-related display, pre-effect, extinction effect, and post-operation effect that appear in "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" are different from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 249 and 251. Examples and modifications can be adopted as appropriate, and it is desirable to use the same method for each other.

In this production example, regarding the length of time (predetermined fixed time) that the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the weak suppression mode, the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception production (No. 1) 4 Even if the operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 of the set time (valid period) of "4 reception allowable state)", the timing to end the weak suppression mode is the end timing of the effect sound applied to the post-operation effect. It is set to arrive at the same or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode related to the "BGM reproduction sound" ends may be set to always be the same as the timing at which the effect sound of the post-operation effect ends. Regardless of the configuration, it is possible to make the post-operation production stand out when the production reception is performed.

By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or non-output first reception allowable state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the weak suppression mode is the fourth acceptance allowable state). However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode, no output, or weak suppression mode). Even if an attempt is made, it is difficult to infer whether the degree of suppression is actually high (strong suppression mode or non-output) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison target. In particular, it is even more so when the volume value when suppressed is not so large between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this causes a feeling of tension when the operation reception effect is generated. Can be suitably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect elements useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode are provided within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. It will be prepared as follows in the form of being scattered in chronological order.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound output when the fourth reception permissible state occurs is output in the middle even if the production reception is performed while the output state is in the output state. While it is designed to be output for a predetermined time without ending, the first permissible sound output when the first permissible state of acceptance occurs is received for directing when it is in the output state. Then, based on the production reception, the output is terminated halfway. In such a configuration, since the first permissible sound itself is provided with a function useful for guessing whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, the game cannot be guessed. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. Therefore, the second allowable sound is output. By confirming whether or not the sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first reception permissible state and the fourth reception permissible state output.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted includes a special mode in the first reception allowable state. While the display is performed in any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)), any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) excluding the special mode in the fourth reception allowable state. Therefore, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that it is not possible to estimate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode when the output of the reception allowable sound and the operation-related display is completed. However, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the fourth reception allowable state (the fourth post-operation effect), both the "effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are constant from the time when the effect is received. In contrast to "things that are performed over time", in the post-operation production according to the first reception allowable state (first post-operation production), the "production by the production sound" is "a certain time from the time when the production reception is received". Although it is "a thing that is performed over a period of time", "a production by a liquid crystal display" is "a thing that ends when a predetermined timing arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the first reception allowable state, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" depends on the timing when the operation reception is performed. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, it becomes possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming such a deviation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming the execution mode of the pre-effect and the extinction effect for the reception allowable state. You can also do it. That is, in the pre-effect and extinction effect according to the fourth reception allowable state, the image related to the pre-effect and the image related to the extinction effect are displayed in a relatively narrow area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, in the pre-effect and extinction effect according to the first acceptance allowable state, the image related to the pre-effect and the image related to the extinction effect are displayed in a relatively wide area, and the background image is changed at that time. It is supposed to be accompanied. By confirming such a mode, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

However, even if the production elements that are useful for guessing are prepared in such a form that they are scattered in chronological order, some players do not notice them, and as a result, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. In the end, if there is something that cannot be guessed, the interest in the game may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception allowable state (weak suppression mode), the production sound of BGM reproduction is produced based on the fact that the production reception is performed within the set time (valid period). Make it a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the production sound of BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression is performed. A set time (valid period) is generated in the mode so that the production can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the timing of suppressing a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) in the fourth reception allowance state (weak suppression mode) and the first reception allowance state (strong suppression mode). By confirming the timing, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the fourth reception allowable state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the operation detection is performed within the set time (valid period). If not, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 253 (h)). That is, in this case, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the operation reception for the specific type of production sound (for example, the production sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Although there is a price that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

Further, in the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the “BGM reproduction effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is terminated is the end timing of the post-operation effect. It is set as the same timing as or earlier than. Therefore, in the fourth reception allowable state (weakly suppressed mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weakly suppressed mode can be completed can come after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppressed mode, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppressed mode or the weak suppressed mode.

Further, as described above, in the fourth reception allowable state according to the above-mentioned production example, the operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) is performed regardless of the timing at which the production reception is performed within the set time (valid period). The length of the period during which the rear display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged. On the other hand, in the first reception allowable state, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). , The length of the period during which the output sound (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed.

According to such a configuration, the color rendering property is generated in "when to perform the production reception (operation)", and the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed can be suitably maintained. Become.

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output at a lower suppression degree than the strong suppression mode can appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the fourth reception allowable state does not occur). You may. That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the weakly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. Then, as the number of times the weak suppression mode appears in the production according to one fluctuation pattern, including the fourth reception allowable state, the degree of suppression is further increased until the symbol fluctuation is stopped (the first). (1) The rate at which the acceptance allowance state is further executed) is increased, so that the color rendering index can be further improved through the suppression status of the "BGM reproduction effect sound".

Further, the strong suppression mode for the "directed sound of BGM reproduction" may also appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first reception allowable state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strongly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a color rendering index as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 253, when the fourth reception allowable state occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is suppressed (weak) based on the fact that the operation reception is performed within the set time (valid period). (Suppression mode). However, instead of this, even when the 4th acceptance allowable state occurs, the "BGM reproduction production sound" is suppressed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the 1st acceptance allow state occurs. A mode (weak suppression mode) may be set, and a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may be set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) when the predetermined timing arrives. Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of effectability can be expanded. In the fourth reception allowable state, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned from the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) to the non-suppressed mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect is terminated. It is desirable to do so.

Further, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of production sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number larger than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to set the "specific type of production sound" to a non-audible state (output in silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel allocation)). Good.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is targeted for operation and an operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth reception allowable state", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first reception allowable state", as described above, the result of the advance notice effect determination. Based on the above, there are "a case of selecting the operation button 410 as an operation target (first operation mode)" and "a case of selecting the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation target (second operation mode)". Therefore, when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is not a weak suppression mode but a strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the production reception was performed in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation production has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating means to be operated is
-The first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part touched by the player when operating) is not moved when the set time (valid period) occurs, and-The operation receiving part is moved by the driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" gives an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 is "a device that can give a player an operation opportunity while moving to a specific position". However, one operating means (one operating receiving unit) may be provided with a "first operating mode" and a "second operating mode", respectively, and an operating opportunity may be provided by any of these modes. Further, as described above, in the first reception allowable state, the operation opportunity may be always given to the sword decoration body 5001.

According to the above-mentioned production example, the reception allowable state (suppression) set so that the post-operation effect is executed while the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output in the suppression mode or is in the non-output state. In the reception production), when the image (integrated image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), the reception allowable state is "first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode)". When the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)) as the special mode, the reception permissible state is the "first reception permissible state". (Strong suppression mode or non-output) "or" Fourth reception allowable state (weak suppression mode) ".

That is, in this case, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), if the operation is accepted while the reception allowable sound is being output, it is terminated halfway. (1st reception allowed state). On the other hand, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), if the operation is accepted while the reception allowable sound is being output, the operation is terminated halfway. There may be cases where the image is not terminated halfway (1st acceptance allowed state, 4th acceptance allowed state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste when the model image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)).

Further, when the model image (integrated image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), the reception allowance state is executed in the automatic reception mode (first reception allowance state). On the other hand, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), the acceptance allowance state is executed in the automatic reception mode and the non-automatic reception mode. Will occur (1st acceptance allowed state, 4th acceptance allowed state). According to such a configuration, the tension when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)) can be suitably maintained.

In this regard, when the image (integrated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), the display is performed when the first acceptance allowed state occurs and when the fourth acceptance allowed state occurs. The size of the image may be different. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle and whether it is executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, according to the above-mentioned production example, by confirming whether the pre-effect is executed as "wide area type pre-effect" or "narrow-range type pre-effect", a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) When the sound) is set to the suppression mode, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether this is the "weak suppression mode" or the "strong suppression mode or no output". After that, by confirming whether or not this is terminated halfway when the operation is performed while the reception allowable sound is being output, is it a "weak suppression mode (not terminated halfway)" or "strong suppression"? It becomes possible to reconfirm whether it is "aspect or non-output (finished in the middle)" while the post-operation effect is performed.

Further, according to the above-mentioned production example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the wide-area type front while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound) is set to the strong suppression mode or non-output. While the effect is executed, when the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow range type pre-effect is executed while the specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is not set to the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, the color rendering property when the narrow region type pre-effect is performed can be suitably maintained.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception allowable state, the aspect in which the mode that appears only at the time of a big hit is executed as a post-operation effect is higher than in the second reception allowable state (the degree of expectation is high). It is higher) as described above. This ratio may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the first reception allowable state (special reception allowable state) occurs and the second reception allowable state (predetermined reception allowable state) from the time before the operation reception is performed. Since different production contents (acceptance allowable sound, image, previous production, etc.) appear depending on when the state) occurs, the second reception allowable state occurs (or the reception allowable state) due to such production contents. If the player detects in advance what is happening, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of a plurality of acceptance allowance states, a fifth acceptance allowance state (specification) is generated based on the fact that the fifth condition is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination. The reception allowable state) is further prepared, and the operation reception is performed while making it difficult to distinguish the fifth reception allowable state from the second reception allowable state until the operation reception is performed. After that, by realizing the production progress that reminds us of the first acceptance state, it is difficult for the gaming interest to decline at least until the operation reception is done. In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, when the fifth reception allowable state occurs, the first reception allowable state is set after the second reception allowable state occurs until the symbol is stopped. It is desirable to set so that the rate of occurrence is high. Further, it is desirable to set so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped differs between when the second acceptance allowable state occurs and when the fifth acceptance allow state occurs. These proportions may be 0% or 100%.

While making it difficult to distinguish between the 2nd reception permissible state and the 5th reception permissible state, the production progress that reminds us of the 1st reception permissible state after the operation reception is made in the 5th reception permissible state is realized. For example, in the case where the second reception allowable state occurs and the case where the fifth reception allowable state occurs, the same mode is output as the reception allowable sound, but the first reception allowable state occurs. In this case, a mode in which the reception allowable sound cannot be output in either the second reception allowable state or the fifth reception allowable state (for example, the type of the sound as the first allowable sound is different, and the second allowable sound is used. Further output mode, etc.) should be output. Then, when the operation is accepted in the second reception allowable state, the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed while the sound that was in the output state at the time of the operation acceptance is continuously output. On the other hand, in the first reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state, when the operation is accepted, (all) the sounds that were in the output state at the time when the operation reception is performed are output in the suppressed mode. A state or a non-output state is set, and the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect or fifth post-operation effect) is executed in the state. In this regard, if a specific effect movable body is used as a target for causing a change in both the first post-operation effect and the fifth post-operation effect, the second reception allowance state and the fifth reception allowance state can be distinguished. However, after the operation reception is performed in the 5th reception allowable state, it becomes possible to realize the production progress reminiscent of the 1st reception allowable state. As a result, the possibility that the first acceptance acceptance state has occurred (the possibility that the acceptance acceptance sound is mistakenly heard) becomes conscious, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment interest will be suppressed. ..

That is, in this case, in the first reception allowable state, at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect). Performing a movable effect (such as the effect shown in FIGS. 162 (C), (D) and 163 (CC1) to (CC3)) for moving the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is possible.

On the other hand, even in the fifth reception allowable state, as the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed, but the first operation is the effect. It is desirable to execute the production as if the content of the production is significantly different from that of the post-production. That is, the fifth reception permissible state is, to the last, "even if a situation appears in which the mode of the pre-production or the reception permissible sound suggests the possibility of the second reception permissible state with low expectation, at least the operation reception is It is prepared for the purpose of "making it possible to maintain the interest of the game until it is done", giving a false recognition that the first acceptance acceptance state had occurred when the post-operation production was executed. If this happens, it is inevitable that the interest in the game will decline when you notice a misrecognition.

Therefore, as such a post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), it is desirable to perform an effect having a more suppressed tendency than in the case of the first post-operation effect. For example, an operation reception is performed. The effect change such as reducing the light emission range or putting it in a non-light emission state without operating the specific effect movable body that was in the light emission state at that time (does not generate a driving force). It is possible to perform it as an effect that causes. In the post-second operation effect, there is no effect change that tends to be suppressed, such as reducing the light emitting range of the specific effect movable body or making it non-light emitting. In this case, the specific movable decorative body has a predetermined light emitting portion.

According to such a configuration, the effect change using the specific effect movable body is made to remind the first reception allowable state (effect after the first operation), thereby reminding the second reception allowable state (second reception allowable state). While trying to recognize that it is not a post-operation production), while the suppressed production content is gradually revealed, it is calmly judged that it is not in the first reception allowable state (first post-operation production). Since it will be possible to do so, it will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in playing games.

In order to enable the fifth post-operation effect to be more preferably executed as an effect having a more suppressed tendency than the first post-operation effect, the first post-operation effect is an operation target. The operating means (operation receiving part such as the effect button) is made to emit light (or causes a change in light emission) when the operation is accepted, and the driving means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operating means is provided. ) Is driven to cause a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the operation means (operation receiving part such as the effect button) that is the operation target is operated. When the reception is made, the light is turned off (it may be a mode in which the light is gradually turned off), and a predetermined movement is performed without driving the drive means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means. It is desirable not to cause (vibration, etc.). In this way, while performing the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect, fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative body in the first reception allowance state and the fifth reception allowance state, the first By making the mode in which the contents of the effect are opposite to each other appear in the effect after the first operation and the effect after the fifth operation, the above-mentioned action and effect can be preferably performed.

FIG. 254 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth reception allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 254 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which the fifth reception allowable state occurs. The fluctuation pattern will be described as a fifth fluctuation pattern, but as described above, it may be the first fluctuation pattern.

Now, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the "fifth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fifth variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

Then, as described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 254 (b), the fifth operation is performed when the timing tE3, in which the fifth predetermined time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, arrives. The fifth reception allowable state (valid period) in which the operation reception regarding the post-production is permitted is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fifth acceptance allowable state (validity period),
-"Non-suppressed reception allowed state (non-suppressed reception allowed state)" in which operation reception is permitted while the "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" corresponding to the fifth fluctuation pattern maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode (See FIGS. 254 (a) and 254 (b)) ”, and ・ When the operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) where the operation reception is allowed. Even so, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started in the "automatic reception mode (see FIG. 254 (i))".
It is designed to be generated as a "non-suppressive / automatic reception effect" executed by. The timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, and may arrive at the end of the set time or after the end.

According to such a configuration, the situation appears as if the second reception allowable state has occurred until the post-operation effect is started to be executed, whereas the post-operation effect is started to be executed depending on the automatic reception mode. When this is done, the production progress as if reminiscent of the first reception permissible state will be realized, so that it will be possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest until the production is started after the operation. ..

Further, also in the fifth reception allowable state, as in the second reception allowable state, as shown in FIGS. 254 (b), (e), and (j), the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which the operation reception is permitted is allowed. ) Occurs, when the timing tE2 arrives, the output of the "acceptable sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is started, and the output state is output across the timing tE3 where the set time occurs. I try to keep it. The length of time from the start of output of the first permissible sound to the permissibility of operation reception is also the same. Further, the sound itself output as the first permissible sound is the same, and the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, which is the same as the second reception permissible state. As a result, with respect to the reception allowable sound, the same mode appears in the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state until the operation reception is performed, so that the game entertainment can be preferably maintained. Be expected.

However, as described above, in the second reception allowable state, the operation is performed at the timing tB3a (FIG. 249 (e)) in which the "reception allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is in the output state after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the reception is made, the set time itself is terminated, but the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the timing (no operation) at which the output as the first allowable sound is completed is completed. The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (FIG. 249 (e)) as at that time. On the other hand, in the fifth reception allowable state, after the set time (valid period) occurs, the "reception allowable sound (first reception allowable sound (first)" is maintained. When the operation is accepted at the timing tE3a (FIG. 254 (e)) in which the "allowable sound)" is in the output state, the set time itself is not only terminated, but also the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)". Also, this is to be terminated halfway. That is, with respect to the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)", such behavior (halfway termination) appears when the operation reception is performed in the first acceptance allowable state. Therefore (FIG. 250 (e)), even though the fifth reception allowable state is occurring, the production progress as if reminiscent of the first reception allowable state is realized. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, when the operation reception is performed within the set time of the fifth reception allowable state (timing tE3a in the figure), the effect display device is used as a post-operation effect according to the operation reception. The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 254 (d)). reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) maintains the execution state until the timing tE5 regardless of the time when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is in the execution state for a predetermined time. Is to be maintained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be executed.

Further, although the illustration is omitted, in this production example, the post-operation effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance allowable state (fifth post-operation effect) and the post-operation effect corresponding to the first acceptance allow state (first). In any of the post-operation effects), at least the "effect using a specific effect movable body" is executed. As described above, the respective production contents of the "production using the specific production movable body" corresponding to the first reception allowable state and the "production using the specific production movable body" corresponding to the fifth reception allowable state are as described above. Is. For example, as the effect after the first operation, the movable effect (FIGS. 162 (C), (D), FIGS. 163 (CC1) to (CC3)) in which the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. ), Etc.) can be performed. Further, as the effect after the fifth operation, the effect change such that the specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the time when the operation reception is performed is reduced in the light emitting range or is put into the non-light emitting state is generated. It can be done as a production.

According to such a configuration, the effect change using the specific effect movable body is made to remind the first reception allowable state (effect after the first operation), thereby reminding the second reception allowable state (second reception allowable state). While trying to recognize that it is not a post-operation production), while the suppressed production content is gradually revealed, it is calmly judged that it is not in the first reception allowable state (first post-operation production). Since it will be possible to do so, it will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in playing games.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 254 (fifth reception allowance state), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 (second reception allowance state), the setting time of the reception allowance state is set at the timing tE3. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image of the operating means to be operated, and also displays a gauge image suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses. Are performed respectively. Further, the display mode of these images and gauge images is the same as in the case of the second reception allowable state, and for example, they are displayed as an integrated image IG. The same applies to the fact that the special mode shown in FIG. 232 (d) is not displayed as the integrated image IG. As a result, until the operation reception is performed, the same mode appears in the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state with respect to the copy image and the gauge image, so that the game entertainment is preferably maintained. It is expected.

In this example as well, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the time when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is started to be output, but it is not limited to this, and either one starts earlier. It may be done. Alternatively, only one of the image and the reception allowable sound (for example, only the image) may be started before the timing tE3. However, even when such another example or the other example described above is adopted, the configuration until the operation reception is performed should be matched between the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (c) to 254 (f), when the timing tE3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated image (image, gauge image) is displayed. Is assumed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a fifth post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration. At least one of the effect movements by the body) will be started, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the effect after the fifth operation is started, the integrated image (image, gauge image) Is not hidden and remains visible. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, no change due to the integrated image (specific layer) occurs at that time (timing tE3a), and a short time (predetermined) from there. Until the timing tE3b when the time) elapses, the "display on the integrated image (image, gauge image)" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. The display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when the timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes it difficult or invisible to see a part or the whole of the integrated image (image, gauge image) in the display state is displayed. Make it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 related to this production example, the integrated image (image, gauge image) is not hidden and displayed even when such an image (disappearance effect) is started to be displayed. Maintain the state. More specifically, even under the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer where the integrated image (image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated image (image, gauge) is displayed. No change is caused due to the change in the image), and the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the extinction effect is displayed on the layer in front of it, the model image and the gauge image are difficult to see or cannot be seen.

That is, in this case, even though the image of the extinction effect is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making it difficult to see the image or the gauge image (integrated image) or making it invisible. The image or gauge image (integrated image) displayed on the specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) itself remains the same as when the operation reception was permitted. The display in is maintained and no change will occur. Further, with respect to the gauge image, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced will be continued across the operation reception. This makes it difficult to see the image or gauge image (integrated image), or even in the process of making it invisible, the mode (at least a part) when the operation reception is permitted. You will be able to see it.

In addition, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated image (image, gauge image) is completed within the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) in which the image of the extinction effect is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated image is integrated. The image of the disappearance effect will be displayed when the image (image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer.

Regarding the image and gauge image, such a display method after the operation reception is made is common to the 1st reception allowable state and the 5th reception allowable state, so that the game interest may be lowered by this. There is no.

Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 254, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 in which the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs arrives, less than half of the predetermined display area is reached. The narrow-area type pre-effect that uses only the area of is started to be executed. Then, within the period in which the image related to the narrow-range type pre-effect is displayed, first, the display of the image (here, the integrated image) that imitates the operation receiving portion and the first permissible sound are displayed. Each output is started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the image (here, the integrated image) is started, a part or the whole of the image (integrated image) becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image related to the narrow area type pre-effect. There is. That is, as time passes, the display range of the image related to the narrow-area type pre-effect is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "image (integrated image)" is used. The visibility of the image) will be gradually improved. ” In this regard, even in the 5th reception allowable state, the narrow area type pre-effect is executed and the image (here, the integrated image) is displayed, and the 5 reception allowable state is displayed. The operation reception is permitted when the timing tE3 at which the above occurs occurs, and the narrow-area type pre-production is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permission state occurs.

Here, the image used for such a narrow-range type pre-effect may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the image (integrated image) is displayed. Then, the image (integrated image) and the image (narrow area type pre-effect) are displayed as one video prepared in advance, and the visibility of the image (integrated image IG) gradually becomes higher in the image. It may be something that expresses how it is being enhanced. However, as for the image of the narrow area type pre-effect corresponding to the fifth reception allowable state, it is desirable to use the same image as the image of the narrow area type pre-effect corresponding to the second reception allowable state.

In the narrow range type pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the output of the effect sound related thereto may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permissible state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the purpose is to maintain a sense of tension regarding operation-related matters, the narrow-range type pre-production is used. It can be said that it is desirable to perform the image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to enhance the concentration on the effect.

In this way, even for the narrow-area type pre-production that occurs before the operation reception is permitted, the same mode appears in the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state. It is expected to be maintained favorably.

According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the effect is relatively advanced in the same manner as the effect contents shown in FIGS. 251 (a) to 251 (e). Even if the player is notified in advance that the highly anticipated first acceptance state has not occurred, it is interesting to know whether the second acceptance allowance state or the fifth acceptance allowance state will occur. It will be possible to make it possible, and it will be expected that the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed.

However, as described above, after the operation by the player is detected in the 5th reception allowable state and the post-operation effect (5th post-operation effect) is started, the first reception allow state is not the second reception allow state. The production will be developed in a manner reminiscent of.

That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation by the player is detected (operation reception) in the fifth reception allowable state, the sound that is in the output state in the non-suppressed mode at the time when the operation reception is performed ( All of) are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state, and this is terminated halfway. In the example shown in FIG. 250 (first allowable sound), when the operation reception is performed, the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode are changed to the strongly suppressed mode. The output state of the above or the non-output state was set so that these were terminated halfway. However, in the example (fifth reception allowable state) shown in FIG. 254, when the operation reception is performed, the operation is not suppressed. The "BGM reproduction sound" and the "first permissible sound" that were in the output state in the mode are set to the output state in the strongly suppressed mode or are set to the non-output state, and these are terminated halfway. As a result, with respect to (all) the sounds that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode before the operation reception is performed, the operation reception is triggered in both the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state. Since the output state is set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or the output state is set to the non-output state, it becomes possible to recall the first acceptance allowable state at the timing tE3a shown in FIG. 254. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In this case, it does not matter whether the output state is set to the strong suppression mode or the non-output state is triggered by the operation reception, but the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state are used. It is desirable to do the same processing in. For example, in the second reception allowable state, if the sound that had been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then is changed to the non-output state with the operation reception as an opportunity, the operation reception is also triggered in the fifth reception allowable state. The sound that was in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then is changed to the non-output state.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 254 (g) to 254 (k), it is assumed that the set time elapses (the second acceptance allowable state ends) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the fifth reception allowable state is executed in the automatic reception mode, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without the player performing the operation, the operation reception is performed. The same process will be executed.

Therefore, in the timing tE3c, not only the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is started to be executed, but also the sound (here, the sound of BGM reproduction) that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode is strongly suppressed. The output state in the mode or the non-output state is set, and these are terminated halfway. Even in the first acceptance allowable state (FIG. 250), a predetermined sound (for example, the first allowable sound) is output in a non-suppressed mode until the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives, and the timing tC4f is output. In, the output state may be set to the strong suppression mode, or the output state may be set to the non-output state, and this may be terminated halfway.

Further, at the timing tE3d, the "wide area type extinction effect" is started to be executed as the extinction effect described above while the effect after the fifth operation is already in the execution state. Regarding the "wide area type extinction effect", the image itself is not necessarily the same as in the case of the first reception allowable state, but the extinction accompanied by a change from the background image displayed until the operation reception is performed. It is desirable to have it run as an effect. That is, in this case, it goes without saying that the execution is performed using at least half of the display area. As a result, the extinction effect after the operation reception is performed (after the post-operation effect is executed) is the same in both the second reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state (wide area type extinction effect). Since it will be executed in, it will be possible to recall the first reception allowable state after the operation reception is done (after the post-operation production is executed, and it is possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby. The mode of such an extinction effect is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tE3c). The same applies to the case of the first reception allowable state.

In the example shown in FIG. 254, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) ends at the timing when the "BGM reproduction sound" is output again in the non-suppressed mode in the fifth reception allowable state. Although it is set as the timing tE5 to be performed, it may be the timing that arrives while the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, or the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) may be set. It may be the timing that arrives after the end.

Further, also in the first reception allowable state, as in the fifth reception allowable state, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode is set when the operation reception is performed. May be good.

In the 1st reception allowable state and the 5th reception allowable state, the process of changing the sound that was in the output state in the non-suppressed mode to the "output in the suppressed mode" or the "non-output state", and the output sound after the operation are performed. The process to be output does not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, and any of these processes may be started as long as the operation is accepted.

Further, as described above, when the operation reception is performed in the fifth reception allowable state, the specific effect movable body that has been in the light emitting state until then is turned off for a predetermined time (fifth operation). (Post-production), when the operation reception is performed in the first reception allowable state, a driving force is applied to the specific production movable body to make a predetermined production operation appear (after the first operation). (Direction) is desirable. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, a driving force is generated for the driving means corresponding to the operating means to be operated so that a predetermined movement (vibration or the like) appears in the operating means. On the other hand, it is desirable not to perform such a process in the effect after the fifth operation. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, the light emitting mode of the operation means targeted for operation is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the light emission in the operation means targeted for operation is turned off. It is desirable to do so. It is desirable that these processes in the first acceptance allowance state and the fifth acceptance allowance state be such that they can appear when the same result (for example, jackpot winning) is obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

Further, when the movable effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the effect after the first operation, it is desirable to enable light emission in a manner in which the specific effect movable body does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

Further, in the first post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is continuously output after the output is started, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is output. Is output for a predetermined time, it is desirable that a state in which no effect sound is output in the non-suppressed mode (a state in which the sound is output in the strongly suppressed mode or a non-output state) appears. According to such a configuration, in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is properly executed, but there is a tendency that this is suppressed as compared with the case of the first post-operation effect. It will be possible to play games, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, it is desirable that the reception permissible sound output when they occur differs between the first reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state. That is, as described above, in the first acceptance allowable state, the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output, whereas in the fifth acceptance allowable state, the second is accepted. The permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first permissible sound (sound effect) itself be output as a different sound.

Further, as described above, the first reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state (second reception allowable state) are shown in the same mode (FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) as the image (integrated image). Aspect) can be displayed. However, even if the same mode is displayed as a similar image (integrated image) in the first reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state (second reception allowable state), the size required for the display. It is desirable that the images are displayed differently (similar to each other), and in the fifth reception allowable state (second reception allowable state), they are displayed in a smaller mode than in the case of the first reception allowable state. However, the size is also displayed in the same mode in the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state. In the first reception allowable state, a special mode can be displayed as a copy image (integrated copy image), but in the fifth reception allow state (second reception allow state), the copy image (integrated copy image) can be displayed. ) As described above, the special aspect is not displayed.

Further, in the first post-operation effect according to the first reception allowable state, the effect sound (variation pattern) that does not trigger the operation reception while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in an unsuppressed mode. It is desirable that the production sound (the production sound output at a predetermined timing) is started to be output in a non-suppressed manner (for example, the return of BGM). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect according to the fifth reception allowable state, the effect sound that does not trigger the operation reception while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode ( It is desirable that the output sound (the production sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) is not started to be output in a non-suppressed manner. That is, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is set to the non-output state, the production sound (the production sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) that is not triggered by the operation reception is non-output. Since the output is started in the suppressed mode, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first reception allowable state.

Further, as described above, the second acceptance allowance state can be generated in both the fluctuation pattern in which the first acceptance allowance state occurs and the fluctuation pattern in which the first acceptance allowance state does not occur, so that the second acceptance allowance can occur. When a state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance allowable state may occur within the period until the symbol change in the executing state is stopped. Further, as for the 5th acceptance allowable state, the 5th acceptance allow state is generated by making it possible to occur in both the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st acceptance allow state occurs and the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st acceptance allow state does not occur. In such a case, the possibility that the first acceptance allowance state may occur within the period until the symbol change in the execution state is stopped may be provided. However, in this case, when the 5th acceptance allowance state occurs, the ratio of the 1st acceptance allowance state occurring within the period until the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when the 2nd acceptance allowance state occurs. It is desirable to set to. This ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player detects in advance that the first reception allowable state has not occurred before the operation reception is performed, the fifth reception allowable state has occurred. Since the possibilities can be expected, the decline in the game interest can be suppressed.

According to the above-mentioned production example, as a result of the operation being accepted when the sound image (integrated sound image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)), the operation is performed. If the reception allowable sound is not terminated in the middle based on the reception, not only the reception allowable sound but also other sounds that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (such as "BGM playback sound") are also in the non-suppressed mode. The output state will be maintained (see FIG. 249). On the other hand, as a result of the operation reception being performed when the sound image (integrated sound image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)), based on the operation reception. When the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle, not only the reception allowable sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were in the output state in the non-suppression mode are output or non-output in the strong suppression mode. (See FIG. 254).

According to the above-mentioned production example, in a situation where a big hit is obtained by the big hit judgment, the operation is accepted when the image (integrated image) is displayed, and as a result, the operation is accepted based on the operation reception. When the permissible sound is terminated in the middle, based on the operation reception, "when the specific effect movable body is made to emit light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 250)" and "the state is in the light emitting state". There is a case where the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or the light emitting area is turned off and no effect operation is generated (FIG. 254). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest in the situation where the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle. In the case of "when the specific effect movable body is made to emit light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 250)", the light is not emitted by "the process of reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body or turning it off". It is desirable that the portion marked with light is also emitted.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, the integrated image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. Further, when the simulated image and the gauge image are displayed separately as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and the following examples, the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output so that there is a time when they are output overlapping each other, but after the first permissible sound is output. The output of the second permissible sound may be started.

Further, in the acceptance allowable state according to each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the following examples, the image is displayed as an integrated image IG including the gauge image GG, but it is not necessarily displayed as an image including the gauge image GG. It does not have to be.

The acceptance acceptance state according to each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the following examples can occur in both the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss.

In each reception allowable state described above and each reception allowable state described later, it was decided to execute the disappearance effect as an image different from the image when the post-operation effect is executed, but it was executed in the non-automatic reception mode. As a result, it is desirable to execute the extinction effect by fading out the image itself only when the post-operation effect is not executed in order to make the expectation unrecognizable. In this case, the image itself displayed on the specific layer is subjected to a process of being changed from the mode in which the reception is allowed.

In each reception allowable state described above and each reception allowable state described later, even if the same reception allowable state is obtained, when the jackpot is won, when the jackpot is lost (missing), or for post-operation production. The type of the extinction effect may be changed depending on the degree of expectation as such an aspect.

The wide area disappearance effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area type disappearance effect is set to less than half of the display screen. However, if "display area of wide area type disappearance effect> display area of narrow area type disappearance effect", it is not always necessary. It does not have to meet the conditions of more than half or less than half. Similarly for the front effect, the wide area type front effect is more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area type front effect is less than half of the display screen. However, "Display area of wide area type front effect> Display area of narrow area type front effect" If it is, it does not necessarily have to satisfy the conditions of more than half or less than half.

The post-operation effect may be executed only by the liquid crystal display, the sound output, or the light emission by the lamp provided on the game board 5. In short, any change may occur in the display, sound, light emission, etc., triggered by the operation reception.

Further, the "specific type of effect sound" may be a BGM reproduction sound output during normal fluctuations, or a BGM reproduction sound output over a plurality of fluctuations.

Further, the fourth reception allowable state does not necessarily have to be executed in the non-automatic reception mode, and may be executed in the automatic reception mode.

In addition, a post-operation effect when the operation reception is performed in the first reception allowable state (first post-operation effect) and a post-operation effect when the operation reception is performed in the fourth reception allow state (fourth post-operation effect). It is desirable to make the contents of each production different.

In each of the above examples and each of the examples described later, when the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, the process of reducing the visibility of the integrated image IG (specific layer) itself (increasing the transmittance, etc.). You may also do it at the same time.

In each of the above examples and the following examples, the image applied to the extinction effect (wide area extinction effect, narrow area extinction effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance, and in this case, , Even if it is displayed so as to overlap the entire image (integrated image), it is possible to confirm the mode of the image (integrated image).

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, the "narrow-range type front production" means "background change (the background image that has been displayed up to that point is made invisible, and a new background image is displayed." It may also be referred to as "pre-production without production) that allows the production to be performed in a state." In this case, the "wide area type front effect" is "background change (an effect that makes the background image that has been displayed invisible until then and makes the effect appear in a state where a new background image is displayed). It means "pre-production accompanied by". The background image may be a solid black image, a solid white image, or the like.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d) may be omitted as the mode of the integrated image. In this case, the "special aspect" is defined as an operating means (an aspect in which the shape of the image itself imitating the operation receiving portion is the same and the shape of the peripheral decorative image is different (the aspect shown in FIG. 232 (c)). It will be used.

When a model image (integrated image) is displayed in each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the effect examples described later, the model image is a "movement in a movable region" or "operation in a movable region" as an operation means (operation receiving unit). As described above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of expressing "behavior when the image is displayed". In this respect, it is desirable that such dynamic display is continued on a specific layer even after the operation is accepted until it is hidden.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each of the production examples described later, the display method related to the image is appropriately changed to FIGS. 232 to 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and the contents described in another example. Or may be added. Further, regarding the image, gauge image, reception allowable sound, and post-operation effect when the first reception allowable state occurs, FIG. 212 to FIG. 248, and among the explanatory texts and other examples corresponding to these figures, "BGM" It is also possible to appropriately change or add to the description or the content applied to another example regarding "the validity period that occurs while the reproduced sound is set to the strongly suppressed mode". .. Further, regarding the image, gauge image, reception allowable sound, and post-operation effect when the second reception allowable state occurs, FIG. 212 to FIG. 248, and among the explanatory texts and other examples corresponding to these figures, "BGM" It is also possible to appropriately change or add to the description or the content applied to another example regarding "the validity period that occurs while the reproduced sound is in the non-suppressed mode". ..

[More detailed color rendering of the image disappearance effect, etc.]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected effects (such as notice effects) will be executed.

Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the jackpot determination is determined by controlling the effect content display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variation effect by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game or high as a privilege for the player. The transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes feasible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the above decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description, the movement of the movable body, etc. The expected effect of the above is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit has been obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the fluctuation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the design production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to generate an acceptable acceptance state (validity period).

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination. Even in such a case, when a special result is obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, the production reception is allowed when the symbol production based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. It is possible to generate an acceptable state of acceptance (validity period). However, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. In addition, the acceptance allowance state (validity period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of the result obtained as the advance notice production judgment. May also be provided. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice production judgment. It is desirable not to do so, or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance allowable state (validity period) that can occur under these conditions is the effecting member to be produced as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (validity period). Post-reception effect (post-operation effect) that generates predetermined changes (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. Since the reception is only performed, the reception permissible state (valid period) itself is poorly directed, and there is a concern that the game interest related to the reception period will decline.

The "operation by the player" to be detected, including the above-mentioned examples and the later-described examples, is directly operated by the player such as "operation button 410" and "sword decoration body 5001". Not limited to those that are (pressing motion or sword pulling motion), "contact motion by the player to a specific part" that is the detection target by the touch sensor and "player in the specific space" that is the detection target by the non-contact sensor. It means that it also includes "operation by". In short, it should be provided with one or more reception means (operation means) to be accepted so that the movement by the player (pressing movement, sword pulling movement, touch movement, non-contact movement, etc.) can be used for the production. Just do it.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effectability is provided. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have all of these configurations, or may only include any configuration. Furthermore, each of the effectability (configuration) described below is merely an example, and may have some configuration that can suppress a decline in the game entertainment interest related to the reception period.

[Structure 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the image display displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) is based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted. It is possible to display after the production has progressed (after the production change based on acceptance has started), and even after the production has progressed based on the acceptance, the image display will be accepted. The player can grasp which mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) is displayed within the period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production contents (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as the post-reception production) that proceed when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted are the notification production (expectation suggestion production). ) Is prepared for a plurality of reception periods (valid periods) with different types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of a type according to the result of the judgment (effect judgment).

In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when the movement by the player is received within the specific reception period, the specific post-reception effect image is displayed as the “effect display device 1600” based on the acceptance. In addition to being able to display in the above, a specific mode can appear separately from the specific post-acceptance effect image, and when the specific mode appears, the pachinko image display is made difficult to see. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance is made, and the specific mode is before the image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility of the image, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift the gaze target from the "image display" to the "directed image after a specific reception". ..

However, since the image display is originally displayed within the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, if the image display is displayed even after the acceptance is made, the acceptance will be accepted. It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a specific post-reception production image is already displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the image display is hidden (invisible) while the specific mode appears, while the specific post-reception effect is produced. The image is designed to be displayed while a specific aspect appears. That is, in this case, after the movement is accepted by the player, the display effect from the pre-reception display (model image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception effect image) is applied while the specific mode appears. Since the transition will be realized, just by confirming whether it is in the situation before the specific mode appears or in the situation where the specific mode has finished appearing, from the pre-reception display (image display) It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not the transition to the display after reception (specific post-reception effect image) has been completed.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, both the above-mentioned specific mode and the above-mentioned specific post-reception effect image appear based on the fact that the reception has been made, but the above-mentioned specific mode is the above-mentioned specific reception. It appears in a situation where the specific post-reception effect image is not yet displayed before the post-effect image is displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the specific post-acceptance production image has not yet been displayed, the image display becomes difficult to see due to the above specific mode. After the reception, the production image is in a state where it can appear soon, and it will be possible to prompt in advance to prepare the mind to change the gaze destination by the player from the "difficult to see image display". ..

[Structure 2]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first reception period (valid period) of the plurality of reception periods (valid period). A mode in which the first post-reception effect image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and the pachinko image display becomes difficult to see separately from the first post-reception effect image (first effect mode). Can appear. Further, when the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period out of the plurality of reception periods (valid periods), the first post-reception production image is different from the first post-reception production image based on the acceptance. A mode different from the case of the first reception period (second effect) as a mode in which the post-reception effect image of 2 can be displayed and the image display becomes difficult to see separately from the second post-reception effect image. Aspects) can appear. The above-mentioned "specific mode" may correspond to either the first effect mode or the second effect mode, or may not correspond to any of them.

According to such a configuration, the model image display can be visually recognized without confirming which of the "first post-reception effect image" and the "second post-reception effect image" is displayed as the post-reception effect image. The type of post-reception effect image (first post-reception effect image, second post-reception effect image) can be inferred only by confirming what kind of mode is difficult. That is, the mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) in which the image display becomes difficult to see is a predetermined area and at least a part of the "display screen of the effect display device 1600" on which the image display is displayed. Whether it is realized as an image displayed in a specific overlapping area (if it overlaps with all of them from the start of appearance, a predetermined transmittance is set), or in the image display and front view Needless to say, it is realized as an effect using predetermined effect bodies at overlapping positions (for example, a movable body effect). Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change the gaze destination from the image display even after being accepted, the type of mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) that appears at the gaze destination (so as to overlap with the image display). ) Can be confirmed, so that the type of post-reception production (first post-reception production image, second post-reception production image) can be inferred without changing the gaze destination. Become

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the third reception period (valid period) of the plurality of reception periods (valid period). It is possible to display a third post-reception effect image that is different from both the first post-reception effect image and the second post-reception effect image based on the acceptance, but the third post-reception effect image can be displayed. Apart from that, as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception period can appear.

According to such a configuration, it is unclear whether the first or third post-acceptance effect image appears when the first effect mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display. As a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, when the second effect mode appears, it can be inferred that the second post-acceptance effect image appears. That is, in this case, for example, when the first effect mode appears, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the second post-acceptance effect image is output is denied, but the first and third post-acceptance effect images It is unclear which one will appear, and it will be possible for the player to be interested in which one will appear. Therefore, when a mode that makes it difficult to see the image display appears. It will be possible to preferably promote the shift of the gaze destination to the place where the production is performed after the reception, while maintaining the effect and tension of.

Here, "post-reception production image" has been illustrated as an example of post-reception production, but for example, "lamp emission" and "movable body movement" as post-reception production are the first reception period and the second reception period. If it is executed in a different manner in (or it is executed when there is an acceptance within one acceptance period, but it is not executed when there is an acceptance within the other acceptance period), the above-mentioned "acceptance" It is also possible to replace "post-effect image" with "lamp emission" or "moving body movement". In any case, in view of the above-mentioned effects such as "the type of post-reception effect can be inferred without changing the gaze destination", the image display is displayed for the post-reception effect. The location is deviated from the front view, and is realized as being executed at a position where the player does not overlap (a position that cannot be confirmed unless the player changes the gaze destination from the position where the image display is displayed). In addition, when a plurality of post-reception effects such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp emission", and "movable body movement" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, at least one of the post-reception effects is described above. It can be said that the above-mentioned action and effect can be achieved as long as it corresponds to the "post-reception production".

If multiple post-reception effects (multiple post-reception modes) such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp emission", and "movable body movement" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, those post-reception effects () The point that at least one of the post-reception modes) can be made to correspond to the "post-reception effect" is applicable not only to the above-mentioned effect examples but also to each effect example described later.

[Structure 3]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the post-acceptance production is performed based on the acceptance. As one aspect), the special effect mode can be executed, and during the execution period of the special effect mode, there are a state in which the pachinko image display is relatively easy to see and a state in which the pachinko image display is relatively difficult to see. I have to.

That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display even after the execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect) is started based on the acceptance. .. In addition, during the execution period of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), the image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that the "special effect mode (post-reception effect)" can be changed from "image display". It is expected that the player will be encouraged to move the gaze target naturally.

In the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned special effect mode (effect after reception) does not affect the visibility of the model image display that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before being accepted. The execution is started as follows. More specifically, the image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the special effect mode (post-reception effect) covers at least a part of the predetermined area. It is not an image display that is displayed by using it, nor is it an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the predetermined area in front view. As a result, during the execution period of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), the image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that the "special effect mode (post-reception effect)" can be changed from "image display". ) ”Will be expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when reception is performed within a specific reception period, at least a state in which a special production mode and a predetermined production mode are parallel to each other appears based on the reception. It has become. However, the predetermined effect mode is started to be executed so as to adversely affect the visibility of the image display (make it difficult to see the image display) after the special effect mode is started (behind the special effect mode). It is supposed to be done. As a result, during the execution period of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), the image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that the "special effect mode (post-reception effect)" can be changed from "image display". ) ”Will be expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

It should be noted that the process of causing the predetermined effect mode to appear is also started to be executed based on the acceptance. Therefore, the post-reception effect is assumed to be parallel to a plurality of post-reception effects (plural post-reception modes) including at least a special effect mode and a predetermined effect mode, and the predetermined effect mode is realized as one aspect of the post-reception effect. You may do so. In any case, the predetermined effect mode described in this configuration example is an image display displayed by utilizing at least a part of a predetermined area in which the image display is displayed, or at least a part of the predetermined area. It will be realized as an effect executed by using the effect body located at the position where it overlaps with the front view.

[Structure 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the image display is displayed. By using a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area which is a display target area of the image display, it is possible to display a "specific disappearance effect display" as a mode for making the image display difficult to see. The image display is set to be hidden while the specific extinction effect display is displayed after the specific extinction effect display is started to be displayed.

That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a model image display even after the acceptance has been made. In addition, the visibility of the image display is reduced by a specific extinction effect display until the image display is hidden, and the image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. Therefore, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the image display is hidden is small, and the deterioration of the game interest when the image display is hidden is suppressed. You will be able to get it.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific extinction effect display can be displayed even in the period after the image display is hidden, and at least the specific extinction effect display is displayed. The production is started after the reception. Then, the post-reception effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area, which is the display target area of the specific extinction effect display, or (at least one of) the specific extinction effect display. It is designed to be realized by using the effect body that is located at the position where it overlaps with the part) in front view.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effect executed at the position where the specific extinction effect display overlaps with the front view is watched from the position where the specific extinction effect display is displayed. It will be recognizable without shifting the destination. That is, in this case, when the specific extinction effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-acceptance effect. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably.

[Structure 5]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific mode is within the period from the acceptance of the movement by the player during the reception period (specific reception period) until the image display is hidden. It may appear, and when the specific aspect appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the pachinko image display. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the precursor effect display is executed in a specific precursor mode based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, etc.). When the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period corresponding to the precursor effect display, the specific mode is within the period from the time of acceptance until the above-mentioned image display is hidden. It is made possible to appear in.

That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that when the precursor effect display is executed in the specific precursor mode, the specific mode appears before the model image display is hidden, making the model image display difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to pay close attention to which mode the image display appears before the player performs the operation. The "specific mode" according to the configuration 5 and the "specific mode" according to the configuration 1 may be the same mode, may be different modes, or occur in response to different reception periods. It may be.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific precursor mode based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, etc.). When the action by the player is accepted within the reception period corresponding to the precursor effect display (reception period different from the specific reception period), the above specific mode is a state in which the image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until it is made, and there are cases where it does not appear within the period.

According to such a configuration, when the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific precursor mode, the specific mode is from the time the reception is received until the image display is hidden. Since it is unclear whether or not it will appear within the period of, the effectability from the time it is accepted until the image display is hidden will be improved. The tension can be maintained favorably.

The above configuration 5 may be realized by replacing it with the following configuration, or may be provided as a configuration (acceptance period) different from the above configuration 5. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the image display is hidden after the movement by the player is accepted during the reception period (a specific reception period or a reception period different from the specific reception period). Within the period until the pachinko machine is used, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the pachinko image display. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the precursor effect display is the same as the specific precursor mode (same as the specific precursor mode) based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, etc.). If the action by the player is accepted within the reception period corresponding to the precursor effect display, the above-mentioned specific mode is such that the above-mentioned image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. Make it impossible to appear within the period until. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the special precursor mode, the specific mode does not appear until the model image display is hidden, and it is difficult to visually recognize the model image display in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that you will not be crushed.

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the above special precursor mode based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, etc.). When the action by the player is accepted within the reception period corresponding to the effect display (reception period different from the above reception period), in the above specific mode, the image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until then, and cases where it does not appear within the period. Even with such a configuration, when the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the special precursor mode, the model image display is hidden from the time when the specific mode is accepted. Since it will be unclear whether or not it will appear within the period until, the effectability will be improved from the time it is accepted until the image display is hidden. , The tension can be maintained favorably.

With respect to the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), each of the above-mentioned or later-described configurations applicable to the above-mentioned configuration 5 can be appropriately applied.

[Structure 6]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types are prepared as precursor display effects suggesting that the reception period in which the movement by the player is the reception target will soon occur. Then, among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays, the specific precursor effect display can be executed in a form straddling the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. The movement by the player can be accepted.

That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to accept the operation by the player while making it possible to confirm which type (aspect) is displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (aspect) of the precursor effect display is changed. It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment due to forgetting to check.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is displayed, a post-reception effect (for example, a special post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the acceptance is performed. The execution is started, but the specific precursor effect display is displayed without being hidden even when the effect is started after the reception.

That is, in this case, the operation by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (aspect) is displayed as the precursor effect display, and further, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the precursor effect display.

[Structure 7]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period (for example, a specific reception period) occurs, the reception means is in a state where acceptance by the reception means is permitted, or acceptance by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the reception allowable sound audible, which suggests that the state will be (soon), it will be suppressed that the player forgets to perform the operation for acceptance.

The reception permissible sound is the timing at which the reception period occurs even if it is realized as something that is audible before the corresponding reception period occurs (suggesting that the reception period will occur soon). It can be made audible by straddling it, and can be made audible even during the reception period, at least halfway through. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 in which the tone setting value can be set to "0", in the situation where the volume setting value is set to "0", the reception allowable sound is output, but it is in the audible state. Will not be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the movement by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowable sound is audible (output state) within the acceptance period (for example, a specific acceptance period), the above-mentioned "image display" is displayed. Before the "mode that makes it difficult to see (disappearing effect display, etc.)" appears, the above-mentioned allowable reception sound is played in a state where the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearing effect display, etc.)" has not yet appeared. The process for making it inaudible is started.

That is, in this case, even if the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" has not yet appeared after the acceptance, the player is informed that the acceptance period has already expired. It becomes possible to suggest favorably. As a result, even if the timing at which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears after acceptance is delayed, inconvenience is unlikely to occur, so that the image display can be displayed in a mode with good visibility. become

[Structure 8]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period (a plurality of reception periods with different post-reception effects) are prepared. Then, from the time when the movement by the player is accepted while the image display is displayed until the image display is hidden, the image display becomes difficult to see. It is supposed to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the movement by the player is accepted while the image display is displayed during the first reception period, and the case where the image display is displayed during the second reception period. In both cases where the movement by the player is accepted, the "mode in which the pachinko image display becomes difficult to see" appears before the pachinko image display is hidden. ing.

That is, in this case, in either the first reception period or the second reception period, the reception period has ended while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a model image display since the reception was made. You will be able to suggest that you are in a state. The "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 8 may be the same type of reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to the configuration 2. However, the reception period may be different from each other.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and the first mode appears in the first reception period. Since the second mode appears in the second reception period, it is possible to give the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" to have a color rendering index related to the type of the reception period.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a third aspect is further prepared as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and in the first reception period, regardless of whether or not the reception is received within the period. The first aspect may appear, but in the second reception period, the second aspect appears when the reception is received within the period, and the third aspect appears when the reception is not received within the period.

According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, it is determined whether or not the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period based on the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" that appears. However, in the first reception period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the movement by the player has been accepted within the reception period based on the appearance of "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". It is expected that the game will be improved through such directing.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples or the following production examples, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" means the disappearance effect display in a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area in which the image display is displayed. In addition to the mode in which is displayed, the mode in which the effect using the effect body located at a position where the image display is overlapped with at least a part of the predetermined area in front view is executed, the image display itself is visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to display (for example, the display may be made smaller, blurred, or the transmittance setting may be changed).

[Structure 9]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, when the reception period (for example, a specific reception period) occurs, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where acceptance by the reception means is permitted, or a state in which reception by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute a process of making the reception allowable sound audible, which suggests that the sound will be (soon), it will be possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the reception operation.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect suggesting that a reception period for the operation by the player is to be received soon. Then, among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays, the specific precursor effect display can be executed in a form straddling the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. The movement by the player can be accepted. That is, in this case, since the movement by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which mode is displayed as the precursor effect display, the game by forgetting to confirm the mode of the precursor effect display. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest. The "specific precursor effect display" according to the configuration 9 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to the configuration 6, or may be a precursor effect display of a different type (aspect). ..

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific precursor effect display is displayed even after the effect (post-reception effect) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player has progressed. By making it possible, the player side can confirm which mode has appeared as a precursor effect display even after the acceptance has been made.

However, since the precursor display effect is originally displayed in a state where acceptance is not allowed (before the reception period occurs), the player can perform an operation while the precursor display effect is displayed. Even if it is done, the player may feel anxious about whether or not the action has been accepted. Nevertheless, if the precursor effect display is simply displayed even after the acceptance has been made, there is a concern that the game interest will decline due to the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the acceptance has been made. To.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the movement by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed, the specific precursor effect is produced even after the acceptance is made. Although the display is displayed, a mode in which the specific precursor effect display is difficult to see appears while the specific precursor effect display is displayed. Then, after the embodiment appears, the specific precursor effect display is hidden under the condition that the specific precursor effect display is difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the precursor effect display, and the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the acceptance has already been made.

[Structure 10]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used for both the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. ), A predetermined image display can be displayed, and the pachinko image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. There is. Then, when the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, a mode in which the image display is difficult to see appears while the image display is displayed. The "mode that makes it difficult to see" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the above-mentioned predetermined image display that can be displayed even when the symbol changes without the reception period.

That is, in this case, since the specific extinction effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that is not related to the reception period, it is directly related to the reception period. You will be able to proceed with the game without adversely affecting the color rendering.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) is used as an image display that is not relevant to the reception period (reception period during occurrence). The second image display and the second image display can be displayed respectively within the reception period, and the specific extinction effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display (the second image display (predetermined image display)). It is supposed to be displayed so as to affect the visibility of (hold).

According to such a configuration, although the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the visibility is affected when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears depending on the type. In some cases, the visibility will not be affected. Therefore, when the player performs an operation, it should be confirmed whether or not the image display that is not directly related to the reception period should be confirmed. It will be possible to provide an effect on the image.

However, in this case, the first image display shall be displayed as an image (suggestion) related to (suggesting) the winning (expectation) of the symbol variation, and the second image display shall be displayed as the symbol variation. By making it displayed as a display that does not relate to (not suggests) the winning (expectation), it is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating when the visibility of the second image display is affected. It can be said that it is desirable above.

In addition, when the "specific disappearance effect display" displayed on the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the operation by the player is accepted within the reception period. If so, it is specified by using a specific area including at least a part of a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) which is a display target area of the image display while the image display is displayed. The disappearance effect display of is displayed.

[Structure 11]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used for both the symbol fluctuation (fluctuation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol fluctuation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. A predetermined image display can be displayed in the slingshot, and the pachinko image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. .. The "predetermined image display" in the configuration 11 may be the same as the "predetermined image display" in the configuration 10, or may be a different image display. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, the image display is displayed, and the image display becomes difficult to see. A plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared as modes that can appear and the image display is difficult to see.

That is, in this case, since any one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", a game entertainment hobby when the model image display becomes difficult to see. Will be expected to improve.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "first aspect" as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is executed, the "first aspect" is defined as the image display. When the "second aspect" as the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" is executed, the "second aspect" is defined as the image display. Of the image display of, only the image display is executed so as to be difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to create a color rendering index as to which of the "first mode" and the "second mode" appears as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". It will be expected to improve the interest.

It should be noted that the image display and the predetermined image display are in a state where either the acceptance period of the type corresponding to the above "first aspect" or the acceptance period of the type corresponding to the above "second aspect" occurs. It is desirable to be able to display the image in order to improve the interest of the game.

[Structure 12]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1
-It is possible to generate a first reception period in which acceptance by the reception means (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, and if the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period, the acceptance is made. Based on this, the first reception effect execution means capable of executing the effect display after the first reception in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations (the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped), and the reception means (for example, the operation button 410). It may be present, or it may be a sword decoration body 5001 different from the operation button 410), and it is possible to generate a second reception period in which acceptance by the sword decoration body 5001 is permitted, and the operation by the player is performed within the second reception period. When accepted, the second reception effect execution means capable of executing the second post-acceptance effect display in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations (ratio of jackpot symbols being stopped) based on the acceptance. It has. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) may be 0% or 100%. Further, the first post-reception effect display and the second post-reception effect display are executed as displays of different types as the advance notice effect. Further, the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to the configuration 12 are the same types of reception periods as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" related to the above configurations 2 and 8. It may be a reception period of different types from each other.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, either the case where the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period or the case where the movement by the player is received within the second reception period. Even in the above, it is possible to appear in a mode in which the pachinko image display becomes difficult to see while the pachinko image display is displayed after the acceptance is made.

That is, in this case, regardless of the type of reception period, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display even after the reception has been made. In addition, since the visibility of the image display is reduced before the image display is hidden, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the image display is hidden is small. Therefore, the deterioration of the game entertainment when the image display is hidden can be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, the first mode is executed as the first post-reception effect display and the first post-reception effect display is the first mode. Regardless of the case where the second aspect, which has a higher degree of expectation than the first aspect, is executed, the same aspect appears as "a mode in which the pachinko image display becomes difficult to see". On the other hand, in the second reception period, when the second mode (or the first mode with a lower expectation than the second mode) is executed as the effect display after the second reception, the expectation is higher than the first mode. Appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", but when the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the effect display after the second reception, the "image display is visually recognized". The specific mode does not appear as the "mode that makes it difficult", and a mode different from the specific mode appears, or the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" itself does not appear. As described above, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation as a post-reception production display simply by confirming "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and the expectation. Since there will be cases where the degree cannot be estimated, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by the color rendering of such "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". ..

As for the "specific mode" that may occur in response to the second reception period as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the first reception period. If it is not possible to appear as "", it will be possible to infer the type of reception period based on "a mode in which the image display is difficult to see", and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be able to. In order to obtain such an effect, as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the "mode" that may occur corresponding to the first reception period is a "mode" corresponding to the second reception period. It is more desirable that the display cannot appear as "a mode in which the display becomes difficult to see".

However, as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the same mode is used in the "mode" that can occur in response to the first reception period and the "mode" that can occur in response to the second reception period. It may be possible to appear.

[Structure 13]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (sound image display, gauge image, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, and the reception period can be displayed. It is possible to output reception-related production sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the generation. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the movement by the player is received within the reception period, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect based on the acceptance (this itself is an aspect of the post-reception effect). It is possible to output (it is also possible to see it as), and if the action by the player is accepted while the above reception-related effect display is displayed within the reception period, it is based on the acceptance. The reception-related effect display is hidden. Similarly, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound is in the audible state within the reception period, the reception-related production sound is placed in the non-audible state based on the acceptance. I try to do it.

In the above configuration, based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, the post-reception effect sound related to the post-reception effect is output, the reception-related effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is not displayed. By making it audible, it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is in the accepted state.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related effect display is not terminated at the time when the specific post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance is started. Although it is displayed, the reception-related production sound is finished at the time when the specific post-reception production sound corresponding to the reception is started to be executed, and is made in an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display displayed during the reception period is displayed until after the specific post-reception effect is started, while it is displayed within the reception period. The reception-related production sound that is considered to be audible (output) will not be in an audible state when the output sound is started to be executed after reception. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started, the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible while the mode as the reception-related effect display displayed within the reception period can be confirmed. This makes it possible to preferably suggest that the reception period has already ended.

The non-audible state may be a state in which the reception-related production sound output processing itself is completed, or the reception-related production sound output processing itself itself, in each of the above examples and the following examples. May be in an inaudible state by adjusting the volume to "0" although it is continued. Further, the specific post-reception effect is a combination of the above-mentioned examples and the later-described examples in which the post-reception effect according to the reception uses a plurality of effect bodies (display, light emitting lamp, movable body, etc.). When it is executed as an effect, it may correspond to "an effect using a specific effect" among those effects.

[Structure 14]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor effect display, and a specific precursor effect display can be displayed prior to the reception period, and the reception-related effect sound can be displayed. It is possible to start audible output (acceptable sound for reception, etc.). Then, the specific precursor effect display and the reception-related effect sound can be executed in a form straddling the timing when the reception period occurs, the specific precursor effect display is displayed, and the reception-related effect sound is in an audible state (output). The movements by the player are accepted in the above. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when the action by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed within the reception period, the specific action is made based on the acceptance. Hide the precursor effect display. In addition, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound is in the audible state within the reception period, the reception-related production sound is made inaudible based on the acceptance. ing.

In the above configuration, the specific precursor effect display is hidden based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted within the reception period, and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible. Therefore, even if the action by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display and the reception-related effect sound that have been in the execution state before the reception period occurs are being executed, they are accepted. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the sound is in the state of being in the state. The "specific precursor effect display" according to the configuration 14 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to the configurations 6 and 9, or is a precursor effect display of a different type (aspect). May be good. Further, the "reception-related production sound" related to the configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the "reception-related production sound" related to the configuration 13.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific precursor effect display is started to be executed according to the fact that it is received within the corresponding reception period. At that point, it is not finished and is displayed. On the other hand, the reception-related production sound is finished at the time when the specific post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started to be executed, and is made in an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned specific precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs is displayed until after the specific post-reception effect is started, while the reception is received. The reception-related production sound that is audible (output) before the occurrence of the period will not be audible at the time when the output sound is started to be executed after reception. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started, it is possible to confirm the mode as the precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs, but the reception-related effect that is output before the reception period occurs. By making the sound inaudible, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the reception period has already ended. The "specific post-reception production" and "specific post-reception output sound" related to the configuration 14 are the same as the "specific post-reception production" and "specific post-reception output sound" related to the configuration 13. It may be present or different.

[Structure 15]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is prepared with a plurality of reception periods in which "the content of the effect (type of effect after reception) that is advanced based on the acceptance of the action by the player" is different. In addition, the image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted within the specific acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, a plurality of the pachinko machines 1 are based on the acceptance. Although any of the effects is made to appear, a specific mode can be made to appear regardless of which of the effects appears.

In the above configuration, the type of effect mode that appears based on the acceptance of the movement by the player (“conversation notice” regarding which conversation appears, and “movable body” regarding whether or not the movable body operates. We have prepared multiple reception periods with different types of notice effects such as "operation notice". In this regard, if an action by a player is accepted within a specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, one of the multiple effects will appear based on the acceptance, but any of these effects will appear. Even if it is done, a specific aspect can appear. That is, in this case, regardless of which of the multiple effects appears, a specific mode will also appear in accordance with it, so that they are "caused by the fact that the action by the player was accepted within the specific reception period. It will be possible to suggest that it is a common production.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an operation by a player is accepted within a special reception period different from the above-mentioned specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, special conditions (big hit winning conditions and probability changes). It is possible to appear in any of a plurality of modes including a special mode in which the appearance rate (which may be 0% or 100%) differs depending on whether or not the entry condition) is satisfied, and the special mode is capable of appearing. When it appears, it becomes difficult to see the image display.

According to such a configuration, a special mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested appears before the image display is hidden, and the special mode makes it difficult to see the image display. , The player will be able to enjoy the effect that progresses from the image display to the effect after reception (special mode) without changing the gaze destination.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "specific mode" appears based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted within the above-mentioned specific reception period, the image display is displayed as the "specific mode". It is made difficult to see by "specific mode". According to such a configuration, when the image display is difficult to see due to the above-mentioned special aspect in which the expectation degree for giving a privilege is suggested (special reception period), the above-mentioned specific aspect in which the expectation degree for giving a privilege is not suggested. Since there are cases where the image display is difficult to see (specific reception period), the "mode that makes the image display difficult to see (specific mode, special mode)" has a color rendering index. As a result, it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of games.

The "specific reception period" related to the configuration 15 may be the same as the "specific reception period" related to the configurations 1, 7 and 9, or may correspond to a different reception period.

[Structure 16]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display the remaining time suggestion display that reduces the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) with the passage of time within the reception period. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. Since the display area of the specific image can be reduced while the production is in progress, it is difficult to recognize "whether the image is accepted" even after the acceptance is made, which makes it difficult to recognize the tension. It will be expected to be maintained favorably.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific section area is displayed on the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestion display, and a specific image is displayed in the specific section area. Depictions that reduce the display area of (gauge images, etc.) are to be performed. Then, after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player, the display is continued not only for the specific image (gauge image, etc.) but also for the specific section area. According to such a configuration, since the specific section area is displayed even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is increased. It becomes possible to easily judge whether or not the decrease has occurred.

In addition, "the display area of a specific image (gauge image, etc.) is reduced after the production is advanced based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted" means that, for example, the movement by the player is accepted. In the sense that when the production is advanced based on this, a predetermined display area is left as a gauge image, but the display area is set to 0 (non-display) at a later time point. is there. However, in this case, it is required that the specific section area is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, and the display area of the gauge image is set to 0 in the specific section area. It will be hidden after the timing.

For example, in the configuration 16, when the movement by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (specific image, specific section area, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance, but the remaining time is hidden. Prior to hiding the time suggestion display, the display area is a specific value (predetermined value) within the specific compartment area, regardless of how much display area of the specific image was left at the time of acceptance. ) Is displayed, or only a specific section area of the specific section area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). Is possible.

In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted (when the progress of the production according to the acceptance is started), the pachinko machine 1 is executed before the acceptance. The "depiction in which the display area of a specific image is reduced" is not completed and is continued. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image whose display area is a specific value is displayed in the specific division area, or only a specific division area among the specific division area and the specific image is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

That is, in this case, at the timing when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Even after the image is taken, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize "whether the image is accepted" and the tension will be maintained appropriately. In addition, since the display area of a specific image (gauge image, etc.) is significantly reduced at a timing after the timing when the progress of the production according to the acceptance is started, the acceptance is valid (the acceptance period). It is possible to make it look as if it was just in time within the reception period), and it is expected that the game will be improved.

[Structure 17]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of precursor effect displays are prepared as precursor effect displays suggesting that a reception period will occur. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific precursor effect display is performed among a plurality of precursor effect displays, a reception period occurs for the image display related to the reception target. It is displayed both within the precursor period before and within the reception period. The image display displayed within the precursory period is different from the image display displayed during the reception period, and is hidden before the reception period occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the time before the reception period occurs.

Further, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted within the acceptance period, the pachinko machine 1 hides the image display based on the acceptance, but the image display is hidden. It is possible to appear "a specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" before the image is displayed. However, as will be described later, the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" is hidden when the image display displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is hidden. I try not to appear before it is done.

According to such a configuration, within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), the image display is not displayed without the "specific mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" that appears corresponding to the reception period. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the image display is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) but is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player does not know. It will be possible to make it difficult to misunderstand that the reception period has expired.

If a plurality of "modes that make it difficult to see the image display" that can appear according to acceptance are prepared, including the above "specific mode that makes it difficult to see the image display", they are used. It is desirable that none of the embodiments appears when the simulated image display displayed within the precursory period is hidden. However, if the mode is different from any of the plurality of modes prepared as the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" according to the acceptance, the image display is hidden within the precursory period. It is also possible to make "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" appear. That is, in this case, since it is recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" dedicated to the precursory period, even if a "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" appears within the precursory period. , It becomes possible to make it difficult to misunderstand that the reception period has expired without the player's knowledge.

The "specific precursor effect display" according to the configuration 17 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to the configurations 6, 9 and 14, or corresponds to a different precursor effect display. You may.

[Structure 18]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the first reception period can be generated as the reception period during the execution period of the symbol change, and the second effect condition is satisfied. , A second reception period can be generated as a reception period during the execution period of the symbol change. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period can be continued even after the symbol change in which the first reception period has occurred is terminated and the next symbol change is started to be executed. However, the second reception period is not continued until after the symbol change in which the second reception period occurs is completed, and is terminated before the symbol change is terminated. It has become a thing. Furthermore, the image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and the operation by the player is accepted within the first reception period and the second reception. In both cases where the movement by the player is accepted within the period, the disappearance effect mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see based on the acceptance is made to appear.

That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has expired while making it possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance has been made. , The first reception period and the second reception period can be preferably obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearance effect mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see is when the pachinko machine 1 is received during the first reception period and when it is received during the second reception period. It is to be implemented as a different aspect. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the acceptance period ends within the pattern change during execution, based on the type of "disappearance effect mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Therefore, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

The "first reception period and the second reception period" related to the configuration 18 may be the same as the "first reception period and the second reception period" related to the configurations 2, 8 and 12, or different receptions. It may correspond to a period.

[Structure 19]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of gaming states (first gaming state) having different gaming conditions (such as the ease with which a prize ball is obtained when the gaming ball is launched with respect to the gaming area) are different. And the second gaming state) can be generated, and the reception period can be generated in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the image display is displayed based on the acceptance. "A mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance effect mode)" can be made to appear, and then the pachinko image display is hidden.

That is, in this case, there is an action effect such as "it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a model image display even after the acceptance has been made, and it can be suggested that the acceptance period has expired." , Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurred in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, the image can be obtained.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods is only in the first gaming state among the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It can occur, and the second reception period of the plurality of reception periods can be generated only in the second gaming state (big hit game) of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this respect, the image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first reception period), a specific "image display" that cannot appear in the second gaming state (when accepted in the second reception period) is visible. A mode that makes it difficult to do (disappearance effect mode) ”can appear.

According to such a configuration, even if the effect is not confirmed after the reception, it is only necessary to confirm which aspect appears as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance effect mode)", and the first game is performed. It becomes possible to grasp whether the state is controlled by the state or the second game state, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Even in the second gaming state (when the image is received during the second reception period), the "image display is difficult to see", which is different from the specific "image display is difficult to see (disappearance effect mode)". (Extinction effect mode) ”may appear.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception acceptance state (reception period) in which the reception opportunity is given occurs, the image related to the reception target (such as the image of the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated image display (see FIG. 232) integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, the deterioration of the gaming interest until the post-reception effect (post-operation effect) is executed can be reduced. I try to suppress it. Such an integrated image display occurs as a result of a notice judgment with an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. .. Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, 207 to 231), the display mode of the illustrated image is replaced with any of the integrated images described below. It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image. Is provided with a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, as the "integrated image display", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different expectations are prepared, and the same is true in that the display is performed in any of these modes.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception allowable state (reception period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. The reception allowable sound is output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that when the sound is started to be output, the acceptable state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned). , It is a sound in which the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable reception sound" is a sound that is not output under the condition that the production has nothing to do with the allowable reception state (reception period).

Further, each acceptance allowable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance allowable state classified into the first type can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is an effective period that cannot occur (an effective period that occurs when a specific condition (specific high-expected fluctuation pattern selection) is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state is a valid period (occurs as a result of a notice determination) that can occur in either a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. Validity period, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in any of the first type and the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, in both the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) and the second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, operation button 410). Since it is assumed that it occurs as an allowable state (reception period), the "integrated image display" displayed in those reception periods is an image that imitates the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the plurality of modes prepared as the "integrated image display", the special mode having a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) is the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). In the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in an aspect different from the special aspect (for example, the aspect shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). ing. In the first type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), "integrated image display" is performed in any of a plurality of aspects (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) including a special aspect based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the image, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in an manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, in any of a plurality of aspects (for example, FIGS. It is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to display the image, and to display the "integrated image display" in an manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above configurations 1 to 19 and the like will be described with reference to the drawings.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is a type of effect content (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as a post-reception effect) that is advanced when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted, and is a type of advance notice effect (expectation suggestion effect). ) Are prepared, and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (big hit judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first reception period (reception effect) to the seventh reception period (reception effect) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effect).

Here, the "conversation notice" as a post-reception production suggests the degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing, etc.) depending on which of the plurality of conversation contents appears, and as a post-reception production. "Cut-in notice" suggests the degree of expectation (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing, etc.) depending on which cut-in image appears among multiple cut-in images, and is a "movable body" as a post-reception effect. The "notice" suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, etc.) depending on whether or not the movable body operates.

With reference to FIGS. 255 to 266, the characteristics of each reception period (reception production) will be described. It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned reception periods with reference to FIGS. 254 may be prepared as a reception period different from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, or the first reception period to the first reception period. It may be realized as any of the seventh reception period.

FIG. 255 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. FIGS. 262 and 263 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "first fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the first variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 262 (a)). ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, an effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ first variation pattern ”itself. Become. In the effect example shown in FIG. 262 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first effect display TE (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variable effect) is suggested. Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol variation. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the fluctuation, not at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings from each other. The second effect display FE itself may or may not suggest the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variable effect.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern (when the first condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU1511a is decorated as shown in FIG. 255 (a). When the timing tF3 that the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the symbol SZ arrives, the above-mentioned first reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the production after the first reception" is allowed occurs. ("Situation shown in FIG. 262 (d)"). As a result, if the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period, the first post-acceptance production will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception period (valid period) is related to the occurrence of such a first reception period. ) Soon to occur, a sign image display suggesting a reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a gauge image display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, and a disappearance that makes it difficult to see the image display. A related display (a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see) and a post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) according to the acceptance are performed. As described above, the image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 before the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (b), a display screen (effect display device) In 1600), the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display. In the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. 255 (b), the timing when the corresponding reception period (first reception period) occurs (acceptance of the first post-reception effect is permitted). Timing) Although it is hidden when tF3 arrives, it may be hidden before timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), during the first reception period according to this example, the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed in a state where the player is allowed to accept the movement. It has never happened.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (c), the timing tF2 before the first reception period occurs is set. When it arrives, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, and the "integrated image" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. That is, in this case, in the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the "integrated image display IG" and the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), " The "first precursor effect display ZEH1" makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the "integrated image display IG". As a result, there is a strong interest in which target (operation receiving unit) the movement by the player is allowed in the period (timing tF2 to tF3) before the first reception period occurs. It will be possible to make it possible, and it will be expected that it will be difficult for forgetting to operate or making an operation error after the first reception period occurs.

During the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the "integrated image display IG" and the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" are displayed, the "integrated image display IG" is easy to see. It is more desirable to display the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" so that the tendency to be gradually improved toward the occurrence of the reception period appears in order to improve the game entertainment. For example, it can be realized by gradually reducing the display range (the range overlapping with the integrated image display IG) of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" or gradually increasing the transmittance. is there.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (c) and 262 (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "integrated image display IG" is , It is displayed so as to straddle the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the reception is made within the first reception period or when the first reception period ends without the reception being made. The first reception period according to this example is set to end when the timing tF4 arrives when the movement is not accepted by the player (see FIG. 255 (b)).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 255 and the production from FIG. 262 (d) to "A1 (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1))" or "A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))" can be produced. In the example of progress, it is assumed that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tF3a within the first reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (a), the first reception period is terminated and the first reception period is supported based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tF3a. The post-reception production (first post-reception production) will be started.

In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to "A1 (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1))" has a relatively low expectation as a post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to "A2 (FIGS. 263 (e2) to (i2))" corresponds to the reception period corresponding to the first reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as a post-effect.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2), when the movement by the player is accepted (acceptance). At the timing tF3a, which is the time when the production is started after the first reception, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not difficult to see. I am trying to do it.

That is, the first post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a "first post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "specific production after the first reception" using the body, the production lamp, etc.) and the output sound after the first reception using the third production device (speaker) are realized as at least a composite production. However, among these effect devices, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) that displays the integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) is the first effect after the first reception. 1 The time when the production display starts after reception is delayed compared to other production devices, and the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is maintained even after the reception is made. It has become.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG has a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 (FIG. 232). Since the player can easily recognize which of a) to (d) is displayed, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed. become.

Here, in order to facilitate recognition of which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period after the end of the reception period. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long "time during which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after the acceptance is made. However, when the integrated image display IG was during the reception period even though the reception was done and the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) was already executed. If the same mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 263 (e1) and (e2)) is continuously displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "it will be delayed to notice the post-reception production that is in the execution state".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (f1) or (f2), the first acceptance period ends when the movement by the player is accepted. When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tF3a (when the timing tF3b arrives), the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first reception period) is defined as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to the first extinction-related display SK1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first extinction-related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 1 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ first extinction-related display SK1-1 ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception is made, the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze destination of the player will be naturally shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tF3b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period. Further, even after the first post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (timing tF3a to tF3b). Since the mode of the integrated image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the first reception period, the mode with low expectation (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1)) and the mode with high expectation (FIGS. 263 (e2) to (i2)) correspond to the post-reception production. Regardless of which of the above is executed, since the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) appears as the first extinction-related display SK1, the post-reception effect (second effect device) , The third effect device) can be kept secret in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) even when the execution is started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (g1) or (g2), the display (integrated image display) related to the first extinction-related display SK1-1. When the timing tf3c within the period in which the IG is difficult to see) arrives, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the first reception period. The execution of the "first post-reception effect display UG1" as the post-reception effect in the above is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to "A1 (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production), FIG. 263 ( As shown in g1), the first aspect (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and FIGS. 262 (d) to "A2". In the example in which the production progresses to (FIGS. 263 (e2) to (i2)) (when the expectation is relatively high as the production after reception), as shown in FIG. 263 (g2), the first reception The second aspect (first post-reception effect display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" are displayed, respectively, the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or" After the first reception, the effect display UG1-2) ”will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the first reception period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) is used. It becomes possible to start the post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) without significantly delaying the effect as compared with other effect devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, since the effect display is started after the first reception while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player suggests that the first reception period has already ended. The gaze destination may naturally shift from the "integrated image display IG" to the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2)". It will be expected (after timing tF3c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2)" is started in this way. , FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (h1) or (h2), the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1). -2) ”is displayed, first, of the“ integrated image display IG ”and the“ first extinction-related display SK1-1 ”, the“ integrated image display IG ”is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (i1) or (i2), the "first extinction-related display SK-1" is displayed. "Is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good," 1st post-reception effect display UG1 (1st post-reception effect display UG1-1 or 1st post-reception effect display UG1-2)) Will be displayed.

In this respect, the "first post-reception effect display UG1" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the action by the player (here, the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or the first). It is displayed in any of the post-reception production display UG1-2). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), the "first post-acceptance effect display UG1" is displayed after the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK-1" are hidden. Will be executed for a relatively long time.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 255) due to the occurrence of the first reception period, and Various displays are performed on a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest of the game. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tF3c) of the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) according to the reception is set to be higher than the received timing tF3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second production device is prepared in addition to the production display device 1600 (first production device), and the operation by the player is performed within the first reception period. When it is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 255 (c), based on the acceptance, the first post-acceptance effect using the second effect device (specification after the first reception). The effect) is started to be executed prior to the first post-acceptance effect (first post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tF3a that was accepted in the first reception period is limited to a part of the production after the first reception (the production display after the first reception). The first post-acceptance production itself can be started without delay from the same timing tF3a.

As such a second effect device, for example, it may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or an effect movable body capable of producing the effect. , It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations.

In the production example shown in FIG. 263, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second production device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to "A1 (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1))" (when the degree of expectation as a post-reception effect is relatively low), FIG. 263 (e1). As shown in the above, the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the first reception period, that is, the first post-acceptance specific effect UGT1 (first post-acceptance identification). As the first post-reception specific effect UGT1-1), which is a mode in which the expectation of the effect UGT1 is low, it precedes the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) using the first effect device. It is supposed to start execution. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to "A2 (FIGS. 263 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), FIG. 263 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which "kichi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the first reception period, and the specific effect UGT1 (first reception) after the first reception corresponds to the first reception period. As the first post-reception specific effect UGT1-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the post-reception specific effect UGT1, it precedes the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) using the first effect device. And the execution is started.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 262, apart from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the first reception period. The precursor effect (first precursor specific effect) to be performed is executed (FIGS. 262 (b) to (d)). The first precursor specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs is set. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tF3.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first reception period occurs, at the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 (d), the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared. The output of the acceptable reception sound is started (corresponding to "the situation where ♪ is started to be output in FIG. 262 (c)"). That is, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the first reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tF3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 262 (d)") at which the first reception period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

Here, in the first reception period, as shown in FIGS. 255 (d), 263 (e1) to (g1), or 263 (e2) to (g2), the reception allowable sound is audibly output. Even if the movement is accepted by the player, the acceptance allowable sound is not terminated halfway and is output for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, during the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods, when the player accepts the operation while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound is based on the acceptance. Includes a reception period during which is terminated halfway. Therefore, as a result of being accepted while the acceptance permissible sound is being audibly output within the first acceptance period, when the mode in which the audible output of the acceptance permissible sound is continued appears, it is in the accepted state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the sound, and it is expected that the tension is maintained favorably.

However, in the first reception period, even if the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway (the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway). However, when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2)) is started based on this. It has become a thing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), the “acceptable reception sound” which is the sound that is audibly output within the first reception period and the audible result of the reception within the first reception period. Since both the output sound and the "output sound after the first reception" can be audibly output, it is possible to recognize whether the sound is within the reception period or the reception period has expired. It will be possible to make it even more difficult to recognize.

As shown in FIG. 255 (d), such an output sound after the first reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK" as in the "first reception post-effect display UG1". Even after "-1" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time ("♪♪ is output in FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)". Equivalent to "situation"). Further, regarding the output sound after the first reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to "A1 (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1))" (the degree of expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to "A2 (Fig. 263 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (aspect) is output.

On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted in FIG. 255, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to "A3 (FIGS. 263 (e3) to (h3))" is a game within the first reception period. It is assumed that the operation by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the first reception period occurs, the timing tF4 arrives without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tF4 (when the first reception period ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tF3a (first effect device) is used. As shown in FIG. 263 (e3), the integrated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the movement is accepted by the player within the reception period of. Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the first reception period ends because the player cannot accept the movement in time, the integrated image is performed within the first reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 263 (f3), the first extinction-related display SK1 is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". -2 (the second aspect of the first extinction-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first extinction-related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ first extinction-related display SK1-2 ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the first reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it becomes possible to suggest that the first reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the first reception period has already expired, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize the image. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first reception is for the above-mentioned "first extinction-related display SK1-2" that appears when the movement by the player is not received within the first reception period. It is executed as a mode different from the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" that appears based on the acceptance of the action by the player within the period. As a result, when the "first extinction-related display SK1-2" appears, it becomes possible to suggest that the movement by the player was not accepted, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (g3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-2", first, the "integrated image display IG" is not selected. Display. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first extinction-related display SK-2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 263 (h3).

FIG. 256 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. FIGS. 264 and 265 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a second reception period (second reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 264 (a)). ”), Within the execution period of the variable effect, an effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected“ second variation pattern ”itself. Become. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the first effect display TE is displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed.

However, in the effect related to the "second variation pattern", the variation of the decorative symbol SZ is shown in FIG. 256 (a) regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). The above-mentioned second reception period in which "acceptance regarding the production after the second operation" is allowed when the timing tG3 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the production arrives. (Validity period) is generated (“Situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)”). As a result, if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period, the second post-acceptance production will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, the above-mentioned first reception period occurs (FIG. 255). Similar to this, in relation to this, a precursor effect display suggesting that the reception period (valid period) will occur soon, a model image display suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), and suggesting the remaining time of the reception period Gauge image display, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (a mode that makes it difficult to see the image display), and post-reception production that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) depending on the acceptance. Each display is made. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) may include "0%" and "100%". As described above, the image display is displayed as an "integrated image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but the image display is not limited to this and is separately displayed. It may be displayed. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, also in this example, when the timing tG1 before the occurrence of the second reception period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 256 (b) and 264 (b), the above-mentioned precursor effect As a display, "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is started to be executed. Further, with respect to the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)", as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 255, the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) is When the timing tG2 before the occurrence arrives, it is displayed while the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is displayed (FIGS. 256 (b) and 264 (c). )). As shown in FIG. 264 (c), at least a part of the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed and the area where the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is displayed overlap. Regarding the point that the "integrated image display IG" is difficult to see due to the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", in the case of the example shown in FIG. 262 (c) (precursor effect display corresponding to the first reception period). Is similar to.

Further, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)) at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs. And when the acceptance is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), or when the second reception period ends without the acceptance being made, it is hidden. This is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 255 (first reception period). The second reception period according to this example is set to end when the timing tG4 arrives when the movement is not accepted by the player.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 256 (b) (second reception period), the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" corresponds to the example shown in FIG. 255 (b) (first reception period). Not only is the mode (image display) different from that of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1", but also the timing (here, the second reception period) corresponding to this is generated (effect after the second reception). It is not hidden when tG3 arrives, but is displayed in a form straddling the timing tG3.

That is, in this case, in the second reception period, not only the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display, gauge image display)" but also the "integrated image display IG" is difficult to see, and the "second precursor" is difficult to see. The movement can be accepted by the player while the "effect display ZEH2" is displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period occurs, at least a part of the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the reception It becomes possible to preferably maintain a feeling of tension when it is within the period.

Here, the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" may be displayed until the timing tG4 at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) ends, or the reception period may be displayed. It may be hidden at a predetermined timing within (here, the second reception period). Further, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is "integrated" within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period). To display the display range in a form that is gradually reduced so that the area that overlaps with the "image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" tends to be gradually reduced, is "integrated model". It is desirable to gradually improve the visibility of the "image display IG" within the reception period. Further, the area where the second precursor effect display is displayed and at least a part of the area where the "integrated image display" is displayed do not necessarily overlap each other during the entire period when the second precursor effect display is displayed. It is not necessary, for example, after the predetermined timing within the reception period of the entire period has arrived, the second precursor effect display is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed. You may do so.

Further, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 according to this example is received when the reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), or the reception period (here, the second reception). It is hidden when the movement by the player is not accepted until a predetermined timing within the period).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 256 and the production from FIG. 264 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1))" or "B2 (FIGS. 265 (e2) to (i2))" can be produced. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 256A, the second reception period is terminated and the second reception period is supported based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a. The post-reception production (second post-reception production) will be started.

In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1))” has a relatively low expectation as a post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to "B2 (FIGS. 265 (e2) to (i2))" corresponds to the reception corresponding to the second reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as a post-effect. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) may include "0%" and "100%".

Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 256, at the timing tG3a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the second post-acceptance production is started according to the acceptance), the “integrated image display IG” Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 256, not only the integrated image display IG but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is when the movement by the player is accepted (when the second post-acceptance effect is started). ) At the timing tG3a, it is not hidden or difficult to see.

That is, the second post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a "second post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or movable). The "specific production after the second reception" using the body, the production lamp, etc.) and the output sound after the second reception using the third production device (speaker) are realized as at least a composite production. However, among these effect devices, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) that displays the integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) is the second effect after reception. 2 The time when the effect display starts after reception is delayed compared to other production devices, and even after the reception is made, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display" are displayed. The visibility of "ZEH2" is maintained.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2), as in the case of the first reception period described above, even after the reception is made, it is integrated within the completed reception period. Which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the modified image display IG was displayed, and which mode (first precursor effect display ZEH1, second precursor effect) was displayed as the precursor effect display. Since the player can easily recognize whether or not the display is displayed on the display ZEH2 or the like), it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed.

Here, after the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are displayed within the acceptance period, after the acceptance is made. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time for "the time during which the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily visible mode". However, despite the fact that the reception has been made and the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG and the precursor production display ZEH are being accepted during the reception period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode as when it was, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is in the accepted situation, and as a result, "the post-reception production in the execution state" It will be delayed to notice. "

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 263 (f1) or (f2), a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tG3a at which the second reception period ends due to the acceptance of the movement by the player. Then (when the timing tG3b arrives), as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the display related to the "second extinction-related display SK2" different from the first extinction-related display SK1 is started. I have to.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "second extinction-related display SK2" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "second extinction-related display SK2" is displayed is the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception is made, the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze destination of the player will be naturally shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tG3b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period. Further, even after the second post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the second extinction-related display SK2 is displayed (timing tG3a to tG3b), The mode of the second precursor effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visibility, and the integrated image display IG can be made difficult to see only by the second precursor effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. In addition, when the reception is made after the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden within the second reception period, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is displayed until the second extinction related display SK2 is displayed. Needless to say, the mode of the integrated image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility.

Further, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "second extinction-related display SK2" is displayed while the "precursor effect display (here, the second precursor effect display ZEH2)" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "second extinction-related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. It is expected that the player's gaze destination will naturally shift from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 to the post-reception effect (timing tG3b or later). This makes it possible to continue displaying the second precursor effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed. , It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the precursor effect display was displayed within the reception period. Further, even after the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, the precursor effect display is displayed until the precursor effect display is difficult to see (timing tG3a to tG3b). Since it is possible to confirm the aspect (here, the second precursor effect display ZEH2) with good visibility, it is expected that the game entertainment taste is preferably maintained.

Further, in the second reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a corresponding post-reception effect, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIGS. 265 (e2) to (i1)). A different aspect (second extinction-related display SK2-1, SK2-2) appears as the second extinction-related display SK2 depending on the case where (i2)) appears. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 265 (f1) and (f2), the "second reception post-effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even so, the second extinction-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first aspect (second extinction-related display SK2-1) and the second aspect (second extinction-related display SK2-). By confirming which of the two appears, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "second reception post-reception display" is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 265 (g1) or (g2), the display (integrated image display IG) related to the second extinction-related display SK2 is When the timing tG3c arrives within the period in which the mode that makes it difficult to see) appears, the reception in the first production device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the reception of the movement by the player within the second reception period. The execution of the "second reception post-reception display UG2" as the post-production is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production), FIG. 265 ( As shown in g1), the first aspect (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and FIGS. 264 (d) to "B2". In the example in which the production progresses to (FIGS. 265 (e2) to (i2)) (when the expectation is relatively high as the production after reception), as shown in FIG. 265 (g2), the second reception The second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG", the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" and the "second extinction-related display SK2 (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or second extinction-related display SK2-2)" are displayed. Among the displayed images, the "second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)" is started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the second reception period, the first effect device The post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2) in the (effect display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay as compared with other effect devices, and the deterioration of the game entertainment is suppressed. You will be able to do it. In addition, since the second reception post-reception display UG2 is started while the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are difficult to see, the second reception period has already ended. While suggesting, the player's gaze destination is from "integrated image display IG" or "second precursor effect display ZEH2" to "second post-acceptance effect display UG2 (second post-acceptance effect display UG2-1 or second). It is expected that the effect will be displayed UG2-2) after reception (timing tG3c or later).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)" is started in this way. , FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 265 (h1) or (h2), the "second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2). -2) ”is displayed, first of all, of the“ integrated image display IG ”, the“ second precursor effect display ZEH2 ”, and the“ second extinction-related display SK2 ”, the“ integrated image display SK2 ”is displayed. "IG" and "2nd precursor effect display ZEH2" are hidden respectively. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are hidden, respectively, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 265 (i1) or (i2). , "Second extinction-related display SK2 (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or second extinction-related display SK2-2)" will be hidden. 2 The display related to the post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2) will be performed.

In this respect, the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the action by the player (here, the second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second). It is displayed in any of the post-reception production display UG2-2). Therefore, the "second reception post-reception display UG2" is compared even after the "integrated image display IG", the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the "second extinction-related display SK2" are hidden. It will be executed for a long time.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example corresponding to the first reception period (FIGS. 262 and 263), even if the reception is made within the first reception period and the "first reception post-reception display UG1" is executed, Before and after the "first reception post-reception display UG1" is started, the background image is not switched and is maintained. On the other hand, in the production example (FIGS. 264 and 265) corresponding to the second reception period, when the reception is made within the second reception period and the "second reception post-reception display UG2" is executed, The background image is switched before and after the "second reception post-reception display UG2" is started.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 265 (e) and 265 (f) (timing tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 256) in which the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (third). Even if there is a change in the effect in the 1 effect device), it becomes possible to suggest that the "second reception post-acceptance effect display UG2" is in a situation where it has not yet been started.

In the example shown in FIG. 265, as a post-reception effect, the same background image can be switched between the case where the mode with low expectation appears and the case where the mode with high expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether a mode with a low degree of appearance appears or a mode with a high degree of expectation appears. Further, the background image is switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the second reception period occurs, within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 256). There are various displays on the limited display screen (effect display device 1600), and this suppresses the deterioration of the game interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tG3c) of the second post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect display) according to the reception is set to be higher than the received timing tG3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, also in this example, when the movement by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 256 (b) and 256 (c), based on the acceptance. , The second post-reception effect (specific effect after the second reception) using the second effect device is started to be executed prior to the second post-acceptance effect (the second post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. I try to let you.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tG3a that was accepted in the second reception period is limited to a part of the production after the second reception (the production display after the second reception). The second post-acceptance production itself can be started without delay from the same timing tG3a.

As described above, such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or the effect operation is possible. It may be provided as an effect movable body, an effect lamp capable of producing an effect, or the like. In any case, it will be provided so that the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different expectations. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) may include "0%" and "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception effect), FIG. 265 (e1). As shown in the above, the mode in which the "kimono for women" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the second reception period of the above-mentioned second reception specific effect UGT2 (second effect). As the second post-reception specific effect UGT2-1), which is a mode in which the expectation of the post-reception specific effect UGT2 is low, the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) using the first effect device is used. Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to "B2 (FIGS. 265 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), FIG. 265 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which the "kimono for men" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the second reception period, that is, the second post-reception specific effect UGT2 ( As the second post-reception specific effect UGT2-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the second post-reception specific effect UGT2, the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) using the first effect device is used. ) Is started before the execution.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 264, apart from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the second reception period. The precursor effect (second precursor specific effect) to be performed is executed (FIGS. 264 (b) to (d)). The second precursor specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tG3 at which the second reception period occurs is set. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tG3.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the second reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 256 (d) In tG2, the reception allowable sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 264 (c) and (d)) is to be started to be output. That is, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the second reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tG3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)") at which the second reception period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

Here, in the second reception period, the reception allowable sound includes a long-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time. Are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 256 (d), the output of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are started at the same time, but the output is not necessarily limited to this. For example, for the short-time allowable sound, the output may be started at the timing tG3 or later when the second reception period occurs.

Then, in the second reception period, when the player accepts the movement while the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are audibly output, the operation is accepted for a long time based on the acceptance. The permissible sound and the permissible sound for a short time are ended halfway (the end in the audible output state).

Further, in the second reception period, if the player accepts the movement while the reception permissible sound (long-time permissible sound, short-time permissible sound) is audibly output, the reception permissible sound is terminated halfway. Not only that, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the second post-acceptance output sound (FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2), etc., which is different from the first post-acceptance output sound, is output "♪♪". The audible output of) is started. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (reception allowable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception are performed. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the corresponding production (output sound after the second reception).

Such the output sound after the second reception is the same as the "second reception post-effect display UG2", as shown in FIG. 256 (d), the "integrated image display IG" and the "second extinction related display SK2". Will be executed for a relatively long time even after "" is hidden ("Situation where ♪♪ is output in FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)" Equivalent to). Further, regarding the output sound after the second reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1))" (the degree of expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to "B2 (FIGS. 265 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (aspect) is output.

In the second reception period, a long-time permissible sound and a short-time permissible sound are output as reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, and the first permissible sound is not necessarily output. As in the reception period, only one reception allowable sound may be output.

On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted in FIG. 256, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to "B3 (FIGS. 265 (e3) to (h3))" is a game within the second reception period. It is assumed that the operation by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the second reception period occurs, the timing tG4 arrives without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tG4 (when the second reception period ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tG3a (second effect device) is used. As shown in FIG. 265 (e3), the integrated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the movement is accepted by the player within the reception period of. Not only does it not hide, but it also prevents the integrated image display IG from being difficult to see. In this effect example, since the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG4, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is not displayed after the timing tG4.

According to such a configuration, even if the second reception period ends because the player cannot accept the movement in time, the integrated image is performed within the second reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 265 (f3), the second extinction-related display SK2 is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to -1 or the second extinction-related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second extinction-related display SK2-1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "second extinction-related display SK2-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. "1 or 2 extinction related display SK2-2" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "2nd extinction related display SK2" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (image display)". , Gauge image display) ”is overlapped with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the second reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it becomes possible to suggest that the second reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the second reception period has already expired, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize the image. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, "second extinction-related display SK2-1" is displayed as the second extinction-related display SK2 when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period. In the case, if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period, the production is progressing from FIG. 264 (d) to "B1 (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to the case (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, when the "second extinction-related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second extinction-related display SK2 when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period, the second reception period If the movement by the player is accepted within, if the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to "B2 (FIGS. 265 (e2) to (i2))" (relatively expected degree). This is equivalent to (when a high post-reception production was performed).

That is, in this case, even if the movement by the player is not accepted in the second reception period, it is related to the fact that the integrated image display IG is hidden after the end of the second reception period. Just by confirming the mode as the "second extinction-related display SK2" (second extinction-related display SK2-1, second extinction-related display SK2-2), the second post-acceptance production is in a mode with low expectations. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether the game has been executed in a highly expected manner, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 265 (g3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "second extinction-related display SK2", first, the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. To do. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "second extinction-related display SK2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 265 (h3).

FIG. 257 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the third condition is satisfied and the third reception period (third reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "third change pattern" is selected as a result of the change pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the third fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the third variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the third variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "third variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the third predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ When the elapsed timing tH3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the production after the third operation" is allowed. The above-mentioned third reception period (valid period) is generated. As a result, if the movement by the player is accepted within the third reception period, the third post-acceptance production will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the third reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception production) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the third post-reception effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first production device). “3rd reception post-effect display”, “3rd post-reception specific effect” in the 2nd production device, “3rd post-reception output sound” in the 3rd production device) is exactly FIG. 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263). The above-mentioned first post-reception effect (“first post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “first post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “first reception” in the third effect device. It is different from the "after-output sound"), but the other configurations are basically the same.

For example, the timing tH1 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600). It should be noted that the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. 257 (b) also has a timing (acceptance regarding the third post-acceptance effect) when the corresponding reception period (third reception period) occurs. Allowable timing) It is hidden as tH3 arrives. However, the point that it may be hidden before the timing tH3 is the same as in the case of the first reception period described above. In any case, even in the first reception period according to this example, the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state where the player is allowed to accept the movement.

Further, the timing tH2 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “integrated image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” is displayed. Regarding the configurations related to the "integrated image display IG" and the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" displayed in relation to the third reception period, and other examples related to them, FIGS. Since it is as described above with reference to 262 and FIG. 263, it will be omitted here.

Further, the timing tH3 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), the above-mentioned third reception period is set while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It will occur. Regarding the point that the "integrated image display IG" is hidden when it is accepted within the third acceptance period or when the third acceptance period ends without the acceptance. The same is true. The third reception period according to this example is set to end when the timing tH4 arrives when the movement is not accepted by the player.

Further, the timing tH3a shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third reception period is terminated based on the acceptance of the action by the player, and the post-reception production corresponding to the third reception period (after the third reception). Production) will be started. As the third post-reception effect, at least a case where the first aspect with a relatively low expectation is executed and a case where the second aspect with a relatively high expectation is executed are prepared. The contents of the production (display after reception, specific production after reception, and output sound after reception) are different from the first post-reception production, but the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the plurality of modes is executed. The points and the like are the same as in the case of the production after the first reception. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) may include "0%" and "100%". In addition, at the timing tH3a, which is the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the time when the production after the third reception is started according to the acceptance), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not hidden. The point that the modified image display IG is not made difficult to see is the same as in the case of the first post-acceptance production.

Further, the timing tH3b shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3b arrives, the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (the first reception period and the third reception period, which correspond in common), is a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see. 1 The display related to the extinction-related display SK1 (first aspect) will be started. The configuration of the "first extinction-related display SK1" displayed in relation to the third reception period and other examples related thereto are as described above with reference to FIGS. 255 and 263. Since there is, I will omit it here.

According to the configuration related to the "period from the display of the first precursor effect display ZEH1 to the display of the first extinction-related display SK1" of the first effect device (effect display device 1600), the first It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the reception period of the above or the third reception period has occurred (whether it has occurred), and this makes it possible to make it difficult to recognize the second production device or the third production device. To improve the interest of the game by encouraging people to be interested in the game, or by giving them a strong interest in which mode (first post-reception production display, third post-reception production display) will appear as the post-reception production display. Will be able to.

In addition, even in the third reception period, regardless of whether the mode with low expectation or the mode with high expectation is executed as the corresponding post-reception production, the first extinction-related display SK1 Since the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) is made to appear, the first effect device even under the situation where the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started to be executed. In (effect display device 1600), the degree of expectation can be maintained as confidential. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and different extinction-related indications may appear depending on the degree of expectation. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) may include "0%" and "100%".

Further, the timing tH3c shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, the "third post-reception effect display" as the post-reception effect in the third effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the third reception period. (The type of notice effect is different from that of the effect display after the first reception) ”will be started. As this "third post-reception effect display", a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared, and the case where the mode with low expectation is executed and the mode with high expectation are executed as the third post-reception effect. As described above, a different aspect appears as the "third reception post-effect display" depending on the case.

That is, in this case, the "third post-acceptance effect display" is started to be executed while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" are displayed respectively. As a result, it becomes possible to create a confusing situation in which it is possible or not possible to recognize whether the first reception period or the third reception period has occurred, and the player's gaze point is "integral." It is expected that there will be a natural shift from "chemical image display IG" to "post-reception production display" (timing tH3c or later).

Then, also in this example, when the display related to the "third reception post-effect display" is started in this way, regardless of the mode, the "third post-reception effect display" is displayed. Of the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-1", the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance-related display SK-1" is hidden, and the "first extinction-related display SK-1" is made to be invisible. The display related to "3rd reception post-production display" will be performed.

In this regard, as described above, the "third post-acceptance effect display" is also displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), the "third post-acceptance effect display" is also displayed even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK-1" are hidden. , Will be executed for a relatively long time.

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 257) and is limited. Various displays are performed on the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tH3c) of the third post-acceptance effect (third post-acceptance effect display) according to the reception is set to be higher than the received timing tH3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, even when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted in the third reception period, as shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and 257 (c), based on the acceptance, the second 2 The third post-reception effect (specific effect after the third reception) using the effect device is started to be executed prior to the third post-reception effect (the third post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. I have to. The content of the third post-reception specific effect is different from that of the first post-reception specific effect, but it is basically performed in the same manner as the first post-reception specific effect.

For example, as the third post-reception specific effect, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared, and a low-expectation mode and a high-expectation mode are executed as the third post-reception effect. Depending on the case, in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), a different mode appears as the specific effect after the third reception. Further, as shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and 257 (c), the specific effect after the third reception using the second effect device is changed to the effect display after the third reception using the first effect device. The point that the execution is started in advance is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception-after specific effect.

In addition, when the third reception period occurs, as in the case of the first reception period, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) provides a precursory effect (common correspondence between the first reception period and the third reception period). It is desirable that the first precursor specific effect) is executed. Further, in this case, the precursor specific effect (first precursor specific effect) in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and has a third effect. It is also executed when the timing tH3 at which the reception period occurs occurs, and it is more desirable that the timing tH3 is executed so as to straddle the timing tH3.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and the timing shown in FIG. 257 (d) also occurs when the third reception period occurs. At TH2, the reception allowable sound is to be started to be output. That is, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the third reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tH3 at which the third reception period occurs, and the reception permissible sound is audibly output. Among them, the movement by the player can be accepted. It is desirable that the reception allowable sound is the same sound as the reception allowable sound output when the first reception period occurs.

However, in the third reception period, when the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound is changed based on the acceptance. I'm trying to finish it.

Further, in the third reception period, when the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but also when the acceptance is made, this is performed. Based on the above, the audible output of the third post-reception output sound, which is different from the first post-reception output sound and the second post-reception output sound, is started. That is, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (reception allowable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception are performed. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the corresponding production (output sound after the third reception).

As shown in FIG. 257 (d), such an output sound after the third reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK1-" as shown in FIG. 257 (d). Even after "1" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Further, as the output sound after the third reception, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared, and a mode with a low expectation is executed and a mode with a high expectation is executed as the third post-reception effect. It is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) depending on the case.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tH3c arrives only by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device and If the third effect device is confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tH3a earlier than that arrives. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 257, even if the movement by the player is not accepted within the third reception period, basically, the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period. It is the same as if it was not done.

That is, in this case, after the third reception period occurs, the timing tH4 arrives without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tH4 (when the third reception period ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tH3a (third). As with the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the movement is accepted by the player within the reception period of the above, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not hidden. The image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, the first extinction-related display SK1-2 (first reception period and third) is used as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to the first extinction-related display SK1 (second aspect), which corresponds in common with the reception period of the above, is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first extinction-related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ first extinction-related display SK1-2 ”is displayed is the“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, if the movement by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period, so that the player is strongly urged to operate. You will be able to do it. In the third reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, when the movement by the player is not accepted, a different mode appears as "first extinction-related display SK1" depending on the degree of expectation. However, a mode (first extinction-related display SK1-2) different from the mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) that appears when acceptance is made appears.

After that, of the "integrated image display IG" and the "first extinction-related display SK1-2", the "integrated image display IG" is first hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance-related display SK-2" is hidden.

FIG. 258 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. FIGS. 266 and 267 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "fourth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fourth fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fourth variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 266 (a)). Within the execution period of the variation effect, the effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the advance notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the above-selected "fourth variation pattern" itself. In the effect example shown in FIG. 266 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first effect display TE (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variable effect) is indicated. Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol variation. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the fluctuation, not at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings from each other.

However, in the effect related to the "fourth variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 258, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ starts regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the timing tI3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed has arrived, the "fourth operation" is performed. The fourth reception period (valid period) is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 266 (d)) in which "acceptance regarding post-production" is permitted. As a result, if the movement by the player is accepted within the fourth reception period, the fourth post-acceptance production will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the fourth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception production) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the fourth post-reception effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first production device). “Fourth reception post-reception display”, “fourth post-reception specific effect” in the second production device, and “fourth post-reception output sound” in the third production device) are shown in FIG. 255 (or FIGS. 262 and 263). The above-mentioned first post-reception effect (“first post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “first post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “first reception” in the third effect device. It is different from the post-output sound "). Further, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception production) according to this embodiment, the fourth extinction different from the first extinction-related display SK1 is described as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The point that the related display SK4 appears is also different from the case of the first reception period described above, but the other configurations are basically the same.

Hereinafter, the production performed in connection with the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception production) will be described, but here is an explanation of what is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception production). I will omit it. That is, with respect to matters not particularly mentioned, the production is performed with the contents as explained in the first reception period (first reception production), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, the timing tI1 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 258 (b) and 266 (b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” is displayed as the precursor effect display. Is started.

Further, the timing tI2 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed.

Further, the timing tI3 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266 (d), the fourth reception period is set while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It will occur.

Further, the timing tI3a shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. That is, the production progresses from the example shown in FIG. 258 and from FIG. 266 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1))" or "C2 (FIGS. 267 (e2) to (i2))". In the example, it is assumed that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tI3a within the fourth acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 258 (a), the fourth reception period is terminated and the fourth reception period is supported based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tI3a. The post-reception production (fourth post-reception production) will be started.

In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1))" has a relatively low expectation as a post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to "C2 (FIGS. 267 (e2) to (i2))" corresponds to the reception corresponding to the fourth reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as a post-effect. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes having different expectations as the post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period, and whenever the reception is received, a specific mode (for example, C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to C1) to (I1))) may appear. In this case, even if the "integrated image display IG is difficult to see" corresponding to the fourth reception period, a plurality of modes are not prepared according to the degree of expectation, and it is always the same when there is a reception. The aspect will be made to appear.

Similarly, in this fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 267 (e1) or (e2), the time when the movement by the player is accepted (the fourth according to the acceptance). At the timing tI3a, which is the time when the production is started after the reception, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. ..

Further, the timing tI3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" appears. However, as described above, when acceptance is received during the fourth reception period, the display related to the fourth extinction-related display SK4, which is different from the first extinction-related display SK1, is started (timing tI3b).

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" is displayed is displayed as "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception is made, the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see after the reception. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze destination of the player will be naturally shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (timing tI3b or later). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the fourth reception period, a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a corresponding post-reception effect, and a mode with a high degree of expectation (FIGS. 267 (e2) to i1). A different aspect (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1, SK4-2) appears as the fourth extinction-related display SK4 depending on the case where (i2)) appears. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 267 (f1) and (f2), the "fourth post-acceptance effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even so, the fourth extinction-related display SK4 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first aspect (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1) and the second aspect (fourth extinction-related display SK4-). By confirming which of 2) and 2) appears, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "fourth post-reception effect display" is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

Further, the timing tI3c shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI3c arrives, the player operates within the fourth reception period while the display related to the fourth extinction-related display SK4 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears. The "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the image will be started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production), FIG. 267 ( As shown in g1), the first aspect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period, and FIGS. 266 (d) to "C2". In the example in which the production progresses to (FIGS. 267 (e2) to (i2)) (when the expectation is relatively high as the production after reception), as shown in FIG. 267 (g2), the fourth reception The second aspect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth extinction-related display SK4 (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1 or fourth extinction-related display SK4-2)" are displayed, respectively. 4 Post-reception effect display UG4 (4th post-reception effect display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception effect display UG4-2) ”will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the fourth reception period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) is used. It becomes possible to start the post-reception effect (fourth post-acceptance effect display UG4) without significantly delaying the effect as compared with other effect devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, since the effect display UG4 is started after the fourth reception while the integrated image display IG is difficult to see, the player suggests that the fourth reception period has already ended. The gaze destination is naturally shifted from the "integrated image display IG" to the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)". Will be expected (after timing tI3c).

Then, even in the production related to the fourth reception period, the display related to the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)" starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 267 (h1) or (h2), the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4)" While "Production display UG4-2)" is displayed, first, of "Integrated image display IG" and "Second extinction related display SK2", "Integrated image display IG" is hidden. .. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 267 (i1) or (i2), the "fourth extinction-related display SK4 (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" "4 Disappearance-related display SK4-1 or 4th extinction-related display SK4-2)" will be hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "4th reception post-production display UG4 (4th reception)" The display related to the post-effect display UG4-1 or the fourth reception post-reception display UG4-2) ”will be performed.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tI3b arrives only by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device and If the third effect device is confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tI3a earlier than that arrives. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

Further, even if the player only sees the first effect device (effect display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth extinction-related display SK4 different from the above-mentioned first extinction-related display SK1 is "integrated". It comes to appear as "a mode in which the modified image display IG becomes difficult to see". Therefore, by confirming such an aspect, it is possible to recognize at an earlier stage which type has occurred as the reception period before the "4th reception post-reception display UG4" is performed. become able to.

In this respect, the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" is a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the acceptance of the action by the player (here, the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth). It is displayed on any of the post-reception effect display UG4-2). Therefore, the "fourth post-acceptance effect display UG4" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" are hidden. ..

As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the fourth reception period occurs, within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 258). There are various displays on the limited display screen (effect display device 1600), and this suppresses the deterioration of the game interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-acceptance effect (fourth post-acceptance effect display) according to the reception is set to be higher than the received timing tI3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, even when the movement by the player is accepted within the fourth reception period, as shown in FIGS. 258 (b) and 258 (c), the second effect is based on the acceptance. The fourth post-reception effect (specific effect after the fourth reception) using the device is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-reception effect (the fourth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. There is.

According to such a configuration, the delay in the execution start from the timing tI3a that was accepted in the 4th reception period is limited to a part of the 4th reception post-production (4th reception post-production display). The fourth post-acceptance production itself can be started without delay from the same timing tI3a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1))" (when the degree of expectation as a post-reception effect is relatively low), FIG. 267 (e1). As shown in the above, the mode in which "one sword" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the fourth reception period, and the specific effect UGT4 (fourth) after the fourth reception. As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-1), which is a mode in which the expectation of the post-reception specific effect UGT4 is low, the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) using the first effect device is used. Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to "C2 (FIGS. 267 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), FIG. 267 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which "two swords" are displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the fourth reception period of the above-mentioned fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4 ( As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4, the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) using the first effect device is used. ) Is started before the execution.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266, apart from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the fourth reception period. The precursor effect (fourth precursor specific effect) to be performed is executed (FIGS. 266 (b) to (d)). The fourth precursor specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tI3 at which the first reception period occurs is set. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tI3.

In this embodiment, the precursory effect corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as an effect different from the first precursory specific effect (fourth precursory specific effect) shown in FIG. 262. It may be executed as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown. In this case, even when the second effect device is confirmed, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period occurs.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the fourth reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 258 (d) is obtained. In tI2, the reception allowable sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 266 (b) to (d)) is to be started to be output. That is, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the fourth reception period is audibly output in a form straddling the timing tI3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 266 (d)") at which the fourth reception period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the reception allowable sound is audibly output.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period, if the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway (audible) based on the acceptance. (Ends in the middle of the output state).

Further, in the fourth reception period, when the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but also when the acceptance is made, this is performed. Based on the above, the audible output of the fourth post-reception output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in FIG. 267 (e1) or (e2)), which is different from the first post-reception output sound, is started. It has become. That is, in this case, in the fourth reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (reception allowable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception are performed. There will be no conflict (overlap) with the corresponding production (output sound after the 4th reception).

As shown in FIG. 258 (d), such an output sound after the fourth reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" as in the "fourth reception post-effect display UG4". Will be executed for a relatively long time even after "" is hidden ("Situation where ♪♪ is output in FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)" Equivalent to). Further, regarding the output sound after the fourth reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1))" (the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production). Case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to "C2 (Fig. 267 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (aspect) is output.

Regarding the reception allowable sound output corresponding to the fourth reception period, in order to make it difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the fourth reception period occurs, the first reception period is used. It is desirable that the sound is the same as the reception allowable sound that is output correspondingly. However, it does not have to be the same.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 258, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to "C3 (FIGS. 267 (e3) to (h3))" is a game within the fourth reception period. It is assumed that the operation by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the fourth reception period occurs, the timing tI4 arrives without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing tI4 (when the fourth reception period ends and the acceptance of the movement by the player is no longer allowed), the timing tI3a (fourth). As shown in FIG. 267 (e3), the integrated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the movement is accepted by the player within the reception period of. Not only does it not hide, but it also prevents the integrated image display IG from being difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the fourth reception period ends because the player cannot accept the movement in time, the integrated image is performed within the fourth reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the image display IG is displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 267 (f3), the fourth extinction-related display SK4 is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to -1 or the fourth extinction-related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth extinction-related display SK4-1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. "1 or 2nd extinction-related display SK4-2" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "4th extinction-related display SK4" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (image display)". , Gauge image display) ”is overlapped with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the fourth reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated image display IG can be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it becomes possible to suggest that the fourth reception period has expired. Further, even in a situation where the fourth reception period has already expired, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize the image. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the fourth reception period, the "fourth extinction-related display SK4-1" is displayed as the fourth extinction-related display SK4. In the case, if the movement by the player is accepted within the fourth reception period, the production is progressing from FIG. 266 (d) to "C1 (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to the case (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, when the "fourth extinction-related display SK4-2" is displayed as the fourth extinction-related display SK4 when the movement by the player is not accepted within the fourth reception period, the fourth reception period If the movement by the player is accepted within, if the production progresses from Fig. 266 (d) to "C2 (Fig. 267 (e2) to (i2))" (relatively expected degree) This is equivalent to (when a high post-reception production was performed).

That is, in this case, even if the movement by the player is not accepted in the fourth reception period, it is related to the fact that the integrated image display IG is hidden after the end of the fourth reception period. Just by confirming the mode as the "fourth extinction-related display SK4" (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1, fourth extinction-related display SK4-2), the fourth post-acceptance production is in a mode with low expectations. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether the game has been executed in a highly expected manner, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 267 (g3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4", first, the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. To do. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" is hidden as shown in FIG. 267 (h3).

In the fourth reception period, as in the first reception period, there are low expectations (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1)) and high expectations (FIG. 267) as post-reception productions corresponding to the first reception period. Regardless of which of 267 (e2) to (i2)) is executed, the same specific aspect may appear as the fourth extinction-related display SK4. However, in this case, even when the movement by the player is not accepted in the fourth reception period, the same specific mode appears as the fourth extinction-related display SK4, unlike the case of the first reception period described above. Become.

By the way, as described above, in both the first reception period and the fourth reception period, the first production display TE ( Here, the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed respectively.

In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 262 (b) and 262 (c), in the situation where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the first effect display TE The second effect display FE is prevented from being obscured by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". In addition, after the first acceptance period ends, as shown in FIGS. 263 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (when accepted). SK1-2 (aspect when not accepted) appears, but the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first extinction-related display. It is designed so that it is not obscured by SK1 (first extinction-related display SK1-1 or first extinction-related display SK1-2).

On the other hand, even when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 266 (b) and 266 (c), the first effect display is displayed in the situation where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. The TE and the second effect display FE are designed so as not to be obscured by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". After the fourth reception period ends, the fourth extinction-related display SK4 (fourth extinction-related display SK4) is shown in FIGS. 267 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2). -1 or the fourth extinction-related display SK4-2) appears, but the first effect display TE is not obscured by the fourth extinction-related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth extinction-related display SK4.

According to such a configuration, even if the type as the extinction-related display SK does not remember which type of the reception period corresponds to, the second effect is displayed when the extinction-related display SK is displayed. It becomes possible to estimate which type has occurred as the reception period only by confirming whether or not the display FE is difficult to see. Further, regarding the first effect display TE, regardless of whether or not the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the disappearance-related display SK, the disappearance-related display SK does not make it difficult to see. Therefore, it is expected that the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is displayed and then the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is displayed. Of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, the first effect display TE can be displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed within the period up to. ..

That is, in this case, the type as the reception period can be inferred (at least the first) only by confirming whether or not the "precursor effect display" or "reception period" has occurred while the second effect display FE is displayed. Since it becomes possible to infer that it is neither the reception period nor the fourth reception period), the second production display FE itself does not indicate the degree of expectation for the fluctuating symbol production. Even so, it becomes possible to provide an interesting effect using the second effect display FE.

Even when the second reception period occurs, it is difficult to visually recognize the first effect display TE due to the precursor effect display and the disappearance-related display as in the case of the first reception period and the fourth reception period. It is designed not to be crushed.

FIG. 259 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "fifth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the fifth fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fifth variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "fifth variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the fifth predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ When the elapsed timing tJ3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the effect after the fifth operation" is allowed. The fifth reception period (valid period) to be performed is generated. As a result, if the movement by the player is accepted within the fifth reception period, the fifth post-acceptance production will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the fifth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception production) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the fifth post-reception effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first production device). After each reception, the "fifth reception post-production display", the second production device "fifth reception post-specific production", and the third production device "fifth reception post-output sound") correspond to other reception periods. It is different from the effect (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “post-reception output sound” in the third effect device). Further, the "fifth precursor effect display" corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is also different from each precursor effect display corresponding to the other reception period. However, the method related to the display of the "fifth post-acceptance effect display" and the "fifth precursor effect display" themselves (the start time and end time of the display, and the display of other images before being hidden) As for the display effects performed in connection with the first reception period, the display effects performed in connection with the second reception period, etc. (FIGS. 255, 256, etc.). It is the same as in FIGS. 262 to 265), and the other configurations are basically the same.

Hereinafter, the production performed in connection with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception production) will be described. However, with regard to the configuration that is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception production) or the second reception period (second reception production), it may be mentioned that they are the same, but more than that. The explanation of is omitted here. That is, for matters not specifically mentioned, the production will be performed with the contents as explained in the first reception period (first reception production) or the second reception period (second reception production), which is another example or modification. The same applies to the example.

For example, the timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG1 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ1 arrives, the "fifth precursor effect display" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

In this respect, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the "fifth precursor effect display" is a type that is displayed so as to straddle the timing tJ3 at which the fifth reception period occurs. That is, the "fifth precursor effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second reception period, but the effect content (display image) is different, but the "display start time and display" Regarding the end time and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden, etc., the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is explained with reference to FIGS. 256, 264, and 265. The display is performed according to the method used. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

Further, the timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG2 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "fifth precursor effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "fifth precursor effect display" is displayed.

Further, the timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ3 arrives, the fifth reception period occurs while the "fifth precursor effect display" and the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" are displayed. It will be.

Further, the timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3a shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tI3a, the fifth reception period is terminated and the post-reception effect (fifth post-reception effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period is started. It will be. The fifth post-reception effect is also relative to the case where the first mode, which has a relatively low degree of expectation, is executed, as in the first post-reception effect (FIG. 263) and the second post-acceptance effect (FIG. 265). The second aspect, which has a high degree of expectation, may be implemented.

Further, the timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3b shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" appears.

In this regard, when acceptance is made during the fifth reception period, the above-mentioned "first extinction-related display SK1" that corresponds in common with the first reception period as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to is started. Regarding "first extinction-related display SK1", "how the display starts and ends, and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden", etc., see FIGS. 255 and 263. As explained with reference to. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

However, unlike the case of the first reception period, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the fifth reception period is "relatively expected" as the production after the fifth reception. It is possible that different aspects appear depending on whether the "first aspect with low expectation" is executed and the "second aspect with relatively high expectation" is executed.

For example, when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the effect after the fifth reception, the "first disappearance-related display SK1" is set as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see". (Here, the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (FIG. 263), which is the first aspect, is displayed. On the other hand, as the fifth post-acceptance production, the “first with relatively low expectation” is displayed. When the "aspect" is executed, if a mode different from the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" appears as a "mode that makes it difficult for the integrated image display IG to be visually recognized", the first reception is received. When the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the period, make people aware of the possibility that the "second mode with relatively high expectations" will be executed as the effect after the fifth reception. Since you will be able to do this, you will be able to improve your interest in playing games.

In this case, when the "second mode with a relatively high expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the "second mode with a relatively high expectation" is executed as the first post-reception effect. It is desirable to set so that the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) is higher than the time. The ratio may be 100%.

In addition, when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the "first extinction-related display SK1-" is set as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". When a mode different from "1" appears, the "first extinction-related display SK1-2, which is the second mode as the first extinction-related display SK1" may appear as the different mode. That is, in this case, when the first extinction-related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first extinction-related display SK1-2 appears as a result of acceptance in the fifth reception period, or within the first reception period. As a result of not being accepted in time, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the first extinction-related display SK1-2 has appeared, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the "first extinction-related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. When the possibility is made more conscious, or when the "1st extinction related display SK1-2" is displayed corresponding to the 1st reception period, "relatively expected" as the 5th post-reception production. In order to make people more aware of the possibility that the "second mode with a low degree" will be executed, the precursory effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period is not the "fifth precursory effect display". It is desirable that the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period is executed.

In addition, when the acceptance is made during the fifth acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 259, the second acceptance is based on the acceptance. The 5th post-reception effect (specific effect after 5th reception) using the effect device (here, sub liquid crystal 1610) is changed to the 5th post-reception effect (5th post-acceptance effect display) using the 1st effect device. Start execution in advance. The same applies to the point that the specific effect is executed after the fifth reception so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (fifth precursor specific effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period. Further, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed not as the fifth precursor specific effect but as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown in FIG. 262. May be good.

Further, when the fifth reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 259 (d), this acceptance allowable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. In the example shown in FIG. 259 (d), "long-time allowable sound" and "short-time allowable sound" are audible outputs, respectively, as the reception allowable sound as well as the reception allowable sound that is audibly output when the second reception period occurs. The start and end times of the audible output and how it relates to other productions before the audible output ends are described in FIGS. 256, 264 and FIGS. The audible output is performed by the method described for the "acceptable sound for reception" with reference to 265. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

However, as for the reception allowable sound output when the fifth reception period occurs, only one reception allowable sound is output as in the case of the reception allowable sound output when the third reception period or the fourth reception period occurs. Is output, and when it is accepted, it may be output as if it were terminated halfway.

In any case, in the fifth reception period, when the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but also the acceptance is made. Occasionally, based on this, the audible output of the fifth post-reception output sound, which is different from the post-reception output sound output corresponding to another reception period, is started. That is, in this case, in the fifth reception period, as in the case of the second reception period, the production performed within the reception period (acceptable reception sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (fifth reception). There is no conflict (overlap) with the post-output sound).

The fifth post-reception output sound, like the first post-reception output sound and the second post-reception output sound, is relative to the case where the post-reception effect is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectations. It is audibly output as an output sound different from the case where it is executed in the second mode with high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 259, if the movement by the player is not accepted within the fifth reception period, the movement by the player is accepted after the fifth reception period occurs. The timing tJ4 will arrive without any notice.

In this regard, even in the fifth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tJ4 (when the fifth reception period ends and the acceptance of movements by the player is no longer allowed). In the above, not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, the display related to the fifth extinction-related display SK5 is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see".

As with the second reception period, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" when the reception is not made in the fifth reception period is tentatively accepted in the fifth reception period. If so, the mode that had appeared (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) has come to appear. However, as in the first reception period, a mode that cannot appear when received in the fifth reception period may appear.

FIG. 260 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the sixth condition is satisfied and the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "sixth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the sixth fluctuation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the sixth variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the sixth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "sixth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "sixth variation pattern", the sixth predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the elapsed timing tK3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the effect after the sixth operation" is allowed. The sixth reception period (valid period) to be performed is generated. As a result, if the movement by the player is accepted within the sixth reception period, the sixth post-acceptance production will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the sixth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception production) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the sixth post-reception effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first production device). "6th post-reception production display", "6th post-reception specific production" in the 2nd production device, "6th post-reception output sound" in the 3rd production device) after each reception corresponding to other reception periods It is different from the effect (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “post-reception output sound” in the third effect device). In addition, when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted during the sixth reception period (sixth reception production), the image display (here) without the appearance of "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Then, the integrated image display) is hidden. However, the method related to the display of "6th post-reception production display" and "image display" themselves (how to compare with other image display before the start time and end time of display and until it is hidden Regarding (whether involved, etc.), it is the same as that described in the display effect (Fig. 255, Fig. 262, Fig. 263) performed in connection with the first reception period, and other configurations are also the same. It is basically the same as any of the above-mentioned methods.

Hereinafter, the production performed in connection with the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception production) will be described. However, regarding the configuration that is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception production), it may be mentioned that it is the same, but further explanation is omitted here. That is, with respect to matters not particularly mentioned, the production is performed with the contents as explained in the first reception period (first reception production), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, the timing tK1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tK1 arrives, the "first precursor effect display" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

Further, the timing tK2 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tK2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display" is displayed.

Further, the timing tK3 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

Further, the timing tK3a shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tK3a, the sixth reception period is terminated and the post-reception effect (sixth post-reception effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period is started. It will be. As for the sixth post-reception effect, as in the first post-reception effect (FIG. 263), there are cases where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed and cases where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed. It may be executed.

However, as shown in FIG. 260, there is no processing related to the effect related to the sixth reception period corresponding to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255, that is, "integrated image display IG (image)". Display, gauge image display) ”is hidden, so that it does not become difficult to see. This is the same regardless of whether "a mode with a low degree of expectation" or "a mode with a high degree of expectation" appears as the effect after the sixth reception (timing tF3b does not exist). The same applies to the case where the sixth reception period ends without the movement by the player being accepted in the sixth reception period (timing tF3b does not exist).

According to such a configuration, in another reception period, when the reception period ends, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is visually recognized until it is hidden. In the sixth reception period, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is hidden even if the reception period ends, despite the appearance of a difficult aspect. Since the mode that makes it difficult to see this (disappearance-related display SK) does not appear until then, is the sixth reception period completed? (A situation in which the operation by the player is canceled. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize (is it in the image), and it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably.

In addition, when the reception is received during the sixth reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 260, the second production device (here, here,) is based on the reception. The sixth post-reception effect (sixth post-acceptance specific effect) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is started to be executed prior to the sixth post-acceptance effect (sixth post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. .. The same applies to the point that the specific effect is executed after the sixth reception so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (sixth precursor specific effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period. Further, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed not as the sixth precursor specific effect but as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown in FIG. 262. May be good.

Further, when the sixth reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tK2. As shown in FIG. 260 (d), this reception allowable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when reception is made. Regarding the “start time and end time of audible output, and how it relates to other effects before the end of audible output” related to such reception allowable sound, FIG. 258, FIG. 266 and FIG. The audible output is performed by the method described for the "acceptable sound for reception" corresponding to the fourth reception period with reference to 267. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

However, as for the reception allowable sound output when the sixth reception period occurs, the two reception allowable sounds are output and accepted in the same manner as the reception allowable sound output when the second reception period occurs. When it is done, it may be output as if it is terminated halfway.

In any case, in the sixth reception period, when the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but also the reception is made. Occasionally, based on this, the audible output of the sixth post-reception output sound, which is different from the post-reception output sound output corresponding to another reception period, is started. That is, in this case, in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, the production performed within the reception period (acceptable reception sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (sixth reception). There is no conflict (overlap) with the post-output sound).

The sixth post-reception output sound, like the first post-reception output sound and the fourth post-reception output sound, is relative to the case where the post-reception effect is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectations. It is audibly output as an output sound different from the case where it is executed in the second mode with high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 260, if the movement by the player is not accepted within the sixth reception period, the movement by the player is accepted after the sixth reception period occurs. The timing tK4 will arrive without any notice.

In this regard, even in the sixth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing is tK4 (when the sixth reception period ends and the acceptance of movements by the player is no longer allowed). In the above, not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. However, as described above, in the sixth reception period, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" does not appear after the timing tK4 arrives without the movement by the player being accepted. ..

FIG. 261 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the seventh condition is satisfied and the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination.

Now, it is said that the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the "seventh fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the 7th variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 7th variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed for the effect of the selected "seventh variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "7th variation pattern", the 7th predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the elapsed timing tL3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the effect after the 7th operation" is allowed. The above-mentioned seventh reception period (valid period) is generated. As a result, if the movement by the player is accepted within the 7th reception period, the 7th post-acceptance production will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the seventh reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the advance notice effect determination.

In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception production) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the seventh post-reception effect based on the acceptance of the action by the player (in the first production device). "7th post-reception production display", "7th post-reception specific production" in the 2nd production device, "7th post-reception output sound" in the 3rd production device) after each reception corresponding to other reception periods It is different from the effect (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “post-reception output sound” in the third effect device). Further, the "7th precursor effect display" corresponding to the 7th reception period (7th reception effect) is also different from each precursor effect display corresponding to other reception periods. In addition, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception production) according to this embodiment, even if the "integrated image display IG is difficult to see", each disappearance-related display corresponding to the other reception period is displayed. Is now showing a different "7th extinction-related display". However, the methods related to the display of the "7th post-acceptance effect display", "7th precursor effect display", and "7th extinction-related display" themselves (the start time and end time of the display, and until they are hidden). In the meantime, how it relates to other image displays, etc.) is the same as that explained in any of the display effects performed in relation to each reception period described above, and other configurations. Is basically the same.

Hereinafter, the production performed in connection with the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception production) will be described. However, regarding the configuration that is the same as in the case of other reception periods (other reception productions), although it is mentioned that it is the same, further explanation is omitted here. Further, with respect to matters not particularly mentioned, the production is performed with the contents as explained in the first reception period (first reception production), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, the timing tL1 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL1 arrives, the precursor effect display is started to be executed on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

However, as described above, in the 7th reception period (7th reception production), as the precursor production display corresponding to this, the "7th precursor production display" which does not correspond to other reception periods is displayed. There is. As shown in FIG. 261 (b), the "seventh precursor effect display" is a type that is not displayed at the time when the seventh reception period occurs and is hidden before this. .. That is, although the "7th precursor effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "1st precursor effect display ZEH1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the effect content (display image) is different, but the "display start time and display" Regarding the end time and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden, etc., as described for "1st precursor effect display ZEH1" with reference to FIGS. 256 and 262. The display is done by the method. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

Further, the timing tL2 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (integrated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "7th precursor effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "seventh precursor effect display" is displayed.

Further, the timing tL3 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

Further, the timing tL3a shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tL3a, the seventh reception period is terminated and the post-reception effect (seventh post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period is started. It will be. As for the 7th post-reception effect, as in the 1st post-reception effect (FIG. 263), there are cases where the first aspect with relatively low expectation is executed and the case where the second aspect with relatively high expectation is executed. It may be executed.

Further, the timing tL3b shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" appears. However, as described above, when acceptance is made during the 7th reception period, the "7th extinction-related display" which does not correspond to other reception periods is defined as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display related to is started (timing tL3b).

Here, the "seventh extinction-related display" is different from the above-mentioned "first extinction-related display SK1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period, but the production content (display image) is different, but the "display start time". And for the end time and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden, etc., refer to Fig. 255, Fig. 256, Fig. 263, Fig. 265, etc. The display is performed by the method described for "Display SK1". The same applies to other examples and modified examples. In addition, in both "when the 7th post-acceptance production is executed as a mode with relatively low expectations" and "when executed as a mode with relatively high expectations", "7th extinction-related" The "display" is the same as in the case of the first reception period, in that it is displayed in the same manner.

However, unlike the case of the 1st reception period, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (7th disappearance-related display)" corresponding to the 7th reception period is produced after the 7th reception. As a result, different modes may appear depending on whether the "first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation" is executed and the case where the "second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed.

Further, the timing tL3c shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL3c arrives, the player appears within the seventh reception period while the display related to the "seventh extinction-related display" (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears. The "7th post-reception effect display" as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is started to be executed.

In addition, when the reception is received during the seventh reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 261, the second production device (here, here, based on the reception) is received. The 7th post-reception effect (7th post-acceptance specific effect) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is started to be executed prior to the 7th post-acceptance effect (7th post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. .. The same applies to the point that the specific effect is executed after the seventh reception so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (seventh precursor specific effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period. Further, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed not as the seventh precursor specific effect but as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown in FIG. 262. May be good.

Further, when the seventh reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tL2. As shown in FIG. 261 (d), this reception allowable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when reception is made. Regarding the “start time and end time of audible output, and how it relates to other effects before the end of audible output” related to such reception allowable sound, FIG. 258, FIG. 266 and FIG. The audible output is performed by the method described for the "acceptable sound for reception" corresponding to the fourth reception period with reference to 267. The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

However, as for the reception allowable sound output when the seventh reception period occurs, the two reception allowable sounds are output and accepted in the same manner as the reception allowable sound output when the second reception period occurs. When it is done, it may be output as if it is terminated halfway.

In any case, in the seventh reception period, when the player accepts the movement while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but also the reception is made. Occasionally, based on this, the audible output of the seventh post-reception output sound, which is different from the post-reception output sound output corresponding to another reception period, is started. That is, in this case, in the 7th reception period, as in the case of the 4th reception period, the production performed within the reception period (acceptable reception sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (7th reception). There is no conflict (overlap) with the post-output sound).

The 7th post-reception output sound, like the 1st post-reception output sound and the 4th post-reception output sound, is relative to the case where the post-reception production is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectations. It is audibly output as an output sound different from the case where it is executed in the second mode with high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 261, if the movement by the player is not accepted within the seventh reception period, the movement by the player is accepted after the seventh reception period occurs. The timing tL4 will arrive without any notice.

In this regard, even in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the timing is tL4 (when the seventh reception period ends and the acceptance of movements by the player is no longer allowed). In the above, not only the integrated image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the movement by the player is not accepted, the display related to the seventh extinction-related display is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see".

Regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" when the reception is not made in the 7th reception period, the reception was received in the 7th reception period as in the 1st reception period. Occasionally, aspects that cannot appear have come to appear. However, as in the second reception period, a mode (a mode different depending on the degree of expectation) that would have appeared if it had been received in the seventh reception period may appear.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which the first reception period to the seventh reception period are prepared, the excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

That is, first, regardless of which of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occurs, the image display displayed using the predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) is the same. It is possible to display even after the effect is advanced based on the acceptance of the action by the player (after the effect change based on the acceptance is started). As a result, even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance, it is possible to determine in which mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the image display is displayed within the reception period. The person will be able to grasp.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production contents (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as the post-reception production) that proceed when the pachinko machine 1 is received are ) Is prepared for multiple reception periods (1st reception period to 7th reception period) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (valid period) according to the result of the judgment (directing judgment). It is supposed to be.

In this regard, in the first reception period to the seventh reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, the post-reception effect display (first post-reception effect display to seventh) based on the acceptance. The effect display after reception) can be displayed on the "effect display device 1600". Then, in the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, when the movement by the player is accepted, the post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance. Not only that, "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is further made to appear. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance has been made, and the image display has not been displayed until the image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility of the image display by making it difficult to see (disappearance-related display), the player's gaze target is naturally moved from the "image display" to the "post-reception effect display". It will be expected to be.

However, since the image display is originally displayed within the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, if the image display is displayed even after the acceptance is made, the acceptance will be accepted. After the reception, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the effect display has already been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. In this regard, when acceptance is made in any of the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the image display is "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). ) ”Is displayed while it is hidden (invisible), while the post-reception effect display is displayed while“ a mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display) ”appears. I am trying to do it. That is, in this case, after the movement is accepted by the player, while the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, the display before reception (display image) is displayed after reception. The transition related to the display effect to (effect display after reception) will be realized.

It should be noted that both the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-reception effect display" are common in that they are displayed based on acceptance. However, as shown in, for example, FIG. 263 (f1), FIG. 265 (f1), and FIG. 267 (f1), the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is the image. It appears so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display when the display is displayed. On the other hand, the "post-reception effect display" means that the image display is displayed as shown in, for example, FIG. 263 (g1), FIG. 265 (g1), and FIG. 267 (g1). Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display. Further, in each of the above-mentioned examples, it was decided to start displaying the "post-reception effect display" when the image display is being displayed, but the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It is not always necessary to start the display when the image is being displayed, and the display may be started after the image display is hidden.

In addition, regarding "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", as a method of "appearing so as to make the image display difficult to see", at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed. In addition to the method realized by preferentially displaying an image display different from the image display (displayed on the front layer), a part of the image display is missing due to an image display different from the image display (displaying on the front layer). It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying an image (moving image) made to be visible (invisible). It is also possible to adopt a method of changing a numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself, instead of displaying an image different from the image display. On the other hand, regarding the "post-reception effect display", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the image display", "post-reception effect display" is displayed in at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed. Although it is displayed, in addition to the method realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" (displayed on the rear layer) in the form that the image display is prioritized, at least while the image display is displayed. It is possible to adopt a method or the like realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in the area other than the area where the image display is displayed.

In addition, as a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display), a method of displaying an image display different from the image display in at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed, and a method of displaying the image display are different from the image display. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing a numerical value (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself.

In addition, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is a situation in which the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It is supposed to appear below. That is, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed, the image display becomes difficult to see due to the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". Therefore, while making the image display visible, the "post-reception production display" is in a state where it can appear soon, and the player's gaze point should be changed from the "difficult to see image display". You will be able to urge them to be ready in advance.

In addition, when the image is received during the 1st to 5th reception period, the 7th reception period, etc., the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is the "post-reception effect display". Can be displayed even after "" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, in the period after the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and the "post-reception effect display" is displayed in a wider range. Since it becomes possible to provide the effect of "post-reception effect display", it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment by changing the effect during such a display period.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, FIGS. 263 (g1) and (h1), FIGS. 265 (g1), (h1), and FIGS. As shown in 267 (g1) and (h1), regarding the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the image display is displayed but also the image display is displayed. Is also displayed in the area where is not displayed. Then, in the area, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed at least in a part thereof, but the "post-reception effect" is displayed according to the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". At least a part of the "display" is displayed so as to be difficult to see (for example, displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears as making it difficult to see not only the image display but also the "post-reception effect display". Therefore, it is expected to improve both the color rendering until the image display is hidden and the color rendering when the display of "post-reception effect display" is started. Become.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed after the reception is made and before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. In the situation where "" is not displayed, apart from "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", a specific effect after reception that does not make the image display difficult to see (the second effect device was used). Post-reception production) can appear in a manner that suits the degree of expectation. As a result, the post-reception effect can be enjoyed prior to the effect without disturbing the effect of the first effect device.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is described as "image. It appears in a situation where the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared before the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears. I am trying to do it. In addition, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) will continue until after the end of the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". There is.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes the complicated color rendering of the first effect device can enjoy the post-reception effect by the second effect device having a simpler effect. It will be possible to improve the color rendering index for various types of players.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the precursor effect display is executed over the timing when the model image display is displayed. Further, in a part of each of the above-mentioned production examples, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, it is possible to accept the image while the precursor effect display is displayed. The "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" makes it difficult to see both the image display and the precursor effect display (priority display described above, etc.).

However, on the other hand, at least at the time when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, neither the image display nor the precursor effect display overlaps with the whole. , At least part of it is not obstructed by visibility. That is, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is executed in such a way that the visibility of the image display and the precursor effect display is gradually deteriorated (the overlapping area is increased). There is.

Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the image display shall be displayed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. It becomes. In this case, with regard to the image display, the dynamic display is not terminated and continues even though the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has appeared since it was accepted. It is desirable to do so.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is only the image display. Instead, it was decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the gauge image that suggests the remaining time until the end of the reception period. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after it is accepted, it is possible to suppress the appearance as if the remaining time remains.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods, after the first reception based on the acceptance. The effect display UG1 can be displayed, and in addition to the first post-acceptance effect display UG1, a mode (first extinction-related display SK1) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display can appear. Further, when the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods, the second post-reception effect display UG1 different from the first post-reception effect display UG1 is based on the acceptance. The post-reception effect display UG2 can be displayed, and apart from the second post-reception effect display UG2, a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second) as a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see. The disappearance-related display SK2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, the image display can be displayed without confirming which of the "first post-reception effect display UG1" and the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is displayed as the post-reception effect display. The type of post-reception effect display can be inferred simply by confirming what mode (first extinction-related display SK1, second extinction-related display SK2) is difficult to see.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods, the acceptance is made. Based on this, it is possible to display a third post-reception effect display that is different from both the "first post-reception effect display UG1" and the "second post-reception effect display UG2". Separately, as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the pachinko image display, the above mode (first extinction-related display SK1) corresponding to the first reception period can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the first extinction-related display SK1 appears as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, it is unclear whether the first or third post-acceptance effect display appears. However, as a mode for making it difficult to visually recognize the image display, when the second extinction-related display SK2 appears, it becomes possible to infer that the second post-acceptance effect display appears.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is displayed (priority display) in the area including at least a part of the area in which the image display is displayed. It was decided to realize as. However, it is also possible to realize an effect using an effect device (movable body or the like) located in front of the display screen at a position where it overlaps with at least a part of the image display in front view.

Even if the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1) appears as a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display", if the type of reception period is different, the jackpot symbol will be affected by the symbol variation. It is desirable that the rate at which is stopped (expectation) is different.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the precursor effect display is the same (first precursor effect display), but when the "first extinction-related display SK1" appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (first). When a mode different from the "first extinction-related display SK1" appears (fourth reception period), or when the mode does not appear (sixth reception period). ) And so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, although the precursor effect display (first precursor effect display, fourth precursor effect display) is different, the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1) is used as "a mode in which the image display is difficult to see". ) Appears (first reception period, fifth reception period).

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult to guess the type of the reception period until it is grasped which type is being executed as the production after the reception, and the game interest is improved. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) can be executed using the second effect device, and the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) can be executed using the second effect device. During the period, in the first effect device, there are a state in which the image display is relatively easy to see and a state in which the image display is relatively difficult to see.

That is, in this case, which mode has appeared as a model image display even after the execution of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance. It is possible to confirm. In addition, during the execution period of the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device, the image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that the "first effect device" can be used. It is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally move the gaze target to the "second production device".

In the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is the visibility of the image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before being accepted. It is supposed to be started so as not to affect. More specifically, the image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is It is neither an image display that is displayed by utilizing at least a part of the predetermined area, nor an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the predetermined area in front view.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the display of the post-reception effect is started after the appearance timing of the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see", but the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" is started. The display may be started at the appearance timing of ".

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" is realized as an image display displayed by using at least a part of the "area in which the image display is displayed". I decided. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area in which the image display is displayed" tends to be gradually enlarged with the passage of time.

Further, as described above, the image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations. Then, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, since the display mode is maintained and continued including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc. even after the acceptance is made, after the acceptance is made. It is also possible to recognize in what mode the image display was displayed during the reception period.

However, in this case, if it is in the period immediately after the reception, the production must be performed after the reception under such conditions (maintaining the display related to the image display). That is, the range of effectability is narrow, and only a limited effect (post-reception effect using only an effect device different from the first effect device) can be executed. However, when time elapses and "a mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearance-related display)" appears, the post-reception effect is performed under the condition that "the visibility of the image display may be deteriorated". Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the "post-reception effect display in the first effect device" under such conditions. By stepwise performing two post-operation effects having different properties (specific effect after reception in the second effect device and display of effect after reception in the first effect device), the mode of displaying the image even after being accepted. While making it easy to confirm, the role as a post-operation effect can also be suitably exerted.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the second precursor effect display is displayed as the precursor effect display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the "image display becomes difficult to see". The second extinction-related display SK1 (FIG. 265) appears. In addition, when the 7th precursory effect display is displayed as the precursory effect display, the 7th extinction-related display appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period. It has become like. On the other hand, if a "first precursor effect display" different from the above "second precursor effect display" or the above "7th precursor effect display" is displayed as the precursor effect display, it is within the corresponding reception period. When acceptance is made, the first extinction-related display appears (first reception period, third reception period) and the fourth extinction-related display appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (the first reception period, the third reception period). There is a fourth reception period).

That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect display or the seventh precursor effect display is displayed as the precursor effect display, it is recognized what kind of aspect appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" at that time. You will be able to make it.

Moreover, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, as the precursory effect display, a "first precursory effect display" different from the specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second precursory effect display" or the above-mentioned "seventh precursory effect display"). Is displayed, even if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, there is a case (sixth reception period) in which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself does not appear. There is.

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect display is different from the specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display" or the above-mentioned "7th precursor effect display") (here, the first precursor effect display). If executed, whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself appears within the period from the time when the image is accepted until the image display is hidden. Since it becomes unknown, the effectability from the time when the image is accepted until the image display is hidden can be improved, and the tension can be maintained favorably. become able to.

In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples may be realized by transforming into the following configuration, or the following configuration (reception period) may be further provided as another reception period (another precursor effect display). May be good. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, "the image display becomes difficult to see" within the period from the acceptance of the movement by the player to the non-display of the image display during the reception period. "Aspects" can appear. In this regard, in this modified example, when a specific mode (for example, a second precursor effect display, a seventh precursor effect display, or another precursor effect display not described above) is displayed as the precursor effect display, Even if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself is prevented from appearing. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" does not appear until the image display is hidden, and the "image display" is displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the image display is not made difficult to see in relation to the "mode that makes it difficult to see."

In this case, also in this modified example, when the precursor effect display is executed in the "first precursor effect display" and is received within the corresponding reception period, the reception is performed within the corresponding reception period. At that time, when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period), the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears. There are cases where this itself does not appear (sixth reception period). Even with such a configuration, the precursor effect display is different from the specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display, the seventh precursor effect display, or another precursor effect display not described above) (here, the precursor effect display). , 1st precursor effect display), it will be unclear whether or not the above-mentioned "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" will appear. The effectability until the image display is hidden is improved, and the tension can be maintained favorably.

With respect to the configurations relating to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply each of the configurations applicable to the above-mentioned configurations before the transformation.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when a specific mode (here, “second precursor effect display”) is displayed as the precursor effect display, the player operates within the corresponding reception period. Even if the image is not accepted, the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" is made to appear in the same mode as when the image was tentatively accepted.

On the other hand, when a mode different from the specific mode (here, "second precursor effect display") is displayed as the precursor effect display (here, "first precursor effect display"), it corresponds to this. When the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period and when the movement is not accepted, different modes appear as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (first reception period, etc.). Even if the movement by the player is not accepted within the corresponding reception period, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears in the same mode as when the acceptance was tentatively performed. There are cases (fourth reception period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by using the effect (precursor effect display) that is executed before the reception period occurs, the effect after the reception period ends and the effect when the reception period is not accepted. You will be able to increase such things.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, a specific mode (here, a second extinction-related display, a fourth extinction-related display, a seventh extinction-related display, etc.) appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". During the possible reception period, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but a mode different from the specific mode as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (here, the first extinction-related display). During the reception period in which the reception allowable sound can appear, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound may be terminated halfway, and the audible output state of the reception allowable sound may not be terminated halfway. According to such a configuration, by confirming the output status of the reception allowable sound at the time of acceptance, a situation may appear in which it is easy to guess what kind of mode will appear as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". , Since the situation that is difficult to guess will appear, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the reception allowable sound that can be used as such a judgment material is terminated at a timing (timing within the reception period) before the timing at which the reception period ends. Since the sound is audibly output, it is accepted while the reception allowable sound is in the audible output state, or it is accepted after the reception allowable sound is finished in the audible output state. You will be able to choose whether to play the game.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the reception period in which the precursory effect display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second precursory effect display), a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to FIG. In the reception period in which the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first precursor effect display) so that the four modes shown in (d) can be displayed. It is desirable that there are modes that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) to 232 (d) are not displayed and only FIG. 232 (a) is displayed). ..

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the reception period of a specific type, a plurality of types are prepared as precursor display effects suggesting that the reception period in which the action by the player is the reception target will soon occur. Then, among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display, fifth precursor effect display) can be executed in a form straddling the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs. , The action by the player can be accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed.

That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to accept the operation by the player while making it possible to confirm which type (aspect) is displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (aspect) of the precursor effect display is changed. It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment due to forgetting to check.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the action by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, but after the reception. Even when the effect is started to be executed, the specific precursor effect display is displayed without being hidden.

That is, in this case, the operation by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (aspect) is displayed as the precursor effect display, and further, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the precursor effect display.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, among the post-reception effects, the post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) using the second effect device is a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display, fifth effect). It is supposed to be executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the precursor effect display).

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, among the post-reception effects, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect display) using the first effect device itself is also a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect). It is supposed to be executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the display, the 5th precursor effect display (the specific precursor effect display is prioritized over the post-acceptance effect display (front display on the layer), etc. ).

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, during the reception period in which the precursory effect display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second precursory effect display and the fifth precursory effect display), while the precursory effect display is displayed. However, when the movement by the player is not accepted, the precursor effect display can be hidden before the corresponding reception period ends. ing. That is, in this case, it is possible to select whether to start the post-reception effect while the precursor effect display is displayed or to start the post-reception effect while the precursor effect display is hidden. become.

However, the execution state of a specific precursor effect display does not necessarily have to be terminated within the reception period, and the execution state is not terminated within the reception period and continues to be displayed until the reception period ends. It may be a thing. In this case, the specific precursor effect display is displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed until the corresponding timing in the middle of the reception period. In the period after the timing, it is desirable that the image display is displayed using only an area different from the area where the image display is displayed, not the area where the image display is displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound suggesting that the reception is in a permissible state or that the reception is in a permissible state (soon) is audible. The process is said to be executable. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for acceptance.

Further, among the above-mentioned production examples, in the examples shown in FIGS. 256 to 259 and 261 the player accepts the operation while the reception allowable sound is audible (output state) within the reception period. If this is the case, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" before the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" still appears. The process for making the reception allowable sound inaudible is started in the non-audible state.

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared since it was accepted, this means that the acceptance period has already expired. Can be suitably suggested to the player. As a result, even if the timing at which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears after acceptance is delayed, inconvenience is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the image display is displayed in a mode with good visibility. Will be able to

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, even if the movement by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible, the reception allowable sound is not terminated halfway and the reception allowable sound is audible. It is decided to further prepare a reception period (first reception period, etc.) for displaying the disappearance effect display while the above is continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is accepted or the situation is not yet accepted, and the tension can be maintained favorably.

In this regard, the reception period (FIGS. 256, 258, and 261) in which the reception allowable sound is made inaudible when the movement by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible. Even if the movement by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible, during the reception period (Fig. 255) in which the reception allowable sound is not made inaudible, the "image" generated corresponding to these is generated. Since the type as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is made different, it is possible to estimate the subsequent production progress by checking the output status of the reception allowable sound. Become.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, a plurality of types are prepared as reception allowable sounds. In this regard, it is desirable that the same sound is output as the allowable reception sound in the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of these reception periods is occurring.

On the other hand, the reception allowable sound that is audible corresponding to the first reception period is the reception that is audible corresponding to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. It is audibly output as a sound different from the permissible sound. According to such a configuration, when the reception allowable sound is started to be output, by checking the sound, it becomes possible to narrow down the candidates as to which type is generated as the reception period to some extent. In addition, when the reception allowable sound is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible, the candidates can be further narrowed down by confirming whether the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, and the reception allowable sound can be further narrowed down. It will be possible to provide an interesting color rendering using.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode (here, the second precursor effect display, the fifth precursor effect display, the seventh precursor effect display), the reception allowable sound corresponding to this is executed. If acceptance is made while is being output, the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway, but when the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first precursor effect display), this When the reception permissible sound is output while the reception permissible sound corresponding to is output, the reception permissible sound is terminated halfway (third reception period, fourth reception period, sixth reception period) and in the middle. There are cases where it is not completed (first reception period). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting color rendering index using the reception allowable sound.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, there is a reception period in which two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) are output as the reception allowable sound, and a reception period in which only one sound is output as the reception allowable sound. .. During the reception period in which two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) are output as the reception allowable sound, if the reception is accepted while the reception allowable sound is audible, the reception is terminated halfway, but the reception allowable sound. In the reception period in which only one sound is output, there are cases where the reception allowable sound is audible and the reception is terminated halfway or not. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting color rendering index using the reception allowable sound.

Regarding the reception period for outputting two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) with different sound data as the reception allowable sound, if the reception is accepted while the reception allowable sound is output, two sounds are received. Only one of the reception allowable sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) may be terminated halfway, and the other may be continued without being terminated halfway.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the same mode appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" when the reception is made and when the reception is not made within the reception period. The reception period (second reception period, fourth reception period, fifth reception period, seventh reception period, etc.), and when the reception is made and when the reception is not made within the reception period, " Since there is a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which a different mode appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", the reception is accepted. It will be possible to improve the effect when it is not done.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when acceptance is made during a specific reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.), "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is described. , It is realized as an extinction-related display different from the image display, but when it is not accepted, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" is changed to the image display itself (numerical value (transparency) related to the display characteristics). It is desirable to achieve this by changing the rate). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether the situation is accepted or not when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears. become able to.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used for both the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. ), The first effect display TE (here, corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the above-mentioned second effect display FE, which are not related to the reception period, can be displayed. It has become. Then, as shown in FIG. 263, when the movement by the player is accepted within the first reception period or the third reception period, the “image display” is displayed while the image display is displayed. The "mode that makes it difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1)" appears, but the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (first disappearance-related display SK1)" also occurs even in the case of a symbol change that does not require a reception period. It does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE that can be displayed (the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are prioritized or the first effect display TE is displayed. And the extinction-related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed).

That is, in this case, the disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display (first effect display TE or the second effect display FE) that has nothing to do with the reception period. Therefore, the game can be advanced without adversely affecting the color rendering index, which is not directly related to the reception period.

However, if the movement by the player is accepted within the fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 267, while the image display is displayed, "the image display becomes difficult to see (the mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see). Although the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" appears, the visibility of the first effect display TE is not affected by the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)". (It is not difficult to see), but it is supposed to be displayed so as to affect the visibility (make it difficult to see) of the second effect display FE.

According to such a configuration, although the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the visibility is affected when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears depending on the type. In some cases, the visibility will not be affected. Therefore, when the player performs an operation, it should be confirmed whether or not the image display that is not directly related to the reception period should be confirmed. It will be possible to provide an effect on the image.

However, in this case, the first effect display TE shall be displayed as (suggested) images (suggestions) related to the winning (expectation) of the symbol variation, and the second effect display FE shall be displayed as the symbol. By making it displayed as a display that does not affect (does not suggest) the hit (expectation) of the fluctuation, the game interest is reduced when the visibility of the second production display FE is affected. It can be said that it is desirable to avoid.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the second reception period can be generated while the first production display TE is displayed, but the second production display FE is displayed. It does not occur, and it occurs only when the second effect display FE is not displayed. That is, the second effect display FE is made displayable only when it is at a relatively early stage after the symbol change is started, and is hidden after that, and the effect or decoration in the early stage of the change is exhibited. It is used to enhance. In this regard, by assuming that the second reception period can occur only when the symbol change is relatively late after the start of the symbol change, this is not related to each other in a dramatic manner. It will be possible to create such a relationship.

As shown in FIG. 267, even if the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth extinction-related display SK4, it is then displayed again in a state where it is easy to see. .. That is, in this case, it will be hidden when a predetermined timing arrives thereafter. When the second effect display FE is hidden, unlike the case of the model image display, a mode that makes it difficult to see does not appear.

The first effect display TE displays a predetermined effect result (expectation degree) at a predetermined timing within the symbol variation, but when the disappearance-related display is displayed during the execution period of the first effect display TE, The disappearance-related display is hidden before the predetermined timing arrives.

As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth extinction-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the second effect display FE is displayed, and in this area, the second effect display FE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode having a higher priority for display than. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set in the fourth extinction-related display SK4, so that the second effect display FE can be visually recognized through the fourth extinction-related display SK4, although it is difficult to see. It may be.

As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth extinction-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the first effect display TE is displayed, and in this area, the first effect display TE is displayed. It is displayed in a form having a lower priority for display than. At this time, it is desirable that the fourth extinction-related display SK4 behind the first effect display TE is not made visible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 263, the first extinction-related display SK1 is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE. It has become a thing.

In the case of the first extinction effect display SK1 that does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the reception allowable sound is continued without being terminated halfway, and the fourth extinction effect display that affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the reception allowable sound can be terminated halfway. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the color rendering index using the reception allowable sound.

Both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are dynamically displayed, and even under the situation where any of the disappearance effect displays is displayed, both of these dynamic displays are to be continued. It is desirable to do.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is possible to appear a "mode in which the image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" while the image display is displayed, and the "image display is difficult to see". A plurality of modes are prepared as the "mode (display related to extinction)".

That is, in this case, since any one of a plurality of modes will appear as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", the game interest when the image display becomes difficult to see is improved. Will be expected.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (FIG. 267), the fourth. The disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the image display and the second effect display FE, but the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1) corresponding to the first reception period" ) ”(FIG. 263), the first extinction-related display SK1 is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize only the image display of the image display and the second effect display FE. There is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a color rendering index as to which of the "first extinction-related display SK1" and the "fourth extinction-related display SK4" appears as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Therefore, it is expected that the game will be improved.

In this case, the "image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed in the first reception period and the "image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed in the fourth reception period are , It is desirable that they are displayed in the same manner.

The image display is hidden while the disappearance-related display is appearing, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance-related display is appearing, and the disappearance-related display ends. It is desirable that the image is hidden at a predetermined timing (before the symbol change stops).

The fourth extinction-related display SK4 may be an effect performed by an effect body in front of the front view of the image display and the second effect display FE instead of the image. However, it is desirable that the first extinction-related display SK1 is realized as an image display.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the second reception period can be generated even when the second production display FE is in the non-display state, and the second effect display is a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see. A special mode (second extinction-related display SK2) that appears only during the reception period is prepared. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. 265, when a special mode appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (second extinction-related display SK2)" (second extinction-related display). There are cases where SK2-2) does not appear (second extinction-related display SK2-1), and when the special aspect appears, the degree of expectation (big hit) is higher than when the fourth extinction-related display SK4 is displayed. It is desirable that the rate of stopping at the symbol) is high. The ratio may be 100%. Further, in this case, it is desirable that during the second reception period, a special mode of precursor effect (second precursor effect display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second effect display FE is in the display state can be executed.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the first reception period, the first aspect (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is executed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e1)). ~ (I1)) and the case where the second mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-2), which has a higher expectation than the first mode, is executed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e2) ~ In any case of (i2)), the same mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see".

On the other hand, in the second reception period, the second mode (second post-reception effect display) has a higher expectation than the first mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) as the second post-reception effect display UG2. When UG2-2) is executed, a specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-2) appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", but the first mode as the second reception post-reception display UG. When (the second reception post-reception display UG2-1) is executed, the specific mode does not appear as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" and a mode different from the specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-). 2) is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation as a post-reception production display simply by confirming "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and the expectation. Since there will be cases where the degree cannot be estimated, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by the color rendering of such "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". ..

In addition, as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", a "specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or second extinction-related display SK2-2)" that may occur in response to the second reception period. With respect to the above, it cannot appear as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the first reception period. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to infer the type of reception period based on "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

However, the same mode may appear in the first reception period and the second reception period as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see".

As shown in FIG. 263, in the first reception period, if the reception is not made, the mode that cannot appear when the reception is made (the first disappearance-related display) is as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". It was decided to make SK-2) appear. However, if the acceptance is not made during the first reception period, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself may not appear.

In the second reception period, as the reception allowable sound, any one of a plurality of modes having different expectations (ratio at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) can be selectively audibly output, and in the first reception period, it is possible to selectively output the sound. As a reception allowable sound, it is desirable that only one aspect can be audibly output. Further, in this case, all of the reception allowable sounds (plurality of modes) that can be audibly output corresponding to the second reception period are different from the reception allowable sounds that are audibly output corresponding to the first reception period. It is desirable to prepare.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is assumed that all of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occur in different fluctuation patterns, but the same fluctuation occurs in the first reception period to the seventh reception period. The reception period may be included in the pattern, which may occur sequentially. That is, in this case, at least some of the first reception period to the seventh reception period can occur in a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

For example, regarding the reception period (second reception period, fourth reception period, etc.) in which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, the "image display" Is difficult to see (disappearance-related display) ”does not change according to the degree of expectation After a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) occurs, it occurs within the same symbol fluctuation. It is desirable to make it possible.

In addition, regarding the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) that can be accepted while the precursor effect display is displayed, acceptance can be made while the precursor effect display is displayed. It is desirable that after a non-reception period (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.) occurs, it can occur within the same symbol variation.

During the reception period, when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation. It is possible to selectively output multiple reception permissible sounds including a specific reception permissible sound that cannot be audibly output during the reception period that does not change, and when a specific reception permissible sound is audibly output, "the image display is difficult to see. It is desirable that a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as a mode (display related to extinction).

In addition, during the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, it is dedicated to the reception period. Although the precursor effect display can be executed, a special advance notice effect can be executed at a stage even before the precursor effect display is executed, and when the special advance notice effect is executed, the above It is desirable to ensure that "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is always executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation when acceptance is made during the reception period.

During the reception period when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, a big hit is obtained as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". It is also possible to prepare an aspect (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) that can appear only when the image is displayed. Further, an aspect that cannot appear when a big hit is obtained (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-1) may be prepared.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (sound image display, gauge image, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, which is related to the occurrence of the reception period. It is possible to output reception-related production sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) at least within the reception period. Further, if the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect can be output based on the acceptance, and the above reception-related effect display can be output within the reception period. If an action by the player is accepted while (image display, gauge image, etc.) is displayed, the reception-related effect display (image display, gauge image, etc.) is received based on the acceptance. ) Is hidden. Similarly, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound, etc.) is audible within the reception period, the reception-related production is based on the acceptance. Sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) may be inaudible.

In such a configuration, based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect is audibly output, and the reception-related effect display (image display or gauge image). Etc.) are hidden and the reception-related production sound is set to a non-audible state (reception allowable sound, etc.), so that it is possible to easily recognize that the reception-related production sound is in the accepted state.

In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the reception-related production display (sound image display, gauge image, etc.) is terminated at the time when the post-reception production according to the acceptance is started. Although it is displayed without being displayed, the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound, etc.) may be in an inaudible state because it is finished when the reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started to be executed. I am trying to be there.

According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display (sound image display, gauge image, etc.) displayed within the reception period is displayed until after the production is started after the reception. On the other hand, the above reception-related production sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) that are audible (output) within the reception period should not be audible when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. It becomes. As a result, even after the post-reception production is started, the reception-related production sound displayed during the reception period can be confirmed as the reception-related production display (model image display, gauge image, etc.). By making the reception allowable sound (such as the reception allowable sound) inaudible, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the reception period has already ended.

As described above, the reception-related effect display (model image display, gauge image, etc.) is executed as an effect display that suggests the ratio (expectation degree) that a big hit is obtained. In this case, the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound) also differs depending on the degree of expectation (mode as the reception-related production display) suggested by the reception-related production display (model image display, gauge image, etc.). It is desirable to output.

However, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the first reception period, the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound) is not ended even when the output sound is started after reception, and is continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is accepted and the tension can be maintained favorably.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, in the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the reception-related production display (model image display, gauge image, etc.), and a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as an effect display that suggests the ratio (expectation level) of the image. Further, in the first reception period, only one mode appears for the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound), so that when a mode different from the mode appears in the other reception period. It becomes possible to preferably improve the game entertainment.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, a plurality of modes including a specific mode are prepared as a precursor effect display, and a precursor of the specific mode is prepared prior to the occurrence of a specific reception period (for example, a second reception period). The effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) can be displayed, and the audible output of the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound, etc.) can be started. Then, the precursor effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) and the reception-related effect sound (acceptance allowable sound) can be executed in a form straddling the timing when the reception period occurs, and the specific mode can be executed. The movement by the player can be accepted while the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is displayed and the reception-related effect sound (reception allowable sound) is in the audible state (output). ing. In this respect, if the movement by the player is accepted while the precursor effect display of a specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is displayed within the reception period, it is based on the acceptance. The precursor effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden. In addition, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound (acceptance acceptance sound) is audible within the reception period, the reception-related production sound (acceptance acceptance) is based on the acceptance. The sound) is made inaudible.

In the above configuration, the precursor effect display of a specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period. Since the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is set to the non-audible state, the precursor effect display of a specific mode that has been in the execution state before the reception period occurs (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. Even when the movement by the player is accepted while 256) and the reception-related effect sound are being executed, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the operation is in the accepted state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 256 and the like, the precursor effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is a post-reception effect corresponding to the reception within the corresponding reception period. Is not finished and is displayed when the execution is started. On the other hand, the reception-related production sound (reception allowable sound) is finished at the time when the output sound after reception according to the reception is started, and is made in an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect display of the above specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) displayed before the reception period occurs is performed after the reception start of the effect. However, the above reception-related production sound (acceptable reception sound), which is audible (output) before the reception period occurs, is in an audible state when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. Will be made to disappear. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started, it is possible to confirm the mode as the precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs, but the reception-related effect that is output before the reception period occurs. By making the sound (acceptable reception sound) inaudible, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the reception period has already ended.

Regarding the precursor effect display of a specific mode (second precursor effect display ZEH2), it is displayed as a different display image according to the degree of expectation, and is executed as an effect display suggesting the ratio (expectation degree) that a big hit is obtained. It is desirable to be done. In this case, the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) should also output a different sound according to the degree of expectation (a mode as the precursor effect display of the specific mode) suggested by the precursor effect display of the specific mode. Is desirable.

However, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, during the reception period in which the first precursor effect display is executed, the first precursor effect display can be executed in only one mode, and the ratio (expected) that a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as an effect display that suggests (degree).

During the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which a plurality of reception allowable sounds (long-time allowable sound, short-time allowable sound) are output at the same time, the reception allowable sound is output and after reception. The output sounds do not overlap, but in the reception period when only one reception allowable sound is output, when the output of the reception allowable sound and the post-reception production sound overlap (first reception period), the reception allowable sound is output. There are cases where the output sounds do not overlap after reception (third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.).

The long-time permissible sound is, for example, a sound output as a sound effect (corresponding to the second permissible sound shown in FIG. 213, etc.), and the short-time permissible sound is, for example, output as a message sound. It is a sound (corresponding to the first allowable sound shown in FIG. 213 and the like). The case where only one reception allowable sound is output means, for example, the case where the message sound is not output and only the sound effect is output (corresponding to the case where only the first allowable sound is output in FIG. 212 or the like). That is. The short-time permissible sound may be referred to as a "sound output as a sound effect", and the long-time permissible sound may be referred to as a "sound output as a message sound".

When one of the two acceptable reception sounds is output as a "message sound", the message image ("press") corresponding to the message sound while the message sound (for example, "press" sound) is audibly output. It is desirable to display the reception-related effect display) such as. In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period during which the post-reception effect (post-reception output sound, etc.) is executed, but the message image (reception-related effect display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed. The period will overlap with the period when the production is executed after reception.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the image display is displayed as an integrated image display including a gauge image in the peripheral decoration image. The integrated image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 232 and the like, and an alternative configuration thereof can be appropriately adopted. That is, in the past, since the model image display was displayed apart from the gauge image, it was difficult to make both of them difficult to see by the precursor effect display or the disappearance-related display. The gauge image may change depending on the mode of the image display that suggests the degree of expectation, and if it can be visually recognized, the meaning of making the image display difficult to see is lost. In this respect, since it is displayed as an integrated image display, it becomes easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the image display and the gauge image.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is assumed to appear so as to make the post-reception effect display difficult to see. The display may appear so as not to make it difficult to see (for example, the effect display is prioritized after reception). In addition, among the above-mentioned multiple reception periods, the reception period in which the post-reception production display is difficult to see due to the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "image display becomes difficult to see". A mode (disappearance-related display) ”may include a reception period in which the effect display is not difficult to see after reception.

Further, it is not always necessary to prepare all of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, and only a part of the reception period may be prepared in an appropriate combination.

Even in the first reception period, when the reception allowable sound is received while being audibly output, it may be terminated halfway.

The "1st precursor effect display" and "7th precursor effect display" do not necessarily have to be "a type that is not displayed when the reception period occurs and is hidden before this". For example, it may be displayed as "a type displayed across the timing when the reception period occurs". That is, in this case, the "first precursor effect display" and the "seventh precursor effect display" are the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display ZEH2" and the effect content (display image) displayed corresponding to the second reception period. Although different, please refer to FIGS. 256, 264 and 265 for "the start and end times of the display and how it relates to other image displays before it is hidden". The display will be performed by the method described for the "second precursor effect display ZEH2". The same applies to other examples and modified examples.

It goes without saying that when "at least a part" is described in the above-mentioned or later description, it is intended to include "all".

Next, a modified example of each of the above-mentioned production examples will be described. That is, FIG. 268 is a modified example of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 264, and FIG. 269 shows “when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 265. This is a modified example of "the production of". In this modified example, the configuration not particularly mentioned is as described above in "Examples of production relating to the second reception period (FIG. 256, FIG. 264, FIG. 265)", and the "second reception period". The same applies to another example that can be applied to the "effect example".

As shown in FIG. 268, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) as a fourth effect device. For convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) has been omitted in each of the above-mentioned production examples, but in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the pachinko machine 1 also has the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Things) are provided. That is, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not operate in connection with the occurrence of the reception period.

Assuming that the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, even in the modified example for the second reception period, first, the effect determination (notice determination) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. Etc.). Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 268 (a)). ").

From this point onward, the same applies to the cases of FIGS. 264 (b) to (d) described above. That is, first, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (c), the “integrated image display IG” is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" and the "integrated image display IG" are displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 268 (d), a second reception period occurs. (Timing tG3).

Although the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted here for convenience of explanation, also in this modified example, the “second reception” using the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The "post-specific effect" and the "precursor effect" are executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265). Further, the effect using the third effect device (speaker) (acceptable reception sound, output sound after the second reception, etc.) is also executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265). ing.

Further, in this modified example, even when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second reception period, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265), the first is based on the acceptance. When the reception period of 2 is terminated, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1))” is relative as the post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period related to the modified example. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D2 (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2))” corresponds to the case where the first aspect having a low degree of expectation is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) may include "0%" and "100%".

Then, also in the examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, as in the case of the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 264 and 265), when the movement by the player is accepted (the second post-acceptance production starts according to the acceptance). At the timing tG3a (at the time when the image is formed), not only the "integrated image display IG" is not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Not only the integrated image display IG, but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG3a when the action by the player is accepted (when the effect is started after the second reception). It is also the same as the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265) in that it does not make it difficult to see.

Further, when the first aspect having a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modified example (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)), after that. Is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265). That is, first, at the timing tG3b, the display related to the "second extinction-related display SK2-1" is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". Next, when the timing tG3c arrives, the "second post-reception effect display" as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the movement by the player within the second reception period. UG2-1 "is started to be executed.

After that, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265), as shown in FIG. 269 (h1), while the "second reception post-reception display UG2-1" is displayed, First, of the "integrated image display IG", "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and "second extinction-related display SK2-1", "integrated image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2" "Is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are hidden, the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is not displayed as shown in FIG. 269 (i1). The display will be displayed, and the display related to the "second reception post-reception display UG2-1" will be performed under the condition that the visibility is good.

However, when the second aspect having a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)), the timing tG3b In the above, as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is started to operate instead of displaying the disappearance-related display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600). Let me. That is, as shown in FIG. 269 (f2), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is positioned (operated) so as to overlap at least a part of the integrated image display IG in front view. The integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, and this functions as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see".

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the situation shown in FIG. 269 (f2) has a higher degree of expectation than the case shown in FIG. 269 (f1). , You will be able to improve the game entertainment. In addition, since the operation itself by the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) itself suggests the degree of expectation, it can also be used as a post-reception effect, and the post-reception effect itself is integrated. The image display IG can be made difficult to see. In this sense, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) is used as an effect element that suggests the degree of expectation even in an effect different from the effect after reception (such as a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation). It is desirable to have.

Next, as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is then viewed from the front with at least a part of the integrated image display IG. When the timing tG3c arrives while being executed in an overlapping manner, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance of the action by the player within the second reception period. "2nd reception after production display UG2-2" is started to be executed.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is "integrated image". While the image display IG is being executed at a position where it overlaps with at least a part of the image display IG in front view, the execution of the "second reception post-reception display UG2-2" is started. According to such a configuration, the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to see by the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)", and the second Since the post-reception production display UG2-2 is started, the player's gaze destination is "Integrated image display IG" or "Second precursor" while suggesting that the second reception period has already ended. It is expected that the effect display ZEH2 will be changed to the effect display UG2-2) after the second reception (timing tG3c or later).

Then, even when the second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modified example (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)), " When the display related to the "second reception post-reception display UG2-2" is started, as shown in FIG. 269 (h2), while the "second reception post-reception display UG2-2" is displayed, the display is displayed. First, the "integrated image display IG", the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the "integrated image display IG" are difficult to see (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)). Of the "effects used)", the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are hidden and terminated. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are each hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 269 (i2), the "integrated image display IG is visually recognized. The "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" as the "mode that becomes difficult" is completed. That is, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to the original position so that the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" does not overlap with the integrated image display IG in front view. As a result, the display related to the "second reception post-reception display UG2-2)" is performed under the condition that the visibility is good.

It should be noted that, as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", a "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is performed (a mode with relatively high expectations (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269)). In e2) to (i2)), when "the effect using the first effect device (disappearance-related display)" is performed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" (relatively expected degree). It is desirable to lengthen the time from the appearance of the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" to the end of the mode, as compared with the lower mode (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)). In this case, when the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the "fourth effect device (specification)" is executed. Production using decorative member SDY) ”It became possible to improve the interest of the game by its own directing property, and after that,“ Production using the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY) ”was released. Even after the end, it is expected that the "second reception post-reception display UG2-2", which has been difficult to see until then, will be revealed to further improve the game entertainment. On the other hand, in the first reception period and the third reception period, there are cases where a mode with a low degree of expectation is executed as a post-reception effect and a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation is executed as a post-reception effect. The "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see (first extinction-related display SK-1 or the like)" is executed for the same time.

On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to "D3 (FIGS. 269 (e3) to (h3))", the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period related to the modified example. It is assumed that there was no such thing.

As shown in FIGS. 269 (e3) to 269 (h3), in this modified example, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period, the case of the above-mentioned example (FIG. 265 (FIG. 265). The same applies to e3) to (h3)). For example, when the movement by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 269 (f3), the player is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" within the second reception period. If the operation by is accepted, the mode that has appeared will appear.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 269 (e3) to 269 (h3), the "second extinction-related display SK2-1" is displayed when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period. In the case, if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period, the production is progressing from FIG. 268 (d) to "D1 (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to the case (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period, the "fourth effect device (specification)" is defined as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". When the "effect using the decorative member SDY" is executed, if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period, the movements from FIGS. 268 (d) to "D2 (FIG. 269 (e2)) are performed. ~ (I2)) ”(when the post-reception production with relatively high expectations is being executed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (g3), the "integrated image display IG" and the "integrated image display IG" become difficult to see (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or fourth). Of the "effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY)", first, the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 269 (h3), the "integrated image display IG" becomes difficult to see (second extinction-related display SK2). -1 or the fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY) ”will be completed.

As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see" is performed as "display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)". There are cases (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)) and cases (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)) in which the production is performed as "the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)". In this regard, in the above-described example, the timing at which the "display on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is started and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" are executed. It was decided that the start timing would be the same (timing tG3b), but for the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)", the "first effect device (effect display device 1600)" was used. The execution may be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) before the timing tG3b at which the “display in” is started.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see" and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) suggested as a post-reception effect, the "integrated image display IG" is "integrated". Since the time until the appearance of "a mode in which the modified image display IG becomes difficult to see" appears, the fun is added and the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" functions as a post-reception effect as well as the "post-reception specific effect using the second effect device". Therefore, by executing this at an early timing, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, even in the case where the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", FIG. 269. As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least a part of the integrated image display IG (image display) is visible.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to "D2 (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2))" (relatively expected degree). In the case where a high post-reception effect is executed), the "display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is not performed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". It was decided to perform "a production using a fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY)". However, in this case, as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specification)". It is also possible to perform both the effect using the decorative member SDY).

According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and the "fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" are displayed. Both the "effect used" and the integrated image display IG make it difficult to see, and it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the image is in the accepted state.

In this way, as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decoration)". When both the effect using the member SDY) is executed, the disappearance-related display is displayed so as to make it difficult to see at least a part of the integrated image display IG (priority display, etc.), and the "fourth display" is performed. The "effect using the effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the integrated image display IG and at least a part of the disappearance-related display.

In this case as well, the execution of the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" that functions as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" is started at the timing tG3a. The "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" that functions as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" may be started to be executed at the timing tG3b. ..

Further, as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decorative member)". When both the effect using SDY) and the effect are executed, the extinction-related display progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1))” (relative). It is displayed as an image display different from the "integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display SK2-1)" that appears when the post-reception production with low expectations is executed. It is desirable to do.

Further, the fourth effect device does not necessarily have to be provided as an movable movable body (specific decorative member SDY), and in short, at least a part of the integrated image display IG (image display). A flying object capable of performing a predetermined effect at a position where it overlaps with the front view (for example, a flying object capable of performing a flight effect on the front side of the effect display device 1600, or a front side of the effect display device 1600. (Such as a light guide plate provided in the above). In addition, the effect using the fourth effect device is executed based on the acceptance during the reception period, or when different effect conditions are satisfied (such as when a predetermined timing arrives in a specific symbol change). It is desirable that also be executed.

The production example relating to the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the production progress as shown in FIGS. 268 and 269 will be made.

Further, the production example relating to the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 is applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. However, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception production) that is different from any of the reception periods.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the post-reception effect display is displayed while the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) is displayed. Is started to be executed, but the post-reception effect display is displayed in a form that is difficult to see by the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period). It was made to start (Fig. 263, Fig. 265, Fig. 267).

However, instead of this, while the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) is displayed, the post-reception effect display is started to be executed. However, the post-reception effect display is not obscured by the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) (priority display, etc.). ) May be used to start the display.

Hereinafter, a case where such a configuration is applied to the production example relating to the second reception period will be described. The configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as those of the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265), and other examples can be appropriately applied.

Regarding the effect contents until the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the second reception period according to this modified example, the above-mentioned effect contents (FIGS. 264 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 265 (e)) are described. ) Is the same. For example, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 270 (e2), at the timing tG3a at the time when the movement by the player is accepted, the “integrated image display IG” and the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are not difficult to see.

Further, also in this modification, there are cases where the post-reception production with a relatively low expectation is executed and a case where the post-reception production with a relatively high expectation is executed. The case where the low-quality post-reception effect is executed is the same as the above-mentioned effect content (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1)), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the "post-reception effect with relatively high expectations" is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period, the above-mentioned effect content (FIG. 265 (FIG. 265) Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effect contents shown in FIGS. 270 (f2) to (i2) appear.

First, in the timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 270 (f2), while the “second reception post-effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. The second extinction-related display SK2 that appears in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second extinction-related display SK2-2). Next, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second extinction-related display SK2 (the mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the player operates within the second reception period. "Second post-reception effect display UG2" as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance starts execution in the second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2). Will be done. Needless to say, the post-reception effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which benefits are given to the player). The ratio may be 100%.

However, as shown in FIG. 270 (g2), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example includes an integrated image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, a second extinction-related display SK2, and the like. It will not be difficult to see. More specifically, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modification overlaps with the area where the integrated image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2 are displayed, respectively. It is displayed in a form, and the integrated image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2 are displayed (priority display) in a manner that makes it difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the effect display UG2-2 itself after the second reception can be made to function as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to see", and the game entertainment can be improved. You will be able to plan. Even in the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this example, the first effect display TE (here, corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect") is not preferentially displayed, and the first effect is not displayed. The part that overlaps with the display TE is made difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 270 (h2), first, the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are hidden. Then, as shown in FIG. 270 (i2), the second extinction-related display SK2 is hidden.

Also in the modified example shown in FIG. 270, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the second reception period, it is the same as the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 265 (e3) to (h3)). .. That is, when the movement by the player is not accepted, if the movement by the player is accepted within the second reception period, it appears as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". Will appear.

In the example shown in FIG. 270, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 and the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 are displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". However, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 may not be displayed, and only the effect display UG2-2 after the second reception may be displayed.

The production example related to the “post-reception effect display” described with reference to FIG. 270 can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the production progress as shown in FIG. 270 will be made.

Further, the production example related to the “post-reception effect display” explained with reference to FIG. 270 is not applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is different from any of those reception periods. It may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth fluctuation pattern, eighth post-reception production).

In the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when the movement by the player is accepted within the reception period (specific reception period), the image is displayed (here, the integrated image is displayed). While the IG) is displayed, a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the image display is used to make the image display difficult to see, and the "specific disappearance effect display (for example, for example)" is displayed. The second extinction-related display SK2-2) ”can be displayed, and the image display is the specific extinction effect display after the specific extinction effect display (second extinction-related display SK2-2) is started to be displayed. (For example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) is hidden while being displayed.

That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a model image display even after the acceptance has been made. In addition, the visibility of the image display is reduced by a specific extinction effect display until the image display is hidden, and the image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. Therefore, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the image display is hidden is small, and the deterioration of the game interest when the image display is hidden is suppressed. You will be able to get it.

Further, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the above-mentioned "specific extinction effect display (for example, second extinction-related display SK2-2)" is an image display (here, integrated). It can be displayed even in the period after the image display IG) is hidden, and at least while the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) is displayed, The post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed. Then, is the post-acceptance effect displayed using at least a part of the specific area, which is the display target area of the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2)? It is executed using the effect body (example shown in FIG. 269 or another example thereof) located at a position where it overlaps with (at least a part of) the specific disappearance effect display (example shown in FIG. 270). I am trying to realize it as a thing.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effects that are executed at a position that overlaps with the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) in front view are specified. It will be possible to recognize without shifting the gaze destination from the position where the disappearance effect display of is displayed. That is, in this case, when the specific extinction effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-acceptance effect. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably.

When a specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using a specific decorative member SDY, a second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.) related to the above modification appears, the ratio of benefits given to the player is It may be 100%.

The specific post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) related to the above modification is executed before the image display is hidden. Since it is started and makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the image display is in a state of being accepted even when the image display is displayed. .. However, for the specific post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.) related to the above modification, after the image display is hidden. It may be the one that is started to be executed.

Apart from the reception period in which the specific post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) related to the above modification can be generated, the specific post-reception effect. A specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) is a case where the different post-reception effect is executed after preparing a reception period in which a different post-reception effect can be generated. May also be displayed. The reception period in which different post-reception effects can be generated may be any of the first reception period and the third reception period to the seventh reception period. However, it is desirable that the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) is not displayed during the reception period (first reception period) in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated in the middle (separately). The disappearance effect display of

In addition, also in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when the reception period occurs, the reception of the post-reception production corresponding to the reception period is permitted, or A process of making the reception allowable sound audible, which suggests that the reception will be in an acceptable state (soon), is executed, so that the player forgets to perform the operation for acceptance. I try to suppress.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of types of precursor effect displays, but in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, a specific precursor effect display (second). When the action by the player is accepted while the precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed, a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the acceptance is made, but the specific While the precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed, a mode in which the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is difficult to see appears. Then, after the aspect appears, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is hidden while the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the precursor effect display, and the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably suggest that the acceptance has already been made.

In the above-described modification (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the mode in which the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) becomes difficult to see is the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display). The image display is different from the ZEH2) (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 or the post-reception effect display UG2-2), or is on the front side of the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2). It is designed to be a production in the production body performed in.

Further, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)" is the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display (second). Not only the precursor effect display ZEH2), but also the specific precursor effect display and the image display are executed so as to straddle both of them in a front view, making it difficult to visually recognize both of them. The aspect may be performed in a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire effect display device 1600, but in that case, a specific precursor effect display or a model image display can be visually recognized through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable to do so.

Further, the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)" is realized by the change (transparency change, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the specific precursor effect display itself. May be

Also in the above-described modification (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is hidden within the reception period. Then, even when the reception is made in the hidden state, "a mode in which a specific precursor effect display becomes difficult to see (second extinction-related display SK2-2, post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc." (Director, etc.) ”is to be executed.

Further, in the first reception period described above, when the movement by the player is accepted, a plurality of effects (effects shown in FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1), FIG. 263) are obtained based on the acceptance. Any of the effects (effects shown in (e2) to (i2)) appears, but even if any of those effects appears, a specific mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1 (first reception period)) The first aspect)) of the first extinction-related display SK1 corresponding to the above can be made to appear. That is, in this case, regardless of which of the multiple effects appears, a specific mode will also appear in accordance with it, so that they are "caused by the fact that the action by the player was accepted within the specific reception period. It will be possible to suggest that it is a common production.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned second reception period and the second reception period according to the modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example, if the movement by the player is accepted, a special condition (big hit winning) is made. A special mode (for example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 or specific) in which the appearance rate (which may be 0% or 100%) differs depending on whether or not the conditions and the probability variation inrush condition are satisfied. It is possible to appear in any of a plurality of modes including the effect using the decorative member SDY, the effect display after reception UG2-2, etc., and when the special aspect appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image display. .. According to such a configuration, a special mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested appears before the image display is hidden, and the special mode makes it difficult to see the image display. , The player will be able to enjoy the effect that progresses from the image display to the effect after reception (special mode) without changing the gaze destination.

In this regard, even when the specific aspect (first extinction-related display SK1-1 (first aspect of the first extinction-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period)) appears, the image display is the "specific". It is made difficult to see by "aspect". According to such a configuration, when the image display is difficult to see due to the above-mentioned special aspect in which the expectation degree for giving a privilege is suggested (special reception period), the above-mentioned specific aspect in which the expectation degree for giving a privilege is not suggested. Since there are cases where the image display is difficult to see (specific reception period), the "mode that makes the image display difficult to see (specific mode, special mode)" has a color rendering index. As a result, it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of games.

In addition, when the reception period illustrated in each of the above-mentioned production examples and each modification occurs, a model image display suggesting an object (type of operation means, etc.) that can be accepted within the reception period is displayed. The display may be performed both within the period in which the precursor effect display is executed before the reception period occurs and within the reception period. However, in this case, the image display displayed during the period when the precursor effect display is executed shall be different from the image display displayed during the reception period, and before the reception period occurs. It is desirable to hide it.

Hereinafter, a modified example will be described in a case where the method of displaying a simulated image in such an embodiment is applied to the second reception period. That is, FIGS. 271 (a) to 271 (f) and FIGS. 272 (g) and 272 (h) are modified examples of the "effect when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 264. (I) to (l) are modified examples of the "effect when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 265. In this modified example, the configuration not particularly mentioned is as described above in "Examples of production relating to the second reception period (FIG. 256, FIG. 264, FIG. 265)", and the "second reception period". The same applies to another example that can be applied to the "effect example".

Now, assuming that the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, even in the modification for the second reception period, first, the effect determination (notice) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. Judgment, etc.). After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 271 (a)). ").

However, in this modification, when the timing tG0 before the timing tG1 described above arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE" is executed. There is. In the example shown in FIG. 271 (b), as the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE", another effect example (the image display is executed within the period in which the precursor effect display is executed, and then this is temporarily hidden. The image display that is also used in the normal effect example that does not do such a thing is executed, but for the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE", another effect example (precursor effect display is executed) is executed. It is desirable to execute the image display as an image display that cannot appear in a normal effect example) in which the image display is executed within the period and then the image display is not temporarily hidden.

Then, in this modification, while the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE" is displayed in this way, the image display TMH (here, the integrated image display) appears. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), at least a part of the image display TMH (here, the integrated image display) according to this example is made difficult to see by the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE". The display is started while the image is being displayed. Further, although the image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated image display, the gauge image GG and the section image KG which is the display target area of the gauge image GG are not displayed ( It is displayed as a model image display in a mode that cannot be displayed within the reception period.

After a lapse of a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the image display TMH (here, the integrated image display) is displayed in a manner that is not difficult to see by the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE". Become so. In this example, the display related to the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" has been terminated, and is displayed in a form decorated by another effect display (flame effect in the figure).

However, as shown in FIGS. 271 (c) and 271 (d), the image display TMH (here, the integrated image display) that appears while the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" is displayed. Is displayed in a mode different from any of the modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) as a model image display that can be displayed within the reception period. As a result, it becomes possible to suggest that the reception period has not yet occurred while displaying the image display TMH for a relatively long time.

Further, as will be described later, when the image display TMH (here, integrated image display) appears, the above-mentioned plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)) are provided within the corresponding reception period. Of these, the image display is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 232 (d)). As a result, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment when the "preceding type precursor effect display SZE" is displayed. The mode that can be displayed as a model image display does not necessarily have to be the above four modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)), and may be, for example, only two modes.

Then, in this modification, when the timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (e), the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is started to be executed, and the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" displays a simulated image. Part of the TMH becomes difficult to see (for example, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 271 (f), the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire image display TMH, and thus the "normal type precursor effect display". While "TZE" is displayed, the image display TMH is hidden.

After that, when the timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 272 (g), the image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is performed in the above-mentioned plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)). ) Is displayed with a high degree of expectation. In this way, at the time when the display of the image that can be displayed within the reception period (here, the integrated image display IG) is started, a part of the image is made difficult to see by the "normal type precursor effect display TZE". ing.

Then, in this way, while the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" and the "image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" are displayed, as shown in FIG. 272 (h), the second The reception period will occur (timing tG3).

Although the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted here for convenience of explanation, also in this modified example, the “second reception” using the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The "post-specific effect" and the "precursor effect" are executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265). Further, the effect using the third effect device (speaker) (acceptable reception sound, output sound after the second reception, etc.) is also executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265). ing.

Further, in this modified example, even when the movement by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second reception period, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265), the first is based on the acceptance. When the reception period of 2 is terminated, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

Further, also in this modification, there are cases where the post-reception production with a relatively low expectation is executed and a case where the post-reception production with a relatively high expectation is executed. The case where the low-quality post-reception effect is executed is the same as the above-mentioned effect content (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1)), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the "post-reception effect with relatively high expectations" is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period, the above-mentioned effect content (FIG. 265 (FIG. 265) Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effect contents shown in FIGS. 272 (i) to 272 (l) appear.

First, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 272 (i), at the timing tG3a at the time when the movement by the player is accepted, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" and the "image display (here, here). , Integrated image display IG) ”is not hidden, and the“ normal type precursor effect display TZE ”and“ integrated image display (here, integrated image display IG) ”are difficult to see. Nor.

However, in this example, the dynamic display as the image display is performed at the time of acceptance in this way and after that, while the "image display (here, the integrated image display IG)" is displayed. Is to continue. Further, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced with the passage of time.

At the timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 272 (j), the “second reception post-effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. The second extinction-related display SK2 that appears in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second extinction-related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much the gauge image GG has a display area at the time of acceptance (FIG. 272 (i)), the display area becomes "0" when the timing tG3b arrives. I am trying to be done. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG has reduced the display area under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of the display area decreasing with the passage of time is proportional). However, ignoring the previous rules, the display area was suddenly greatly reduced, which "suddenly reduced the remaining time to" 0 ", but I was lucky enough to make it in time for acceptance." It will be possible to make people think that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Then, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second extinction-related display SK2-2 appears (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) arrives, the player enters the second reception period. The second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is the "second post-reception effect display UG2" as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance of the operation according to. Is started. Needless to say, the post-reception effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which benefits are given to the player). The ratio may be 100%.

As shown in FIG. 272 (k), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example includes an integrated image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, and a second extinction-related display SK2-. Although it is difficult to see due to 2 or the like, it may be displayed in the above-described manner with reference to FIG. 270.

After that, first, the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are hidden (FIG. 272 (l)). Next, although the illustration is omitted, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 is hidden, so that the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 is displayed under good visibility. Will be.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of precursor effect displays are prepared as precursor effect displays suggesting that a reception period will occur. In this regard, in the above-described modification (FIGS. 271 and 272), when a specific precursor effect display (FIGS. 271 (b) to (f) and FIG. 272 (g)) is performed among the plurality of precursor effect displays, The image display related to the reception target is displayed both within the precursory period (image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and within the reception period (image display IG).

In particular, in this modification, after the image display (image display TMH) is displayed in the precursor period, it is hidden within the precursor period. The image display TMH that is displayed (hidden) only within the precursory period is different from the image display IG that can be displayed during the reception period. Therefore, the reception period It is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the time before the occurrence of.

Further, also in this modified example, if the image is accepted within the acceptance period, the image display IG is hidden based on the acceptance (FIG. 272 (l)). Before the image display IG is hidden, "a specific mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (second extinction-related display SK2-2)" can appear (FIGS. 272 (j), (Fig. 272 (j),). k)). However, with respect to the "specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-2) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display", the image display TMH displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is not displayed. It is prevented from appearing before it is hidden when it is turned on.

According to such a configuration, within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (second extinction-related display SK2-2)" that appears corresponding to the reception period. The image display TMH will be hidden without the appearance of "". Therefore, even if the image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) but is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player's knowledge It will be possible to make it difficult to misunderstand that the reception period has expired before long.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" that can appear depending on the acceptance is changed to the above "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display (second extinction). A plurality of related displays SK2-2) ”will be prepared. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), none of these embodiments appears when the simulated image display TMH displayed within the precursory period is hidden. It has become. In the above modification, a mode (normal type precursor effect display TZE) different from any of the plurality of modes prepared as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" according to the acceptance is displayed within the precursor period. It is supposed to function as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" until is hidden. That is, in this case, since it is recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" dedicated to the precursory period, even if a "mode that makes it difficult to see the image display" appears within the precursory period. , It becomes possible to make it difficult to misunderstand that the reception period has expired without the player's knowledge.

Further, in the above modification, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" until the model image display TMH is hidden within the precursor period. Then, when the image is received within the reception period, the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed as "a mode in which the image display is difficult to see" until the image display IG is hidden. I decided. In this regard, regarding the period from the display of the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" to the non-display, the period from the display of the "second extinction-related display SK2-2" to the non-display. It is desirable to make it longer than that in order to improve the interest of the game.

If the symmetric image display TMH is displayed within the precursory period, the type of reception target suggested by the symmetric image display TMH during the reception period corresponding to the hidden image display TMH. Acceptance (acceptance related to post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period) is allowed for (operation means), and the acceptance object (operation means) is different from the type of acceptance object (operation means) suggested by the image display TMH. It is desirable that acceptance (acceptance regarding post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period) is not allowed. That is, in the case of the above modification (FIGS. 271 and 272), the image display TMH displayed within the precursory period suggests the operation button 410 as a reception target, and thus corresponds to this. During the reception period, acceptance (acceptance regarding post-reception production corresponding to the reception period) is not allowed for a reception target (sword decoration body 5001) different from the operation button 410.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an "operation button 410" and a "sword decoration body 5001" as reception targets for post-reception production. In this regard, when the effect is executed in the mode of "displaying the image display and then hiding the image display within the precursory period", among the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001". , It is desirable that the side with a high rate of appearance of big hit symbols when it is targeted for reception is targeted for reception. That is, in this case, among the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration body 5001", the reception target on the side where the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing when it is the reception target is low, but the reception period corresponding to this occurs. Prior to this, the effect is prevented from being executed in a manner such as "displaying the image display and then hiding the image display within the precursory period".

Among the above-described modified examples with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, regarding such a “directing mode related to precursory production”, the reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods and their distinctions are different. It is also applicable to the example. In addition, the "directing mode related to precursory production" is not applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is different from any of the reception periods in the eighth reception period (eighth reception period). It may be prepared as a variation pattern (8th post-acceptance production).

Further, among the above-described modified examples with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such “directed mode related to precursory effect” is illustrated by referring to FIGS. 268 to 270, and other examples thereof. It is also applicable to.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display the remaining time suggestion display (display including the section image KG) that reduces the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) with the passage of time within the reception period. is there. In this regard, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the effect is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. Since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced while the production is in progress, it is recognized that "is it in a state of being accepted" even after the acceptance is made? It is expected that it will be difficult to maintain the tension.

Further, in the above-described modification with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, a specific section area (section image KG) is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600) as the remaining time suggestion display, and the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed. The display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced in the compartment area (compartment image KG). Then, after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player, the display is continued not only for the specific image (gauge image GG) but also for the specific section area (section image KG). I have to. According to such a configuration, since the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed even after the effect is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player, the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed. ) Can be easily determined whether or not the display area has decreased.

In addition, "the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the movement by the player" means that, for example, the movement by the player is accepted. It means that the gauge image GG in which a predetermined display area is left at the time when the production is advanced based on the above is set to 0 (non-display) display area at a later time. (Fig. 272 (j)). However, in this case, it is required that the specific section area (section image KG) is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, and the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed. , The display area of the gauge image GG will be hidden after the timing when it is set to 0.

Further, in the modification described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, when the movement by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (gauge image GG, section image KG, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. Hide, but prior to hiding the remaining time suggestion display, regardless of how much display area of the gauge image GG was left at the time of acceptance, a specific compartment area (compartment image KG) ) Displays a specific image whose display area is a specific value (predetermined value), or a specific partition area (compartment image) of the specific partition area (compartment image KG) and the gauge image GG. It was decided to realize it so that only KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). That is, in this case, the gauge image GG that has reduced the display area under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of the display area that decreases with the passage of time is proportional) has been used up to that point. Ignoring the law of, suddenly the display area was greatly reduced, which made me think that "the remaining time was suddenly set to" 0 ", but I was lucky enough to make it in time for acceptance." You will be able to improve the game fun.

Further, in the above-described modified example with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, when the movement by the player is accepted (when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started), the operation is executed before the acceptance. The "depiction in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" is not completed and is continued. Then, after that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) having a specific display area in a specific partition area (compartment image KG) is displayed, or a specific partition area (compartment image GG) is displayed. Of the image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG), only a specific section area (section image KG) is displayed (display area is reduced to 0).

That is, in this case, at the timing (for example, timing tG3a) when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize "whether the image is accepted" and the tension will be maintained favorably even after the image is accepted. In addition, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG, etc.) is significantly reduced at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) after the timing (for example, timing tG3a) when the progress of the effect according to the acceptance is started. It is possible to make it appear as if the reception was just in time within the valid period (reception period), and it is expected that the game will be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after the reception. .. In this regard, when the timing tG3b, in which a predetermined time has passed since the acceptance, arrives, regardless of the dynamic position of the image display at the time of acceptance, after the acceptance, at a specific dynamic position. The image display is displayed in a stationary manner (in the example shown in FIG. 272 (j), when the timing tG3b arrives, the button position is the highest position regardless of the button position up to that point. Depicted as in). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 272 (j), the simulated image display is not dynamically displayed after the timing tG3b, and is stopped and displayed at the displayed position. As a result, the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained more preferably.

Among the above-described modified examples with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such "depictions of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))" and " The "dynamic display and static display related to image display" can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period among the above-mentioned plurality of reception periods and other examples thereof. In addition, "depiction of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))" is applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. However, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception production) that is different from any of the reception periods.

In addition, the first receptionist is "depiction of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 272 (i)-(k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to image display". When applying to one of the period to the seventh reception period (any reception period may be used), it is desirable not to apply to a reception period different from the applied reception period. According to such a configuration, after the acceptance is made, there are cases where a depiction in which the gauge image GG is greatly reduced appears (FIG. 272 (j)) and a case where the depiction does not appear. You will be able to improve.

Even during the reception period when "depiction of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Figs. 272 (i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to image display" are not applied. After acceptance, it is desirable to perform depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image GG and dynamic display itself. That is, in this case, the display area of the gauge image GG is different only in that the depiction that greatly reduces the display area ignoring the previous law is not performed and that the static display is not performed.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and other examples, and their modified examples, a plurality of reception periods (for example, a first reception period to a seventh reception period) that can occur under different conditions are prepared. There is. In this regard, with respect to a predetermined reception period (for example, a first reception period, a third reception period, a fifth reception period, etc.) among a plurality of reception periods, the symbol change in which the predetermined reception period occurs ends. Then, the next symbol change can be continued even after the execution is started (the one that can occur across multiple changes), and a specific reception period (for example, a second reception) among the multiple reception periods is set. The period, the 4th reception period, the 7th reception period, etc.) will not be continued until after the symbol change in which the specific reception period has occurred is completed, and rather than the symbol change being completed. It may be terminated before. That is, in this case, the image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the predetermined reception period and the specific reception period, and the case where the action by the player is accepted within the predetermined reception period is specified. In either case where the movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period of, the image display is not hidden at the time of acceptance, and the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). Etc.) will appear. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has expired while making it possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance has been made. It will be possible to obtain a suitable image regardless of whether it is a predetermined reception period or a specific reception period.

Further, the "predetermined reception period" is, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" is, for example, the second reception period and the fourth reception period. When the reception period is set to the 7th reception period, the mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display) is when the reception is made in the "predetermined reception period" that can be maintained across multiple fluctuations. It will be executed as a different mode from when the acceptance is made in the "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the acceptance period ends within the pattern change during execution, based on the type of "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)". As a result, it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of games.

In addition, in both the "predetermined reception period" that can occur across multiple fluctuations and the "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, a model image display that imitates the reception target is displayed. The image display may be displayed in different modes (size, position, etc. for display) between the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period". For example, in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, when the image display is displayed (displayed only at a predetermined position) in the manner described above, it occurs in a form that spans multiple fluctuations. In the possible "predetermined reception period", it is desirable to display (move display) so that the display position of the image display itself changes. According to such a configuration, even when a "predetermined reception period" occurs in the form of straddling a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to urge the player to accept the request as soon as possible.

Further, in the "reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, the operation button 410 may be used as the reception target or the sword decoration 5001 may be used as the reception target, whereas it occurs in the form of straddling multiple fluctuations. In the possible "reception period", the operation button 410 may be used as the reception target, but it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 is not used as the reception target.

Even in the "reception period" that can occur over a plurality of fluctuations, it is desirable that the precursor effect display can be executed prior to the occurrence of the "reception period". That is, in this case, the symbol variation is terminated while the "precursor effect display" is being executed, and the reception period corresponding to the "precursor effect display" may occur after the symbol variation is completed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment after the symbol change is completed.

Even in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, as described above, after the reception is made, the "image" A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display, etc.) "appears. This "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is executed after a predetermined time, but it is a case where the symbol variation is stopped while this is being executed. However, it is desirable that the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is continued without being terminated halfway.

The "precursor effect display" and "precursor effect display" that are executed in response to the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur across multiple fluctuations. As for the mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display, etc.), the time from when the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped until the next symbol variation is started (the symbol in the execution state). The execution period (the time from when the precursor effect display is displayed until it is hidden) is shorter than the time required from when the fluctuation stops until the hold is exhausted, making it difficult to see the image display. It is desirable that the time from the appearance of the aspect to the end) is completed.

As described above, in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that can occur in the form of straddling multiple fluctuations, the corresponding "precursor effect display" And "disappearance-related display" can be displayed respectively. In this regard, if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed before the symbol change in which the "precursor effect display" is displayed ends, the same area as the area in which the "precursor effect display" is displayed (overlapping area). ) Is displayed by using at least a part of the "disappearance-related display", and after the symbol change in which the "precursor effect display" is displayed is completed (the hold is exhausted and the next symbol change is started to be executed). When the "disappearance-related display" is displayed after that, it is possible to display the "disappearance-related display" by using only the area different from the area where the "precursor effect display" is displayed. desirable. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that this is executed across a plurality of fluctuations while paying close attention to the production after reception.

Further, as described above, a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) having different expectations are prepared as the image display, and the “reception period (for example, the second reception period, In "4th reception period, 7th reception period)", the image display is displayed as one of those modes. However, in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur over a plurality of fluctuations, a specific mode among the plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 232) It is desirable that only the model image display of (a)) is displayed. However, a "reception period (for example, a second reception period, a fourth reception period, a seventh reception period)" that does not span multiple fluctuations and a "reception period (for example, a reception period) that can occur across multiple fluctuations". In any of the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) ”, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the image display is continued after the reception.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of gaming states (first gaming state and second gaming state) having different gaming conditions (ease of obtaining a prize ball when the gaming ball is launched with respect to the gaming area, etc.) are used. (Game state) can be generated. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "reception period" in which the post-reception effect can be executed when the movement by the player is received is the first game state and the second game state. It can occur in any of the gaming states. Furthermore, when the movement by the player is accepted within such a "reception period", it is assumed that the "reception period" occurs in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. However, after being accepted, "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" appears while the image display is displayed, and then the "image display becomes difficult to see". The image display is hidden while the mode (disappearance-related display, etc.) appears.

That is, in this case, there is an action effect such as "it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a model image display even after the acceptance has been made, and it can be suggested that the acceptance period has expired." , Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurred in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, the image can be obtained.

The "first gaming state" corresponds to, for example, a normal gaming state (low probability / non-time saving), and the "second gaming state" occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination ( It corresponds to a "game state different from the normal game state" that can be changed to a state. Any gaming state may be used as long as it is in a gaming state different from the normal gaming state.

This point will be further described using the plurality of reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period, etc.) exemplified in each of the above-mentioned production examples and other examples, and their modified examples. For example, a plurality of receptions Of the periods, there are predetermined types of reception periods (for example, the first reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc., but not all of them are necessarily provided. (May be) is set so that it can occur only in the first gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the third reception period out of the plurality of reception periods is set so that it can occur only in the second gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Even with such a configuration, the image display related to the reception target has a predetermined type of reception period (first game state) and a third reception period (second game state). It is displayed in both cases. However, in the first game state (when it is accepted in the first reception period), in the second game state (when it is accepted in the second reception period) as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". Is capable of appearing specific modes that cannot appear (4th extinction-related display SK4, 7th extinction-related display, etc., but not necessarily all of them).

According to such a configuration, without confirming the type of effect after reception, it is only necessary to confirm which aspect appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", and the first gaming state and the first It becomes possible to grasp which of the two game states is controlled, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270 also appears only when the game is in the first gaming state (when it is accepted in the first reception period). It may be set as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" that cannot be obtained. That is, in this case, it is expected that the gaming interest when the player is in the most disadvantageous state (normal gaming state) is preferably maintained.

Further, according to the above configuration, in the second gaming state (when the image is accepted in the third reception period), the first extinction-related display is executed as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see". However, the first extinction-related display can also appear in the first gaming state (when it is accepted in the first reception period). That is, in this case, since the possibility of being in the state of being controlled by the second gaming state is only shown, the tension can be suitably maintained. Further, even when the player is controlled to the first gaming state, when the first extinction-related display appears, the player is made aware of the possibility of being controlled to the second gaming state. Since it becomes possible to make the game entertaining, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste.

The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in both the first game state and the second game state, or the first game. It may occur only in the first gaming state of the state and the second gaming state.

Further, as described above, during the reception period generated in the first gaming state, the simulated image display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)). In this regard, during the reception period that occurs in the second gaming state, it is possible to display only the model image display of the specific mode (for example, the mode with low expectation, FIG. 232 (a)) among the plurality of modes. desirable. According to such a configuration, even if a mode with low expectation (FIG. 232 (a)) appears as a simulated image display, there is a possibility that the game is controlled by the second gaming state. Since it becomes possible to make people aware of it, it becomes possible to maintain a good game interest.

In the first gaming state, when the movement by the player is not accepted within the reception period, the same aspect as in the accepted case appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" (for example, the first). There are two cases: the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc.) and the case where a mode different from the reception period appears (for example, the first reception period). However, in the second gaming state (third reception period), as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", the same mode as in the case of acceptance is always made to appear, or It is desirable to make sure that a mode different from the accepted case appears. According to such a configuration, when the movement is not accepted in the first gaming state, the same aspect as when the operation is accepted appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", depending on whether or not the same mode appears. It becomes possible to make people aware of the possibility that a second gaming state has occurred.

The reception period (third reception period) that occurs in the second gaming state is the same as when it is accepted as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see even if it is not accepted within the period". When it is generated as "a mode that always appears", for the reception period (third reception period), the "image display becomes difficult to see even if it is not accepted" that occurs in the first gaming state. As the "mode", it is desirable that the effective time (set time) as the reception period is longer than any of the "reception period" in which the same mode as in the case of acceptance always appears.

In both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the corresponding precursor effect display is executed before the reception period occurs. In this regard, in the first gaming state, a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display, fifth precursor effect display, seventh precursor effect display, etc.) that cannot occur in the second gaming state is executed. It is desirable to.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various embodiments are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is possible to improve and change the design.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic effect function, a display such as "auto button is being set" may be displayed, but the display may not necessarily be performed. In particular, when it is realized as a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic effect function can always be enabled and the process itself such as "setting to the effect state" is not installed, instead of the pachinko machine 1 set in the automatic effect mode. It is desirable not to display "Auto button is being set". In the pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with the process itself such as "setting to the effect state", the valid period in which the automatic effect function is played and the automatic effect function are set according to the type of operation reception effect that the player is allowed to operate. There may be a valid period that is not played.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "model image" may be an image that urges the player to operate, and is not necessarily an operation target, for example, an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down. It does not have to be displayed as an image that imitates the operating means.

In addition, when the automatic effect function is adopted in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation reception within the operation valid period is set to any timing as long as it is within the operation valid period. It may be. In order to appropriately give the player an operation opportunity, the operation is performed when the operation is not detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after half or more of the operation validity period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, when the operation is not detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is produced based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get started. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden and maintained even after the valid period ends, the operation is targeted at the timing when the valid period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration, turning off the LED, etc.). This is expected to prevent the player from misrecognizing the bar display, such as "Isn't the validity period continuing?", Even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously. Become so.

In addition, in the above-mentioned and later-described production examples such as the production example described with reference to FIG. 209, the post-operation production is started while maintaining the model image (or bar display) without hiding it. The time from the timing when the operation is detected to the timing when the image (or bar display) is hidden (the period of timing tf2 to tf4, the period of timing tg3 to tg5, the period of timing th3 to th4, etc.) There may be at least a few frames (for example, 2 frames) of time. Alternatively, there may be only one frame of time. Even if there is such a time, the period in which the image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the post-operation effect is started, which can be recognized by some players. In some cases.

In addition, in the explanation example of the "help image that promotes understanding of the production", the ruler is illustrated as the "reference image showing the length unit in the horizontal direction", but other images should be used. You may. The point is that when the player operates it, a display image that is depicted without being affected by the special effect may appear. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image suggesting the degree of expectation, an image suggesting the current production state, an image suggesting the state related to the production setting, etc.) is drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. It should be noted that such an image does not necessarily have to be drawn by one, and may be drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

In addition, in the explanation example of "prevention of mischief against multiple operating means", mischief is very different from cheating such as magnet goto, and it is not possible for the hall side to take too strict measures. It can also lead to profits. Therefore, images that appear based on the detection of operations by the player (including images that appear in the process of making a specific video appear) should be realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. May be good. The point is that when the player operates the plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), "the effect display device 1600 executes the game effect according to the jackpot determination." Display (play) a specific video that cannot appear in the state where it is played (a video with content that has nothing to do with mischief prevention (for example, shifting to a state in which a predetermined movie is played)) is displayed (played). ), "Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change in the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.", "For brightness adjustment Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. " All you need is. In this case, the player can also voluntarily generate a function restriction period in which the above-mentioned specific moving image is played by operating the plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (procedure). Is.

Further, in the explanatory example of "prevention of mischief against a plurality of operating means", in the state where the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, it may be always controlled as the partial restriction period.

In addition, regarding the explanation example of "noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening", the point is that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to the normal state after passing through the restricted state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and if the game is started in the restricted state, the restricted state is terminated early. It suffices as long as it is controlled to the normal state, and the length of time maintained as the restricted state may be set appropriately (set to any of several seconds to several hours). Good. If the length of time maintained as the restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effects will not be exhibited during the game period immediately after the store opens, but the noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to suppress this.

Further, in the explanatory example of "control over the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the importance of the effect", the conditions are advantageous depending on whether the first special symbol is changing or the second special symbol is changing. The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the second special symbol on the side where the game is possible, but during the change of the first special symbol on the side where the game is possible under unfavorable conditions. The case where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is illustrated. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology for game machines that are not equipped with the second special symbol. For example, a specific symbol is prepared in which a lottery is performed under more disadvantageous conditions than the first special symbol. However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under favorable conditions, but the side that can be played under unfavorable conditions. The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the fluctuation of the specific symbol of.

Further, in the explanation example of "the period during which the operation reception is permitted (valid period) itself, the effectability", the reception allowable sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation reception effect and the occurrence of the first and second operation reception effects are accompanied. It may be a production sound different from the reception allowable sound. Further, in FIG. 210, the reception allowable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11), but as "one sound data" straddling the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. It may be output.

Even if the image of the operation receiving part that receives the operation and the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery thereof are individually prepared as image data and each of these image data is combined and displayed as an integrated image. Good.

In the example shown in FIG. 232, when "normal button image BMGa" is displayed when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (FIGS. 232 (a) and 232 (c)), and this case. In some cases, "special button image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 232 (b) and 232 (d)). However, when the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 232 (a) and 232 (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving unit), and the "special button" is displayed. When the "image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 232 (b) and (d)), the second operating means (second operating receiving section) different from the first operating means (first operating receiving section) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given.

In each of the above-mentioned explanatory examples, as the member (operation means) prepared as an operation target, a member (button or the like) that requires a pressing operation (pressing operation) or a member (sword) that requires an insertion / removal operation (insertion / removal operation). In addition to decorations), it may be realized as something that requires player movements such as non-contact and touch (proximity sensor, etc.).

The peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decorative portion actually provided on the peripheral edge of the "operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given", but at least a part of the peripheral decorative portion is imitated. It does not have to be, and there may be a part that imitates the peripheral decoration part.

Regarding the second validity period in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", and the validity period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, It is not a finite one in which a predetermined set time is set, and may be infinitely continued as long as a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is not satisfied.

When displaying the specific image TG within the valid period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

For the "automatic reception effect" described in FIGS. 232 and later, any of the realization methods related to the "automatic reception effect" exemplified earlier may be adopted. Any of the above-mentioned realization methods may be adopted for how the model image and the gauge image are displayed when the automatic reception effect is produced. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception effect occurs, the type of the effect state at the time of the occurrence, the type of the reception effect (post-operation effect) itself, or the reception effect. Depending on the conditions under which the above occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed is executed (the "automatic effect function" is enabled) even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period. If there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the post-operation effect may not be executed (the "automatic effect function" may not be enabled). The timing at which the automatic effect function is activated may be a predetermined timing within the valid period, a timing at which the valid period ends, or a timing at which a little time has passed since the valid period ended. It may be.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special hold number indicator 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special hold Number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large winning port

Claims (2)

Judgment means to make a judgment based on the starting prize,
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means, and
The operation receiving part that receives the operation by the player,
An operation reception means that can generate a reception allowance period in which an operation opportunity is given and starts executing a post-operation effect when an operation is received during the reception allowance period,
An image display means capable of displaying an image display of the operation receiving unit on a predetermined display screen, and an image display means.
Equipped with a production sound output means that can output the production sound audibly,
The production sound is a gaming machine that includes a BGM production sound that is audibly output based on a starting prize.
Whether the BGM effect sound is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, audibly output in the first suppressed mode, or audibly output in the second suppressed mode having a higher degree of suppression than the first suppressed mode. , Or may be inaudible,
further,
As the acceptance allowance period, a plurality of acceptance allowance periods including the first acceptance allowance period, the second acceptance allowance period, and the third acceptance allowance period are prepared.
The first reception allowable period is such that the operation reception is permitted while the BGM effect sound is audibly output in the second suppression mode or is in an inaudible state, and the first reception is permitted. When the operation reception is performed while the reception allowable period occurs and the operation reception is displayed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is started to be executed, and when the operation image display is hidden. Duplicate display is executed at the time of specific disappearance,
Both the second acceptance allowance period and the third acceptance allowance period allow operation acceptance while the BGM production sound is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and the second acceptance allowance period. When any of the third acceptance period occurs and the operation reception is performed while the image display is displayed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is started to be executed, and the image display is displayed. When the display is hidden, a predetermined overlap display at the time of disappearance using only a smaller area than the specific overlap display at the time of disappearance is executed, but when the operation reception is performed during the second reception allowable period, the BGM effect sound is produced. Is executed after the operation while the audible output is performed in the non-suppressed mode, whereas when the operation reception is performed within the third reception allowable period, the BGM production sound is generated by the third reception allowable period. 1 The post-operation effect is executed by producing audible output in the suppression mode.
further,
When the reception allowable period occurs, the reception allowable sound can be output in any of a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode and a special mode.
When the reception allowable sound is output in a special mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed can always be executed even if the operation reception is not performed within the reception allowable period corresponding to the special mode. When the reception allowable sound is output in the predetermined mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed when the operation reception is not performed within the reception allowable period corresponding to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that there are both cases where the operation is not executed and cases where the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed is executed. Judgment means to make a judgment based on the starting prize,
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means, and
The operation receiving part that receives the operation by the player,
An operation reception means that can generate a reception allowance period in which an operation opportunity is given and starts executing a post-operation effect when an operation is received during the reception allowance period,
An image display means capable of displaying an image display of the operation receiving unit on a predetermined display screen, and an image display means.
Equipped with a production sound output means that can output the production sound audibly,
The production sound is a gaming machine that includes a BGM production sound that is audibly output based on a starting prize.
Whether the BGM effect sound is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, audibly output in the first suppressed mode, or audibly output in the second suppressed mode having a higher degree of suppression than the first suppressed mode. , Or may be inaudible,
further,
As the acceptance allowance period, a plurality of acceptance allowance periods including the first acceptance allowance period, the second acceptance allowance period, and the third acceptance allowance period are prepared.
The first reception allowable period is such that the operation reception is permitted while the BGM effect sound is audibly output in the second suppression mode or is in an inaudible state, and the first reception is permitted. When the operation reception is performed while the reception allowable period occurs and the operation reception is displayed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is started to be executed, and when the operation image display is hidden. Duplicate display is executed at the time of specific disappearance,
The second reception permissible period allows operation reception while the BGM production sound is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and the second reception permissible period occurs and the image display is displayed. When the operation reception is performed while the operation is being displayed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is started while the BGM effect sound is being audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and the image display is displayed. being adapted to the predetermined extinction overlapping display uses only an area smaller than a specified extinction overlapping display is executed when the hide,
The third reception allowable period is generated while the BGM effect sound is output in the first suppression mode, and the third reception allowable period is generated and the image display is displayed. When the operation reception is performed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is started, and when the image display is hidden, the predetermined area using only a smaller area than the specific disappearance overlap display is used. When the disappearance of, duplicate display is executed,
further,
When the reception allowable period occurs, the reception allowable sound can be output in any of a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode and a special mode.
When the reception allowable sound is output in a special mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed can always be executed even if the operation reception is not performed within the reception allowable period corresponding to the special mode. When the reception allowable sound is output in the predetermined mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed when the operation reception is not performed within the reception allowable period corresponding to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that there are both cases where the operation is not executed and cases where the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is performed is executed.

Images